Ly
rhe henete
iain
as are
serait A
tai phe oe
ret : raed: Five. 82%: bars gas Uh OEMS
Cede etter!
Pi tchah te . %, ens nee)
as
0 Soca vb *
veeddaca : Se
CU tetris te : os
Sees rire SRP
cei
Us,
nese
AMR
' crn
a
i. rere lohereare tities
+. Mey
ors
eotat este SS,
shines Sometete SMES
z +
Seether
Sees ye
os
ede atratitehe erp
Pr arte SET eet ae
setac tate) reeneng an
fe tehe
teu
Me
Ayse ;
uy Sept ate
Sit
Sua ease
>
athe
ch
Sticaré
This
Brig aes
Sabra delete.
porta
Bie
eas Ad
Seat disespeapare ete Sta Ty
Brpy
be erety tt
erie:
v3
iad sia bole!
Arr ra wits
EC tthier
deneiyy)
ae aes _
Te teeneter aan
tines *r (heen
Rititnsso ele BO
“ i Soqenaaee
Yh
rare) pager afet
es
ae
th
estan ages are
brat
wate
reserorerara
eer
eetarereroreses
SeOOuY
ara male
.
.
oo
~~
i | ee , f ~
ana ACR RAARERAAAAA Ar~
~~
gg an ey NN
Sasanettmasttec ca a aann ena NaAAAA;
alent
Sas —~ _~
———~ jp — AYN AN en ous Ji) CL) a aa — SN AN i ge, ling
nf a 2 NAA AA am em am
’ ann aesagaaaaae ht iis a PAR ATI NN AN a a AAA,
ip BARA PR RR mre
Ae eeaawerenee ramen a
IAARA aAAe ANE
qe OSA ARAAR an
mle Pe ar pasappaeeeeereen i
AAAAAAAMAAAARAR Rana. St
5
Le
») le
Wy) Lbs
Yoee' 5 einen
cae.
Aaaae,
Re 2s ania ANA
= = aio “AA
-_
ARARARAAR
enn aa2=A2 vnsssbmsssssenstectecee
~
Rn gnlen
a es ARS
ee ll
mS rx | Se SNR NIA RAN PAA laa NNSA AE
ae BARA RAR AAR aa ID OO
m Rana ARR Ran PENTA i aR non ann wan Sy RAO OI gn aco mam
AA an alate YY YY [a ER ER Pm a may
ms om, | | om. | cams aan | am er, BR RARRAARAR Raa A BPR PPPRIOP ETERS
aR eR ARR OIRO OEOC COT AAA ann nanan ne An
ARAAARARARAAAARnn APY a RRRRRRAA
aanaaaananm manannne annnne RAR eve
aaa 2 Baa RAARRARRRRRAE Paps mye SAR
AAAS |
AAA a WAmaaans >.
naanatanntneenanannaaa
RARAR AAR cm aaanna”
mite
PRARRARAC fim FD, fi AAA : {) as) == -
RRR e nN a= ARRARRAAAAAOIOAA Onna an RARRRGACEAAR
“EN AS AVANOOONe e aan lan\ a ARR RASA AAR Rae >
| Baas AAR AAA AAA AAR A
Ama; ~
ARAA 2 7 pg
AERA A aR ana nan ne
XY Xo Vanlenlenlemtenyn non onion lana an 5 (ORME? pb
anna qo
—- Y
AR AARAA as eccsas cL caaweaa
am
nsessanaaaanaamannaaanenns’
Peaae AeA AAR Ra An a
AANA ~
aaad AAA
BS AN ES ES & ga ly i, 6
RARARRA A eeRpRpPenrrnrnr Veeeet PETER PrP EY
PP AAR A BARAT na nnnnnnnane i ie i an | zy SAAR REINS
Vy a —
PSN EX
=| an aie
BARR AAA AA Aa, 5 A, fl, ee
lan len
1 ao AA AAA a I
| EAN in
ST Ve te AG an Om a NCU ECs _ : ga e \
AAAARAAAAne —_a_ Y FT Moan mAARIn~
nAAAAA 255) i aa gl ARR AR;
As
ARR ARAAR AR AA -:
BN aRAARAAAAAA | | jar
aRAR AAA R RRA AACAAA ~~ -caaaae.
ARARAARAA-AA Ae ~aaer
AAR A AAAA XB a z. .
AAA AAAARAAAA aaeaaa.>
lo Veo
A
a
RRR RR aR aaaaaeaeeroonnnneee et
lama
ae NARA An
Ralanaanaaaalalaln
a AAR a a RARARARARARE = AARRRAAAS a in - pane Pu a5
MAAAAAAAAAAe AAA aaa ppenene
Aan” anrn
= ‘ ~ = AAAS YY. Veen nl
aA AAA RARAAARARGRRAREARE ge
SE } a
| ~~ VaVNAAIAANAANV NA AAO
eae a tan _ aaAas\A\n\\-\ nn AA Ne = A= an
| . AR QanaAnAAA-= RARRARRARA =~ se a
SOY | nnn
VAAAAASIa aya ee A a pn pn on SS ee = gs pS Pa
AR AAA Ra Minlala ale. nm maaminme
PA pp
AA RARAGRRARS
AAAAARR BARR AAR ARBAB BaARAAr
lan \an\am en \amlem nV |
RARRRRARE AAA ARRaanaR
‘a an | AAARR
Annaaanaaanaaa
BAA AE
Ce mannnnan
aA | AP nan __P REE,
| a ad te sae 24 CV ARAAARRRRSRAECEERRARARE AA
Pyy y ame fs DARA ARAARAAA; ~~ . a |
J
}
genie =~ Aanrereerrnce
a " i
ae gia
DISCOVERY
REPORTS
Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Government of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands
Vol. I, pp. i-vi
PLT LE-PAGE AND LIST OF CONTENTS
rr OG oles 54,11
HAY. 2 O Wo Beh
se 2
i
Oye
CAMBRIDGE
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
1931
Price ninepence net
DISCOVERY REPORTS
VOLUME, II
Cambridge University Press
Fetter Lane, London
New York
Bombay, Calcutta, Madras
Toronto
Macmillan
Tokyo
Maruzen Company, Ltd
All rights reserved
DISCOVERY REPORTS
Issued by the Discovery Committee
Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Government of the Dependencies
of the Falkland Islands
VOE.UME, TI
CAMBRIDGE
SEE UNV ST EY PRESS
1931
PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN,
CONTENTS
OLYCHAETE WORMS (published roth October, 1930)
By C. C. A. Monro, M.A.
INTRODUCTION . ; F : : ; : : ; : ‘ : ‘ : : page 3
SuMMarY OF RESULTS : 2 ; ; : : ‘ : : : E : : 5
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT : : ; : ; ; : : : : : : ; 27
List oF LITERATURE CITED : : 2 ; 3 ; 5 ‘ : : : ; a ills
INDEX ; : : : ; : ; ‘ : ; : : ‘ : F : 5 Duis)
HORACIC CIRRIPEDES COLLECTED IN 1925-27 (published 15th October, 1930)
By C. A. Nilsson-Cantell, Sweden
INTRODUCTION . ; : : : : : j ‘ : ; : ; . page 225
GENERAL . : : . ; : : : ; ‘ g : : . 226
SYSTEMATIC. ; : : : : : : : , : ‘ ‘ : 5 228
LITERATURE. : : . : : : : c : : A : : 3 = 250
RrATE : F : ‘ ‘ : : : é : ; : : following page 260
CEANIC FISHES AND FLATFISHES COLLECTED IN 1925-27 (published 29th
October, 1930)
By J. R. Norman
Part I. OcEANIC FISHES
Introduction. ; ‘ . : ‘ : ; ‘ : : : : : . page 263
List of Stations 264
Systematic Account . : ; : : : : : : : , . 267
Part II. FLATFISHES
Introduction. : , : : ; : ; : : : : ; : ; 5 Bie!
Systematic Account . 358
Index : 365
Plate II following page 370
s-EPHALOPODA, I. OCTOPODA (published 6th November, 1930)
By G. C. Robson, M.A.
INTRODUCTION . page 373
SYSTEMATIC 7/5)
BIBLIOGRAPHY . 401
Piates IIT anp IV following page 402
vi
CONTENTS
THE AGE OF FIN WHALES AT PHYSICAL MATURITY WITH A NOTE ON
MULTIPLE OVULATIONS (published 1st January, 1931)
By J. F. G. Wheeler, M.Sc.
INTRODUCTION . : .
Tue AGE or FIN WHALES AT PHysicaL MATURITY
Notre ON MULTIPLE OVULATIONS
List oF LITERATURE CITED
‘TABLE OF RECORDS
PLATE V
following page 4
page 4
4
4
4
4
ON THE ANATOMY OF A MARINE OSTRACOD CYPRIDINA (DOLORIA)
LEVIS SKOGSBERG (published 11th February, 1931)
By H. Graham Cannon, Sc.D.
INTRODUCTION .
FEEDING MECHANISM
SKELETON AND Bopy WALL
BLoop SysTEM
Gut : :
NERVOUS SYSTEM ;
SEGMENTED EXCRETORY ORGANS
SUMMARY
LITERATURE CITED
Pirates VI anv VII .
CORRIGENDUM
P. 376, Fig. 1, for x 1 read x3.
page 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
following page
DIE
Pe CS
DISCOVERY
REPORTS
Vol. Il, pp. 1-222, text-figs. 1-91
Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Government of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands
POLYCHAETE: WORMS
by
C. C. A. Monro, M.A.
CAMBRIDGE
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
1930
Price eighteen shillings net
ale
grils
[Discovery Reports. Vol. II, pp. 1-222, text-figs. 1-91, October, 1930.]
POLYCHAETE WORMS
By
c. Cc. A. MONRO, M.A.
INTRODUCTION
SUMMARY OF RESULTS
SVRUCIMENS, 5 ge
Geographical Distribution .
Bathymetrical Distribution
Ecological
SysTEMATIC ACCOUNT
Amphinomidae .
Aphroditidae
Polynoidae
Acoetidae
Sigalionidae .
Phyllodocidae
Alciopidae
‘Tomopteridae
Typhloscolecidae
Hesionidae
Syllidae .
Nereidae .
Nephthydidae
Sphaerodoridae .
Glyceridae
Eunicidae
Eunicinae
Onuphidinae
Lumbriconereinae .
Staurocephalinae
Arictidae
Spionidae
CONTENTS
page 3
Tit
115
118
118
146
SysTemaTiIc ACCOUNT (cont.)
AMEN 5 2 56 6 og 6 0 yuo
Chaetopteridae .
Cirratulidae .
Flabelligeridae
Scalibregmidae .
Capitellidae .
Opheliidae
Maldanidae .
Oweniidae
Sabellariidae .
Sternaspidae .
Amphictenidae .
Ampharetidae
Terebellidae .
Amphitritinae
Artacaminae
Thelepinae
Polycirrinae .
Canephorinae
Sabellidae
Sabellinae
Fabriciinae
Serpulidae
Serpulinae
Filograninae .
Spirorbinae
LIST OF LITERATURE CITED .
INDEX
150
152
154
159
163
163
165
169
176
176
178
180
180
185
185
gl
192
194
198
199
199
203
206
206
213
214
215
218
Zit
V.2, e.l-
POLYCHAETE WORMS
By C. C. A. Monro, m.a.?
(Text-figures 1-91)
INTRODUCTION
Ape: Polychaeta studied in this report were all collected by the staff of the Dis-
covery Investigations in the R.R.S. ‘Discovery,’ in the R.S.S. ‘William Scoresby,’
in the Floating Whaling Factory S.S. ‘ Anglo-Norse’ off the South Sandwich Islands,
and by the personnel of the Marine Biological Station at South Georgia and at Saldanha
Bay, South Africa. A few specimens were also procured by a member of the staff in a
trawler off the Cape of Good Hope.
The stations made by the ‘ Discovery’ have no letters prefixed to the numbers: those
of the ‘William Scoresby’ have the prefix WS, those of the S.S. ‘Anglo-Norse’ SS (for
South Sandwich), and those of the Marine Biological Station MS.
The following summary of stations, taken from the Station List published by the
Discovery Investigations, gives the courses sailed by the ‘Discovery’ and the
“William Scoresby.’
‘Discovery.’ Stations 1-2, Ascension Island; 3, Mid South Atlantic; 4-6, Tristan da
Cunha; 7-12, Tristan da Cunha to South Georgia; 13-45, off South Georgia; 46-47,
South Georgia to Falkland Islands; 48-58, off Falkland Islands; 59-89, Falkland
Islands to Cape Town; go-101, off South-west Africa; 102-116, South Africa to Bouvet
Island; 117-121, Bouvet Island to South Georgia; 122~159, off South Georgia; 160—
161, South Georgia to South Orkneys; 162-167, off South Orkneys; 168-170, South
Orkneys to South Shetlands; 171-177, Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands; 178-192,
Palmer Archipelago; 193-209, Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands; 210-221, Drake
Strait; 222-230, Cape Horn to Falkland Islands; 231-259, Falkland Islands to Cape
Town; 260-265, off South-west Africa; 266-299, Cape ‘Town to Cape Verde Islands.
‘William Scoresby.’ Stations WS 1-4, off South-west Africa; WS 5-17, Cape Town
to South Georgia; WS 18-65, off South Georgia; WS 66-70, South Georgia to Falkland
Islands; WS 71-99, off Falkland Islands and between Falkland Islands and South
America; WS 100-107, Falkland Islands to Port Desire, South America; WS 108-109,
North of Falkland Islands; WS 110-114, off South Georgia; WS 115-121, South
Georgia to Gough Island; WS 122-130, off Gough Island; WS 131-136, Gough Island
to Cape ‘Town.
The Marine Biological Station made seventy-four stations at South Georgia and
eight stations at South Africa. The location of the SS stations has already been given.
1 Published by permission of the Trustees of the British Museum,
DISCOVERY REPORTS
GEAR
In the station lists the following symbols represent the various kinds of gear used:
N 100
N 450
NC 50
NCS-N)
NCS-T|
NH
NRL
NRM
OTC
OTL
OTM
RM
Nas
Oblique.
Horizontal.
Vertical.
Small beam trawl. Beam 8 ft. in length (2:45 m.): mesh at cod-end } in. (12:5 mm.).
Conical dredge. Mouth 16 in. in diameter (40-5 cm.), with canvas bag.
Large dredge. Light pattern, 4 ft. in length (1-2 m.).
Large dredge. Heavy pattern, 4 ft. in length (1-2 m.).
Small dredge. 2 ft. in length (0-6 m.).
Hand lines.
Nets with mesh of 4 mm. or 7 mm. (0°16 in. or 0-28 in.) attached to back of trawl.
50 cm. tow-net. Mouth circular, 50 cm. in diameter (19:5 in.): 200 meshes to the linear
inch,
70 cm. tow-net. Mouth circular,-70 cm. in diameter (27-5 in.): mesh graded, at cod-end
74 to the linear inch.
1m. tow-net. Mouth circular, 1 m. in diameter (3-3 ft.): mesh graded, at cod-end 16 to
the linear inch. From July 1, 1927, this net was replaced by another, of similar pattern;
but with the cod-end made of stramin with 11-12 meshes to the linear inch.
44m. tow-net. Mouth circular, 44m. in diameter (14:8 ft.): mesh graded, at cod-end
7 mm. (0-28 in.).
Coarse 50 cm. tow-net. Mouth circular, 50 cm. in diameter (19-5 in.): 25 meshes to the
linear inch.
Tow-net of coarse silk, with 16 meshes to the linear inch, attached to trawl or other net.
Hand net.
Large rectangular net. Frame 8 ft. long and 2} ft. wide (2-45 m. x 0-7 m.) with bag of
in. mesh (12:5 mm.).
Medium rectangular net. Frame 4 ft. long and 1} ft. wide (1:22 m. x 0-38 m.) with bag
of 7 mm. mesh (0:28 in.).
Commercial otter trawl. Head rope 80 ft. long (24:5 m.): mesh at cod-end 14 in. (3-8 cm.).
Large otter trawl. Head rope 40 ft. long (12:2 m.): mesh at cod-end 1} in. (3:2 cm.).
Medium otter trawl. Head rope 30 ft. long (9:14 m.): mesh at cod-end 14 in. (3-2 cm.).
Mussel rake.
Young fish trawl. Mouth about 20 ft. in circumference (6 m.): bag of stramin with 11-12
meshes to linear inch. Fished until July 1926 with poles and otter-boards, thereafter
attached to a circular tow-net frame 2 m. in diameter (6-6 ft.).
Table I shows the number of times each gear was used in procuring the present
collection, and the number of species and specimens caught by each gear.
INTRODUCTION 5
TABLE |
. No. of No. of : No. of No. of
Gear Times species | specimens Gear Times species | specimens
used caught caught used caught caught
BTS 79 42 320 NC 50 3 3} 8
DC 18 15 109 NCS-N 2 I 8
DL 32 35 256 NCS-T 17 16 73
DLH 172 gl 1061 NH 17 13 71
DS 7 8 32 NRL 42 35 143
LH 6 6 17 NRM 4 6 45
N 4-T 35 29 230 OTC 105 31 388
N 7-T 10 10 36 OTL 179 gt IOOI
N 50 I 2 2 OTM 13 13 41
N 70 6 14 56 RM 23 19 276
N 100 20 16 127 ABYE) 43 19 62
N 450 3 3 3
SUMMARY OF RESULTS
SYSTEMATIC
There follows a list of species.
Benthic species
Family AMPHINOMIDAE
Hermodice carunculata (Pallas), var. didymobranchiata Notopygos megalops, McIntosh.
(Baird). Amphinome vagans (Savigny).
Eurythoé complanata (Pallas). Paramphinome australis, n.sp.
Eurythoé chilensis, Kinberg. Euphrosyne capensis, Kinberg.
Chloeia viridis, Schmarda. Euphrosyne arctia, Johnson.
Family APHRODITIDAE
Aphrodite alta, Kinberg. Laetmonice producta, Grube.
Family POLYNOIDAE
Hermadion ferox, Baird. Harmothoé spinosa, Kinberg.
Hermadion magalhaensi, Kinberg. Harmothoé exanthema (Grube).
Malmgrenia micropoides, Augener. Harmothoé anderssoni, Bergstrém.
Euphione elisabethae, McIntosh. Harmothoé crosetensis (McIntosh).
Scalisetosus pellucidus (Ehlers). Harmothoé (Evarnella) impar (Johnston), var.
Lepidonotus semitectus, Stimpson. notialis, var. nov.
Eulagisca corrientis, McIntosh. Harmothoé (Evarnella) kerguelensis (McIntosh).
Eunoé opalina, McIntosh. Harmothoé (Barrukia) cristata (Willey).
Eucrantha mollis (McIntosh). Harmothoé (Barrukia) curviseta, n.sp.
Polyeunoa laevis, McIntosh. Antinoé setobarba, n.sp.
Polynoé antarctica Kinberg. Antinoé antarctica (Bergstr6m).
Harmothoé magellanica (McIntosh). Antinoé epitoca, n.sp.
Family ACOETIDAE
Eupanthalis tubifex (Ehlers). Polyodontes mortenseni, Monro.
Family SIGALIONIDAE
Euthalanessa dendrolepis (Claparéde). Leanira incisa, Grube.
6 - DISCOVERY REPORTS
Family PHYLLODOCIDAE
Eteone sculpta, Ehlers.
Eteone aurantiaca, Schmarda.
Eteone rubella, Ehlers.
Phyllodoce patagonica, Kinberg.
Phyllodoce ( Anaitis) bowersi, Benham.
Phyllodoce oculata, Ehlers.
Phyllodoce longipes, Kinberg.
Austrophyllum charcoti (Gravier).
Genetyllis polyphylla (Ehlers).
Eulalia magalhaensis, Kinberg.
Eulalia viridis (O. F. Miiller).
Eulalia anomalochaeta, n.sp.
Eulalia subulifera (Ehlers).
Eulalia picta, Kinberg.
Family HESIONIDAE
Orseis sp.
Leocrates diplognathus, Monro.
Family SYLLIDAE
Pionosyllis comosa, Gravier.
Pionosyllis maxima, n.sp.
Eusyllis kerguelensis, McIntosh.
Trypanosyllis gigantea (McIntosh).
Trypanosyllis gemmulifera, Augener.
Autolytus charcoti, Gravier.
Autolytus gibber, Ehlers.
Autolytus simplex, Ehlers.
Autolytus (Sacconereis) sp.
Grubea clavata (Claparéde).
Syllis prolixa, Ehlers.
Syllis brachychaeta, Schmarda.
Syllis brachycola, Ehlers.
Syllis variegata, Grube.
Syllis sclerolaema, Ehlers.
Family NEREIDAE
Nereis kerguelensis, McIntosh.
Nereis callaona, Grube.
Nereis eugeniae (Kinberg).
Nereis typhla, n.sp.
Nereis pelagica, L.
Platynereis magalhaensis, Kinberg.
Platynereis dumerilii (Milne-Edwards).
Leptonereis loxechini, Kinberg.
Nereis (Eunereis) hardyi, n.sp.
Ceratonereis vittata, Langerhans.
Family NEPHTHYDIDAE
Nephthys macrura, Schmarda.
Nephthys lyrochaeta, Fauvel.
Nephthys serratifolia, Ehlers.
Family SPHAERODORIDAE
Ephesia antarctica, McIntosh.
Family GLYCERIDAE
Glycera capitata, Oersted.
Glycera tesselata, Grube.
Glycera convoluta, Keferstein.
Goniada congoensis, Grube.
Family EUNICIDAE
Eunice pennata (O. F. Miiller).
Eunice siciliensis, Grube.
Eunice vittata (Delle Chiaje).
Eunice longicirrata, Webster.
Eunice rousseaui, Quatrefages.
Eunice murrayi, McIntosh.
Nicidion kinbergii, Webster.
Nicidion edentulum, Ehlers.
Diopatra cuprea (Bosc).
Diopatra punctifera, Ehlers.
Epidiopatra hupferiana, Augener.
Rhamphobrachium ehlersi, n.sp.
Onuphis eremita, Audouin and Milne-Edwards.
Onuphis notialis, n.sp.
Onuphis quadricuspis, M. Sars.
Onuphis iridescens (Johnson).
Leptoecia antarctica, n.sp.
Lumbrinereis magalhaensis, Kinberg.
Lumbrinereis africana, Augener.
Lumbrinereis coccinea, Renieri.
Lumbrinereis heteropoda, Marenzeller.
Lumbrinereis tetraura, Schmarda.
Lumbrinereis antarctica, n.sp.
Augeneria tentaculata, gen. et sp. nov.
Arabella iricolor (Montagu).
Drilonereis filum (Claparede).
Drilonereis sp.
Staurocephalus neglectus, Fauvel.
Staurocephalus rubrovittatus, Grube.
INTRODUCTION 5
Family ARICIIDAE
Aricia marginata, Ehlers. Scoloplos mawsoni, Benham.
Aricia michaelsent, Ehlers. Scoloplos armiger (O. F. Miiller).
Nainereis hexaphyllum (Schmarda).
Family SPIONIDAE
Pygospio dubia, usp. Prionospio africana, Augener.
Nerine sp.
Family PARAONIDAE
Paraonts (Paraonides) gracilis (Tauber).
Family CHAETOPTERIDAE
Chaetopterus variopedatus (Renier). Phyllochaetopterus sp.
Phyllochaetopterus socialis, Claparéde.
Family CIRRATULIDAE
Audouinia filigera (Delle Chiaje), var. capensis Dodecaceria concharum, Oersted.
(Schmarda). Heterocirrus caput-esocis, Saint Joseph, var
Cirratulus cirratus (O. F. Miiller). capensis, var. nov.
Cirratulus antarcticus, n.sp. Tharyx epitoca, n.sp.
Cirratulus afer, Ehlers. Tharyx sp.
Family FLABELLIGERIDAE
Stylarioides kerguelarum (Grube). Flabelligera mundata, Gravier.
Stylarioides swakopianus, Augener. Brada villosa (Rathke).
Flabelligera affinis, M. Sars. Brada mammillata, Grube.
Flabelligera luctator, Stimpson. Pycnoderma congoense, Grube.
Flabelligera pennigera, Ehlers.
Family SCALIBREGMIDAE
Scalibregma inflatum, Rathke.
Family CAPITELLIDAE
Capitella capitata (Fabricius). Notomastus latericeus, M. Sars.
Capitella capitata (Fabricius), var. antarctica, Notomastus lineatus, Claparéde.
var. nov.
Family OPHELIIDAE
Ammotrypane breviata, Ehlers. Travisia kerguelensis, McIntosh, var. gravieri,
Travisia olens, Ehlers. var. nov.
Travisia kerguelensis, McIntosh. Kesun abyssorum, 0.sp.
Family MALDANIDAE
Maldane decorata, Grube. Clymene (Isocirrus) yungi (Gravier).
Maldane sarsi, Malmgren, var. antarctica, Arwidsson. Asychis amphiglypta (Ehlers).
Rhodine intermedia, Arwidsson. Nicomache lumbricalis (Fabricius).
Lumbriclymenella robusta, Arwidsson. Nicomache sp.
Clymenella minor, Arwidsson. Axiothella antarctica, n.sp.
Clymene kerguelensis (McIntosh).
Family OWENIIDAE
Owenia fusiformis, Delle Chiaje.
8 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Family SABELLARIIDAE
Gunnarea capensis (Schmarda).
Idanthyrsus armatus, Kinberg.
Idanthyrsus pennatus (Peters).
Family STERNASPIDAE
Sternaspis scutata (Ranzani).
Sternaspis scutata (Ranzani), var. africana, Augener.
Family AMPHICTENIDAE
Pectinaria sp.
Family AMPHARETIDAE
Amage sculpta, Ehlers.
Melinna cristata (M. Sars).
Phyllocomus crocea, Grube.
Neosabellides elongatus (Ehlers).
Amphicteis gunneri (M. Sars).
Amphictets gunneri (M. Sars), var antarctica, Hessle
Amphicteis gunneri (M. Sars), var. japonica, Mc-
Intosh.
Family TEREBELLIDAE
Terebella ehlersit, Gravier.
Loimia medusa (Savigny).
Loimia montagui (Grube).
Pista mirabilis, McIntosh.
Pista corrientis, McIntosh.
Leaena abranchiata, Ehlers, var. antarctica (Mc-
Intosh).
Leaena collaris, Hessle.
Neoleprea streptochaeta (Ehlers).
Lanice vayssieri (Gravier).
Amphitrite kerguelensis, McIntosh.
Amphitrite edwardsi (Quatrefages).
Nicolea chilensis (Schmarda).
Nicolea macrobranchia (Schmarda).
Artacama proboscidea, Malmgren.
Thelepus cincinnatus (Fabricius).
Thelepus setosus (Quatrefages).
Polycirrus kerguelensis (McIntosh).
Polycirrus hamiltoni, Benham.
Polycirrus hesslet, n.sp.
Lysilla loveni, Malmgren, var. macintoshi, Gravier.
Hauchiella tribullata (McIntosh).
Terebellides minutus, Hessle.
Terebellides longicaudatus, Hessle.
Family SABELLIDAE
Sabella pavonina, Savigny.
Potamilla antarctica (Kinberg).
Bispira magalhaensis (Kinberg).
Dasychone violacea (Schmarda).
Dasychone natalensis (Kinberg). °
Dasychone nigromaculata (Baird).
Hypsicomus torquatus (Grube).
Euratella puncturata (Augener).
Euchone pallida, Ehlers.
Fasmineira scotti, Benham.
Family SERPULIDAE
Serpula vermicularis, L.
Serpula loveni (Kinberg).
Hydroides norvegica (Gunner).
Vermiliopsis notialis, n.sp.
Vermiliopsts glandigerus, Gravier.
Vermiliopsis richardi, Fauvel, var. fauveli,
var. Nov.
Salmacina dysteri (Huxley), var. falklandica,
var. Nov.
Pelagic species
Family POLYNOIDAE
Podarmus atlanticus, n.sp.
Sheila bathypelagica, gen. et sp. nov.
Lagisca hubrechti (McIntosh).
Nectochaeta caroli, Fauvel.
Macellicephala, sp.
Antinoé pelagica, n.sp.
INTRODUCTION 9
Family PHYLLODOCIDAE
Lopadorhynchus brevis, Grube. Lopadorhynchus krohnii (Claparéde), var. sim-
plex, var. nov.
Family ALCIOPIDAE
Vanadis longissima (Levinsen). Greeffia oahuensis, McIntosh.
Vanadis formosa, Claparéde. Rhynconerella fulgens, Greeff.
Torrea candida (Delle Chiaje). Alciopa cantrainii (Delle Chiaje).
Callizona angelini (Kinberg).
Family TOMOPTERIDAE
Tomopteris carpenteri, Quatrefages. Tomopteris nisseni, Rosa.
Tomopteris septentrionalis, Quatrefages. Tomopteris kempi, n.sp.
Tomopteris cavallii, Rosa.
Family TYPHLOSCOLECIDAE
Sagitella kowalewskii, Wagner. Typhloscolex miilleri, Busch.
Sagitella cornuta, Ehlers. Travistopsis sp.
Sagitella lobifera, Ehlers.
The total number of benthic species or varieties is 220, belonging to 128 genera, and
of pelagic species or varieties 25, belonging to 17 genera.
There are 2 new genera and 29 new species or varieties in this collection, and several
additions have been made to the number of species recorded from the colder waters of
both hemispheres. I see no reason to doubt the truth of the explanation adopted by
Fauvel (1925 A, p. 316), Gravier and others of the presence of the same or closely
allied species at both poles.
GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION
The table on pp. 10-17 is constructed to show where, and at what stations, the species
were found; to what extent the Polychaete faunas, as far as they are represented in this
collection, diverge or overlap in the several regions (South Georgia and the Falkland
Islands, ‘Tristan da Cunha and the Cape, etc.); and how often any two or more species
occur at the same stations. Regarding the last, the practice by systematists of presenting
their data in some such easily accessible form should prove valuable to the student of
animal communities.
The station numbers are not arranged in chronological order, but according to the
areas in which they occur, related regions being juxtaposed. A few species are without
record of station, and these are omitted from the table.
Each species has a number, which is carried over to the left-hand side of the right-
hand pages. The numbers in the columns are station numbers.
Diri ° <
Io
Palmer Archipelago
‘Discovery’
S. Shetlands
‘Discovery’
‘Discovery’
‘Discovery’
Between S. Shetlands and
‘Discovery’
Between S. Orkneys and
S. Shetlands
Between S. Georgia and
The Horn,
Off S. Orkneys
‘Discovery’
S. Orkneys,
South Sandwich
Islands
Off Bouvet Island
‘Discovery’
Off S. Georgia
‘Discovery’
al
OO ONIN ONAPW VN
20
21
22
23
23
23
24
24
25
27
28
29
30
Hermodice carunculata, var .didymo-
branchiata
Eurythoé complanata
Eurythoé chilensis
Chloeia viridis
Notopygos megalops
Paramphinome australis
Euphrosyne arctia
” ”
Aphrodite alta
Laetmonice producta
” ”»
Hermadion ferox
Hermadion magalhaensi
Podarmus atlanticus
Sheila bathypelagica
Lagisca hubrechti
Malmgrenia micropoides
Nectochaeta caroli
Macellicephala sp.
Scalisetosus pellucidus
Lepidonotus semitectus
Eulagisca corrientis
Eunoé opalina
Eucrantha mollis
Polyeunoa laevis
”» »”
”» D
Polynoé antarctica
»”» ”»
Harmothoé magellanica
” »”»
” ”
” »
Harmothoé spinosa
” ”
” ”
” ”
Harmothoé exanthema
Harmothoé anderssoni
Harmothoé crosetensis
Harmothoé impar, var. notialis
Harmothoé kerguelensis
Harmothoé cristata
Harmothoé curviseta
Antinoé pelagica
Antinoé setobarba
Antinoé antarctica
” ”
Antinoé epitoca
Eupanthalis tubifex
Polyodontes mortensent
Euthalanessa dendrolepis
Leanira incisa
Eteone sculpta
” ”
Eteone aurantiaca
Eteone rubella
Phyllodoce patagonica
Phyllodoce bowersi
Phyllodoce oculata
Phyllodoce longipes
Austrophyllum charcoti
Genetyllis polyphylla
Eulalia magalhaensis
Eulalia viridis
Eulalia anomalochaeta
Eulalia picta
Lopadorhynchus brevis
Lopadorhynchus krohnii, var.
simplex
181
180 181 182
186 187
181 190
187
181
181 182 187
190
181
187 190
190
190
181 190
181 186
195
175 177 195
175 195
195
160
Only pelagic gear used
27 39 42 140
144 149
42 45 123 144
148 149 152
39 42 149
27 140
144
159
39 42 144 148
149 152 159
27 39 42 45
123 140 144 146
148 149 152 156
159
45 141 145 146
144
126
18 45
29 39 45 123
140 142 149
145
149
27 45 141 142
144 145
142
45
145
45 141 145
42
149 156
,AtsAoosiqq,
pur[s] uolsusosy
,ATOAOOSICT,
spurs] apisA odep
pue uMoyT, oded usaMjag
uONeIS [BIISO[OIg dUTIBIAy
volipy YING
<Aqse109G WerIIAA ,
BOLIFY JsSeM-YINOS YO
,ATAOOSIC, ,
BolIyy IsaM-YIN0G YO
,AIsAOoSIC,,
eyUND ep uUr}jsII.y,
~AqsaI09g WRIT] ,
purjs] ysn0y YO
, AdaAOosICy
uUMO JT, adea
pue spurs] purpyye.j usamjog
<Aqseroog wert ,
ROLIOUIY *S
pue spurysy puepye.y usamMiog
,AI@AOosIC, ,
UIOF] OU,
pur spurjs] purpye.y uoamjog
<Aqsaroog UIeTTIIM ,
spurs] purpy[ey JO “N
-AraAoosiqy ,
Spuejs] puepled YO
52
Ss} SS Sy
48 51
58
,Aqsaioog WURTTIIM ,
PIBIOI) "SG YO
25 56 62
woreI1g [BOIsSO[oIg surIeyAT
BIDIOID *S
_
TN OMtNO MEO ADI HA MTINO BOO
be ee ee oo
om
a0
N
aa
6 68 71
AM tNOO DODO MtMmo FO AO A Ot INO
I2
Palmer Archipelago
‘Discovery’
S. Shetlands
‘Discovery’
‘Discovery’
Between S. Shetlands and
The Horn,
Between S. Orkneys and
‘Discovery’
S. Shetlands
Off S. Orkneys
‘Discovery’
Between S. Georgia and
‘Discovery’
S. Orkneys,
South Sandwich
Islands
Off Bouvet Island
‘Discovery’
Off S. Georgia
‘Discovery’
113
114
Vanadis longissima
Vanadis formosa
” ”
Torrea candida
Callizona angelini
Greeffia oahuensis
Rhynconerella fulgens
Alciopa cantrainii
Tomopteris carpenteri
” ”
” ”
Tomopteris septentrionalis
»”» »”
” ”
” ”
Tomopteris cavallii
Tomopteris nisseni
»” ”
Tomopteris kempi
Sagitella kowalewskii
Sagitella cornuta
Sagitella lobifera
Typhloscolex miilleri
Travisiopsis sp.
Orseis sp.
Leocrates diplognathus
Pionosyllis comosa
Pionosyllis maxima
Eusyllis kerguelensis
» ”
Trypanosyllis gigantea
» ”
Trypanosyllis gemmulifera
Autolytus charcoti
Autolytus gibber
Autolytus simplex
Autolytus sp.
Grubea clavata
Syllis prolixa
Syllis brachychaeta
Syllis brachycola
Syillis variegata
Syllis sclerolaema
Nereis kerguelensis
Nereis callaona
Nereis eugeniae
Nereis typhla
Nereis pelagica
Platynereis magalhaensis
”» ”
Platynereis dumerilii
Leptonereis loxechini
” ”
Eunereis hardyi
Ceratonerets vittata
Nephthys macrura
” ”
Nephthys lyrochaeta
Nephthys serratifolia
Ephesia antarctica
Glycera capitata
” ”
Glycera tesselata
Glycera convoluta
Goniada congoensis
Eunice pennata
Eunice siciliensis
Eunice vittata
Eunice longicirrata
Eunice murrayt
Nicidion kinbergii
182 190
180 181 182
186 190
173 175 195
175 177
Only pelagic gear used
17, 30. 5370NsS
41
39
45
39
27 45 123 140
145 148 149
45
141
135
45
45 141 145
27 28 29 45
140 143 144 146
148 149 157 159
27 42 45 123
144 149 159
152 156 157 159
13
,AraA0osIq ,
pups] uolsusssy
_Alsaoosiq ,
spurs] epiaA ade
pure umo,y, adey usaayog
287 289
267 282 288
283
283
283
270 282 287
204
268
273 288 289
293
287 291
279
WOIeIG [BIIsOpOIg PULL IAT
volgy YINos
<Aqsaroog WeITITM ,
voLipy ISeM-YINOS HO
_AraAoosiq ,
Bolpy 3SeM-YIN0S YO
102
102
100
100
100
go
90
9° 93
,AT@AOOSIC, ,
eyuny ep urysILy,
|
+
[ial sel arti ean
<Aqse109g WRIITAA ,
pues] ysn0D YO
LE A
,ArsAO9SIC, ,
uMoy, odep
pur spurys] puepyey ueomjog
<AqseIoog WeITTA ,
voroury *S
pur spurysy puepy[ey waemiog
75
83 93 97
79 91
LST IST STs ke a
Eat i tte
,ATAOOSIC, ,
uIOF] PUL
pur spurys] puryy[ey UaeMjog
222
TEC id
-Aqser0og WeITITAA ,
spurjs] purple JO “N
,AIOAOOSICT ,
spurs] purplet BO
bs} Sy7/
51
55 58
51
(ea es as a Lia a
eS |
Aqsero0g WITT ,
¥IB109D “S HO
A Ae
woNeIg [BOISO[OIg UTIL]
BISIOI) "CS
68 71
(pede Tata Te
ys and
gia and
Between S. Geor
S. Orkneys, ‘Discovery’
South Sandwich
pelago
‘Discovery’
ys
‘Discovery’
‘Discovery’
‘Discovery’
Between S. Shetlands and
‘Discovery’
The Horn,
Palmer Archi
S. Shetlands
Between S. Orkne
S. Shetlands
Off S. Orkne
Off Bouvet Island
‘Discovery’
Off S. Georgia
‘Discovery’
115 Nicidion edentulum
116 Diopatra cuprea
117 Diopatra punctifera
118 Epidiopatra hupferiana
119 Rhamphobrachium ehlerst
120 Onuphis eremita
121 Onuphis notialis
122 Onuphis quadricuspis
123 Onuphis iridescens
124 Leptoecia antarctica
125 Lumbrinereis magalhaensis 27 29 30 39
125 42 45 123 140
125 I4l 144 145 152
was) ”, 5B 159
126 Lumbrinereis africana
127 Lumbrinereis coccinea
128 Lumbrinerets heteropoda
129 Lumbrinereis tetraura
130 Lumbrinereis antarctica
131 Augeneria tentaculata
132 Arabella iricolor
133 Drilonereis filum
134. Drilonereis sp.
135 Staurocephalus neglectus
136 Staurocephalus rubrovittatus
137 Aricia marginata
138 Aricia michaelseni
139 Scoloplos mawsont
140 Scoloplos armiger
141 Pygospio dubia
142 Nerine sp.
143 Prionospio africana
144 Paraonis gracilis
145 Chaetopterus variopedatus
146 Phyllochaetopterus socialis
147 Phyllochaetopterus sp.
148 Audouinia filigera, var. capensis
149 Cirratulus cirratus
150 Cirratulus antarcticus
151 Cirratulus afer
152 Dodecaceria concharum
153 Heterocirrus caput-esocis, var.
capensis
154 Tharyx epitoca
155 Tharyx sp.
156 Stylarioides kerguelarum
157 Stylarioides swakopianus
158 Flabelligera affinis
159 Flabelligera luctator
160 Flabelligera pennigera
161 Flabelligera mundata
162 Brada villosa
163 Brada mammillata
164. Pycnoderma congoense
165 Scalibregma inflatum
166 Capitella capitata
167 Notomastus latericeus
168 ? Notomastus lineatus 152
169 Ammotrypane breviata .
170 Travisia olens
171 Travisia kerguelensis 157 159
172 Travisia kerguelensis, var.
gravieri
173 Kesun abyssorum 177
174. Maldane decorata =
175 Maldane sarsi, var. antarctica 177 195 123
175 » ”
“78 Rhodine intermedia 42 140 141
17 ” ”
177 Lumbriclymenella robusta 27 140
178 Clymenella minor =
179 Clymenella kerguelensis 27
Only pelagic gear used
,ATOAOOSIC, ,
pue]s] worsusosy
,AI@A09SIC] ,
spurs] apis ade
pue umoy, aded usamjag
Ana
bho &
aa a
uoNeIg [vOIDO[OIg eUTIe]
ROLIFY YING
Aqsatoog wer ,
BOlIfY JSAM-YINOG HO
,AT@AOOSIC] ,
BOLIFY IS9M-YINCG YO
,ATAOOSIC, ,
eyunyd ep Ue}SsII],
Aqse100g Wer ,
purjst ysn0y HO
,AraAoosiq ,
uMOy, adey
pu spurs] puepyye.y ueeMjog
,Aqsaioog wer],
BOLO *S
pue spurys] puryy[ey wseMjog
, AIBAOOSIC, ,
UO Sty
pure spurys] puepyey uaemjog
.Aqse109g WRITE ,
spurs] Puepy[ey JO"N
,AI@AONSIC, ,
SpuslsT Pures ao
<Aqsei0og WRITIIM ,
BIBIOIH *S HO
wore} [BOISO[OTY JuTIV]\y
BISIOID) "SG
‘Discovery’
ys and
‘Discovery’
pelago
‘Discovery’
‘Discovery’
Between S. Shetlands and
‘Discovery’
‘Discovery’
The Horn,
Between S. Georgia and
Between S. Orkne
S. Orkneys,
Palmer Archi
S. Shetlands
S. Shetlands
Off S. Orkneys
South Sandwich
Off Bouvet Island
‘Discovery’
Off S. Georgia
‘Discovery’
|
180 Clymene yungi 181 190 27 45 140 148
180 ” ” ar 149 152 153
181 Asychis amphiglypta 181 186 29 30
182 Nicomache sp. 190
183 Axiothella antarctica =
184 Owenia fusiformis
185 Gunnarea capensis
186 Idanthyrsus armatus
186 » »
186 23 »
187 Idanthyrsus pennatus
188 Sternaspis scutata
188 »» »
189 Sternaspis scutata, var. africana
190 Pectinaria sp.
191 Amage sculpta
192 Melinna cristata
193 Phyllocomus crocea
194. Neosabellides elongatus = 140 159
195 Amphictets gunneri =
a Amphicteis gunneri, var. antarctica 30 39 143
19 ” »
197 Amphicteis gunneri, var. japonica =
198 Terebella ehlersi 45 149
199 Loimia medusa — =
200 Loimia montagui
201 Pista mirabilis
202 Pista corrientis
203 Leaena abranchiata, var.
antarctica
204 Leaena collaris
205 Neoleprea streptochaeta
206 Lanicides vayssieri
207 Amphitrite kerguelensis
208 Amphitrite edwardsi
209 Nicolea chilensis
210 Nicolea macrobranchia
211 Artacama proboscidea 30 144
212 Thelepus cincinnatus 39 42 45
212 » » 140 146 148
212 . : 159
213 Thelepus setosus =
214 Polycirrus kerguelensis = 42 45 144
214 ” ”
215 Polycirrus hamiltoni =
216 Polycirrus hesslei —
217 Lysilla loveni, var. macintoshi 28 30
218 Hauchiella tribullata —_— =>
219 Terebellides minutus 30 45
220 Terebellides longicaudatus 27 30 45
221 Sabella pavonina =
222 Potamilla antarctica 39 42 45 123
222 20 Zs 153 154
223 Bispira magalhaensis =
224 Dasychone violacea
225 Dasychone natalensis
226 Dasychone nigromaculata
227 Hypsicomus torquatus
228 Euratella puncturata :
229 Euchone pallida 39 45 123
230 Fasmineira scotti a
231 Serpula vermicularis 27 45 140 146
232 Serpula loveni : =
233 Hydroides norvegica
234 Vermiliopsis notialis
235 Vermiliopsis glandigerus
236 Vermiliopsis richardi, var. fauveli
237 Salmacina dysteri, var. falklandica
Only pelagic gear used
17
,AlsAoosiq ,
pur]s] uorsusssy
a Rm
,AdaAoosIqZ ,
spurs] apiaA adep
pue uMoy, aded usamjog
279
270
U0I1}EIS [POISO[OIg surely
voliyy yINnog
82
g S| al
<Aqsatoog well AA ,
ROLY ISAM-YINOG YO
,AdaAoosiq ,
BOLIFY 1SaM-YINCS YO
gr
gi
go
gt
,AIDA09SIC ,
eyUnD ep uejsILy,
a | ee 1 it
<Aqse109§ WeITTTAA ,
purysy ysn0H YO
,AlsAoosIq, ,
uMOT, aded
pur spuvjs] puepye.y usaajog
<Aqsar0og WITITA ,
ROTIOUIY *S
pure spurys] puryy[ey usaemjog
93
8
88
97
why Th) 2
73
97
79
85 88 90
77 79 92
85
,AlsAoosIq, ,
UIOFT OUT,
pure spurjsy puryy[e.y uaomjog
Aqsaroog Wer ,
spurs] Puepy]ey JO "N
.AqaAoosiqy ,
spuels] purpleq HO
53
51
<Aqse10og WwreITITAA ,
PIB109D) "S HO
48 55 58
uoreIg [BOIsO[oIg ure
BIDIOID *S
8
piri
18 DISCOVERY REPORTS
BATHYMEERICGAL DISTREUBU TION
Benthic species
The following table of benthic species gives the number of hauls and the number of specimens in parallel
columns at three categories of depth, 0-175 m., 175-350 m. and below 350m. The depth of 350m. is
chosen as being Chun’s physiological line, below which assimilation by the phytoplankton ceases. It should
be borne in mind, however, that the majority of hauls are coastal, and the presence of detritus, etc., in the
water at the coastal stations would raise the level of penetration of the sun-rays, necessary for assimilative
activity, to above the 350 m. line.
The object of the table is to show, within the limits of the present material, what species are confined
to one of the selected categories of depth, and to what extent other species, not so confined, increase or
decrease in numbers per haul in passing from one depth to another. Repeated observations of this kind
would reveal at what depth a species or group of species was most dense, and consequently their optimum
depth. This would vary with the latitude and conditions of temperature.
A number of species have depth records as, for example, 120-200 m., which do not exactly fit the arbitrary
categories of depth used; and these I have placed in the categories to which their recorded depths most
nearly approximate. A few species are without any record of depth, and these are excluded from Table II.
Taste II
0-175 m. 175-350m. | 350-I1d00m. 0-175 m. 175-350 m. | 350-1000 m.
Species a a 5 Species Soe i- i-
inuis|| ood Freefall =a ais Ieee Haale ees fants: eee | laulal |e
Hermodice carunculata, 2 16 — = = — || Eteone rubella — — I I
var. didymobranchiata Phyllodoce patagonica 7} 14 4 6 I I
Eurythoé complanata 3 28 Phyllodoce bowersi — — I I — —_—
Eurythoé chilensis I I — — — => Phyllodoce oculata 3 5 —_ = = =
Chloeia viridis I I = = = = Phyllodoce longipes® — -- _— — = —
Notopygos megalops I I Austrophyllum charcoti = = 3 5 I 2
Paramphinome australis _ — I I = — Genetyllis polyphylla 2 3 I 2 —_—
Euphrosyne capensis* I 3 — —_— — — Eulalia magalhaensis 4 4 I I — —
Euphrosyne arctia 5 7 2 3 = = Eulalia viridis I 10
Aphrodite alta = _ I I == == Eulalia anomalochaeta I 2 3 3 = —
Laetmonice producta* 5 14 be) 102 —_— = Eulalia subulifera I 304, — = = aS
Hermadion ferox I 2 2 3 = = Eulalia picta 3 3 2 6 _ —
Hermadion magalhaensi 14 146 — = — — Orseis sp. — — I 20 — =—
Malmgrenia micropoides I I Leocrates diplognathus I I = — — =
Euphione elisabethae* Pionosyllis comosa —_— —_ I I — —
Scalisetosus pellucidus 2 3 = = = = Pionosyllis maxima — — I 3 — —
Lepidonotus semitectus I 5 —_— — —_ — Eusyllis kerguelensis 5 7 I I — —
Eulagisca corrientis I I 2 3 = = Trypanosyllis gigantea 14 26 6 5] —_ —
Eunoé opalina = = i I a = Trypanosyllis gemmulifera I I = = = =
Eucrantha mollis 2 2 2 6 = — Autolytus charcoti 2 2 I I — =
Polyeunoa laevis* 13 113 9 40 I 2 Autolytus gibber I 3 I I — —
Polynoé antarctica 5 8 I I — —_ Autolytus simplex 3 20 = — — —
Harmothoé magellanica 13 77 II 99 2 6 Autolytus sp. I I = = — —
Harmothoé spinosa 25 150 6 18 3 3 Grubea clavata I 4 — — —_—
Harmothoé exanthema 5 18 Syllis prolixa 2 2 I I — —
Harmothoé anderssoni I I Syllis brachychaeta 3 13 = — — —
Harmothoé crosetensis I 4 4 4 = = Syllis brachycola 3 9 = — —_— —_
Harmothoé impar, var. I 2 = = = — Syllis variegata 6 18 = — = =
notialis Syllis sclerolaema I 2 = — —
Harmothoé kerguelensis I I == = = = Nereis kerguelensis 13 45 3 II — —
Harmothoé cristata — — 3 4 = = Nereis callaona I I = = — —_
Harmothoé curviseta = | = 2 2 = = Nereis eugeniae 8 29 = = = =
Antinoé setobarba I I Nereis typhla —_— —_ I I _- —
Antinoé antarctica 2 2 6 37 = Nereis pelagica I 3 = = —_ _
Antinoé epitoca I I — oe = — Platynereis magalhaensis 10 31
Eupanthalis tubifex I I Platynereis dumerilii 2 22 = — — ~-
Polyodontes mortenseni I I Leptonereis loxechini 5 34 5 65 I I
Euthalanessa dendrolepis I 2 = = = = Nereis (Eunerets) hardyi 4 26 = _ — —
Leanira incisa 2 4 Ceratonereis vittata I I _ —
Eteone sculpta 6 6 I 3 = = Nephthys macrura® i pe 37 12 103 4 15
Eteone aurantiaca I I — — — — Nephthys lyrochaeta I 4 —_— = — —_
1 Shore coll. 2 1:10. 278-500 m., i.e. one haul and 10 specimens. This form is used throughout.
% 1:3. 310-402 m. 4 1:11. 278-500 m. * 1:1. 88-273 m. 6 1:15. 278-500 m.
19
0-175 m. 175-350m. | 350-1000 m. o-175 m. 175-350m. | 350-1000 m.
Species Speci- | Speci- | Speci- Species Speci- | Speci- | eci-
Hauls | mens | Hauls | pens | Hauls see Hauls ee | Hauls Lea Hauls page
Nephthys serratifolia 2 7 I I = = Travisia kerguelensis, =) =) 2 12 = _—
Ephesia antarctica —_ — I 4 — — var. graviert |
Glycera capitata 16 32 6 15 I I Kesun abyssorum — — -- — I I
Glycera tesselata I I = — — — || Maldane decorata I 8 — —=.| — —
Glycera convoluta it 3 —_— — — — Maldane sarsi, var. _— = 3 3 i 4 33
Goniada congoensis I 2 — — — — antarctica
Eunice pennata 3 112 3 71 I 1 || Rhodine intermedia 3 7 3 12 = =
Eunice siciliensis r 5 = = = — || Lumbriclymenella robusta 2, 2 = — I 3
Eunice vittata I 15 = — — — Clymenella minor 2 5
Eunice longicirrata I 15 = — — — Clymene kerguelensis I 2 I I = =
Eunice rousseaui I I — — — — Clymene yungi 6 12 4 6 I I
Eunice murrayt I 3 = = = = Asychis amphiglypta I I 4 IOI I 80
Nicidion kinbergii I 2 — — — = Nicomache lumbricalis I 2 = —_ = =
Nicidion edentulum I 4 = = = = Nicomache sp. I I I 3 = =
Diopatra cuprea I 18 = _— — — Axiothella antarctica — a Zi 3 —_ =
Diopatra punctifera I 14 —_— —_ — — Owenia fusiformis I 20 = = = =
Epidiopatra hupferiana I 2 — — —= — Gunnarea capensis? a 3 = a= = _
Rhamphobrachium ehlersi | — = = = I 2 Idanthyrsus armatus 9 25 = — = =
Onuphis eremita I I — —_— — = Idanthyrsus pennatus I 4 = = = =
Onuphis notialis = = 4 12 = = Sternaspis scutata I 3 6 | 240 3 83
Onuphis quadricuspis 3 10 — _— = = Sternaspis scutata, var. 2 15 = —_— = =
Onuphis tridescens = = = _— I 2 africana
Leptoecia antarctica = = = = I 60 Pectinaria sp. I I = = = =
Lumbrinereis magalhaensis| 14 63 6 28 I 3 Amage sculpta — a I 7 I I
Lumbrinereis africana I 4 —— oo — — Melinna cristata I I = = = =
Lumbrinereis coccinea I 2 || Phyllocomus crocea I I I 5 — =
Lumbrinereis heteropoda 2 5 = _ —_ — || Neosabellides elongatus 2 2 = = = =
Lumbrinereis tetraura 4 17 — — — = Amphicteis gunneri I I = _— = =
Lumbrinereis antarctica* _— = = = — = Amphicteis gunneri, var. 3 7 7 27 2 6
Augeneria tentaculata = —_ 2 15 — — || antarctica
Arabella iricolor I 4 — — — — Amphicteis gunneri, var. I I = = = =
Drilonereis filum I 4 — — —_— — japonica
Drilonereis sp. I 2 — — — — Terebella ehlersi I 2 3 19 — =
Staurocephalus neglectus I I —_ — = = Loimia medusa I 6 = = = —
Staurocephalus rubro- I I — — — — Loimia montagut I I I 2 = =
vittatus Pista mirabilis I 5 = = = =
Aricia marginata 5 43 I qo |, — — Pista corrientis I I = — I 2
Aricia michaelseni I I — oo — — Leaena abranchiata, var. — = 2 II — =
Nainereis hexaphyllum I 2 — — _ = antarctica
Scoloplos mawsoni I 8 I 3 — — Leaena collaris — = I I = =
Scoloplos armiger I I = — —_ = Neoleprea streptochaeta I 4 I I = =
Pygospio dubia I 50 — —_— —_ — Lanicides vayssieri 4 10 I I = =
Nerine sp. — = I 2 — — Amphitrite kerguelensis I 2 I I I I
Prionospio africana I I — — os — Amphitrite edwardst 3 7) = = =
Paraonis gracilis I 10 — — — — Nicolea chilensis 5 92 = = — =
Chaetopterus variopedatus 6 19 os — — || Nicolea macrobranchia I 2 = = = =
Phyllochaetopterus sp. — = 2 15 I 3 Artacama proboscidea 3 II I 2 — =
Audouinia filigera, var. I II — — — = Thelepus cincinnatus 10 78 7] 62 I I
capensis Thelepus setosus 10 24 = = — =
Cirratulus cirratus 8 30 I 7 —_— = Polycirrus kerguelensis 3 4 2 5 a =
Cirratulus antarcticus 2 12 2 12 — — Polycirrus hamiltoni 2 7 = = = ra
Cirratulus afer I 2 — — — —_— Polycirrus hesslei I 8 = = =
Dodecaceria concharum I it — — — — Lysilla loveni, var. I 5 4 mae am
Heterocirrus caput-esocis, I 6 — — — — macintoshi
var. capensis Hauchiella tribullata os ca I 3 ai =
Tharyx epitoca I I 2 2 — | — |} Terebellides minutus t I 2 14 — | —
Tharyx sp. I 3 2 12 — — Terebellides longi- I a 2 7, a =a
Stylarioides kerguelarum I 65 2 7 — — caudatus*
Stylarioides swakopianus | ~ 1 4 — — — — Sabella pavonina I I = =, ae =
Flabelligera affinis 4 6 I I = — || Potamilla antarctica 15 93 4 | 20 I 20
Flabelligera luctator I 2 — — — — Bispira magalhaensis 2 3 =i = = aa
Flabelligera pennigera 3 G | — — = — Dasychone violacea I I = a = =
Flabelligera mundata I I — — — — Dasychone natalensis* I 4 = =a — =
Brada villosa a — 2 2 — = Dasychone nigromaculata | 1 8 — ze aa =
Brada mammillata = = rf 3 — _- Hypsicomus torquatus I I = — = =
Pycnoderma congoense I I — a = — Euratella puncturata* I 5 — = = =e
Scalibregma inflatum 3 5 I I — — Euchone pallida _— —— 5 57 2 2
Capitella capitata i I — — —_ — || Fasmineira scotti I I == = = =
Capitella capitata, var. I 4 — —_ — Serpula vermicularis 8 96 2 Ir I 3
antarctica Serpula loveni I 6 = — = ==
Notomastus latericeus 2 5 —_ — — Hydroides norvegica I I — = = —
Notomastus lineatus — _ I I —_ = Vermiliopsis notialis I 2 = = = =
Ammotrypane breviata _ = I 9 — — Vermiliopsis glandigerus I 4 = = = =
Travisia olens 2 3 — — — = Vermiliopsis richardt, I 3 as = = —
Travisia kerguelensis I 3 2 6 2 10 var. fauveli |
1 1:1. 278-500 m. 2 Shore coll. 3 1:1. 278-500 m. * Beach coll.
20 DISCOVERY REPORTS
SUMMARY
The total number of benthic species for which the depth is recorded is 217, and of
these only 207 are used in the following analysis, the remainder being incapable of
inclusion in the chosen categories. These 207 species were caught in 770 hauls; and if
we see how many species, and how many hauls belonging to these species, are confined
to any one of the given categories of depth, and, calculating what percentage they
constitute of the total number of species and hauls, compare them each with the others,
we may be able to form a rough estimate of the relative species density at the various
depths. In the following analysis the first three depth columns represent the same
categories as those in the preceding table; the fourth column of the analysis, ““o—350 m.,”’
represents a combination of the first two columns of the table, i.e. species with repre-
sentatives both between o and 175 m. and between 175 and 350 m.; the fifth column
of the analysis, ‘‘o—350 m. and below,” represents a combination of all three columns of
the table, i.e. species with representatives between o and 175 m., between 175 and
350 m. and below 350 m.; the sixth column of the analysis, “Between 175-350 m.
and below,” represents a combination of the second and third columns of ‘Table III and
needs no explanation.
~ 'Tasce III
Depth
Between | Between
Between | Below | Between 0-350 m. |175-350 m.
Cais tel) = 350m. |o-350m.] and and
35° m. below below
No. of species 30 500 506 116 21 5 42 18 5
No. of hauls ... 06 306 See 216 35 5 210 281 23
Percentage of total number of species SOG LOM 2% 2oG O% ae
Percentage of total number of hauls 287 5 06 % A Yi 87s Beck
It is noteworthy that for almost the same number of hauls (28 per cent. of the total
as against 27 per cent.) nearly three-fifths of the total number of species were confined
to above the 175 m. line, as against one-fifth with representatives both above and below
the 175 m. line.
Pelagic species
In Table IV, opposite, the bathymetrical range of the pelagic species is shown by the
arrangement in parallel columns of the minimum and maximum depths at which each
species was found. Where there is only one record, this is set down in the minimum
depth column.
The sign (-o) after the depth indicates that the net, though fishing for the duration
of the station at the recorded depth, was hauled open to the surface. The possibility is,
therefore, not excluded that the organisms contained in it were caught during its passage
to a higher level.
TABLE IV
Minimum depth
Maximum depth
Podarmus atlanticus...
Sheila bathypelagica
Lagisca hubrechti ...
Nectochaeta caroli ...
110-0 m. 200-230 (—0) m.
Macellicephala sp. 155-178 m.
Antinoé pelagica 50-0 m. 238-270 m.
Lopadorhynchus brevis 200-230 (—o) m —
Lopadorhynchus krohnit, var. simplex 56 (-o) m. 450-550 (—o) m.
Vanadis longissima ... 100 (—o) m. 800-1000 (—o) m.
Vanadis formosa, 52m. 2000 (—O) m.
Torrea candida
Callizona angelini
Greeffia oahuensts
Rhynconerella fulgens
Alciopa cantraini
Tomopteris carpenteri
Tomopteris septentrionalis ...
Tomopteris cavallit ...
Tomopteris nissent
300 (—o) m.
850-1100 m.
450-550 (—0) m
104 m.
100-150 (—o) m
125-225 (—o) m.
250-100 m.
125-225 (—o) m.
o-5 m.
rom.
1000 (—0) m.
100-120 (—o) m.
2500-2000 m.
100-150 (—O) m.
300 (—o) m.
250 (—o) m.
800-1000 (-o) m.
250-100 m.
250-100 m.
1000 (—o) m.
Tomopteris kempi o-10 m. =
Sagitella kowalewskit I10-O m. 2000 (—o) m.
Sagitella cornuta 320-450 m. .=
Sagitella lobifera 1000 (—o) m. 2500-2000 m.
Typhloscolex miilleri 250-100 m. oo
Travisiopsis sp.
2500-2000 Mm.
21
ECOLOGICAL
Table V, with the number of specimens and the number of hauls of each species
arranged in parallel columns under each of the several kinds of bottom, shows within
the scope of the present material what species are confined to any one kind of
bottom, to what extent other species not so confined display an increase or decrease in
numbers per haul in passing from one kind of bottom to another and, consequently,
their relative density on the several kinds of bottom. Although the present material
forms a wholly insufficient basis for generalisation, repeated observations of this nature
should reveal the kind of bottom on which a species or group of species is most dense
and, therefore, their optimum bottom. If to this were added a knowledge of their
optimum depth, we should possess some of the factors constituting at a given latitude
their optimum habitat.
The nature of the bottom is taken from the observations made by the naturalists and
recorded in the Station List 1925-1927 (Discovery Reports, 1, pp. 1-140). For the
purposes of the table I have simplified their classification of the bottom deposits: grey or
green mud is treated as mud without qualification ; “‘sand, stones and rock”? is treated as
“sand and stones”’; ‘‘mud, sand and stones”’ is treated as ‘‘mud and sand,” and so on.
In the table there are eight categories of bottom deposit used: mud, sand, stones, rock,
mud and sand, mud and stones, mud and rock, sand and stones.
The number of species or varieties having a record of the kind of bottom on which
they were found is 168.
22
DISCOVERY REPORTS
TABLE V
Species
Sand Stones
Rock
Madiand
sand
Speci-
Hauls | wens
Hauls
Speci-
mens
Speci-
Hauls | wens
Mud and
Hauls
stones
Mud and Sand and
rock stones
Speci-
mens
Hauls
Speci-
mens
Speci-
Hauls | wens
Hermodice carunculata,
var. didymobranchiata
Eurythoé complanata
Eurythoé chilensis
Paramphinome australis
Euphrosyne arctia
Aphrodite alta
Laetmonice producta
Hermadion ferox
Hermadion magalhaensi
Macellicephala sp.
Eulagisca corrientis
Eunoé opalina
Eucrantha mollis
Polyeunoa laevis
Polynoé antarctica
Harmothoé magellanica
Harmothoé spinosa*
Harmothoé exanthema
Harmothoé anderssoni
Harmothoé crosetensis
Harmothoé impar, var.
notialis
Harmothoé kerguelensis
Harmothoé (Barrukia)
cristata
Harmothoé (Barrukia)
curviseta
Antinoé setobarba
Antinoé antarctica
Antinoé epitoca
Eupanthalis tubifex
Polyodontes mortensent
Leanira incisa
Eteone sculpta
Eteone rubella
Phyllodoce patagonica
Phyllodoce bowersi
Phyllodoce oculata
Phyllodoce longipes
Austrophyllum charcoti
Genetyllis polyphylla
Eulalia magalhaensis
Eulalia anomalochaeta
Eulalia picta
Pionosyllis comosa
Pionosyllis maxima
Eusyllis kerguelensis
Trypanosyllis gigantea
Trypanosyllis gemmulifera
Autolytus charcoti
Autolytus gibber
Grubea clavata
Syllis prolixa
Syllis brachychaeta
Syllis brachycola
Syllis variegata*
Syllis sclerolaema
Nereis kerguelensis*
Nereis eugeniae*
Nereis typhla
Nereis pelagica
WS ears Greece | es.cseies |
”
Nv
res ll Merced. eedulleeen ones
pra llaudaan | |
CO WwW
ed Onion!
”
nN
w
wre ror ce mee We
Heer tes We |
|
|
) ey tenes eo Greer ais me
| ict eos les ees Ereacs cn
es (ls (Ll | eres
|
|
asa
1 Five specimens off derelict hull.
2 Four specimens from a buoy.
les lee is Ws lal
~ |
Cc)
— I 15
ol
H
anlolilxlals
|
|
flere ile cseallaltalireyt shall
le aad
Eighteen specimens off kelp.
[AEs Reed SS ees Te ane SIAL ESSE Ene]
Sixteen specimens off kelp.
Species
Hauls
Hauls
Hauls
Mud and
sand
Mud and
stones
23
Mud and
rock
Hauls
Speci-
mens
Hauls
Speci-
mens
Speci-
mens
Hauls
Platynereis magalhaensis*
Leptonereis loxechini
Nereis hardyi
Nephthys macrura
Nephthys lyrochaeta
Nephthys serratifolia
Ephesia antarctica
Glycera capitata
Glycera convoluta
Goniada congoensis
Eunice pennata
Eunice murrayi
Nicidion kinbergii
Diopatra cuprea
Epidiopatra hupferiana
Rhamphobrachium ehlersi
Onuphis eremita
Onuphis notialis
Onuphis quadricuspis
Onuphis iridescens*
Leptoecia antarctica
Lumbrinereis magalhaensis*
Lumbrinereis africana
Lumbrinereis heteropoda
Lumbrinereis tetraura
Lumbrinereis antarctica
Augeneria tentaculata
Arabella iricolor
Drilonereis filum
Drilonereis sp.
Aricia marginata
Scoloplos mawsont
Pygospio dubia
Nerine sp.
Prionospio africana
Paraonis gracilis
Chaetopterus variopedatus
Phyllochaetopterus sp.
Cirratulus cirratus
Cirratulus antarcticus
Cirratulus afer
Tharyx epitoca
Tharyx sp.
Stylarioides kerguelarum
Stylarioides swakopianus
Kesun abyssorum
Maldane decorata
Maldane sarsi, var.
antarctica
Rhodine intermedia
Lumbriclymenella robusta
Clymenella minor*
Clymene kerguelensis
Clymene yungi
Asychis amphiglypta
Nicomache sp.
Axiothella antarctica
Idanthyrsus armatus*
Sternaspis scutata®
Sternaspis scutata, var.
africana
Pectinaria sp.
Amage sculpta
Melinna cristata
1 Four specimens off kelp.
ml ll ee leona lel sonieesral
et eee (les hosel) desea
nilewn ll lol lode
meni Pesky Weer celle lize) Weis ce et ee
walywlrwnl lo
lw lo
| oo |
Pell ess
(hes
om aes
cl
~
60 "osm: || gaa
1 Four specimens from derelict hull.
2 'Two specimens,
diatomic ooze.
5 Fifteen specimens, mud and diatomic ooze.
3 'Two specimens off kelp.
* Diatomic ooze.
24°
Species
DISCOVERY REPORTS
TABLE V (contd.)
Stones
Rock
Mud and
sand
Speci-
mens
Hauls Hauls
Speci-
mens
Speci-
Hauls | wens
Mud and
stones
Sand and
stones
Speci-
Hauls a
Speci-
mens
Hauls
Flabelligera affinis*
Flabelligera pennigera
Flabelligera mundata
Brada villosa
Brada mammillata
Pycnoderma congoense
Scalibregma inflatum
Capitella capitata, var.
antarctica*
Notomastus latericeus
Notomastus lineatus
Ammotrypane breviata
Travisia olens
Travisia kerguelensis
Travisia kerguelensis, var.
graviert
Phyllocomus crocea
Neosabellides elongatus
Amphicteis gunnert
Amphicteis gunneri, var.
antarctica
Amphicteis gunneri, var.
japonica
Terebella ehlersi
Loimia medusa
Pista mirabilis
Pista corrientis
Leaena abranchiata, var.
antarctica
Leaena collaris
Neoleprea streptochaeta
Lanicides vayssieri
Amphitrite kerguelensis
Amphitrite edwardsi
Nicolea chilensis
Artacama proboscidea
Thelepus cincinnatus
Thelepus setosus*
Polycirrus kerguelensis
Polycirrus hamiltoni
Polycirrus hesslei
Lysilla loveni, var.
macintoshi
Terebellides minutus
Terebellides longicaudatus
Sabella pavonina
Potamilla antarctica
Dasychone nigromaculata
Euratella puncturata*
Euchone pallida
Jasminiera scottt
Serpula vermicularis
Hydroides norvegica
Vermiliopsis notialis
|. |
[foresees | eRe here eater
le lll lean] |
bestee oe [es |
[alll los. | |
I 2
4
i
1 Two specimens from derelict hull.
+ Five specimens from a buoy.
* Four specimens off kelp.
% Nine specimens off kelp, two off derelict hull.
* Diatomic ooze.
25
SUMMARY
The following analysis shows what percentage of the total number of species occurring
on all bottoms the species confined to any one of the several kinds of bottom constitute ;
and also in how many of the total number of hauls on all bottoms the species so confined
were caught. It should, however, be borne in mind that many of the species occur on
more than one kind of bottom and are, therefore, not included.
Mud | Mud |} Mud | Sand
Mud | Sand | Stones | Rock and and and and
sand | stones | rock | stones
Ratio of hauls appertaining to
species occurring on only one
kind of bottom to total number
of hauls on all bottoms (% 6 33
Ratio of species occurring on only
one kind of bottom to total num-
ber of species occurring on all
kinds of bottom (%)
tol
4
H
N
4
tol
ote
oe
ton
wo
a
Nie
n
\—~
II 34
foal
nn
Lol
ANIMAL ASSOCIATIONS
Examples of the following species were found living in association with other animals :
Trypanosyllis gigantea, Autolytus charcoti, Syllis brachycola and Syllis brachychaeta
inside a colony of Cephalodiscus nigrescens, living in the tubules of the polypides.
Nereis kerguelensis and Polyeunoa laevis in association with an Alcyonarian.
Hermadion magalhaensi and Harmothoé spinosa from a 'Tubularian colony.
Platynereis magalhaensis from the carapace of a Paralomis.
Idanthyrsus armatus found attached to large Molgulidae.
Hermadion magalhaensi from a Chaetopterus tube.
Diri 4
“
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT
Family AMPHINOMIDAE
Genus Hermodice, Kinberg
Hermodice carunculata (Pallas) var. didymobranchiata (Baird).
Fauvel, 1914, pp. 113-116, pl. viii, figs. 22-27, 31-32.
Amphinome didymobranchiata, Baird, 1864, pp. 449-450, pl. xlv, figs. 1-7.
St. 279. 10. viii. 27. Off Cape Lopez, French Congo. From 8-5 miles N 71° E to 15 miles
N 24° E of Cape Lopez Light. 58-67m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud and fine sand. Fifteen
specimens.
St. 283. 14. viii. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. +75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. One young specimen.
Remarks. The largest specimen measures 42 mm. by 6 mm. including the feet, the
smallest, the example from St. 283, only 11 mm. by 2 mm. The great majority have
lost all their colour in spirit, but in two or three specimens there remain thin dark
intersegmental bands on the back. The caruncle reaches back to the 4th chaetiger, and
ventrally the first four chaetigers are involved with the mouth. The two branches of
the gill are widely separated; the harpoon-shaped dorsal chaetae are few in number
and difficult to find.
These specimens correspond closely to those described by Fauvel (/oc. cit.) from
St Thomas Island, Gulf of Guinea. Fauvel regards Baird’s Amphinome didymo-
branchiata from Ascension Island as a variety of the widely distributed Hermodice
carunculata.
The chief differences between Baird’s species and a typical H. carunculata are as
follows: in Baird’s species the gill is more ramified, and the two branches are widely
separated ; the dorsal chaetae are longer, finer and softer than in H. carunculata, and the
harpoon-shaped notopodial chaetae are comparatively few in number. There is nothing
I can add to Fauvel’s careful comparative study of the two forms.
Genus Eurythoé, Kinberg
Eurythoé complanata (Pallas).
Eurythoé alcyonia, Gravier, 1901, pp. 248-254, pl. ix, figs. 140-143; pl. x, figs. 144-146.
St. 1. 16. xi. 25. Clarence Bay, Ascension Island. 7° 55’ 15” S, 14° 25’ 00” W. 16-27 m.
Gear NRM. Bottom: coral sand and shell. Twenty-five specimens.
St. 2. 17.xi. 25. Clarence Bay, Ascension Island, Catherine’s Point and Collyer Point. Shore
collection, on buoy lifted from an inshore position near landing place. ‘Two specimens.
St. 283. 14. viii. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. +75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. One young specimen.
4-2
28 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Remarks. Of these specimens of Pallas’ widely distributed species the largest
measures 30 mm. by 4 mm., and the smallest 11 mm. by 2 mm. including the feet. ‘They
are at once distinguished from Fauvel’s Eurythoé laevisetis from St ‘Thomas Island,
Gulf of Guinea, by the presence of harpoon-shaped chaetae in the dorsal branch of
the foot. E. complanata has already been recorded from Annobon by Augener (1918,
p. 88). Gravier’s account of this species (as E. alcyonia) is probably the most complete.
Eurythoé chilensis, Kinberg.
Kinberg, 1857, pp. 35-36, pl. xii, fig. 9.
St. 4. 30.1. 26. Tristan da Cunha. 36° 55’ 00” S, 12° 12’ 00” W. 40-46m. Gear DL. Bottom:
stones. One specimen.
Imm ‘75mm
NO,
\
Y
O
‘4Amm
ee ~ 4mm
a
‘4mm
O oO
c d
O
O
b €
Fig. 1. Eurythoé chilensis.
a. Anterior end seen from above. 6. Smooth type of dorsal bristle. c. Toothed type
of dorsal bristle. d. Ventral bristle. e. Capillary ventral bristle.
DESCRIPTION. ‘This specimen measures to mm. by 4 mm. including the feet. The
colour in spirit is a pale yellow with white bristles, and the body is somewhat flattened
dorso-ventrally. The prostomium (Fig. 1, a) is semilunar in front with a more or less
AMPHINOMIDAE 29
quadrangular cushion behind. A pair of lateral tentacles is set far forward on this
cushion, and behind them is the anterior pair of red reniform eyes. The posterior pair
of minute round eye-spots is set at the back of the prostomial cushion, in such a
manner that the two pairs of eyes are at the corners of a square. The small median
tentacle is also set far back on the prostomial cushion just in front of the origin of the
caruncle, which is a flexuous crest reaching to the 4th chaetiger. There is a pair of
palps on the sides of the buccal lobe. The first three chaetigers are involved with the
mouth. The gills are small, consisting of four or five digitiform processes; they
begin on the 2nd chaetiger.
The feet are set widely apart, and the bristles are few. There is a dorsal cirrus
articulated at its base and longer than the branchial processes; and a short ventral
cirrus. The dorsal bristles are of four kinds: (1) toothed harpoon-chaetae similar to those
figured by Kinberg (Fig. 9, G, s’), (2) straight, smooth chaetae (Fig. 1, 6) similar in
outline to the harpoon-chaetae, (3) bristles of moderate length with a lateral tooth and
a number of widely spaced serrations going to the tip (Fig. 1, c), (4) a few (two or
three) very long and fine capillary bristles with a lateral spur, finely hispid to the tip,
and similar to that figured by Kinberg (Fig. 9, G, s). In some the lateral spur is more
pronounced than that in Kinberg’s figure.
The ventral chaetae are of two sorts: (1) numerous bristles of moderate length with
a lateral tooth and a number of serrations reaching to the tip (Fig. 1, d), (2) one or two
very fine and long capillary bristles with a lateral tooth and finely serrated to the tip
(Fig. 1, e); these bristles are either absent or lost from a large percentage of the neuro-
podia. There is a lobular pygidium.
Remarks. My specimen agrees closely and in detail with Kinberg’s description and
figures except in the following details. Kinberg’s figure (9, B) of the head shows the
median tentacle and the caruncle set further forward on the prostomial pad than they
are in my example, but this is corrected in his second figure (9, B”) of the head seen
from in front. His two figures do not agree. Moreover, the caruncle reaches back to
the 4th chaetiger in my specimen, and not to the 3rd, as in Kinberg’s figure. He describes
it however as ““‘segmentum quintum attingens.”’ Kinberg appears also to have over-
looked the smooth type of straight dorsal chaeta, but unless the absence of teeth be
noted, these might easily be confused with the harpoon-chaetae, which they closely
resemble in outline.
The posterior end of my specimen is slightly damaged, but, as far as I can see, the
pygidium is a rounded lobe rather than the large plate shown in Kinberg’s figure (9, x).
Horst (1912, p. 36) wrongly attributes a number of specimens from the Malay Archi-
pelago to this species under a misapprehension of the characters of F. chilensis. Kinberg’s
figure 9, G, s” represents the shorter type of dorsal bristle with the lateral tooth and
serrated tip, and Horst writes, “‘'The setae of our worms show a great resemblance to
those of E. chilensis figured by Kinberg on PI. xii, figs. 9, G,u, s”, s’ and s; however,
I suggest that a mistake has crept into this delineation and that s” should be w and also
30 } DISCOVERY REPORTS
represents another kind of ventral bristle, for I never met with a dorsal bristle of this
shape in the Eurythoé-species.”
I am not aware that E. chilensis has been recorded since Kinberg’s original description
of an example from off Valparaiso. The common southern American form 1s FE. paupera,
Grube. It seems probable that EF. chilensis is a southern cold water species carried
north by the cold current, which might account for its occurrence in places as far
apart as Valparaiso and ‘Tristan da Cunha.
Genus Chloeia, Savigny
Chloeia viridis, Schmarda.
Schmarda, 1861, p. 144, pl. xxxv, figs. 295-305; Augener, 1925, p. 20.
Chloeia euglochis, Ehlers, 1887, pp. 18-24, pl. i, figs. 1 and 2; pl. ii, figs. 1-8; pl. it, figs. 1-4.
St. 283. 14. viii. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. +75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. One specimen.
Remarks. The single example of this species measures 32 mm. by 6 mm. excluding
the feet. The segmental T-shaped markings consist of slender rather faded lines in
place of the usual broad stripes. There are 28 chaetigers and the caruncle extends to
the anterior edge of the 6th. :
This specimen is similar to those described by Augener (1918, p. 94) as Chloeia
euglochis, Ehlers from Goree Island, off Senegal. An examination of Schmarda’s type
has convinced Augener (1925, p. 20) that C. ewglochis is synonymous with C. viridis,
and I believe that Chloeia parva, Baird is also indistinguishable.
Genus Notopygos, Grube
Notopygos megalops, McIntosh.
McIntosh, 1885, p. 17, pl. i, fig. 1; pl. ii A, figs. 3 and 4.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 133, fig. 48 7-1.
St. 283. 14. viii. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. +75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. One specimen.
Remarks. A single specimen, measuring 14 mm. by 3 mm. including the feet, and
having 17 chaetigers. It is colourless except for the large black eyes. The caruncle
reaches back to the 5th chaetiger and the branchiae begin on the 7th. The first three
chaetigers are involved with the mouth. The chaetae are much damaged, but as far as
can be seen they agree with McIntosh’s and Fauvel’s figures. The anus opens on the
dorsal surface of the terminal segment between the pygidial styles. The regular seg-
mental folding of the skin to form a sort of pattern on the back, which is apparent in
MclIntosh’s type, is well shown in this specimen. This is the first record of this species
from the African coast; it has previously been found at Bermuda and off the coast of
Spain.
I think it probable that this species will prove to be the young form of Notopygos
crinita, Grube from Ascension Island. As far as our present knowledge goes, the
AMPHINOMIDAE 3
31
differences appear to be as follows: N. megalops is a much smaller form than N. crinita,
measuring only 10-15 mm. in length and having 17-19 chaetigers, whereas N. crinita
is recorded with a length of over 40 mm. and with 28 segments. In N. megalops the
eyes are larger than in N. crinita, the gills are much smaller and begin further back on
the body. Moreover, the anus opens on the last segment and not further forward as
in N. crinita. This position of the anus is characteristic of young examples of Notopygos,
and has no specific differential value, but it strengthens the presumption that in
N. megalops we are dealing with a young form.
Genus Amphinome, Bruguicres
Amphinome vagans (Savigny).
For synonymy see Chamberlin, 1919, p. 27.
29. x. 25. 11° 12’ N, 18° 30’ W. Found on floating cuttle-bone in company with Lepas and
small gastropods. Twenty-five specimens.
‘06 mm
oO
Fig. 2. Amphinome vagans.
a. Larva. 6. Ventral bristles of Larva.
Remarks. Of the 25 specimens more than half are larvae: the largest example
measures 8 mm. by 2 mm. including the feet, and the smaller of the larvae are about
1-25 mm. by -5 mm. including the feet. The more mature of the specimens are typical
except that the straight type of dorsal chaetae with denticulated edges is very scarce,
and the denticulation so fine that it can only be seen under a high power.
This species is usually found on floating logs, etc., in conjunction with Lepas. ‘The
younger larvae (Fig. 2, a) have about ro chaetigers, the gills are not yet developed, and
the caruncle is not clearly differentiated. I cannot distinguish any eyes. There are
five head appendages which are presumably homologous with those of the adult
32 DISCOVERY REPORTS
form. The dorsal and ventral cirri are small and papilliform, except the tentaculiform
dorsal cirrus of the rst chaetiger. I can distinguish no straight denticulated chaetae
in the upper ramus of the foot, and the bristles of the lower ramus (Fig. 2, b) have a
secondary tooth, absent in the adult. There is a large prominent anus on the dorsal
surface of the last segment.
By the time a length of 2 mm. is reached with 12 chaetigers, two and three branched
gills are developed.
Genus Paramphinome, M. Sars
Paramphinome australis, n.sp.
St. 167. 20. 11.27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. 244-344 m.
Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud. One specimen.
DescripTION. Length 46 mm., breadth 4 mm. anteriorly and 2 mm. at the posterior
end, both measurements excluding the feet. Colour in spirit a very pale yellow. The
body is long and vermiform and flattened dorso-ventrally: behind the gill region the
intersegmental constrictions are very marked giving the body a moniliform appearance.
The head is rounded in front and sends a roughly cordiform prolongation backwards
to the posterior border of the 1st chaetiger which at the sides extends forward as far
as the base of the palps. There are no eyes. A pair of small lateral tentacles is situated
on either side of the front of the prostomium and there is a median tentacle at the same
level as the dorsal cirrus of the 1st chaetiger. Below and to the side of the lateral
tentacles is a pair of small tapering palps. The dorsal cirrus of the 1st chaetiger is
twice as long as the head appendages and slightly longer than the ventral cirrus.
There are 13 pairs of gills and they begin on the 4th chaetiger. They are arborescent
and richly branched (Fig. 3, a) and grow out of the back just behind the notopodial
lobe. From the 7th to the 15th chaetiger they almost meet in the mid-dorsal line.
The two fairly prominent lobes of the feet are widely separated (Fig. 3, b) the noto-
podium being actually dorsal and the neuropodium ventro-lateral. Except for the
1st chaetiger the cirri are very small and almost rudimentary; the dorsal cirrus is just
behind the notopodial lobe and the ventral below the neuropodium.
On the 1st chaetiger below the dorsal cirri on either side is a pair of large curved
chitinous hooks. These can be seen under a dissecting microscope, and a wish to
preserve the single type specimen as intact as possible prevents me from removing them
for detailed study.
The bristles of the feet are exceedingly fragile and so much damaged that they render
a satisfactory study of them very difficult. In the dorsal lobe there are two kinds of
bristles: (1) short moderately stout smooth spear-like bristles (Fig. 3, c), and (2) a few
very fine capillary bristles proximally smooth and distally delicately serrated on one
side (Fig. 3, @). In the ventral lobe the bristles are of three kinds: (1) a large number
of extremely delicate capillary chaetae in which the lower part is smooth and the upper
finely denticulated on one side only (Fig. 3, e); (2) near the ventral cirrus are a few
knife-shaped short bristles with a small spur and a row of teeth reaching to the tip
2mm
a)
‘4-mm ‘5mm
‘lmm
‘Imm
0
O
ia
C -OSmm
O 0 Oo
d € ig
Fig. 3. Paramphinome australis.
a. Gill. b. Middle foot. c. Dorsal bristle. d. Dorsal bristle. e. Ventral bristle.
f. Ventral bristle. g. Ventral bristle.
Dil
34 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
(Fig. 3, f); (3) a few short stout acicular chaetae with expanded tips (Fig. 3, g). The
anus opens on the ventral surface of the last segment.
Remarks. I believe this to be the first record of this genus in southern waters.
It differs from Paramphinome pulchella, M. Sars, of which an excellent account is given
by G. O. Sars (Remarkable forms of animal life, vol. 1, pp. 45-49, pl. iv, figs. 19-35),
in many particulars, amongst others in the number of gill-pairs.
According to G. O. Sars the fine capillary ventral chaetae (Fig. 34,¢) in his P.
pulchella have a lateral spur at the base of the serrations. I cannot find this in my
Antarctic specimen, but in some of the bristles the lowest tooth appears to project
more than the rest. It is possible that in the damaged condition of the bristles in my
example the lateral spur may have worn away, or be broken off.
Genus Euphrosyne, Savigny
Euphrosyne capensis, Kinberg.
Kinberg, 1857, p. 37, pl. xii, fig. 14.
McIntosh, 1885, pp. 1-5, pl. ii, fig. 5; pl. 14, figs. 1-3.
24. vii. 26. Salamander Beach, Saldanha Bay, South Africa. Shore collection. Three specimens.
Remarks. The largest example measures 28 mm. by 8 mm. including the feet. The body
is composed of 50~55 chaetigers and the slender caruncle reaches to the 7th chaetiger.
The first four chaetigers are involved with the mouth. There are 10-11 branchial trunks,
much branched and ending in leaf-shaped tips, and the lower dorsal cirrus is situated
between the 2nd and 3rd most dorsal tufts. The chaetae are well figured by McIntosh.
This species is very common around the Cape.
Euphrosyne arctia, Johnson.
Johnson, 1897, p. 159, pl. v, figs. 5-7.
? Huphrosyne armadilloides, Ehlers, 1901, p. 37, pl. 1, figs. 6-8.
St. 27. 15. ui. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3:3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. One specimen.
St. 39. 25. ui. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 8 cables S 81° W of Merton
Rock to 1-3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. 179-235 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: grey mud.
One specimen.
St. 42. 1.iv.26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 6-3 miles N 89° E of Jason
Light to 4 miles N 39° E of Jason Light. 120-204 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 140. 23. xil. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02’ S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29 W. 122-136m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
‘Two specimens.
St. 144. 5.1.27. Off mouth of Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. From 54° 04’ S, 36° 27’ W
to 53° 58’ S, 36° 26’ W. 155-178 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud and sand. One specimen.
St. 149. 10.1. 27. Mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 1:15 miles N 763° W
to 2°62 miles S 11° W of Merton Rock. 200-234 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Two specimens.
St. MS 71. 9g. ili. 26. East Cumberland Bay. 9} cables E x S to 1-2 miles E x S of Sappho
Point. 110-60 m. Gear BTS and NCS-T. Two specimens.
AMPHINOMIDAE 35
The larger specimens measure about 11 mm. by 8 mm. including the feet, and the
smaller about 5 mm. by 3 mm. The number of chaetigers is between 17 and 21. The
body is oval and rather squat, and the colour in spirit is a pale yellow with white bristles.
The median tentacle is short and thick. The posterior eyes are large and the anterior are
lmm
-Smm
Ww
Smm 0
a
‘3mm
-4mm
(0) O
b €
O O
@ d
Fig. 4. Euphrosyne arctia.
a. Gill. 6. ‘“‘Ringent” bristle. c. ‘‘Ringent” bristle. d. Smooth dorsal bristle.
e. Intermediate dorsal bristle.
partly hidden behind the front of the buccal folds: the mouth reaches to the anterior
border of the 5th chaetiger. The caruncle is high, and apparently composed of a single
lobe superficially divided by longitudinal grooves running along both sides; it reaches
to the anterior border of the 6th chaetiger.
The branchiae begin on the 1st chaetiger and are arranged in transverse rows of
five trunks on either side. These trunks (Fig. 4, a) branch four times and end in curious
5-2
36 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
tufts exactly as figured by Johnson (Joc. cit. Fig. 5). The upper of the two dorsal cirri
are on the inside of the rows of gills, and the lower between the 2nd and 3rd most dorsal
trunks. The ventral cirri lie behind the ventral bristle-bundles.
The dorsal bristles are of two and perhaps of three kinds: (1) ringent chaetae (Figs. 4, 5
and 4, c) which vary in the extent to which the long arm is flexed; (2) smooth stout
bifid bristles (Fig. 4, d); (3) a few bristles intermediate in type between the “ ringents”’
and the smooth “‘bifids”’ (Fig. 4, e): in these there are striae in the fork, and the small
arm is relatively shorter than in the ringents. In the majority of examples but not in
all, the long arm of the “‘ringent”’ and the “intermediate” chaetae is delicately serrated
to just below the tip. These serrations vary widely in their distinctness in the different
specimens, and in a few they cannot be seen. This may be a function of the state of
preservation of the bristles.
The ventral chaetae are simple bifids of two sizes exactly as figured by Johnson.
The anus is large and ventrally placed.
Remarks. These Antarctic specimens agree in detail with Johnson’s description of an
example from too fathoms depth in Monterey Bay, California, except that Johnson
figures no serrations on the long arm of the ringent chaetae ; these may have been absent,
as they are in several of the Antarctic specimens. Moreover, he makes no mention of
the “‘intermediate”’ type of chaetae: they are not clearly separable from the “ringents,”
and might easily be overlooked.
I am unable to decide whether this species, to which I believe the Antarctic specimens
to belong in spite of the wide differences in locality and habitat between them and
Johnson’s type, is the same as FE. armadilloides, Ehlers, which has a wide Antarctic
distribution. Ehlers is of the opinion that his species is close to both E. arctia, Johnson
and EF. armadillo, M. Sars. Now Ehlers’ EF. armadilloides has broad foliaceous tips to
its branchiae and a secondary tooth to the long arm of the bifid chaetae: I cannot quite
reconcile the curious tufted gill-ends described by Johnson with those of FE. arma-
dilloides. M. Sars describes EF. armadillo as having branchiae “apicibus ramulorum
conico-acuminatis.”’ This conveys a different type of branchia from that figured by
Ehlers for E. armadilloides, and the E. armadillo, M. Sars of McIntosh (1900, Pl. xxv,
fig. 2) and of Fauvel (1923, fig. 49, O) has long finger-shaped branchial extremities.
As far as the branchiae go, E. armadilloides is nearer to E. foliosa than to E. armadillo.
Moore (1908, p. 340) hesitatingly attributes a specimen from Behm Canal, Alaska,
to Johnson’s species.
Family APHRODITIDAE
Genus Aphrodite, Linnaeus
Aphrodite alta, Kinberg.
Kinberg, 1857, Pas plain ieee"
St. 181. 12. iii. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00” S, 63° o1’ 00” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
2mm
‘2mm
lmm
O oO
a b ‘Smm
4mm
‘4mm.
(0)
2mm ‘
h
e g 1
Fig. 5. Aphrodite alta.
a. Stout dorsal bristle. 6. Upper bristle of second foot. c. Lower bristle of second foot. d. Ventral
bristles of middle foot. e. Upper bristle of posterior foot. f—7. Posterior ventral bristles.
38 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
DeEscrIPTION. Body oval, with flat papillated sole. The measurements are 25 mm. by
12 mm. including the feet. There are about 35 chaetigers. The back is a plaster of fine
mud entangled with the felting, which is not penetrated by the dorsal bristles. On
probing the felting these are seen as an occasional gleam of chestnut brown.
The prostomium is globular with a very short stout median tentacle, on either side
of which is an ocular prominence without a trace of eyes. Below the tentacle there
is a laterally compressed facial tubercle. The palps are stout, tapering and rather short,
reaching to the 6th chaetiger (5th foot) when laid along the venter. The tentacular cirri
are lost.
The dorsal bristles corresponding to the large bronzed bristles of the majority of
species are very long, of a chestnut brown and end in a hook. They are nearly all
broken off and lie loose, entangled in the felting. This may account for the fact that
they do not project through the felting.
The ventral bristles of the first two chaetigers are of three types: (1) the upper are
stout bronze-coloured bristles with slightly curved ends (Fig. 5, b); (2) a few middle
bipinnate bristles ; (3) the lower are similar to the middle bristles but more slender and
spirally twisted (Fig. 5, c).
The ventral bristles of the middle feet of the body are of the usual three sizes, and
all have slightly curved, heavily bearded ends (Fig. 5, d). The ventral bristles of the
posterior feet change in the usual manner for the genus. The last half-dozen feet are
so crowded together that I cannot count with certainty, but at about the 6th from the
end the upper bristles (Fig. 5, e) are bearded much further down the shaft than in the
middle body, and the middle and lower bristles are strongly denticulated. Further back
there are a number of long, fine bristles with alternating teeth. In the last three or four
feet of the body the ventral bristles are broken off. I have figured several types of
posterior ventral bristle (Fig. 5, f-7).
In the middle feet the ventral cirri reach to the end of the foot, in the posterior feet
they are longer.
Remarks. I have doubtfully assigned this example to Kinberg’s species from off
Rio Janeiro, on the ground that the dorsal felting conceals the dorsal bristles. The
specimen is an Aphroditella or young Aphrodite and it is indistinguishable, as far as
Horst’s brief description goes (Horst, 1917, p. 49), from his Aphroditella limosa from
a depth of 835 m. off the Malay Archipelago, except in the shape of the median tentacle.
It is also very similar to Aphrodite obtecta, Ehlers from the coast of Florida and to the
A. talpa, Quatrefages of Fauvel (Fauvel, 1925, pp. 140-144). It is distinguished from
the A. echidna, Quatrefages of McIntosh from the Magellan region by the fact that in
A. echidna the dorsal bristles project through the felting.
This is the first record of an Aphrodite from Antarctic waters.
APHRODITIDAE 39
Genus Laetmonice, Kinberg
Laetmonice producta, Grube.
Grube, 1877, p. 512.
Gravier, 1911, p. 80.
St. 42. 1. iv. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 6-3 miles N 89° E of
Jason Light to 4 miles N 39° E of Jason Light. 120-204 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Five
specimens.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Eight specimens.
St. 123. 15. xu. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 4:1 miles N 54° E
of Larsen Point to 1-2 miles S 62° W of Merton Rock. 230-250m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey
mud. One specimen.
St.144. 5.1.27. Off mouth of Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. From 54° 04’ S, 36° 27’ W
to 53° 58’ S, 36° 26’ W. 155-178 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud and sand. Two specimens.
St. 148. 9.1.27. Off Cape Saunders, South Georgia. From 54° 03’ S, 36° 39’ W to 54° 05’ S,
36° 36’ 30” W. 132-148 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud and stones. Four specimens.
St. 149. 10.1. 27. Mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 1-15 miles N 761° W
to 2-62 miles S 11° W of Merton Rock. 200-234 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Six specimens.
St. 152. 17. 1. 27. 53° 51’ 30” S, 36° 18’ 30” W. 245m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One
specimen.
St. 160. 7. 11. 27. Near Shag Rocks. 53° 43’ 40” S, 40° 57’ 00” W. 177m. Gear DLH. Bottom:
grey mud, stones and rock. ‘I‘wo specimens.
St. 170. 23. 1. 27. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island. 61° 25’ 30”S, 53° 46’ 00” W. 342m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. ‘l'wenty-five specimens.
St. 175. 2. ill. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 20"S, 59° 48’ 15” W. 200m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, stones and gravel. ‘Twenty specimens.
St. 180. 11. iii. 27. 1-7 miles W of N point of Gand Island, Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archi-
pelago. 160 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. ‘Two young specimens.
St. 181. 12. ill. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00” S, 63° o1’ 00” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Thirty-two specimens.
St. 182. 14. ui. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 21’ 00”S, 62° 58’ oo” W.
278-500 m. Gear N 7-T. Bottom: mud. ‘Ten specimens.
St. 186. 16. il1.27. Fournier Bay, Anvers Island, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 25’ 30” S, 63° 02’ 00” W.
295m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud. ‘Iwo specimens.
St. 187. 18. ii. 27. Neumayr Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 48’ 30”S, 63° 31’ 30” W.
259m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud. Five specimens.
St. WS 33. 21. xii. 26. 54° 59’ 00" S, 35° 24” 00” W. 130m. Gear N 100-H. Bottom: grey
mud and stones. One specimen.
Remarks. The variation in size ranges from young specimens with 30 chaetigers
measuring about 10 mm. by 4 mm. excluding the feet, to huge forms with about 50
chaetigers and measuring 18 cm. by 3} cm. Gravier records five specimens from King
George Island, South Shetlands, and Ehlers an example from Kaiser William II Land.
40 < DISCOVERY REPORTS
In addition to a number of small organisms entangled with the bristles, as described
by McIntosh (1885, p. 43) for his Kerguelen specimens, a sponge Homawinella supra-
tumescens, Topsent (I am indebted to my colleague, Mr M. Burton, for the name) is
attached to the back of a specimen from St. 45. It is fixed to two adjacent notopodia
and to the external edge of an elytron.
Family POLYNOIDAE
Genus Hermadion, Kinberg
Hermadion ferox, Baird.
Baird, 1865, p. 197.
Hermadion rouchi, Gravier, 1911, pp. 82-86, pl. iii, figs. 33-34; pl. iv, figs. 45-51; pl. vii, fig. 74.
Georgia. From 8 cables S 81° W of Merton Rock
to 1:3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. 179-235 m.
Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
St. 42. 1. iv. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay,
South Georgia. From 6-3 miles N 89° E of Jason
Light to 4 miles N 39° E of Jason Light. 120-204 m.
Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Two specimens.
St. 39. 25. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South
16cm \ (
St. 149. 10. i. 27. Mouth of East Cumberland
Bay, South Georgia. From 1-15 miles N 763° W to
2°62 miles S 11° W of Merton Rock. 200-234 m.
Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. ‘Iwo specimens.
Remarks. I have examined Baird’s type
specimen and it agrees exactly with Gravier’s AB
admirable description and figures of Hermadion
rouchi.
From St. 42 there is a gigantic example
(Fig. 6) with 60 chaetigers which measures
16 cm. by 6 cm. including the bristles.
Benham (1921, pp. 46-50) makes a lengthy
comparative study of this species and is at
pains to show that it is distinct from Lagisca
crosetensis. I have examined MclIntosh’s type
and I endorse Benham’s conclusions. ‘There Lg
is a tendency for H. ferox to grade into
H.magathaenst. 'The chief differences between
the two are the presence in H. ferox of the
palisade of long dorsal bristles and of giant spines on the elytra. There is a considerable
variation in the extent to which the dorsal bristles arch over the back, and in the smaller
specimen from St. 42 the giant spines are confined to the posterior border of the
elytra, and in the hinder segments are absent altogether. It is not impossible that
H. ferox be the sexual stage of H. magalhaensi.
G\
Fig. 6. Hermadion ferox. Dorsal view
of entire specimen.
POLYNOIDAE 41
Hermadion magalhaensi, Kinberg.
Kinberg, 1857, p. 22, pl. vi, fig. 22.
Fauvel, 1916, pp. 423-426, pl. viii, figs. 10-11. With synonymy.
Harmothoé magalhaensi, Bergstrém, 1916, p. 276.
St. 27. 15. ili. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3-3 miles 5 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. One specimen.
St. 51. 4. v.26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: fine sand. ‘Ten specimens.
St. 52. 5. v.26. Port William, East Falkland Island. 7-4 cables N 17° E of Navy Point. 17m.
Gear LH. Three specimens.
St. 53. 12. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. Hulk of ‘‘Great Britain.” 0-2 m. Gear
RM. Sixty-three specimens.
St. 57. 16. v. 26. Port William, East Falkland Island. 54 cables S 20° W of Sparrow Point.
15m. Gear BTS. ‘Two specimens.
St. 58. 19. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 1-2 m. Gear RM. ‘Two specimens.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02'S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
One specimen.
St. WS 73. 6. iii. 27. 51° o1’ 00”S, 58° 54’ 00” W. From 51° 02’ 00”, 58° 55’ 00” W to
51° 00’ 00” S, 58° 53’ 00” W. 121-130 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. Four specimens;
one specimen from a ‘Tubularian colony.
Sti WS 80. 14. ili. 27. 50° 57’ 00” S, 63° 37’ 30” W. From 50° 58’ oo” S, 63° 39’ co” W to
50° 55’ 30” S, 63° 36’ 00” W. 152-156 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. Nine specimens.
— St. WS 81. 19. iii. 27. 8 miles N 11° W of North Island, West Falkland Island. From
51° 30’ 00” S, 61° 15’ 00” W to 51° 30’ 30” S, 61° 10’ 00” W. 81-82 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand.
One specimen taken from a Chaetopterus tube.
St. WS 84. 24. iii. 27. 74 miles S 9° W of Sea Lion Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 33’ 00” S, 59° 08’ 00” W to 52° 34’ 30"S, 59° 11’ 00” W. 75-74m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
coarse sand, shell and stones. Thirty-eight specimens.
St. WS 85. 25. iii.27. 8 miles S 66° E of Lively Island, East Falkland Island. From 52°09’00"S,
58° 14’ 00” W to 52° 08’ 00” S, 58° 09’ 00” W. 79m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand and shell. Nine
specimens.
St. WS 93. 9. iv. 27. 7 miles S 80° W of Beaver Island, West Falkland Island. From
51° 51’ 00” S, 61° 30’ 00” W to 51° 54’ 00"S, 61° 30’ 00" W. 133-130 m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
grey sand. One specimen.
St. MS 71. 9. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 9} cables E x S to 1-2 miles
E x S of Sappho Point. 110-60 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
Remarks. The brown colour markings on the elytra vary greatly in intensity and are
sometimes absent. The elytra are thickly covered with small tubercles. The dorsal
chaetae are dark brown, stout, upturned and lightly pectinated: the ventral are uni-
dentate and with well-developed scales. The last 12 to 14 chaetigers are left uncovered
by the elytra.
From St. 140 is one specimen in which the dorsal bristles are to some extent arched
over the back, as in H. ferox, Baird (H. rouchi, Gravier). This may be a sexual condition.
piri o
42 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Genus Podarmus, Chamberlin
Podarmus atlanticus, n.sp.
St. 282. 12. vill. 27. I° 11’ 00’ S, 5° 38’ 00" E. 300(-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
‘3mm
2mm
‘lnm
lmm
Fig. 7. Podarmus atlanticus.
a. Head. 6. Middle foot. c. Upper and middle bristle. d. Lower bristle.
DescripTION. The specimen measures 13 mm. by 2 mm. without the feet, and has
about 45 chaetigers and 18 pairs of elytrophores. There is no colour.
The head (Fig. 7, a) is broader than long, somewhat rounded in shape, and with two
pairs of small eyes set rather far back and to the side. The insertion of the lateral ten-
tacles appears to be subterminal as in Halosydna, but of this I am not sure. The median
tentacle is about of the same length as the long and rather slender palps, and it is
longer than the lateral tentacles. he tentacular cirri are rather longer than the tentacles
and there is a long ventral cirrus on the first foot. The elytrophore of the first foot is a
cylindrical structure about half the length of the foot; the remaining elytrophores are
conspicuous but not unusually prominent.
POLYNOIDAE 43
The dorsal cirri reach to the tips of the bristles and the ventral are shorter than the
feet. The parapodia (Fig. 7,5) are biramous, the dorsal branch consisting of a small
lobe containing a sheathed aciculum!, but no bristles. The neuropodium has two rather
prominent, bluntly conical lips of about the same length, between which the bristles are
arranged in a vertical series.
The upper and middle bristles (Fig. 7, c) are long, fine-scaled capillaries ending in a
delicate, whip-like tip. Below these are about a dozen much shorter bristles (Fig. 7, d),
expanded towards the apex, toothed above the expansion and ending in a bidentate tip.
The cylindrical clavate process, which adjoins the ventral cirrus, appears to be absent
from the first four or five feet. It is an enlarged genito-nephridial papilla.
Remarks. This pelagic species is close to the Podarmus ploa of Chamberlin from
Easter Island, but is distinguished by the bidentate character of its lower ventral
bristles.
Genus Sheila, gen. nov.
Dracnosis. The lateral tentacles are inserted terminally as in Lepidonotus. There
are 13 pairs of elytra inserted on segments 2, 4, 5, 7,9, etc. The feet are biramous, but
the dorsal ramus is reduced. The notopodial chaetae are delicate toothed capillaries,
slightly finer than the neuropodials. These consist of long toothed capillaries, a few
shorter and stouter toothed bristles ending in a blunt hook, and in the middle of the
neuropodium a single giant bidentate hook. The genotype is bathypelagic.
Sheila bathypelagica, n.sp.
St. 256. 23. vl. 27. 35° 14’ 00” S, 6° 49’ 00” E. 850-1100 m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
DESCRIPTION. ‘The specimen measures 9 mm. by 2 mm. without the feet: there are
about 29 chaetigers and 13 pairs of elytrophores. In spirit the back is pale grey with
rather faint transverse segmental bands of a darker colour interrupted in the middle
line. ‘The undersurface and the feet are a deep black; the tentacles and cirri are also
black except at their tips, but the palps are a pale grey.
The head (Fig. 8, a) is longer than broad and bulged at the sides. ‘The whole of the
lateral surfaces are occupied by two pairs of large contiguous eyes with white centres
and dark brown edges. The three tentacles leave the head at the same level, are all of
the same length, about two-thirds that of the prostomium, and end ina flagelliform tip.
Below the lateral tentacles is a pair of palps, each ending in a small mamilla; they are of
about the same length as the tentacles but twice as thick. Set close to the side of the
palps is a pair of tentacular cirri about twice the length of the other appendages. Palps,
tentacles and cirri are smooth. All the elytra are lost.
The dorsal cirri are long, reaching almost to the tips of the bristles, and the ventral
cirri are very short.
1 There is no etymological warrant for the form aciculum with plural in a: the Latin acicula is a
feminine noun with plural in ae. The incorrect variant is, however, so firmly established as part of the
English terminology of the Polychaeta that I prefer to retain it.
44 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
The feet (Fig. 8, ) are biramous, but the dorsal branch is reduced. On the top of
the foot a sheathed aciculum makes a small projection, and with it is a bundle of about
a dozen long, fine, toothed, capillary bristles.
ia
‘5mm gets
2mm =
———
Lo b
‘6mm
‘4-m.
Fig. 8. Sheila bathypelagica.
a. Head. 6. Foot. c. Short neuropodial bristle. d. Giant bristle. e. Ventral capillary bristle.
The ventral branch consists of two large bluntly conical lips from between which the
bristles come out. The uppermost ventral bristles are similar to the dorsal but rather
stouter; a little lower there are three or four much stouter and shorter toothed bristles,
POLYNOIDAE 45
(Fig. 8, c) ending in a sort of blunt hook; below these again and in the centre of the
foot is a single, gigantic, toothed, bidentate hook (Fig. 8, d). The lower ventral (Fig. 8, e)
bristles are toothed capillaries similar to the upper, and there is a tendency for these
to be stouter the nearer they are to the central giant hook. All the capillary chaetae
are glassy and transparent, but the giant hook is bright yellow.
The pygidium is slightly damaged, so I cannot tell whether there were any styles or
appendages.
Remarks. I found myself unable to include this specimen within any known genus.
Of the known pelagic genera, M'renna, Quetieria, Drieschia, Plotolepis and Podarmus are
all without dorsal bristles; Harmopsides has a subtentacular cirrus and no notopodial
chaetae, and many other distinctive characters ; Nectochaeta has a different shaped head,
feet and bristles, and Macellicephala has no lateral tentacles. he present specimen is
probably the young pelagic stage of another species.
Genus Lagisca, Malmgren
Lagisca hubrechti (McIntosh).
Fauvel, 1923, p. 78, fig. 29 a—-k.
St. 100. 3-4. x. 26. 33° 20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00”S, 15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ 00” E. 2500-2000 m.
Gear TYF. One specimen. ;
St. 169. 22. ii. 27. 60° 48’ 50” S, 51° 00’ 20” W. 1000-1100 m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
te}
St. 267. 23. vil. 27. 24° 31’ 00" S, 12° 15’ 30” E. 450-550 (-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
Remarks. The three examples of this bathypelagic species correspond in detail to
Fauvel’s description. It is characterised by the transparent dorsal bristles, the long
unidentate ventral bristles with their rows of scales and the large caudal appendage.
It is remarkable to find it as far south as off the South Shetlands.
Genus Malmgrenia, McIntosh
? Malmgrenia micropoides, Augener.
Augener, 1918, pp. 146-148, pl. ii, fig. 21; pl. iii, fig. 43, text-fig. 8.
St. 283. 14. vill. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. +75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. One specimen.
Remarks. This example is a macerated fragment without head or elytra. The feet
and bristles seem to correspond to Augener’s description and figures. ‘The dorsal ramus
is set far back, so that the tips of the bristles barely reach to the end of the ventral
chaeta sac. Both rami are more or less pointed, and the lip of the ventral ramus is
produced into a cirriform process (Fig. 9, @).
The dorsal bristles (Fig. 9, 5) are less numerous and very much finer than the ventral.
They resemble Augener’s figure.
46 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
The ventral bristles (Fig. 9, c) are relatively broader than those figured by Augener,
and the gap between the two terminal teeth less wide. Moreover, the uppermost ventral
bristles are unidentate and the rest bidentate, a condition apparently exactly the reverse
of that described by Augener, who records that the lowest ventral bristles sometimes
lacked the second tooth.
It is not possible to attribute this fragment to a species with any certainty.
‘5mm
‘-5>mm
2mm
Fig. 9. ? Malmgrenia micropoides.
a. Foot. 6. Dorsal bristle. c. Ventral bristle.
Genus Nectochaeta, Marenzeller
Nectochaeta caroli, Fauvel.
Fauvel, 1916, p. 39, pl. i, figs. 24-27; pl. ii, figs. 16-18; and 1923, p. 91, fig. 35 af.
St. 273. 31. vii. 27. 9° 38’ 00” S, 12° 42’ 30” E. 200-230 (-o) m. Gear TYF. Three specimens.
St.276. 5. viii. 27. 5° 54/00” S, 11° 19’ 00” E. 110(-0)m. Gear N 100 B. Twenty-nine specimens.
Remarks. These specimens correspond so closely to Fauvel’s description that there
is very little I can add. The larger specimens have about 40 chaetigers and 16 pairs of
elytrophores: they measure about 37mm. by 2mm. without the feet and 6 mm.
including the feet. All the elytra are lost. In most of the specimens the huge cirro-
phores are larger anteriorly than behind. Up to about the 16th chaetiger they are
longer than the feet; further back they are of about the same length. Up to the 11th
to 13th feet the cirrophores are transparent; over the rest of the body they are filled
with a pale brown, or grey, granular inclusion. On staining this shows itself to be
glandular tissue with a granular secretion. The elytra are all lost. The notopodial
aciculum is clearly visible in all the feet.
POLYNOIDAE 47
Genus Macellicephala, McIntosh
Macellicephala sp.
St. 144. 5.1.27. Off mouth of Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. From 54° 04’ S, 36° 27’ W.
to 53° 58’ S, 36° 26’ W. 155-178 m. Gear NCS-T. Bottom: green mud and sand. One specimen.
DEscrIPTION. This much damaged specimen measures 21 mm. by 5mm. 75mm
without the feet. ‘The back is irregularly splashed with purplish brown.
The prostomium is deeply incised in front but not so deeply as in
M. mirabilis. 'There is no trace of eyes, and all the appendages are lost
except a fairly short palp with an abrupt blunt end and a single tapering
dorsal tentacular cirrus, as long as the prostomium is broad. The ventral
cirrus of the first foot reaches to the end of the chaeta sac.
There are 17 feet and g pairs of elytrophores. The feet (Fig. 10, a) are
biramous; the dorsal branch is reduced to a single long sheathed aciculum
with, in the middle and posterior segments, one or two bristles lying in
the tissue beside it. In a preparation of a posterior foot the end of one
of these bristles projects clear of the tissue.
lmm
a b
Fig. 10. Macellicephala sp.
a. Foot. 6. Ventral bristle.
The ventral branch is slightly longer, shaped like a very narrow cone and ends in
a long sheathed aciculum: it contains a bundle of transparent bristles (Fig. 10, d) lightly
serrated on one side only. The ventral cirri are small, not reaching to the end of the foot.
Remarks. Macellicephala is a pelagic genus. Unfortunately this example is so much
damaged that its specific attribution is impracticable. It differs from M. mirabilis,
MelIntosh, from New Zealand, in the shape of the prostomium, and in the absence of
eyes and of a dorsal bristle bundle. The shape of the feet is similar to that of Fauvel’s
M. incerta and M. affinis, but it differs from these in the character of its bristles.
48 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Genus Euphione, McIntosh
Euphione elisabethae, McIntosh.
McIntosh, 1885, pp. 62-64, pl. ix, fig. 3; pl. xvii, fig. 7; pl. xviii, fig. 10; pl. viii a, figs. 3-6.
St. M. Cape Trawler. 9. vii. 27. 33° 42’ 00" S, 17° 29’ 00” E. 310-402m. Gear OTC. Found
on coral. Three specimens.
Remarks. These examples measure about 40 mm. by 17 mm. In one of them the
very large type of rotate tubercle on the elytra is absent.
Genus Scalisetosus, McIntosh
Scalisetosus pellucidus (Ehlers).
Fauvel, 1923, p. 74, fig. 27 a-f.
Scalisetosus communis, Ehlers, 1913, p- 447.
St. 90. 10. vii. 26. Simon’s Town, False Bay, South Africa. Basin of H.M. Dockyard. o-2 m.
Gear NH. Two specimens.
St. MS 82. 6. ix. 26. Off Salamander Point, Saldanha Bay, South Africa. 7-14 m. Gear BTS.
One specimen.
Remarks. Three small specimens. Ehlers records the presence of this species at
Simon’s ‘Town.
Genus Lepidonotus, Leach
Lepidonotus semitectus, Stimpson,
Ehlers, 1913, p. 447.
St. go. 10. vii. 26. Simon’s Town, False Bay, South Africa. Basin of H.M. Dockyard. 0-2 m.
Gear NH. Five specimens.
Remarks. All the specimens are small, measuring between 10 and 15 mm. in length.
The first pair of scales and the anterior half of the second are much lighter in colour
than the rest, which are either mottled with dark grey or, as in three of the examples,
of a uniform deep orange colour.
The German South Polar Expedition collected specimens of this species at Simon’s
Town.
Genus Eulagisca, McIntosh
Eulagisca corrientis, McIntosh.
McIntosh, 1885, pp. 91-93, pl. xiii, fig. 4; pl. vii A, figs. 3, 4.
St. 170. 23. ii. 27. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island. 61° 25’ 30” S, 53° 46’ 00” W. 342 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One fragmentary specimen.
St. 181. 12. iii. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00”S, 63° o1’ 00” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Two fragmentary specimens.
St. 190. 24. iii.27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 93-126 m.
Gear DLH and NRL. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. One complete specimen.
POLYNOIDAE 49
DEscRIPTION. The single complete example measures 60 mm. by 27 mm. including
the feet. Body colour in spirit is a pale yellow and the back is strongly but irregularly
splashed with purple: the tentacles and the tentacular and dorsal cirri are spotted with
purple and there is a purple band round the top of the elytrophores and dorsal cirro-
phores.
2mm Geiger 2mm
5mm
0
o @)
b (6 d e
Fig. 11. Eulagisca corrientis.
a. Head. 6. Foot. c. Dorsal bristle. d. Ventral bristle in profile. e. Ventral bristle.
The prostomium (Fig. 11, @) is subrectangular, and there are two pairs of large eyes
both set rather far back and to the sides. The head is of the lepidonotid type and the
lateral tentacles are terminally inserted. The medium tentacle is lost and the laterals
are nearly twice as long as the prostomium. The palps are as long as the head and the
first seven chaetigers, and the tentacular cirri are about two-thirds of their length.
All the appendages except the palps, which are thickly covered with small papillae,
are very hirsute. Below the median tentaculophore is a small digitiform process (sub-
tentacular cirrus), which is probably a facial tubercle. From just above the junction
of the tentaculophores of the tentacular cirri on both sides is a bundle of about half
a dozen stout bristles pointing directly forwards.
i 7
piri
50 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
There are 15 pairs of prominent elytrophores and the elytra are all lost. The pseudo-
elytrophores are scarcely less prominent than the elytrophores. The dorsal cirrophores
are set low down on the foot and are very large structures with a prominent lateral
bulge or expansion. The dorsal cirri are very long, the tips of the bristles only reaching
to about half their length.
The feet (Fig. 11, 6) are biramous and the bristles very numerous. Both dorsal and
ventral lobes have long pointed prolongations containing the acicula. The dorsal
aciculum reaches to about half the length of the dorsal bristles; the ventral is a little
longer. The dorsal bristles (Fig. 11, e) are stouter than the ventral, strongly pectinate
on one edge and smooth at their tips. The ventral (Fig. 11, d and e) are unidentate with
well-developed rows of teeth. The ventral cirri are short, barely reaching to the end
of the chaeta sac.
Remarks. I have examined McIntosh’s type specimens, and I believe the present
Antarctic examples to be conspecific with them. McIntosh does not record the arrange-
ment of the elytra; they occur on the following feet: 1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20,
22, 25, 28, 31. This species is now known from the South Shetlands, from the vicinity
of Kerguelen Island and from 600 fathoms off Buenos Ayres.
Genus Eunoé, Malmgren
Eunoé opalina, McIntosh.
McIntosh, 1885, pp. 71-72, pl. x, fig. 5; pl. xix, fig. 2;
pl. viii A, figs. g—11.
St. 187. 18. ii. 27. Neumayr Channel, Palmer Archipelago.
64° 48’ 30"S, 63° 3130” W. 259m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud.
One specimen.
lmm
DescriPTION. This example has 20 chaetigers followed
by a regenerating hinder end of 12 chaetigers. The
measurement is 24 mm. by 10 mm. including the feet,
and the colour in spirit is a pale yellow.
McIntosh has a good figure of the head. The eyes
are lateral and the two pairs are set close together.
The front pair is about half-way up the prostomium
and the hinder pair is a little more lateral than as
shown in MclIntosh’s figure. The lateral tentaculo-
phores are larger and more prominent than as drawn
by McIntosh, and the lateral tentacles are slightly
longer than the prostomium. The palps are long and
tapering and the ventral cirrus of the first foot is
prolonged into a sort of accessory tentacular cirrus. a b
Nearly all the elytra are lost and the few that remain Fig. 12. Eunoé opalina.
are damaged. They are thin semi-transparent structures a. Dorsal bristle. 6. Ventral bristle.
O
POLYNOIDAE 51
of a milky colour, smooth except for a large patch of small tubercles near the scar
of attachment. In a fragment of an anterior scale part of the edge had a few minute
papillae projecting over it.
The feet are biramous and the dorsal cirri reach to the tips of the ventral bristles.
The bristles are few in number: the dorsal (Fig. 12, a) are pointed and with smooth
tips; the shaft is so lightly pectinated as to appear almost smooth. 'The ventral bristles
(Fig. 12,5) are longer than the dorsal and almost of the same thickness. They are
expanded towards the tip, which is smooth and slightly curved: the expanded part is
traversed by very delicate pectinae which are often visible in profile on both sides of
the blade, and not on one only as in McIntosh’s figure (PI. viii a, fig. 11). The ventral
cirri reach about one-half the way down the ventral bristles.
Remarks. I have examined MclIntosh’s type obtained at a depth of 245 fathoms in
the Straits of Magellan, and I believe this Antarctic specimen to be conspecific with it.
Genus Eucrantha, Malmgren
Eucrantha mollis (McIntosh).
Eupolynoé mollis, McIntosh, 1879, p. 259, pl. xv, figs. 5-9.
Eucrantha mollis, Bergstrém, 1916, p. 294.
St. 159. 21. i. 27. 53° 52° 30” S, 36° 08’ 00” W. 160m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One
specimen.
St. 170. 23. ii. 27. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island. 61° 25’ 30”S, 53° 46’ 00” W. 342 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Two specimens.
St. 181. 12. iii. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00”S, 63° or’ 00” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Four specimens.
St. WS 97. 18. iv. 27. 49° 00’ 30” S, 61° 58’ 00” W. From 49° 00’ 00” S, 62° 00’ 00” W to
49° o1’ 00" S, 61° 56’ 00” W. 146-145 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, gravel, stones. One specimen.
Remarks. Both McIntosh and Bergstrém give good accounts of this species, which
is easily distinguishable by the long slender upper and lower ventral bristles with their
minutely bifid tips. Bergstrém’s figure (Text-fig. 2, setae furcatae 'Typus F) of the
upper ventral bristles is a little misleading, because the rows of scales are not continued
to the apex, and the curve is more pronounced than that of any I have seen either in
these specimens or in McIntosh’s type.
Genus Polyeunoa, McIntosh
Polyeunoa laevis, McIntosh.
McIntosh, 1885, pl. xii, fig. 2; pl. xx, fig. 8; pl. vii A, figs. 12-13.
Enipo rhombigera, Ehlers, 1908, pp. 47-49, Pl. iv, figs. 1-12.
Polyeunoa laevis, Bergstrém, 1916, pp. 288-291, pl. iii, fig. 7.
St. 39. 25. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 8 cables S 81° W of Merton
Rock to 1-3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. 179-235 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud.
Twelve specimens.
7-2
52 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 42. 1. iv. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 6-3 miles N 89° E of
Jason Light to 4 miles N 39° E of Jason Light. 120-204 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One
specimen.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02'S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
Thirty-one specimens.
St. 144. 5.1.27. Off mouth of Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. From 54° 04’ S, 36° 27’ W
to 53° 58’ S, 36° 26’ W. 155-178 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud and sand. One specimen.
St. 148. 9. i. 27. Off Cape Saunders, South Georgia. From 54° 03’ S, 36° 39’ W to 54° 05'S,
36° 36’ 30” W. 132-148 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud and stones. One specimen.
St. 149. 10.i1.27. Mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 1-15 miles N 76$° W
to 2-62 miles S 11° W of Merton Rock. 200-234.m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
Dt, 1520 07..1..27., 63. 51 307 S,.46: 18 30°W. 245m. (Gear DLA. Bottom: rock. One
specimen.
St. 159. 21. 1. 27. 53° 52’ 30”S, 36° 08’ 00” W. 160m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One
specimen.
St. 160. 7.11.27. Near Shag Rocks. 53° 43’ 40" S, 40° 57’ 00” W. 177m. Gear DLH. Bottom:
grey mud, stones, rock. Eleven specimens.
St. 170. 23. il. 27. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island. 61° 25’ 30” S, 53° 46’ 00” W. 342 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Two specimens.
St. 181. 12. iii. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00”5, 63° o1’ 00” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 182. 14. ili. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 21’ 00”S, 62° 58’ 00” W.
278-500 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Eleven specimens. (Collector’s note: “One specimen with
deep metallic blue colouring and one banded with brown. Both living along stems of large yellow
Alcyonarians.’’)
St. 187. 18. ili. 27. Neumayr Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 48’ 30S, 63° 31’ 30” W.
259m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud. Five specimens.
St. 190. 24. iil. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 126-
315m. Gear NRL and DLH. Bottom: mud, stones and rock. Seven specimens.
St. WS 81. 19. iii. 27. 8 miles N 11° W of North Island, West Falkland Island. From
51° 30’ 00" S, 61° 15’ 00” W to 51° 30’ 30” S, 61° 10’ 00” W. 81-82 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand.
One specimen.
Dt. Wis) 82. 21. ii. 27. 54°06" 00" 'S},57- 46. We, Fromesay 05" 00” S, 57° 45° 00” W to
54 07’ 00" S, 57° 47’ 30” W. 140-144 m. Gear OTC. Fourteen specimens.
St. WS 83. 24. ill. 27. 314 miles S 64° W of George Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 28’ 00” S, 60° 06’ 00” W to 52° 30’ 00" S, 60° 09’ 30” W. 137-129 m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
fine green sand and shell. ‘Twenty-seven specimens.
St. WS 85. 25. ili. 27. 8 miles S 66°E of Lively Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 09’ 00” S, 58° 14’ 00” W to 52° 08’ 00”S, 58° 09’ 00” W. 79m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand
and shell. ‘Two specimens.
Sty Wioes0. 3.11. 27. 53 53° 30°-S, 60° 34° 30° W. From’ 53> 53" 0071S; 60° 37 ‘00 W to
53° 54° 00”S, 60° 32’ oo” W. 151-147m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, shell and stones. Five
specimens. —
St. WS or. 8 1V..27. 52°953° 45"5,, 64° 37° 30° Wa, From 520954" 30 (9,804; 39° COs Wita
52° 53’ 00" S, 64° 36’ 00” W. 191-205m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand and shell. One
specimen.
POLYNOIDAE 53
St. WS 93. 9. iv. 27. 7 miles S 80° W of Beaver Island, West Falkland Island. From
51° 51’ 00" S, 61° 30’ 00” W to 51° 54’ 00” S, 61° 30’ 00” W. 133-130m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
grey sand. ‘I'wenty-three specimens.
St. WS 97. 18. iv. 27. 49° 00’ 30”S, 61° 58’ 00” W. From 49° 00’ 00” S, 62° 00’ 00” W to
49° 01’ 00"S, 61° 56’ 00” W. 146-145 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, gravel and stones. Five
specimens, associated with an Alcyonarian.
Remarks. There is much variation in the arrangement of the pigment. The longi-
tudinal dorsal stripe and the transverse markings may be both present or both absent, or
one may be present and the other absent. In some specimens there is a series of dark
brown markings on the ventral surface just below the neuropods. In a few examples
the ventral surface is a deep purple.
The elytra are smooth except for a small patch of minute tubercles: the dorsal bristles
are smooth or very lightly striated: the ventral bristles are unidentate and expanded
towards the tip. Bergstrém has made a careful study of the variation in the arrangement
of the elytra in this species.
Genus Polynoé, Oersted, sensu stricto
Polynoé antarctica, Kinberg.
Kinberg, 1857, p. 23, pl. x, fig. 58.
Fauvel, 1916, p. 426.
Harmothoé antarctica, Bergstrém, 1916, p. 279.
St. 51. 4. v.26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: fine sand. ‘wo specimens.
St. 181. 12. iii. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00” S, 63° o1’ 00” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. WS 73. 6. ili. 27. 51° o1’ 00” S, 58° 54’ co” W. From 51° 02’ 00”, 58° 55° 00” W to
51° 00’ 00" S, 58° 53’ 00” W. 121-130 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. ‘Three specimens.
St. WS 79. 13. ili. 27. 51° o1’ 30” S, 64° 59’ 30” W. From 51° 00’ 00” S, 65° 00’ oo” W to
51° 03’ 00” S, 64° 59’ 00” W. 132-131 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
St. WS 80. 14. ili. 27. 50° 57’ 00” S, 63° 37’ 30” W. From 50° 58’ 00” S, 63° 39’ 00” W to
50° 55’ 30” S, 63° 36’ 00” W. 152-156m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
St. WS 81. 19. iii. 27. 8 miles N 11° W of North Island, West Falkland Island. From
51° 30’ 00” S, 61° 15’ 00” W to 51° 30’ 30”S, 61° 10’ oo” W. 81-82m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
sand. One specimen.
Remarks. All the specimens occur north of 52°, except the example from the Palmer
Archipelago, which is doubtfully attributable to this species. This specimen has the
scales and body coloured chestnut brown. The structure of the foot is typical, except
that there is a large bundle of abundant dorsal bristles instead of the usual few. ‘The
dorsal cirri are very long, the tips of the ventral chaetae reaching only to about half
their length. There are only about 12 chaetigers behind the last pair of elytrophores.
The bristles are typical.
54 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Genus Harmothoé, Kinberg
Harmothoé magellanica (McIntosh).
Lagisca magellanica, McIntosh, 1885, p. 82, pl. xiii, fig. 5; pl. xviii, figs. 3-4; pl. vii A, figs. 1-2.
Harmothoé magellanica, Bergstrém, 1916, pp. 280-282, pl. iv, figs. 1-3.
St. 27. 15. ili. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3:3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. Twelve specimens.
St. 39. 25. ili. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 8 cables S 81° W of Merton
Rock to 1-3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. 179-235 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. Five
specimens.
St. 42. 1. iv. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 6-3 miles N 89° E of
Jason Light to 4 miles N 39° E of Jason Light. 120-204 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Ten speci-
mens.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. ‘Twenty-one specimens.
St. 123. 15. xil. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 4-1 miles N 54° E
of Larsen Point to 1-2 miles S 62° W of Merton Rock. 230-250m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey
mud. ‘l'wenty-five specimens.
St. 140. 23. xil. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02’S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
Seven specimens.
St. 144. 5.1.27. Off mouth of Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. From 54° 04’ S, 36° 27’ W
to 53° 58’ S, 36° 20’ W. 155-178 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud and sand. Five specimens.
St. 146. 8. i. 27. 53° 48’ 00S, 35° 37’ 30” W. 728m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Five
specimens.
St. 148. 9. i. 27. Off Cape Saunders, South Georgia. From 54° 03’ S, 36° 39’ W to 54° 05’ S,
36° 36’ 30” W. 132-148 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud and stones. ‘Twelve specimens.
St. 149. 10.1. 27. Mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 1-15 miles N 764° W
to 2:62 miles S 11° W of Merton Rock. 200-234m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Twenty-three
specimens.
St, 152. 17. 1; 27. 53° 51° 30-9, 36°18" go" W.. 245 ms Gear DL. Bottoms) rocks Iwo
specimens.
St. 156. 20. 1.27. 53° 51’ 00” S, 36° 21’ 30” W. 200-236m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Three
specimens.
St. 159. 21.1. 27. 53° 52’ 30” S, 36° 08’ 00” W. 160 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Twelve
specimens.
St. 160. 7. ii. 27. Near Shag Rocks. 53° 43’ 40” S, 40° 57’ 00” W. 177m. Gear DLH. Bottom:
grey mud, stones, rock. Eight specimens.
St. 187. 18. ii.27. Neumayr Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 48’ 30” S, 63° 31’ 30” W. 259m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 190. 24.-ii. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 126-
315m. Gear DLH and NRL. Bottom: mud, stones and rock. Four specimens.
St. 195. 30. iii. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00”S,
58° 28’ 30” W. 391 m. Gear OTM. Bottom: mud and stones. One specimen.
POLYNOIDAE 55
St. WS 27. 19. xii. 26. 53° 55’ 00” S, 38° o1’ 00” W. 107 m. Gear N roo H. Bottom: gravel.
Six specimens.
St. WS 73. 6. ili. 27. 51° or’ 00” S, 58° 54’ 00” W. From 51° 02’ 00” S, 58° 55’ 00” W to
51° 00’ 00" S, 58° 53’ 00” W. 121-130 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. Two specimens.
St. WS 76. 11. iil. 27. 51° 00’ 00”"S, 62° 02’ 30” W. From 51° 00’ 00” S, 62° 00’ 00” W to
51° 00’ 00" S, 62° 04’ 36” W. 207-205 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
St. WS 88. 6. iv. 27. 54° 00’ 00” S, 64° 57’ 30” W. From 54° 00’ 00” S, 65° 00’ 00” W to
54. 00’ 00" S, 64° 55’ 00” W. 118m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, shell and stones. One specimen.
St. WS 97. 18. iv. 27. 49° 00’ 30”S, 61° 58’ 00” W. From 49° 00’ 00” S, 62° 00’ 00” W to
49° 01’ 00", 61° 56’ oo” W. 146-145 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, gravel and stones. Three
specimens.
St. WS 109. 26. iv. 27. 50° 18’ 48” S, 58° 28’ 30” W. From 50° 19’ 00” S, 58° 27’ 00” W
to 50° 18’ 36” S, 58° 30’ 00” W. 145m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
St. MS 14. 17. ii. 25. From 1-5 miles SE x S to 1-5 miles S 4° W of Sappho Point, East
Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 190-110 m. Gear DS. Five specimens.
St. MS 68. 2. iii. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S } E to 84 cables
SE x E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. Six specimens.
St. MS 71. 9g. ii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 9} cables E x S to 1-2 miles
E x S of Sappho Point. 110-60 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
Remarks. A clearly defined species. The elytra are smooth except for a small patch
of minute tubercles. Dorsal bristles lightly striated; ventral long and clearly bidentate:
the upper ventral bristles have the toothing continued much further down the shaft
than the rest. The elytra are often speckled with small dark spots.
Harmothoé spinosa, Kinberg.
Ehlers, 1913, p. 438, pl. xxvi, figs. 1-12.
Bergstrém, 1916, p. 284, pl. u1, figs. 5-6; pl. iii, figs. 1-4.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Eight specimens.
St. 48. 3. v. 26. 8-3 miles N 53° E of William Point Beacon, Port William, Falkland Island.
105-115 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: sand and shell. One specimen.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: fine sand. Eight specimens.
St. 52. 5. v.26. Port William, East Falkland Island. 7-4 cables N 17° E of Navy Point. 17 m.
Gear LH. One specimen.
St. 53. 12. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. Hulk of “Great Britain.” o-2 m. Gear
RM. Fifty-one specimens among kelp.
St. 55. 16. v. 26. Entrance to Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 2 cables S 24° E of Navy
Point. 10-16 m. Gear BTS. Three specimens.
St. 57. 16. v. 26. Port William, East Falkland Island. 54 cables S 20° W of Sparrow Point.
15m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
St. 58. 19. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 1-2 m. Gear RM. Fourteen specimens.
St. 141. 29. xii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia, 200 yards from shore, under Mount
Duse. 17-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom: mud. Three specimens.
56 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 145. 7. i. 27. Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. Between Grass Island and 'Tonsberg
Point. 26-35 m. Gear BTS. Fifteen specimens.
St. 146. 8. i. 27. 53° 48’ 00”S, 35° 37’ 30” W. 728m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One
specimen.
St. 160. 7. ii. 27. Near Shag Rocks. 53° 43’ 40” S, 40° 57’ 00” W. 177m. Gear DLH. Bottom:
grey mud, stones, rock. One specimen.
St. 163. 17. ii. 27. Paul Harbour, Signy Island, South Orkneys. 18-27m. Gear BTS. Four
specimens.
St. 164. 18. ii. 27. East end of Normanna Strait, South Orkneys, near Cape Hansen, Coronation
Island. 24-36 m. Gear BTS. Four young specimens.
St. 175. 2. iii. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 20”, 59° 48’ 15” W. 200m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, stones and gravel. One specimen.
St. 177. 5. ili. 27. 27 miles SW of Deception Island, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 30”S,
61° 17’ 00” W. 1080 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, coarse sand and stones. One specimen.
St. 190. 24. iii. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 126-
315m. Gear DLH and NRL. Bottom: mud, rock and stones. One specimen.
St. 195. 30. iii. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00”S,
58° 28’ 30” W. 391 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. One specimen.
St. WS 25. 17. xii.26. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. 18-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
mud and sand. Five specimens. >
St. WS 56. 14. i. 27. Larsen Harbour, Drygalski Fjord, South Georgia. From kelp roots,
2m. Six specimens.
St. WS 62. 19. i. 27. Wilson Harbour, South Georgia. 15-45 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
St. WS 72. 5. iii. 27. 51° 07’ 00" S, 57° 34’ 00” W. 95m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand and shell.
Three specimens.
St. WS 73. 6. iii. 27. 51° o1’ 00” S, 58° 54’ 00” W. From 51° 02’ 00”S, 58° 55’ 00” W to
51° 00’ 00” S, 58° 53’ 00” W. 121-130 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen from
a ‘Tubularian colony.
St. WS 76. 11. iii. 27. 51° 00’ 00” S, 62° 02’ 30” W. From 51° 00’ 00”S, 62° 00’ 00” W to
51° 00’ 00” S, 62° 04’ 36” W. 207-205 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. ‘Two specimens.
St. WS 77. 12. iii. 27. 51° o1’ 00” S, 66° 31’ 30" W. From 51° 00’ 00” S, 66° 30’ 00” W to
51° 02’ 00” S, 66° 33’ 00” W. 110-113 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: coarse dark sand. One specimen.
St. WS 79. 13. ill. 27. 51° 01” 30’, 64° 59’ 30° W. From 51-00" 00'S; 65; co ao Wto
51° 03’ 00" S, 64° 59’ 00” W. 132m. Gear N 7-T. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
St. WS 80. 14. iii. 27. 50° 57’ 00” S, 63° 37’ 30” W. From 50° 58’ 00’ S, 63% 39’ oo” W to
50° 55’ 30” S, 63° 36’ 00” W. 152-156m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
St. WS 84. 24. iii. 27. 74 miles S. 9° W of Sea Lion Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 33’ 00” S, 59° 08’ 00” W to 52° 34’ 30” S, 59° 11’ 00” W. 75-74 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: coarse
sand, shell and stones. Four specimens.
St. WS 85. 25. iii. 27. 8 miles S 66°E of Lively Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 09’ 00” S, 58° 14’ 00” W to 52° 08’ 00”, 58° 09’ 00” W. 79m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand and
shell. One specimen.
St. WS 93. 9g. iv. 27. 7 miles S 80° W of Beaver Island, West Falkland Island. From
51° 51’ 00” S, 61° 30’ 00” W to 51° 54’ 00” S, 61° 30’ 00” W. 133-130 m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
grey sand. Four specimens.
POLYNOIDAE 57
St. WS 97. 18. iv. 27. 49° 00’ 30”S, 61° 58’ 00” W. From 49° 00’ 00” S, 62° 00’ 00” W to
49° o1’ 00" S, 61° 56’ 00” W. 146-145 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, gravel and stones. Four
specimens.
St. MS 6. 12. ii. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. } mile S of Hope Point to 11 cables
S x E of King Edward Point Light. 24-30 m. Gear BTS. Five specimens. .
St. MS 68. 2. ii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S } E to 84 cables
SE x E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. Five specimens.
St. MS 71. 9. ili. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 9} cables E x S to 1-2 miles
E x S of Sappho Point. 110-60 m. Gear BTS. Four specimens.
Remarks. Bergstrém has well figured the variations in the elytra of this very abundant
Antarctic species. He treats Willey’s H. spinosa var. lagiscoides as a separate species.
I have included examples of Willey’s variety within H. spinosa.
Harmothoé exanthema (Grube).
Bergstrém, 1916, p. 287, pl. iii, fig. 5.
St. 53. 12. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. Hulk of “Great Britain.” o-2 m. Gear
RM. Five specimens.
St. 56. 16. v. 26. Sparrow Cove, Port William, East Falkland Island. 14 cables N 50° E of
Sparrow Point. 105-16 m. Gear BTS. Three specimens.
St. 58. 19. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 1-2 m. Gear RM. Four specimens.
St. WS 79. 13. ili. 27. 51° o1’ 30" S, 64° 59’ 30” W. From 51° 00’ 00” S, 65° 00’ 00” W to
51 03’ 00" S, 64° 59’ 00” W. 132-131 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
St. WS 88. 6. iv. 27. 54° 00’ 00”S, 64° 57’ 30” W. From 54° 00’ 00” S, 65° 00’ 00” W to
54. 00’ 00” S, 64° 55’ 00” W. 118m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, shell and stone. Five specimens.
Remarks. I have nothing to add to what is already known of this species. ‘The
elytra have large stalked tubercles surmounted by a papilla, which is sometimes absent.
The ventral bristles are both unidentate and bidentate.
Harmothoé anderssoni, Bergstrém.
Bergstrém, 1916, p. 286, pl. iii, fig. 6; pl. iv, figs. 8-ro.
St. 144. 5.i. 27. Off mouth of Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. From 54° 04’ S, 36° 27’ W
to 53° 58’ S, 36° 26’ W. 155-178 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud and sand. One specimen.
Remarks. This specimen corresponds closely to Bergstrém’s description. The elytra
are ciliated and have tubercles with jagged tips. Some of the upper ventral bristles have
scales on the blade as well as toothed edges: they are unidentate.
This is a quite different species from H. hirsuta, Johnson, in which the elytra are
areolated and the ventral bristles bidentate.
Harmothoé crosetensis (McIntosh).
Lagisca crosetensis, McIntosh, 1885, pp. 88-89, pl. viii, fig. 6; pl. xiii, fig. 2; pl. xviii, fig. 7;
pl. xia, figs. 4-6.
Harmothoé crosetensis, Bergstrém, 1916, p. 284, pl. i, fig. 4.
Harmothoé crosetensis, Ehlers, 1913, p- 442, pl. xxvii, figs. 1-4.
Diti
58 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. go. 10. vii. 26. Simon’s Town, False Bay, South Africa, Basin of H.M. Dockyard. o-2 m.
Gear NH. Four specimens.
St. 170. 23. ii. 27. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island. 61° 25’ 30”, 53° 46’ oo” W. 342 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One specimen.
St. 175. 2. iii. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 20”, 59° 48’ 15" W. 200m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, stones and gravel. One specimen.
St. 190. 24. iii. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 126-
315 m. Gear DLH and NRL. Bottom: mud, rock and stones. One specimen.
St. 195. 30. iii. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00”S,
58° 28’ 30” W. 391 m. Gear OTM. Bottom: mud and stones. One specimen.
Remarks. All the Antarctic specimens have long, numerous, pointed spines on the
elytra and unidentate ventral bristles. The examples from the Cape have less sharply
pointed elytral spines and bidentate ventral bristles. Willey (1902, p. 267) has created
two varieties of this species, a var. acuminata for forms with acuminate elytral spines,
such as his specimens from Cape Adare had, and a quite unnecessary var. laciniata for
forms with elytral spines resembling those of the type specimen. All my Antarctic
specimens belong to Willey’s var. acuminata; on the other hand, Bergstrém states that
his Antarctic specimens had elytral spines of the var. lacimiata kind.
I am disinclined to attach much differential value to variations in the tips of the
elytral spines, but I believe that there is a distinct varietal difference between the
Antarctic forms and those from the South Temperate Zone, such as McIntosh’s type
from off the Crozet Islands and my specimens from the Cape, which have distinctly
bidentate ventral bristles.
I suggest, therefore, that the Antarctic forms with unidentate ventral bristles should
take the varietal name applied by Willey to his examples from Cape Adare and be
called var. acuminata.
Harmothoé (Evarnella) impar Johnston, var. notialis, var. nov.
Harmothoé impar Johnston, Fauvel, 1923, p. 59, fig. 21 a-f.
_St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: fine sand. 'Two specimens.
DescrIPTION. The one complete specimen measures 16 mm. by 3 mm. including the
feet.
The head is not nearly so deeply grooved in front as in the northern form and the
palps are proportionately much longer and more slender. The position of the eyes is as
in Johnston’s species. ‘The median tentacle is lost and the laterals are very small. ‘The
tentacles and dorsal cirri are provided with long clavate papillae and the palps with very
short truncated ones. An elytron (Fig. 13, a) from the second pair is all that remains,
and this is kidney-shaped, sparsely fringed at the external border with a few small
clavate papillae, and dotted all over its surface with small simple tubercles.
The foot and bristles are very close to those of E. impar. The dorsal (Fig. 13, 6)
bristles are numerous and strongly pectinated, and the superior ventral (Fig. 13, c) are
POLYNOIDAE 59
long, slender, toothed and with a delicate bidentate tip: more ventrally (Fig. 13, d) they
become shorter and more expanded distally. The middle ventral chaetae are all clearly
bidentate and only a few at the base of the foot lack the second tooth. The ventral cirri
are short and smooth.
3mm
‘42mm
(0) (0) oO
b
Fig. 13. Harmothoé (Evarnella) impar, var. notialis.
a. Elytron. 6. Dorsal bristle. c. Upper ventral bristle. d. Lower ventral bristle.
Remarks. This variety differs from the typical form in the grooving of the head,
the relative length of the palps and in the absence of a long fringe and large tubercles
on the elytra. I have retained Evarnella as a sub-genus to include those forms in which
there is a clear transition from the very slender, strongly toothed, superior ventral bristles
to the broader, shorter, less spinous, inferior ventral bristles. Evarne, Malmgren, being
preoccupied, Evarnella, Chamberlin, takes its place.
Harmothoé (Evarnella) kerguelensis (McIntosh).
Evarne kerguelensis, McIntosh, 1885, pp. 97-99, pl. vi, fig. 43 pl. xix, fig. 6; pl. vi A, figs. 12-14.
St. 126. 19. xii. 26. 53° 58’ 30” S, 37° 08’ 00” W. 1oom. Gear N 50 V. Bottom: coarse black
sand and mud. (Net touched bottom.) One fragmentary specimen.
Remarks. A small fragment with a harmothoid head; it has 16 chaetigers and measures
3mm. by 2 mm. including the feet. All the elytra and appendages are lost, but the
bristles agree closely with those of McIntosh’s type. The dorsal bristles (Fig. 14, a and 6)
8-2
60 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
are of the normal pectinated harmothoid kind; the superior ventral bristles (Fig. 14, c)
are long and slender with two alternating rows of teeth, and the inferior ventral bristles
(Fig. 14, d), more expanded towards the tip, appear quite smooth except under a very
high magnification. They are all unidentate. The absence of a second tooth in the
ventral bristles distinguishes this species from H. impar var. notialis.
‘2mm
‘3nm
*lmm
‘lmm
O Oo
a b c d
Fig. 14. Harmothoé (Evarnella) kerguelensis.
a. Dorsal bristle. 6. Dorsal bristle. c. Upper ventral bristle. d. Lower ventral bristle.
Harmothoé (Barrukia) cristata (Willey).
Gattyana cristata, Willey, 1902, p. 268, pl. xliv, figs. 1-4.
Barrukia cristata, Bergstr6m, 1916, p. 297, pl. v, figs. 7-9 and 14.
St. 181. 12. ili. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00” S, 63° o1’ 00” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 190. 24. ill. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35 oo” W. 126-
315 m. Gears DLH and NRL. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. One specimen.
St. 195. 30. ili. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00” S,
58° 28’ 30” W. 391 m. Gear OTM. Bottom: mud and stones. Two specimens.
Remarks. This species is recognisable by the dorsal bristles with hirsute tips. There
is a row of median dorsal pads running the whole length of the body. The elytra have
clavate tubercles with crenellated tops. The ventral chaetae are unidentate with two
short rows of teeth on the shaft.
POLYNOIDAE 61
Harmothoé (Barrukia) curviseta, n.sp.
St. 181. 12. iit. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00” S, 63° o1’ 00” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One small fragment.
St. 186. 16. ili. 27. Fournier Bay, Anvers Island, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 25’ 30” S, 63° 02’00” W.
295m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
DEscRIPTION. 'T'wo fragments, the larger of which is composed of 24 chaetigers and
measures 30 mm. by 10 mm. including the feet: the colour is pale yellow in spirit.
The prostomium (Fig. 15, @) is as broad as long and divided by a median groove.
The insertion of the lateral tentacles is ventral, but the prostomial peaks are not distinct.
The eyes are small; the anterior pair, which is the larger, is far forward and laterally
placed, so that it can scarcely be seen from above. The posterior are about in the middle
of their half of the prostomium. ‘The median tentaculophore is fairly stout and the
median tentacle is lost. The lateral tentacles are small and hirsute, and the palps
long, tapering and smooth. Laid along the back they reach to the 5th chaetiger. The
tentacular cirri are missing. The first five chaetigers have conspicuous mid-dorsal
tubercles, rounded in the first two chaetigers and transversely elongated in the
remainder.
Elytrophores are present on the ist, 3rd, 4th and every alternate segment up to the
22nd; the pseudo-elytrophores are very conspicuous and similar in appearance to the
elytrophores. The elytra are dotted throughout with small tubercles with truncated and
irregular tops, and except for a small area near the inner border there are long cilia both
on the scale itself and along its free edges (Fig. 15, 0).
The feet are biramous: the dorsal cirri are lost, but the dorsal cirrophores are large,
dorso-ventrally flattened structures ending in a rounded knob for the cirrus: they lie
above the foot, and their end falls just short of the tips of the dorsal bristles.
The mid-ventral edge of the dorsal chaeta sac is carried out to a point containing the
aciculum, and the middle of the anterior lip of the ventral chaeta sac is similarly pro-
duced. The notopodium appears to have been twisted through a right angle, so that
the aciculum is in the mid-ventral line, and the dorsal bristles are arranged in three
superimposed rows parallel with the long axis of the body. The ventral bristles lie at
right angles to the dorsal.
The upper row of dorsal bristles (Fig. 15, c) is shorter than the rest, strongly curved
towards the tip, and provided with rows of prominent pectinae on their convex side.
The tips are devoid of hairs. Similar bristles are found in Willey’s Gattyana cristata
from Franklin Island, the genotype of Barrukia. The remaining two rows (Fig. 15, @)
of dorsal bristles are lightly pectinated, and end in hairy tips, the “setae penicillatae”
of Bergstrém.
The ventral bristles (Fig. 15, e) are slightly more slender than the dorsal, and in place
of the usual rows of teeth, there are two short series of two to three teeth. One of these
series is always seen lying along the middle of the shaft and the other to its right side.
The arrangement is not unlike that figured by Bergstrém (1916, PI. v, fig. 9) for Barrukia
62 . DISCOVERY REPORTS
d
Fig. 15. Barrukia curviseta.
a. Head. 6. Part of an elytron. c. Upper dorsal bristle. d. Lower dorsal bristle.
e. Ventral bristle.
POLYNOIDAE 63
cristata. The ventral chaetae are prolonged into very fine delicate flagelliform tips which
curl over in the shape of a hook. The extent to which the tips are bent over varies
widely and a few bristles are without the curving of the tip. The ventral cirri are very
small: they are attached to stout bulbous cirrophores.
Remarks: I have attributed these fragments to the sub-genus Barrukia on the ground
of the presence of dorsal “setae penicillatae.’”’ There are other characters, however, in
which they resemble the genotype, the presence of the median dorsal tubercles, the
shape of the dorsal cirrophores and of the feet. They differ from Barrukia cristata in
the number of median dorsal tubercles, in the presence of long curved flagelliform tips
to the ventral chaetae, and in the sculpturing of the elytra.
Genus Antinoé, Kinberg
Antinoé pelagica, n.sp.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. Bottom. 238-270 m. Gear
NCS-T. One specimen.
St. SS 18. 15. xii. 27. 54° 58’ S, 27° 32’ W. 50-om. Gear N70V. One specimen.
DescripTIONn. The body is slender and delicate. The complete specimen measures
Irmm. by 1-5 mm. without the feet: the measurement from tip to tip of the bristles
is 6mm. There are about 35 chaetigers and 15 pairs of elytra, which completely cover
the body up to the pygidium. The elytra are faintly touched with brown on their edges ;
otherwise there is no colour.
The head (Fig. 16, a) is broader than long and deeply incised in front. The lateral
tentacles are inserted ventrally. There are two pairs of eyes, of which the anterior is
situated laterally and half-way down the head, and the posterior at the outer corners.
The median tentacle is very long, reaching to the 8th chaetiger when laid along the
back, and the lateral tentacles are extremely small. The palps are very slender and
slightly longer than the median tentacle, which itself is longer than the tentacular cirri.
The dorsal cirri are long and reach to the tips of the bristles, and the ventral cirri just
reach to the end of the feet. The tentacles and cirri are hirsute, but the palps appear
smooth.
The first pair of elytra is rounded, and the remainder are oval. Around the outer
edge (Fig. 16, 6) are a few sparse cilia, and the outer half of the scale is thinly dotted
with small conical tubercles.
The feet (Fig. 16, c) are biramous and harmothoid in type, with long sheathed acicula
protruding from both branches. The dorsal bundle consists of a number of backwardly
curved scaly bristles (Fig. 16, d); just above the aciculum there are two chaetae that
differ slightly from the rest: one (Fig. 16, e) is unusually broad and short, with its end
projecting a short distance from the chaeta sac, and the other is of the same kind as
the rest of the dorsal bristles but larger (Fig. 16, f) in all dimensions. All the dorsal
bristles have a smooth tip.
‘Simm.
=)
d S
Fig. 16. Antinoé pelagica.
a. Head. 6. Elytron. c. Foot. d. Normal dorsal bristle. e. Broad dorsal bristle.
f. Large dorsal bristle. g. Ventral bristle.
POLYNOIDAE 65
The ventral bristles (Fig. 16, g) are about twice the length of the dorsal, and slender,
with smooth unidentate tips and fine spirally arranged whorls of teeth going up the
shaft. There is a pair of long pygidial styles.
Remarks. This pelagic polynoid has much in common with Herdmanella gracilis,
Ehlers (Ehlers, 1908, p. 44). The shape of the head appears to be similar, and there are
great resemblances in the structure of the bristles. In Ehlers’ species the lateral ten-
tacles are relatively longer, and there are only eight pairs of elytra. It is possible that
H. gracilis may be a young stage of the present species, just as the present species 1s
probably the pelagic phase of some bottom living form.
I have attributed this example to the genus Anéinoé on the ground of the fine hairlike
ventral bristles.
Antinoé setobarba, n.sp.
St. 195. 30. iii. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00S,
58° 28’ 30” W. 391 m. Gear OTM. Bottom: mud and stones. One specimen.
3mm
O
O
d e
Fig. 17. Antinoé setobarba,
a. Head. b. Dorsal bristle. c. Part of dorsal bristle highly magnified.
d. Ventral bristle. e. Ventral bristle.
Dili 9
66 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
DescRIPTION. The measurement is 21 mm. by 3 mm. excluding the feet. In spirit
the dorsum is black merging into grey at the hinder end, except for the elytrophores
and pseudoelytrophores which are white. The median tentaculophore is marked with
chestnut brown, and there are two patches of this colour below the lateral tentacles.
The prostomium (Fig. 17, a) is subrectangular and divided by a median groove. The
eyes are small, and the front pair is near the anterior lateral edges of the prostomium ;
the hinder pair is near the posterior lateral edges. There is a stout median tentaculo-
phore, by the sides of which are the two inconspicuous prostomial peaks. The lateral
tentacles are inserted ventrally, and are very small. The palps are long, smooth and
tapering. The median tentacle and all the tentacular cirri except one are lost; this cirrus
is papillose.
There are 15 elytrophores, and all the elytra are lost; behind the hindermost elytro-
phore are only four chaetigers. The dorsal cirri are all lost, and the cirrophores are
placed low down on the feet just above the dorsal bristles. All the cirrigerous segments
have small pad-like pseudoelytrophores.
The structure of the feet is harmothoid in character. The dorsal chaetae (Fig. 17, 5
and c) are numerous with rather irregular rows of very fine scales, and end in a bearded
tip. ‘The aciculum is mid-ventral in position.
The ventral chaetae (Fig. 17, d and e) are also numerous, more slender than the
dorsal, with two rows of teeth and a fine unidentate tip covered with a number of delicate
hairs. ‘The ventral cirri are short and very slender.
Remarks. This species combines the penicillate dorsal chaetae, which distinguish
Bergstrém’s Barrukia, with filamentous ventral chaetae very like those of his Austro-
laenilla antarctica. The ventral bristles of A. setobarba are unidentate, and those of
Bergstrém’s species are bidentate.
I know of no other Polynoid that has bearded tips to both its dorsal and its ventral
chaetae.
Antinoé antarctica (Bergstrém).
Austrolaenilla antarctica, Bergstr6m, 1916, pp. 291-294, pl. iii, fig. 8; pl. v, figs. 1 and 2.
St. 29. 16. ili. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 5-9 miles S 51° W of Jason Light.
23m. Gear DC. Bottom: mud and stones. One specimen.
St. 39. 25.11.26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 8 cables S 81° W of Merton Rock
to 1:3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. 179-235 m. Gear N7-T. Bottom: grey mud. Two
specimens.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Sixteen specimens.
St. 123. 15. xi. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 4:1 miles N 54° E
of Larsen Point to 1-2 miles S 62° W of Merton Rock. 230-250m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey
mud. Six specimens.
St. 140. 23. xil. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02’ S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
One specimen.
POLYNOIDAE 67
St. 142. 30. xii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 35’ W to
54° 12'S, 36° 29’ 30” W. 88-273 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: mud. Five specimens.
St. 149. 10. 1.27. Mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 1-15 miles N 764° W
to 2:62 miles 5 11° W of Merton Rock. 200-234 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Four specimens.
St. MS 68. 2. iil. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S } E to 8} cables
SE x E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. Four specimens.
Remarks. The prostomium (Fig. 18) is very broad 6mm
and divided by a median groove. The peaks are not
clearly defined. The eyes are very small and some-
times invisible. The median tentaculophore is very
large, and all three tentaculophores are reddish brown.
The elytra have small tubercles and slender clavate
papillae. The dorsal chaetae are lightly pectinated, and
the ventral are long, slender, unidentate and end ina
hirsute tip.
I have already elsewhere (Monro, 1929, p. 162)
given reasons for my opinion that Austrolaenilla o
should be regarded as a synonym of Antinoé, Kinberg,
sensu McIntosh.
Fig. 18. Antinoé antarctica. Head.
Antinoé epitoca n.sp.
St. 274. 4. vill. 27. Off St Paul de Loanda, Angola. From 8° 40’ 15”S, 13° 13’ 45” E to
8° 38’ 15” S, 13° 13’ 00” E. 64-65 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
DESCRIPTION. One specimen, incomplete posteriorly. There are 28 chaetigers and
14 pairs of elytrophores; the measurement is 29 mm. by 3 mm. without the feet.
The prostomium (Fig. 19, a) is broader than long and deeply incised in front. There
are two pairs of eyes of which the anterior is on the front apexes and the posterior at
the hinder corners of the head. There are no peaks, their place being taken by the
anterior eyes. The median tentacle has a very large tentaculophore set between the
anterior eyes, and a long style about three times the length of the head. The lateral
tentacles are small, about the length of the head, and their tentaculophores are hidden
from above by the eyes and median tentaculophore. The palps are long, reaching
back along the dorsum to the 7th chaetiger and the tentacular cirri are about twice the
length of the lateral tentacles. Neither the appendages of the head nor the cirri are
hirsute.
The elytra are all lost, but the first 14 pairs of elytrophores are arranged as in
Harmothoé.
The dorsal cirrophores are large inflated-looking structures, which reach to the end
of the feet, and the dorsal cirri extend well beyond the tips of the bristles. The elytro-
phores also have a somewhat inflated appearance and are about half the length of the
cirrophores. The feet (Fig. 19, b) are biramous.
The dorsal ramus is on the upper and anterior face of the neuropodium, and consists
of a rounded chaeta-sac carried out into a point by a long sheathed aciculum.
68
‘5mm:
a. Head.
‘lmm
b.
DISCOVERY REPORTS
lmm
Fig. 19. Antinoé epitoca.
Foot. c. Dorsal bristle. d. Part of dorsal bristle highly magnified.
e. Ventral bristle. f. Entire animal seen from above.
ACOETIDAE 69
The dorsal (Fig. 19, c) bristles are numerous and exceedingly fine capillaries, which
appear to be quite smooth, but under a very high magnification minute serrations
(Fig. 19, d) can be detected on one side of the blade.
The ventral bristle bundle is contained between two vertical lips, the anterior of
which is produced into an extremely long cirriform process, almost reaching to the tips
of the bristles. The ventral bristles (Fig. 19, e), although coarser than the dorsal, are
very long and slender, and end in fine hair-like tips. They carry rows of delicate closely
set teeth. The ventral cirri are short, just reaching to the lip of the chaeta sac. The
example (Fig. 19, f) is a ripe female, filled with ova.
Remarks. I find this specimen very puzzling. It was apparently obtained from the
bottom of the sea, and the head and the sturdy character of the body are not those of
a pelagic form: on the other hand, the large inflated-looking cirrophores and the long
very delicate bristles recall the free-swimming species. Furthermore, | know no genus
in which the bristles of both rami of the foot are fine capillaries, the dorsal almost
smooth and finer than the ventral. I have provisionally attributed it to Antinoé on
account of its ventral bristles, for | am unwilling to base a new genus on an incomplete
specimen.
The example is full of eggs, and I think it very possible that it is undergoing some
sexual change, involving the temporary adoption of the pelagic habit.
Family ACOETIDAE
Genus Eupanthalis, McIntosh
Eupanthalis tubifex (Ehlers).
Euarche tubifex, Ehlers, 1887, p. 54, pl. xii, figs. 1-7; pl. xiii, fig. 1.
Eupanthalis tubifex, Augener, 1918, p. 125, pl. ii, fig. 20.
St. 274. 4. vill. 27. Off St Paul de Loanda, Angola. From 8° 40’ 15”S, 13° 13’ 45” E to
8° 38’ 15” S, 13° 13’ 00” E. 64-65 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
Remarks. A large example, measuring 295 mm. by 10 mm. including the feet, of
this species, described by Ehlers from the West Indies and by Augener from the
Belgian Congo. Fauvel regards it as synonymous with the Mediterranean LE. kinbergi,
McIntosh, but this seems to me doubtful. Both in my specimen and in that figured
by Ehlers the bristles are extremely short, while in all the Mediterranean examples
seen by me they are fairly long and prominent.
Genus Polyodontes, Renier
Polyodontes mortenseni, Monro.
Monro, 1928, p. 569, figs. 19-24.
St.279. 10. viii.27. Off Cape Lopez, French Congo. From 8-5 miles N 71° E to 15 miles N 24° E
of Cape Lopez Light. 58-67 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud and fine sand. One specimen.
70 . DISCOVERY REPORTS
Remarks. An anterior fragment belonging to a young specimen. Neither the bran-
chiae nor the bristles are as fully developed as in the type specimen from Panama. The
skin is flaccid on top of the feet and definite branchial processes are hard to distinguish.
It seems probable that this species is identical with P. bicolor, Grube, described by
Augener (1918, p. 119) from the West Coast of Africa. The finger-shaped process on
the foot, which Augener was unable to interpret with certainty, is present in the Panama
specimen and seems to be an undoubted branchia.
The globular extension of the skin of the ventral side of the pedal lobe of the first
foot, which Augener figures and describes, is completely absent from my specimens.
Family SIGALIONIDAE
Genus Euthalanessa, Darboux
Euthalanessa dendrolepis (Claparede).
Fauvel, 1923, p. 114, fig. 42 h-o.
Euthalanessa insignis, Ehlers, 1908, p. 52, pl. 1, figs. 10 and 12; pl. ii, figs. 1-9.
St. 283. 14. vill. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. 0-75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. Two specimens.
Remarks. ‘Two small anterior fragments. The Euthalanessa insignis, Ehlers, from
35. 2’ S, 19° 58’ W seems to me to be indistinguishable from the European FE. dendro-
lepis. On the other hand, the E. insignis, Ehlers, of Augener from the Gold Coast is
a different species. According to Augener’s account it has a third cirrus on the first
segment. Gravier’s EF. djiboutiensis has the palps lying outside the first segment and
apparently not fused with it. My specimens correspond in detail with Ehlers’ description
and figures.
Genus Leanira, Kinberg
Leanira incisa, Grube.
Augener, 1918, p. 107, with synonymy.
Sthenelais simplex, Ehlers, 1887, p. 60, pl. xiii, figs. 2 and 3; pl. xiv, figs. 1-6.
St. 274. 4. vill. 27. Off St Paul de Loanda, Angola. From 8° 40’ 15”S, 13° 13’ 45” E to
8° 38’ 15”S, 13° 13’ 00” E. 64-65 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
St. 279. 10. villi. 27. Off Cape Lopez, French Congo. From 8-5 miles N 71° E to 15 miles
N 24° E of Cape Lopez Light. 58-67 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud and fine sand. Three specimens.
Remarks. Four incomplete examples of this species, described by Grube and Ehlers
from the West Indies and recorded by Augener from the Congo. In these specimens
the ventral ramus of the feet bears in the middle one stylode of much greater length
than the rest: this is not shown in Ehlers’ figures.
PHYLLODOCIDAE 71
Family PHYLLODOCIDAE
Genus Eteone, Savigny
Eteone sculpta, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1go1, p. 80, pl. viii, figs. 18-21.
Bergstrém, 1914, p. 191, text-fig. 71.
St. 145. 7. 1. 27. Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. Between Grass Island and Tonsberg
Point. 26-35 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
St. 166. 19. il. 27. SE Point of Paul Harbour, Signy Island, South Orkneys. Shore collection.
One specimen.
St. WS 71. 23. 11. 27. 6 miles N 60° E of Cape Pembroke Light, East Falkland Island.
51° 38’ 00" S, 57° 32’ 30” W. 82m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand. One specimen.
.St. WS 84. 24. ili. 27. 74 miles S 9° W of Sea Lion Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 33° 00" S, 59° 08’ 00” W to 52° 34’ 30’ S, 59° 11’ 00” W. 75-74 m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
coarse sand, shell and stones. One specimen.
St. WS 85. 25. ili. 27. 8 miles S 66° E of Lively Island, East Falkland Island. From 52° 09’ 00” S,
58° 14’ 00” W to 52° 08’ 00” S, 58° 09’ 00” W. 79m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand and shell. One
specimen.
St. WS 88. 6. iv. 27. 54° 00’ 00” 5, 64° 57’ 30” W. From 54° 00’ 00” S, 65° 00’ 00” W to
54° 00 00" S, 64° 55°00” W. 118m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, shell and stones. Three specimens.
St. MS (?). 13. iv. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. One specimen.
Remarks. The majority of examples are bright yellow with a dark brown transverse
band in each segment. They correspond closely to Ehlers’ FE. crassifolia which Bergstrém
identifies with FE. sculpta.
The dorsal cirri are symmetrical, but I do not find their breadth invariably exceeding
their length, as Bergstrém claims. Roughly speaking, the length and breadth are about
the same.
The most easily appreciable difference between this species and EF. rubella is that in
the latter species the aciculum and chaeta-sac are considerably more prominent in relation
to the cirri than they are in EZ. sculpta. Bergstr6m’s suggestion that E. sculpta is a variety
of the Arctic E. flava seems to me sound.
Eteone aurantiaca, Schmarda.
Bergstrém, 1914, p. 201, text-fig. 76, with synonymy.
St. WS 65. 22.i.27. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. With kelp root. One specimen.
Remarks. A small Eteone, which I attribute to this species on the ground of its short
asymmetrical dorsal cirri.
Eteone rubella, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1gor, p. 80, pl. viii, figs. 18-21.
Bergstrém, 1914, p. 191, text-fig. 71.
St. 149. 10. i. 27. Mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 1-15 miles N 763° W
to 2:62 miles S 11° W of Merton Rock. 200-234 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
72 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
REMARKS. One specimen which probably belongs to this species. ‘The body is pale
yellow, and in the hinder part of the specimen the dorsal cirri are tinged with brown.
I can find no trace of eyes. In other respects the example agrees with Ehlers’ descrip-
tion. The anal cirri are two small rounded lobes. It differs from E. aurantiaca in that
the dorsal cirri are symmetrical.
Genus Phyllodoce, Savigny
Phyllodoce patagonica (Kinberg).
Anaitides patagonica, Bergstrém, 1914, p. 147, text-fig. 46, with synonymy.
St. 27. 15. iil. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3:3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
trom. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. Four specimens.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Three specimens.
St. 91. 8.ix. 26. 0-5 mile off Roman Rock, False Bay, South Africa. 35 m. Gear NRL. Bottom:
sand. ? One specimen.
St. 141. 29. xl. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia, 200 yards from shore under Mount
Duse. 17-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom: mud. Three specimens.
St. 142. 30. xii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 35’ W to
54° 12’ S, 36° 29’ 30” W. 88-273 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 144. 5.i.27. Off mouth of Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. From 54° 04’ S, 36° 27’ W
to 53° 58'S, 36° 26’ W. 155-178 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud and sand. One specimen.
St. 145. 7. i. 27. Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. Between Grass Island and 'Tonsberg
Point. 26-35 m. Gear BTS. ‘l'wo specimens.
St. 160. 7. 11.27. Near Shag Rocks. 53° 43’ 40” S, 40° 57’ 00” W. 177m. Gear DLH. Bottom:
grey mud, stones and rock. One specimen.
St. 167. 20. ii. 27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. 244-344 m.
Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud. One specimen.
St. 182. 14. ili. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 21’ 00”S, 62° 58’ 00” W.
278-500 m. Gear N 7-T. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. MS (?). 13. iv. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. Two specimens.
St. MS 71. 9. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 9} cables E x S to 1-2 miles
E x 5S of Sappho Point. rro-60 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
Remarks. I have followed Bergstrém in identifying P. madeirensis of Ehlers and Willey
with P. patagonica. 'The specimen from the Cape has the papillae of the proboscis
thinner and more foliaceous than have the more southern forms. Moreover, it has
seven papillae in the middle line and eleven in the rest, whereas five and nine seem to
be the more usual numbers for the Antarctic examples.
Phyllodoce (Anaitis) bowersi, Benham.
Phyllodoce bowersi, Benham, 1927, p. 77, pl. i, figs. 27-31.
St. 167. 20. ii. 27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. 244-344 m.
Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud. One specimen.
PHYLLODOCIDAE 73
Remarks. This is an example of Benham’s species from the Ross Sea. It has an
orange stripe down the middle of the back. The differences in the length of the dorsal
cirri of the three tentacular segments is not so great as Benham indicates. Otherwise
this specimen corresponds in detail to Benham’s description and figures. I have only
one specimen, and I cannot without damaging it ascertain the tentacular formula.
Phyllodoce oculata, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1887, p. 135, pl. xl, figs. 4-6.
Anaitides oculata, Bergstrém, 1914, p. 144, text-fig. 44.
Augener, 1918, p. 169.
St. 1. 16. xi. 25. Clarence Bay, Ascension Island. 7° 55’ 15” S, 14° 25’ 00” W. 16-27 m. Gear
NRM. Bottom: coral, sand and shell. One specimen.
St. 4. 30. 1. 26. Tristan da Cunha. 36° 55’S, 12° 12° W. 40m. Gear LH. Two specimens.
St. 283. 14. vill. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. +75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. 'T'wo specimens.
Remarks. The head is rather long, equalling
in length the first six segments. The first tenta-
cular segment is incomplete dorsally, and the
longest tentacular cirrus, when laid along the
back, reaches to the 9th segment and not to the
14th, as in Ehlers’ description. ‘There are twelve
rows of papillae with nine in each row.
At both ends of the body the dorsal cirri are
considerably narrower and more symmetrical
than they are in the middle of the body (Fig. 20) ;
also the anterior ventral cirri are shorter and less
pointed than they are in the rest of the body.
The colour is a pale yellow without markings, fig. 26. Phyllodoce oculata. Middle foot.
but in one of the specimens the ventral surface
of the posterior two-thirds of the body is a dull green. The range from the West
Indies to Tristan da Cunha is a long one, but I cannot discover any differences of
specific value between these specimens and those described from the former locality.
Phyllodoce longipes, Kinberg.
Kinberg, 1865, p. 241.
Ehlers, 1901, p. 72, pl. vil, figs. 1-4.
Bergstrém, 1914, p. 149, text-fig. 47.
St. 142. 30. xii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 35’ W to
54° 12’ S, 36° 29’ 30” W. 88-273 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
DESCRIPTION. This example has 140 segments, measures 110 mm. by 7 mm. including
the feet, and is incomplete posteriorly. There is an iridescent blue band, wider in front
Dili he)
74 DISCOVERY REPORTS
than behind, running down the middle of the back. The cordiform head with its median
papilla has been figured by Ehlers: the eyes in my specimen are so much faded as to
be only just indicated. This may have been caused by the fact that the specimen was
removed in a dry condition from a faulty bottle.
The formula for the tentacular segments is as follows: 1+ B = +B a
The first tentacular segment is incomplete dorsally, and its cirrus and the thickened
ventral cirrus of the second segment are
both less than half the length of the other
two tentacular cirri. ‘The dorsal tentacular
cirrus of the second segment reaches back
to the 12th segment.
The foot (Fig. 21), with its small digiti-
form appendage at the end of the chaeta
sac and the pointed end of the ventral
cirrus, has been figured by Bergstrém and
by Ehlers, but both these authors have
overlooked one important fact. When the
foot has been cleared, a very slender acicu-
lum can be seen running up the dorsal
cirrophore as in Austrophyllum and Noto- 0
phyllum. The proboscis is unfortunately
not everted. Fig. 21. Phyllodoce longipes. Middle foot.
5mm
Remarks. This species has a foot very like that of Notophyllum foliosum as far as
the dorsal ramus goes, but the head with its occipital papilla and no median tentacle
is that of a Phyllodoce.
For uniformity’s sake, I should make this species the type species of a new genus,
but I suspect that, as our knowledge of this family increases, it will be found that a
number of species on close investigation show vestiges of a biramous condition of the
foot. I therefore retain its original name in spite of the fact that by generic definition
Phyllodoce has uniramous feet.
This species seems to be very like Phyllodoce macropapillosa, St Joseph, from
European waters (v. Fage et Legendre, 1927, p. 53, fig. 6), but no dorsal aciculum has
been described for St Joseph’s species.
Genus Austrophyllum, Bergstrém
Austrophyllum charcoti (Gravier).
Bergstrém, 1914, p. 119, text-fig. 30, with synonymy.
St. 45. 6. iv: 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. ‘Three specimens.
St. 160. 7. 11. 27. Near Shag Rocks. 53° 43’ 40” S, 40° 57’ 00” W. 177m. Gear DLH. Bottom:
grey mud, stones and rock. One specimen.
PHYLLODOCIDAE 75
St. 195. 30. ili. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00” S,
58° 28’ 30” W. 391 m. Gear OTM. Bottom: mud and stones. Two specimens.
St. MS 68. 2. ii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S 4 E to 8 cables
SE x E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. One specimen.
Remarks. The proboscis is not smooth distally, but the bands of papillae are con-
tinued to the apex as in Gravier’s original description.
Genus Genetyllis, Malmgren
Genetyllis polyphylla (Ehlers).
Phyllodoce polyphylla, Ehlers, 1897, p. 26, pl. i, figs. 14-19.
Phyllodoce polyphylla, Gravier, 1911, p. 54, pl. i, figs. g—11.
Genetyllis polyphylla, Bergstrém, 1914, p. 161, text-fig. 55.
St. 145. 7.1. 27. Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. Between Grass Island and 'Tonsberg
Point. 26-35 m. Gear BTS. ‘Two specimens.
St. 190. 24. iii. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 126-
315m. Gear DLH and NRL. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. Two specimens.
St. MS 14. 17. i. 25. From 1-5 miles SE x S to 1-5 miles S } W of Sappho Point, East
Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 190-110 m. Gear DS. One specimen.
REMARKS. Sts. 145 and 190 each yielded two small examples of this species.
They are bright yellow with orange dorsal cirri.
From St. MS 14 was obtained an incubating specimen. It is curled upon itself to
such an extent that accurate measurements are impossible, but it is approximately
20 mm. long by 1 mm. broad. Exactly as in Gravier’s description of Eteone gaint, there
is an envelope of dark brown parchmenty substance wrapped round the specimen,
from which only the head and tail are free. Inside this envelope is a large number of
larval phyllodocids, measuring about 1 mm. in length and having about 12 chaetigers.
Unfortunately the specimen is in bad condition and cannot be determined with
certainty, but from the structure of the head and anterior segments and from the frag-
ments of the feet which I was able to detach, I believe it to belong to this species.
Genus Eulalia, Oersted
Eulalia magalhaensis, Kinberg.
Steggoa magelhaensis, Bergstrém, 1914, p. 129, with synonymy.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
St. 141. 29. xii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia, 200 yards from shore under Mount
Duse. 17-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom: mud. ‘Two specimens.
St. 145. 7. i. 27. Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. Between Grass Island and Tonsberg
Point. 26-35 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
St. WS 25. 17. xii. 26. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. 18-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
mud and sand. Two specimens.
St. MS (?). 13. iv. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. Two specimens.
76 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Remarks. Bergstrém has made this species the type of a new genus, Steggoa, on the
ground of the foliaceous character of the ventral cirrus of the second tentacular seg-
ment, the absence of bristles in this segment, and the presence of a notopodial aciculum
in the third tentacular segment. The species is easily distinguishable by the long and
comparatively narrow dorsal cirrus.
Eulalia viridis (O. F. Miiller).
Fauvel, 1923, p. 160, fig. 57 a—h, with synonymy.
St. 283. 14. vili. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. -75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. Ten specimens.
Remarks. ‘Ten specimens with very long and narrow dorsal cirri. The ventral cirrus
of the second tentacular segment is moderately thickened and flattened, and betrays no
trace of border. The three tentacular segments are clearly separated. Augener (1918,
p- 174) does not figure the ventral cirrus of the second tentacular segment of his Steggoa
microcephala (Clap.) from the Gulf of Guinea, and from his description his S. micro-
cephala is scarcely to be distinguished from this species. Augener’s Eulalia viridis var.
capensis, Schm. from South-west Africa differs in having much broader dorsal cirri.
Eulalia anomalochaeta, n.sp.
St. 42. 1. iv. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 6-3 miles N 89° E of
Jason Light to 4 miles N 39° E of Jason Light. 120-204 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Two
specimens.
St. 149. 10.1. 27. Mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 1-15 miles N 761° W
to 2-62 miles S 11° W of Merton Rock. 200-234 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 175. 2. ili. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 20” S, 59° 48’ 15” W. 200 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, stones and gravel. One specimen.
St. 190. 24. ill. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 315 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. One specimen.
DescriPTIoN. ‘The average size is about 100 mm. by 4 mm. including the feet and
the number of chaetigers is about 300. The body is long and vermiform and only
slightly tapered at the ends. The body colour is a pale green with large segmental trans-
verse bands, sometimes interrupted in the mid-dorsal line.
The feet and cirri are either dark brown or dark green. The prostomium (Fig. 22, a)
is roughly rectangular in shape, and the eyes are set well back; these are oblong with
crystalline centres. There are five tentacles, and the median is set in front of the eyes.
The cirrus of the first tentacular segment is about half the length of the dorsal cirri
of the remaining tentacular segments. These cirri, when laid along the back, reach to the
gth segment.
The ventral cirrus of the 2nd tentacular segment is slightly flattened and a little longer
than the cirrus of the 1st tentacular segment. The remaining tentacular cirri are all
digitiform.
PHYLLODOCIDAE 77
Expressed in Bergstrém’s formula the tentacular segments are as follows:
I
aN~
All the everted area of the proboscis is covered with a sort of thick fur of conical
papillae.
TB B
al
‘3mm
‘3mm
Fig. 22. Eulalia anomalochaeta.
a. Head. 6b. Middle foot. c. Heterogomph bristle. d. Heterogomph bristle.
The feet (Fig. 22, b) are bilobed, and the dorsal cirri are large and cordiform, almost
as broad as long, and sometimes apparently asymmetrical. The ventral cirri are about
one-third the size of the dorsal, rather asymmetrical and with blunted ends. The
bristles (Fig. 22, c and d) are remarkable. They are very strongly heterogomph, and
the “‘hilt”’ ends in a large hook, below which is the articulation for the very small deli-
cately hirsute blade. The pygidium consists of a simple rounded lobe.
Remarks. I believe these markedly heterogomph bristles to be distinctive of this
species, for I know no Eulalia with chaetae at all resembling them.
78 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Eulalia subulifera (Ehlers).
Hypoeulalia subulifera, Bergstrém, 1914, p. 167, text-fig. 58, with synonymy.
Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. Three specimens.
Remarks. As in Gravier’s specimens, the pigment is more diffuse than as described
by Ehlers. The proboscis is thickly covered with small papillae. Bergstrém has estab-
lished the genus Hypoeulalia to include this species and F. bilineata (Johnston), on the
ground of the fusion of the first tentacular segment with the head.
Eulalia picta, Kinberg.
Notalia picta, Bergstrém, 1914, p. 127, text-fig. 34, with synonymy.
St. 56. 16. v. 26. Sparrow Cove, Port William, East Falkland Island. 13 cables N 50° E of
Sparrow Point. 10o}-16m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
St. 57. 16. v. 26. Port William, East Falkland Island. 53 cables S 20° W of Sparrow Point.
15m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
St. 149. 10. i. 27. Mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 1-15 miles N 763° W
to 2°62 miles S 11° W of Merton Rock. 200-234 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Five specimens.
St. 156. 20. 1.27. 53° 51’ 00" S, 36° 21’ 30” W. 200-236m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One
specimen.
St. MS 71. 9. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 9} cables E x S to 1-2 miles
E x S of Sappho Point. 110-60 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
Remarks. On either side of each chaetiger is a black spot just above the dorsal cirrus,
and black spots are sometimes discernible in a similar position on the undersurface
below the ventral cirri. T'wo of the examples have the proboscis only partly protruded,
and it then has the misleading appearance of being covered with large papillae, which
are what Bergstrom describes as Kontraktionswarzen.
Genus Lopadorhynchus, Grube
Lopadorhynchus brevis, Grube.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 184, fig. 69 Rk.
Ehlers, 1913, p. 463.
Lopadorhynchus nans, Chamberlin, 1919, p. 116, pl. xvii, figs. 1-5.
St. 273. 31. vil. 27. 9° 38’ 00” S, 12° 42’ 30” E. 200-230(-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
Remarks. This specimen from St. 273 measures 12 mm. by 4 mm. including the feet
and has about 27 chaetigers. The head is slightly damaged, and I can find no trace of
eyes. The head is cut off squarely in front, and of the tentacles the upper pair is longer
than the lower. The three pairs of short stout tentacular cirri lie at the side of the head
and partly conceal the tentacles. The first three pairs of feet are only slightly shorter
and thicker than those that follow, for the feet gradually lengthen out and become more
slender up to the 6th chaetiger. The first three pairs of feet have neither ventral cirri
nor compound chaetae; the remainder have a few simple bristles in addition to the
compound chaetae.
ALCIOPIDAE 79
Lopadorhynchus krohnii (Clap.), var. simplex, var. nov.
Lopadorhynchus krohnu, Fauvel, 1923, p. 185, figs. 68 a—d, with synonymy.
St. 104. 31. x. 26. 41° 33’ 30” S, 17° 58’ 00” W. 56(-o) m. Gear N 100H. Two specimens.
St. 267. 23. vil. 27. 24° 31’ 00” S, 12° 15’ 30” E. 450-550(-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
St. 268. 25. vil. 27. 18° 37’ 00” S, 10° 46’ 00” E. 100-150 (—-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
Remarks. These specimens, measuring about 9 mm. by 3mm.
including the feet, correspond in detail to Fauvel’s description
except in the following particulars. There are no simple bristles
behind the 2nd chaetiger. The 3rd chaetiger (Fig. 23, a) has
the aciculum produced into a slender tip extending well beyond
the lips of the chaeta sac. Posteriorly to this the aciculum is
‘normal and the bristles (Fig. 23,0) are all compound. I can
find no trace of a ventral cirrus in the first two chaetigers.
‘3mm
‘5mm
oO
O
Fig. 23. Lopadorhynchus krohnit, var. simplex.
a. Third foot. 6. Compound bristle from third foot.
Family ALCIOPIDAE
REMARKS. Apstein (1900) and Fauvel (1923) have both given admirable accounts,
with synonymies, of the majority of the species belonging to this family. When I have
nothing to add, I shall do no more than give the references to the descriptions of these
authors under the specific names.
Genus Vanadis, Claparede
Vanadis longissima (Levinsen).
Apstein, 1900, p. 11, pl. i, figs. 8-9.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 207, fig. 77f, g.
St. 220. 21. iv. 27. Drake Strait. 57° 16’ 00” S, 67° 06’ oo” W. 126m. Gear Ni10oH. One
specimen.
St. 287. 19. vill. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. 800-1000 (-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
St. 291. 24. vili. 27. 3° 46’ 00” N, 16° 49’ 00” W. 100(-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
80 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
DescrIPTION. The specimen from St. 291 consists of three fragments all presumably
belonging to the same animal: joined together they give a length of between 50 mm.
and 60 mm. with a breadth of about 3 mm. The anterior border of the prostomium 1s,
with the proboscis everted, slightly concave. There are two very large eyes (Fig. 24,4
and 6) with their axes pointing laterally. There is a small conical unpaired tentacle and
two pairs of lateral tentacles. There are four pairs of tentacular cirri, the first larger
4mm
C
Fig. 24. Vanadts longissima.
a. Dorsal view of head. 6. Ventral view of head. c. Middle foot.
than the other three and joined across the ventral surface by a membrane as in I. for-
mosa: the fourth pair is very small and rather flattened. The first two pairs of parapodia
are modified into sperm vesicles.
The feet (Fig. 24, c) are fully developed by about the ath chaetiger. They consist of
a foliaceous dorsal cirrus, a much narrower and more elongated ventral cirrus, and a
long conical chaetigerous lobe with a projecting aciculum and a single small cirriform
process. The bristles are all of the long compound type.
ALCIOPIDAE 8x
The distribution of the glands is curious: they occur on every 5th chaetiger up to
the 25th and from the 4oth to the 6oth on every 1oth. In the anterior fragment the
glands are accompanied by dark brown rings of pigment, running all round the body
but fainter in the mid-ventral line. Up to about the soth chaetiger these rings are two
segments deep, but behind the soth chaetiger they cover one segment only. The glands
themselves are very small.
In the posterior fragments they are much larger and occur in groups of 3 or 4 con-
secutively with one or two glandless segments between each group.
The proboscis is everted and instead of the two long lateral cirriform processes such
as occur in lV’. formosa, there are ten small tooth-like papillae, all of about the same size.
The examples from the other two stations consist of a small anterior and a small
posterior fragment.
Vanadis formosa, Claparede.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 205, fig. 77 a—c.
Apstein, 1900, p. 8, pl. i, figs. 1-6.
St. 85. 23. vi. 26. 33° 07’ 40” S, 4° 30’ 20” E. 2000(-o) m. Gear N 450. One specimen.
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33° 53’ 45” S, 9° 26’ 30” E. 1000(-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
St. 89. 28. vi. 26. 34° 05’ 15” S, 16° 00’ 45” E. 1000(-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
St. 102. 28. x. 26. 35° 29’ 20”S, 18° 33’ 40”E. 52m. Gear Nioo H. Bottom 1800m.,
globigerina ooze. One specimen.
St. 259. 26. vi. 27. 34° 59’ 00” S, 16° 39’ 00” E. 170-250 (-o) m. Gear TYF. Two specimens.
St. 270. 27. vii. 27. 13° 58’ 30” S, 11° 43’ 30” E. 200(-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
St. 282. 12. viii. 27. 1° 11’ 00” S, 5° 38’ 00” E. 300 (-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
St. 287. 19. viii. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” E. 800-1000 (-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
Remarks. Benham (1921, p. 58) suggests that both McIntosh (1885, p. 175) and
Gravier (1911, p. 65) are mistaken in stating that the bristles of the examples described
by them as V’. antarctica are simple and without articulations. A prolonged study of
MclIntosh’s type specimen has convinced me that as far as the latter author is concerned
Benham is right. McIntosh’s Alciopa antarctica has compound bristles. And in view
of the great difficulty of observing the chaetal articulations in some specimens, Gravier
may also have been mistaken.
V. antarctica is very close to V. formosa, but it seems to be a larger and more massive
species and lacks the two lateral processes on the proboscis found in V. formosa.
In V. antarctica they are represented by two papillae slightly larger than the rest.
V. antarctica is not represented in the present collection. Except for one example
of V. longissima there is no specimen of Vanadis from farther south than 34”.
Dui
82 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Genus Torrea, Quatrefages
Torrea candida (Delle Chiaje).
Asterope candida, Fauvel, 1923, p. 202, figs. 75 a-d.
St. 102. 28. x. 26. 35° 29’ 20S, 18° 33’ 4o”E. 104m. Gear N1ooH. Bottom 1800m.,
globigerina ooze. One specimen.
St. 294. 25. viii. 27. 4° 33’ 15” N, 16° 52’ 45” W. 100-150 (-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
Remarks. The genus Asterope, Claparéde, 1870, is both preoccupied by Asterope,
Philippi, in Crustacea and antedated by Torrea, Quatrefages, 1850. In the original
description the name Torrea is spelled with two r’s; Quatrefages himself, in his Histoire
des Anneleés (1865), and subsequent authors write Torea.
Genus Callizona, Greeff
Callizona angelini (Kinberg).
Fauvel, 1923, p. 215, fig. 81 dz, with synonymy.
St. 250. 17. vi. 27. 36° 09’ 00” S, 5° 33’ 00” W. 300 (-o)m. Gear TYF. Two specimens.
St. 254. 21. vi. 27. 35° 04’ 00” S, 2° 59’ 30” E. 200 (-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
Sis 257) Die Wl 27, BG Wil Co" Sy 10° 18’ 00” E. 250 (-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
St. 268. 25. vii. 27. 18° 37'S, 10° 46’ E. 100-150 (-o) m. Gear TYF. ‘Two specimens.
Remarks. The tentacular cirri are short and massive: I can find no trace of
denticulation on the appendages of the 08
stout bristles. Chamberlin’s Rhynco- q
nerella pycnocera is probably synony-
mous with this species.
Callizona bongraini, Gravier, from
Antarctic waters seems to have, from
Gravier’s account, long simple capil-
lary swimming bristles, and is there-
fore perhaps nearer to Callizonella, a e
Cp
Apstein, sensu Fauvel, than to Calli-
zona in which the long swimming
chaetae are compound. : —
P \ Ct ~ ae = ae
Genus Greeffia, McIntosh ee a ae
Greeffia oahuensis, McIntosh.
MH mC ai Ys
McIntosh, 1885, p. 182, pl. xxviii, Sage =e
figs. 5-7; pl. xxxii, fig. 11; pl. xv a, Qe A
fig. 4. . a) ) ——— D>
St. 273. 30s Vil. 27219 aS (OOS, La oy
12° 42’ 30° E. 200-230 (-o) m. Gear TYF.
One specimen. Fig. 25. Greeffia oahuensis. Ventral view of anterior end.
ALCIOPIDAE 83
St. 288. 21. vili. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. 250 (-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
St. 289. 23-24. vill.27. 3°04’ 45” N, 16° 52’ 00” W. 125-225 (-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
Remarks. ‘There are three pairs of tentacular cirri. The ventral pedal glands are in
these specimens colourless, and reach their full development about the 12th—15th
chaetigers. Greeffia celox (Greeff) has four pairs of tentacular cirri. I figure the anterior
end seen from below (Fig. 25).
Genus Rhynconerella, Costa
Rhynconerella fulgens, Greeff.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 210, fig. 79 a—d, with synonymy.
St. SS 33. 20.1. 28. 60° 52’S, 25° 59’ W. 250-100m. Gear N 70 V. Three specimens.
St. SS 53. 16. il. 28. 61° 30’ 00” S, 23° 20’ 00” W. 250-100 m. Gear N 70 V. One specimen.
29° 27’ N, 15° 07’ W. o-goom. One specimen.
‘3mm
Fig. 26. Rhynconerella fulgens. Middle foot.
Remarks. The dorsal cirrus of the 3rd segment is about twice the length of the other
tentacular cirri: there is only a single acicular chaeta in the middle feet (Fig. 26).
Ehlers records this species from 58° 29’ S, 89° 58’ E.
According to Chamberlin (1919, p. 143) Rhynconerella gracilis is the type species of
Costa’s genus. R. gracilis is the same as Callizona nasuta, Greeff, the type species of
Greeft’s Callizona, which genus therefore becomes a synonym of Rhynconerella. This
means that all the species which previous authors grouped under Callizona are now to
change their generic name to Rhynconerella, and Chamberlin has supplied Plotohelmis
as the generic name for the species that previous authors have grouped under Rhyn-
conerella. Rhynconerella fulgens, Greeff, is presumably the type species of Chamberlin’s
Plotohelmis. It seems to me that this is an occasion when to adhere to the rule of priority
would only lead to confusion, so I retain the generic names Callizona and Rhynconerella
in the sense in which they are used by Apstein, Fauvel and others.
The example from 29° 27’ N, 15° 07’ W is in two pieces, which together measure
about 15 mm. in length. The condition precludes a satisfactory examination, but the
shape of the body is more elongated and slender than in the Antarctic specimens. ‘They
may possibly belong to the longer and more slender Rhynconerella alata (Chamberlin).
I can, however, discover no distinction in the feet between this specimen and R. fulgens.
II-2
84 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Genus Alciopa, Audouin and M.- Edwards
Alciopa cantrainii (Delle Chiaje).
Apstein, 1900, p. 7, pl. v, fig. 53.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 203, fig. 76 a-e.
St. 100. 2. x. 26. 33° 20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00" S, 15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ 00” E. 475 (—o) m. Gear
TYF. One specimen.
St. 287. 19. viii. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. 800-1000 (-o) m. Gear TYF. Four specimens.
St. 289. 23-24. vili. 27. 3° 04’ 45” N, 16° 52’ 00” W. 125-225 (-o)m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
Remarks. In the specimen from St. 100 the ventral cirri of the first 25 chaetigers
are swollen with a white opaque inclusion, which proves to be sperm; and from the
roth to the 25th chaetigers there are just below the feet conspicuous white patches also
filled with genital products.
The type specimen of McIntosh’s A. quadrioculata is useless for purposes of iden-
tification or comparison.
Family TTOMOP'TERIDAE
Genus Tomopteris, Eschscholtz
Tomopteris (Tomopteris) carpenteri, Quatrefages.
Benham, 1921, p. 61, pl. viii, figs. 64-66, and 1929, p. 191, pl. il, figs. 18-23.
St. 17. 4. iii. 26. 46 miles N 46° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 250-100 m. Gear N 70 V.
One specimen.
St. 36. 18. iii. 26. 38 miles N 39° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. o-5 m. Gear N 100 H. One
specimen. 50(-0)m. Gear N100H. One specimen. go (—o) m. Gear N roo H. 'T'wo specimens.
St. 37. 18-19. iii. 26. 28 miles N 36° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. go (-o) m. Gear N 100 H.
Seventeen specimens.
St. 38. 19. iii. 26. 18-5 miles N 33° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. o-5 m. Gear N roo H.
‘Two specimens.
St. 41. 28. ili. 26. 164 miles N 39° E of Barff Point, South Georgia. o-5 m. Gear N 100 H.
‘Three specimens.
St. 114. 12. xi. 26. 52° 25’ 00” S, 9° 50’ 00” E. 90m. Gear N 100 H. Five specimens.
St. 118. 19. xi. 26. 53° 07’ 00” S, 1° 26’ 00” W. 100m. Gear N roo H. Three specimens.
St. MS 11. 14. ii. 25. } mile SSW of Hope Point, East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia.
gm. Gear NC 50H. One specimen.
St. MS 19. 9. iv. 25. 3 miles SW of Merton Rock, East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia.
160 (-o) m. Gear NC 50 V. One specimen.
St. MS 22: 9. iv. 25. 1-3 miles N of Dartmouth Point, East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia.
40-om. Gear NC 50 V. One specimen.
St. MS 25. 13. iv. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 43 cables NE to 1} cables N x W
of Hobart Rock. tom. Gear NC 50H. One specimen.
TOMOPTERIDAE 85
St. MS 31. 30. iv. 25. 2 miles N } E of Macmahon Rock, East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia.
40-om. Gear NC 50 V. One specimen.
St. MS 32. 1. v. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 44 cables NE of Hobart Rock
to 13 miles SSE of Hope Point. o-5 m. Gear NC 50H. One specimen.
St. MS 34 a. 2. v. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3} miles SSW of Merton Rock
to 43 cables NE of Hobart Rock. 20m. Gear NC 50 H. One specimen.
St. MS 62. 24. ii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. } cable E to 3? cables S of
Hobart Rock. o-5 m. N 70H. Five specimens.
St. MS 68. 2. ili. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S } E to 84 cables
SE x E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. One specimen.
St. SS 6. 29. xi. 27. 54° 20’ 00” S, 29° 31’ 00” W. 137-om. Gear N 100 B. Two specimens.
St. 5S ro. 2. xii. 27. 54° 30’ 20” S, 29° 38’ 43” W. 100-om. Gear N 100 B. One specimen.
St. SS 12. 6. xii. 27. 54° 30’ 20”S, 29° 50’ 20” W. 122-0om. Gear N 100 B. One specimen.
St. SS 16. 14. xii. 27. 55° 00’ 00” S, 27° 29’ 00” W. 104-0m. Gear N 100 B. One specimen.
St. SS 17. 14. xii. 27. 55° 00’ 00” S, 27° 43’ 00” W. gg-om. Gear N 100 B. One specimen.
Also Net 70 B. One specimen.
St. SS 19. 19. xii. 27. 54° 51’ 30” S, 27° 38’ 00” W. 137-om. Gear N 70 B. One specimen.
St. SS 21. 21. xil. 27. 56° 12’ 00” S, 25° 4o’ 00” W. 250-100 m. Gear N 70 V. Two young
specimens.
St. SS 22. 22. xii. 27. 55° 56’ 00” S, 25° 56’ 00” W. g5-om. Gear N 100B. ‘Two specimens.
Net 70 B. One specimen.
St. SS 32. 18. i. 28. 60° 57’ 00” S, 25° 57’ 30” W. 115 (-o) m. Gear N 70 B. One specimen.
Gear N 100 B. One specimen.
St. SS 57. 23. ii. 28. 61° 49’ 30” S, 23° 28’ 00” W. 95-om. Gear N 70B. One specimen.
Gear N 100 B. One specimen.
REMARKS. Some of these Tomopterids are large and handsome creatures measuring
about 65 mm. by 25 mm. including the feet. They correspond in detail with Benham’s
description of some examples which he attributes to Quatrefages’ species: this last is
not identifiable with certainty from the scanty description. Eyes are invisible in the
larger of my examples and present as a pair of minute black dots in the smaller. here
is normally no median notch in the prostomium, but in a few of the smaller examples
there appears to be a very slight indentation, which may be an artefact. The hyaline
glands are marked by a conspicuous brown patch of colour, and both they and the large
ventral chromophil glands can be seen without removing the foot or staining.
I believe that the T. planktonis of Apstein from northern waters is identical with this
species. The shape of the head and the position of the pedal glands is the same. The
only differences that I can discover are size—T. planktonis is recorded up to a length
of about 10 mm. only—and degree of pigmentation of the hyaline glands: in 7. plank-
tonis the hyaline glands are described as transparent and little pigmented. If the two
species are identical, 7. carpenteri has priority provided that we accept Benham’s
interpretation of it. The specimens of 7’. carpenteri described by McIntosh (1885) from
the neighbourhood of Kerguelen belong to the same species as those described by
Benham.
86 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Note. The above remarks were printed before Augener’s paper on the plankton of
the Weddell Sea reached me. Augener (1929, p. 303 ff.) claims that T. carpenteri and
T. planktonis are distinct species, both with representatives in Antarctic waters, and on
p. 306 summarises what he believes to be the distinguishing characters. I cannot here
discuss Augener’s conclusions, but if he be followed, the examples of T. planktonis in
the present collection are those from the following stations:—MS 11, 19, 22, 25, 31,
32, 34 A, 62 and SS 21. It is noteworthy that these are all coastal stations.
Tomopteris (Tomopteris) septentrionalis, Quatrefages ex Steenstrup.
Rosa, 1908, p. 297, pl. xii, fig. 17.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 224, fig. 84 d.
Benham, 1929, p. 195.
Tomopteris (Tomopteris) eschscholtzi, Greeff.
Rosa, 1908, p. 306, pl. xii, figs. 21-22.
St. 69. 25. v. 26. 45° 06’ 00” S, 49° 00’ 00” W. 45 (-o)m. Gear N70 H. Seven specimens (?).
Specimens in bad condition.
St. MS 26B. 15. iv. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 43 cables NE to 1} cables
N x W of Hobart Rock. 10m. Gear NC 50H. One specimen.
St. SS 6. 29. xi. 27. 54° 20’ 00” S, 29° 31’ 00” W. 137 (-o) m. Gear N 100 B. Three specimens.
St. SS 10. 2. xii. 27. 54° 30’ 20” S, 29° 38’ 43” W. 100(-5) m. Gear N70 B. Three specimens.
Gear 100 B. Six specimens.
St. SS 16. 14. xii. 27. 55° 00’ 00" S, 27° 29’ 00” W. 104 (-o)m. Gear N 100 B. Three specimens.
Net 70 B. One specimen.
St.SS 17. 14. xii. 27. 55° 00’ 00” S, 27° 43’ 00” W. 99 (-0) m. Gear N 100 B._ Four specimens.
St. SS 19. 19. xii. 27. 54° 51’ 30” S, 27° 38’ 00” W. 137 (-o) m. Gear N 100 B. Two specimens.
St. SS 20. 19. xii. 27. 54° 52’ 30” S, 27° 36’ 30” W. 101 (-0) m. Gear N 100 B. Three specimens.
St. SS 21. 21. xii. 27. 56° 12’ 00” S, 25° 40’ 00” W. 250-100 m. Gear N 70 V. Two specimens.
100-50 m. ‘Two young specimens.
St. SS 24. 24. xii. 27. 56° 49’ 00" S, 25° 35’ 00” W. 805 (-o)m. Gear N roo B. Fifteen
specimens.
St. SS 32. 18. i. 28. 60° 57’ 00” S, 25° 57’ 30” W. 115 (0) m. Gear N 70B. One specimen.
Gear N 100 B. One specimen.
St. SS 33. 21. i. 28. 60° 52’ 00” S, 25° 59’ 00” W. 250-100m. Gear N 70 V. Two specimens.
50-0 m. One specimen.
St. SS 35. 21.1. 28. 60° 49’ 00” S, 26° 32’ 00” W. 119 (-o) m. Gear N 100 B. One specimen.
St. SS 44. 3. ii. 28. 62° 23’ 00” S, 27° 04’ 00” W. 102 (-o)m. Gear N 100 B. One specimen.
St. SS 56. 22. ii. 28. 61° 49’ 00”S, 23° 54’ 00” W. 50 (-0) m. Gear N 50 V. One specimen.
Remarks. As Malaquin and Carin (1922, p. 39) have already noted, there is no
means of distinguishing between 7. eschscholtzi and T. septentrionalis except the
presence in the latter species of very indistinct hyaline glands in the ventral pinna.
In the present collection, among the examples from a single haul, it frequently
happens that some can be shown after careful preparation to have indistinct hyaline
glands and others cannot. Moreover, in a considerable number the state of fixation is
TOMOPTERIDAE 87
such that, while it allows the presence of the apical chromophil glands to be seen, it
renders impracticable the much more intensive examination necessary for the discovery
of the hyaline glands. It therefore seems reasonable to suppose that T. eschscholtzi is
a T. septentrionalis in which the hyaline glands were not or could not be seen. It is
also not unlikely that the distinctness of the hyaline glands in T. septentrionalis is
dependent on their functional activity. The alternative is that I should attribute all
the examples that for reasons of preservation, glandular activity, etc., have no apparent
hyaline glands to 7’. eschscholtzi and the rest to T. septentrionalis, a most unsatisfactory
procedure in view of the fact that in occurrence, habitat and structure they are otherwise
indistinguishable.
This is a considerably smaller species than T. carpenteri together with which it occurs
in large numbers around South Sandwich. It is noteworthy that whereas 7’. carpenteri
appears to be equally common round South Georgia, from the present collection only
a single 7. septentrionalis was found there. The anterior pair of appendages was not
present in any of the specimens.
Tomopteris (Tomopteris) cavallii, Rosa.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 222, fig. 84 a.
Benham, 1929, p. 197, pl. ii, figs. 27-28.
St. 89. 28. 6. 26. 34° 05’ 15” S, 16° 00’ 45” E. 1000 (-o) m. Gear TYF. Four specimens.
Remarks. In two of these examples, measuring about 12 mm. by 4 mm. including
the feet, a pair of small anterior chaetigerous appendages is present: they are feebly
developed and probably about to disappear: Fauvel in his diagnosis writes, “ 1°" appen-
dice sétigere manque, méme chez les jeunes.” ‘There is a pair of large brown eyes at
the centre of two ganglionic masses. There are no hyaline glands. The gonads are
situated in the dorsal ramus of the foot but in a ripe female some of the ova had
penetrated into the ventral ramus also.
Tomopteris (Tomopteris) nisseni, Rosa.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 222, fig. 83 e, g.
St. 78. 12. vi. 26. 35° 18’ 00” S, 19° or’ 10” W. 1000 (-o) m. Gear TYF. Two specimens.
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33° 53’ 45” S, 9° 26’ 30” E. 1000 (-o) m. Gear TYF. Two specimens.
St. 89. 28. vi. 26. 34° 05’ 15” S, 16° 00’ 45” E. 1000 (-o) m. Gear TYF. Three specimens.
St. 267. 23. vil. 27. 24° 31’ 00” S, 12° 15’ 30” E. 450-550 (-0) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
fe}
St. 282. 12. viii. 27. 1° 11’ 00” S, 5° 38’ 00” E. 300 (-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
St. 288. 21. vili. 27. 00° 56’ 00" S, 14° 08’ 30” W. 250 (-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
St. 293. 24. vili. 27. 4° 18’ 15” N, 16° 51’ 00” W. 100-120 (-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
Remarks. The arrangement of the hyaline glands is very variable in this species (see
Malaquin and Carin, 1922, p. 36). Ina number of the examples from the various stations
the pinnules are frayed out in a curious way, a condition probably due to improper
88 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
fixation, and in them the arrangement of the glands cannot be studied, but the occur-
rence of the ventral glands from the 4th foot and of the dorsal from the 8th—gth, as
recorded by Southern, seems to be the more usual. Malaquin and Carin maintain that
there is no definite dividing line between the pinnule and the trunk of the foot, and
recognise an outer wrinkled part of the pinnule and an inner smooth part. I suggest
that the limits of the pinnules are largely, if not entirely, a matter of fixation.
Sub-genus Johnstonella, Gosse
Tomopteris (Johnstonella) kempi, n.sp.
,
St. 4. 30. 1. 25. Tristan da Cunha. 36° 55’ 00”S, 12° 12’ 00” W. o-10m. Gear N 100H.
Seven specimens.
Fig. 27. Tomopteris kempi. Middle foot.
DescripTION. The largest of these specimens measures 55 mm. by 20 mm. including
the feet (there are 16 pairs of parapodia excluding the tail segments): among them
there are two young specimens measuring 12 mm. by 5 mm.
The body has a rather swollen appearance and is very transparent: there is a monili-
form tail of seven or eight segments in which the feet are reduced to minute processes
near the segmental constrictions. The frontal horns curve backwards and there is a
very small notch between them. The neck is fairly stout. The anterior chaetigerous
processes are absent and the posterior are in the fully grown specimens about three-
quarters the length of the body, and in the young specimens about a third as long again
as the body:
The brain is cordiform and the eyes are only visible when the specimen is cleared.
Vibratile pits are present but their exact course cannot be seen because of the dis-
tortion of the prostomium in all the examples, caused by the eversion of the proboscis.
TYPHLOSCOLECIDAE 89
The upper end of the latter is produced into a kind of peak and overhangs the lower
end.
The feet (Fig. 27) are very large and prominent and the pinnules small in com-
parison. On the first two feet I can find no trace of a rosette either on the pedal trunks
or on the pinnules. On the third and subsequent feet at the point where the trunk of
the foot at its apex merges into the pinnule there is a rosette gland on both dorsal and
ventral rami. It has the appearance of a small black oculiform spot and beyond it
towards the edge of the pinnule is an area filled with brown granules.
I can see no spindle of fine tubules such as is sometimes visible in hyaline glands;
moreover, its position in close apposition to the trunk of the foot and the fact that it
faces outwards towards the edge of the pinnule, and not inwards towards the foot,
strengthen the presumption that it is a true rosette and not a hyaline gland. On the
lower part of the pinnule of the ventral ramus is a cupuliform chromophil gland which
varies considerably in size in the different specimens. I can find no trace of what Rosa
calls an aculeo.
All the species of Fohnstonella with a tail hitherto described have rosettes on the
trunks of the first two feet or an aculeo or both. These structures are absent from the
present species.
Chamberlin has described three species of Tomopteris, T. innatans, T. eura and
T. idiura; Treadwell has also given an account of two further species, 7. opaca and
T. tentaculata. Unfortunately the nature and position of the pedal glands are not
specified with sufficient precision for these species to be capable of inclusion within
Rosa’s system of classification.
Norte. This species is named after Dr Stanley Kemp, the distinguished leader of the
expedition.
Family TYPHLOSCOLECIDAE
Genus Sagitella, Wagner
Sagitella kowalewskii, Wagner.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 228, figs. 85 a—c.
Benham, 1927, p. 80, pl. ii, figs. 33 and 34.
St. 17. 4. iii. 26. 46 miles N 46° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 500-250 m, Gear N 70 V.
One specimen.
St. 78. 12. vi. 26. 35° 18’ 00” S, 19° or’ 10” W. 1000 (-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
St. 85. 23. vi. 26. 33° 07’ 40” S, 4° 30’ 20” E. 2000 (-0) m. Gear N 450. One specimen.
St. 89. 28. vi. 26. 34° 05’ 15” S, 16° 00’ 45” E. 1000 (-o) m. Gear TYF, ‘Two specimens.
St. 116. 14. xi. 26. 54° 30’ 00” S, 5° 34’ 00” E. 110 (-o) m. Gear N 100 H. Two specimens.
St. 208. 7. iv. 27. Off Livingston Island, South Shetlands. 62° 49’ 30”S, 60° 10’ 30” W.
800 (-o) m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
Remarks. These specimens are conspecific with the example described and clearly
figured by Benham from the Ross Sea. I share Benham’s doubt whether they should
be referred to Wagner’s North Atlantic species, and unfortunately I have no example
DiIrl 12
go j DISCOVERY REPORTS
with which to compare them. Most of them are larger than previously recorded
examples, being from 15 mm. to 25 mm. in length. The number of segments is 22 to 25
and is fairly constant.
The collector made the following notes on the colour of the living individuals:
St. 78, “colourless transparent”’; St. 89, “‘transparent”’; St. 85, “‘ white opaque.”
Sagitella cornuta, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1913, p. 527, pl. xxxix, figs. 8-14.
St. 258. 25. vi. 27. 35° 03’ 30” S, 13° 55’ 00” E. 320-450 m. Gear TYF. One specimen.
Remarks. This single specimen has 23 segments and a length of 31 mm. It is easily
distinguishable by the paired digitiform processes arising from the nuchal organs
behind the head.
Sagitella lobifera, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1912, p. 24, pl. iii, figs. 1-4.
St. 78. 12. vi. 26. 35° 18’ 00” S, 19° or’ 10” W. 1000 (-o) m. Gear TYF. Two specimens.
St. 85. 23. vi. 26. 33° 07’ 40” S, 4° 30’ 20” E. 2000 (-o) m. Gear N 450. One specimen.
St. 100. 3-4. x. 26. 33° 20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00” S, 15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ 00” E. 2500-2000 m.
Gear TYF. One specimen.
Remarks. I have compared these specimens with Ehlers’ type and am able to modify
his account of the nuchal processes on the head. There are only three lobes, a small
crescentic lobe in the middle and on either side two longer pinnate lobes with two or
three branches on each side of the main stem. Moreover, as Ehlers’ figure indicates, the
parapodia and the bristles are more prominent and clearly defined than in the other
species of the genus. The bristles begin on the 6th foot and not on the 1oth-12th as
they do in S. kowalewshit.
The collector describes the living individuals as “deep scarlet” (St. 100) and “‘ uni-
formly deep scarlet” (St. 78).
Genus Typhloscolex, Busch
Typhloscolex miilleri, Busch.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 226, fig. 85 f-h.
St. SS 53. 16. ii. 28. 61° 30’ 00” S, 23° 20’ 00” W. 250-100 m. Gear N70 V. One specimen.
Remarks. A single example which I believe to belong to this species. The cirri are
rather large, and it should perhaps be referred to T. phyllodes, Reibisch. Both species
have been recorded from the Antarctic by Ehlers.
Genus Travisiopsis, Levinsen
Travisiopsis sp.
St. 100. 3-4. x. 26. 33° 20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00” S, 15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ 00” E. 2500-2000 m.
Gear TYF. One specimen.
HESIONIDAE gl
Remarks. The condition of this single example precludes a satisfactory examination.
It is a large specimen with 25 feet and measures 37 mm. in length. It seems to be very
close to 7. levinseni, Southern, in the shape of the nuchal processes and in the very
wide insertion of the cirri: but the anal cirri are not spatulate. They are wider at the
base than at the end and the tips are bluntly rounded: they are supported by a hyaline
process. The collector describes the living individual as “‘ semi-transparent orange.”’
Family HESIONIDAE
Genus Orseis, Ehlers
Orseis sp. juv.
St. MS 68. 2. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S } E to 8} cables
SE x E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NCS and NRL. ‘Twenty specimens.
‘OS mm
‘4mm
Sx te
SS=
Fig. 28. Orseis, sp. Juv.
a. Head and anterior segments. 6. Foot. c. Bristle.
DescriPTION. A score of examples of a post-larval Hesionid with about 15 chaetigers.
The average size is about 4 mm. by -5 mm. excluding the feet. There are no colour
markings. The prostomium (Fig. 28, a) is rectangular, about twice as broad as long,
I2-2
92 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
with two pairs of almost contiguous brown eyes. At the outer ends of the head there is
a pair of small biarticulate palps. There are no tentacles, nor tentacular cirri. Behind
the head there are two or three achaetous segments and then a foot on each side about
half the size of the normal feet. The dorsal cirri are rudimentary, being represented by
small projections on the upper side of the foot: the ventral cirri are digitiform and reach
to the end of the foot.
The feet (Fig. 28, 6) are triangular in outline with a central aciculum and a bundle of
compound bristles (Fig. 28, c) with very long slender blades: the apex of the blades
curls over into a hook and there is a second tooth, the point of which is almost in con-
tact with the point of the hook. The pharynx is unarmed and crowned with a circle
of about 1o large papillae separated by rows of minute papillae.
Remarks. I have provisionally assigned these postlarval Hesionids to Orsezs: they
cannot be the O. mathai, Gravier, from Port Charcot, because Gravier’s specimens
measured only 3} mm. in length and were at a much later stage of development than
the present examples, which are slightly larger. ‘The compound chaetae, biarticulate
palps and uniramous feet bring this form nearer to Orsezs than to any other genus.
Genus Leocrates, Kinberg
Leocrates diplognathus, Monro.
Monro, 1926, p. 313, text-figs. 1 and 2.
St. 283. 14. viii. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. -75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. One specimen.
Remarks. A single specimen measuring 24 mm. by 3 mm. without the feet. It has
the large wing-like folds behind the prostomium, and the double upper jaw-plates
described for the examples from the China Sea, but the notopodium begins with the
4th chaetiger instead of the 5th. The L. greeffianus, Augener (1918, p. 219), may be
identical with this species, but the prostomial wings seem little developed and Augener
gives no account of the jaws.
Family SYLLIDAE
Genus Pionosyllis, Malmgren
Pionosyllis comosa, Gravier.
Gravier, 1907, p. 15, pl. ii, figs. 12-13.
St. 39. 25. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 8 cables S 81° W of Merton
Rock to 1:3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. 179-235 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. One
specimen.
Remarks. A single damaged example corresponding to Gravier’s description.
Pionosyllis maxima, n.sp.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Three specimens.
SYLLIDAE 93
Description. A considerable number of small fragments which probably constituted
three individuals. The largest fragment measures 21 mm. by 2 mm. without the feet
and is composed of 59 chaetigers. ‘The body is massive and arched dorsally. The colour
in spirit is pale yellow with vivid red-brown transverse bands across the back : this band-
ing is more intense in the forepart of the body than behind.
2mm
lmm
BA
b
Fig. 29. Pionosyllis maxima.
a. Head. b. Foot. c. Bristle.
The palps are fused at their base and the prostomium (Fig. 29, a) is broader than
long and rectangular. There are two pairs of almost contiguous eyes, one directly
behind the other. The three tentacles are slightly longer than the prostomium: the
median is inserted in the middle of the prostomium and the laterals further forward
in front of the eyes. The prostomium is deeply notched behind and the notch is hidden
by a flap-like prolongation of the buccal segment.
There are two pairs of tentacular cirri, the dorsal almost twice the length of the
ventral: the dorsal cirrus of the 1st chaetiger is the longest appendage of the body.
94 DISCOVERY REPORTS
The subsequent dorsal cirri are alternately long and short, the longer being about twice
the length of the feet including the bristles. Just below the dorsal cirriswimming bristles
are beginning to appear. The chaetal lobe (Fig. 29, 5) is roughly triangular, the apex
of the triangle being formed by the tips of the three acicula above the bristles. ‘The
bristles (Fig. 29, c) have long slender shafts with simple unidentate hooked blades. The
ventral cirri are massive processes comparable, as in Gravier’s Pionosyllis comosa, with
the chaetal lobe.
The pharynx is armed with a single large tooth and as far as I can see has no crown
of papillae: it reaches to the roth chaetiger and the proventriculus to the 24th.
Remarks. This species is characterised by its large size, its distinctive dorsal colour
bands and its unidentate chaetal blades. I know no other Pionosyllis that has this
combination of characters. It may, however, represent the epitocous phase of the closely
allied P. stylifera, Ehlers, but the partly sexually modified specimens from Auckland
Island attributed to Ehlers’ species by Augener (1924, p. 50) have a different colour
pattern and a number of bristles with linear end-pieces, absent in my examples.
Genus Eusyllis, Malmgren
Eusyllis kerguelensis, McIntosh. ~
McIntosh, 1885, p. 191, pl. xxix, fig. 4; pl. xxxiii, fig. 3; pl. xv A, fig. 13.
Gravier, 1907, p. 17, pl. ii, figs. 14-16.
St. 39. 25. ili. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 8 cables S 81° W of Merton
Rock to 1:3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. 179-235 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. One
specimen.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 115 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: fine sand. Three specimens.
St. 53. 12.v.26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. Hulk of ‘‘ Great Britain.” o-2m. Gear RM.
One specimen.
St. 56. 16. v. 26. Sparrow Cove, Port William, East Falkland Island. 1} cables N 50° E of
Sparrow Point. 103-16 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
St. 57. 16. v. 26. Port William, East Falkland Island. 5} cables S 20° W of Sparrow Point.
15 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
St. WS 72. 5. ili. 27. 51° 07’ 00” S, 57° 34’ 00” W. 95 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand and shell.
One specimen.
Remarks. The body is very massive and much arched dorsally as in McIntosh’s
description. The prostomium (Fig. 30, a) is broad and has a median posterior cleft, but
the transverse prostomial ridges are not equally visible in all these specimens. The two
uppermost bristles (Fig. 30, b) in every foot (Fig. 30, c) are long and slender and resemble
Ehlersia bristles. In McIntosh’s type the two uppermost bristles are also longer and
more slender than the rest, but they do not differ from the rest to the same extent as
the homologous bristles in these specimens, which are nearer to those described as
E. kerguelensis by Willey in his ‘Southern Cross’ report than they are to McIntosh’s
SYLLIDAE 95
type specimen. It is possible that there are two closely allied species of Eusyllis with
broad heads, massive dorsally-arched bodies and dorsal parapodial languets, but
differing in the character of the prostomium and in the upper bristles.
The specimen from St. 56 has swimming chaetae.
‘3mm.
Imm
Fig. 30. Eusyllis kerguelensis.
a. Head. 6b. Upper bristle. c. Foot.
Genus Trypanosyllis, Claparede
Trypanosyllis gigantea (McIntosh).
Syllis gigantea, McIntosh, 1885, p. 193, pl. xxx, figs. 1-3; pl. xxxiii, fig. 4; pl. x A, fig. 14;
pl. xxiv a, fig. 7.
Trypanosyllis gigantea, Ehlers, 1901, p: 85, pl. vi, figs. 11-16.
St. 27. 15. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3-3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. One specimen.
96 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
St. 123. 15. xii. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 4:1 miles N 54° E
of Larsen Point to 1-2 miles S 62° W of Merton Rock. 230-250m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey
mud. One specimen.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02'S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
One specimen.
St. 145. 7.1. 27. Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. Between Grass Island and Tonsberg
Point. 26-35 m. Gear BTS. Two specimens.
St. 148. 9. i. 27. Off Cape Saunders, South Georgia. From 54° 03’ S, 36° 39’ W to 54° 05'S,
36° 36’ 30” W. 132-148 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud and stones. One specimen.
St. 149. 10.1. 27. Mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 1:15 miles N 76}° W
to 2:62 miles S 11° W of Merton Rock. 200-234 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 160. 7. ii. 27. Near Shag Rocks. 53° 43’ 40” S, 40° 57’ 00” W. 177 m. Gear DLH. Bottom:
grey mud, stones and rock. One specimen.
St. 175. 2. iii. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 20” S, 59° 48’ 15” W. 200m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, stones and gravel. One specimen.
St. 190. 24. iii. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 93-
126m. Gear DLH and NRL. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. ‘‘ Found inside a colony of Cephalo-
discus nigrescens, living in the tubules of the polypides.” One specimen.
St. WS 25. 17. xii. 26. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. 18-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
mud and sand. Two specimens.
St. WS 80. 14. ili. 27. 50° 57’ 00” S, 63° 37’ 30” W. From 50° 58’ 00”S, 63° 39’ 00” W to
50° 55’ 30” S, 63° 36’ 00” W. 152-156m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. Two specimens.
St. WS 83. 24. iii. 27. 14 miles S 64° W of George Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 28’ 00” S, 60° 06’ 00” W to 52° 30’ 00” S, 60° 09’ 30” W. 137-129 m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
fine green sand and shell. Two specimens.
St. WS 84. 24. iii. 27. 74 miles S 9° W of Sea Lion Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 33 00” S, 59° 08’ 00” W to 52° 34’ 30”S, 59° 11’ 00” W. 75-74m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
coarse sand, shell and stones. Two specimens.
St. Wis 86. 3: iv. 27. 53- 53° 401 9,.00--34° 30° W. From 53° 53°00" S,)607 37, (co a Wiato
53° 54’ 00” S, 60° 32’ 00” W. 151-147 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, shell and stones. Three
specimens.
St. WS 93. 9. iv. 27. 7 miles S 80° W of Beaver Island, West Falkland Island. From
51° 51’ 00” S, 61° 30’ 00” W to 51° 54’ 00” S, 61° 30’ 00” W. 133-130 m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
grey sand. One specimen.
St. WS 97. 18. iv. 27. 49° 00’ 30” S, 61° 58’ 00” W. From 49° 00’ 00”S, 62° 00’ 00” W to
49° or’ 00" S, 61° 56’ 00” W. 146-145 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, gravel and stones. Three
specimens.
St. MS 68. 2. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S }E to 84 cables
SE x E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. Two specimens.
St. MS 71. g. ui. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 9} cables E x S to 1-2 miles
E x 5 of Sappho Point. 110-60 m. Gear BTS. Four specimens.
St. MS ?. 13. iv. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. One specimen.
Remarks. This species has been extensively studied by a number of authors, and I
have nothing to add to the numerous accounts of it already given.
SYLLIDAE 97
Trypanosyllis gemmulifera, Augener.
Augener, 1918, p. 278, pl. v, figs. gg—101, text-fig. 27.
St. 1. 16. xi. 25. Clarence Bay, Ascension Island. 7° 55’ 15”S, 14° 25’00” W. 16-27 m. Gear
NRM. Bottom: coralline sand and shell. One specimen.
Remarks. The single example of this species from Ascension Island corresponds in
detail to Augener’s description. The long cirri, the bidentate chaetal blades, and the
brown double banding on the back are distinctive. I can find no trace of buds.
Genus Autolytus, Grube
Autolytus charcoti, Gravier.
Gravier, 1907, p. 7, pl. i, figs. 1-2.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
St. 190. 24. iii. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00”, 65° 35’ 00” W. 93-
126m. Gear DLH and NRL. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. “‘ Found inside a colony of Cephalo-
discus nigrescens, living in the tubules of the polypides.” One specimen.
St. MS 14. 17. ii. 25. From 1-5 miles SE x S to 1-5 miles S } W of Sappho Point, East
Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 190-110 m. Gear DS. One specimen.
Remarks. This species is characterised by the very distinct nuchal organs and the
long slender tentacular and dorsal cirri.
In the specimen from St. 190, the pedal lobe is more thickened on top above the
bristles than as shown by Gravier, but less than in McIntosh’s A. maclearanus.
Autolytus gibber, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1897, p. 55, pl. iii, figs. 71 and 72.
St. 141. 29. xii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 200 yards from shore under Mount
Duse. 17-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom: mud. Three specimens.
St. 170. 23. ii. 27. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island, 61° 25’ 30" S, 53° 46’ 00” W. 342m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One specimen.
Remarks. The examples of this species are all in rather poor condition. A. gibber is
a more massive species than A. charcoti, the tentacles and tentacular cirri are thicker
and shorter and the nuchal organs very much less distinct. I cannot distinguish with
certainty the flap or gibbosity behind the head described by Ehlers. In the example
from St. 170, the transverse lines of pigment dots are faintly visible across the back,
but not on the cirri.
Autolytus simplex, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1901, p. 97, pl. x, figs. 5-8.
Pratt, 1901, p. 2.
Fauvel, 1916, p. 430.
St. 53. 12. v.26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. Hulk of “Great Britain.” o-2m. Gear
RM. ‘Twelve specimens.
pii 13
98 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 57. 16. v. 26. Port William, East Falkland Island. 5} cables S 20° W of Sparrow Point.
15m. Gear BTS. Four specimens.
St. 63. 22. v. 26. 48° 50’ 00" S, 53° 56’ 00” W. om. Gear NH. ‘“‘From floating Macrocystis.”
Four specimens.
Remarks. The four specimens from St. 63 measure 10-14 mm. by 1 mm. including
the feet and are in the “Chain”’ phase.
The head and its appendages are well figured by Ehlers, the rst dorsal cirrus being
longer than the tentacular cirri. The dorsal cirri are very short and rather thick and the
second tooth of the chaetal blades is longer than the first. ‘The pharynx runs straight
from the rst to 3rd chaetigers: in the 3rd it loops backwards alongside the proventriculus
into the 4th chaetiger: the proventriculus extends from the 3rd to the 6th chaetigers.
At the r4th chaetiger the stolon begins and is marked by a head in different stages of
development in the various examples. In the most highly developed there are two
pairs of brown eyes, a pair of forked palps, a median and two lateral tentacles. Behind
the head in the largest stolon there are about 45 chaetigers. The stolon seems to show
no differences from the stock except that the constrictions between the segments are
more marked. In the less developed specimens the head of the stolon appears as a
white pad of tissue across the 14th chaetiger. There are no traces either of swimming
bristles or of Ehlersia bristles. There is never more than one individual behind the stock.
Autolytus (Sacconereis) sp.
St. 135. 21. xii. 26. 54° 22’ 00” S, 35° 39’ 00” W. 64m. Gear N 70H. One specimen.
Imm
—_—as
ip
Fig. 31. Autolytus, sp. Middle foot.
DescripTIoN. A single example tightly curled round a cluster of eggs. The eggs are
very numerous and small, and the brood pouch is not visible, but the firm line of the
outer edge of the egg-cluster has the appearance of having been made by some external
container. All that can be seen, however, is the large mass of eggs adhering together
and apparently held in place by the twisting of the mother’s body around them. I
cannot make a thorough examination without uncoiling the specimen and so dislodging
the eggs, so I have to leave a number of characters unexamined. The colour is a
pale brown and all the markings are faded from the body. The tentacles and cirri are
indistinctly moniliform.
SYLLIDAE oe
The prostomium is broader than long, rectangular and with two pairs of large black
eyes. The median tentacle is very long, about five times as long as the prostomium,
and arises at the back of the head. The lateral tentacles are about half the length of
the median and arise at the sides of the prostomium between the front and hinder pairs
of eyes. There are two pairs of tentacular cirri which come off below the head. The
dorsal are about the length of the lateral tentacles and twice as long as the ventral.
The segment to which they are attached is incomplete dorsally. The first dorsal cirrus
is very long, of about the length of the median tentacle, and the following dorsal cirri
are about half its length, and the first three or four feet are very small and crowded
together. There are no ventral cirri. About the first ten chaetigers and the last forty
are without the long swimming bristles: owing to the coiling of the specimen I cannot
make an exact count.
There is a long dorsal cirrus below which in all the middle chaetigers (Fig. 31)
is a tuft of long transparent swimming chaetae: below these again is the lobe of the foot,
oval in outline and with a notch or incision at its apex just below the ends of the acicula.
The compound bristles are numerous, with a short bidentate blade showing a typical
Autolytus structure. For the reasons already given I cannot examine the pharynx or
make a measurement of the body length.
Remarks. I have assumed that the broad pouch in this specimen has burst and dis-
integrated, for the absence of palps and of ventral cirri, the structure of the chaetal
blades and the shape of the dorsal cirri all go to show that this example is a Sacconereis.
It may be the female sexual form of Autolytus maclearanus of which Ehlers (1913,
Pp. 492, Pl. xxxiv, fig. 3) gives a very brief account and a rather sketchy figure.
Genus Grubea, Quatrefages
Grubea clavata (Claparede).
Augener, 1918, p. 295.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 296, fig. 114 a-e.
? Grubea rhopalophora, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1897, p. 53, pl. iii, figs. 66-70.
St. WS 25. 17. xii. 26. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. 18-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
mud and sand. Four specimens.
Remarks. With some hesitation I refer these minute worms to Claparede’s North
Atlantic species rather than to the Antarctic G. rhopalophora, because the upper of the
tentacular cirri is decidedly longer than the lower. The dorsal cirri are of the gradually
tapering fusiform kind, and there is a marked constriction in the pharynx a short
distance above the proventriculus. The second tooth on the bristles is exceedingly
small and can only be seen at a very high magnification. As Ehlers has noted, there is
a considerable variation in the shape of the dorsal cirri in G. rhopalophora. If this
extends to the relative lengths of the dorsal and ventral tentacular cirri, the distinction
between G. rhopalophora and G. clavata ceases to exist.
100 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Genus Syllis, Savigny
Syllis prolixa, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1901, p. 92, pl. ix, figs. 1-7.
Syillis longifilis, Ehlers, 1901, p. 95, pl. x, fig. 3.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles
N 50° E to 7-6 miles N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: fine sand. One specimen.
St. 58. 19. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 1-2m. Gear RM.
One specimen.
‘05mm
Remarks. I have assigned these two specimens to S. prolixa, because
of their long multi-articulate dorsal cirri and the absence of a second 0
tooth to the chaetal blades. About the latter character it is very
difficult to be certain with the material at my disposal, but I am unable
definitely to find a subapical tooth. In the example from St. 58, traces
of a transverse brown banding can be discerned. The bristles (Fig. 32) F832. Sos
2 nea ‘ prolixa. Bristle.
closely resemble that figured by Ehlers for S. longifilis. S. prolixa and
S. longifilis seem to be growth stages of the same species, and the former has priority.
Syllis brachychaeta, Schmarda.
Augener, 1918, p. 247, pl. iv, figs. 83-85; pl. v, fig. 98, text-fig. 20; and 1924 A, p. 358.
St. 4. 30. i. 26. Tristan da Cunha. 36° 55’ 00” S, 12° 12’ 00” W. 40-46m. Gear DL. Bottom:
stones. “‘ From débris of stones with incrustations.” Four specimens.
St. 190. 24. iii. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 93-
126m. Gear DLH and NRL. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. “‘ Found inside a colony of Cephalo-
discus nigrescens, living in the tubules of the polypides.” Eight specimens.
Saldanha Bay beach, Cape of Good Hope. One specimen.
Remarks. Augener has studied this species at great length, and has come to the
conclusion that Syllis closterobranchia, Schmarda, and S. hyalina, Grube, are synonyms
of S. brachychaeta. I have not sufficient material to form an opinion of my own on this
matter, so I accept Augener’s conclusions.
This species is easily recognisable by its short pauci-articulate spindle-shaped dorsal
cirri.
Syllis brachycola, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1897, p. 38, pl. ii, figs. 46 and 47.
Augener, 1924, p. 362.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear NCS-T. Bottom: fine sand. One specimen. Also
at 115 m. Gear DLH. Two specimens.
SYLLIDAE 101
St. 190. 24. 11. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 50’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 93-
126m. Gear DLH and NRL. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. ‘‘ Found inside colony of Cephalodiscus
nigrescens, living in the tubules of the polypides.”” One specimen.
St. WS 128. ro. vi. 27. West side of Gough Island, inshore. 40° 19’ 00” S, 10° o4’ 00” W.
120-90 m. Gear DLH. Six specimens.
‘(04mm
a
Fig. 33. Syllis brachycola.
a. Bristle. 6. Head with pharynx everted (the papillae are omitted from the proboscis sheath).
Remarks. I have much hesitation in assigning these specimens to Ehlers’ species
because the head of the chaetal shafts is more expanded, and the blades (Fig. 33, a)
much shorter and stouter than those figured by Ehlers (/oc. cit.) and by Gravier (1907,
p. 20, text-fig. 14). I find two kinds of southern Sy//7s with long multi-articulate dorsal
cirri and bidentate chaetal blades in this collection. One in which the bristles are few
(seven to eight), and the chaetal blades are short and broad with a very distinct second
tooth; the other has more numerous bristles and longer and more slender chaetal blades
with a slight second tooth. In both, the pharynx is rather long, reaching to the 13th—15th
chaetigers and the proventriculus to the 2oth—21st, and the tooth is terminal.
The forms with the broad chaetal blades I have doubtfully assigned to S. brachycola,
and those with slender chaetal blades to S. variegata. In two or three of the examples
of S. brachycola the front part of the body is coloured brown, the pigment extending
to the dorsal cirri. One of the longer dorsal cirri from the middle of the body has
about 45-50 articulations. I figure a head with the pharynx everted (Fig. 33, 0).
Except in the shape of the chaetal blades, these specimens agree with Ehlers’
description.
Syllis variegata, Grube.
Augener, 1918, p. 234.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 262, fig. 97 A-n.
St. 2. 17. xi. 25. Clarence Bay, Ascension Island, Catherine’s Point and Collyer Point. Shore
collection. From buoy. Four specimens.
St. 52. 5. v.26. Port William, East Falkland Island. 7-4 cables N 17° E of Navy Point. 17 m.
Gear LH. Seven specimens.
102 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 55. 16. v. 26. Entrance to Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 2 cables S 24° E of Navy
Point. 10-16 m. Gear BTS. Three specimens.
St. 58. 19. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 1-2 m. Gear RM. Two specimens.
St. 283. 14. vili. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. -75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 77m. Gear DLH. One specimen.
St. WS 88. 6. iv. 27. 54° 00’ 00’ S, 64° 57’ 30” W. From 54° 00’ 00”, 65° 00’ 00” W to
54° 00’ 00” S, 64° 55’ 00” W. 118m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, shell and stones. One specimen.
(04 mm
O
Fig. 34. Syllis variegata.
a. Head. 6. Bristles.
Remarks. I have compared these examples with a specimen of this species from
European waters and I can discover no ground for separation. I figure a head (Fig. 34, a)
and two bristles (Fig. 34, 6).
‘Imm
Syllis sclerolaema, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1901, p. 86, pl. x, figs. 1-2.
St. 51. 4. v.26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles
N 50° E to 7-6 miles N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: fine sand. Two specimens.
Remarks. Two rather damaged fragments which I believe to
belong to this species. The body is rather massive and dorsally
arched. The prostomium is very small and the palps are very broad
at the base. I can see two pairs only of minute eyes, the anterior
larger than the hinder. The chaetal lobe has two unequal lips. ‘The O
bristles (Fig. 35) are broad at the head of the shaft and the articu- Fig. 35. Syllis sclero-
: laema. Bristle.
lation between blade and shaft can only be seen after careful
examination. The blade has the appearance of an uninterrupted continuation of the
shaft (pseudoypsiloid) as shown in Ehlers’ figure and it ends in a bidentate hook.
The ventral cirrus is large and triangular in outline.
NEREIDAE 103
Family NEREIDAE
Genus Nereis, Cuvier
Nereis kerguelensis, McIntosh.
McIntosh, 1885, p. 225, pl. 35, figs. ro-12; pl. xvi A, figs. 17 and 18.
Ehlers, 1897, p. 65, pl. iv, figs. 81-93.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 342, fig. 133 g-m.
Nereis larseni, Monro, 1926, p. 320, text-figs. g-11. For the rest of the synonymy see Fauvel,
LOL 7433"
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Seven specimens.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear OTL. ‘Off kelp root.” Bottom: fine sand. One
specimen.
St. 141. 29. xii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 200 yards from shore under Mount
Duse. 17-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom: mud. Six specimens.
St. 145. 7. i. 27. Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. Between Grass Island and 'Tonsberg
Point. 26-35 m. Gear BTS. Four specimens.
St. 163. 17. il. 27. Paul Harbour, Signy Island, South Orkneys. 18-27m. Gear BTS. One
specimen.
St. 164. 18. ii. 27. East end of Normanna Strait, South Orkneys, near Cape Hansen, Coronation
Island. 24-36 m. Gear BTS. Four specimens.
St. 175. 2. iii. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 20”S, 59° 48’ 15” W. 200m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, stones and gravel. Two specimens.
St. 190. 24. iii.27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 93-126 m.
Gear DLH and NRL. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. ‘Two specimens.
St. WS 25. 17. xii. 26. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. 18-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
mud and sand. Three specimens.
St. WS 56. 14.1. 27. Larsen Harbour, Drygalski Fiord, South Georgia. 2 m. Gear NH. From
kelp root. Seven specimens.
St. WS 65. 22. i. 27. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. Shore collection: from kelp
root. ‘Ten specimens.
St. WS 71. 23. ii. 27. 6 miles N 60° E of Cape Pembroke Light, East Falkland Island.
51° 38’ 00” S, 57° 32’ 30” W. 82-80 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand. One specimen.
St. WS 84. 24. iii. 27. 74 miles S 9° W of Sea Lion Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 33’ 00” S, 59° 08’ 00” W to 52° 34’ 30” S, 59° 11’ 00” W. 75m. Gear OTC. Bottom: coarse
sand, shell and stones. One specimen.
St. WS 86. 3. iv. 27. 53° 53’ 30”S, 60° 34’ 30” W. From 53° 53’ 00” S, 60° 37’ oo” W to
53° 54’ 00” S, 60° 32’ 00” W. 151-147 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, shell and stones. ‘‘ Found
in association with an Alcyonarian.’’ One specimen.
St. MS 6. 12. ii. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. } mile S of Hope Point to 1} cables
S x E of King Edward Point Light. 24-30 m. Gear BTS. Four specimens.
St. MS 68. 2. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay. 1-7 miles S } E to 8} cables SE « E of Sappho
Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. Two specimens.
104 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Remarks. I can confirm Ramsay’s (1914, p. 42) observation that the southern
examples of this species have no heterogomph spinigers. I have examined the type of
Nereis patagonica, McIntosh (1865, p. 228): the proboscis is withdrawn and previous
dissection has made it impossible to study the arrangement of the paragnaths with any
accuracy, but its general facies and its feet are those of a typical N. kerguelensis.
Nereis callaona, Grube.
Augener, 1918, p. 184, with synonymy.
St. go. 10. vil. 26. Simon’s Town, False Bay, South Africa. Basin of H.M. Dockyard. o-2 m.
Gear NH. One specimen.
Remarks. ‘The specimen from St. go is a small anterior fragment of 25 chaetigers,
and measures 11 mm. by 2 mm. including the feet. It is doubtfully of this species.
The proboscis is withdrawn, but as far as I can see, the arrangement of the paragnaths
corresponds to that in Kinberg’s figures of the proboscis (as N. angusta), with the
exception that there is clearly a single paragnath in Group V.
The feet are indistinguishable from those described for this species.
Nereis eugeniae (Kinberg).
Char. emend. Ehlers, 1897, p. 67, pl. iv, figs. 94-105.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear OTL. “Off kelp root.” Bottom: fine sand. Sixteen
specimens.
St. 52. 5. v. 26. Port William, East Falkland Island. 7:4 cables N 17° E of Navy Point. 17 m.
Gear LH. One specimen.
St. 58. 19. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 1-2 m. Gear RM. One specimen.
St. WS 71. 23. ll. 27. 6 miles N 60° E of Cape Pembroke Light, East Falkland Island.
51° 38’ 00” S, 57° 32’ 30” W. 80-82 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand. One specimen.
St. WS 70. 1g) Ul. 27. 50. ol 30/7 5, 64559 30. W., Prom) sie Co 00. 19,165 5 001 1008 Wiito
51° 03’ 00" S, 64° 59’ 00” W. 132-131 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. Four specimens.
St. WS 80. 14. ili. 27. 50° 57 00” 'S, 63° 37° 30° W.. From’ 50° 58° 007 5, (63-309) co” Wito
50° 55/ 30” S, 63° 36’ 00” W. 152-156m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. Four specimens.
St. WS 81. 19. iii. 27. 8 miles N 11° W of North Island, West Falkland Island. From
51° 30’ 00” S, 61° 15’ 00” W to 51° 30’ 30” S, 61° 10’ 00” W. 81-82 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand.
One specimen.
St. WS 84. 24. ili. 27. 74 miles S 9° W of Sea Lion Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 33’ 00” S, 59° 08’ 00” W to 52° 34’ 30” S, 59° 11’ 00” W. 75m. Gear OTC. Bottom: coarse
sand, shell and stones. One specimen.
Remarks. This species appears to be common off the Falkland Islands. It was first
recorded from there by Ramsay (1914, p. 43). It is considerably larger and slightly
darker in colour (in spirit) than the other two common southern nereids N. kerguelensis
and N. magalhaensis. It seems not to penetrate further south than the Falkland Islands.
Ehlers figures the paragnaths of Groups VII and VIII as vaguely distichous. They
form a single very sparse rather irregular row and in a number of the larger examples
they appear to be altogether absent.
NEREIDAE 105
Nereis typhla, n.sp.
Dt ah2. 17-1. 27. 53° 51’ 30° S, 36° 18’ 30” W. 245m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One
specimen.
ae lmm
QO“
SS
_ Af °
—/ —
ee 0 o
a b
Fig. 36. Nereis typhla.
a. Head. b. Foot.
Description. A single fragment measuring 26 mm. by 3 mm. including the feet and
with 58 chaetigers. The colour in spirit is a pale brown with a dark stripe down the
middle of the back, broader and more indistinct in front, narrower and more clearly
defined in the rest of the body. The prostomium (Fig. 36, a) is longer than broad and
the tentacles are about half its length. There are no eyes or ocular pigment of any kind,
even beneath the skin. The palps end in a conical terminal article. The tentacular cirri
are short, the longest reaching to the posterior border of the first chaetiger. The buccal
is twice the length of the following segment. The proboscis is withdrawn and the exact
arrangement of the paragnaths is difficult to discern. Of the oral ring Group VI alone
is represented by a small collocation of about five minute paragnaths. Of the maxillary
ring Group II is represented by a mass of about eight rather larger paragnaths, and
IV by an oblique distichous row of paragnaths of about the same size as those in
Group II. Iam uncertain whether Group III is present. The jaws are of the usual form
with three teeth below the main fang.
The feet (Fig. 36, d) are very like those of N. eugeniae.'The notopodium has two pointed
languets of about equal length, from between which the dorsal bristles emerge. The
lips of the neuropodial chaeta sac are unequal but with only a slight difference in size:
the ventral languet is of the same shape as the dorsal but a little smaller. ‘The dorsal
cirrus is very slightly longer than the upper dorsal languet, and the ventral cirrus is
small, set far back and reaches about half-way down the ventral languet. ‘The dorsal
bristle bundle contains homogomph spinigers, the upper ventral bundle homogomph
spinigers and heterogomph falcigers, the lower ventral bundle heterogomph spinigers
and heterogomph falcigers.
Dili I4
106 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Remarks. I had much hesitation in basing a new species on a single example, but
the complete absence of eyes together with the arrangement of the paragnaths is dis-
tinctive. This species is closely related to N. eugeniae: as I have already remarked about
that species, there is a tendency for the paragnaths of Groups VII and VIII to dis-
appear. When these are absent, the arrangement is similar to that in N. typhla. More-
over, the eyes in N. eugeniae are not so distinct as in most species of Nereis, and I can
confirm Ehlers’ observation: “‘Die Augen auf den Seitentheilen der hinteren Halfte
des Kopflappens schimmern in der atoken Form oft wenig deutlich durch die Haut
durch.” I regard N. typhla as a N. eugeniae that has lost its eyes and the paragnaths
of Groups VII and VIII.
Nereis pelagica, L.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 336, fig. 130 a-f.
St. 4. 30.1. 26. Tristan da Cunha. 36° 55’ 00" S, 12° 12’ 00” W. 40-46m. Gear DL. Bottom:
stones. Three young specimens.
Platynereis magalhaensis, Kinberg.
Fauvel, 1917, pl. viii, figs. 21 and 22, with synonymy.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7:6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear OTL. “‘Off kelp root.” Bottom: fine sand. Three
specimens.
St. 53. 12. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. Hulk of ‘‘Great Britain.” o-2m. Gear
RM. 'I'wenty specimens.
St. 55. 16. v. 26. Entrance to Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 2 cables S 24° E of Navy
Point. 10-16 m. Gear BTS. Two specimens.
St. 56. 16. v. 26. Sparrow Cove, Port William, East Falkland Island. 1} cables N 50° E of
Sparrow Point. 10}-16 m. Gear BTS. ‘‘ From carapace of Paralomis.” Four specimens. Also two
further specimens not so labelled.
St. 58. 19. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 1-2 m. Gear RM. Two specimens.
St. 145. 7. i. 27. Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. Between Grass Island and 'Tonsberg
Point. 26-35 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
St. 222. 23. iv. 27. St Martin’s Cove, Hermite Island, Cape Horn. 30-35 m. Gear NRL. Three
specimens.
St. WS 25. 17. xii. 26. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. 18-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
mud and sand. Two specimens.
St. WS 65. 22. i. 27. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. Shore collection: “from kelp
root.”” One specimen.
Sta Wisi 75 LO ill. 27.9551 Ole 20149, 00g 82 TmCOr Wi. shroml (sit s(OOn0Om)), s0Om2 OMOO mato
51° 02’ 42” S, 60° 31’ 42” W. 64-104 m. Gear OTC. One specimen.
Remarks. I share Fauvel’s doubt as to whether this species is separable from
P. dumerilii. 1 propose, however, for the present to keep Kinberg’s name. The two
specimens attributed by me (1926, p. 322) to P. dumerilii from the Straits of Magellan
and South Georgia should therefore be assigned to P. magalhaensis.
NEREIDAE 107
Of the specimens from Hermite Island, Cape Horn, the largest measures 105 mm. by
7 mm. including the feet, and one is an epitocous female. The various lamellae of the
feet (Fig. 37) are not so fully developed as those figured by Ehlers (1897, pl. v,
fig. 106) and presumably the meta-
morphosis is not complete. It is,
however, noteworthy that the ‘
: a 2mm é
change to the epitocous condition SM EE
of the feet begins on the 22nd :
A
chaetiger. According to Ehlers in
P. dumerilii the change begins from
the 21st foot and in P. magalhaensis —s
from the 26th. The present speci- ee
men occurs within the P. magal- —_— =
haensis area, but corresponds to
P. dumerilii in the disposition of the vz
heteronereid feet. ‘This seems an ik
additional reason for regarding the
~~
US
separation of the two species with Fig. 37. Platynerets magathaensis. Thirty-fitth
foot of epitocous 2.
suspicion.
St. 56 yielded four young specimens measuring about 7 mm. long, labelled “from
carapace of Paralomis.” ,
I have examined two specimens labelled by Benham N. australis, Schmarda, from
the Campbell Islands, but they throw little light on the question whether this species
should be identified with P. magalhaensis, as Benham and Ramsay claim. ‘The specimens
are more massive than any examples of P. magalhaensis that I have examined. More-
over, the buccal segment is very short, but this may be the result of improper fixation:
the pedal languets are rather thinner and more pointed than is usual in P. magalhaensis,
but in other respects they appear to be indistinguishable. This is a question that the
examination of a large series of specimens alone can decide.
Platynereis dumerilii (Audouin and Milne- Edwards).
Fauvel, 1923, p. 259, fig. 141 a-f, with synonymy.
St. go. 10. vii. 26. Simon’s Town, False Bay, South Africa. Basin of H.M. Dockyard. o-2m.
Gear NH. Fourteen specimens.
St. MS 82. 6. ix. 26. Off Salamander Point, Saldanha Bay, South Africa. 7-14m. Gear BTS.
Eight specimens.
Leptonereis loxechini (Kinberg).
Nicon loxechini, Kinberg, 1865, p. 178.
Nereis loxechini, Ehlers, 1908, p. 73, pl. vii, figs. 8-12; and 1913, p. 497.
St. 6. 1. ii. 26. Tristan da Cunha. 3 miles N 30° E of Settlement. 80-140m. Gear DL.
Bottom: rock. Eight specimens.
108 - DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Eight specimens.
St. 123. 15. xii. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 4:1 miles N 54° E
of Larsen Point to 1-2 miles S 62° W of Merton Rock. 230-250m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey
mud. Seven specimens.
St. 170. 23. ii. 27. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island. 61° 25’ 30”S, 53° 46’ 00” W. 342 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. ‘Twenty-eight specimens.
St. 175. 2. ili. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 20”S, 59° 48’ 15” W. 200m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, stones and gravel. Seven specimens.
St. 182. 14. ili. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago, 64° 21’ 00” S, 62° 58’ 00” W.
278-500 m. Gear OTL. One specimen.
St. 190. 24. iii.27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 50’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 93-126 m.
Gear DLH and NRL. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. One specimen.
St. WS 83. 24. iil. 27. 14 miles S 64°W of George Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 28’ 00” S, 60° 06’ 00” W to 52° 30’ 00” S, 60° 09’ 30” W. 137-129 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine
green sand and shell. Six specimens.
St. WS 93. 9. iv. 27. 7 miles S 80° W of Beaver Island, West Falkland Island. From 51° 51’ 00” S,
61° 30’ 00” W to 51° 54’ 00” S, 61° 30’ 00” W. 133-130 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: grey sand. Two
specimens.
St. WS 97. 18. iv. 27. 49° 00” 30” S, 61° 58’ 00” W. From 49° 00’ 00” S, 62° 00’ 00” W to
49° or’ 00” S, 61° 56’ 00” W. 146-145 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, gravel and stones. Seventeen
specimens.
St. WS 99. 19.1v; 27. 49° 42’ 00" S, 59° 14’ 30° W. From 49° 41° 00°S, 59° 14° co" W /to
49° 43’ 00" S, 59° 15’ 00” W. 251-225 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. Fifteen specimens.
DescripTION. The largest specimen
measures 175 mm. by 8 mm. including
the feet. In spirit there are no colour
markings. ‘The prostomium is as broad as
long with two pairs of large eyes. The
tentacles are about half the length of the
prostomium, and the palps are very broad
and massive with small conical styles. ‘The
longest tentacular cirrus reaches back to
the 5th-12th chaetiger. There are no
paragnaths.
The first two feet are uniramous.
A normal anterior foot has two large
notopodial languets, the lower slightly Fis: 38- bel has tear acacia
shorter and less pointed than the upper,
and between them in contact with the dorsal bristle bundle is a third and very much
smaller languet. ‘The neuropodial chaeta sac has two unequal lips, the anterior
rounded and the posterior longer and conical. The ventral languet is broader and
blunter than those of the notopodium. 'The dorsal cirrus extends for about half its
NEREIDAE 109
length beyond the end of the upper dorsal languet, and the ventral cirrus is the same
length as the ventral languet. The posterior feet differ from the anterior only in the
more slender and pointed character of the languets.
The dorsal bristle bundle contains homogomph spinigers, the upper ventral bundle
homogomph spinigers and heterogomph falcigers and the lower ventral bundle hetero-
gomph spinigers and falcigers.
The body ends in a pair of long pygidial styles.
Remarks. This species differs from Leptonereis laevis, Kinberg, from Guajaquil in
the shape of the head, the greater size of the eyes and also, as far as I can judge, from
his figure, in the shape of the feet. his species is recorded by Ehlers from Kaiser
Wilhelm II Land.
The examples from off Tristan da Cunha are doubtfully of this species. ‘They are
small and possibly young specimens, measuring about 15 mm. by 2 mm. including the
feet. The eyes are relatively rather larger than in the typical forms and the anterior pair
is crescentic: the tentacles are also relatively much larger, being about as long as the
prostomium. The tentacular cirri reach back to the 15th chaetiger. The languets of
the feet are relatively longer and narrower: the intermediate dorsal languet is reduced
to a very small process: the anterior face of the ventral chaeta sac ends in a kind of
rounded lobe and the posterior lip is carried out into a long digitiform process as long
as the languets. The interior of the pharynx is coloured dark red and I can find no
trace of paragnaths. I cannot clearly separate these examples from L. loxechini, of
which they may be young forms.
A number of the specimens from St. 170 had built tubes along the stems of a Hydroid
(Sertularia sp.).
At St. 123, off South Georgia, was found an epitocous male: the head and first seven
chaetigers are modified in the usual manner, the 8th to the 2oth feet are of the atokous
form, and from the 21st onwards they assume the true heteronereid shape, as shown
by the figure (Fig. 38).
Nereis (Eunereis) hardyi, n.sp.
Sta WVomGOn Salvia 2753 mu 58) GO! 9,00" 34: 30 We Bromli53= 52°00" 19560. 37,00. Wi to
53° 54. 00” S, 60° 32’ oo” W. 151-147m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, shell and stones. Eight
specimens.
St. WS: 88. 6. iv. 27. 54° 00’ 00° S, 64° 57’ 30” W. From 54° 00’ 00” S, 65° 00’ co” W to
54° 00’ 00” S, 64° 55° 00” W. 118m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, shell and stones. Eight specimens.
St. WS go. 7. iv. 27. 13 miles N 83° E of Cape Virgins Light, Argentine Republic. From
52° 18’ 00” S, 68° 00’ 00” W to 52° 19’ 30” S, 67° 57’ 00” W. 82-81 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine
dark sand. Seven specimens.
St. WS 93. 9g. iv. 27. 7 miles S 80° W of Beaver Island, West Falkland Island. From
51° 51 00" S, 61° 30’ 00” W to 51° 54’ 00" S, 61° 30’ 00” W. 133-130 m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
grey sand. Three specimens.
DescripTION. Nearly all the adult specimens are incomplete. ‘The largest measures
70mm. by 3 mm. without the feet and has about 65 chaetigers, There is a young,
110 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
complete specimen measuring 38 mm. by 1 mm. without the feet and with
70 chaetigers. .
There are brown markings on the head (Fig. 39, a) and back and the pedal glands
are brown. The length and breadth of the prostomium are about equal: there are two
pairs of eyes of equal size. The tentacles are about half the length of the prostomium:
the palps are rather long with conical styles. The longest tentacular cirrus reaches to
the 5th—6th chaetiger.
5mm
6mm.
2mm
4mm.
Fig. 39. Nereis (Eunereis) hardy.
a. Head and anterior segments. 6. Head and proboscis from above. c. Proboscis-ventral aspect. d. Foot.
There are no paragnaths on the maxillary ring: on the upper side of the oral ring
(Fig. 39, 5) are two paragnaths side by side both in Group V. Groups VII and VIII
(Fig. 39, c) are occupied by a single row of seven to eight rather large widely spaced
paragnaths. ‘The jaw plates have five very small teeth below the main fang.
NEPHTHYDIDAE III
The feet (Fig. 39, d) are very like those of N. kerguelensis and Leptonereis loxechint.
The notopodium has two conical dorsal languets of about the same size, between which
is a third very small languet in contact with the bristles. This third languet disappears
in the posterior feet. The neuropodial chaeta sac has two unequal lips, the anterior
rounded and the posterior longer and conical. The ventral languet is broader and
blunter than those of the dorsal branch. The dorsal cirrus extends for about half its
length beyond the end of the upper dorsal languet and the ventral cirrus is the same
length as the ventral languet. The dorsal bristle bundle contains homogomph spinigers,
the upper ventral bundle homogomph spinigers and heterogomph falcigers and the
lower ventral bundle a single heterogomph spiniger and heterogomph falcigers.
There is a pair of long pygidial styles at the end of the body.
Remarks. In its general appearance and in the shape of its feet this species is close
to N. kerguelensis. The intermediate dorsal languet is not so fully developed; there are
no paragnaths in the maxillary ring and there is a single heterogomph spiniger in the
lower ventral bristle bundle. I have not been able to find any heterogomph spinigers
in N. kerguelensis.
I have named this species after Prof. A. C. Hardy, the resourceful second in command
of the expedition.
Ceratonereis vittata, Langerhans.
Langerhans, 1884, p. 254, pl. 15, fig. 12 a-e.
Fauvel, 1916, p. 86, pl. vi, figs. g-11; pl. ix, figs. 16-20.
Ceratonereis rolasiensis, Augener, 1918, pl. iii, fig. 64-65; pl. iv, fig. 78, text-fig. 16.
St. 283. 14. viii. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. -75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. One specimen.
Remarks. The specimen from St. 283 corresponds in detail to Langerhans’ descrip-
tion and figures. The very sparse paragnaths are distinctive. The colour markings are
similar to those figured by Augener for his C. rolasiensis, which does not seem to be
separable from this species. The specimen is atocous, and I have not sufficient material
to add anything to the already published accounts of this species.
Family NEPHTHYDIDAE
Genus Nephthys, Cuvier
Nephthys macrura, Schmarda.
Fauvel, 1916, p. 436, pl. viii, figs. 1-3, with synonymy.
St. 27. 15. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3-3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. ‘Three specimens.
St. 28. 16. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3-3 miles S 45° W of Jason Light.
168 m. Gear DC. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 29. 16. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 5-9 miles S 51° W of Jason Light.
23m. Gear DC. Bottom: mud and stones. Nine specimens.
112 . DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Eight specimens. Gear NCS—T. Three specimens.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02’ S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30" S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
Six specimens.
St. 143. 30. xii. 26. Off mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 54° 12’ S, 36° 29’ 30” W.
273m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. ‘Two specimens.
St. 144. 5.1. 27. Off mouth of Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. From 54° 04'S, 36° 27’ W
to 53° 58’ S, 36° 26’ W. 155-178 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud and sand. ‘Two specimens.
St. 146; 8¢ 1. 275 53° 48’ 00"'S, 35° 37 30° W. 728m. Gear DL. Bottom: rock, Dhree
specimens.
St. 148. g. i. 27. Off Cape Saunders, South Georgia. From 54° 03’ S, 36° 39’ W to 54° 05'S,
36° 36’ 30” W. 132-148 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud and stones. Two specimens.
St. 149. 10. i. 27. Mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 1-15 miles N 763° W
to 2:62 miles S 11° W of Merton Rock. 200-234 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Six specimens.
,
St. 157. 20. i. 27. 53° 51’ 00S, 36° 11’ 15” W. 970m. Gear DLH. Bottom: diatomic ooze,
stones and fine sand. Seven specimens.
St. 159. 21. i. 27. 53° 52’ 30”S, 36° 08’ 00” W. 160m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Two
specimens.
St. 160. 7. ii. 27. Near Shag Rocks. 53° 43’ 40” S, 40° 57’ 00” W. 177m. Gear DLH. Bottom:
grey mud, stones and rock. ‘Three specimens.
St. 167. 20. ii. 27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. 244-344 m.
Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud. One specimen.
St. 173. 28. ii. 27. Port Foster, Deception Island, South Shetlands. Close to SE shore, near
Lake Point. 5-60 m. Gear BTS. Four specimens.
St. 175. 2. iii. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 20”S, 59° 48’ 15” W. 200m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, stones and gravel. Three specimens.
St. 180. 11. iii. 27. 1-7 miles W of N Point of Gand Island, Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archi-
pelago. 160m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. Three specimens.
St. 181. 12. ili. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00” S, 63° o1’ 00” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Fifty-two specimens.
St. 182. 14. iii. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 21’ 00” S, 62° 58’ 00” W.
278-500 m. Gear N 7-T. Bottom: mud. Fifteen specimens.
St. 186. 16. ili. 27. Fournier Bay, Anvers Island, Palmer Archipelago. 64°25’ 30” S, 63° 02’ 00” W.
295m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 190. 24. iii. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 315 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and rock. ‘Two specimens.
St. 195. 30. iii. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00” 5,
58° 28’ 30” W. 391 m. Gear OTM. Bottom: mud and stones. Three specimens. Gear DLH. Two
specimens.
St. WS 25. 17. xii. 26. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. 18-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
mud and sand. Two specimens.
St. WS 32. 21. xii. 26. Mouth of Drygalski Fiord, South Georgia. 225 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
grey mud. Seven specimens.
St. WS 33. 21. xii. 26. 54° 59’ 00” S, 35° 24’ 00” W. 130m. Gear NiooH. Bottom: grey
mud and stones. ‘wo specimens.
NEPHTHYDIDAE 113
St. MS 15. 17. ii. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3 miles SW of Merton Rock
to 24 miles NNW of Dartmouth Point. 110m. Gear DS. One specimen.
St. MS 68. 2. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S }E to 84 cables
SE x E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NCS-N and NRL. Fifteen specimens.
Remarks. There is very wide variation in the shape of the feet in this species on a
ground plan of a rounded upper dorsal lamella, a lower dorsal lamella that is always
gathered to a point at its apex and a lanceolate ventral lamella. I cannot discover any
correlation between the size of the individual and the degree of the development of
the lamellae: in the larger specimens the lamellae are usually relatively small, and in
individuals of about the same size there are wide differences in the size and shape of
the lamellae. St. 143, off South Georgia, yielded the largest example, measuring
200 mm. by 13 mm. without the feet.
From St. 173 (South Shetlands) there came four specimens in every way typical of
this species, but the lower border of the ventral lamella is serrated. They are quite
distinct from N. serratifolia, Ehlers, and indistinguishable in every other character
from N. macrura. I do not regard these serrations as even of varietal value. St. MS 68
(South Georgia) yielded a number of young examples, measuring about 10 mm. by
1 mm. including the feet.
Nephthys lyrochaeta, Fauvel.
Fauvel, 1902, p. 72, text-figs. g and ro.
Augener, 1918, p. 160, pl. ii, fig. 12; pl. iii, fig. 59.
St. 279. 10. vili. 27. Off Cape Lopez, French Congo. From 8-5 miles N 71° E to 15 miles N 24° E
of Cape Lopez Light. 58-67 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud and fine sand. Four specimens.
e SKI
mm : ify!
Hue = 2mm i)
g
WA
Fig. 40. Nephthys lyrochaeta.
a. Fifteenth foot. 6. Thirty-fifth foot.
Dili 15
114 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Remarks. Four anterior fragments, the largest of which has about 40 chaetigers and
measures 18 mm. by 3 mm. including the feet.
The proboscis was withdrawn in all the specimens, which makes the examination of .
the papillae impracticable. These examples do not altogether agree with Augener’s
description, especially as regards the dorsal cirri of the anterior segments. ‘The first
two chaetigers are biramous and not uniramous as stated by Augener: in this they agree
with Fauvel’s original description. Moreover, the 1st chaetiger has a long ventral
tentacular cirrus, the 2nd has an equally long thread-like dorsal cirrus, and the 3rd
has a shorter but still thread-like dorsal cirrus, intermediate in size between that of the
2nd and 4th chaetigers. For about the following twenty chaetigers (Fig. 40, a) the
dorsal cirri are very short and thick; and between the 2oth and 25th chaetigers they
lengthen to form the long filiform process shown in Augener’s figure (/oc. cit. pl. in,
fig. 59).
The middle feet (Fig. 40, b) correspond to Augener’s description and figures. The
pedal lobes are conical. The dorsal ramus has a fairly large delicate rounded posterior
lamella and a very small anterior lamella: below this is the very long dorsal cirrus and
the gill. The ventral ramus has a dorsal cirriform process, a large lanceolate posterior
lamella and a small conical anterior lamella. Behind the ventral cirrus the skin is
expanded into a small oval membrane.
Ehlers’ Nephthys inermis, besides having no papillae, lacks the dorsal cirri of the
2nd and 3rd chaetigers.
Nephthys serratifolia, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1897, p. 24, pl. i, fig. 13.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 115 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: fine sand. Six specimens.
2mm
3mm
Fig. 41. Nephthys serratifolia.
a. Foot. 6. Proboscis dissected out.
SPHAERODORIDAE II5
St. WS 79. 13. iil. 27. 51° or’ 30” S, 64° 59’ 30” W. From 51° 00’ 00” S, 65° 00’ 00” W to
51° 03’ 00” S, 64° 59’ 00” W. 132-131 m. Gear N 7-T. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
Stora tO-siva27- 52.53 45° 9, 64° 37’ 30° W. From 52° 54” 30° S, 64° 39’ co” W to
52° 53° 00” S, 64° 36’ 00” W. 191-205 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand and shell. One
specimen.
Remarks. This species has a rounded upper posterior dorsal lamella (Fig. 41, a),
a slender lanceolate lower posterior dorsal lamella, a cirriform process at the base of
the gill, a slender anterior digitiform process, a laciniated posterior ventral lamella with
about five digitiform processes and a small pointed anterior ventral lamella.
Behind the ventral cirrus there is also a scale-like process similar to that figured by
Ehlers. In all the examples the proboscis (Fig. 41, 6) was withdrawn, but dissection
showed a number of short rows of long papillae in addition to the usual large papillae
at the apex.
Family SPHAERODORIDAE
Genus Ephesia, Rathke
Ephesia antarctica, McIntosh.
McIntosh, 1885, p. 361, pl. xliv, fig. 5; pl. xxii a, figs. 22-23.
Ehlers, 1908, p. 107, pl. xiv, figs. 7-13.
St. 170. 23. ii. 27. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island. 61° 25’ 30” S, 53° 46’ 00” W. 342 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Four specimens.
Family GLYCERIDAE
Genus Glycera, Savigny
Glycera capitata, Oersted.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 385, fig. 151 a-e.
St. 4. 30. i. 26. Tristan da Cunha. 36° 55’ 00” S, 12° 12’ 00” W. 40-46 m. Gear DL. Bottom:
stones. One specimen.
St. 27. 15. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3:3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. ‘Two specimens.
St. 39. 25. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 8 cables S 81° W of Merton
Rock to 1-3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. .179-235 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. One
specimen.
St. 42. 1. iv. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 6-3 miles N 89° E of
Jason Light to 4 miles N 39° E of Jason Light. 120-204 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One
specimen.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Soe 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Eight specimens.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear NCS-T. Bottom: fine sand. One specimen. Gear
OTL. Twelve specimens.
St. 55. 16. v. 26. Entrance to Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 2 cables S 24° E of Navy
Point. 10-16 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
116 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 58. 19. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 1-2m. Gear RM. One specimen.
St. 123. 15. xii. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 4-1 miles N 54° E
of Larsen Point to 1-2 miles S 62° W of Merton Rock. 230-250 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud.
Three specimens.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02'S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
‘Two specimens.
St. 144. 5. i. 27. Off mouth of Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. From 54° 04’ S, 36° 27’ W
to 53° 58’ S, 36° 26’ W. 155-178 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud and sand. Two specimens.
Gear NCS-T. Two specimens.
St. 149. 10. i. 27. Mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 1-15 miles N 763° W
to 2-62 miles S 11° W of Merton Rock. 200-234 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 159. 21. 1.27: 53° 52’ 30" S; 36° 08’ 00” W. 160m. Gear DLH. Bottom: tock. Iwo
specimens.
St. 160. 7.11.27. Near Shag Rocks. 53° 43’ 40” S, 40° 57’ 00” W. 177 m. Gear DLH. Bottom:
grey mud, stone and rock. One specimen.
St. 175. 2. ili. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 20”S, 59° 48’ 15” W. 200 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, stones and gravel. One specimen.
St. 177. 5. iii. 27. 27 miles SW of Deception Island, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 30”S,
61° 17’ 00” W. 1080 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. One specimen.
St. 190. 24. iii. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 126m.
Gear NRL. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. One specimen.
St. WS 84. 24. ili. 27. 74 miles S 9° W of Sea Lion Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 33’ 00” S, 59° 08’ 00” W to 52° 34’ 30” S, 59° 11’ 00” W. 75 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand and
shell. One specimen.
St. WS 86. 3.av. 27. 53° 53° 307.5, 60, 34” 30° W.. From: 53> 537(00: 55,607 37 00) Weto
53° 54/00" S, 60° 32’ 00” W. 151-147m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, shell and stones. One specimen.
St. MS 68. 2. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S } E to 8} cables
SE x E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. One specimen.
St. MS 71. 9. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 9} cables E x S to 1-2 miles
E x S of Sappho Point. 110-60 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
Remarks. There is a certain amount of variation in the relative length of the pedal
lips, but otherwise these specimens are uniform.
I am doubtful of the necessity of keeping G. capitata and G. lapidum separate. hey
are usually distinguished on the following characters: G. capitata has eight prostomial
rings, the support of the jaws is hardly, if at all, notched in the middle and the bristles
of the lower bundle are all of the same size. G. apidum has eleven prostomial rings,
the support of the jaws is deeply notched in the middle, the ventral cirrus is more
pointed and downwardly directed than in G. capitata, and the upper and lower bristles
of the ventral ramus are stouter than the rest.
Regarding the number of prostomial rings, in the majority of these specimens this
cannot be counted with sufficient accuracy to be of any differential value: the supports
of the jaws are in many examples deeply notched and with one arm elongated: as a
specific differential this character seems to be valueless. Moreover, the extent to which
GLYCERIDAE 117
the ventral cirrus is pointed and obliquely directed downwards appears to be variable,
and is at any rate difficult to distinguish except within wide limits. The bristles, on the
other hand, are very uniform in size and show no differences between the middle
bristles of the ventral ramus and the rest.
I am inclined to regard G. capitata and G. lapidum as one species.
Glycera tesselata, Grube.
Ehlers, 1868, p. 654, pl. xxiv, figs. 2 and 33-34.
Augener, 1918, p. 394, pl. v, fig. 131, text-fig. 49.
St. 283. 14. vili. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. -75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. One specimen.
Remarks. A single specimen measuring 19 mm. by 2 mm. including the feet. I am
unable to add anything to the already existing accounts of this species.
Glycera convoluta, Keferstein.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 383, fig. 150 a—h.
Glycera tridactyla, Schmarda, Augener, 1918, p. 386, pl. v, figs. 142-143, text-fig. 47, with
synonymy.
St. 4. 30. i. 26. Tristan da Cunha. 36° 55’ 00” S, 12° 12’ 00” W. oe m. Gear DL. Bottom:
stones. Three specimens.
Remarks. The specimens from St. 4 are all in bad condition: the largest measures
128 mm. by 7 mm., including the feet, at its broadest part.
The gill begins on the 12th chaetiger and in the anterior segments reaches slightly
beyond the end of the bristles: in the hinder segments it is considerably longer. ‘The
feet consist of two pointed anterior lips, an upper posterior lip resembling in size and
shape the upper anterior lip and a shorter rounded lower posterior lip. There is a
triangular ventral cirrus. The small button-like dorsal cirrus is set low down just above
the foot. The papillae and the supports of the jaws are of the usual shape for the species.
The lips of the foot and especially the ventral cirrus are more prominent than those
figured by Augener for his South-West African specimens: and in this relation
Augener separates G. africana, Arwidsson, from the present species on the ground that
the pedal lips and ventral cirri are more pointed and prominent in the former species,
and regards G. africana as the tropical representative of G. convoluta, which occurs in
the more temperate zones to the north and south.
I find it hard to believe that the distinction between the two species is valid, for in
the shape of their feet the examples from ‘Tristan da Cunha seem to be nearer to
G. africana than to G. convoluta. Augener claims that G. tridactyla, Schmarda 1861,
is the same as G. convoluta, Keferstein 1862. I prefer to retain the familiar name.
118 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Genus Goniada, Audouin and Milne- Edwards
Goniada congoensis, Grube.
Arwidsson, 1898, p. 41, figs. 34 and 62.
St. 274. 4. viii. 27. Off St Paul de Loanda, Angola. From 8° 40’ 15”S, 13° 13’ 45” E to
8° 38’ 15” S, 13° 13’ 00" E. 64-65 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. Two specimens.
Remarks. The larger specimen from St. 274 measures 147 mm. by 3 mm. without
the feet. The number of chevrons on the pharynx is 14 and there are 44 paragnaths:
the larger jaw plates have four teeth. The biramous feet begin at the 28th chaetiger.
The feet are well figured by Arwidsson.
Augener (1918, p. 396) regards G. hupfert, Arwidsson, as a young form of this species.
Family EUNICIDAE, sensu Grube
Sub-family EUNICINAE, Kinberg
Genus Eunice, Cuvier
Eunice pennata (O. F. Miiller).
Fauvel, 1923, p. 400, fig. 156 h-o.
Eunice norvegica, Augener, 1928, p. 727, with synonymy.
St. 6. 1. ii. 26. Tristan da Cunha. 3 miles N 30° E of Settlement. 80-140 m. Gear DL.
Bottom: rock. One specimen.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 115 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: fine sand. One specimen.
St. 152. 17. 4. 27. 53° 51° 90" S, 36° 18’ 30" W. 245m. Gear DLH. Bottom: stock.) six
specimens.
St. 156. 20.1. 27. 53° 51’ 00” S, 36° 21’ 30” W. 200-236 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Ten
specimens.
St. 157. 20. i. 27. 53° 51’ 00” S, 36° 11’ 15” W. 970m. Gear DLH. Bottom: diatomic ooze,
stones, fine sand. One specimen.
St. 159. 21.1. 27. 53° 52’ 30” S, 36° 08’ 00” W. 160m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One hundred
and ten specimens.
St. 160. 7.11.27. Near Shag Rocks. 53° 43’ 40” S, 40° 57’ 00” W. 177 m. Gear DLH. Bottom:
grey mud, stones and rock. Fifty-five specimens.
Remarks. The colour in spirit is pale brown, and an average specimen measures
about 80 mm. by 4 mm. including the feet, and has about 100 chaetigers. The head is
only slightly indented in front. The tentacles are not strictly moniliform but constricted
at intervals into a number of articles of different length. ‘The median tentacle reaches
back to the 3rd—4th chaetiger, and the outer lateral tentacles are about half the length
of the inner lateral. The tentacular cirri reach to the anterior edge of the buccal seg-
ment; these are indistinctly annulated. The buccal segment is equal in length to the
two following segments. The gills begin with a single filament on the 3rd (very rarely
EUNICIDAE 119
on the 5th) segment and end between the 4oth and 45th segments. Very rarely they
are continued to about the 6oth chaetiger. They are at their maximum development
between the 2oth and 30th chaetigers, where they are usually composed of 7-8 filaments.
One large specimen from St. 152 has as many as 15 filaments. The acicula are yellow,
as is also the hooded bidentate subacicular chaeta which begins between the 30th and
35th chaetigers. ‘The comb chaetae have the lateral tooth of one side much elongated.
There are two pairs of pygidial styles, the upper long and the lower very short.
The anterior edge of the lower jaw plates (Fig. 42, a) is calcareous and irregular, often
with three more or less distinct teeth.
3mm
2mm
a O
Fig. 42. Eunice pennata.
a. Lower jaw plates. 6. Upper jaws.
The dental formula (Fig. 42, 5) is as follows: 8 or g—g: 9 or 10 + 7 or 8—r2. Maxilla
V is represented by a small chitinous plate.
These specimens seem to me to be indistinguishable from a rather small example of
the uncommon deep water European species. Augener and Fauvel give the length as
between 60 and 150 mm. Fauvel gives the number of gill filaments in a fully developed
branchia as between 8 and 17, and Augener as between Io and 22. In these specimens
8-15 is the maximum. Fauvel states that the gills cease between the 30th and 46th
segments and Augener about the 6oth segment. In these specimens they usually cease
between the goth and 45th segments.
This species is closely related to EL. atlantica, Kinberg.
Ehlers (1901, p. 125) gives an account of a small example of the latter species mea-
suring 41 mm. long and with 124 chaetigers. In this the median tentacle reaches back
to the gth segment (7th chaetiger) and the first and second segments are together equal
120 2 DISCOVERY REPORTS
in length to the five following segments. The gills extend from the 3rd to the 6oth
chaetigers and have a maximum of 20 branches.
The dental formula is 1o—12 : 10+ 4-9.
Another small specimen measuring 30 mm. long described by Ehlers (1908, p. 87)
has gills extending from the 3rd to the 35th chaetiger and a maximum of four branches:
the ventral cirrus has an elongated thread-like tip.
The dental formula ts 7—8 : 7 + ?—?: Ehlers’ figure of the upper jaws is not very
clear.
I think it rather doubtful that the specimen ascribed with hesitation to FE. atlantica
by Ehlers in 1901 is conspecific with the one described by him in 1908.
Eunice savignyi, described by Grube from the Philippines and by Ehlers (1908, p. 88)
from 500 m. off the Cape of Good Hope, is also very close to, if not identical with,
E. pennata. The median tentacle reaches back to the 6th chaetiger: the first two seg-
ments are not as long as the first three chaetigers. The gills extend from the 3rd to the
4oth chaetigers and have a maximum of 6-7 branches. He records a single pair only
of anal cirri.
The dental formula is 7—6 : 7+ 7—6. The acicula and bristles are similar to those
described for E. pennata.
According to Augener E. pennata, O.F.M., is identical with Nereis norvegica,
Linnaeus (partim).
Eunice siciliensis, Grube.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 405, fig. 159 e-m.
Augener, 1918, p. 327.
St. 283. 14. viii. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. -75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. Five specimens.
Remarks. These specimens were taken, together with examples of E. Jongicirrata,
E. vittata and Nicidion edentulum.
Eunice vittata (Delle Chiaje).
Fauvel, 1923, p. 404, fig. 158 h-n.
Augener, 1918, p. 321.
St. 283. 14. viii. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. -75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. Fifteen specimens.
Remarks. The anterior ends of 15 young specimens, the largest of which measures
30 mm. by 1 mm. without the feet for 55 chaetigers. I can discover no annulation of
the tentacles. The gills begin on the 3rd and end about the 35th chaetiger and their
maximum number of filaments is five. I see only one tridentate subacicular chaeta.
The dental formula is 12—11 : 9 + Io—I5.
I can see nothing to separate this species from E. indica, Kinberg, a good account of
which is given by Crossland (1904, p. 318).
EUNICIDAE 121
Eunice longicirrata, Webster.
Treadwell, 1921, p. 11, pl. i, figs. 1-4, text-figs. 3-12.
Eunice articulata, Ehlers, 1887, p. 83, pl. xxiv, figs. 8-10.
Eunice antillensis, Ehlers, 1887, p. 84, pl. xxiv, figs. 5-7.
Augener, 1918, p. 314.
St. 283. 14. viii. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. +75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. Fifteen specimens.
Remarks. The largest complete specimen measures 160 mm. by 3 mm. including
the feet.
The body is extremely slender and not thickened in the anterior region as is usual
in the genus. The colour is a pale gold: the 4th chaetiger is colourless and the seg-
mental grooves are marked with a thin colourless band which widens slightly from before
backwards. Towards the middle of the body this colourless band widens out into a
triangular spot in the mid-dorsal line. The colour of the ventral surface is lighter than
that of the dorsal. The tentacles, tentacular cirri and dorsal cirri of about the first seven
segments are strongly moniliform with a brown colour band at each constriction.
Further back the segmentation of the dorsal cirri is not so clear and the banding appears
less regular.
The prostomium is deeply incised in front: the median tentacle reaches to the 4th
chaetiger and the two lateral pairs are shorter. The tentacular cirri are unusually long,
reaching to the end of the prostomium.
The rst segment is equal in length to the first two chaetigers, and the 2nd segment
is about half the length of the 1st chaetiger.
The gills begin as a single filament at the 3rd chaetiger and are continued for 80-100
chaetigers. There are usually about 40 post-branchial segments, but in one posterior
fragment I counted as many as 80. The maximum number of filaments in these speci-
mens is four. At about the 15th chaetiger reduction in the number of filaments begins,
and at the 35th chaetiger a single filament remains; this persists to the end of the gill-
bearing region. The gills are never more than half the length of the dorsal cirri.
The ventral cirrus is a stout subulate structure till the 5th foot, where it becomes
mammiform: at about the 30th foot it lengthens out again into a tapering process. At
the 30th foot the black bidentate subchaetal spine appears.
The foot is supported by a pair of large black acicula with tapering ends. The
compound bristles are clearly bidentate and the comb chaetae have long terminal teeth.
The bristles are figured by ‘Treadwell.
The dental formula is 6—5 : 7 + 6—10. The under jaws have calcareous end-pieces
with jagged irregularly toothed edges. The upper jaws are well figured by ‘Treadwell.
E. articulata, Ehlers, is treated by Treadwell as a synonym of the present species,
and a comparison of these specimens with Augener’s account of his examples of
E. antillensis, Ehlers, from the Gulf of Guinea has made me strongly of the opinion
that E. antillensis is also a synonym of this species. Like the allied E. coccinea, it 1s
very variable in coloration and in the number and arrangement of the gills.
Dili 16
122 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
According to Treadwell’s account the gills begin on the 5th somite (3rd chaetiger ?)
and disappear at about the 58th somite: they have a maximum of 15 or more filaments.
In E. articulata Ehlers records the gills as ending between the 30th and 48th segments
and as having a maximum of 13 filaments.
Ehlers again writes that the gills of his E. antillensis extended from the 4th to the
4oth foot and had a maximum of six filaments. Augener’s specimens had gills extending
from the 3rd to the 55th feet with a maximum of five or six filaments.
There is also much variation in the recorded relative lengths of the tentacles. In
Augener’s specimens the unpaired tentacle reached to the roth chaetiger. Ehlers gives
the 2oth segment (18th chaetiger) for both his £. antillensis and his E. articulata.
Treadwell gives the 8th somite (6th chaetiger) for the length attained by the unpaired
tentacle in his specimens, and in the present examples it reaches only to the 4th
chaetiger.
The present species is characterised by the very long tentacular cirri and by the
great length of the dorsal cirri in proportion to the gills.
Eunice rousseaui, Quatrefages.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 403, fig. 158 a—g, with synonymy.
Saldanha Bay Beach, South Africa.
Remarks. A large specimen measuring 220 mm. by 9 mm. without the feet.
Eunice murrayi, McIntosh.
McIntosh, 1885, p. 288, pl. xxxix, figs. 7-8; pl. xx A, figs. 19-20; and 1924, p. 26.
St. g1. 8. ix. 26. +5 mile off Roman Rock, False Bay, South Africa. 35 m. GearNRL. Bottom:
sand. Three specimens.
Remarks. Three small and ill-preserved specimens, two of which are incomplete.
The complete example measures 38 mm. by 1 mm. without the feet and has about
80 chaetigers. The gills begin at the 3rd chaetiger, have about four filaments at the
8th chaetiger, rapidly reach their maximum number of nine to ten branches and dis-
appear by about the 35th chaetiger. McIntosh’s type specimen has from about the
30th foot onwards two yellow tridentate subacicular crochets: in these specimens there
is only a single tridentate crotchet to each foot. On the other hand, McIntosh in com-
menting on a specimen dredged at 240 fathoms off the Cape (/oc. cit. 1924) writes,
‘a stout winged crochet,” as if in that specimen there were only one.
The jaws are well figured by McIntosh. The dental formula is as follows:
6—7 :74+ 7-8.
With the material at my disposal there is nothing I can add to McIntosh’s account.
According to Augener this species is a synonym of E. australis, Quatrefages.
EUNICIDAE 123
Genus Nicidion, Kinberg
Nicidion kinbergii, Webster.
Webster, 1884, p. 320, pl. xii, figs. 81-88.
Treadwell, 1921, p. 91, pl. vi, figs. 5-8, text-figs. 324-332.
St. 1. 16. xi. 25. Clarence Bay, Ascension Island. 7° 55’ 15”S, 14° 25’ 00” W. 16-27 m.
Gear NRM. Bottom: coral, sand and shell. Two specimens.
Remarks. The largest of the two incomplete speci-
mens measures 13 mm. by I mm. including the feet
and has about 65 chaetigers. The colour in spirit is
a pale brown. The prostomium is deeply incised in
front and the tentacles are short, the median, which
is the longest, barely reaching to the 2nd chaetiger.
The tentacular cirri are so small as easily to be
overlooked.
The flattened area of the body with the short
crowded segments extends from about the 5th to the
40th segments, about ten segments further back than
in Crossland’s (1904, p. 327) Nicidion gracilis. More-
over, the change over to the longer and more arched
condition of the posterior somites is much more
gradual than as recorded by Crossland for his species.
For the first five feet, there is a stout dorsal cirrus
reaching to the tips of the bristles, and a stout conical Fig. ee Nae Ei
ventral cirrus. By the roth chaetiger the dorsal cirrus es ts
is much reduced and the ventral cirrus is a conical projection on top of a glandular
pad. By the 25th the dorsal cirrus is still further reduced in size and the ventral cirrus
is amere button. At the soth chaetiger the dorsal cirrus is a slight digitiform process
as in the 25th foot and the ventral cirrus is again a small conical process.
The bristles agree with those figured by Treadwell. At about the 35th chaetiger the
bidentate acicular chaeta appears, and at the same time the yellow aciculum gives place
to a stouter black aciculum.
The dental formula (Fig. 43) is 5—5 :5 + 4—6. Details of the jaws are given in
the figure.
N. gracilis, Crossland, N. brevis, Ehlers (1887, p. 98), and the present species are
all closely allied. In addition to the differences between N. gracilis and N. kinbergii
already mentioned, Crossland makes no reference to the winged type of capillary bristle
such as is present in Webster’s species.
Ehlers’ N. brevis from Key West has slightly different upper jaws and the secondary
lateral supports to the lower jaws figured by Ehlers (PI. xxix, fig. 2) are absent from the
present species. .
16-2
124 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Nicidion edentulum, Ehlers.
Fauvel, 1914, p. 128, pl. vii, figs. 10-12.
St. 283. 14. vili. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. +75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. Four specimens.
Remarks. ‘These specimens are all incomplete posteriorly. The largest measures
105 mm. by 2 mm. without the feet, for 165 chaetigers.
They were found with a number of Eunice siciliensis, from which this species seems
to be indistinguishable except for the absence of gills. Fauvel’s suggestion that
N. edentulum may be a gill-free variety of EF. stciliensis seems to me to be plausible.
Sub-family ONUPHIDINAE, Levinsen
Genus Diopatra, Audouin and Milne- Edwards
Diopatra cuprea (Bosc).
Augener, 1918, p. 350, text-fig. 39, with synonymy, excluding D. punctifera, Ehlers.
St. 274. 4. vill. 27. Off St Paul de Loanda, Angola. From 8° 40’ 15”, 13° 13’ 45” E to
8° 38’ 15” S, 13° 13’ 00” E. 64-65 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. Eighteen specimens.
Remarks. The largest of these specimens measures 185 mm. by 5 mm. without the
feet. The gills begin on the 4th or 5th chaetiger and end between the 35th and 4oth.
The three posterior occipital tentacles have 18 rings to their tentaculophores and the
paired tentacles reach back to the 14th-16th chaetiger. The comb chaetae have about
20 teeth. There are no tubes.
I have nothing to add to Augener’s article on this species. I give my reasons for
doubting that D. punctifera, Ehlers, is synonymous with D. cuprea in my remarks on
the former species.
Diopatra punctifera, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1908, p. 79, pl. x, figs. 1-11.
St. WS 4. 30. ix. 26. 32° 45’ 00” S, 18° 10’ 00” E. 45-47 m. Gear DL. Fourteen specimens.
Remarks. An average specimen measures about 75 mm. by 4 mm. without the feet.
The colouring is similar to that of D. cuprea. The posterior occipital tentacles have
eight rings to their ceratophores and the paired tentacles reach back to the 4th chaetiger.
The comb chaetae are wide at the apex and have 15~20 teeth. The gills begin on the
5th chaetiger and are continued for about 40 segments.
The dental formula (Fig. 44, a) is 7—8 : 7+ 6—g, and the upper jaws resemble
Ehlers’ figure.
These specimens correspond closely to Ehlers’ description and figures except in the
structure of the lower jaw plates (Fig. 44, 6). These are black except for the calcareous
end-pieces, very thick, heavy and spatulate: they are widely different from those figured
by Ehlers. It may be unjustifiable to refer these specimens to Ehlers’ species, when
EUNICIDAE 125
the lower jaw plates differ so widely, but I do not know to what extent these are liable
to vary within the species.
Among these specimens there are five preserved in their tubes: the latter are round
in section and have a thick layer of mud overlying the tough parchmenty basis. Inside
one of these tubes were a number of young specimens together with the parent: these
specimens measure about 15 mm. by 1 mm.,and are at a much later stage of development
than the post-larval Diopatra cuprea described by Monro (1924, p. 193). They were not
very well preserved within the tube, but as far as I can discover, they do not differ from
the adult form except in size. Augener (1918, p. 354) regards this species as identical
2mm
oO
Fig. 44. Diopatra punctifera.
a. Upper jaws. 6. Lower jaw plates.
with D. cuprea. I can only say that in the examples of the latter species examined by
me the relative length of the occipital tentacles and the number of rings to their
ceratophores seem to be constantly greater than in Ehlers’ species. Ehlers’ specimens
came from 35° 19'S, 20° 15’ E.
Genus Epidiopatra, Augener
Epidiopatra hupferiana, Augener.
Augener, 1918, p. 355, pl. v, figs. 104-106; pl. vi, fig. 212, text-fig. 4o.
St. g1. 8. ix. 26. -5 mile off Roman Rock, False Bay, South Africa. 35 m. Gear NRL. Bottom:
sand. ‘Two specimens.
Remarks. ‘T'wo small specimens incomplete posteriorly: the larger measures 10 mm.
by 1 mm. including the feet and has 32 chaetigers. They agree with Augener’s description,
There are no tentacular cirri. The ventral cirrus and the cirriform prolongation of
the posterior lip of the chaeta sac disappear by the 4th chaetiger. The pseudo-compound
126 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
bidentate bristles of the first four feet are as figured by Augener. The comb chaetae
(Fig. 45, a) have about 12 rather long closely set teeth. The capillary bristles (Fig. 45, 6)
have a distinct narrow border along both
edges. There is a pair of large yellow
subacicular bidentate hooks (Fig. 45, c).
The gills begin on the 4th chaetiger and
there are only three pairs in all. They
have a long thick stem with a crown of
spiral filaments.
Regarding the jaws, I cannot with my \
present material discover the shape of
the carriers; otherwise they resemble O
Augener’s figure. ‘The dental formula is |
g—I0 : 10+ 7—8.
I have rather doubtfully referred these a
two fragments to Augener’s species.
‘04mm -2mnr
2mm
Genus Rhamphobrachium, Ehlers
Rhamphobrachium ehlersi, n.sp.
St. 172. 26. ii. 27. Off Deception Island,
South Shetlands. 62° 59’ 00” S, 60° 28’ 00” W.
525m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Two speci-
mens.
DescripTION. ‘Two fragments incom-
plete posteriorly. ‘The larger measures
28 mm. by 4 mm. including the feet and O
has 35 chaetigers. In spirit there are no
colour markings. There is a pair of
globular anterior tentacles. All the Hee , Comibichiaetaly 0. eanieeaenene
maining tentacles are short and thick. Ze Subchaetalltook
The outer laterals are spindle-shaped
with massive tentaculophores: the inner laterals are more slender and subulate. They
reach to the anterior border of the 2nd chaetiger. ‘The median tentacle is a little shorter.
The stout tentacular cirri are inserted on the anterior border of the 1st segment.
The first three pairs of feet are much enlarged and carried forward beneath the body.
In addition to a stout dorsal cirrus and a small conical ventral cirrus, there are a small
papilla on the inner and anterior face of the chaetal lobe and two papillae, a ventral
and a dorsal, at the apex of the chaetal lobe. Behind the first three modified chaetigers
the feet are of the usual onuphid shape (Fig. 46, a). The dorsal cirrus is rather short
and thick, just surpassing the end of the chaetal lobe. The ventral cirrus is a rounded
lobe and it is transformed into a pad by the 6th chaetiger. The cirriform prolongation
Cc
Fig. 45. Epidiopatra hupferiana.
lmm
0
15mm. 4mm
b
‘mm
fp
O
Oo
2mm
2mm
Fig. 46. Rhamphobrachium ehlerst.
a. Fourth foot. 6. Eleventh foot. c. Twenty-second foot. d. Dorsal capillary bristle. e. Compound
bristle. f. Comb chaeta. g. Subacicular hook. h. Upper jaws. 7. Lower jaw plates.
128 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
of the posterior lip of the chaeta sac disappears by the 1oth chaetiger. The gills begin
as a single filament on the roth—r11th chaetiger (Fig. 46, 6) and at the 2oth are bifila-
mentous (Fig. 46, c). In the present specimens there are never more than two filaments.
The fully developed gill is two or three times as long as the dorsal cirrus.
All the bristles of the first three modified chaetigers are broken off. The 4th foot
contains a dorsal bundle of capillary bristles (Fig. 46, d) and a ventral bundle of com-
pound bristles with knife-like blades (Fig. 46, e). There are three long pointed yellow
acicula supporting the feet. At the roth foot there are, in addition to the two types of
bristles already described, two or three dorsally situated comb chaetae (Fig. 46, f). At
about the 2oth foot a pair of yellow hooded bidentate subacicular hooks (Fig. 46, g)
appear and take the place of the compound bristles.
The dental formula is 7—g : 9 + 6—6, and the details of the jaws are shown in the
figure (Fig. 46, h). The anterior part of the lower jaws (Fig. 46, 7) is calcareous.
Remarks. There are three known species of this rare abyssal genus, R. agassizt,
R. brevibrachiata and R. chuni. The present species is distinguished by the low number
of filaments to the gills and the character of its bristles. Fauvel apparently does not
accept the genus Rhamphobrachium, for he redescribes (1923, p. 417) the Diopatra
brevibrachiata, Ehlers (1875, p. 49), under the generic name Onuphis. Ehlers (1908,
p. 78) has himself recognised that this species falls within the genus Rhamphobrachium.
Genus Onuphis, Audouin and Milne- Edwards
Onuphis eremita, Audouin and Milne- Edwards.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 414, fig. 163 a-l.
St. g1. 8. ix. 26. -5 mile off Roman Rock, False Bay, South Africa. 35 m. Gear NRL. Bottom:
sand. One specimen.
‘03mm
Remarks. A single specimen incomplete posteriorly and
measuring 23 mm. by 2 mm. without the feet. There are
60 chaetigers. This specimen corresponds in detail with
Fauvel’s account.
There are branchiae on every foot. Up to the 22nd foot
the branchiae are single: on the 23rd foot there are two oa
filaments, which are continued to the end of the fragment.
That which Fauvel describes as a little conical tubercle
between the chaetigerous lobe and the base of the dorsal
cirrus is only present on the first three to four chaetigers.
It appears to be a prolongation of the anterior lip of the
O
chaeta sac. The ventral cirrus disappears by the 6th chaetiger
and the cirriform prolongation of the posterior lip of the — Fig. 47. Onuphis eremita.
chaeta sac by the roth. See
The dental formula is as follows: 7—8 : 8+ 6—8. I figure a comb chaeta (Fig. 47).
EUNICIDAE 129
Onuphis notialis, n.sp.
St. 152. 17. 1. 27. 53° 51’ 30” S, 36° 18’ 30” W. 245 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One
specimen.
St. 170. 23. 11. 27. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island. 61° 25’ 30” S, 53° 46’ 00” W. 342 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Five specimens.
St. 175. 2. ili. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 20” S, 59° 48’ 15” W. 200 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, stones and gravel. Two specimens.
St. 190. 24. lil. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 315m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and rock. Four specimens.
DescriPTION. ‘The most complete specimen measures 35 mm. by 2 mm. and has
65 chaetigers. ‘There are dark red segmental colour bands across the body and in two
or three examples a longitudinal red stripe down the back. There is a pair of globular
frontal tentacles. There are five occipital tentacles. The inner lateral occipital tentacles
are the longest, reaching to the 7th chaetiger, and the median is slightly shorter. I can
discover no eyes. The tentacular cirri are inserted on the anterior border of the buccal
segment just behind the inner laterals. Up to about the 5th chaetiger the body is more
cylindrical and the segments longer than in more posterior regions where the body is
dorso-ventrally flattened
The first five feet have long cirriform postchaetal lips (Fig. 48, a), almost as long as
the dorsal cirri: the postchaetal lips diminish in size from before backwards and finally
disappear about the 16th chaetiger. In the middle and posterior regions of the body
the dorsal cirrus just fails to reach the tips of the bristles. The digitiform ventral cirrus
is absorbed into a pad by the 5th foot (Fig. 48, 6). There are no branchiae.
The first five feet have hooded tridentate pseudo-compound bristles (Fig. 48, c) and
delicately bordered capillaries. In some preparations one of the teeth of the pseudo-
compound bristles is lost and they have a bidentate appearance. Behind the 5th foot
the bristles consist of capillaries (Fig. 48, d) and comb chaetae (Fig. 48, e) with about
12 rather long teeth. At about the 15th chaetiger a pair of yellow bidentate hooded
crochets (Fig. 48, f) appear. The feet are supported by two slender yellow acicula.
The details of the jaws (Fig. 48, g and /) are given in the figure: the dental formula
is 7—9 : 7+ 8—10.
Remarks. I was much tempted to regard these specimens as young examples of
Onuphis abranchiata, McIntosh (1885, p. 314), described by that author from Antarctic
waters, but there are many points of difference between these specimens and those of
McIntosh.
In McIntosh’s type specimens the postchaetal lip of the 1st foot is thick and trun-
cated ; at the 2nd foot it is long and cirriform, slightly shorter than the dorsal cirrus;
it diminishes in size from before backwards but appears to be continued to the end of
the body. The ventral cirrus has become a pad by the 4th foot. The pseudo-compound
chaetae are described as bidentate and not tridentate, as in these specimens. Moreover,
piri ee
‘lmm
‘3mm.
‘05mm
; ‘limm
lmm
O
g h
Fig. 48. Onuphis notialis.
a. Second foot. 6. Tenth foot. c. Tridentate bristle from second foot. d. Capillary bristle from
tenth foot, e. Comb chaeta. J. Hooded crochet. g. Upper jaws. h. Lower jaw plates.
EUNICIDAE 131
the jaws, as figured by McIntosh, differ in many details of structure from those of the
present specimens.
O. sombreriana (McIntosh), and O. minuta (McIntosh), are both abranchiate species
but with bidentate pseudo-compound bristles.
Onuphis quadricuspis, M. Sars.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 418, fig. 165 f-p.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 115 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: fine sand. Three specimens.
wt. WS 78. 13. ili. 27. 51° o1’ 00” S, 68° 04’ 30” W. From 51° o1’ 00” S, 68° 02’ 00” W to
51° o1’ 00" S, 68° 07’ 00” W. g5 m. Gear DC. Bottom: fine dark sand. Five specimens.
St. WS 95. 17. iv. 27. 48° 58’ 15” S, 64° 45’ 00” W. From 48° 57’ 00” S, 64° 45’ 00” W to
48° 59’ 30” S, 64° 45’ 00” W. 109m. Gear DC. Bottom: fine dark sand, stones and shell. Two
specimens.
‘lmm
‘lmm
‘lmm
a b c
Fig. 49. Onuphis quadricuspis.
a. 'Tridentate pseudo-compound bristle. 6. Smooth pseudo-compound bristle.
c. Bidentate pseudo-compound bristle.
Remarks. All the examples are incomplete. The most perfect has about 40 chaetigers
and measures 30 mm. by 2 mm. including the feet. In one specimen there are red trans-
verse segmental bands across the back: they are either absent or very faint for the first
six chaetigers. The first four to five chaetigers form a kind of neck: the segments are
narrow and cylindrical and 1} times as long as a segment from the middle of the body.
There are two short ovoid frontal tentacles. The inner laterals reach to the 3rd chaetiger
and the outer laterals and the median are shorter than these. The buccal segment has
a pair of short tentacular cirri inserted on its anterior border behind the inner laterals.
The shape of the anterior segments is as usual in the genus. The ventral cirrus is
converted into a pad by the 6th—7th chaetiger. The cirriform posterior lip of the chaeta
sac disappears about the 17th foot. The fully developed branchia is longer than the
17-2
132 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
dorsal cirrus. The branchiae begin as a single filament on the 6th foot, are bifilamentous
at the 7th and have three filaments at the 30th. The latter is the maximum number for
these specimens.
The first five chaetigers have capillary. bristles and pseudo-compound bristles: of
these there are a few smaller and apparently unused examples which are hooded and
clearly tridentate (Fig. 49, a), but the great majority are absolutely smooth and apparently
without hoods (Fig. 49, 6): a few have a single tooth below the apex (Fig. 49, c). These
bristles are puzzling: I am inclined to regard them as old and worn examples of what
were once hooded tridentate bristles. The comb chaetae have about 12 rather long
narrow teeth. At about the 15th chaetiger a pair of bidentate hooded subacicular hooks
appears. The feet are supported by three rather slender yellow pointed acicula.
The dental formula is as follows: 8—8 : 8+ 5—g: Fauvel’s figure of the jaws
(Fig. 165 g) differs in a number of details from that of McIntosh (1908, PI. Ixiv, fig. 2).
The jaws of the present specimens correspond closely to McIntosh’s figure.
Except in regard to certain of the anterior pseudo-compound bristles, already men-
tioned, these specimens correspond to the descriptions of this deep-water European
species. Fauvel, however, states that it has no transverse colour bands: these are present
in my specimens. It is noteworthy that McIntosh (1924, p. 36) has recorded the presence
of this species at a depth of 47 fathoms off the Cape of Good Hope.
Onuphis iridescens (Johnson).
Northia iridescens, Johnson, 1901, p. 408, pl. vili, figs. 86-87; pl. ix, figs. 88-92.
Moore, 1911, p. 255.
St. 228. 2. v. 27. 53° 33’ 00” S, 61° 49’ 30” W. 650m. Gear N70 V. ? Net touched bottom.
Bottom: diatomic ooze. ‘Two specimens.
Remarks. One complete specimen and a second incomplete posteriorly. ‘The com-
plete specimen measures 72 mm. by 1 mm. without the feet. ‘The colour in spirit is a
pearly iridescent white. There are no eyes. There is a pair of globular frontal tentacles,
and the occipital tentacles have long ringed tentaculophores. The inner pair is the
longest, reaching to the 8th chaetiger, and the outer are about half their length. The
median reaches to the 4th chaetiger. The tentacular cirri are long and filiform.
Johnson’s figure of the 2nd foot of O. elegans (Johnson, Joc. cit. Pl. viii, fig. 80) is
exactly similar to that of this species. The long postchaetal processes are reduced to
small papillae by the rath foot. The ventral cirrus begins to be absorbed by the 6th
foot. From about the 15th to the 25th foot the cirriform gill and dorsal cirrus are of
approximately the same length. Further back the cirrus becomes increasingly shorter
than the gill.
In the complete specimen the gills begin on the 1st chaetiger and are continued to
about the 4oth segment from the end of the body. The gills are slender, cirriform and
unifilamentous throughout.
The pygidium carries two pairs of styles, one about half the length of the other. A
pair of hooded bidentate subchaetal spines appear at about the 15th foot.
EUNICIDAE 133
The jaws are small and rather delicate. The carriers taper down to two fine points:
the dental formula is 8—8 : 9 + 5—7.
In the same bottle with the specimens are three worm tubes: they have a very narrow
lumen and are made of a soft membraneous substance thickly coated with green mud.
My specimens from off Cape Horn seem to correspond with Johnson’s description
of his examples dredged at Victoria, British Columbia. The body measurements are,
however, different. Johnson gives 38 mm. by 3 mm. for 52 somites; my complete
specimen measures 72 mm. by 1 mm. without the feet for 170 segments.
Onuphis elegans (Johnson), from an unknown locality, is very close to and perhaps
identical with this species. Chamberlin (1919, p. 295) separates them on the ground of
certain differences in the number of teeth in the jaw plates and in the shape of the teeth
of the pseudo-compound bristles, both of which characters are within certain limits
matters of individual variation.
Eyes are present in O. elegans and absent in this species: this is, however, not always
a satisfactory specific character (v. Ehlers, 1887, p. 80). Onuphis holobranchiata,
Marenzeller, is also a closely allied species. ‘This species also has eyes, the carriers of the
jaws are rounded at the ends and not pointed as in O. iridescens and the shape of the
teeth of the pseudo-compound bristles is different.
Onuphis pallida (Moore) (1911, p. 256) has the gill beginning on the 4th chaetiger,
and corresponds with my incomplete specimen in which the arrangement of the gills
is similar. It is probably identical with O. iridescens.
Genus Leptoecia, Chamberlin
Leptoecia antarctica, n.sp.
St. 177. 5. ili. 27. 27 miles SW of Deception Island, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 30” S, 61° 17’ 00” W.
1080 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. Sixty specimens.
DEscCRIPTION. ‘Ten specimens and about 50 tubes with an average length of 60 mm.
and a diameter of 2 mm. The tubes have stout and very resistant walls of mud, from
which it is difficult to extract the animal. The ten specimens free of their tubes must
have been removed from them by the collector probably while the animal was alive.
Most of the tubes contain a specimen.
The largest specimen examined has 56 chaetigers and measures 33 mm. by 2 mm.
including the feet. The body is slender and flattened and in spirit there are no colour
markings. There are two globular palps, two ovoid anterior tentacles and five occipital
tentacles with short ringed ceratophores. The inner lateral tentacles reach back to the
6th chaetiger ; the median tentacle is about half their length and the outer laterals about
one-third. I can find no trace of eyes. The buccal segment is longer than the pro-
stomium and about equal in length to the following segment. It is not surpassed by the
st foot. There are no tentacular cirri and no branchiae.
The first three chaetigers (Fig. 50, a) have a cirriform posterior lip to the pedal lobe
and a tapering ventral cirrus, both of which decrease in size rapidly from before back-
liseayear ‘2mm.
&
Fig. 50. Leptoecia antarctica.
a. First foot. 6. Bidentate pseudo-compound bristle. c. Fourth foot. d. Comb chaeta. e. Capillary
bristle of middle foot. f. Bidentate hook. g. Thirtieth foot. h. Upper jaws. 7. Lower jaw plates.
EUNICIDAE 135
wards. The dorsal cirrus also grows increasingly shorter till about the 7th foot, where
it is a digitiform process reaching to the tips of the bristles. It retains this form through-
out the rest of the body. Behind the 3rd foot the ventral cirrus is modified into a
glandular pad.
The 1st foot has a few simple capillary bristles and a number of curved hooded
bidentate crochets (Fig. 50, 6) with a feeble pseudo-articulation. These are continued
to the 4th chaetiger (Fig. 50, c) in which a single broadly bilimbate capillary bristle
also occurs. The 5th foot has bilimbate capillary bristles only.
At the roth foot there is a small dorsal group of comb chaetae (Fig. 50, d) with
numerous short closely set teeth, a number of the usual twisted bilimbate capillaries
(Fig. 50, e) with slender tips, and a pair of yellow hooded bidentate hooks (Fig. 50, f
and g). In the posterior feet the comb chaetae seem to be absent and the capillary
bristles are narrower.
The dental formula is as follows: 7—7 : 9 + 5—8 (Fig. 50, h). The teeth and the
junction of the carriers are dark brown, but the plates are pale yellow. ‘The under jaws
(Fig. 50, z) are delicate translucent structures, except for a pair of dark chitinous pieces
at the anterior end.
Remarks. Chamberlin established the genus Leptoecia to include forms resembling
Hyalinoecia but without gills.
The present species is near to Leptoecia abyssorum, Chamberlin (1919, p. 320),
collected at a depth of 2005 fathoms between the Galapagos and Peru. It differs from
Chamberlin’s species in that the curved anterior crochets are continued to the 4th
chaetiger and are feebly pseudo-compound: in L. abyssorum they are unjointed and
confined to the 1st foot. Moreover, the number of teeth in the jaws is higher in
Chamberlin’s species. ‘The only records of this genus are the present one and that of
Chamberlin. It appears to be abyssal.
Sub-family LUMBRICONEREINAE, Grube
Genus Lumbrinereis, Blainville
Lumbrinereis magalhaensis, Kinberg.
Gravier, 1911, p. 78, pl. itl, figs. 35-36, with synonymy.
St. 27. 15. ili. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3-3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
trom. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. Eighteen specimens.
St. 29. 16. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 5-9 miles S 51° W of Jason Light.
23m. Gear DC. Bottom: mud and stones. One specimen.
St. 30. 16. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 2-8 miles S 24° W of Jason Light.
251m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. One specimen.
St. 39. 25. lili. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 8 cables S 81° W of Merton
Rock to 1-3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. 179-235 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. Two
specimens.
136 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 42. 1. iv. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 6-3 miles N 89° E of
Jason Light to 4 miles N 39° E of Jason Light. 120-204 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Two
specimens.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. 34 specimens. Gear NCS-T. One specimen.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 115 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: fine sand. Four specimens.
St. 123. 15. xil. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 4:1 miles N 54° E
of Larsen Point to 1-2 miles S 62° W of Merton Rock. 230-250 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey
mud. Three specimens.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02'S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud and stones.
Four specimens. Gear OTL. Two specimens.
St. 141. 29. xil. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 200 yards from shore, under Mount
Duse. 17-27 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
St.144. 5.1.27. Off mouth of Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. From 54° 04’ S, 36° 27’ W to
53° 58'S, 36° 26’ W. 155-178 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and sand. Twenty-five specimens.
St. 145. 7.1. 27. Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. Between Grass Island and Tonsberg
Point. 26-35 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
St. 152. 17. i. 27. 53° 51’ 30”S, 36° 18’ 30” W. 245m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One
specimen. =
St. 159. 21. i. 27. 53° 52’ 30” S, 36° 08’ 00” W. 160m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One
specimen.
St. 167. 20. ii. 27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. 244-344 m.
Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud. One specimen.
St. 195. 30. ili. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands. 391 m. Gear OTM.
Bottom: mud and stones. Three specimens.
St. WS 25. 17. xii. 26. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. 18-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
mud and sand. One specimen.
St. WS 65. 22. i. 27. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. Shore collection, from kelp
root. Two specimens.
St. MS 68. 2. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S 4 E to 84 cables
SE x E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. Twenty specimens.
St. MS 71. 9. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. g} cables E x S to 1-2 miles
E x S of Sappho Point. 110-60 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
Remarks. This species is very common round South Georgia, but I have only a
single record of it from the Falkland Islands. It appears to show very little variation
and is distinguishable easily from L. tetraura, to which it has a great superficial resem-
blance, by the presence of only a single tooth at the apex of M. III, whereas in L.
tetraura there is a pair of teeth at the apex of M. III. I agree with Benham’s suggestion
that L. kerguelensis, McIntosh, is identical with Kinberg’s species.
Lumbrinereis africana, Augener.
Augener, 1918, p. 367, pl. vii, figs. 261 and 262, text-fig. 42.
St. 279. 10. viii. 27. Off Cape Lopez, French Congo. From 8-5 miles N 71° E to 15 miles N 24° E
of Cape Lopez Light. 58-67 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud and fine sand. Four specimens.
EUNICIDAE 137
Remarks. Four thread-like specimens measuring 1 mm. across the body and super-
ficially very like the examples of Drilonereis filum with which they were associated. They
are close to L. impatiens, Claparéde. The prostomium is conical, simple crochets are
present in the 1st chaetiger and the acicula are yellow. The change in the form of the
simple crochets from the anterior and the posterior segments is well illustrated by
Augener. The jaws are similar to those of L. impatiens, except that I cannot discover
more than a single tooth in M. III.
Lumbrinereis coccinea, Renieri.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 432, fig. 172 g-n.
Crossland, 1924, p. 32.
St. 283. 14. vill. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. +75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. Two specimens.
Remarks. Two small specimens measuring only 1-5 mm. across the body. The pres-
ence of a globular prostomium, compound crochets in the anterior feet, yellow acicula,
and jaws that resemble Fauvel’s figure / would seem to refer them to this species.
Lumbrinereis heteropoda, Marenzeller.
Crossland, 1924, p. 4, text-figs. 1-7, with synonymy.
St. 4. 30. i. 26. Tristan da Cunha. 36° 55’ 00” S, 12° 12’ 00” W. 40-46 m. Net DL. Bottom:
stones. ‘Three specimens.
St. 279. 10. viii. 27. Off Cape Lopez, French Congo. From 8-5 miles N 71° E to 15 miles
N 24° E of Cape Lopez Light. 58-67 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud and fine sand. Two specimens.
Remarks. Five fragmentary examples of great size, the largest measuring 7 mm.
across the body. This species is easily identifiable by the great elongation of the posterior
lip of the foot in the hinder segments. The L. branchiata of Treadwell from the West
Indies is an allied species, but the long and slender ‘
different from those of this species.
“carriers” of the jaws are very
Lumbrinereis tetraura (Schmarda).
Ehlers, 1901, p. 137, pl. xvii, figs. 1-10.
St. 51. 4. v.26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: fine sand. One specimen.
St. 57. 16. v. 26. Port William, East Falkland Island. 5} cables S 20° W of Sparrow Point.
15m. Gear BTS. ‘Two specimens.
St. 90. 10. vii. 26. Simon’s Town, False Bay, South Africa. Basin of H.M. Dockyard. o-2m.
Gear NH. ‘Twelve specimens.
St. WS 84. 24. ili. 27. 74 miles S 9° W of Sea Lion Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 33 00” S, 59° 08’ oo” W to 52° 34’ 30” S, 59° 11’ 00” W. 75-74 m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
coarse sand, shell and stones. Two specimens.
Remarks. Both McIntosh and Ehlers have recorded this species from Simon’s ‘Town.
Dili 18
138 3 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Lumbrinereis antarctica, n.sp.
St. 182. 14. ill. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 21’ 00” S, 62° 58’ 00” W.
278-500 m. Gear N 7-T. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
DeEscRIPTION. The specimen from St. 182 is incomplete posteriorly and measures
34 mm. by 2 mm. without the feet for 80 chaetigers. The body is not tapered at the
ends.
The prostomium (Fig. 51, @) is equal in length to the first four segments and is
rather sharply pointed. On the underside the usual pair of buccal cushions is present,
and the second segment appears to be prolonged to form the lower lip of the mouth,
but this is not very clear in the specimen. The first segment is very slightly longer than
the second.
The feet (Fig. 51, b, c and d) increase rather rapidly in size up to the 6th chaetiger.
The anterior lip of the pedal lobe is rounded and not at all prominent, and the posterior
lip in the front part of the body forms a slender digitiform process: further back it
becomes gradually smaller until towards the end of the fragment it is reduced to a small
papilla.
The bristles present a remarkable appearance because the lower part of their shafts
is black and the upper part yellow. The feet are supported by two black acicula. As
far as about the roth foot the bristles are limbate capillaries (Fig. 51, e); further back
a number of simple crochets (Fig. 51, f) with long flanges appears. Towards the hinder
end of the fragment the flanges of the simple crochets become shorter. The limbate
capillaries are replaced by simple capillaries.
The mandible (Fig. 51, g) is a light and delicate structure, the details of which are
given in the figure.
Of the upper jaws (Fig. 51, 2) M. I is a pair of simple pincers. M. II has three large
teeth. M. III is a slender triangular plate with a single tooth. M. IV is a very large
single-toothed triangular plate.
Remarks. This species is characterised by the very small digitiform posterior lip of
the foot, by the half black, half yellow bristles and the arrangement of M. III and M. IV.
It is allied to the European L. fragilis (O. F. Miiller), but distinguished by the character
of the feet and the more anterior position of the simple crochets.
Genus Augeneria!, gen. nov.
Dracnosis. As Lumbrinereis, but with three small tentacles on the hinder edge of
the prostomium and partly hidden in a crescentic groove between the prostomium and
buccal segment, as in Halla.
‘ This genus is named after Dr H. Augener of Hamburg, the author of many valuable contributions
to our knowledge of the Polychaeta.
2mm
lmm.
‘7mm
‘5mm
0)
y |
0)
e
\ ‘2mm
0 |
if ;
a. Head from above. 6. Tenth foot. c. Twenty-fifth foot. d. Sixtieth foot. e. Bordered capillary
bristle. f. Crochet. g. Lower jaw plates. h. Upper jaws.
iy h
Fig. 51. Lumbrinereis antarctica.
18-2
140 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Augeneria tentaculata, n.sp.
St. 167. 20. ii. 27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. 244-344 m.
Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud. Fourteen specimens.
St. 187. 18. iii. 27. Neumayr Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 48’ 30” 5S, 63° 31’ 30” W. 259 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
DescripTIon. The great majority of the specimens are incomplete posteriorly. The
largest complete specimen measures 135 mm. by 3 mm. without the feet and has about
110 chaetigers.
All colour has disappeared from most of the specimens, but traces of a thin
transverse colour band joining the bases of the feet remain in a few. When present,
this does not begin before the 6th chaetiger. The body is of the usual “ Lumbrinereis”’
shape, cylindrical in front and more flattened posteriorly: it does not taper at the ends.
The prostomium (Fig. 52, a) is of a rounded oval form without a trace of eyes. The
three small subequal tentacles situated at the hinder edge of the prostomium are some-
times almost hidden in a groove where a crescentic re-entrant is carved out of the
anterior border of the first segment. In this groove the evaginable nuchal organs are
also situated. On the undersurface of the prostomium (Fig. 52, d) is a pair of large
buccal cushions. The second segment is carried forward to form the lower border of
the mouth in a manner similar to that in Lumbrinereis magalhaensis.
The 1st segment is about half as long again as the 2nd. The first two segments are
achaetous. For the first five chaetigers the feet gradually increase in length. The
anterior lip of the chaetal lobe is rounded and does not project, the posterior lip forms
a conical process. There are no pedal cirri nor branchiae.
The anterior feet (Fig. 52,c) carry compound crochets and bordered capillaries
(Fig. 52,d). In the compound crochets (Fig. 52, e) the end-piece or blade is rather
short, its length being less than the length of the continuation of the cutting flange
below the joint. At the apex of the blade there are about four teeth above the main fang.
In the middle feet compound crochets are replaced by simple crochets (Fig. 52, f)
with four to five teeth, and the capillaries have narrower borders and long and extremely
delicate ends. In each foot the most dorsal bristle is a single giant simple crochet
(Fig. 52, g), of the same form as, but larger than the rest of, the crochets in the foot.
In the posterior feet (Fig. 52, #) the postchaetal lobe becomes more pointed, and the
bordered capillaries are replaced by sump capillaries. About the last 20 feet have
simple crochets only.
I can see no acicula.
The lower jaw (Fig. 52,7) is rather short, longitudinally striated, and with small
calcareous end-pieces. Regarding the maxillae (Fig. 52, k), M.I is a pair of simple
black pincers. M. II is a pair of heavy plates with three teeth. M. III has two teeth.
M. IV is a pair of large subrectangular plates without any clearly defined teeth. The
carriers are narrow and pointed.
4mm.
O
omny
b
Cc
‘Amm
‘2mm.
O
O
O
é
d if
2mm
Imm
oO
0 ¢ oO
h Fig. 52. Augeneria tentaculata. k
a. Head seen from above. b. Head seen from below. c. Anterior foot viewed from infront. d. Bordered
o. Giant crochet. h. Posterior foot
capillary bristle. e. Compound crochet. ff. Simple crochet. 2
viewed from behind. 7. Lower jaw plates. k. Upper Jaws.
142 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Remarks. Except for the three tentacles this form is a typical Lumbrinereis; but the
presence of these structures places it outside the sub-family Lumbrinereinae, in which,
however, I propose to leave it provisionally rather than create another sub-family. It
may possibly be a link between the Lysaretinae and the Lumbrinereinae, but in its general
characteristics it is closer to the latter family than to the former.
Genus Arabella, Grube
Arabella iricolor (Montagu).
Fauvel, 1923, p. 438, fig. 175 a-h, with synonymy.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: fine sand. Four specimens.
Remarks. The Arabella lorum, described by Ehlers (1897, p. 78) from off the Pata-
gonian coast, is easily distinguished from A. zricolor by the presence of toothed plates
in M.1I instead of pincers with toothed bases. A. caerulea (Schmarda), described by
Ehlers from off the coast of Chile, is near to this species, but the under jaws have a
very different shape.
Genus Drilonereis, Claparede
Drilonereis filum (Claparéde).
Fauvel, 1923, p. 436, fig. 174 a-h.
Drilonereis longa, Webster, Augener, 1918, p. 375.
St. 279. 10. viii. 27. Off Cape Lopez, French Congo. From 8-5 miles N 71° E to 15 miles N 24° E
of Cape Lopez Light. 58-67 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud and fine sand. Four specimens.
Remarks. Crossland has described two species, D. major and D. logani, from the east
coast of Africa and Suez, both of which differ from this species in the small jaw plates.
Drilonereis sp.
St. 4. 30. i. 26. Tristan da Cunha. 36° 55’ 00” S, 12° 12’ 00” W. 40-46 m. Gear DL. Bottom:
stones. Two specimens.
DescripTION. The colour in spirit is dark red and the skin is iridescent. About the
first 20 segments are pale in contrast with the rest of the body. The specimens are both
incomplete and the larger measures about 400 mm. by 3 mm. without the feet. The
prostomium is rather flattened, bluntly conical and without eyes. It is equal in length
to the first two segments..
The feet are moderately well developed from the 1st chaetiger, but show a very
gradual increase in size up to about the 25th foot. From the rst foot they consist of a
rounded anterior lobe and a longer conical posterior lobe. There is nothing diagnostic
about the bristles. There are a number of curved bilimbate capillary bristles, several
acicula ending in a fine capillary tip, and a large bluntly pointed ventral aciculum.
Regarding the jaws (Fig. 53), in one of the specimens they are imperfectly developed :
they are of a very pale yellow colour and incompletely chitinised. In the other specimen,
EUNICIDAE 143
which I believe to be of the same species, they are fully developed. There is the usual
pair of long slender black carriers. M.I is a pair of simple pincers. M. II has five
teeth. M. IIT is small and has a large tooth with a very
small and easily overlooked second tooth below it. T3mm
M.1Visalsosmalland unidentate. Behind the “ carriers”’
is a large roughly cordiform plate which I believe to be
a support of the “carrier,” and not a lower jaw plate.
I could discover no lower jaw plates.
Remarks. I cannot with certainty attribute these two
specimens to any known species, and I do not, with the
material at my disposal, feel justified in establishing a
new species. ‘They are very close to and perhaps
conspecific with Drilonereis pinnata, Treadwell (1921,
p. 110) from the West Indies. 'Treadwell’s species has
eyes and differs also in certain details of the jaws.
Sub-family STAUROCEPHALINAE, Kinberg
Genus Staurocephalus, Grube
Staurocephalus neglectus, Fauvel.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 447, fig. 179 7-@.
St. go. 10. vii. 26. Simon’s Town, False Bay, South Africa.
Fig. 53. Drilonereis, sp. Jaws.
Basin of H.M. Dockyard. o-2m. Gear NH. One specimen.
Remarks. A single specimen measuring 12mm. by 2mm. without the feet. It
corresponds exactly to Fauvel’s account except that at the posterior border of the pro-
stomium is a couple of very faint minute dots which may represent a second pair of
eyes. As Fauvel points out, this species is distinguished from S. rudolphii only by the
absence of geniculate bristles from the first two chaetigers.
‘This species is quite distinct from the S. egena (Ehlers), also from Simon’s ‘Town.
Staurocephalus rubrovittatus, Grube.
Fauvel, 1923, p. 445, fig. 177 a-l.
Stauronereis rubrovittata, Augener, 1918, p. 376.
St. 283. 14. villi. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. +75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon, 18-30 m. Gear DLH. One specimen.
Remarks. A single colourless example of this species. It is characterised by the
presence of capillary bristles only in the notopodium and by the long hair-like pro-
longation of the supports of a number of its jaw plates in the middle of the row.
144 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Family ARICIIDAE, Savigny
Genus Aricia, Savigny
Aricia marginata, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1897, p. 95, pl. vi, figs. 150-156.
Benham, 1921, p. 77.
Nainereis marginata, Fauvel, 1916, p. 445, pl. vii, figs. 26-33, with synonymy.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Seventy specimens.
St. 141. 29. xii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 200 yards from shore, under Mount
Duse. 17-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom: mud. Fourteen specimens.
St.144. 5.i.27. Off mouth of Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. From 54° 04’ S, 36° 27’ W
to 53° 58'S, 36° 26’ W. 155-178 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud and sand. One specimen.
St. WS 25. 17. xii. 26. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. 18-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
mud and sand. Nine specimens.
St. WS 62. 19. i. 27. Wilson Harbour, South Georgia. 26-83 m. Gear BTS. Five specimens.
St. MS ? 24 or 25. 13. iv. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. (No further information.)
Fourteen specimens.
Remarks. I have examined a large series of examples of this species, which is common
off South Georgia. The number of thoracic chaetigers varies between 11 and 14, but
the greater part have 13 thoracic chaetigers.
The appearance of the gills on the 6th chaetiger is an almost constant character: in
one specimen examined they begin on the gth chaetiger. The three rows of spines in
the ventral rami of the thoracic feet are also constant in my specimens. I find no
capillary bristles in the ventral thoracic rami. Forked bristles are present in the
abdominal region.
Aricia ohlini, Ehlers, with its 19 or 20 thoracic segments, is a very closely allied species.
Aricia michaelseni, Ehlers. Imm
Ehlers, 1897, p. 88, pl. vi, figs. 136-140.
St. 56 ?. 16. v. 26. Sparrow Cove, Port William, East Falkland
Island. 1m. Gear RM. One specimen.
Remarks. A single specimen measuring 65 mm. by 2 mm.
and incomplete posteriorly. ‘There are 22 thoracic segments
and the gills begin on the 6th chaetiger. Ehlers gives
17 to 1g thoracic segments and the 5th for the gills. There
are about 12 papillae on a mid-thoracic foot. The ventral
papillae begin on the 14th chaetiger and continue to the
23rd. The ‘rows are single and contain a maximum of
about 15 papillae. At the 14th chaetiger a great change
comes over the thoracic neuropodia (Fig. 54). Four or five Hig ce Aricia machee eer!
spear-headed chaetae appear, arranged in a transverse row, Fifteenth thoracic foot.
ARICIIDAE 145
and the thoracic crochets are confined to the ventral part of the ramus. The arrangement
is well shown in Ehlers’ fig. 137, except that he does not indicate the ordinary crochets
at the base of the ramus and, moreover, in my specimens there is no single spear-
headed bristle projecting clear of the body at the dorsal apex of the ramus.
The abdominal region has an intermediate cirrus and two acicula in the dorsal ramus
and one in the ventral. Forked bristles are present.
I believe the arrangement of the spear-headed bristles to be characteristic of this species.
Genus Nainereis, Blainville
Nainereis hexaphyllum (Schmarda).
Theodisca (Anthostoma) hexaphyllum, McIntosh, 1905, p. 63, pl. v, figs. 27-29.
Scoloplos (Naidonereis) hexaphyllum, Augener, 1918, p. 421, pl. vi, figs. 153-154; pl. vii,
fig. 260, text-fig. 59.
Saldanha Bay, South Africa, 1926. Beach Collection. ‘Two specimens.
Remarks. ‘Two young specimens, the largest measuring 11 mm. by 2 mm.
Genus Scoloplos, Oersted
Scoloplos mawsoni, Benham.
Benham, 1921, p. 78, pl. ix, figs. g1—-94.
Scoloplos kerguelensis, Gravier, 1911, p. 108, pl. v, figs. 60-63.
Non-Scoloplos kerguelensis, McIntosh, 1885, p. 355, pl. xxi1A, fig.-19, pl. xlili, figs. 6-8.
St. 29. 16. ili. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 5-9 miles S 51° W of Jason Light.
23m. Gear DC. Bottom: mud and stones. Eight specimens.
St. WS 32. 21. xii. 26. Mouth of Drygalski Fiord, South Georgia. 225 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
grey mud. Three specimens.
Remarks. The average size is about 20 mm. by -5 mm. ‘These specimens agree with
the accounts given by Gravier and Benham. In the posterior segments there are filiform
cirri as in S. armiger.
Benham, who has had a very large number of specimens for examination, claims that
this form is separate from the S. kerguelensis of McIntosh, Fauvel and others. I have
not sufficient material to form an opinion of my own. Fauvel has recently (1927, p. 21)
made S. kerguelensis, McIntosh, a synonym of S. armiger. If Benham and Fauvel are
both right, there are two Antarctic species of Scoloplos known, S.mawsoniand S.armiger.
Scoloplos armiger (O. F. Miiller).
Fauvel, 1927, p. 20, fig. 6 k-q.
St. go. 10. vii. 26. Simon’s Town, False Bay, South Africa. Basin of H.M. Dockyard. o-2 m.
Gear NH. One specimen.
piri 19
146 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Family SPIONIDAE
Genus Pygospio, Claparéde
Pygospio dubia, n.sp.
St. 29. 16. iil. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 5-9 miles S 51° W of Jason Light.
23m. Gear DC. Bottom: mud and stones. About fifty specimens.
DescripTION. The average size is about to mm. by 1 mm. at the widest part. The
body is tapered at both ends, the widest part being at about the 7th chaetiger. All
colour has disappeared in spirit. The prostomium (Fig. 55, q@) is subtriangular. In
front it is very slightly indented in the middle, and the corners are prolonged into small
rounded eminences: there are no frontal horns. It is continued back to the edge of the
2nd chaetiger and ends in a minute occipital tentacle. There is a pair of very long
grooved palps, in some examples more than half the length of the body. I can see no
trace of eyes.
In the anterior segments the lamellae are semi-oval and equally developed. ‘The 1st
chaetiger has fully developed dorsal and ventral rami but no gill. On the 2nd and 3rd
chaetigers (Fig. 55, 6) there is a finger-shaped gill quite separate from the dorsal lamella.
The 4th and 5th chaetigers (Fig? 55,c) have no gill, but from the 7th to the 13th
chaetiger (Fig. 55, d) there are gills more than twice the size of those of the 2nd and
3rd chaetigers and fused with the dorsal lamellae, except at the tip which is free.
In the posterior segments (Fig. 55, e) the lamellae are equally developed, the dorsal
being broadly lanceolate and the ventral more papilliform. They are both small. There
are capillary bristles (Fig. 55, /) bordered very slightly, if at all, in the dorsal and ventral
rami. Between the 17th and 2oth chaetigers, hooks (Fig. 55, ¢) appear in the ventral
rami. ‘These seem to be perfectly plain hooks lacking both a second tooth and a hood.
The pygidium is very puzzling. In some examples, apparently complete posteriorly,
the body tapers simply to a point with an anus without anal cirri (Fig. 55, 2); and in
others there is a distinct pygidial sucker consisting of two vertical valves, which under
the microscope have the appearance of oyster shells (Fig. 55,7). There are no neuro-
podial glandular pockets and I can discover no sexual pouches. The state of preservation
was inadequate for an examination of the dorsal organs.
Remarks. ‘This is a young form. ‘The presence of an occipital tentacle, or at any rate
a minute process at the base of the tapered prostomium, of an anal sucker, of hooks
in the ventral rami only, of gills beginning on the 2nd chaetiger and continuing fused
with the dorsal lamellae from the 6th to the 13th chaetiger only, and the absence of
frontal cornua and a modified 5th chaetiger place this form nearer to Pygospio than to
any other genus. Moreover, the interrupted arrangement of the gills recalls that in the
male of P. elegans.
My specimens are immature, and as far as I can discover they show no sexual
dimorphism. They may, however, be the young of a Polydora in which the 5th chaetiger
is not yet modified.
147
‘6mm
2mm
7Tlmm 5 e
‘5mm -5mm a
.
‘Ss h 1
Fig. 55. Pygospio dubia.
a. Head. b. Third foot. c. Fifth foot. d. Tenth foot. e. Posterior foot. f. Capillary bristle.
g. Ventral hook. h. Pygidium without anal sucker. Ventral view. 7. Pygidium with anal sucker. Dorsal
19-2
148 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Genus Nerine, Johnston (sensu Mesnil)
Nerine sp.
St. 181. 12. iii. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00” S, 63° o1’ 00” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Two specimens.
‘2mm
C0)
Fig. 56. Nerine, sp.
a. Anterior foot. 6. Bidentate hook.
DescrIPTION. Two rather ill-preserved anterior fragments, the largest of which has
24 chaetigers and measures 15 mm. by 3 mm. The body is stout and massive and the
gills give it a foliaceous appearance.
The prostomium is an elongated plate rounded in front and ending behind in a small
knob, which I take to represent an occipital tentacle. The palps are lost, and there are
no eyes. The hinder end of the prostomium reaches to the middle of the 1st chaetiger.
The 1st chaetiger has an oval dorsal lamella, a rounded ventral lamella and capillary
bristles in both rami. The gills begin on the 2nd chaetiger and are continued to the
ends of the fragments. They are large and fused with an upward extension of the dorsal
lamella (Fig. 56, a). The ventral lamella is vertically elongated and with a rounded edge.
Both dorsal and ventral bristles are capillary until the 21st chaetiger, where, in addition
to the capillary bristles, a row of 15 bidentate hooded hooks (Fig. 56, 6) appears in the
ventral ramus.
Remarks. These fragments probably belong to Nerine, but the few anterior segments
of which they consist do not show any hooks in the dorsal rami. The closely allied
Nerinides has no capillary bristles in the dorsal ramus of the 1st chaetiger, as well as no
hooks in the dorsal ramus. I know no Nerine in which the ventral hooks appear as
early as the 21st chaetiger, and I have found no previous record of a Nerine from
Antarctic waters.
SPIONIDAE 149
Genus Prionospio, Malmgren
Prionospio africana, Augener.
Augener, 1918, p. 402, pl. vi, figs. 162 and 163, text-fig. 51.
? Prionospio, sp., Sdderstrém, 1920, p. 238, figs. 137, 148 and 149.
St. 279. 10. viii. 27. Off Cape Lopez, French Congo. From 8-5 miles N 71° E to 15 miles
N 24° E of Cape Lopez Light. 58-67 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud and fine sand. One specimen.
2mm
‘05mm.
Fig. 57. Prionospio africana.
a. Anterior end. Dorsal view. 6. Hook.
DESCRIPTION. One specimen measuring 24 mm. by 1°5 mm. It has 37 chaetigers and
is incomplete posteriorly. The colour in spirit is a pale reddish brown. The prostomium
is fusiform with rounded ends (Fig. 57, a). The palps are missing. On the posterior
end of the prostomium is a pair of faint longitudinal parallel markings which I take to
be eye pigment.
The buccal segment on its lateral and ventral surfaces sends forward a large collar,
open on the dorsal surface, which extends for about two-thirds the length of the
prostomium. The appearance from the side is similar to that of Séderstrém’s (/oc. cit.)
fig. 137. Behind the prostomium the notopodium of the 1st chaetiger sends out two
processes which meet in the mid-dorsal line.
The 1st chaetiger has a triangular cirrus, dorsal and ventral bristle bundles and
a rounded ventral cirrus. The foot, however, is a little smaller than the following feet.
There is no gill on the 1st chaetiger. The 2nd chaetiger has small gills slightly longer
than the large dorsal cirrus and unfeathered. The 3rd chaetiger has large feathered gills
equal in length to the following five segments. The 4th chaetiger has no gills. ‘There
are therefore on this specimen two pairs of gills only.
150 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Séderstrém’s fig. 149 is an accurate diagram of the relative sizes of the dorsal cirri,
except that the rst dorsal cirrus is considerably larger relatively to the 2nd, the relation
being similar to that shown in his fig. 137.
Both rami of the feet carry very thick bundles of capillary bristles. The hooks
(Fig. 57, 6) begin on the gth chaetiger in the ventral ramus, and there is also at its
lowest point a sabre-shaped bristle which is usually broken. The dorsal ramus of the
last foot of the present fragmentary specimen shows no hooks.
Remarks. P. pinnata, Ehlers, P. africana, Augener, and P. sexoculata, Augener, are
all distinguished by the collar round the prostomium and the presence of a gill on the
1st chaetiger. Caullery (1914) has suggested a sub-genus Paraprionospio for those forms
in which the first pair of parapodia is similar to those following and carries a gill.
Séderstrém contends, I think justly, that in these forms the 1st chaetiger is morpho-
logically the equivalent of the 2nd chaetiger in Prionospio sensu stricto. ‘The bristles
of the 1st chaetiger have disappeared and the feet are modified to form the collar. The
two processes meeting in the middle line behind the head, as already described, may
possibly represent part of the modified 1st chaetiger. If this is so, in the present
specimen the gills do not begin before the 3rd true chaetiger. But the gills from the
first bristle-bearing segment (2nd chaetiger) may have been lost.
The Prionospio sp. of Séderstrém (loc. cit.) is very close to this species, if not identical
with it. Sdéderstrém, however, writes, ‘‘ Ventral cirrus, notopodium and neuropodium
of the first bristle segment degenerate; dorsal cirrus not distinguishable.” ‘This is not
shown in his fig. 137 and differs from the condition in P. africana.
In spite of the differences in the number and arrangement of the gills between the
present specimen and Augener’s original examples I think it probably belongs to
Augener’s species.
Augener records three pairs of gills all of about the same size, the first pair occurring
on the ist chaetiger.
Family PARAONIDAE, Cerruti
Genus Paraonis, Grube
Paraonis (Paraonides) gracilis (Tauber).
Levinsenia gracilis, Mesnil and Caullery, 1898, p. 136.
Levinsenia gracilis, Cerruti, 1909, p. 468.
? Paraonis dubia, Augener, 1924, p. 72, fig. 25.
St. 29. 16. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 5-9 miles S 51° W of Jason Light.
23m. Gear DC. Bottom: mud and stones. Ten specimens.
Remarks.: Ten examples of this rare family, that are rather doubtfully conspecific
with the specimens originally described by ‘Tauber from Denmark. They are rolled
into tight coils, which makes accurate measurement impossible. ‘The size is about
20mm. by-5 mm. for 80-100 chaetigers. ‘There are no colour markings. The prostomium,
PARAONIDAE 151
when seen from above, is triangular in outline and ends in a sharp point, which I take
to represent the terminal tentacle mentioned by Mesnil and Caullery. There is only a
single achaetous segment, the buccal segment, behind the prostomium (Fig. 58, a).
I can find no dorsal cirrus on the rst chaetiger and the upper and lower bristle bundles
issue directly from the body wall without any parapodial lobes. In the 2nd and following
chaetigers there is a small papilliform dorsal cirrus. Mesnil and Caullery state that the
first three chaetigers are clearly smaller than those that follow. My specimens do not
show this.
‘1mm.
6mm.
‘2mm
O
(6
‘Imm
oO > 0)
a b
Fig. 58. Paraonis gracilis. d
a. Anterior end. (The feet are not shown behind the 5th chaetiger.) 6. Capillary bristle.
c. Hook. d. Dorsal view of foot and genital papilla.
The gills begin on the 6th—7th chaetiger and continue to the 18th—zoth chaetiger.
They are simple strap-like structures, arching over the back. The gill-bearing region
of the body is flattened dorsally and rounded ventrally and the limits of the segments
are clearly marked. Behind this region the body is cylindrical and the limits of the
segments are almost impossible to distinguish. From the distance apart of the chaetal
bundles it can be seen that the segments are about twice as long as in the anterior region.
The posterior region of the body looks much more like a fragment of some microdrilid
Oligochaete, such as Navs, than part of a Polychaete.
152 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
In the anterior region the bristles of both bundles are similar ; they are very delicate,
unbordered capillaries (Fig. 58, 6) and in the preparations the ends are often twisted.
Between the 20th and 25th feet a shorter and much stouter hook (Fig. 58, c) appears in
the ventral bristle bundle: these hooks increase in number posteriorly; until towards
the end of the body they are about six in number with a few capillaries amongst them.
In the hinder region I can see no dorsal cirrus, and the notopodium is represented
by a few fine capillary bristles. The specimens are too imperfect to make out a pygidium.
Mesnil and Caullery write ‘Du 30° au 40° sétigeére, il existe un mamelon transversal
tres net en avant des soies.” I take this to refer to the genital papillae (Fig. 58, d)
which, from about the 3oth to the 6oth chaetiger, lie a little below and in front of the feet.
Remarks. ‘These specimens agree in the main with Mesnil’s account of 'Tauber’s
species, but more material both from the north and the south is required before the
identity of the forms from the two hemispheres can be established with certainty.
Family CHAETOPTERIDAE
Chaetopterus variopedatus (Renier).
Fauvel, 1927, p. 77, fig. 26 a—-n. -
St. 58. 19. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 1-2 m. Gear RM. Three specimens and
three large tubes.
St. 222. 23. iv. 27. St Martin’s Cove, Hermite Island, Cape Horn. 30-35 m. Gear NRL. One
specimen.
St. 274. 4. vill. 27. Off St Paul de Loanda, Angola. From 8° 40’ 15”S, 13° 13’ 45” E to
8° 38’ 15”S, 13° 13’ 00” E. 64-65 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
St. Ws 80. 14. 111. 27. 50° 57 00° 5S; 63° 37 30° W. Erom’ 50: 58’ co” S; 63> 397 co Wi to
50° 55' 30’ S, 63° 36’ 00” W. 152-156m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. ‘Two specimens.
St. WS 81. 19. ili. 27. 8 miles N 11° W of North Island, West Falkland Island. From
51° 30’ 00" S, 61° 15’ 00” W to 51° 30’ 30” S, 61° 10’ 00” W. 81-82 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand.
Eight specimens.
St. WS 88. 6. iv. 27. 54° 00’ 00” S, 64° 57’ 30” W. From 54° 00’ 00” S, 65° 00’ co” W to
54. 00’ 00” S, 64° 55’ 00” W. 118m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, shell and stones. One specimen.
St. WS 128. 10. vi. 27. West side of Gough Island, inshore. 40° 19’ 00” S, 10° o4’ 00” W.
120-90 m. Gear DLH. Several fragments of tubes.
Remarks. The greater part of these specimens consists of fragments only. Port
Stanley, East Falkland Island, however, yielded two intact specimens, the largest of
which has ro thoracic chaetigers, 5 median chaetigers and 28 posterior chaetigers. In
all the specimens in which it is possible to make a count, there are g to 10 thoracic and
5 middle chaetigers. I cannot accept Augener’s suggestion (1918, p. 458) that the
Ch. variopedatus, Ehlers, from Southern America should be regarded as a distinct
species, Ch. antarcticus, Kinberg.
CHAETOPTERIDAE I
un
Ww
Genus Phyllochaetopterus, Grube
(Claparede char. emend.)
Phyllochaetopterus socialis, Claparéde.
Fauvel, 1927, p. 84, fig. 30 a-e; and 1916, p. 451, pl. ix, figs. 44-47, text-fig. 1, with synonymy.
St. 272. 30. vil.27. Off Elephant Bay, Angola. From 13° 11’ 00” S, 12° 44’ 45” E to 13° 09’ 45” S,
12° 46’ oo” E. 73-91 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and sand. Numerous specimens.
Remarks. A large cluster of intertangled, indistinctly annulated tubes from which
I extracted a number of small examples of this species. The average size is about
15mm. by 1 mm. They are typical specimens of this species with red bands on the
palps, 13 to 14 thoracic chaetigers and 7 to 8 median chaetigers.
Phyllochaetopterus, sp.
St. 146. 8.1.27. 53° 48’ 00” S, 35° 37’ 30” W. 728m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Three frag-
mentary tubes.
St. 167. 20. ii. 27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. 244-344 m.
Bottom: green mud. Gear OTL. Ten tubes and three fragmentary specimens. Gear N 4—-T. ‘Two
fragmentary specimens.
DescripTION. ‘The tubes are large, separate, indistinctly annulated and probably
incomplete. The largest measures 22 mm. in length by 4 mm. in diameter. The badly
preserved fragments do not permit of a complete account of the systematic characters
of this form. The anterior thoracic region has nine chaetigers and measures 12 mm. by
5 mm. The thoracic region is a pale yellowish green and the middle and posterior regions
are dark green, the posterior being darker than the middle region.
The anterior end is damaged: there is a pair of large globular tentacles supported
internally by a number of fine bristles. A large white glandular cushion extends on the
under side from the 6th to the 8th chaetiger.
The lanceolate bristles of the thoracic region are similar to those found in P. socialis.
The giant bristle from the 4th chaetiger is obliquely truncated, slightly excavated at
the end and with a finely crenellated apex. It is similar to that figured by Fauvel (1927,
fig. 31 6) for P. major.
The notopodia of the median region are bilobed with a large accessory lamella
(? branchia) lying between notopodium and neuropodium. There are two long median
segments and possibly more, for the only fragments showing the median region are
badly damaged. The 2nd median chaetiger is bilobed and similar to the rst. I cannot
tell whether the median neuropodia are bilobed or unilobed.
The posterior region has numerous segments. Except towards the end of the body
the notopodia are free towards their ends only, a condition similar to that found in
Mesochaetopterus. The terminal segments, however, have projecting notopodia. Each
notopodium has four to six lanceolate bristles. The posterior neuropodia are bilobed
with rows of subtriangular uncini with very numerous fine teeth.
Dili
154 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Remarks. This is the first record of a Chaetopterid from Antarctic waters except for
P. pictus, Crossland (= P. socialis, Claparede, fide Fauvel) recorded by Augener from
the sub-Antarctic Auckland Islands: unfortunately the condition is so unsatisfactory
that I cannot assign it to a species. It seems to be close to P. major, Claparede, but
that species is described as having only a single lanceolate bristle in the posterior
notopodia.
Family CIRRATULIDAE
Genus Audouinia, Quatrefages sensu Fauvel
Audouinia filigera (Delle Chiaje) var. capensis (Schmarda).
Cirratulus capensis, Schmarda, 1861, p. 56, pl. xxvii, fig. 213.
Cirratulus capensis, auctorum.
Cirratulus cirratus (O. F. Miller), McIntosh, 1904, p. 67.
Non Cirratulus cirratus (O. F. Miller).
St. go. 10. vii. 26. Simon’s Town, False Bay, South Africa. Basin of H.M. Dockyard. o-2 m.
Gear NH. Eleven specimens.
Remarks. This form seems to be identical with A. filigera (Delle Chiaje) except that
the tentacles are on the 3rd and 4th chaetigers instead of the 4th and 5th or 5th and 6th.
Fauvel, in his account of A. filigera (1927, p. 92), states that the gills are above the
dorsal ramus at a distance equal to or greater than that which separates the two rami.
This is true only from about the 4oth chaetiger: in front of the 4oth chaetiger the
distance between the gill and the dorsal ramus is less than that which separates the
two rami.
Genus Cirratulus, Lamarck
Cirratulus cirratus (O. F. Miiller).
Fauvel, 1927, p. 94, fig. 33 a-g, with synonymy; and 1916, p. 447, pl. viii, fig. 12.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Seven specimens.
St. 145. 7. i. 27. Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. Between Grass Island and Tonsberg
Point. 26-35 m. Gear BTS. Five specimens.
St. WS 25. 17. xii.26. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. 18-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
mud and sand. Nine specimens.
St. WS 62. 19.1. 27. Wilson Harbour, South Georgia. 15-45 m. Gear BTS. Three specimens.
St. WS 73. 6. ili. 27. 51° or’ 00” S, 58° 54’ 00” W. From 51° 02’ 00” S, 58° 55’ 00” W to
51° 00’ 00” S, 58° 53’ 00” W. 121-130 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
St. WS 97. 18. iv. 27. 49° 00’ 30” S, 61° 58’ 00” W. From 49° 00’ 00” S, 62° 00’ 00” W to
49° or’ 00” 5S, 61° 56’ 00” W. 146-145 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, gravel and stones. One
specimen.
St. MS 6. 12. ii. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. } mile S of Hope Point to 1} cables
S x E of King Edward Point Light. 24-30 m. Gear BTS. Nine specimens.
CIRRATULIDAE 155
St. MS 66. 28. ii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 2} miles SE of King Edward
Point Light to 1} cables W x N of Macmahon Rock. 18 m. Gear NCS-T. ? One specimen, young.
St. MS ?. South Georgia. Shore collection. One specimen.
Remarks. The specimen from the South Georgia shore collection is a uniform deep
purple in colour. The specimen from WS 97 has the two groups of tentacular filaments
very forward in position, so that they appear to be on the last achaetous segment rather
than on the rst chaetiger.
Cirratulus antarcticus, n.sp.
St. 29. 16. ii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 5-9 miles S 51° W of Jason Light.
23m. Gear DC. Bottom: mud and stones. Ten specimens.
St. 39. 25. ili. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 8 cables S 81° W of Merton
Rock to 1-3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. 179-235 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: grey mud.
Five specimens.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear NCS-T.
Bottom: grey mud. Four specimens. Gear OTL. Three specimens.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02’ S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
Two specimens.
4mm
DEscrIPTION. The largest complete specimen
measures 26 mm. by 2 mm. The body is long
and rather slender with very crowded segments.
The prostomium is rather short and bluntly
conical; it has no eyes; the two achaetous seg-
ments behind the buccal segment are not clearly
distinguished. ‘The first two chaetigers have no
branchiae. These begin on the 3rd chaetiger and
are continued over the greater part of the body.
Throughout they arise just above the dorsal
ramus. On the 3rd to 5th chaetigers there are
two groups of tentacular filaments, with six to
eight filaments in each group (Fig. 59). ‘They
are rather stouter than the branchiae. ‘The feet
carry capillary bristles only: there are no hooks. The pygidium is conical and the anus
is pointing upwards.
Fig. 59. Cuirratulus antarcticus.
Anterior end.
Remarks. This species is allied to C. chrysoderma, Claparéde, from the Mediterranean.
The body, however, is more massive and there are six to eight pairs of tentacular
filaments instead of two to three. Moreover, in C. chrysoderma the anus is ventral, and
the tentacular filaments are on the 4th—s5th chaetigers.
156 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Cirratulus afer, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1908, p. 127, pl. xvii, figs. 10-12.
St. 279. 10. vill. 27. Off Cape Lopez, French Congo. From 8-5 miles N 71° E to 15 miles
N 24° E of Cape Lopez Light. 58-67 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud and fine sand. Two specimens.
5mm
le
BN
ZZ O
Fig. 60. Cirratulus afer. Anterior end.
Remarks. I have much hesitation in referring these forms to Ehlers’ species. One
of the specimens is complete and measures 83 mm. by 11 mm. for 150 chaetigers. This
specimen is much larger than those seen by Ehlers. The general proportions of the
body are similar to those described by Ehlers. The prostomium is very short and as
if telescoped into the buccal segment. The two tentacular groups, each of 10 to 12
filaments, are on the 1st chaetiger and apparently spread over a considerable area of
the last achaetous segment (Fig. 60). According to Ehlers there is a single filament
on the 1st chaetiger and a group of filaments on the 2nd. Moreover, I can find no
trace of hooks in my specimens. In Ehlers’ specimens their occurrence seems to be
very irregular, or they may be absent. The gills seem to be continued over the greater
part of the body, and their insertion is just above the dorsal ramus.
Genus Dodecaceria, Oersted
Dodecaceria concharum, Oersted.
Fauvel, 1927, p. 102, fig. 36 a-n.
St. 2. 17. xi. 25. Clarence Bay, Ascension Island, Catherine’s Point and Collyer Point. Shore
collection. One specimen.
Remarks. A single atocous sedentary ripe female with five pairs of gills.
Genus Heterocirrus, Grube
(Saint-Joseph char. emend.)
Heterocirrus caput-esocis, Saint-Joseph, var. capensis var. nov.
Heterocirrus caput-esocis, Fauvel, 1927, p. 97, fig. 33 Ln.
St. go. 10. vil. 26. Simon’s Town, False Bay, South Africa. Basin of H.M. Dockyard. o-2 m.
Gear NH. Six specimens.
CIRRATULIDAE 157
DESCRIPTION. ‘The average measurement is about 20 mm. by 2 mm. at the widest
part: there are 80-go chaetigers. The body is tapered at both ends, suddenly at the
anterior end and gradually at the posterior. It is at its broadest from the roth to the
4oth chaetiger. In spirit all pigment has disappeared. The prostomium (Fig. 61) is
shorter and blunter than that figured for H. caput-esocis (Fauvel, loc. cit. fig. 1). Instead
of a pair of round eye spots, there is a row of small eye spots interrupted in the middle
line as in Cirratulus cirratus.
2mm
6) Z ZF, = >
Fig. 61. Heterocirrus caput-esocis, var. capensis. Anterior end.
The buccal and the following achaetous segments are not clearly distinguished. Just
in front of the rst chaetiger is a pair of long coiled palps, and a little behind and below
these a pair of gills. Most of the gills are lost, and I can find none behind the 15th
chaetiger ; further back they are either absent or broken off.
There are dorsal and ventral capillary bristles in all the feet, and from about the
15th neuropodium and 2oth notopodium there are also simple unidentate hooks. I can
see no ventral folds round the anus.
Remarks. This form is close to H. caput-esocis, but differs from it in the shape of the
head and eyes, and in the presence of notopodial hooks behind the 2oth chaetiger
instead of in the terminal feet only.
Genus Tharyx, Webster and Benedict
Tharyx epitoca, n.sp.
St. 181. 12. ili. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00” S, 63° o1’ 00” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One specimen. Gear N 4-T. One specimen.
St.190. 24. iii. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 93-126 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. One specimen.
DescripTION. Two epitocous females, swollen with eggs. The largest measures
27mm. by 3 mm. at the widest part, for about 50 chaetigers. ‘The body is fusiform,
158 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
and about the last 20 chaetigers are free from eggs. ‘The prostomium is bluntly conical
and without eyes. The buccal and the two (?) following segments are long, achaetous
and indistinctly separated. As in Hetero-
cirrus (see Fauvel, 1927, p. 96), on the last
achaetous segment or on the anterior border
of the 1st chaetiger there is a pair of gills
and a pair of coiled palps (Fig. 62) which
are about equal in length to the first ten
chaetigers. The gills are for the most part +9
lost, but it can be seen that they are con-
tinued for at least the anterior two-thirds
of the body. They are very long, a gill
from the middle of the body being equal in
length to about 15 chaetigers in the middle
of the body. After the 30th chaetiger the body is no longer swollen with eggs, and
‘the segments are half the length of those in the sexual region.
The bristles consist of very long fine capillary chaetae, in length about equal to twice
the breadth of the body. There are no hooks.
The pygidium is conical and the anus terminal.
2mm
Fig. 62. Tharyx epitoca. Anterior end. (Position
of the gills indicated by the broken lines.)
Remarks. The position of the first gill and palp would seem to refer this form to
Heterocirrus, Grube; on the other hand, the absence of crochets in the feet is charac-
teristic of Tharyx. This species is very close to, and possibly identical with, Hetero-
cirrus cincinnatus, Ehlers (1908, p. 129) from 48° 57’ S, 70° W. The differences are
these: Ehlers’ type specimen measured 18 mm. by 1-5 mm. for 110 segments; Ehlers
states that towards the posterior end of the body the segments are longer than in the
middle; Ehlers describes a pair of gills only on the last achaetous segment and places
the palps on the 1st chaetiger. My specimen measures 27 mm. by 3 mm. for 50
chaetigers ; towards the posterior end the segments are much shorter than in the middle
of the body and both rst gill and palp are on the same segment. The examples from
Auckland Island referred to Ehlers’ species by Augener (1924, p. 81) have hooks, and
are therefore wrongly attributed.
South Georgia (St. 29. 16. ii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia; 5-9 miles
S 51° W of Jason Light, 23 m. Gear DC. Bottom: mud and stones) yielded another
epitocous female, with all its gills and palps broken or lost. As far as can be seen, the
arrangement of the palps and gills is the same as in Th. epitoca; on the other hand,
the body is much more slender and thread-like and the segments more numerous. The
measurements are 30 mm. by -5 mm. for about 120 chaetigers. The bristles are all
capillary. It may be conspecific with my specimen from Bismarck Strait.
FLABELLIGERIDAE 159
Tharyx sp. juv.
St. 30. 16. itl. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 2:8 miles S 24° W of Jason Light.
251m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. Four specimens.
St. MS 68. 2. ii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S } E to 84 cables
SE < E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NCS-N. Eight specimens.
St. MS 71. 9g. ii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. g} cables E x S to 1-2 miles
E x S of Sappho Point. 110-60 m. Gear NCS-T. Three specimens.
Remarks. I have given this name to a number of small immature Cirratulids, all
more or less in poor condition. The average measurement is about 5 mm. by 1 mm. for
30-50 chaetigers. There is a pair of gills and palps on the rst chaetiger and the gills
are continued over the greater part of the body. There are no eyes and no hooks in the
bristle bundles. They may be young examples of Th. epitoca.
Family FLABELLIGERIDAE, Saint-Joseph
Genus Stylarioides, Delle Chiaje
Stylarioides kerguelarum (Grube).
Trophonia kerguelarum, McIntosh, 1885, p. 364, pl. xliv, figs. g-10; pl. xxxii A, figs. 4-6.
St. 39. 25. i. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 8 cables 5 81° W of Merton
Rock to 1-3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. 179-235 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. Six
specimens.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
St. 141. 29. xii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 200 yards from shore under Mount
Duse. 17-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom: mud. Sixty-five specimens.
Remarks. An average specimen measures about 18mm. by 3 mm. without the
bristles, and has about 30 chaetigers. ‘This species is close to St. plumosa (O. F. Miiller) ;
it differs, however, in that the sigmoid ventral crochets begin on the 3rd instead of the
4th chaetiger.
Stylarioides swakopianus, Augener.
Augener, 1918, p. 433, pl. vii, fig. 234, text-figs. 61 and 62.
Stvlarioides xanthotricha, Ehlers, partim, 1908, p. 119, pl. xvi, fig. 2.
St. 4. 30. i. 26. Tristan da Cunha. 36° 55’ 00” S, 12° 12’ 00” W. 40-46m. GearDL. Bottom:
stones. Four specimens.
Remarks. Of these specimens all except one are fragments: the complete specimen
measures 33 mm., without the tail, by 4 mm.; the tail measures 6 mm. ‘There is no need
for me to recapitulate Augener’s arguments for separating this, the shaggy-skinned
form, from St. xanthotricha. 1 am still rather doubtful if the two forms are specifically
distinct; and both are very close indeed to the European St. monilifer.
Except in the matter of the difference in the number of bristles forming the cage, a
160 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
difference to which I am inclined to attach little systematic value,
the differences
between Si. swakopianus and St. xanthotricha are similar to the differences between
St. monilifer and St. hirsutus. According to Fauvel (1927, p. 119) all the intermediate
stages between the latter pair of species are found.
Genus Flabelligera, M. Sars
Flabelligera affinis, M. Sars.
Fauvel, 1927, p. 113, fig. 40 af; 1916, p. 450, with synonymies.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia.
238-270 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
St. 51. 4. v.26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N
50° E to 7-6 miles N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. ros—115 m. Gear OTL. Bottom:
fine sand. One specimen.
St. 53. 12. v.26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. Hulk of “Great Britain.”
o-2m. Gear RM. Two specimens.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia.
From 54° 02’ S, 36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136 m. Gear
N 7-T. Bottom: green mud and stones. Two specimens.
St. WS 77. 12. iii. 27. 51° or’ 00” S, 66° 31’ 30” W. From 51° 00’ 00" S,
66° 30’ 00” W to 51° 02’ 00” S, 66° 33’ 00” W. 110-113 m. Gear OTC.
?. South Georgia. One specimen. Bottom: coarse dark sand. Two specimens.
Remarks. These specimens are mostly in bad condition. I can find
nothing to distinguish them from the northern form, Fauvel (1927,
loc. cit.) writes: ‘A partir du 25° sétigere une ou deux grosses soies
composées ou pseudocomposées, etc.” Surely 25° is a printer’s error
for 2°? I figure a papilla of the elongated kind (Fig. 63).
Flabelligera luctator, Stimpson.
Augener, 1918, p. 452.
St. go. 10. vii. 26. Simon’s Town, False Bay, South Africa. Basin of H.M.
Gear NH. Two specimens.
Remarks. The largest specimen measures 25 mm. by 5 mm. including
the mucous sheath for 32 chaetigers. ‘The mucous sheath is so thick
that the ends of the bristles are embedded in it. There is only a single
hook with a strongly curved blade in each neuropodium. ‘The more
elongated type of papilla (Fig. 64) has a different form from that
usually found in FV. affinis.
Willey and Fauvel (1916, p. 451) both regard this species as identical
with F7. affinis. In all the examples of the latter species that I have
seen the shape of the papillae is very constant. Therefore, in view
of the difference in the papillae already mentioned, I hesitate to unite
the two species. I can find no other distinguishing character.
‘4mm
oO
Fig. 63. Flabelligera
affinis. Elongated
papilla.
Dockyard. 0-2 m.
‘2mm
0)
Fig. 64. Flabelligera
luctator. Elongated
papilla.
-PLABELLIGERIDAE 161
Flabelligera pennigera, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1908, p. 123, pl. xvi, figs. g-10.
St. 141. 29. xii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 200 yards from shore, under Mount
Duse. 17-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom: mud. Two specimens.
St. 144. 5. 1. 27. Off mouth of Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. From 54° 04’ S, 36° 27’ W
to 53° 58'S, 36° 26’ W. 155-178 m. Gear N 4~-T. Bottom: green mud and sand. One specimen.
St. 145. 7. 1. 27. Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. Between Grass Island and Tonsberg
Point. 26-35 m. Gear BTS. Four specimens.
Remarks. The specimens are in very bad condition, and I cannot count the number
of chaetigers. The mucous sheath is very thin. There is normally a single hook only
in the neuropodia. The dorsal bristles are completely hidden by thick clusters of
papillae, which impart to the notopodia the appearance of gills exactly as described by
Ehlers.
Flabelligera mundata, Gravier.
Gravier, 1907, p. 37, pl. iv, figs. 31 and 32.
Benham, 1921, p. 108, with synonymy.
St. 190. 24. ill. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 93-
126m. Gear DLH. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. One specimen.
Remarks. A single specimen in good condition measuring 38 mm. by 7 mm. in-
cluding the sheath, for 27 chaetigers. The branchiae are numerous, the mucous sheath
is very thick, and there are for the most part three composite hooks to each neuro-
podium. The papillae attached to the bristles are as figured by Gravier.
Genus Brada, Stimpson
Brada villosa (Rathke).
Fauvel, 1927, p. 121, fig. 43 e-l.
St. 167. 20. ii. 27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. 244-344 m.
Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud. One specimen.
St. 175. 2. iii. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 20”S, 59° 48’ 15” W. 200 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, stones and gravel. One specimen.
Remarks. There is a very thick coating of sand which hides the skin, and I cannot
see the usual circlet of papillae around the parapodia. Nevertheless, I believe that this
form belongs to the common northern species. ‘The southern B. mammillata appears
to lack the delicate flagelliform tips to the ventral bristles. I have examined McIntosh’s
Challenger specimens of the latter species and I can see no trace of these tips. Their
absence may be due to wear, but from the appearance of the bristles I do not think
that this is so.
Dili 2I
162 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Brada mammillata, Grube.
Ehlers, 1901, p. 180, for synonymy.
St. 170. 23. ii. 27. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island. 61° 25’ 30” S, 53° 46’ 00” W. 342 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Three specimens.
Remarks. I cannot find any flagelliform tips to the ventral bristles, which resemble
those figured by McIntosh and Studer. Otherwise they do not appear to be separable
from B. villosa.
Genus Pycnoderma, Grube
Pycnoderma congoense, Grube.
Grube, 1877, p. 540.
Augener, 1918, p. 451, text-fig. 58.
St. 274. 4. vill. 27. Off St Paul de Loanda, Angola. From 8° 4o’ 15” S, 13° 13’ 45” E to 8° 38’ 15” S,
13° 13’ 00” E. 64-65 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
Imm
A (3 70mm
(i. |
Ks
rE
if
A 2
y
8
y 0
Cc
S ‘6mm
at ;
. Me. 0
a d
Fig. 65. Pycnoderma congoense.
a. Entire specimen. 6. Dorsal bristle. c. Ventral bristle. d. Cuticle with papillae.
SCALIBREGMIDAE 163
Remarks. The body (Fig. 65, a) is long and worm-like, measuring 98 mm. by 5 mm.
for 69 chaetigers. There are very numerous slender gills and a pair of short thick
grooved palps.
The bristles of the cage are few and inconspicuous. The bristles of the rst chaetiger
are all long and forwardly directed: the ventral bristles are shifted dorsally so that they
lie close to the dorsal bundle. ‘The dorsal bristles of the 2nd chaetiger are about half
the length of those of the 1st, and are also directed forward to form part of the cage,
The ventral bristles of the 2nd chaetiger are separated by the normal distance from the
dorsal, and are of the characteristic type found throughout the body. They do not form
part of the cage. The dorsal bristles of the first four chaetigers are directed forwards.
Dorsal and ventral bristles are figured by Augener (Joc. cit.). The dorsal (Fig. 65, 5)
are long, thin capillary barred bristles of a transparent white colour; the ventral
(Fig. 65, c) are twice as thick, pale yellow, and also end in a fine flagelliform tip.
The surface of the specimen is beset with numberless long thread-like papillae
(Fig. 65, d) with expanded tips.
The tough, transparent, horny, outer layer of the body is, as Grube states, a thick
hyaline cuticle and not a mucous sheath homologous with that in Flabelligera.
Family SCALIBREGMIDAE
Genus Scalibregma, Rathke
Scalibregma inflatum, Rathke.
Fauvel, 1927, p. 123, fig. 44 a-f.
St. 27. 15. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3:3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. Three specimens.
St. 28. 16. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3:3 miles S 45° W of Jason Light.
168 m. Gear DC. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 148. 9. i. 27. Off Cape Saunders, South Georgia. From 54° 03’ S, 36° 39’ W to 54° 05'S,
36° 36’ 30” W. 132-148 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud and stones. One specimen.
St. MS 68. 2. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles 5 } E to 8} cables
SE = E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. One specimen.
Remarks. The specimen from St. 28 is, I think, immature. It is pale yellow in the
anterior swollen part of the body and pale green in the rest. ‘There is, moreover, a row
of small brown eye spots between the horns of the prostomium: these are absent from
the other examples.
Family CAPITELLIDAE
Genus Capitella, Blainville
Capitella capitata (Fabricius).
Fauvel, 1927, p. 154, fig. 55 a-h.
St. MS 67. 28. ii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3 cables NE of Hobart Rock
to } cable W of Hope Point. 38 m. Gear NCS-T. One young specimen.
?, Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. Three specimens.
21-2
164 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Remarks. All the examples are small and immature. They are easily distinguished
from the Antarctic Jsomastus perarmatus, Gravier, by the presence of hooks only in the
8th and gth chaetigers. The only other record of this species from colder southern
waters is that from Kerguelen.
Capitella capitata (Fabricius), var. antarctica, var. nov.
St. MS ?. 13. x. 25. From kelp root, Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. Four specimens.
DescripTION. ‘The largest example measures 110 mm. by 2 mm. for 120 chaetigers.
I regard these specimens as representing an intermediate form between C. capitata and
Isomastus perarmatus, Gravier.
The 8th and gth chaetigers have no capillary chaetae, and in this the specimens are
distinct from I. perarmatus. On the other hand, the copulatory armature of the male
corresponds closely to that of Gravier’s species. The modified bristles are plainly visible
at maturity, and those of the 8th chaetiger overlie those of the gth. Exactly as Gravier
describes, there are five to six crochets on each side in the 8th chaetiger, and four
crochets on each side in the gth. In the abdomen the pads carrying the rows of hooks
are more developed than is usual in C. capitata.
This form can be considered either as a C. capitata, with an unusually highly
developed copulatory apparatus, or as an J. perarmatus, in which the capillary bristles
are lacking from the 8th and gth chaetigers.
Genus Notomastus, Sars
Notomastus latericeus, Sars.
Fauvel, 1927, p. 143, fig. 49 a-h.
St. 27. 15. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3-3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. Four specimens.
St. 159. 21. i. 27. 53° 52’ 30” S, 36° 08’ 00” W. 160 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One
specimen.
Remarks. This species has been previously recorded in southern waters from Bouvet
Island.
? Notomastus lineatus, Claparéde.
Fauvel, 1927, p. 145, fig. 51 a=.
St. 152. 17. i. 27. 53° 51’ 30”S, 36° 18’ 30” W. 245m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One
specimen.
Remarks. A fragment consisting of 24 chaetigers. I have compared this specimen
with a number of examples of this species from Naples, and except that in the Mediter-
ranean examples the branchial prolongations of the ventral tori are larger and more
bulbous, I can find nothing to separate them.
A confusion of locality labels may possibly have occurred, for it is otherwise hard
to account for the presence of this shallow-water Mediterranean species below the
200 m. line in sub-Antarctic waters.
OPHELIIDAE 165
Family OPHELIIDAE
Genus Ammotrypane, Rathke
Ammotrypane breviata, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1913, p. 523, pl. xxxix, figs. 1-7.
St. 167. 20. ii. 27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. 244-344 m.
Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud. Nine specimens.
Remarks. The largest example measures 34 mm. by 2 mm. The number of chaetigers
is 28. ‘The specimens correspond exactly to the description and figures of this species.
They have gills on every chaetiger except the 1st and the last four modified chaetigers.
The anal cylinder is very faintly and irregularly ringed, and its dorsal peak is much
more prominent than the ventral.
Genus Travisia, Johnston
Travisia olens, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1897, p. 98, pl. vi, figs. 162-163.
Benham, 1927, p. 123.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 115 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: fine sand. Two specimens.
Sparrow Cove, Port William, East Falkland Island. 1m. Net RM. One specimen. -
Remarks. The terminal segments of these specimens are 73mm
difficult to count accurately, but there are between 29 and
31 segments. It is also not at all easy to determine the
segment on which the posterior or abdominal region, dis-
tinguished by the lateral eminences, begins, but I estimate
15-16 posterior segments. ‘The body tapers gradually down
to the anal cylinder (Fig. 66) which is equal in length to
the last two segments.
Benham (loc. cit.) discusses at length the relation of
this species to T. kerguelensis, McIntosh. I give my views Hig. 06.0 Train ola
on this matter in my remarks on the latter species. Pygidium from above.
O
Travisia kerguelensis, McIntosh.
McIntosh, 1885, p. 357, pl. xliii, fig. 10; pl. xxvi A, figs. 1-2.
Ehlers, 1897, p. 97, pl. vi, figs. 159-161.
Benham, 1927, p. 123.
St. 146. 8. i. 27. 53° 48’ 00S, 35° 37’ 30” W. 728m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Nine
specimens.
St. 157. 20. 1. 27. 53° 51’ 00” S, 36° 11’ 15” W. 970m. Gear DLH. Bottom: diatomic ooze,
stones and fine sand. One specimen.
St. 159. 21.1. 27. 53° 52’ 30” S, 36° 08’ 00” W. 160m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Three
specimens,
166 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 170. 23. ii. 27. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island. 61° 25’ 30” S, 53° 46’ oo” W. 342 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Three specimens.
St. 175. 2. iii. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 20”S, 59° 48’ 15" W. 200m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, stones and gravel. Three specimens.
3mm
Fig. 67. Travisia kerguelensis.
a. Pygidium. 6. Pygidium. c. Pygidium.
Remarks. There are 23-27 segments. The body does not as a rule taper gradually to
the anal cylinder, but the latter comes off rather abruptly from the terminal segment. It is
equal in length to the last four segments. The posterior part of the body with the lateral
eminences has Io to 11 segments and not 15 to 16, as in 7. olens. The edges of the
terminal segments may be divided into areas as described by Benham (Joc. cit.), or they
may be faintly laciniated (Fig. 67, a), or again deeply serrated (Fig. 67, 6): finally, these
serrations may be modified into large spike-shaped papillae (Fig. 67, c). At the other
end of the series the terminal segments may be perfectly smooth, and apparently
associated with this condition is found a pair of dorsal anal cirri at the end of the anal
cylinder. It is possible that these anal cirri may have been present but lost from the
papillated and laciniated examples. For the specimens with smooth terminal segments
and anal cirri I propose to create a new variety.
OPHELIIDAE 167
Benham attaches some importance to the shape and length in relation to number of
segments in his specimens. I cannot follow him here: the examples before me vary in
shape from that of a cigar to that of an acorn.
I have examined MclIntosh’s three co-types, and they vary considerably in their
degree of papillation, the most extreme example being serrated rather than strongly
papillated. In my view all the intermediate stages between a faint areolation to large
papillae are present in this species.
To summarise my remarks, I suggest that 7. olens should be provisionally separated
from T. kerguelensis, on the ground that 7. olens has 29 to 31 segments and T. ker-
guelensis 23 to 27; that 7. olens has 15 to 16 segments involved in the posterior division
of the body and 7. kerguelensis 10 to 11; and that in 7. olens the body passes gradually
into the anal cylinder which is equal in length to the last two segments, whereas in
T. kerguelensis the anal cylinder, which is equal in length to the last four segments,
comes off more abruptly from the body. Moreover, the terminal segments in 7’. olens
are smooth and in 7. kerguelensis more or less laciniated or papillated.
Ehlers regards 7. olens as identical with the European T. forbes. The latter species
seems to me to be nearer to 7. kerguelensis than to T. olens. Fauvel gives 23 to 26 for
the number of segments of 7. forbesii. I have also observed that the longitudinal
furrows of the anal cylinder are fewer and the areas they delimit larger than in
T. kerguelensis.
Travisia kerguelensis, McIntosh, var. gravieri, var. nov.
St. 187. 18. i. 27. Neumayr Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 48’ 30”S, 63° 31’ 30” W.
259m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud. Nine specimens.
St. 190. 24. ili. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archi- i =e 2mm.
pelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 315m. Gear
DLH. Bottom: mud and rock. Three specimens.
Remarks. This variety differs from T. ker-
guelensis in the absence of papillation or laciniation
of the terminal segments, and in the presence
of a pair of short dorsal anal cirri (Fig. 68) at the
end of the anal cylinder. I have named this 0)
variety after my esteemed colleague, Prof. C. Fig. 68. Travia berouclenss, var.
Gravier of Paris. graviert. Pygidium.
Genus Kesun, Chamberlin
Kesun abyssorum, n.sp.
St. 177. 5. ili. 27. 27 miles SW of Deception Island, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 30” S,
61° 17’ 00” W. 1080 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. One specimen.
DescrIPTION. The body (Fig. 69, a) is acorn-shaped from contraction, and measures
21 mm. for 23 chaetigers. The diameter is 6 mm. at its widest part. There is a very short,
blunt, smooth prostomium, followed by a triannulate buccal segment with paired
168 DISCOVERY REPORTS
nuchal pits. Apart from the prostomium the surface of the body is granular or finely
vesicular ; and as described by Chamberlin for Kesun fusus, each annulus is marked by
a row of fine but distinct vesicular papillae. There is no trace of gills.
In the anterior portion of the body the bristle bundles are borne on small papillae,
and above and below the foot are one or two papillae much larger than the other
papillae of the middle annulus (Fig. 69, 6). From about the 12th chaetiger all the papillae
O
O
Fig. 69. Kesun abyssorum.
a. Entire specimen. 6. 8th chaetiger. c. Terminal segments from the side.
of the middle ring increase in size till they equal the papillae lying above and below
the foot. Consequently, for the last ten segments, the bristle bundles lie in a deep
groove (Fig. 69, c), the sides of which are formed by the annulus in which the feet lie.
The terminal segments are uniannulate. The lateral prominences so conspicuous in
Travisia are wholly absent.
From the 6th to the 9th chaetigers inclusive, there is on each side below the foot
an enormous oval nephridiopore, the vertical diameter of which is about equal to the
distance between the bristle bundles. Between the bristle bundles sensory pits are
MALDANIDAE 169
present as in Travisia. ‘The anal cylinder is about equal in length to the last two
segments, and faintly longitudinally furrowed.
Remarks. This form is allied to Kesun fusus, Chamberlin: it differs in the number
of segments and in the possession of a deep posterior groove in which the feet lie.
Family MALDANIDAE
Genus Maldane, Grube (Malmgren char. emend.)
Maldane decorata, Grube.
Augener, 1918, p. 475, pl. vii, figs. 191-194, text-fig. 75.
St.274. 4. vili.27. Off St Paul de Loanda, Angola. From 8° 40’ 15" 5S, 13° 13’ 45” E to 8° 38’ 15S,
13° 13’ 00” E. 64-65 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. Eight specimens.
Remarks. A complete specimen measures 128 mm. by 4 mm., which is twice as
large as the measurements given by Augener. There are 19 chaetigers and two achaetous
preanal segments. The head and the first two chaetigers are dorsally mottled with small
reddish brown spots. Glandular areas are present on the back from the 3rd to the 6th
chaetiger. The thick glandular pads on which the tori lie reach their greatest prominence
at the 8th chaetiger. The bristles are well figured by Augener. The border of the anal
plate is entire.
Maldane sarsi, Malmgren, var. antarctica, Arwidsson.
Arwidsson, 1911, p. 32, pl. i, figs. 23-26; pl. ii, figs. 50-54.
St. 123. 15. xii. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 4:1 miles N 54° E
of Larsen Point to 1-2 miles S 62° W of Merton Rock. 230-250m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey
mud. One specimen.
St. 177. 5. iii. 27. 27 miles SW of Deception Island, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 30” S, 61° 17’ oo” W.
1080 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. One specimen.
St. 181. 12. iii. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00” S, 63° o1’ 00” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 182. 14. iti. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 21’ 00"S, 62° 58’ 00” W.
278-500 m. Gear N 7-T. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 186. 16.iii.27. Fournier Bay, Anvers Island, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 25’ 30” 5, 63° 02’ 00" W.
295m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 192. 27. iii. 27. Off Cape Kaiser, Brabant Island, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 14 00”S,
61° 49’ 00” W. 750 m.; on lead. One specimen.
St. 195. 30. iii. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00” S,
58° 28’ 30” W. 391m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. 30 specimens.
Remarks. Arwidsson has given a full and careful account of this species, which he
separates from the northern form on differences in the distribution of the glandular
areas. He has specialized in the Maldanids, and I follow his naming.
Dili 22
170 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Genus Rhodine, Malmgren
Rhodine intermedia, Arwidsson.
Arwidsson, 1911, p. 11, pl. i, figs. 5-11; pl. ii, figs. 39-41.
Rhodine loveni, Willey, 1902, p. 276, pl. xlvi, figs. 3-5.
Rhodine loveni, Gravier, 1911, p. 125, pl. ix, figs. 110-112; pl. x, fig. 114; pl. x1, fig. 133.
? Rhodine antarctica, Gravier, 1906, p. 39, pl. iv, figs. 33-37, text-fig. 24.
St. 27. 15. ili. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3:3 miles S 44° E ot Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. One fragment.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Ten specimens.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02'S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
One specimen.
St. 141. 29. xii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 200 yards from shore under Mount
Duse. 17-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom: mud. Five specimens.
Dt, 152. 17. 1. 27. 53° 51 30° S; 36° 18 30" W. 245m. Gear DLH- ‘Bottom:) rock. One
specimen.
St. 187. 18. ili. 27. Neumayr Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 48’ 30S, 63° 31’ 30” W.
259m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
Remarks. There are glandular bands from the
3rd to the roth segment, and double rows of crochets
on the 4th to the 14th chaetiger. The segmental
collars reappear on the 17th to 18th chaetigers.
I have nothing to add to Arwidsson’s compre-
hensive study of this species. That which Gravier
figures as the pygidium of his R. antarctica .has
much the appearance of the end of an incomplete
specimen, the supposed anus being possibly the
constriction where the delicately joined segments are
: Fig. 70. Rhodine intermedia.
apt to break off. I figure the posterior end of a 2 her ees sees ‘
specimen (Fig. 70).
Finally, R. intermedia does not seem to be clearly distinguished from R. loveni.
Genus Lumbriclymenella, Arwidsson
Lumbriclymenella robusta, Arwidsson.
Arwidsson, 1911, p. 3, pl. i, figs. 1-4; pl. ii, figs. 32-36.
Fauvel, 1916, p. 456.
St. 27. 15, iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3:3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. One specimen.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02'S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
One specimen.
MALDANIDAE 171
St. 195. 30. iii. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00” S,
58° 28’ 30” W. 391 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. Three specimens.
Remarks. I have nothing to add to Arwidsson’s and Fauvel’s accounts of this species.
Genus Clymenella, Verrill
Clymenella minor, Arwidsson.
Arwidsson, 1911, p. 24, pl. i, figs. 17-22; pl. ii, figs. 44-46.
St. 51. 4. v.26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Off kelp root. Gear OTL. Bottom: fine sand. Four
specimens.
St. WS 78. 13. iii. 27. 51° o1’ 00” S, 68° 04’ 30” W. From 51° o1’ 00” S, 68° 02’ 00” W to
51° o1’ 00” S, 68° 07’ 00” W. 95 m. Gear DC. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
Remarks. The fragmentary material at my disposal does not permit me to add any-
thing to Arwidsson’s account of this species.
Genus Clymene, Savigny
Clymene kerguelensis (McIntosh).
Praxilla kerguelensis, McIntosh, 1885, p. 405, pl. xlvi, fig. 7; pl. xxv A, fig. 6.
Praxillella antarctica, Arwidsson, 1911, p. 19, pl. i, figs. 12-15; pl. ii, figs. 42-43.
Clymene kerguelensis, Fauvel, 1916, p. 457, pl. ix, figs. 48-49.
St. 27. 15. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3:3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. Two specimens.
St. 167. 20. ii. 27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. 244-344 m.
Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud. One specimen.
Remarks. This species has already been carefully studied by the above authors.
Clymene (Isocirrus) yungi (Gravier).
Isocirrus yungi, Gravier, 1911, p. 122, pl. ix, fig. 109; pl. x, figs. 115—120.
Benham, 1921, p. 100.
St. 27. 15. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3-3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. Three fragments.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Three specimens.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02’ S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
One specimen. Gear N 4-T. Three specimens.
St. 148. g. i. 27. Off Cape Saunders, South Georgia. From 54° 03’ S, 36° 39’ W to 54° 05'S,
36° 36’ 30” W. 132-148 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud and stones. One specimen.
St. 149. 10. i. 27. Mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 1-15 miles N 765° W
to 2:62 miles S 11° W of Merton Rock. 200-234 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 052.927. 1. 27. 53° 51 30° S, 36° 18’ 30" W. 245 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One
specimen.
bd
n
n
172 DISCOVERY REPORTS
St153. 17. 1.276 54° 08: 30 S.ea6: 274530 Wie, tobum. Gear, DEH) Bottom: rock. One
specimen.
St. 177. 5. iii. 27. 27 miles SW of Deception Island, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 30” S, 61° 17’ 00” W.
1080 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. One fragment.
St. 181. 12. iii. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00” S, 63° o1’ oo” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One fragment.
St. 190. 24.ii1.27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 93-126 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. ‘Three specimens.
Remarks. Benham, with more material at his disposal, has supplemented Gravier’s
account of this species. Gravier gives the number of achaetous ante-anal segments as
five and Benham as six. There are undoubtedly six glandular rings, as Benham describes,
but the hindmost lies up against the anal funnel and may form part of the anal segment.
Gravier writes of the anal funnel of his specimen: “‘ L’aspect rappelle de trés pres ce
qu’Arwidsson (1906, Taf. III, fig. 106) a figuré pour le Lezochone borealis.” The figure
to which Gravier refers represents the anal funnel of an Jsocirrus planiceps and not of
a Leiochone borealis. .
Genus Asychis, Kinberg
Asychis amphiglypta (Ehlers).
Maldane amphiglypta, Ehlers, 1897, p. 119, pl. viii, figs. 187-193.
Asychis amphiglypta, Arwidsson, 1911, p. 35, pl. 1, figs. 27-31; pl. ii, figs. 55-58.
St. 29. 16. ili. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 5-9 miles S 51° W of Jason Light.
23m. Gear DC. Bottom: mud and stones. One specimen.
St. 30. 16. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 2:8 miles S 24° W of Jason Light.
251m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. Sixty-two specimens.
St. 181. 12. iii. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00” S, 63° o1’ 00” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Two specimens.
St. 186. 16. ili. 27. Fournier Bay, Anvers Island, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 25’ 30’S,
63° 02’ 00” W. 295 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud. Thirty-five specimens.
St. 195. 30. iii. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00” S,
58° 28’ 30” W. 391 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. Eighty specimens.
St. MS 68. 2. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S } E to 8} cables
SE x E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. ‘Two specimens.
Remarks. There is little I can add to Ehlers’ and Arwidsson’s accounts of this species.
The largest complete specimen measures 100 mm. by 4 mm. There are 1g chaetigers.
The border of the cephalic plate is smooth. The buccal segment is achaetous and ventral
hooks are absent from the 1st chaetiger.
‘The examiples are without colour and the glandular areas are not very clearly marked.
Both head and hinder ends are well figured by Arwidsson. This author states that there
are two to three hinder achaetous segments. This is not substantiated by my specimens,
which confirm Ehlers’ statement that the anal segment alone is achaetous.
MALDANIDAE 173
Genus Nicomache, Malmgren
Nicomache lumbricalis ( Fabricius).
Fauvel, 1927, p. 190, fig. 66 a7.
Nicomache capensis, McIntosh, 1885, p. 399, pl. xlvi, fig. 4; pl. xxiv A, figs. 18-19; pl. xxxvii A,
fig. 2.
Nicomache lumbricalis, var. capensis, McIntosh, 1904, p. 71, pl. vi, fig. 32.
Saldanha Bay, South Africa. Beach collection. Two specimens.
Remarks. I am unable to find any distinction between these specimens and European
examples of this species. McIntosh (/oc. cit. 1904) gives the number of chaetigers of
his example from the Cape as 20. My complete specimen has 22 chaetigers, as in the
European form.
Nicomache sp.
St. 190. 24. ili. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 315 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and rock. Three specimens. 93-126 m. Bottom: stones, mud and rock.
One specimen.
DescRIPTION. The largest fragment has eight chaetigers and measures 52 mm. by
4mm. The head (Fig. 71, a and 5) and the first two chaetigers have a strong reddish
brown colour on the dorsal surface, the colour being most intense along the cephalic
keel. Otherwise there is no pigmentation.
There is no cephalic border; the prostomium is bluntly rounded and without eye
spots. The cephalic keel is well developed, and lies between the nuchal organs: these
form a pair of depressions wider in front than behind and diverging from behind for-
wards; they do not curve round in front as is usual in the genus. Ventrally there is
a very large mouth with a folded posterior lip.
The head and buccal segment are equal in length to the 1st chaetiger. The first three
chaetigers are all of about the same length, the 4th is shorter than these and the sth,
6th and 7th are each about equal to the combined lengths of the 2nd and 3rd. These
proportions do not hold good for the single specimen from 93~126 m., in which the
increase in the length of the segments begins with the 7th chaetiger. ‘The comparative
length of the segments must depend on the mode of contraction of the specimen. Pre-
chaetal glandular bands occur on the 4th to the 7th chaetigers, and on the 8th the
glandular areas are reduced to uncinigerous pads. The feet lie in the anterior third of
the segments as far as the 7th chaetiger: the boundary between the 7th and 8th
chaetigers is indistinguishable. The first three chaetigers have one to two large
untoothed ventral acicular spines.
The dorsal bundle contains bristles of three kinds: stout bordered bristles ending
in hirsute tips (Fig. 71, c), long, slender, very delicately pennate bristles (Fig. 71, @),
and simple capillary bristles (Fig. 71, e). The ventral hooks (Fig. 71, f) have three teeth
above the main fang.
174 DISCOVERY REPORTS
In the same bottle with the specimens from 315 m. is a single posterior fragment
which probably belongs to this species. It consists of an anal funnel (Fig. 71, g) with
‘6mm
‘Imm
0
f g
Fig. 71. Nicomache, sp.
a. Head seen from above. b. Head seen from side. c. Stout bordered bristle.
d. Pennate bristle. e. Capillary bristle. f. Hook. g. Anal funnel.
‘5mm:
30 equal cirri and a centrally situated anus, two achaetous ante-anal rings and three
posterior chaetigers. In the specimen from 93-126 m. the head, buccal segment and
ist chaetiger are regenerated.
MALDANIDAE 175
Remarks. These fragments cannot with certainty be attributed to a genus. They
differ from any known Antarctic Maldanid. The head and bristles are close to those of
Nicomache, to which genus I have provisionally assigned the examples.
Genus Axiothella, Verrill
Axiothella antarctica, n.sp.
St. 167. 20. 11. 27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. 244-344 m.
Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud. Two specimens.
St. WS 76. 11. ili. 27. 51° 00’ 00"S, 62° 02’ 30” W. From 51° 00’ 00” S, 62° 00’ 00” W to
51° 00’ 00” S, 62° 04 36” W. 207 m. Gear DC. ‘Taken from sand brought up by conical dredge.”
Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
‘4mm:
2mm.
‘02mm
b
Fig. 72. Axiothella antarctica.
a. Head from above. 6. Dorsal bristle. c. Hook.
DescriPTION. The largest fragment measures 36 mm. by 1 mm. for eight chaetigers.
The colour is an uniform pale green, except for the whitish glandular areas. ‘The head
(Fig. 72, a) has an oblique cephalic plate with an uninterrupted edge. ‘The prostomium
is a small conical structure without eye spots. There is a pair of long parallel nuchal
organs set rather far apart.
There is no distinct cephalic keel. There is a long buccal segment about three-quarters
the length of the rst chaetiger. The segments decrease in length to the 4th chaetiger,
which is about half the length of the rst. The 4th to 8th chaetigers are about the same
176 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
length, and there remains a damaged fragment of a gth chaetiger which appears to be
longer than the 8th. There are prechaetal glandular bands on the 4th to the 8th chaetigers.
Throughout the fragment the feet remain the same distance from the anterior border
of the segments.
The 1st chaetiger has about three ventral uncini, but I cannot with certainty dis-
tinguish on these any subrostral barbules. I can see only one kind of dorsal bristle:
slender, very thinly bordered capillaries (Fig. 72, 6). ‘The uncini (Fig. 72, c) have five
to six teeth above the main fang.
Remarks. I have created a new species for these few fragments; it is necessarily
very imperfectly characterised owing to the poverty of the material. Further material
may show that this species is identical with one of the two European representatives
of the genus, A. catenata (Malmgren) or A. constricta (Claparede).
The southern A. quadrimaculata, Augener, is a much smaller species with a differently
shaped head.
Family OWENIIDAE
Genus Owenia, Delle Chiaje
Owenia fusiformis, Delle Chiaje.
Fauvel, 1927, p. 203, fig. 71 a-f.
St. WS 4. 30. ix. 26. 32° 45’ 00” S, 18° 10’ 00” E. 45-47 m. Gear DL. Twenty specimens.
Remarks. The tube with its incrustation of imbricating sand grains and pieces of
shell, the branchial laciniated membrane and the innumerable hooks with two parallel
teeth are characteristic of this species.
Family SABELLARIIDAE
Genus Gunnarea, Johansson
Gunnarea capensis (Schmarda).
Johansson, 1927, p. 99.
Sabellaria capensis, McIntosh, 1885, p. 418, pl. xxv A, figs. 24-25; pl. xxvi A, figs. 11-12; and
1904, P- 74.
Augener, 1918, p. 493.
Saldanha Bay Beach, South Africa, 1926. Three specimens.
Remarks. These rather ill-preserved specimens are almost uniformly deep black,
except for the golden paleae. Johansson has created the genus Gunnarea with this as
the type species. He gives the absence of dorsal hooks (Nacken Haken) as the generic
differential. ‘This is scarcely a character of generic value, but although this form agrees
with Idanthyrsus in the number of rows of paleae and of parathoracic segments, the
complete fusion dorsally of the peduncles to form a single opercular structure with
SABELLARIIDAE 177
concentric rows of paleae, and the distinctive broad outer paleae (see McIntosh, Joc. cit.
Pl. xxv A, fig. 24) render it generically distinct from Idanthyrsus. To some extent it
combines the characters of Sabellaria and Idanthyrsus.
Genus Idanthyrsus, Kinberg
Idanthyrsus armatus, Kinberg.
Pallasia sexungulata, Ehlers, 1897, p. 125, pl. viii, figs. 194-202.
Idanthyrsus armatus, Johansson, 1927, p. 90.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 115 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: fine sand. Five specimens.
St. 53. 12. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. Hulk of ‘‘Great Britain.’ o-2 m. Gear
RM. Four specimens.
St. WS 72. 5. iil. 27. 51° 07’ 00” S, 57° 34’ 00” W. g5 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand and shell.
One specimen.
St Wor77- I2yill. 27. 51. 0% 00" S, 66° 31° 30° W. From 51° 00’ 00" S; 66° 30’ 00” W to
51° 02’ 00” S, 66° 33’ 00” W. r1o-113 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: coarse dark sand. One specimen.
st. WS 79. 13. ili. 27. 51° or 30’ S, 64° 59’ 30” W. From 51° 00’ 00” S,65° 00’ oo” W to
51° 03’ 00” S, 64° 59’ 00” W. 132-131 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark
sand. “‘Found attached to large Molgulidae.” Six specimens. 2mm
St. WS 85. 25. iti. 27. 8 miles S 66° E of Lively Island, East Falkland
Island. From 52° 09’ 00” S, 58° 14’ 00” W to 52° 08’ 00” S, 58° 09’ 00” W.
79 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand and shell. One specimen.
St. WS 88. 6. iv. 27. 54° 00’ 00” S, 64° 57’ 30” W. From 54° oo’ 00” S,
65° 00’ 00” W to 54° 00’ 00" 5, 64° 55’ 00” W. 118m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
sand, shell and stones. Four specimens.
St. WS 92. 8. iv. 27. 51° 58’ 30’ S, 65° or’ 00” W. From 52° 00’ 00” S,
65° 00’ 00” W to 51° 57’ 00", 65° 02’ 00” W. 145-143 m. GearOTC. Bottom:
fine dark sand and stones. A cluster of tubes with Serpulid vermidom and one
specimen.
St. WS 95. 17. iv. 27. 48° 58’ 15”S, 64° 45’ 00” W. From 48° 57’ oo” S,
64° 45’ 00” W to 48° 59’ 30” S, 64° 45’ 00” W. 109m. Gear DC. Bottom:
fine dark sand, stones and shell. Two specimens.
Remarks. Ehlers has given a full account of this species.
Johansson claims that the outer paleae (Fig. 73) are characteristic.
They are certainly distinct from those of the allied J. pennatus
(Peters) of tropical distribution.
The specimens from St. 53 are very small, measuring 7-1omm., lo
and I can find only two pairs of dorsal hooks instead of the Biot ae Taeneayreus
usual three. Otherwise they do not differ. I take them for young armatus. Outer palea.
specimens.
The name Pallasia, Quatrefages, 1848, retained by Fauve! (1927, p. 206), appears to
be preoccupied by Pallasia, Desvoidy, 1830, in Diptera, and is replaced by Idanthyrsus,
Kinberg.
pul 23
178 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Idanthyrsus pennatus (Peters).
Johansson, 1927, p. 88, with synonymy.
St. 2. 17. xi. 25. Clarence Bay, Ascension Island, Catherine’s Point and Collyer Point. Shore
collection. Four specimens.
1mm
Remarks. I have compared these examples with a number of
specimens from the Pacific attributed to this species, and also
with the type specimen of MclIntosh’s Sabellaria johnstoni, and
I can find no distinction between these Atlantic examples and the
Pacific forms. I believe this to be the first record of this species
from the Atlantic.
The palm-leaf shaped outer paleae (Fig. 74) are probably
characteristic of the species. There is only a single pair of large
dorsal hooks. Johansson, writing of the opercular peduncles, says:
“Thr vorderer freier Rand tragt keine Papillen.” If he means the
peduncular wall just external to the outer paleae, his statement is
supported neither by these specimens nor by the Pacific forms
examined by me. In all examples this wall has a row of papillae:
in old and ill-preserved specimens many of these papillae are
often lost.
O
Fig. 74. Idanthyrsus
pennatus. Outer palea.
Family STERNASPIDAE
Genus Sternaspis, Otto
Sternaspis scutata (Ranzani).
Fauvel, 1927, p. 216, fig. 76 a—g, with synonymy.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear NCS-T.
Bottom: grey mud. ‘Twelve specimens.
St. 144. 5.1.27. Off mouth of Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. From 54° 04'S, 36° 27’ W
to 53° 58'S, 36° 26’ W. 155-178 m. Gear NCS-T. Bottom: green mud and sand. Three specimens.
St. 162. 17. 1. 27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 48’ 00” S, 46° 08’ 00” W. 320m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: green mud. Ninety-five specimens.
St. 167. 20. 11.27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. 244-344 m.
Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud. Seventy specimens.
St. 177. 5. 111.27. 27 miles SW of Deception Island, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 30”'S, 61° 17’ oo” W.
1080 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. Three specimens.
St. 181. 12. ui. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00” S, 63° o1’ 00” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Sixty specimens.
St. 182. 14. ii. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 21’ 00” S, 62° 58’ 00” W.
278-500 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: mud. Sixty-five specimens.
St. 187. 18. itt. 27. Neumayr Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 48’ 30” 5, 63° 31’ 30” W.
259m. Gear DLH, Bottom: mud. One specimen.
STERNASPIDAE 179
St. 190. 24. 11. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00" W. 315 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and rock. Two specimens.
,
St. 196. 3. iv. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands. 62° 17’ 30” S, 58° 21’ 00” W. 720m.
Gear N 70 V. Bottom: mud and diatomic ooze. Fifteen specimens.
Remarks. I have compared these specimens with some examples from between
Iceland and Jan Mayen, and I can find nothing to distinguish the southern from the
northern forms. I believe this to be the first record from Antarctic waters.
Sternaspis scutata (Ranzani), var. africana (Augener).
Sternaspis fossor, Stimpson, var. africana, Augener, 1918, p. 608, figs. 10g and rio.
St. 274. 4. vill. 27. Off St Paul de Loanda. From 8° 40’ 15”S, 13° 13’ 45” E to 8° 38’ 15S,
13° 13’ 00" E. 64-65 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. Fourteen specimens.
St.279. 10. vill. 27. Off Cape Lopez, French Congo. From 8-5 miles N 71° E to 15 miles N 24° E
of Cape Lopez Light. 58-67 m. Gear N 4-T. Bottom: mud and fine sand. One specimen.
Remarks. The ventral shield is subrectangular with the posterior mid-ventral notch
much reduced, the anterior bristles are more slender, numerous (about 20 in a bundle
as opposed to Io or 12, the usual number in SS. scutata) and closely set than in S. scutata
(cf. Augener’s figs. 109 a and 6, and r1o), and eight out of the fifteen examples have
an appearance of macroscopic papillation on the posterior segments visible to the
naked eye.
These specimens correspond to Augener’s account, and I agree that this form differs
from the S. scutata of European and colder South Atlantic waters, but I cannot follow
him in regarding it as a variety of S. fossor, Stimpson. I have examined three examples
from Massachusetts Bay, labelled S. fossor, from the United States National Museum,
and except for traces of what appears to be macroscopic papillation round the posterior
end they are indistinguishable from the European form. In fact I agree with Fauvel
(1927, p. 216) in uniting S. fossor with S. scutata.
The appearance of macroscopic papillation seems to be due to small, more or less
regularly spaced, aggregations of fine particles of mud entangled in tufts of thread-like
papillae (Hautcirren). I suspect that these groups of particles correspond in position
to islands of gland cells secreting a viscous fluid that causes the particles to adhere to
the papillae; and I am not satisfied that they represent special concentrations of skin
papillae, which appear to be distributed over the skin equally in examples with and
without the apparent macroscopic papillation. Anyhow, the fact that this papillation
may be present or absent in examples from the same haul renders it of no value as a
differential character.
Marenzeller (1890, PI. i, figs. 4~7) gives comparative figures of the ventral shields of
three species of Sternaspis and, with Augener, regards the differences in their shape as
specific characters. After examining a very large series of Antarctic specimens, I am
of the opinion that the shape of the shield varies too much to be of value as a differential.
However, on the whole, the shield of these African specimens is more subrectangular
23-2
180 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
and less notched in the middle posteriorly than the shield of an average Antarctic
specimen.
In this relation the shield of these specimens and Augener’s figures (109 d and e)
are closer to Marenzeller’s figures of the shield of S. scutata (loc. cit. Fig. 6) than to
those of S. fossor (Fig. 4). Augener holds the opposite view. Moreover, I am equally
of the opinion that the shape of the gill plates and the degree of extension and size of
the genital papillae are of little, if any, differential value. There is, however, a substantial
distinction in the number and character of the anterior bristles: this is illustrated by
Augener.
Regarding the name of this form, if S. fossor and S. scutata are synonymous, S. scutata
becomes the stem form and africana a variety of this.
Family AMPHICTENIDAE
Genus Pectinaria, Lamarck
Pectinaria sp.
St. 4. 30. 1. 26. Tristan da Cunha. 36° 55’ 00” S, 12° 12’ 00” W. 40-46 m. Gear DL. Bottom:
stones. One specimen.
Remarks. The specimen is too much damaged to be assigned with certainty to any
species. It is a massive form, measuring as much as 13 mm. in breadth behind the
paleae. It is impossible to count the number of bristle-bearing segments. There are
13 paleae in both groups, the tentacular membrane has about 22 processes and the
dorsal collar has the same number. There are six anal hooks on each side. 'The bristles
and hooks resemble those figured by McIntosh (1904, PI. vii, figs. 35 a—36) for Pectinaria
capensis, to which species the present example probably belongs.
Family AMPHARETIDAE
Genus Amage, Malmgren
Amage sculpta, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1908, p. 141, pl. xx, figs. 1-9.
Hessle, 1917, p. 121.
St. 167. 20. 11.27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. 244-344 m.
Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud. Seven specimens.
St. 177. 5. ill. 27. 27 miles SW of Deception Island, South Shetlands. 63” 17’ 30”S,
61° 17’ oo” W. 1080 m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, coarse sand and stones. One specimen.
Remarks. The average measurements are about 30 mm. by 6 mm. at the widest part.
The body is unusually thick and slug-like and tapers very sharply posteriorly. Noto-
podial bristles are visible externally on 12 segments only, those of the first two chaetigers
(3rd and 4th segments according to Hessle’s enumeration) being enclosed within the
notopodial lobes. The 3rd segment has only two small bristles inside the lobe. The cirri
are enormously developed in the hinder region.
AMPHARETIDAE 181
The Amage sculpta described by Benham (1927, p. 121) from the Ross Sea belongs,
in my opinion, to a different species. Benham’s examples have a different shape of
body, 15 bristle-bearing notopodia and 15 abdominal segments. The bristles of the
first two chaetigers are very much more developed than in these specimens and, as
Benham has pointed out, the posterior end, with its two long anal cirri and its six
segments without neuropods, is quite different from that described by Ehlers. My
specimens confirm Ehlers’ account.
The deep-water specimen from St. 177 shows certain differences from the rest. It
is a small and apparently ripe female, measuring 11 mm. in length. The difference in
breadth between the thoracic and abdominal regions is not so marked as in the other
specimens. The cephalic lobe is more clearly trilobed, and the raised glandular bands
more distinct. The bristles of the first two chaetigers are not enclosed within the pedal
lobe, but project freely. ‘They are small but distinct.
In all other respects this example is indistinguishable from the other specimens. ‘The
hooks in all the specimens have paired teeth in the third row as figured by Ehlers.
Genus Melinna, Malmgren (Hessle char. emend.)
Melinna cristata (M. Sars).
Fauvel, 1927, p. 237, fig. 83 in.
St. 27. 15. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3-3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
trom. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. One specimen.
Remarks. A single, rather poorly preserved specimen, which I believe to belong to
this species. Ehlers (1908, p. 144) has already recorded it from southern waters, near
Bouvet Island.
Genus Phyllocomus, Grube
Phyllocomus crocea, Grube.
McIntosh, 1885, p. 427, pl. xlvii, fig. 11; pl. xxvi A, fig. 25; pl. xxxvii A, fig. 6.
Flessle, 1917, p- 123:
St. 175. 2. ili. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 20”S, 59° 48’ 15" W. 200m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, stones and gravel. Five specimens.
St. WS 80. 14. iii. 27. 50° 57’ 00” S, 63° 37’ 30” W. From 50° 58’ 00” S, 63° 39’ 00” W to
50° 55’ 30” S, 63° 36’ 00” W. 152-156m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
Remarks. There is not much that I can add to Hessle’s diagnosis of this species.
The examples from St. 175 have an average measurement of 30 mm. by 4 mm. at the
widest part; a damaged example from St. WS 80, doubtfully attributable to this
species, is very much larger, measuring 83 mm. in length. The large, rounded pro-
stomium (Fig. 75, @) is splashed with dark red pigment, which extends in irregular
markings to the under-surface of the buccal segment, and along the back to about the
5th chaetiger.
182 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Hessle does not call attention to the unusual nature of the gills: they are described
by Grube as “ foliaceae, quasi lanceolatae”’; and instead of being of the normal cirriform
shape they are flattened and leaf-like for about three-fourths of their length, and end
in a rounded cirriform tip. The gills (Fig. 75, 6) are arranged in two transverse series
of three on each side, with the 4th directly in front of the innermost of the series.
Oo O
Fig. 75. Phyllocomus crocea.
a. Prostomium. 6. Anterior end with gills. c. Posterior member of inner pair of gills on each side.
d. Anterior member of inner pair of gills on each side. e. Dorsal bristle.
Those of the outer pair on each side consist of two membranes, one on each side of a
rounded central axis. The posterior member of the inner pair (Fig. 75, c) on each side
has, in addition to its two membranes separated by the axis, a second, smaller pair of
membranes coming off from the axis and extending for about half its length. The
anterior member of the inner pair (Fig. 75, d) on each side is shorter than the rest and
lacks the rounded cirriform tip; it has four membranes, springing from the main axis
AMPHARETIDAE 183
and continued over its entire length. This condition is exactly similar to that described
by Benham (1921, p. 98) for the gill of his P. dibranchiata. Moreover, there are three
tubular ducts running down from the bases of the gills to the notopods. That from the
outermost gill runs to the rst chaetiger, that from the second gill to the 2nd chaetiger,
and that from the hindmost of the inner pair on each side to the 3rd chaetiger. The
anterior member of the inner pair on each side has no duct visible externally. The
condition is as if the ceratophores of the gills were fused to the back as they ran
outwards towards the notopods.
In Benham’s account of P. dibranchiata he describes analogous ducts as channels
open near the gill base, and roofed over on their way to the notopods. In this they
differ from those of the present species, in which the “
throughout. These ducts are the “‘areolae”’ of Grube.
This species is clearly distinct from Benham’s P. dibranchiata, which has a single
pair of gills, each with four membranes. Benham is mistaken in saying that Grube
ascribes two pairs of gills to P. crocea, for Grube writes: ‘“‘Branchiae utrinque 4
dorsuales.”’
The dorsal bristles (Fig. 75, e) correspond exactly to those described by Benham for
P. dibranchiata. 'Vhey all have the curious third flange which Benham describes and
figures. The hooks are well figured by McIntosh.
channels’’ are closed tubes
Genus Neosabellides, Hessle
Neosabellides elongatus (Ehlers).
Sabellides elongatus, Ehlers, 1913, p. 551, pl. xlii, figs. 1-6.
Neosabellides elongatus, Hessle, 1917, p. 104.
Benham, 1927, p. 117, pl. ili, figs. 82-86.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02'S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
One specimen.
St. 159. 21. i. 27. 53° 52’ 30’ S, 36° 08’ 00” W. 160m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One
specimen.
Remarks. From these indifferently preserved specimens, I can add nothing to the
already existing accounts of this species.
Genus Amphicteis, Grube
Amphicteis gunneri (M. Sars).
Fauvel, 1927, p. 231, fig. 80 a-k.
St. gt. 8. ix. 26. «5 mile off Roman Rock, False Bay, South Africa. 35m. GearNRL. Bottom:
sand. One specimen.
Remarks. The specimen is poorly preserved, and does not permit a thorough
examination. It seems to be inseparable from this widely distributed species. There
184 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
are, however, only three pairs of gills, and I presume that the fourth has been lost,
although I cannot see the usual scar marking the position of a lost gill. I believe this
to be the first record of this species from South Africa.
Amphicteis gunneri (M. Sars), var. antarctica, Hessle.
Hessle, 1917, p. 116, text-fig. 21.
St. 28. 16. 11. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3-3 miles S 45° W of Jason Light.
168 m. Gear DC. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 30. 16. iil. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 2-8 miles S 24° W of Jason Light.
251m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. Two specimens.
St. 39. 25. ill. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 8 cables S 81° W of Merton
Rock to 1-3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. 179-235 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. One
specimen.
St. 143. 30. xii. 26. Off mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 54° 12’ S, 36° 29’ 30” W.
273 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
St. 152. 17. 1. 27. 53° 51° 30” S, 36° 18’ 30” W. 245m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Two
specimens.
St. 160. 7. ii. 27. Near Shag Rocks.~53° 43’ 40" S, 40° 57’ oo” W. 177m. Gear DLH. Bottom:
grey mud, stones and rock. Four specimens.
St. 167. 20. li. 27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. 244-344 m.
Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud. Twelve specimens.
St. 182. 14. ili. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 21’ 00” S, 62° 58’ 00” W.
278-500 m. Gear N 7-T. Bottom: mud. Two specimens.
St. 195. 30. ill. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00” 5S,
58° 28’ 30” W. 391 m. Bottom: mud and stones. Gear OTM. Three specimens. Gear DLH. Four
specimens.
St. WS 32. xii. 12. 26. Mouth of Drygalski Fiord, South Georgia. 225 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
grey mud. Five specimens.
St. MS 15. 17. il. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3 miles SW of Merton Rock
to 2{ miles NNW of Dartmouth Point. 110m. Gear DS. One specimen.
St. MS 69. 5. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 14 cables E x N to 8} cables
E x N of Macmahon Rock. 146m. Gear DS. Five specimens.
Remarks. This species is abundant round South Georgia. In the smaller and pre-
sumably younger specimens, the type of palea with a kind of plume on the top, which
Hessle regards as a varietal character, is replaced by a more slender and gradually
tapering kind such as is found in the stem form. The examples from Sts. 160 and 182
have the posterior raised border of the nuchal organs conspicuously coloured brown:
in some from St. 167 there are faint traces of this pigmentation; but in the majority
of examples it is completely absent. Unfortunately the type specimens of McIntosh’s
A. wyvillei and A. sarsi are too ill-preserved to be of use for purposes of comparison.
TEREBELLIDAE 185
? Amphicteis gunneri (M. Sars), var. japonica (McIntosh).
Amphicteis japonica, McIntosh, 1885, p. 431, pl. xxvii A, figs. 3-5.
Amphicteis gunnert, var. japonica, Hessle, 1917, p. 117.
St. 279. 10. vili. 27. Off Cape Lopez, French Congo. From 8-5 miles N 71° E to 15 miles
N 24° E of Cape Lopez Light. 58-67 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud and fine sand. One specimen.
Remarks. A single specimen, measuring 21 mm. by 2 mm. ‘The paleae are indis-
tinguishable from those of the northern form, and in this they agree with those of
Hessle’s Japanese specimens rather than McIntosh’s. In fact, as Hessle points out, the
only difference between this form and the northern is that the hooks have an extra
tooth. Those of my specimen correspond exactly to McIntosh’s figure. On distribu-
tional grounds I had much hesitation in assigning this form to the Japanese variety,
but an A. gunneri with an extra tooth to its hooks seems to be an exact account of this
form.
Family ‘TEREBELLIDAE
Sub-family AMPHITRITINAE, Malmgren
Genus Terebella, Linnaeus
Terebella ehlersi, Gravier.
Gravier, 1907, p. 47, pl. v, tigs. 45-46, text-figs. 30-31.
Hessle, 1917, p. 190.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Seven specimens.
St. 149. 10. i. 27. Mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 1-15 miles N 763° W
to 2:62 miles S 11° W of Merton Rock. 200-234 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Six specimens.
St. 190. 24. iii.27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 93-126 m.
Gear DLH and NRL. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. Two specimens.
St. MS 68. 2. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S } E to 8} cables
SE x E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. Six specimens.
Remarks. St. 149 yielded a large specimen measuring 145 mm. in length without
the tentacles. This is considerably longer than any previous record. Hessle claims that
this species has eye spots. With Gravier I cannot see these. The species is distinguished
by its twisted and denticulated dorsal bristles.
Genus Loimia, Malmgren
Loimia medusa (Savigny).
Fauvel, 1902, p. 94, text-figs. 43-45.
Hessle, 1917, p. 170, for synonymy.
St. 1. 16. xi. 25. Clarence Bay, Ascension Island. 7° 55’ 15”S, 14° 25’ 00” W. 16-27 m.
Gear NRM. Bottom: coral, sand and shell. Six specimens.
DIli 24
186 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Remarks. All these examples are in poor condition. The largest measures 28 mm.
by 2 mm. at the widest part. Some have four teeth only in the hooks of the biserial
thoracic tori and five teeth in the abdominal hooks: in others there is a small 5th tooth
apically in the hooks of the biserial thoracic tori and a 6th tooth in the abdominal hooks.
Willey (1905, pp. 302-304) separates L. medusa from L. variegata (Grube) on the
ground that the former species has four teeth only in the hooks of the biserial thoracic
tori and five in the abdominal hooks, and L. variegata has an additional tooth in the
thoracic and abdominal hooks respectively. In view of the variation in the number of
uncinal teeth in the present examples, I cannot believe that this alone constitutes a
specific distinction. Grube, however, states that L. medusa and L. variegata are
differently coloured. Fauvel (/oc. cit.) figures four to five uncinal teeth for his L. medusa
and Augener (1918, p. 540) records five to six uncinal teeth.
In the biserial tori the hooks are set back to back. The present material is unsuitable
for an accurate estimate of the number of gland shields, but there appear to be about
eleven. L. montagui has about eight scutes.
Loimia montagui (Grube).
Willey, 1905, p. 303, pl. vi, figs. 160-163, with synonymy.
St. 270. 27. vii. 27. 13° 58’ 30” S, 11° 43’ 30’ E. 200(-o)m. Gear TYF. Two specimens.
126 (-o) m. Gear N 100 B. One specimen.
Remarks. The largest specimen measures 15 mm. by 2mm. As in L. medusa the
2nd segment sends forward two large foliaceous lobes that fuse in the mid-ventral line.
The 3rd segment has a pair of thick triangular lateral lobes. There are eight ventral
gland shields. The biserial thoracic tori have the hooks set back to back. The thoracic
hooks have six teeth and the abdominal seven teeth. On each side above the notopods
is a white glandular tract, extending from the gill region to the 8th chaetiger. It
probably corresponds to the path of the large tube joining the nephridia.
Both Fauvel and Augener have recorded L. medusa from tropical West Africa.
L. montagui is easily distinguished by the larger number of teeth to the hooks. I
believe this to be the first record of this tropical species from Atlantic waters. I suspect,
however, some error in the locality label, for this indicates that these specimens were
pelagic. Many 'Terebellids have pelagic larvae, but the present examples are small but
not larval, being in all respects fully formed, and I am unable to account for their
presence among the plankton.
Genus Pista, Malmgren
Pista mirabilis, McIntosh.
McIntosh, 1885, p. 454, pl. li, figs. 1 and 2; pl. xxvii A, fig. 34.
Scione mirabilis, Benham, 1921, p. 85, pl. ix, figs. 97-100.
Pista nurabilis, Benham, 1927, p. 99, with synonymy.
St. 170. 23. li. 27. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island. 61° 25’ 30” S, 53° 46’ 00” W. 342 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Five specimens.
TEREBELLIDAE 187
Remarks. The largest specimen measures 76 mm. by 4 mm. There are several tubes
with the characteristic lateral projections. In my opinion Benham (1921, Pl. ix, figs. 97,
98), in his figures drawn to show the arrangement of the lateral
lobes, greatly exaggerates the size of the lobe below the 1st notopod.
I find the lobe of the 3rd segment larger and more rounded than
he shows it, and that of the 4th segment or 1st chaetiger only
very slightly developed. I give a figure of the modified hooks
(Fig. 76) of the 1st thoracic torus. I have nothing further to add
to the numerous accounts of this species and its tube.
‘lmm
Pista corrientis, McIntosh. re)
McIntosh, 1885, p. 457, pl. xlviii, fig. 11; pl. xxvii A, fig. 35.
Hessle, 1917, p. 158, pl. ii, figs. 2 and 3.
Fig. 76. Pista mirabilis.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From fyook of ist thoracic
7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. torus.
Gear OTL. Bottom: fine sand. One specimen.
St. 195. 30. iii. 27. Admiralty Bay, King
George Island, South Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00” S,
58° 28’ 30” W. 391 m. Gear OTM. Bottom:
mud and stones. ? Two specimens.
3mm
Remarks. Of these specimens only that
from St. 51 is suitable for detailed exami-
nation. It measures 20 mm. by 2 mm.
The cephalic lobe is completely concealed
at the sides by the greatly developed
lateral flaps of the buccal segment. ‘The
3rd segment has also well-developed 0)
lateral processes. The rst pair of gills a
(Fig. 77, a) has a long stalk and is richly
branched at the apex. The 2nd pair is
about two-thirds the size of the first.
Small nephridial papillae are visible at
the sides of the 3rd and 4th notopods
(6th and 7th segments). The dorsal bristles
have wide wings (Fig. 77, 6) and the an-
terior hooks are well figured by McIntosh.
I give a figure of a hook (Fig. 77, c) from
a biserial thoracic torus, in which the C
posterior prolongation is absent. I find Fig. 77. Pista corrientis.
this speCs difficult to separate from a. Gill. b. Dorsal bristle. c. Hook from
Pista symbranchiata (Ehlers). biserial thoracic torus.
188 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Leaena abranchiata, Ehlers, var. antarctica (Mc Intosh).
Hessle, 1917, p. 197.
Benham, 1927, p. 106.
Leaena antarctica, McIntosh, 1885, p. 462, pl. xlviti, figs. 9 and 10; pl. xxviii A, figs. 10 and 11.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Six specimens.
St. MS 68. 2. ui. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S }E to 84 cables
SE = E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. Five specimens.
Remarks. These specimens have ro notopods and winged dorsal bristles. Benham
gives 11 notopods for his specimens from McMurdo Sound. The dorsal collar of the
3rd segment is very little developed.
Leaena collaris, Hessle.
Hessle, 1917, p. 198, pl. ii, figs. 9 and ro, text-fig. 52 a-c.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
Remarks. This specimen corresponds closely to Hessle’s description and figures. I
should describe the characteristic dorsal collar of the 3rd segment as being crenellated
rather than divided into four lobes, as Hessle describes it. ‘The specimen measures
30 mm. by 3 mm.
Genus Neoleprea, Hessle
Neoleprea streptochaeta (Ehlers).
Leprea streptochaeta, Ehlers, 1897, p. 130, pl. viii, figs. 203-205.
Neoleprea streptochaeta, Hessle, 1917, p. 192.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7:6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: fine sand. Four specimens.
Remarks. This species is characterised by the twisted geniculate dorsal bristles.
Ehlers gives a full account of it.
Genus Lanicides, Hessle
Lanicides vayssieri (Gravier).
Terebella (Phyzelia) vayssieri, Gravier, 1911, pl. x, figs. 121-123; pl. xi, figs. 134-135.
Lanicides vayssiert, Hessle, 1917, p. 166.
Benham, 1921, p. 83.
St. 27. 15. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3-3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. Two specimens.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
TEREBELLIDAE 189
St. WS 25. 17.x1i.26. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. 18-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
mud and sand. One specimen.
St. MS 14. 17. 11. 25. From 1-5 miles SE x S to 1-5 miles S }W of Sappho Point, East
Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 190-110 m. Gear DS. One specimen, ? young.
St. MS 71. 9g. ii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. g} cables E x S to 1-2 miles
E x S of Sappho Point. 110-60 m. Gear BTS. Six specimens.
Remarks. ‘The example from St. 45 is very large, measuring iam
I15 mm. without the tentacles for about 110 segments. The
3rd segment has a large lateral lobe: the rst notopod is on the
4th segment and the 1st neuropod on the 5th. The example
from St. 45 has the double rows of hooks beginning on the
roth segment on one side and the r1th on the other: they
continue to the zoth segment. There are large nephridial
papillae on the 6th and 7th segments. Hessle and Benham
have corrected certain misapprehensions in Gravier’s original
account, but I cannot follow Hessle when he writes of the
dorsal bristles “in ihren oberen 'Teilen ruderformig erweitert
und hier massig gesaumt.”’ The dorsal bristles (Fig. 78) in these
specimens are slender and narrowly bordered, as Gravier
describes and figures them.
Genus Amphitrite, O. F. Miller
Amphitrite kerguelensis, McIntosh.
Hessle, 1917, p. 186, with synonymy.
St. 27. 15.11.26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3-3 miles
S 44° E of Jason Light. 110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. |
‘Two specimens. oO
St. 195. 30. ili. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Fig. 78. Lanicides vayssieri.
Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00” S, 58° 28’ 30” W. 391 m. Gear OTM. Bottom: Dorsal bristle.
mud and stones. One specimen.
St. WS 99. 19. iv. 27. 49° 42’ 00” S, 59° 14’ 30” W. From 49° 41’ 00” S, 59° 14’ 00” W to
49° 43’ 00” S, 59° 15’ 00” W. 251-225 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
Remarks. This species is characterised by the high dorsal collar on the 4th segment
to which the posterior pair of gills is attached.
Amphitrite edwardsi (Quatrefages).
Fauvel, 1927, p. 245, fig. 84 a1.
St. WS 80. 14. iii. 27. 50° 57’ 00” S, 63° 37’ 30” W. From 50° 58’ 00” S, 63° 39’ 00” W to
50° 55° 30” S, 63° 36’ oo” W. 152-156m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
St. WS 81. 19. iii. 27. 8 miles N 11° W of North Island, West Falkland Island. From
51° 30’ 00” S, 61° 15’ 00” W to 51° 30’ 30” S, 61° 10’ 00” W. 81-82 m. Gear OTC. Two specimens.
190 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. WS 97. 18. iv. 27. 49° 00’ 30” S, 61° 58’ 00” W. From 49° 00’ 00” S, 62° 00’ 00” W to
49° or’ 00” S, 61° 56’ 00” W. 146-145 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, gravel and stones. Four
specimens.
8 ‘Smm:
EA (Y a 3
FO
aS .
WS 0
a
08mm.
¥ 0
O b
c
Fig. 79. Amphitrite edwardst.
a. Gills of right side seen from below and from the side. 6. Dorsal bristle. c. Thoracic hook.
Remarks. The largest specimen measures 45 mm. by 6mm. for 48 chaetigers. It
is incomplete posteriorly. ‘The thorax is thick and dorsally arched. There are no eye
spots. There are large lateral flaps on the 2nd and 3rd segments and a small one on the
4th. There are 11 ventral gland shields. Each of the three pairs of gills (Fig. 79, a)
consists of a pair of stout and richly branched trunks. The nephridia extend from the
3rd to the 12th segments. There are 17 thoracic notopods. The dorsal bristles have
distinct borders and a long denticulated apex (Fig. 79, ). The double rows of hooks
(Fig. 79, c) extend from the 7th to the 16th uncinigers. ‘The hooks have about six rows
of teeth above the main fang. Posteriorly the abdominal tori are gradually transformed
into narrow pinnules.
I have compared these specimens with some examples from St Vaast named by
Fauvel and, except in the matter of size and in the fact that in the European specimens
the nephridia extend from the 3rd to the 11th segments, while in the southern examples
TEREBELLIDAE 1gI
they extend from the 3rd to the 12th segments, I can find nothing to distinguish them.
The tube is a plain structure with walls of mud.
This species would fall within Hessle’s genus Neoamphitrite, which Fauvel rejects.
Genus Nicolea, Malmgren
Nicolea chilensis (Schmarda).
Hessle, 1917, p. 172.
St. 4. 30.1. 26. Tristan da Cunha. 36° 55’ 00” S, 12° 12’ 00” W. 40-46 m. Gear DL. Bottom:
stones. Fifty-two specimens.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. ro5—115 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: fine sand. Two specimens.
St. 58. 19. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 1-2 m. Gear RM. ‘Twenty specimens.
St. WS 84. 24. ill. 27. 74 miles S g° W of Sea Lion Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 33, 00" S, 59° 08’ 00” W to 52° 34” 30”S, 59° 11’ 00” W. 75-74 m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
coarse sand, shell and stones. ‘Two specimens.
St. WS 88. 6. iv. 27. 54° 00’ 00” S, 64° 57’ 30” W. From 54° 00’ 00” S, 65° 00’ 00” W to
54° 00’ 00" S, 64° 55’ 00” W. 118m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, shell and stones. Sixteen specimens.
Remarks. These specimens have 18 notopods and 16 to 17 gland shields. A specimen
from St. WS 88 measures 70 mm. by 5 mm. for 68 segments. The examples from
Tristan da Cunha are small, varying between 31 mm. in length and 4 mm., with only
four abdominal segments. The majority of specimens from St. 58 are young, with an
average length of about ro mm. In young specimens, the second pair of gills is only
very slightly developed.
Nicolea macrobranchia (Schmarda). .
Augener, 1918, p. 527, pl. vii, figs. 232-233, text-fig. 89, with synonymy.
St. MS 82. 6. ix. 26. Off Salamander Point, Saldanha Bay, South Africa. 7-14 m. Gear BTS.
Two specimens.
Remarks. Of these examples one measures 29 mm. without the tentacles and has
34 bristle-bearing notopods; the other measures 24 mm. and has 25 bristle-bearing
notopods. Behind the 25th notopod the body is regenerating.
Sub-family ARTACAMINAE
Genus Artacama, Malmgren
Artacama proboscidea, Malmgren.
Hessle, 1917, p. 194, with synonymy.
St. 27. 15. ili. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3-3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. Nine specimens.
St. 30. 16. il. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 2-8 miles S 24° W of Jason Light.
251m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. Two specimens.
192 DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 144. 5.1.27. Off mouth of Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. From 54° 04’ S, 36° 27’ W
to 53° 58'S, 36° 26’ W. 155-178 m. Gear NCS-T. Bottom: green mud and sand. One specimen.
St. WS 25. 17. xi. 26. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. 18-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
mud and sand. One specimen.
Remarks. The largest example measures 82 mm. by 6 mm. The appearance of the
abdominal segments varies much with the degree of contraction of their cirri.
Sub-family THELEPINAE, Hessle
Genus Thelepus, Leuckart
Thelepus cincinnatus (Fabricius).
Fauvel, 1927, p. 271, fig. 95 7-m.
Hessle, 1917, p. 212.
Benham, 1927, p. III.
St. 27. 15. ui. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3-3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. ‘Twenty specimens, with numerous tubes, mud and debris.
St. 39. 25. ili. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 8 cables S 81° W of Merton
Rock to 1-3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. 179-235 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. Five
specimens.
St. 42. 1. iv. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 6-3 miles N 89° E of
Jason Light to 4 miles N 39° E of Jason Light. 120-204 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Eighteen
specimens.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. ‘Twenty specimens.
St. 123. 15. xii. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 4:1 miles N 54° E
of Larsen Point to 1-2 miles S 62° W of Merton Rock. 230-250m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey
mud. Thirteen specimens.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02’ S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
Five specimens.
St. 148. 9. i. 27. Off Cape Saunders, South Georgia. From 54° 03’ S, 36° 39’ W to 54° 05'S,
36° 36’ 30” W. 132-148 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud and stones. Five specimens.
St. 149. 10.1. 27. Mouth of East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 1-15 miles N 763° W
to 2°62 miles 5 11° W of Merton Rock. 200-234 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Eleven specimens.
Stems2. 175 1, 27. 535 514 30 95 30m 16, 300 We 245m. (Gear DEH. Bottom rock mlenl
specimens.
St. 159. 21. i. 27. 53° 52’ 30” S, 36° 08’ 00” W. 160m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Nine
specimens.
St. 163. 17. il. 27. Paul Harbour, Signy Island, South Orkneys. 18-27 m. Gear BTS. One
specimen. .
St. 187. 18. ili. 27. Neumayr Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 48’ 30” S, 63° 31’ 30” W. 259 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud. Two specimens.
St. 195. 30. iii. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00” 5,
58° 28’ 30” W. 391 m. Gear OTM. Bottom: mud and stones. One specimen.
TEREBELLIDAE 193
St. WS 27. 19. xii. 26. 53° 55’ 00” S, 38° o1’ 00” W. 107m. Gear N 100 H. (Net touched
bottom.) Bottom: gravel. Two specimens.
St. WS 97. 18. iv. 27. 49° 00’ 30” S, 61° 58’ 00” W. From 49° 00’ 00” S, 62° 00’ 00” W to
49° 01’ 00" S, 61° 56’ 00” W. 146-145 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, gravel, stones. Two specimens.
St. MS 14. 17. it. 25. From 1-5 miles SE x S to 1-5 miles S } W of Sappho Point, East
Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 190-110 m. Gear DS. Fifteen specimens, with numerous tubes,
mud and debris.
St. MS 68. 2. ili. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S } E to 84 cables
SE x E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. One specimen.
St. MS 71. 9. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. g} cables E x S to 1-2 miles
E x S of Sappho Point. 110-60 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
Remarks. An example from St. MS 68 measures 190 mm. for about 105 segments.
Only the last 23 segments are without notopods. I believe that in the southern forms
belonging to this species the gills more nearly meet in the mid-dorsal line than in the
northern forms. In some examples there is only the width of about two gills separating
the tufts of branchiae.
Thelepus setosus (Quatrefages).
Fauvel, 1927, p. 273, fig. 95 a-h, with synonymy.
Thelepus plagiostoma, Hessle, 1917, p. 214.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7:6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: fine sand. Four specimens.
St. 53. 12.v.26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. Hulk of ‘‘ Great Britain.”” o-2m. GearRM.
Two specimens.
St. 58. 19. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 1-2 m. Gear RM. Two specimens.
St. WS 25. 17. xii. 26. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. 18-27 m. Gear BTS. Bottom:
mud and sand. One specimen.
St. WS 56. 14. i. 27. Larsen Harbour, Drygalski Fiord, South Georgia. 2m. Gear NH. Off
kelp root. Eight specimens.
St. WS 65. 22.i.27. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. From kelp root. One specimen.
Stas 73.10. ill. 27. 51° OL 00” S, 58° 54 00° W. From, 51° 02° 00” S, 58° 55 do’ W to
51° 00’ 00” S, 58° 53’ 00” W. 121-130 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. Two specimens.
St. WS 79. 13. ili. 27. 51° o1’ 30” S, 64° 59’ 30” W. From 51° 00’ 00” S, 65° 00’ 00” W to
51° 03’ 00" S, 64° 59’ 00” W. 132-131 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
St. WS go. 7. iv. 27. 13 miles N 83° E of Cape Virgins Light, Argentine Republic. From
52° 18’ 00” S, 68° 00’ 00” W to 52° 19’ 30” S, 67° 57’ 00” W. 82-81m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
fine dark sand. ‘Two specimens.
St. WS 97. 18. iv. 27. 49° 00’ 30” S, 61° 58’ 00” W. From 49° 00’ 00” S, 62° 00’ 00” W to
49° or’ 00” S, 61° 56’ 00” W. 146-145 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, gravel and stones. One
specimen.
13. iv. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. Two specimens.
Remarks. I have nothing to add to Fauvel’s (1916, pp. 466-471) exhaustive discussion
of this species.
DIiti 25
194 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Sub-family POLYCIRRINAE, Malmgren
Genus Polycirrus, Grube
Polycirrus kerguelensis (McIntosh).
Hessle, 1917, p. 221.
Ereutho kerguelensis, McIntosh, 1885, p. 474, pl. xxviii A, figs. 20-21.
Polycirrus kerguelensis, Gravier, 1911, p. 141, pl. xi, fig. 136.
St. 39. 25. ill. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 8 cables S 81° W of Merton
Rock to 1-3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. 179-235 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. One
specimen.
St. 42. 1. iv. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 6-3 miles N 89° E of
Jason Light to 4 miles N 39° E of Jason Light. 120-204 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Two
specimens.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Four specimens.
St. 144. 5.1.27. Off mouth of Stromness Harbour, South Georgia. From 54° 04’ S, 36° 27’ W
to 53° 58'S, 36° 26’ W. 155-178 m. Gear NCS-T. Bottom: green mud and sand. One specimen.
St. 148. 9.1.27. Off Cape Saunders, South Georgia. From 54° 03’ S, 36° 39’ W to 54° 05’ S,
36° 36’ 30” W. 132-148 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud and stones. One specimen.
Remarks. All these examples have 11 notopods and the neuropods begin behind the
last notopod. The dorsal bristles are winged. In the present collection there are several
ripe males with very large nephridial papillae on the 4th, 5th and 6th chaetigers.
Polycirrus hamiltoni, Benham.
Benham, 1921, p. 94, pl. ix, figs. 101-106.
St. 51. 4. v. 26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. 105-115 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: fine sand. Four specimens.
St. 52. 5. v.26. Port William, East Falkland Island. 7-4 cables N 17° E of Navy Point. 17 m.
Gear LH. Three specimens.
Remarks. All specimens are in poor condition. They agree in the main with Benham’s
account. ‘The average size is 20 mm. by 2 mm. There are between 30 and 40 notopods.
The neuropods begin at about the 13th chaetiger. Benham gives 13 pairs of gland
shields: my specimens show only 11 clearly defined pairs. Benham states that there is
a small nephridial papilla below each of the first eight notopods. These I do not see,
but as far as can be gathered from dissection of this inadequate material there are six
pairs of nephridia of equal size occupying the first six chaetigers. If, as I suspect, the
rst notopod occurs on the 3rd segment, this arrangement of the nephridia would corre-
spond to that found in all the other species of Polycirrus with more than three pairs of
nephridia. It is, however, impossible to determine externally the limits of the first
three segments.
TEREBELLIDAE 195
As Benham states, there are two kinds of dorsal bristle, a larger kind (Fig. 80, a)
with one edge clearly denticulated, and a smaller kind (Fig. 80, b) with a row of minute
teeth on both edges. The hooks (Fig. 80, c) correspond to Benham’s description, except
that he omits to mention the very distinct striae on the body of the hook.
I believe the smaller type of toothed dorsal bristle to be characteristic of this species.
3mnyr -2mm
‘03mm
o 0
a b
Fig. 80. Polycirrus hamiltont.
a. Larger kind of dorsal bristle. 6. Smaller kind of dorsal bristle. c. Hook.
Polycirrus hesslei, n.sp.
St. WS 73.-6. iii. 27. 51° o1’ 00” S, 58° 54’ 00” W. From 51° 02’ 00” S, 58° 55’ 00” W to
51° 00’ 00” S, 58° 53’ 00” W. 121-130 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. Eight specimens.
DescripTION. The largest specimen measures 70 mm. by 4 mm. for about 125 seg-
ments. The body is swollen and arched dorsally in the thoracic region and tapers in the
abdomen. The cephalic lobe (Fig. 81, a) is carried forward as a large trilobed undulating
membrane completely hidden by a dense tangle of long tentacles. ‘The ventral gland
shields of the rst, 2nd and of the anterior part of the 3rd segments are fused into a large,
roughly shield-shaped mass, which in some of the examples is divided by a groove
corresponding in position to the anterior border of the 2nd segment. In some speci-
mens this groove is altogether absent. There are 10 pairs of ventral gland shields,
counting the reduced pairs of the 2nd and 3rd segments. These gland shields are widely
25-2
196 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
separated throughout in the mid-ventral line. There are six pairs of nephridia, extending
from the 3rd to the 8th segment. As in P. caliendrum they decrease in size from the
first to the third pairs: the remainder are of equal size and smaller than the 3rd pair.
There are several ripe females among the specimens, and these have rounded
glandular orifices below the bristles in the 6th, 7th and 8th segments.
et
‘02mm
a b
Fig. 81. Polycirrus hesslei.
a. Ventral view of anterior end. The tentacles have been pushed back to show the cephalic lobe.
b. Dorsal bristle. c. Hooks.
The bristles begin on the 2nd segment and there are 13 notopods with cirriform
processes. ‘The uncini begin at the 14th chaetiger. The dorsal bristles (Fig. 81, 5) are
long and slender and very thinly bordered. Under a one-twelfth objective, they appear
to have finely hirsute edges, which I hesitate to describe as a true denticulation. The
abdominal hooks (Fig. 81, c) have above the main fang a single tooth surmounted by a
row of about six denticles. The intestine is filled with sand.
Remarks. This form is clearly separated from P. kerguelensis by the character of its
dorsal bristles: it is nearer to Gravier’s P. insignis, but differs from it in a number of
TEREBELLIDAE 197
characters. Gravier’s species had only 28 abdominal segments, and the bristles begin
on the 4th instead of the 2nd segment. The shape of the hooks is also different.
This species belongs to the same group as P. arenivorus and P. caliendrum, but differs
in having very much fewer notopods.
Genus Lysilla, Malmgren
Lysilla loveni, Malmgren, var. macintoshi, Gravier.
Hessle, 1917, p. 231.
Lysilla macintoshi, Gravier, 1907, p. 56, fig. 37.
St. 28. 16. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3:3 miles S 45° W of Jason Light.
168 m. Gear DC. Bottom: mud. Five specimens.
St. 30. 16. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 2-8 miles S 24° W of Jason Light.
251m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. Three specimens.
St. 181. 12. iii. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 20’ 00”S, 63° o1’ oo” W.
160-335 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
Remarks. I think Hessle is right in treating 4mm.
Gravier’s species as a variety of the northern form. Pel coe
The present specimens are exceptionally large, QQ AG
measuring as much as 80 mm. by 5 mm. at the Z GO) (.
widest part. The northern form has not been recorded a aad
with a length greater than 60 mm. The bristles are PS an
wholly enclosed within a layer of tissue, and their
ends all have the appearance of having been broken;
I cannot find a trace of the characteristic spatulate
enlargement at the tip. In two of the specimens, females filled with eggs, in the
4th, 5th and 6th chaetigers the place of the nephridial papillae is taken by large
cordiform orifices (Fig. 82) with glandular lips. Similar orifices are mentioned by
Gravier as occurring on the 3rd, 4th and 5th chaetigers in some of his examples.
I regard these orifices as nephridial papillae modified for the release of the sexual
products. They occur in the female only. It may have been the observation of similar
orifices that led Hessle to write that contracted nephridial papillae in the northern
form can assume a more or less sucker-like appearance.
10)
Fig. 82. Lysilla lovent, var. macintosht.
Genitonephridial orifices.
Genus Hauchiella, Levinsen
Hauchiella tribullata (McIntosh).
Hessle, 1917, p. 233, with synonymy.
St. MS 68. 2. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles S } E to 8} cables
SE x E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. Three specimens.
Remarks. The largest example measures 49 mm. in length without the tentacles;
Hessle gives 30 mm. as the greatest recorded length. I see four pairs of nephridiopores,
of which the posterior three are larger than the first pair.
198 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Sub-family CANEPHORINAE, Malmgren
Genus Terebellides, Sars
Terebellides minutus, Hessle.
Hessle, 1917, p. 138, pl. i, fig. 16, text-fig. 29 a-e.
St. 30. 16. ili, 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 2-8 miles S 24° W of Jason Light.
251m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. Six specimens.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Eight specimens.
St. WS 62. 19.1. 27. Wilson Harbour, South Georgia. 15-45 m. Gear BTS. One specimen.
‘02mm
ayy,
O2m
d
‘lmm \
‘lmm
O
G
0 Bs mm
(0) 0
b
Fig. 83. Terebellides minutus.
a
a. Thoracic hook. 6. Modified hook of 1st thoracic torus. c. Abdominal hook from in front.
d. Abdominal hook in profile.
Remarks. The largest specimen measures 42 mm. in length and has 35 abdominal
segments. I am inclined to think that 7’. minutus, Hessle, and 7. antarcticus, Hessle,
are the same species. Both are distinguished from 7’. longicaudatus by having the 1st
notopod fully developed and by the absence of lateral flaps to the anterior segments.
Both have thoracic hooks with markedly curved necks (Fig. 83, a). The angle between
the shaft and the terminal section of the modified hooks of the 1st neuropod (Fig. 83, 6)
varies not only from specimen to specimen but in the individual hooks of a single torus.
The general arrangement of the teeth of the abdominal hooks (Fig. 83, c and d) is the
same in both species, and in this relation I may say that under an oil immersion lens
the number of larger teeth in the hooks from a single abdominal pinnule appears to
vary between four and six. The most usual number is five teeth.
Hessle gives the greatest recorded length for 7. minutus as 35 mm. and that for
T. antarcticus as. 65 mm. I suggest that T. minutus represents a stage in the growth of
T. antarcticus. T. minutus has priority.
SABELLIDAE 199
Terebellides longicaudatus, Hessle.
Hessle, 1917, p. 139, pl. 1, fig. 17, text-fig. 30 a—c.
St. 27. 15. ili. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3-3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. Seven specimens.
St. 30. 16. ui. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 2-8 miles S 24° W of Jason Light.
251m. Gear DLH. Bottom: mud and stones. Four specimens.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2:7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Three specimens.
St. 182. 14. ui. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 21’ 00” S, 62° 58’ 00” W.
278-500 m. Gear N 7-T. Bottom: mud. One specimen.
Remarks. This species is distinguished by the reduction of the 1st notopod and the
great development of the side lobes of the 3rd and 4th segments. The largest specimen
measures 95 mm. in length; this is 20 mm. longer than the maximum hitherto recorded.
In some examples the dorsal bristles of the 1st notopod are so much reduced that they
are enclosed in the tissue of the segment and only discoverable by dissection. One of
the specimens from St. 30 has 19 notopods.
Family SABELLIDAE
Sub-family SABELLINAE
Genus Sabella, Linnaeus
Sabella pavonina, Savigny.
Fauvel, 1927, p. 298, fig. 102 a-e.
St. g1. 8. ix. 26. -5 mile off Roman Rock, False Bay, South Africa. 35 m. Gear NRL. Bottom:
sand. One specimen.
Remarks. After prolonged examination, I cannot separate this specimen from the
European S. pavonina. It measures 28 mm. for the body and g mm. for the gills. ‘There
are only six thoracic chaetigers. There are 14 pairs of gills with three bands of dark
brown pigment. The collar with its four lobes, the ventral pair being thick and fleshy,
is coloured dark brown on the inside.
The sole difference that I can find between this specimen and a typical European
example is that in this specimen the collar slopes more sharply backwards from the
ventral to the dorsal surface, and thus leaves a greater part of the nuchal area exposed.
I see no trace of fleshy pads at the base of the branchiae.
Augener records this species from Senegal.
Genus Potamilla, Malmgren
Potamilla antarctica (Kinberg).
Potamilla antarctica, Gravier, 1907, p. 59, text-figs. 38-43.
Potamilla antarctica (Kinberg), Benham, 1921, p. 109, with synonymy.
St. 39. 25. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 8 cables S 81° W of Merton
Rock to 1-3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. 179-235 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. Seven
specimens.
200 i DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 42. 1. iv. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 6-3 miles N 89° E of
Jason Light to 4 miles N 39° E of Jason Light. 120-204 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Four
specimens.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Four specimens.
St. 48. 3. v. 26. 8-3 miles N 53° E of William Point Beacon, Port William, Falkland Island.
105-115 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: sand and shell. One specimen.
St. 55. 16. v. 26. Entrance to Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 2 cables S 24° E of Navy
Point. 10-16 m. Gear BTS. Three specimens.
St. 58. 19. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 1-2m. Gear RM. Sixty specimens.
St. 123. 15. xii. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 4:1 miles N 54° E
of Larsen Point to 1-2 miles S 62° W of Merton Rock. 230-250 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud.
Four specimens.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02'S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
One specimen.
Dt: 153. 17. 1. 27. 54 05 3075, 360° 27° 30° W. room. Gear DEH. Bottom rock. One
specimen.
St. 154. 18. i. 27. Jason Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 2:6 miles S 84° W
to 54 cables S 26° E of Larsen Point. 60-160 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: mud. Five specimens.
St. 175. 2. ili. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands. 63° 17’ 20S, 59° 48’ 15” W. 200m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: mud, stones and gravel. Ten specimens.
St. 190. 24. 1ii.27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 93-126 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. One specimen.
St. 195. 30. ill. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00” S,
58° 28’ 30” W. 391 m. Gear OTM. Bottom: mud and stones. ‘Twenty specimens.
St: WS73. 6. ill. 27. 51-01 00'S, 58 §4 “00° W.- From 51.02" ‘001-9, 5ou-55 sO Wiata
51 00’ 00” S, 58° 53’ 00” W. 121-130 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. One specimen.
St. WS 79: 135 Hil. 27. 51° OL’ 30°'S, 64° 59° 30" W.. From. 51° 00; 00" S,-65" 00’ Go” W to
51° 03’ 00” S, 64° 59’ 00” W. 132-131 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. Four specimens.
St. WS 84. 24. ili. 27. 74 miles S 9° W of Sea Lion Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 33’ 00” S, 59° 08’ 00” W to 52° 34’ 30”S, 59° 11’ 00” W. 75-74 m. Gear OTC. Bottom:
coarse sand, shell and stones. Two specimens.
St. WS 85. 25. ili. 27. 8 miles S 66° E of Lively Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 09’ 00” S, 58° 14’ 00” W to 52° 08’ 00” S, 58° 09’ 00” W. 79m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand
and shell. Three specimens.
St. WS 88. 6. iv. 27. 54° 00’ 00” S, 64° 57’ 30” W. From 54° 00’ 00” S, 65° 00’ 00” W to
54° 00’ 00” S, 64° 55’ 00” W. 118m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand, shell and stones. Two specimens.
St. WS 90. 7. iv. 27. 13 miles N 83° E of Cape Virgins Light, Argentine Republic. From
52° 18’ 00” S, 68° 00’ 00” W to 52° 19’ 30” S, 67° 57’ 00” W. 82-81 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine
dark sand. Three specimens.
St. MS 14. 17. il. 25. From 1-5 miles SE x S to 1-5 miles S } W of Sappho Point, East
Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 190-110 m. Gear DS. Two specimens.
SABELLIDAE 201
Remarks. Almost the only character which is constant in this common and much
described Antarctic species is the bristles and hooks. Benham (Joc. cit.) gives a good
account of the variation in this species, but he does not mention that the shape of the
collar and especially that of the ventral lappets also shows some variation.
Genus Bispira, Kroyer
Bispira magalhaensis (Kinberg).
Sabella magalhaensis, Kinberg, 1857-1910, p. 72, pl. xxvii, fig. 5.
Bispira magalhaensis, Fauvel, 1916, p. 471, pl. ix, figs. 34-43.
St. 55. 16. v. 26. Entrance to Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 2 cables S 24° E of Navy
Point. 10-16 m. Gear BTS. Two specimens.
St. 58. 19. v. 26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 1-2 m. Gear RM. One specimen.
Remarks. The largest specimen from St. 58 measures 33 mm. for the body and 12 mm.
for the gills. The latter have their barbules coloured brown in an irregular manner.
This species is superficially very like Potamilla antarctica, but may be distinguished by
the following characters: the collar is lower, the branchiae are spirally coiled and have
their tips free from barbules, and the dorsal thoracic “
discoidal than the spatulate bristles of P. antarctica.
scimitar’’ bristles are less
Genus Dasychone, Sars
Dasychone violacea (Schmarda).
Augener, 1918, p. 580.
Non McIntosh, 1885, p. 504, pl. liti, fig. 3; pl. xxxi a, figs. 7-8; pl. xxxix A, fig. 7.
Dasychone foliosa, Ehlers, 1913, p. 572, pl. xlv, figs. 8-16.
Branchiomma violacea, Johansson, 1927, p. 164.
St. go. 10. vil. 26. Simon’s Town, False Bay, South Africa. Basin of H.M. Dockyard. o-2 m.
Gear NH. One specimen.
Remarks. The body measures 12 mm. and the gills 5 mm. The body colour is pale
violet and the gills a pale yellow except towards the tips, where there is a suggestion of
orange. Each filament has eight eye spots and there is a band of pigment around the
gill base. The collar is widely open dorsally and notched in the mid-ventral line and
at the sides. The dorsal appendages (stylodes) of the branchiae are as figured by Ehlers
(Joc. cit. figs. 13 and 14).
Dasychone capensis, McIntosh, is not a synonym of this species, but is probably the
same as Dasychone cingulata, Grube.
I heartily agree with Benham (1927, p. 137) in his refusal to follow Johansson in
transferring the generic name Branchiomma to Dasychone, and in substituting Mega-
lomma for Branchiomma.
DIri 26
202 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Dasychone natalensis (Kinberg).
Branchiomma natalensis, Johansson, 1927, p. 165, with synonymy.
Dasychone violacea, McIntosh, 1885, p. 504, pl. liii, fig. 3; pl. xxxi A, figs. 7-8; pl. xxxix , fig. 7.
Saldanha Bay Beach, South Africa, 1926. Four specimens.
Remarks. This species, easily distinguished by the spirally twisted gill bases and the
very numerous short gills with their paired foliaceous dorsal appendages is, according
to Johansson, the Sabella natalensis of Kinberg. The largest specimen measures 82 mm.
for the body and 13 mm. for the gills.
: ‘0
Dasychone nigromaculata (Baird). 4mm
McIntosh, 1885, p. 503, pl. liii, fig. 5; pl. xxxi A, figs. 4-6;
pl. xxxix A, fig. 6. Oo
Branchiomma nigromaculata, Johansson, 1927, p. 162,
with synonymy. a
St. 1. 16.xi.25. Clarence Bay, Ascension Island. 7° 55’15"S,
14° 2500" W. 16-27m. GearNRM. Bottom: coral, sand and
shell. Eight specimens.
"2mm
Remarks. These are all very small specimens
measuring about 7mm. for the body and 4 mm. for
the gills. I believe them to be young examples of
Baird’s species. The body colour is a pale green with
eye spots between the rami of the feet. The barbules
are splashed with brown. There are only seven gills
on each side, and each gill has about five pairs of
eyes and six pairs of dorsal stylodes. ‘These are slender
and filiform and of unequal size. The bristles and
hooks (Fig. 84, a) agree with MclIntosh’s figures,
except that the broader sort of thoracic dorsal bristle
(Fig. 84, 6) is more widely winged than as shown by
McIntosh. The character of the dorsal branchial
stylodes and the shape of the hook seem to be oO
characteristic.
b
Genus Hypsicomus, Grube Fig. 84. Dasychone nigromaculata.
Hypsicomus torquatus (Grube). a. Thoracic hook. 6. Broader
thoracic bristle.
Augener, 1918, p. 572, text-fig. 101.
St. 283. 14. viii. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. -75 mile to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid
Rock, Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. One specimen.
Remarks. This specimen measures 12 mm. for the body and g mm. for the gills.
Its most conspicuous character is the brown colouring of the abdominal gland shields.
The present material does not permit me to add anything to Augener’s full account of
this species.
SABELLIDAE 203
Genus Euratella, Chamberlin
Euratella puncturata (Augener),.
Demonax puncturatus, Augener, 1918, p. 576, pl. vi, figs. 170-171, text-fig. 102.
St. 2. 17. xi. 25. Clarence Bay, Ascension Island, Catherine’s Point and Collyer Point. Shore
collection, from buoy. Five specimens.
Remarks. Of these examples only one is complete, and this measures 7 mm. for the
body and 3 mm. for the gills. There are only five thoracic chaetigers. The body is
slender and flattened ventrally: there are 11 branchial filaments to each branchial
lobe. These have about six bands of brown pigment. According to Augener, there are
no eyes, but I am inclined to regard the paired pigment spots on the outer surface of
the filaments as rudimentary eyes. There is a very distinct pigment band across the
branchial lobes. Dorsally there is a pair of pigment spots at the base of the collar, and
ventrally a pair below the collar lappets. There is a distinct spot in every segment
between the rami of the feet.
The branchial membrane extends for about a quarter of the length of the gills; and,
as Augener points out, the rachis of the filaments is thickened in places on its outer
surface, suggesting rudimentary dorsal stylodes.
There is a pair of palps equal in length to the branchial membrane. ‘The collar is
widely open dorsally, slightly notched at the sides and forms two triangular lappets
ventrally. The faecal groove is very indistinct. The bristles and hooks correspond so
closely to Augener’s description and figures that there is nothing I can add.
Augener attributed this species ‘‘mit einiger Reserve” to Demonax, Kinberg. On
the other hand, Johansson, who has examined Kinberg’s Sabellid types, claims that
Demonax has pickaxe chaetae in the ventral tori of the thorax. It therefore cannot
belong to Demonax.
With its bristles of two kinds, neither kind spatulate, both in thorax and abdomen,
and its avicular hooks unaccompanied by pickaxe chaetae in the thorax, it seems to be
generically allied to Laonome salmacidis, Claparéde (v. Fauvel, 1927, p. 323, fig. 112 s—x),
which is the type species of Chamberlin’s Euratella.
In the type species, however, the abdominal capillary bristles differ from those of
the present species and are said to occur in the terminal segments only.
Sub-family FABRICIINAE
Genus Euchone, Malmgren
Euchone pallida, Ehlers.
Ehlers, 1908, p. 159, pl. xxi, figs. 10-15; pl. xxii, figs. 1-4.
Benham, 1927, p. 139, pl. iv, figs. 126-130.
St. 39. 25. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 8 cables S 81° W of Merton
Rock to 1-3 miles N 7° E of Macmahon Rock. 179-235 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud. Three
specimens.
26-2
204 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles S 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. Fifty specimens.
St. 123. 15. xii. 26. Off mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. From 4:1 miles N 54° E
of Larsen Point to 1:2 miles S 62° W of Merton Rock. 230-250 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey
mud. One specimen.
St. 167. 20. ii. 27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys. 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. 244-344 m.
Gear N 4-T. Bottom: green mud. One specimen.
St. 172. 26. ii. 27. Off Deception Island, South Shetlands. 62° 59’ 00” S, 60° 28’ 00” W. 525 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. One specimen.
St. 195. 30. iii. 27. Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetlands. 62° 07’ 00” S,
58° 28’ 30” W. 391 m. Gear OTM. Bottom: mud and stones. One specimen.
St. MS 68. 2. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 1-7 miles 5 } E to 8} cables
SE x E of Sappho Point. 220-247 m. Gear NRL. ‘Two specimens.
Remarks. The largest specimen is that from St. 167 and it measures 63 mm. for the
body; the gills are damaged, so that an exact measurement is impracticable, but they
appear to have measured about 15 mm. This specimen has 32 abdominal chaetigers,
as had Ehlers’ original example. The specimen from St. 172 has 26 abdominal chaetigers
as had Benham’s examples: it mveasures 20 mm. for the body and about 10 mm. for
the gills. On the other hand, the numerous specimens from St. 45 have an average
measurement of 25 mm. for the body and 15 mm. for the gills, with only 22 abdominal
chaetigers.
The collar is extremely delicate and is apt to present a rather different appearance in
different specimens from the same locality. ‘The mid-ventral cleft extends, as Benham
says, to the anterior border of the 1st ventral gland shield. Dorsally, the appearance of
the collar depends upon the degree of development of the two parallel glandular areas
which Benham calls the nuchal gland. In some specimens this gland is not visible.
The inner dorsal edges of the collar are fused in their lower part with two lamellae,
which are at their ventral edges continuous with the pair of fleshy pads at the base of
the branchial lobes. When the nuchal gland is developed, these lamellae are themselves
thickened and glandular, and appear as anterior continuations of the nuchal gland. I
can confirm Benham’s account of the intrabranchial naked filaments, which are, as
Fauvel has shown, greatly elongated barbules. ‘The caudal membranes vary greatly in
depth and in the extent to which they curve over towards the mid-line.
All the tubes are of the yellow horny kind as described by Benham, except two from
St. MS 68, which have mud walls as described by Ehlers. This is puzzling, but on
scraping away the mud, a horny substructure, which appears similar to the ordinary
horny tubes, is revealed.
I do not believe that more than one species of Euchone is represented by these
specimens.
SABELLIDAE 205
Genus Jasmineira, Langerhans
Jasmineira scotti, Benham.
Benham, 1927, p. 131, pl. ili, figs. 100-107.
? Fasmineira caeca, Ehlers, 1913, p. 579.
St. WS 33. 21. xii. 26. 54° 59’ 00” S, 35° 24’ 00” W. 130m. Gear N10oH. Bottom: grey
mud and stones. One specimen.
‘lmm
REMARKS. One specimen in poor condition | ‘3mm
and its tube. The specimen measures 9 mm.
for the body and 4 mm. for the gills. There
are eight thoracic and fifteen abdominal
chaetigers. There are no colour markings.
The condition is such that the example can
only be doubtfully attributed to a species.
There appears to be a membrane extending
for about a third the length of the gills: the ih
head region and collar are too much damaged
for description. Dorsally there are two large ‘07mm
prominent glandular pads, running from the
3rd chaetiger to the base of the head region.
I take this to be a nuchal gland, and the
dorsal lappets of the collar appear to be
fused with it. The thoracic bristles consist
of winged (Fig. 85, a) and spatulate bristles,
and the thoracic hooks (Fig. 85, 5) have very
long downwardly directed manubria and
crests of four to five rows of denticles; the
abdominal bristles are slender and capillary without borders; the abdominal hooks
(Fig. 85, c) are avicular with crests of eight rows of teeth.
The chaetae of this specimen agree with Benham’s description and figures closely
except in one particular: in this specimen, the end of the manubrium of the abdominal
hooks turns back sharply at right angles to the rest of the shaft and is not gently curved
backwards as it is in Benham’s fig. 106.
Ehlers’ F. caeca from Kerguelen is briefly described without figures, but is probably
synonymous with Benham’s species. As already said, I can only doubtfully assign the
present specimen to a species. The tubes are incrusted with sand grains and small black
stones.
0
a Cc
Fig. 85. Jasmineira scottt.
a. Winged thoracic bristle. 6. Thoracic hook.
c. Abdominal hook.
206 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Family SERPULIDAE
Sub-family SERPULINAE
Genus Serpula, Linnaeus
Serpula vermicularis, Linnaeus.
Fauvel, 1927, p. 351, fig. 120 a-g.
St. 27. 15. ill. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 3:3 miles S 44° E of Jason Light.
110m. Gear DL. Bottom: mud and rock. Forty specimens.
St. 45. 6. iv. 26. 2-7 miles 5 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m. Gear OTL.
Bottom: grey mud. One specimen.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. From 54° 02'S,
36° 38’ W to 54° 11’ 30” S, 36° 29’ W. 122-136m. Gear OTL. Bottom: green mud and stones.
One specimen. Gear N 4-T. Three specimens.
St. 146. \8. 1. 27. 53° 48’ 00” S, 35° 37’ 30” W. 728m. Gear DLH. Bottom: rock. Three
specimens.
St. 160. 7.11.27. Near Shag Rocks. 53° 43’ 40” S, 40° 57’ 00” W. 177m. Gear DLH. Bottom:
grey mud, stones and rock. Ten specimens.
St. 190. 24. ili.27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 93-126 m.
Gear DLH. Bottom: stones, mud and rock. Two specimens.
St. WS 27. 19. xli. 26. 53° 55’ 00” S, 38° o1’ 00” W. 107m. Gear N 100 H. Bottom: gravel.
Thirty specimens.
St. WS 77. 12. iii. 27. 51° or’ 00” S, 66° 31’ 30” W. From 51° 00’ 00” S, 66° 30’ 00” W to
51° 02’ 00” S, 66° 33’ 00” W. 110-113 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: coarse dark sand. Six specimens.
St. WS 79. 13. il. 27. 51° Or 30" S, 64° 59) 30° W. From 51° co" co’ S,, (65. 007.00" Wi to
51° 03’ 00" S, 64° 59’ 00” W. 132-131 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand. Four specimens.
St. WS 92. 8. iv. 27. 51° 58’ 30” S, 65° or’ 00” W. From 52° 00’ 00” S, 65° 00’ 00” W to
51° 57/00" S, 65° 02’ 00” W. 145-143 m. Gear OTC. Bottom: fine dark sand and stones. Vermidom
with tubes of Jdanthyrsus armatus.
St. MS 71. g. ui. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 9} cables E x S to 1-2 miles
E x S of Sappho Point. 110-60 m. Gear BTS. Ten specimens.
Serpula loveni (Kinberg).
Zopyrus loveni, Kinberg, 1857-1910, p. 71, pl. xxvii, fig. 5.
St. WS 128. 10. vi. 27. West side of Gough Island, inshore. 40° 19’ 00” S, 10° 04’ 00” W.
120-90 m. Gear DLH. Six specimens and numerous tubes.
DEscrRIPTION. The average length is 15 mm. There are no colour markings. There
are seven thoracic chaetigers. The two branchial lobes have each 14 filaments: these
filaments have naked filiform tips. Of these examples four have oval bilaterally sym-
metrical opercula (Fig. 86, a and 6) and the remaining two radially symmetrical round
opercula (Fig. 86, c). The peduncle shows a marked constriction below the operculum,
which is inserted more or less centrally on its stalk. The number of rays or teeth on the
operculum varies between 12 and 24. They are large and well separated by radial
‘6mm
= ce Th , 3
Say RG ‘05mm
St | E : ‘05mm
SS ff Js 4 ~ | re)
\) Oo 2
1 h
Fig. 86. Serpula lovent.
a. Operculum. 6. Operculum. c. Operculum. d. Collar bristle. e. Collar bristle. f. Dorsal thoracic
bristle. g. Thoracic hook. h. Abdominal bristle. 7. Tube.
208 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
furrows. Each ray has on its inside a more or less pronounced eminence, but there are
no spines like those in Hydrordes. There is a club-shaped pseudo-operculum on the
opposite branchial lobe to the operculum.
The collar is trilobed with a large folded ventral lobe and two lateral lobes which are
fused with the thoracic membrane. The latter is rather macerated, but as far as can
be seen, it forms a triangular lappet on the ventral surface behind the thorax.
The collar bristles consist of capillary bristles with delicately denticulated borders
and ‘“‘bayonet”’ bristles (Fig. 86, d and e). The teeth at the base of the blade in these
are much worn and vary much in appearance according to the angle at which they are
seen. Looked at directly from above, there are at the top of the boss three teeth in a
line, a large tooth and a smaller tooth on each side: the large tooth begins a little below
the other two and is set further away from the shaft. Near the base of the large tooth
and forming the second row are two double teeth on each side of the chaetal shaft.
Below these again is a row of small denticles.
The remaining dorsal thoracic bristles are bordered capillaries (Fig. 86, f).'The thoracic
hooks (Fig. 86, g) are provided with six to seven teeth.
In the abdomen, in addition to the dorsal hooks, there are ventral bristles (Fig. 86, h)
shaped like compressed cups with denticulated edges. One lateral tooth is more developed
than the rest. In the posterior abdominal segments there are long capillary chaetae.
The tubes (Fig. 86, 7) are all fragmentary. They are sinuous, with several low and ill-
defined longitudinal ridges, and without distinct peristomes: at their base they coil
round in a loose loop-shaped spiral: they are tinged with red.
Remarks. Kinberg’s description and figures of Zopyrus loveni are insufficient for its
certain recognition. As far as they go, they seem to agree with the present specimens.
The present species is very close to S. lo-biancoi, Rioja, which differs, however, in a
number of details. In S. /o-biancoi the operculum is eccentrically inserted on its stalk
and does not show the same range of variation as does that of this species. Moreover,
the arrangement of the denticles on the spur of the collar bristles and the number of
teeth in the thoracic hooks are different.
Genus Hydroides, Gunner
Hydroides norvegica (Gunner).
Fauvel, 1927, p. 356, fig. 122 7-0.
McIntosh, 1924, p. 50.
St. gt. 8. ix. 26. -5 mile off Roman Rock, False Bay, South Africa. 35 m. Gear NRL. Bottom:
sand. One specimen.
Remarks. McIntosh has recorded this species from the Cape. The present specimen
is a typical norvegica, except that there are only 10 chitinous rays on the operculum:
the northern forms usually have a larger number. The rays have two teeth on each side
and are strongly hooked.
SERPULIDAE 209
Genus Vermiliopsis, Saint-Joseph
Vermiliopsis notialis, n.sp.
St. 148. 9. i. 27. Off Cape Saunders, South Georgia. From 54° 03’ S, 36° 39’ W to 54° 05'S,
36° 36’ 30” W. 132-148 m. Gear OTL. Bottom: grey mud and stones. Two specimens.
Description. Along and across a Cidarid spine is a number of small Serpulid tubes,
in contact all their length with the substratum. They have large peristomes and three
parallel toothed crests, recalling those of the Mediterranean V. multicristata. Unfortu-
nately I was unable to extract a worm from them in any but a very poor condition. The
measurements are about ro mm. by -5 mm. Owing to the bad condition I cannot with
certainty discover the number of thoracic chaetigers. There are probably seven, the
usual number for the genus. I am also unable to give an account of the collar and
thoracic membrane. A thoracic membrane is at any rate present. Each branchial lobe
(Fig. 87, a) has six rather short filaments, which are adherent and have the barbules
continued to the tip (Fig. 87,5). The opercular peduncle has neither barbules nor
wings. The operculum itself (Fig. 87, ¢ and d) is a vesicular body, surmounted by a
long cone ending in one example in a cup-like disk. The cone is covered with long
chitinous spines except for a triangular area running up its outer face.
The rst chaetiger has limbate bristles (Fig. 87, e) and fine capillary bristles (Fig. 87, f)
with a denticulated edge. The remaining thoracic notopodia have similar bristles, and
from the 3rd chaetiger backwards a number of Apomatus bristles (Fig. 87, g) in
addition. The thoracic hooks (Fig. 87, 4) have 10 to 12 teeth of which the basal is far
the most prominent: this tooth is not excavated. The abdominal hooks are similar in
form, but smaller. The ventral abdominal bristles (Fig. 87, 7) are geniculate, and in the
posterior abdominal segments there are a number of simple capillary bristles (Fig. 87, k).
I figure a portion of a tube (Fig. 87, /).
Remarks. The description of this species must remain incomplete until the acquisition
of more and better material. The operculum with its chitinous spines seems to be charac-
teristic. In fact, under the present system of using rather wide variations in the oper-
culum as generic differentials, it might justify the establishment of a new genus. On
the other hand, in all characters except the operculum, the species agrees with Ver-
miliopsis ; and the reduplication of Serpulid genera based on differences in the operculum
alone is to be deprecated.
Vermiliopsis glandigerus, Gravier.
Gravier, 1908, p. 121, pl. viii, figs. 290-291, text-figs. 476-481.
Augener, 1918, p. 602.
St. 283. 14. viii. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. -75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. Four specimens.
Remarks. I believe these examples to be conspecific with the specimens from
Annobon attributed to Gravier’s species by Augener. The operculum (Fig. 88, a) is,
27
piri
0)
-lmm.
< *lmm
oO
hn @)
‘03mm f g
O O O
i k l
Fig. 87. Vermiliopsis notialis.
a. Operculum and gills. 6. Gill filament. c. Operculum. d. Operculum. e. Bordered bristle.
f. Capillary bristle. g. ‘‘Apomatus” bristle. h. Thoracic hook. 7. Geniculate abdominal bristle.
k, Abdominal capillary bristle. /. Portion of a tube.
SERPULIDAE 211
however, very variable in form, and only one specimen shows the three rings described
by Gravier. In two examples the operculum is more like that of V. infundibulum than
that of V. glandigerus. In fact, in the light of the great variability of the operculum,
the two species are very hard to separate. The largest specimen measures 30 mm. by
3 mm. across the thorax. The thoracic membrane is fused with the thorax only as far
3mm
b
Fig. 88. Vermiliopsis glandigerus.
a. Opercula. 6. Abdominal bristle. c, Portion of a tube.
as the 5th chaetiger. The abdominal bristles (Fig. 88, b) are closer to that figured by
Gravier (text-fig. 481) than to that figured by Fauvel (1927, p. 364, fig. 124 f) for
V. infundibulum. 1 have only a fragment of a tube (Fig. 88, c), and this shows successive
funnel-like ridges formed by the growth of successive peristomes. I have figured a
number of opercula to show the variation.
I think it probable that V. glandigerus, Gravier, V. acanthophora, Augener, and
V. langerhansi, Fauvel, will all prove to be simple varieties of V. infundibulum.
27-
27-2
212 j DISCOVERY REPORTS
Vermiliopsis richardi, Fauvel, var. fauveli, var. nov.
Vermiliopsis richardi, Fauvel, 1927, p. 366, fig. 126 a—m.
St. 283. 14. viii. 27. Off Annobon, Gulf of Guinea. +75 to 1 mile N 12° E of Pyramid Rock,
Annobon. 18-30 m. Gear DLH. Three specimens.
4mm
Imm.
)
2mm] ~
Fig. 89. Vermiliopsis richardi, var. fauveli.
a. Gill filament. 6, Anterior end seen from the side. c. Operculum. d. Tube.
DescrIPTION. ‘The average measurement is about 15 mm. in length. ‘These specimens
correspond in detail with Fauvel’s account of his species, except in the following
particulars. The extremity of the branchial filaments (Fig. 89, a) is not spatulate but
filiform, and I can see no eyes on their dorsal surfaces. Moreover, the hooks begin at
the 2nd and not the 3rd thoracic chaetiger. Otherwise, in the absence of a branchial
membrane, in the presence of a spiral base to the filaments, in the shape of the collar,
in the structure of the operculum (Fig. 89, 6 and c) and in the character of the bristles,
these specimens agree with Fauvel’s account. Moreover, the tube (Fig. 89, d), with its
very wide peristomes and its longitudinal ridges, seems to be similar to that described
by Fauvel.
SERPULIDAE 213
Sub-family FILOGRANINAE
Genus Salmacina, Claparéde
Salmacina dysteri (Huxley), var. falklandica, var. nov.
Salmacina dysteri (Huxley), Fauvel, 1927, p. 377, fig. 129 c-k.
St. WS 85. 25. iii. 27. 8 miles S 66° E of Lively Island, East Falkland Island. From
52° 09’ 00” S, 58° 14’ 00” W to 52° 08’ 00” S, 58° 09’ 00” W. 79m. Gear OTC. Bottom: sand
and shell. Numerous specimens.
-lmm
-lmm
i ae
O
a b c
Fig. 90. Salmacina dysteri, var. falklandica.
a. Collar bristle. 6. Thoracic sickle bristle. c. Abdominal bristle.
DescrIPTION. A number of delicate, smooth, white tubes, more or less straight and
lying flat on several fragments of a calcareous Polyzoan. The contained worms agree
with the common S. dysteri except in the collar bristles (Fig. go, a), which do not show
the typical gap or notch above the toothed spur. In these specimens the teeth are
continued without interruption up the blade. Furthermore, the thoracic “sickle”
bristles (Fig. 90, 6) appear to be denticulated, the serrations being real and not due
merely to the folding of the concave edge of the blade. There are seven thoracic chae-
tigers and each branchial lobe has four filaments. The abdominal bristles (Fig. 90, c)
are geniculate and denticulated.
The bristles of this form differ sufficiently from those of the typical S. dysteri to
justify the creation of a new variety. They show affinities with the bristles of the
Spirorbids.
As far as I know, S. dysteri has not been recorded further south than Gough Island.
214 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Sub-family SPIRORBINAE
Genus Spirorbis, Daudin
Spirorbis, sp. divers.
Remarks. There are in this collection about half a dozen bottles containing examples
of Spzrorbis from various localities. I feel that I am unable to report upon these without
undertaking a revision of the whole sub-family, a task which at the moment I cannot
attempt.
35 nom
Fig. 91. Helicosiphon biscoeensis. Tube.
I should like, however, to point out here that the tube (Fig. 91) of Helicosiphon
biscoeensis, Gravier (1907, p. 63, Pl. v, figs. 49-52), is not, as Gravier supposed, free.
It is attached at its narrow base to the substratum, makes two or three sinistral spiral
coils and then turning upwards is solute for the rest of its length. The lower portion
of the solute part of the tube is strongly fluted, but this fluting disappears apically.
My examples of Gravier’s species are from St. 175, Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands,
63° 17, 20° S, 59, 48’ 15’ W. 200m.
215
bist OF LITERATURE (CrreD
ApsTEIN, C., 1900. Die Alciopiden und Tomopteriden der Plankton-Expedition. Plankton-Exped., 11, 61 pp.,
7 pls. and 7 maps, 4 text-figs.
Arwipsson, J., 1898. Studien iiber die Familien Glyceridae und Goniadidae. Bergens Mus. Aarbog, Xt,
7° pp., 4 pls.
1906. Studien tiber die skandinavischen und arktischen Maldaniden nebst Zusammenstellung der tibrigen
bisher bekannten Arten dieser Familie. Zool. Jahrb. Jena, Abt. f. Syst. Suppl. 1x (1), 308 pp.,
12 pls.
1911. Die Maldaniden. Wiss. Ergeb. der Schwed. Siidpolar-Exped. 1go1-3, vi (6), Stockholm, 44 pp.,
2 pls.
Aucener, H., 1918. Polychaeta. (In Beitriige zur Kenntniss des Meeresfaunas West-Afrikas. Herausgeg. v.
W. Michaelsen, 1 (2), pp. 67-625, pls. 2-7. Hamburg.)
—— 1924 a. Polychaeta. I. Polychaeten von den Auckland- und Campbell-Inseln. Videns. Medd. Nat. For.
Copenhagen, LXXxv, pp. I-II5, 45 text-figs.
—— 1924. Polychaeta. II. Polychaeten von Neuseeland I. Errantia. Op. cit., LXXV, pp. 241-441,
II text-figs.
—— 1925. Uber westindische und einige andere Polychaeten-typen. Publ. Univ. Zool. Mus. Nat. For.
Copenhagen, XXXxIX, 47 pp., 2 text-figs.
—— 1928. Die Polychaeten von Spitzbergen. Fauna Arctica, Jena, v, pp. 647-834, pl. 11.
— 1929. Beitrége zur Planktonbevilkerung der Weddellsee. Int. Revue d. ges. Hydrob. u. Hydrogr.,
XXII (5-6), pp. 273-312.
Bairp, W., 1864. Description of a new species of Annelide belonging to the Family Amphinomidae. Trans.
Linn. Soc. London, xxiv, pp. 449-50, pl.
—— 1865. Contributions towards a Monograph of the species of Annelides belonging to the Aphroditacea,
containing a list of the known species, and a description of some new species contained in the British
Museum. J. Linn. Soc. London, Zool., vil, pp. 172-202.
Bennam, W.B., 1921. Polychaeta. Austral. Antarctic Exped., rg11-14. Sci. Reps. Ser. C (Zool. and Bot.)
VI (3), pp. 1-128, pls. 5-10.
—— 1927. Polychaeta. Brit. Antarct. (‘Terra Nova’) Exped., 1910. Nat. Hist. Rep. Zool. vm (2), pp.
47-182, 6 pls.
1929. The Pelagic Polychaeta. Brit. Antarct. (‘Terra Nova’) Exped., 1gto. Op. cit. vil (3), pp.
183-201, 2 pls.
BercstrOM, E., 1914. Zur Systematik der Polychaetenfamilie Phyllodociden. Zool. Bidrag, Uppsala, 111,
Pp. 37-224, 81 text-figs.
— 1916. Die Polynoiden der schwedischen Siidpolarexpedition, 1901-1903. Zool. Bidrag, Uppsala, tv, pp.
269-304, 5 pls.
Cerruti, A., 1909. Contributo all’ anatomia, biologia e sistematica delle Paraonidae (Levinsenidae) con
particolare riguardo alle specie del golfo di Napoli. Mitt. Zool. Stat. Neapel, Berlin, x1x, pp. 459-
512, pls. 18 and 19.
CHAMBERLIN, R., 1919. ‘ Albatross’ Polychaeta. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, xLviit, 514 pp., 80 pls.
CrossLanp, C., 1904. Polychaeta of the Maldive Archipelago from the collections made by S. Stanley Gardiner
in 1899. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, (1), pp. 270-86, pls. 18-19.
1924. Polychaeta of Tropical East Africa, etc. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, (1), pp. 1-106, 125 text-figs.
Enters, E., 1868. Die Borstenwiirmer. Leipzig, 748 pp., 24 pls.
—— 1887. Florida Anneliden. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, xv, 335 pp., 60 pls.
—— 1897. Polychaeten. Hamburger magalhaenische Sammelreise, Hamburg, 148 pp., 9 pls.
—— 1901. Die Polychaeten des magellanischen und chilenischen Strandes. Ein faunistische Versuch.
Festschr. Ges. Géttingen, 232 pp., 25 pls.
— 1908. Die bodenséssigen Anneliden aus den Sammlungen der deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition. Wiss. Ergeb.
d. D. Tiefsee-Expedition, xvi (1), pp. 1-167, 23 pls.
216 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Enters, E., 1912. Polychaeta. National Antarctic Exped., 1901-1904. Nat. Hist. v1, Zool., pp. 1-32, 2 pls.
—— 1913. Die Polychaeten-Sammlungen d. D. Siidpolarexped., 1901-1903. D. Siidpolarexped., x1 (4),
pp- 397-598, 21 pls.
Face, L. and Lecenprr, R., 1927. Péches planctoniques a la lumiére effectuées a Banyuls-sur-mer et a Con-
carneau. I. Annélides Polychétes. Arch. Zool. Paris, LXV, pp. 23-222, 29 figs.
FauveL, P., 1902. Annélides Polychétes de la Casamance. Bull. Soc. Linn. Normandie, (5), Vv, pp. 59-105,
55 text-figs.
1914. Annélides Polychétes de San Thomé (Golfe de Guinée) recueillies par M. Ch. Gravier. Arch. Zool.
Paris, LIV, pp. 105-55, pls. 7 and 8.
—— 1916. Annélides Polychétes des Iles Falkland recueillies par M. R. Vallentin (1902-1910). Arch. Zool.
Paris, LV, pp. 417-82, pls. 8 and 9.
—— 1917. Annélides polychétes de T Australie méridionale. Arch. Zool. Paris, LVI, pp. 159-278,
pls. 4-8.
—— 1923. Polychétes errantes. Faune de France, Paris, v, 488 pp., 181 text-figs.
—— 1925. Sur quelques espéces du genre Aphrodite. Bull. soc. zool. Paris, L, pp. 131-50, 5 text-figs.
—— 1925 a. Bionomie et Distribution géographique des Annélides Polychétes. Livre du Cinquantenaire de
l'Université Catholique d’Angers. Angers, Société Anonyme des Editions de l'Ouest, pp. 307-17.
— 1927. Polychétes sédentaires. Faune de France, Paris, Xv1, 494 pp., 152 text-figs.
Gravirr, C., 1901. Contribution a l'étude des Annélides Polychétes de la Mer Rouge. Nouv. Arch. Mus. Hist.
Nat. Paris, (4), 11, pp. 147-268, pls. 7-10, text-figs. 160-285: and 1906, (4), VII, pp. 123-236,
8 pls., text-figs. 286-409, 2 maps.
— 1907. Annélides Polychétes. Expéd. Antarct. Frangaise, 1903-1905, 75 pp., 5 pls., 47 text-figs.
1908. Contribution a l’étude des Annélides Polychétes de la Mer Rouge. Nouv. Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat.
Paris, (4), X, pp. 67-168, text-figs. 410-95.
tg11. Annélides Polychétes. Deuxiéme Expéd. Antarct. Frangaise, 1908-1910, 165 pp., 12 pls.
Grusg, E., 1877. Anneliden-Ausbeute S.M.S. ‘Gazelle’. Monatsber. k. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, pp. 509-54.
Hesste, C., 1917. Zur Kenntnis der terebellomorphen Polychaeten. Zool. Bidrag, Uppsala, v, pp. 39-248,
5 pls., 66 text-figs.
Horst, R., 1912. Polychaeta errantia. ‘Siboga’ Exped. Mon. xxtv a, 43 pp., Io pls.
— 1917. Polychaeta errantia. ‘Siboga’ Exped. Mon. xxiv b, 140 pp., 18 pls.
Jouansson, K. E., 1927. Beitrdge zur Kenntnis der Polychaeten-Familien Hermellidae, Sabellidae und
Serpulidae. Zool. Bidrag, Uppsala, x1, pp. 1-184, 5 pls., 15 text-figs.
Jounson, H. P., 1897. A preliminary account of the marine annelids of the Pacific coast with descriptions of
new species. I. Proc. California Acad. Sci. San Francisco, 111, Zool. (1), pp. 153-90, pls. 5 to Io.
—— 1go1. The Polychaeta of the Puget Sound Region. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., xxix, pp.
381-437.
Kinser, J. G. H., 1857. Annulata Kongliga Svenska Fregatten Eugenies Resa omkring forden, 1851-1853.
Zool. 111, Annulater (Uppsala-Stockholm, 1857-1910), pp. 1-78, pls. 1-29.
— 1865. Annulata nova. Oefvers. K. Vet.-Akad. Férh. Stockholm, xxi, pp. 559-74.
LANGERHANS, P., 1884. Die Wiirmfauna von Madeira. IV. Z. wiss. Zool., XL, pp. 247-85, pls. 15-17.
McIntosu, W. C., 1879. Marine Annelida. ‘Venus’ Exped., Phil. Trans. R. Soc. London, cLxvim (extra
vol.), pp. 258-63, pl. 15.
—— 1885. Report on the Annelida Polychaeta collected by H.M.S. ‘Challenger’ during the years 1873-1876.
‘Challenger’ Rep. Zool. x11, 554 pp., 94 pls.
— 1900. A monograph of the British Annelids. I (2), Polychaeta. Amphinomidae to Sigalionidae. Pp. 215-
442, pls. 24-43. Roy. Society.
—— 1903. Marine Annelids of South Africa. I, Marine investigations in South Africa, 11, pp. 19-56,
4 pls.
—— 1904. Marine Annelids of South Africa. II, Marine investigations in South Africa, 111, pp. 59-92,
pls. 5-9.
—— 1908-1910. A monograph of the British Annelids. II. Polychaeta. Nephthydidae to Arictidae.
524 pp-, Pls. 43-87.
LIST OF LITERATURE CITED 217
McIntosu, W. C., 1924. Notes from the Gatty Marine Laboratory, St Andrews, xty1. Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist., London (9), x1v, pp. 1-52.
Mataguin, A. and Carin, F., 1922. Tomoptérides provenant des campagnes de I’ Hirondelle et de la Princesse-
Alice. Rés. Camp. Sci. Monaco, Lxt, 52 pp., 10 pls.
MARENZELLER, E. (VON), 1890. Annulaten d. Beringsmeeres. Ann. Nat. Hist. Mus. Wien, v, pp. 1-8, pl. 1.
MesniL, F. and Cauttery, M., 1898. Etudes de Morphologie externe chez les annélides. IV. La famille
nouvelle des Lévinséniens. Bull. sci. France et Belgique, xxx1, pp. 126-50, pl. 6.
Monro, C.C. A., 1924. On the post-larval stage in Diopatra cuprea Bosc, a Polychaetous Annelid of the family
Eunicidae. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., London (9), x1v, pp. 193-99, 2 text-figs.
1926. Polychaeta of the ‘ Alert’ Expedition, Families Hesionidae and Nereidae. J. Linn. Soc. London,
Zool. XXXVI, pp. 311-23, I1 text-figs.
—— 1929. On the identity of two Polychaete Type-specimens of Baird, with a note on the genus Austrolaenilla,
Bergstrom. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., London (10), 11, pp. 162-64.
Moorg, J. P., 1908. Some Polychaetous Annelids of the northern Pacific coasts of North America. Proc. Acad.
Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, Lx, pp. 321-64, 4 text-figs.
1911. The Polychaetous Annelids dredged by the U.S.S.‘ Albatross’ off the coast of southern California
in 1904. Euphrosynidae to Goniadidae. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, Lx11, pp. 234-318,
pls. 15-21.
Pratt, E. M., 1go1. A collection of Polychaeta from the Falkland Islands. Mem. Lit. Phil. Soc. Manchester,
XLV, pp. 1-18, pl. 4.
Ramsay, L. N. G., 1914. Polychaeta of the family Nereidae, collected by the Scottish National Antarctic
Exped. (1902-1904). ‘Trans. R. Soc. Edinburgh, L (3), pp. 41-8, pl. 3.
Rosa, D., 1908. Annelidi. I. Tomopteridi. Raccolte Planctoniche f. d. R.N. ‘Liguria’, 1 (5), pp. 247-326,
pl. 12. Pubbl. Ist. St. sup. Firenze.
Scumarpa, L. K. 1861. Neue wirbellose Thiere, 1 (2), 164 pp., pls. 16-37, Leipzig.
SOpERSTROM, A., 1920. Studien iiber die Polychdten-familie Spionidae, 286 pp., 1 pl., 174 text-figs. (Dis-
sertation.) Uppsala.
TREADWELL, A. L., 1921. Leodicidae of the West Indian Region. Papers Dept. Mar. Biol. Carnegie Inst.
Washington, xv, 131 pp., 9 pls.
Wesster, H. E. and Benepicr, J. E., 1884. The Annelida Chaetopoda from Provincetown and Wellfleet, Mass.
U.S. Comm. Fish., Rep. for 1881, pp. 699-747, 8 pls.
WILLY, A., 1902. Polychaeta. Nat. Hist. Collections, ‘Southern Cross’, London, pp. 262-383, pls. 41-6.
1905. Report on the Polychaeta collected by Prof. Herdman at Ceylon, 1902. Roy. Soc. Rep. on Pearl
Oyster Fisheries. Suppl. Rep. xxx, London, pp. 243-324, pls. 1-8.
Dili 28
INDEX
abranchiata, Onuphis, 129 aurantiaca, Eteone, 7%
abranchiata, var. antarctica, Laena, 188 Austrophyllum, 74
abyssorum, Kesun, 167 australis, Eunice, 122
abyssorum, Leptoecia, 135 australis, Paramphinome, 32
acanthophora, Vermiliopsis, 211 Autolytus, 97
afer, Cirratulus, 156 Axiothella, 175
affinis, Flabelligera, 160
affinis, Macellicephala, 47 bathypelagica, Sheila, 43
africana, Glycera, 117 biscoeensis, Helicosiphon, 214
africana, Lumbrinereis, 136 Bispira, 201%
africana, Prionospio, 149 bongraini, Callizona, 82
agassizi, Rhamphobrachium, 128 bowerst, Phyllodoce (Anaittis), 72
alata, Rhynconerella, 83 brachychaeta, Syllis, 100
Alciopa, 84. brachycola, Syllis, 100
alcyonia, Eurythoé, 27 Brada, 161
alta, Aphrodite, 36 branchiata, Lumbrinereis, 137
Amage, 180 breviata, Ammotrypane, 165
Ammotrypane, 165 brevibrachiata, Rhamphobrachium, 128
Amphicteis, 183 % brevis, Lopadorhynchus, 78
amphiglypta, Asychis, 172 brevis, Nicidion, 123
Amphinome, 31
Amphitrite, 189 caerulea, Arabella, 142
anderssoni, Harmothoé, 57 caliendrum, Polycirrus, 196
angelini, Callizona, 82 callaona, Nereis, 104.
anomalochaeta, Eulalia, 76 Callizona, 82
antarctica, Antinoé, 66 candida, Torrea, 82
antarctica, Axiothella, 175 cantrainii, Alciopa, 84.
antarctica, Ephesia, 115 capensis, Dasychone, 201
antarctica, Leptoecia, 133 capensis, Euphrosyne, 34
antarctica, Lumbrinereis, 138 capensis, Gunnarea, 176
antarctica, Polynoé, 53 capensis, Pectinaria, 180
antarctica, Potamilla, 199 capitata, Capitella, 163
antarctica, Rhodine, 170 capitata, var. antarctica, Capitella, 164
antarcticus, Chaetopterus, 152 capitata, Glycera, 115
antarcticus, Cirratulus, 155 caput-esocis, var capensis, Heterocirrus, 156
antarcticus, Terebellides, 198 caroli, Nectochaeta, 46
antillensis, Eunice, 121 carpenteri, Tomopteris (Tomopteris), 84
Antinoé, 63 carunculata, var. didymobranchiata, Hermodice, 27
Aphrodite, 36 catenata, Axiothella, 176
Arabella, 142 cavallii, Tomopteris (Tomopteris), 87
arctia, Euphrosyne, 34 charcoti, Austrophyllum, 74
arenivorus, Polycirrus, 197 charcoti, Autolytus, 97
Aricia, 144 chilensis, Eurythoé, 28
armadillo, Euphrosyne, 36 chilensis, Nicolea, 19%
armadilloides, Euphrosyne, 34. Chloeia, 30
armatus, Idanthyrsus, 177 chrysoderma, Cirratulus, 155
armiger, Scoloplos, 145 chuni, Rhamphobrachium, 128
Artacama, 191 cincinnatus, Thelepus, 192
articulata, Eunice, 121% cingulata, Dasychone, 201
Asychis, 172 Cirratulus, 154
atlantica, Eunice, 119 cirratus, Cirratulus, 154
atlanticus, Podarmus, 42 clavata, Grubea, 99
Audouinia, 154 closterobranchia, Syllis, 100
Augeneria, 138 Clymene, 171
INDEX
Clymenella, 171 Eupanthalis, 69
coccinea, Eunice, 121 Euphione, 48
coccinea, Lumbrinereis, 137 Euphrosyne, 34
collaris, Leaena, 188 Euratella, 203
communis, Scalisetosus, 48 Eurythoé, 27
comosa, Pionosyllis, 92 Eusyllis, 94.
complanata, Eurythoé, 27 Euthalanessa, 70
concharum, Dodecaceria, 156 exanthema, Harmothoé, 57
congoense, Pycnoderma, 162
congoensis, Goniada, 118 ferox, Hermadion, 40
constricta, Axiothella, 176 filigera, var. capensis, Audouinia, 154
convoluta, Glycera, 117 filum, Drilonereis, 142
cornuta, Sagitella, go . Flabelligera, 160
corrientis, Eulagisca, 48 flava, Eteone, 71
corrientis, Pista, 187 forbesit, Travisia, 167
crinita, Notopygos, 30 formosa, Vanadis, 81
cristata, Harmothoé (Barrukia), 60 fossor, Sternaspis, 179
cristata, Melinna, 181 fragilis, Lumbrinereis, 138 :
crocea, Phyllocomus, 181 fulgens, Rhynconerella, 83
crosetensis, Harmothoé, 57 fustformis, Owenia, 17
crosétensis, Lagisca, 40 fusus, Kesun, 168
cuprea, Diopatra, 124
curviseta, Harmothoé (Barrukia), 61 gemmulifera, Trypanosyllis, 97
Genetyllis, 75
Dasychone, 201% gibber, Autolytus, 97
decorata, Maldane, 169 gigantea, Trypanosyllis, 95
dendrolepis, Euthalanessa, 70 glandigerus, Vermiliopsis, 209
dibranchiata, Phyllocomus, 183 Glycera, 115
Diopatra, 124 Goniada, 118
diplognathus, Leocrates, 92 gracilis, Nicidion, 123
Dodecaceria, 156 gracilis, Paraonis (Paraonides), 150
Drilonereis, 142 gracilis, Rhynconerella, 83
dubia, Pygospio, 146 Greeffia, 82
dumerilii, Platynereis, 107 Grubea, 99
dysteri, var. falklandica, Salmacina, 213 Gunnarea, 176
gunnert, Amphicteis, 183
edentulum, Nicidion, 124 gunneri, var. antarctica, Amphicteis, 184.
edwardsi, Amphitrite, 189 gunner, var. japonica, Amphicteis, 185
egena, Staurocephalus, 143
ehlersi, Rhamphobrachium, 126 hamiltoni, Polycirrus, 194
ehlerst, Terebella, 185 hardyi, Nereis (Eunereis), 109
elegans, Onuphis, 132 Harmothoé, 54.
elegans, Pygospio, 146 Hauchiella, 197
elisabethae, Euphione, 48 Hermadion, 40
elongatus, Neosabellides, 183 Hermodice, 27
Ephesia, 115 hesslei, Polycirrus, 195
Epidiopatra, 125 Heterocirrus, 156
epitoca, Antinoé, 67 heteropoda, Lumbrinereis, 137
epitoca, Tharyx, 157 hexaphyllum, Nainereis, 145
eremita, Onuphis, 128 hirsutus, Stylarioides, 160
eschscholtzi, Tomopteris (Tomopteris), 86 holobranchiata, Onuphis, 133
Eteone, 71 hubrechti, Lagisca, 45
Euchone, 203 hupferi, Goniada, 118
Eucrantha, 5% hupferiana, Epidiopatra, 125
eugeniae, Nereis, 104 hyalina, Syllis, 100
euglochis, Chloeia, 30 Hydroides, 208
Eulagisca, 48 Hypsicomus, 202
Eulalia, 75
Eunice, 118 Idanthyrsus, 177
Eunoé, 50 impar, var. notialis, Harmothoé (Evarnella), 58
a)
28-
n
219
220
impatiens, Lumbrinereis, 137
incerta, Macellicephala, 47
incisa, Leanira, 70
indica, Eunice, 120
inflatum, Scalibregma, 163
infundibulum, Vermiliopsis, 211
insignis, Polycirrus, 196
intermedia, Rhodine, 170
iricolor, Arabella, 142
iridescens, Onuphis, 132
Jasmineira, 205
JFohnstonella, 88
kempi, Tomopteris (Fohnstonella), 88
kerguelarum, Stylariodes, 159
kerguelensis, Amphitrite, 189
kerguelensis, Clymene, 17%
kerguelénsis, Eusyllis, 94
kerguelensis, Harmothoé (Fvarnella), 59
kerguelensis, Lumbrinereis, 136
kerguelensis, Nereis, 103
kerguelensis, Polycirrus, 194
kerguelensis, Scoloplos, 145
kerguelensis, Travisia, 165
kerguelensis, var. gravieri, Travisia, 167
Kesun, 167
kinbergit, Nicidion, 123
kowalewskii, Sagitella, 89
krohnii, var. simplex, Lopadorhynchus, 79
Laetmonice, 39
laevis, Leptonereis, 109
laevis, Polyeunoa, 51
laevisetis, Eurythoé, 28
Lagisca, 45
langerhansi, Vermiliopsis, 211
Lanicides, 188
lapidum, Glycera, 116
latericeus, Notomastus, 164
Leanira, 70
Leocrates, 92
Lepidonotus, 48
Leptoecia, 133
lineatus, Notomastus, 164
lo-biancoi, Serpula, 208
lobifera, Sagitella, 90
Loimia, 185
longicaudatus, Terebellides, 199
longicirrata, Eunice, 121
longifilis, Syllis, 100
longipes, Phyllodoce, 73
longissima, Vanadis, 79
Lopadorhynchus, 78
loxechini, Leptonereis, 107
loveni, var. macintoshi, Lysilla, 197
loveni, Serpula, 206
loveni, Zopyrus, 206
luctator, Flabelligera, 160
lumbricalis, Nicomache, 173
Lumbriclymenella, 170
INDEX
Lumbrinereis, 135
lyrochaeta, Nephthys, 113
Lysilla, 197
Macellicephala, 47
maclearanus, Autolytus, 99
macrobranchia, Nicolea, 191
macrura, Nephthys, 111
magalhaensis, Bispira, 201
magalhaensis, Eulalia, 75
magalhaensis, Hermadion, 41
magalhaensis, Lumbrinerets, 135
magalhaensis, Nereis, 104
magalhaensis, Platynereis, 106
magellanica, Harmothoé, 54
major, Phyllochaetopterus, 153
Maldane, 169
mammilata, Brada, 162
marginata, Aricia, 144
mawsoni, Scoloplos, 145
maxima, Pionosyllis, 92
medusa, Loimia, 185
megalops, Notopygos, 30
Melinna, 181
michaelseni, Aricia, 144
minor, Clymenella, 171
minutus, Terebellides, 198
mirabilis, Macellicephala, 47
murabilis, Pista, 186
mollis, Eucrantha, 51
mollis, Eupolynoé, 51
monilifer, Stylarioides, 159
montagui, Loimia, 186
mortenseni, Polyodontes, 69
miilleri, Typhloscolex, 90
mundata, Flabelligera, 161
murray, Eunice, 122
Nainereis, 145
nasuta, Callizona, 83
natalensis, Dasychone, 202
natalensis, Sabella, 202
Nectochaeta, 46
neglectus, Staurocephalus, 143
Neoleprea, 188
Neosabellides, 183
Nephthys, 111
Nereis, 103
Nerine, 148
Nicidion, 123
Nicolea, 191
Nicomache, 173
nigromaculata, Dasychone, 202
nisseni, Tomopteris (Tomopteris), 87
norvegica, Hydroides, 208
norvegica, Nereis, 120
notialis, Onuphis, 129
notialis, Vermiliopsis, 209
Notomastus, 164
Notopygos, 3°
oahuensis, Greeffia, 82
oculata, Phyllodoce, 73
ohlini, Aricia, 144
olens, Travisia, 165
Onuphis, 128
opalina, Eunoé, 50
Orseis, 91
Owenia, 176
pallida, Euchone, 203
pallida, Onuphis, 133
Paramphinome, 32
Paraonis, 150
parva, Chloeia, 30
patagonica, Nereis, 104
patagonica, Phyllodoce, 72
pavonina, Sabella, 199
Pectinaria, 180
pelagica, Antinoé, 63
pelagica, Nereis, 106
pellucidus, Scalisetosus, 48
pennata, Eunice, 118
pennatus, Idanthyrsus, 178
pennigera, Flabelligera, 161
Phyllochaetopterus, 153
Phyllocomus, 181
Phyllodoce, 72
picta, Eulalia, 78
pictus, Phyllochaetopterus, 154
pinnata, Drilonerets, 143
pinnata, Prionospio, 150
Pionosyllis, 92
Pista, 186
planktonis, Tomopteris, 85
plumosa, Stylarioides, 159
Podarmus, 42
Polycirrus, 194
Polyeunoa, 51
Polynoé, 53
Polyodontes, 69
polyphylla, Genetyllis, 75
Potamilla, 199
Prionospio, 149
proboscidea, Artacama, 191
producta, Laetmonice, 39
prolixa, Syllis, 100
pulchella, Paramphinome, 34.
punctifera, Diopatra, 124
pycnocera, Rhynconerella, 82
Pycnoderma, 162
Pygospio, 146
quadricuspis, Onuphis, 131
quadrimaculata, Axiothella, 176
quadrioculata, Alciopa, 84.
Rhamphobrachium, 126
Rhodine, 170
rhopalophora, Grubea, 99
Rhynconerella, 83
INDEX
richardi, var. fauveli, Vermiliopis, 212
robusta, Lumbriclymenella, 170
rouchi, Hermadion, 40
rousseaul, Eunice, 122
rubella, Eteone, 7%
rubrovittatus, Staurocephalus, 143
rudolphit, Staurocephalus, 143
Sabella, 199
Sagitella, 89
salmacidis, Laonome, 203
Salmacina, 213
sarsi, Amphicteis, 184
sarsi, var. antarctica, Maldane, 169
savignyl, Eunice, 120
Scalibregma, 163
Scalisetosus, 48
sclerolaema, Syllis, 102
Scoloplos, 145
scotti, Fasmineira, 205
sculpta, Amage, 180
sculpta, Eteone, 71
scutata, Sternaspis, 178
scutata, var. africana, Sternaspis, 179
semitectus, Lepidonotus, 48
septentrionalis, Tomopteris (Tomopteris), 86
Serpula, 206
setobarba, Antinoé, 65
setosus, Thelepus, 193
serratifolia, Nephthys, 114
sexoculata, Prionospio, 150
Sheila, 43
siciliensis, Eunice, 120
simplex, Autolytus, 97
socialis, Phyllochaetopterus, 153
spinosa, Harmothoé, 55
spinosa, var. lagiscoides, Harmothoé, 57
Spirorbis, 214
Staurocephalus, 143
Sternaspis, 178
streptochaeta, Neoleprea, 188
Stylarioides, 159
subulifera, Eulaha, 78
swakopianus, Stylariodes, 159
Syllis, 100
symbranchiata, Pista, 187
tentaculata, Augeneria, 140
Terebella, 185
Terebellides, 198
tesselata, Glycera, 117
tetraura, Lumbrinereis, 137
Tharyx, 157
Thelepus, 192
Tomopteris, 84.
torquatus, Hypsicomus, 202
Torrea, 82
Travisia, 165
tribullata, Hauchiella, 197
tridactyla, Glycera, 117
221
222 : INDEX
Trypanosyllis, 95 villosa, Brada, 161
tubifex, Eupanthalis, 69 wiolacea, Dasychone, 201
typhla, Nereis, 105 viridis, Chloeia, 30
Typhloscolex, go viridis, Eulalia, 76
vittata, Ceratonereis, 111
vagans, Amphinome, 31 vittata, Eunice, 120
Vanadis, 81
variegata, Syllis, 101 wyvillet, Amphicteis, 184
variopedatus, Chaetopterus, 152
vayssiert, Lanicides, 188 xanthotricha, Stylarioides, 159
vermicularis, Serpula, 206
Vermiliopsis, 209 yungi, Clymene (Isocirrus), 171
i
i
MaRS Sala
re
Aten
uo
RB AR
SBOE Se visste
Raa ay eo nS
ey Awe nS
Peaiee se gant
rh ones Aas
p
fea
i a
oe)
DISCOVERY
REPORTS
Vol. Il, pp. 223-260, plate 1, text-figs. 1-12
Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Government of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands
THORACIC CIRRIPEDES —
COLLECTED IN 1925-1927
by
C. A. Nilsson-Cantell, Sweden
CAMBRIDGE
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
1930
Price four shillings net
Py
b
ie
[Discovery Reports. Vol. IT, pp. 223-260, Plate I, text-figs. 1-12, October, 1930.]
MAIORACI IC CIRRIPEDES
COMEECLED IN 1925-1927
By
Cc. A. NILSSON-CANTELL, SWEDEN
CONTENTS
EN TRODUCTION SMS ame. Sees eS e.ae My ee ee ee ee ee Der 26
(GENERATS PA2-3) > ar PAW, Sfaet hae Mae ee a ome eee 2
DY STEMATT Crags st in zai i SR a ee) tae eA fhe eS
Scalpellumiobberumnm we. aon ca ok ee he ee eee ee ee,
SAA ANT OIANT iy BE 5 5 b 5 6 oo 6 o o 6 =o 8 a 5 ARE
Scalpellum magnae-carinae, n.sp. Soe ac Wer. grat” aay mee ce Rene ie EO)
SCHBANTTD CHET, MS 5 9 6 6 6 6 6 © 5 9 6 6 4 6 5 2D
SUABQIUTDO/MUEDTE « 6 36 6 © 6 o o 5 8 0 m 6 5 6 5 MD
SGHPOUTD CORED, 5 5% 6 6 “@ & @ a Oo p 9 9 o 0 6 fA
epasianatifera watia-ary | , aek tn ge cen ee at es Ce ee
Pe PassQustnGlis Pa aes, Gl iep tes Ms ANcce i se cy Eee A 7)
Conchodermacauritum <0) SaircoB Se, Se. en
COPAIMUETIIL CUED sb 5 8 6 6 G 6 0 0 6 a 4 6 6 2 OB
lewelasmarcorallyjovmcy aaa nn 2)
Balanusimaxcllariscc 8 8s) 7 sk 43) ae bak co ) Mio Re BN ee
BALaRUSHAEUIS: Son cot ee eM ea nc Ne ee ee ee Oe ee ee
LE MINUSRIN Gee tao ae aco ee ee ae ep REL ee) eee ae eS
Conomulardiademan es o.c)o.the Sem <6 okt, Oe eet ne 3
Coronulaimeginge wan 1s, ga Ne ee UG, Bo eo eee ee
EN ENODGIANUS PIODICIPIES ss Ver aaa Gh ch gy 2) eA ee eee Pe es S
IETERRATURE 9), Sal x6 la aoe cy Sse Rae «Sn Ge ee ee ee ee
EATEN 9 ee ee ee ee ee ee eh Oowne pare;
iMiOnrxecre CleR iE Dis
COLEEC TED IN 1025-1927
By C. A. Nilsson-Cantell, Sweden
(Plate I, text-figs. 1-12)
INTRODUCTION
HIS collection of Cirripedes was brought home by the R.R.S. ‘Discovery’, the
R.R.S. ‘William Scoresby’, and the staff of the Marine Biological Station at South
Georgia, during the years 1925-7. For the opportunity to study this collection I have
to express my best thanks to the chief of the expedition, Dr Stanley Kemp. I wish also
to thank Mr N. A. Mackintosh and Mr D. D. John, London, for assistance with the
localities and the printing, and Dr W.'T. Calman, London, Prof. Dr A. Schellenberg,
Berlin, and Dr N. Odhner, Stockholm, for giving me the opportunity to compare
material in the collections under their charge. I also wish to express my best thanks
to Mr T’. Withers, London, for his kind assistance in correcting the English translation.
Stations made by the ‘ Discovery’ are entered first in the lists of localities under the
species headings and have no letters prefixed to the numbers. Those of the ‘ William
Scoresby’ follow and are distinguished as WS 73, etc. Where the material was collected
from whales, the sex and length of the whale, and the serial number (No. 46, No. 968, etc.)
assigned to it by the Discovery observers, are given. A number of the specimens
were taken from whales for which such data are not available.
The following symbols are used for nets, apparatus, etc., in accordance with Discovery
Reports, 1, Station List:
BTS Small beam trawl. Beam 8 ft. in length (2-45 m.): mesh at cod-end $ in. (12:5 mm.). All
measurements are taken from knot to knot along one side of the mesh, not diagonally with
the mesh stretched.
DC Conical dredge. Mouth 16 in. in diameter (40-5 cm.), with canvas bag.
DL Large dredge. Light pattern, 4 ft. in length (1-2 m.).
DLH Large dredge. Heavy pattern, 4 ft. in length (1-2 m.).
LH Hand lines.
Nets with mesh of 4 mm. or 7 mm. (0°16 or 0-28 in.) attached to back of trawl.
N100H 1m. tow-net. Mouth circular, 1 m. in diameter (3-3 ft.): mesh graded, at cod-end 16 to
the linear inch. Horizontal.
NH Hand net.
NRL Large rectangular net. Frame 8 ft. long and 2} ft. wide (2-45 m. x 0-7 m.) with bag of
4 in. mesh (12:5 mm.).
OTC Commercial otter trawl. Head rope 80 ft. (24:5 m.): mesh at cod-end 1} in. (3-8 cm.).
OTL Large otter trawl. Head rope 40 ft. (12-2 m.): mesh at cod-end 14 in. (3:2 cm.).
RM Mussel rake.
226 DISCOVERY REPORTS
The abbreviations used in denoting the nature of the bottom are:
c. coarse. gn. green. s. sand.
d. dark. m. mud. sh. shells.
f. fine. Tee LOCK st. stones.
g. gravel.
‘“‘When no addition is made to the figures in the depth column, it is always to be
understood that the tow-net or young-fish trawl was closed before hauling; but when
such an expression as (—0) or (—50) follows the figure for depth, it is implied that the net,
though fishing for the time indicated at the major depth, was hauled open to the surface
or to a higher level.”” (Cited from Discovery Reports, 1, p. 5.)
The depths of the water at the beginning and at the end of trawling stations are
shown, as, e.g. St. 48, 105-115 m.
GENERAL
The Discovery collection of thoracic Cirripedes contains fifty-five different finds,
most of them from the Southern Ocean, grouped round the Falkland Islands, Cape
Horn, the South Shetlands, Palmer Archipelago, Elephant and Clarence Islands, South
Georgia, Tristan da Cunha, and the south and west coast of Africa. The most southerly
locality is 64° 58’ S, 65° 35’ W (St. 190), the most northerly 14° 45’ N, 18° 34’ W, the
most westerly St Martin’s Cove, Hermite Island, Cape Horn (St. 222), and the most
easterly Durban on the east coast of South Africa—the only find from the Indian
Ocean.
The number of species is shown in the following table:
Genus Total Burnes o New species
species
Scalpellum 6 3
Lepas 2 =
Conchoderma 2 =
Hexelasma I -
Balanus 2 ~-
Elminius I —
Coronula 2 —
Xenobalanus I _-
‘Total number 17 3
This table shows that the collection is not very rich in species; but of some common
species, such as Conchoderma auritum, Coronula diadema and C. reginae, many specimens
were taken from different stations. Eight genera are represented. Most species (six)
belong to Scalpellum, of which genus many species have already been described, although
some are uncertain. Those in the present collection all seem to be well defined, and
three new species are here described.
GENERAL 227
The species of Scalpellum were collected in the so-called Southern Ocean and the
southern part of the Atlantic Ocean. The localities are grouped round the Falkland
Islands, Palmer Archipelago, South Georgia, Elephant and Clarence Islands, and Tristan
da Cunha, which latter locality is the most northerly for the genus Scalpellum in this
collection. ‘These species therefore belong to the so-called Antarctic and sub-Antarctic
regions of which the limits are not uniformly regarded by different authors. By
some, e.g. Weltner, the northern limit for the sub-Antarctic is set at 40° S,a very unnatural
limit, and not in agreement with the principles of modern zoogeography. By later
authors, South Africa, South Australia and New Zealand are not held to belong to
the sub-Antarctic region. In consequence of this lack of uniformity it is difficult to
determine how many species of Scalpellum are known from the Antarctic and sub-
Antarctic regions. Some species are known also from parts near to the northern limit
here mentioned, and if these are included about twenty-six species of Scalpellum are
known from both these regions.
It is not possible to decide whether they are distributed over the whole area in which
the Discovery material was collected, as only a few finds of each species are known.
Of these twenty-six species, only three were rediscovered by the Discovery expedition,
namely, S. gibberum, C. W. Aurivillius, 1892, S. africanum, Hoek, 1883, and S. con-
vexum, Nilsson-Cantell, 1921, all from previously known localities. As the other three
species are new to science, we must admit that our knowledge of the Cirripedes from
these parts of the ocean is incomplete. Since some, such as S. elongatum, Hoek, 1883,
are known also from New Zealand waters, it is possible that others have a wider distri-
bution. S. ventricosum, Hoek (1907), 1913, noted by me from the Atlantic Ocean
(50° 11’ S, 50° 50’ W) was first described from a more northern and eastern locality
(10° 35:6’ S, 124° 11-7’ E). If other species have such a wide distribution the number
of species mentioned above may be much greater. At present, I think it is impossible
to give a complete discussion of the distribution of these South Atlantic species of
Scalpellum. 'The details of the distribution of the genera in this collection are given
under the descriptions of the species. A comparison may here be made between the
species with regard to the depth at which they were found. (Table overleaf.)
The first eight species in this table are pelagic, occurring on animals and floating
objects. ‘The substrata are discussed in detail in the systematic part of this paper. Of the
remainder, most were taken from the littoral belt if, in accordance with many authors, we
put the limit for this zone at 200 m., and not 400 m. as is done in many works on Cirri-
pedes. Surely many occur in the abyssal zone also. For instance, S. convexum, Nilsson-
Cantell, 1921, is here noted from 110-236 m. and in the type description from 310 m.
H, corolliforme is here taken from 200 m., but was first described from a specimen from
deeper water (274 m.). The three new species of Scalpellum are from depths greater
than 200 m.
Many of the species here collected are well known. Still, the collection is of biological
and embryological interest. Of some species of Lepas, Scalpellum and Coronula, rich
material was brought home, including young stages. I have followed the principles applied
228 ‘ DISCOVERY REPORTS
Bathymetrical distribution
Name of species Depth at which taken
Lepas anatifera Floating
» australis is (down to 46 m.)
Conchoderma auritum
a virgatum
Coronula diadema
rn reginae
Xenobalanus globicipitis
Balanus maxillaris
»”
Elminius kingt o-2 m.
Balanus laevis 0-109 m.
Scalpellum gibberum 74-156 m.
5 africanum 80-140 m.
‘ convexum 110-236 m.
Hexelasma corolliforme 200 m.
Scalpellum liberum, n.sp. 259 m.
is magnae-carinae, N.Sp. 259-315 m.
. angulare, n.sp. 342 m.
in modern works, and have given figures and descriptions of as many young and old stages
as possible for the same species. If this is done for many species it will be much easier to
determine new finds of Cirripedes. During my studies of the different stages I have
found the actual form of the plates to be very different during development. It seems
to me very questionable if all species described in the literature, especially of Scalpellum,
are good species. In many cases they have been found to represent only different stages
of growth of the same species. Though many species in the collection were previously
known, they are not all well known. Scalpellum africanum, Hoek, 1883, S. convexum,
Nilsson-Cantell, 1921, and Hexelasma corolliforme (Hoek, 1883) have not before this
been recaptured since the original descriptions were given. ‘The systematic part, which
here follows, contains, besides actual systematic data, biological and embryological
details of interest.
SYS LEMALLE
Genus Scalpellum, Leach, 1817
Scalpellum gibberum, C. W. Aurivillius, 1892.
For synonymy see Nilsson-Cantell, 1921, Zool. Bidrag Uppsala, vu, p. 178.
St. 48. 3. v. 26. Port William, Falkland Islands. 105-115 m.,s.sh. Gear OTL. Three very young
specimens.
St. 51. 4. v.26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Island. 105-115 m., f.s. Gear OTL. Many
specimens on the decapod Eurypodius latreillei; one small specimen on a Hydroid.
St. WS 73. 6.iii.27. 51° 01’ 00" S, 58° 54’ 00” W. 121-130 m., f.d.s. Gear OTC. Some large
and small specimens on a Tubularia colony. Gear N 7—-T. One full-grown specimen on a Hydroid.
St. WS 79. 13. iii. 27. 51° or’ 30” S, 64° 59’ 30” W. 132-131 m., f.d.s. Gear OTC. Some large
and small specimens on Molgulids, which occurred in large numbers in the catch.
SCALPELLUM 229
St. WS 80. 14. iii. 27. 50° 57’ 00” S, 63° 37’ 30” W. 152-156 m., f.d.s. Gear N 7-T. Some small
specimens. N 4-T. One specimen on a Polyzoan.
St. WS 83. 24. ili. 27. 14 miles S 64° W of George Island, East Falkland Island. 137-129 m.,
f.gn.s. sh. Gear N 7-T. Three large specimens. OTC. Three small specimens on Hydroids.
St. WS 84. 24. ili. 27. 7$ miles S 9° W of Sea Lion Island, East Falkland Island. 75~74 m.,
c.s. sh. st. Gear OTC. One large specimen.
St. WS 85. 25. iii. 27. 8 miles S 66° E of Lively Island, East Falkland Island. 79 m. Gear OTC.
Two full-grown specimens on Hydroids.
St. WS 92. 8.iv.27. 51° 58’ 30”S, 65° o1’ 00” W. 145-143 m., f.d.s. st. Gear N 7-T. Two
specimens.
DisTRIBUTION. Pacific Ocean (according to Aurivillius uncertain), Atlantic Ocean
south from La Plata, Patagonia, Magellan Strait, Falkland Islands, 18-156 m. This
species, rediscovered near the Falkland Islands (Nilsson-Cantell, 1921) is here taken
from nine stations grouped round those Islands, where the species seems to be richly
represented. From equatorial and northern parts of the ocean no records are known.
SUPPLEMENTARY DESCRIPTION. This species has already been re-described by Nilsson-
Cantell (1921). Since, however, the Discovery collection comes from nine different
stations and includes a large number of young stages, some further remarks may be
added. These young stages are very richly represented from St. 51. The youngest free
stage was a pupa without valves. The metanauplius stage, which is to be found in the
mantle cavity as the first development takes place there, has already been described by
me as well as the pupa stage (Nilsson-Cantell, 1921). It is re-figured here so as to
give a complete series of developmental stages (Fig. 1, a). The following young stages are
new. In general we know little about the development of Scalpellum. Broch, who has
studied both the species Scalpellum stroemii (1912) and S. scalpellum (1924), has added
much to our knowledge. A comparison may here be of great interest.
In a paper on Scalpellids from the coast of Chile (Nilsson-Cantell, 1930) I have
discussed some young stages of other species of Scalpellum, and have found that variability
exists in the development of the valves. Broch also noted differences in the order of the
appearance of the valves in the pupae of the two species S. stroemii and S. scalpellum.
The second stage of S. gibberum is represented by a pupa without valves (Fig. 1, 6), and
of this stage I found many individuals.
The third stage has the primordial valves and all the calcareous plates of the capitulum
developed except the rostrum and rostral latera (Fig. 1,c). Among all these pupal stages
I did not find any with less than eleven capitular valves. According to the theory of
Broch there must have been a stage with only five primordial valves, representing an
older phylogenetic stage. It is curious that among all these pupae no such form is
present. It is possible that intermediate stages may exist, but this does not seem
probable, judging from the present material. Variation exists, as is stated also by
Broch.
In the fourth stage (Fig. 1, d) the rostrum and rostro-laterals appear. In this stage the
calcareous plates are developed under and beyond the primordial valves. 'To the first
230 DISCOVERY REPORTS
layer of the calcareous plates of the third stage a new layer is added. This new layer
differs in structure from the first layer, which again is different from the primordial
structure. In the figures this first layer of the plates is distinguished from the primordial
Fig. 1. Scalpellum gibberum. a. Metanauplius (total length 1-09 mm.). 6. Pupa just attached (total
length 1:23mm.). c. Pupa with primordial valves, lateralia and dorsal scales of peduncle developed
(total length 1-25 mm.). d. Somewhat older stage (total length 1-23 mm.). e, f. Young specimens (total
lengths 1-23 and 1-52 mm. respectively).
valves. In no other species have I seen any differences in the structure in the first and
later layers of the laterals ; this fact does not seem to be of any phylogenetic importance,
although I have thought it well to mention it. The rostrum and rostro-laterals appear in
the fourth stage but, like the laterals of the third stage, they have only one layer.
SCALPELLUM 231
In the fifth stage (Fig. 1, e) the pupa valves have been thrown off, and new calcareous
layers have been added to all the plates. Thus the upper, inframedian and carinal laterals
have three layers, but the rostrum and rostro-laterals, which appear at a later stage, have
only two. In stages three to five the four dorsal scales are the only scales developed on
the peduncle. The structure of these scales is the same as described for the laterals.
They have in the third stage one layer, in the fourth two, and in the fifth three.
In the sixth stage (Fig. 1, f) the tentacle-like processes at the apex of the capitulum are
more distinct than in the preceding stage. The capitular valves have additional layers and
a shape more like the fully grown stage. The corners between the margins of the plates
are now more distinct than in the fifth stage. Thus the upper latus is now quadrangular,
the inframedian latus is pentagonal, and the rostral latus, carinal latus, and the rostrum
are quadrangular. The umbo is central in all plates except the carinal latus. In the last-
mentioned plate the umbo is first central (Fig. 1, d), but is later situated at the carinal
margin. The peduncle is more developed, and new peduncle scales begin to appear
between the first scales and the lower lateralia.
In the seventh stage (Fig. 2, a) the prehensile antennae of the pupal stage are still present.
On the capitulum one can study the further changes in the position of the umbo and
the shape of the valves. ‘The umbo of the carina is further removed from the apex. In
the upper latus the umbo becomes nearer to the apex, for the lower part of the plate is
more developed. In the rostrum the umbo is sub-apical, in the rostral latus the umbo
is situated near to the upper rostral corner, and in the inframedian latus the umbo is
moved from a central to a sub-central position. In the carinal latus the umbo is placed
as in the seventh stage. The tentacular processes have nearly disappeared. In the upper
part of the peduncle new scales are visible.
In the ezghth stage (Fig. 2, b) the prehensile antennae are totally lost, and the primordial
valves have almost disappeared. The carina is angularly bent with the umbo above the
middle. In the rostral latus the umbo is situated in the upper rostral angle, and
in the inframedian latus the umbo is nearer to the basis. In other valves as in the
eighth stage.
In the ninth stage (Fig. 2, c) the valves are close in shape to those of the fully grown
stage, but some small differences exist. The occludent margin of the tergum is straight.
The umbo of the carina is as in the eighth stage, but the lateral parts are more developed.
The upper latus is transversely elongated, with an upper secondary part very distinct.
The rostrum is quadrangular with a central umbo, and the visible part is triangular. The
inframedian latus has now a basal umbo. The carinal latus is nearly the same as in mature
specimens, with an umbo projecting behind the carina. In the peduncle a large number
of new rounded scales are visible. All scales of the peduncle tend to become of a more
rounded shape, but in the early stages, here figured, they are more transversely
elongated.
The tenth stage (Fig. 2, d, e), which represents a fully grown animal, has a tergum
with a convex occludent margin, a carina with a central umbo, an inframedian latus with
a basal umbo and a more projecting carinal latus. The valves of the capitulum are
Ditii 2
2
232 DISCOVERY REPORTS
separated by wide chitinous interspaces, distinctly delimited. ‘The peduncle has scales
very different from those of the younger stages. The formation of scales in the peduncle
is now ended. It is interesting to note that the scales are rather small and rounded, with
a little point standing out from the cuticle.
Fig. 2. Scalpellum gibberum. a, b, c. Young specimens (total lengths 2:30, 4:30, and 11 mm. respec-
tively). d. Full-grown specimen, lateral view (total length 30 mm.). e. The same specimen, rostral view.
This comparison shows the importance of studying young and old stages of Cirripedes,
especially those species with many plates, as in Scalpellum. Broch (1927) discussed the
changes in the shape of the capitular plates during the ontogenetic development, a
subject also mentioned by Nilsson-Cantell (1921). Accessory parts are added to the
primary parts. A comparison is made by Broch between different species of Scalpellum.
SCALPELLUM 233
It is of importance also to know the changes undergone during the ontogeny of a species,
as here shown for S. gibberum.
My study of the young stages of certain species of Scalpellum brings out the fact that
young specimens of many closely allied forms of Scalpellum are difficult to distinguish.
Thus, I find that young stages of S. gibberum closely resemble those of S. scalpellum
figured by Broch (1924). But, in the older stages, the differences become greater and
greater, for the umbo of some plates, such as the scutum, has a different position. The
primary part of the inframedian latus is very different in both these certainly allied
species. The inframedian latus in the allied species S. stearns7, Pilsbry, 1890, is of the
same type as in S. gibberum, the primary part being triangular with a basal umbo.
Pilsbry (1911) figures a stage of S. stearnsi much like the eighth stage here figured
(Fig. 2, 6). But S. stearnsz is in other plates, for instance the scutum, more like S. scal-
pellum. The differences in these three species seem to have arisen through the secondary
development of the accessory parts of the plates, except in the inframedian latus. The
scales of the peduncle are, in S. scalpellum and S. stearnst, more different from the fully
grown stage of S. gibberum, but by studying the young stages of this latter species, we
have here seen that the scales were also originally transversely elongated.
Scalpellum liberum, n.sp.
St. 187. 18. iii.27. Neumayer Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 48’ 30”S, 63° 31’ 30” W.
259 m., m. Gear DLH. Three full-grown specimens situated on a Gorgonian.
Ho.otyre. Zoological Department of the British Museum.
Diacnosis. Female. Capitulum with fourteen well-calcified plates, beautifully
sculptured with growth lines and longitudinal lines. Scutum quadrangular, with
straight occludent margin, and projecting apex. Tergum large, triangular, with bowed
margins. Carina regularly bent; dorsal roof convex in the middle, with indistinctly
indicated lateral ridges. Upper latus triangular, with apical, projecting umbo. Rostrum
triangular, umbo apical. Rostral latus triangular. Inframedian latus triangular, with
apical umbo, the upper part of the plate projecting freely. Carinal latus triangular, with
much projecting apical umbo. Peduncle well developed, with very large triangular
scales regularly covering the whole surface. Mandible with three teeth and an inner
angle divided into two pectinated teeth. Maxilla I with a very small notch. Maxilla II
with bristles in two groups. Caudal appendage single-jointed, without bristles, of the
same length as the proximal segment of the protopodite.
Complemental male sack-like, without valves but with a distal projection with rudi-
ments of cirri.
DescripTION. This beautiful species is well distinguished from the known
species. It is more nearly related to S. velutinum, Hoek, 1883, in the shape of the
carinal latus, and consequently belongs to the group of S. velutinum, Pilsbry, 1907.
I have named this new species S. liberum from the very typical freely projecting
inframedian latus.
2-2
234 ' DISCOVERY REPORTS
Of this species two young stages were found. The first (Fig. 3, a) is a pupa without
any traces of the valves. The prehensile antennae are typical for Scalpellum.
The second stage (Fig. 3,6) shows an individual with all the capitular valves
and the first four scales of the peduncle formed. The upper latus was originally
quadrangular. The lower latera have not reached the development of the mature stage.
They are all rather low triangular plates. ‘The prehensile antennae are not lost in this
stage.
Female. Capitulum with fourteen plates, all well calcified and separated by very small
chitinous interspaces. The cuticle in the fully grown specimens is very thin and without
hairs. The middle part of the animal, especially the upper part of the peduncle, is
swollen, as is the case in many old individuals of Scalpellum. All plates with very distinct
growth ridges and longitudinal striations. Thus the species is beautifully striated.
Fig. 3. Scalpellum liberum. a. Pupa without valves (total length 0-75 mm.). 6. Young specimen
which has not lost prehensile antennae (total length 1-30mm.). c. Holotype, lateral view (total length
11mm.). d. Carina and carinal latera. e. Holotype, rostral view.
Scutum quadrangular, with the occludent margin straight and the apex projecting
freely. The lateral margin comparatively short.
Tergum triangular, with recurved apex. All margins bowed.
Carina simply curved, with an apical umbo. Lateral parts developed in the upper
part of the plate. The dorsal roof convex in the middle, with very indistinctly indicated
lateral ribs. The same shape of carina is to be found in typical S. velutinum, Pilsbry,
1907.
Upper latus in fully grown specimens triangular, with umbo apical and distinctly
projecting. The scutal margin a little concave.
Rostrum well developed in comparison with the rostrum in S. velutinum, Pilsbry,
1907, and triangular in shape with the umbo at the apex. The valve is much like the
scales of the peduncle, and not overlapped by the rostral latera.
Rostral latus triangular and nearly as high as wide.
SCALPELLUM 235
Inframedian latus triangular and about as wide as high. It is very characteristic that,
in this new species, the upper part of the plate in the fully grown female projects freely
(Pigs 35¢, e):
Carinal latus triangular, with the umbo at the projecting apex, situated very high.
A median ridge extends from the apex.
A\
NV
MY
Fig. 4. Scalpellum liberum. a. Palpus. 6. Mandible. c. Maxilla I. d. Maxilla II. e. Cirrus VI
and caudal appendage. f. Complemental male, holotype (total length 0-85 mm.).
at
——|
Peduncle well developed, of about the same length as the capitulum. A prominent
feature is the great development of the scales which very regularly cover the whole
surface. They are triangular in shape, rather like the rostral latus and the rostrum, but
smaller. In no other species of Scalpellum have I seen such strongly developed scales.
Probably this is a primitive feature if we maintain the old Darwinian opinion, for which
T. H. Withers has recently (1928) produced palaeontological evidence, that Pollicipes
and Scalpellum with many plates represent ancient forms. Pollicipes mitella (Linné, 1767)
has a peduncle closely covered by large scales, which are nevertheless different from those
of S. liberum.
236 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Measurements in mm.
Length of Breadth of Lengthof Breadth of
capitulum —_capitulum peduncle peduncle
Holotype 6 4°5 5 3°5
Paratype 5°5 3°5 5 2
Mouth-parts: Labrum concave, without teeth in the dissected specimen. Palpus
conical, rather blunt, with long bristles at the point and on one margin. Mandible
with three teeth and an inner angle divided into two somewhat pectinated points.
Maxilla I has the lower corner of the front edge blunt. A little notch is situated in
the upper half of the front edge. The first spine is strongest, and smaller ones are
situated at the lower corner. Maxilla II with the front edge without a notch, and with
a continuous row of bristles. A posterior lobe with bristles is differentiated. Behind
this lobe is a small maxillary lobe (not indicated in the figure).
Number of segments of the cirri of the Holotype
Cirrus I I 0 IV Vv VI Candal
—— ee Sy ae ge ee See —— appendage
Segments 6 8 iat 402 Te T2012 E218 ig} Tih I
Cirrus I much shorter than the other cirri, with rami of unequal length. The shorter
ramus is about one-third of the longer.
Cirri II-VI have rami of equal length. Cirrus II is somewhat shorter than the
following. Cirrus VI with three pairs of spines on the front edge of the segments.
The caudal appendage is single-jointed, without any traces of bristles. It is of the
same length as the proximal segment of the protopodite.
Complemental male. On the inside of both scuta a complemental male was found.
One of these is figured (Fig. 4, f). It is difficult to make out the finer details as the
male is enclosed in a part of the mantle. The male is of the sack-like type without
any traces of valves. Near the one pole the two prehensile antennae are situated.
At the opposite pole a small lobe is differentiated. From this part a long projection
is formed, on the top and sides of which are some bristles. This is of interest as the same
is found in S. gibberum (Nilsson-Cantell, 1921, p. 184, text-fig. 25, f). The contours
of the testis can be traced. The sack is provided with muscular bands as in other
males, but these are only indicated in this figure. The surface is covered with very
small spines.
Scalpellum magnae-carinae, n.sp.
St. 187. 18.11.27. Neumayer Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 48’ 30" 5, 63° 31’ 30” W.
259m.,m. Gear DLH. One specimen, destroyed.
St. 190. 24. ili. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. 315 m.,
m.r. Gear DLH. Two specimens, one selected as holotype.
Ho.otyre. Zoological Department of the British Museum.
SCALPELLUM 237
Diacnosis. Female. Capitulum hairy, with fourteen well calcified plates, separated
by chitinous interspaces, the valves sculptured. Scutum quadrangular, apex recurved
and occludent margin convex. 'Tergum triangular, with nearly straight occludent
margins. Carina regularly bowed with apical umbo. Dorsal roof strongly convex.
Upper latus pentagonal with apical umbo. Rostrum triangular with apical umbo.
Rostral latus quadrangular, wide rather than high. Inframedian latus triangular with
apical umbo. Carinal latus quadrangular with apical umbo. Peduncle with trans-
versely elongated scales with chitinous interspaces. Mandible with three teeth and a
pectinated inner angle. Maxilla I with an indistinct notch. Maxilla II with bristles in
two groups. Caudal appendage single-jointed, with bristles, of the same length as the
proximal segment of the protopodite of cirrus VI.
DiscussION AND DeEscCRIPTION. This new species, which I have named S. magnae-
carinae, from the large and well-developed
carina, belongs, like S. iberum, n.sp., to the
group of S. velutinum. From this species it is
well differentiated by several external and
internal characters. In the shape of the carinal
latus it is much related to S. regium, Wyv.
Thomson, 1873, S. moluccanum, Hoek, 1883,
and SS. gigas, Hoek, 1883, of the Challenger
Expedition. These species I have studied in
the British Museum, and have found them in
other characters well separated. In the internal
parts this new species differs especially by the
single-jointed caudal appendage. In S. regium
the appendage is four-jointed (according to Fig. 5. Scalpellum magnae-carinae. a. Holotype,
Hoek); in S. gigas I found in the type material lateral view (total length 19 mm.). 6. Carina.
four to six segments; in S. moluccanum the & gruer ae “i pes
appendage has five to six segments (Hoek, > Res Seapets ss) ess
1883, and Nilsson-Cantell, 1927).
Female, Capitulum wholly covered by a thick and very hairy cuticle, and this must
first be removed before one can study the valves. ‘There are fourteen plates separated by
chitinous interspaces, sometimes rather widely as in the larger individuals, especially
round the upper latus. The valves are distinctly sculptured by growth ridges and
longitudinal radiating lines.
Scutum quadrangular, with recurved umbo, occludent margin slightly convex.
Tergum triangular, with the apex acute, occludent margin like the others alittle convex.
Carina very typical, rather broad and regularly arched. Umbo apical. Dorsal roof
very convex, without lateral ribs, and merging into the well-developed sides.
Upper latus pentagonal, with the umbo at the apex. The scutal margin, which is the
longest, hollowed out, the carinal margin convex.
238 i DISCOVERY REPORTS
Rostrum triangular, rather small, with the umbo at the apex, not overlapped by the
rostral latera.
Rostral latus quadrangular, wide rather than high, with the umbo at the upper rostral
corner.
Inframedian latus triangular, with the umbo at the apex.
Carinal latus quadrangular with the umbo also at the apex. Upper margin hollowed
out; carinal margin convex.
Peduncle shorter than the capitulum, with transversely elongated scales separated by
chitinous interspaces. The cuticle with many hairs.
Fig. 6. Scalpellum magnae-carinae. a. Palpus. 6. Mandible. c. Maxilla I. d. Maxilla II.
e. Cirrus VI and caudal appendage of holotype. f. Cirrus VI and caudal appendage of paratype.
Measurements in mm.
Length of Breadth of Length of Breadth of
capitulum capitulum peduncle peduncle
Holotype 13 8 6 4
Paratype 19 14 II 6
Mouth-parts: Palpus conical, pointed and with bristles along one edge. Mandible
with three teeth and a pectinated inner angle. Maxilla I with straight front edge: a very
small, sometimes barely developed notch, can be traced on the front edge. Maxilla II
with bristles along the whole concave front edge. In the posterior part a small lobe with
bristles is differentiated. Behind this is a large maxillary lobe with the opening for the
maxillary gland.
SCALPELLUM 239
Number of segments of the cirri
I I Il IV Vv VI SUC
ae aie pn ee See eee eet appendage
Holotype ©. au 13 14 14 15 uy ug / 16 17 17 18, I
Paratype Or Teale — 15 I
Cirrus I with rami of different lengths. Cirrus II also with unequal rami, shorter than
the following cirri, in which the rami are equal. Cirrus VI with six pairs of spines on
the front edge of the segments.
The caudal appendage is single-jointed, broad and flat and covered with many
bristles. The appendage is of the same length as the proximal segment of cirrus VI.
In the paratype it is even shorter (Fig. 6, f).
The complemental male could not be studied here. Probably it is of the reduced sack-
like type.
Scalpellum angulare, n.sp.
St. 170. 23.ii.27. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island. 61° 25’ 30” S, 53° 46’ 00” W. 342 m., r.
Gear DLH. Young and old individuals situated on a Tunicate.
Hototyre. Zoological Department of the British Museum.
Dracnosis. Female. Capitulum with fourteen plates and very small interspaces.
Growth lines well marked. Surface with strongly curved hairs. Scutum quadrangular,
occludent margin straight. Tergum large, triangular. Carina regularly bent, umbo
apical; dorsal roof somewhat concave. Upper latus pentagonal; umbo apical. Rostrum
triangular with the umbo apical. Rostral latus high. Inframedian latus with a triangular
primary part and a secondary upper part, both forming an obtuse angle seen from
the side. Umbo apical at first, but later sub-apical. Carinal latus pentagonal; umbo
projecting much beyond the carina. Peduncle with transversely elongated scales
and curved hairs. Mandible with three teeth and a small pectinated inner angle.
Maxilla I with a notch. Maxilla II with the bristles in two groups. Caudal
appendage single-jointed without bristles, shorter than the proximal segment of the
protopodite.
Complemental male sack-like, without cirri and valves.
DiscussION AND DescripTION. These individuals represent a new and distinct species
of Scalpellum, well distinguished from other species by the very peculiar inframedian
latus. Even when fully grown the species does not seem to attain a large size. Of theknown
species of Scalpellum, in my opinion the following are most closely related to this species:
S. brevecarinatum, Hoek, 1883, S. micrum, Pilsbry, 1907. I have named this new species
S. angulare from the curious, angularly bent inframedian latus.
Two young stages were found in this material. They are figured here. ‘The first stage
(Fig. 7, f) has all plates of the capitulum well developed. The peduncle has the first four
basi-dorsal plates formed. The lower latera are different from those in the fully grown
specimen. They have not reached the height of the mature stage.
Dili 3)
240 DISCOVERY REPORTS
The second stage (Fig. 7, g) shows the plates a little more developed. The carinal latus
has not reached the mature shape, for the umbo does not project so much. The infra-
median latus is still triangular, with no trace of the secondary part; consequently the
umbo is situated at the apex. The dorsal roof, in these young stages, is convex without
Fig. 7. Scalpellum angulare. a. Palpus. 6. Mandible. c. Maxilla I. d. Maxilla II. e. Cirrus VI
and caudal appendage. f,g. Young specimens (total lengths 0:84 and 1-68 mm. respectively). 4. Holotype,
lateral view (total length 7-5 mm.). 7. Carinal view. 7. Rostrum and rostral latera. k. Inframedian
latus from the side. /. Left scutum, internal view showing the depressions for the depressor muscle
(below) and for the complemental male.
traces of the indistinctly developed lateral ridges of the fully grown stage. The tentacle-
like organs of the capitulum seen in the first stage have already disappeared. On the
peduncle many scales have been formed.
Female. Capitulum covered by a hairy membrane. The hairs are very strong, some-
times regularly curved, a feature I have never seen in other species. Valves fourteen in
number, rather thick, separated by very narrow chitinous interspaces. The growth-lines
in this species are well marked and placed rather far from each other.
SCALPELLUM 241
Scutum quadrangular with a straight occludent margin. Tergal margin hollowed out.
Tergum triangular, rather large, with the occludent margin convex. Carinal margin
concave in the upper part and convex in the lower.
Carina regularly bent with the umbo apical. Dorsal roof somewhat concave, with
very indistinctly indicated lateral ridges; the sides are well developed.
Upper latus pentagonal, with the tergal and scutal margins longer than the other sides,
of which the carino-lateral and basal margins are the longest. Umbo situated at the apex.
Rostrum well developed, triangular, with the umbo at the apex. The plate is not
covered by the rostral latera.
Rostral latus as high as wide, with a ridge extending from the umbo to the opposite
corner.
Inframedian latus of very typical shape. It consists of a primary part, which is tri-
angular, with the umbo at the top, and a later formed secondary or accessory upper part.
The umbo is thus in fully grown specimens sub-apical. The plate, seen from the side
(Fig. 7, k), is bowed, the two parts forming an obtuse angle.
Carinal latus of very typical shape, pentagonal, with the umbo projecting outwards
beyond the carina. From the umbo two ridges can be traced; the plate is therefore
divided into three triangular areas. Basal margin very short. All margins straight, except
the lateral, which is convex.
Capitulum swollen in the lower part. ‘The mantle cavity in the dissected specimen was
filled with eggs in development. No Cypris stages were found in the specimen, but
there is a great possibility that the first development takes place in the mantle cavity.
Peduncle somewhat shorter than the capitulum. The surface is covered with distinctly
separated transversely elongated scales. Cuticle hairy; the hairs are strong, and are
curved towards the base of the peduncle.
Measurements in mm.
Length of Breadth of Length of Breadth of
capitulum capitulum peduncle peduncle
Holotype 4°5 3 3 15
Paratype 75 3°5 3 2
Mouth-parts: Palpus conical with few bristles. Mandible with three teeth, and an
inner angle with a few finer teeth. Maxilla I with a small notch at the middle of the
front edge. Maxilla II with a continuous row of bristles on the front edge. A posterior
lobe with bristles is differentiated. Behind this a small maxillary lobe is formed.
Number of segments of the cirri of the Holotype
Cirrus I Il II] IV Vv VI Caudal
pare a =e a aa pares appendage
Segments 5 6 8 9 9 10 Io II iit Trt me in I
Cirrus I short with nearly equal rami. Cirrus II shorter than the following cirri, with
rami unequal in length. The segments in the longer cirri have three pairs of spines on
the front edge of the segments.
242 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Caudal appendage single-jointed, conical, without bristles. The appendage is shorter
than the proximal segment of the protopodite.
The complemental male is of the sack-like type without any traces of valves. The male
was situated in a very distinct pit on the inside of the scutum near the apex (Fig. 7, /).
Scalpellum africanum, Hoek, 1883.
Hoek, 1883, Challeng. Rep. vin, p. 87.
Gruvel, 1905, Monogr. Cirrhip. p. 62.
St. 6. 1.11.26. Tristan da Cunha. 80-140 m., r. Gear DL. Six specimens on corals.
DIsTRIBUTION. This species was described by Hoek (1883) from Tristan da Cunha,
the same place from which the Discovery material was taken.
Discussion. Three closely related species, S. africanum, Hoek, 1883, S. triangulare,
Hoek, 1883, and SS. botellinae, Barnard, 1924, have been described, and these have been
held by me to be, possibly, synonyms. The first two mentioned are grouped by Hoek in
two different sections of the genus, for he said that the rostrum is present in S. africanum
and absent in S. triangulare. As I have been able to study the types of both, it was
possible to find much external agreement between the two species, and at first I thought
that S. africanum represented a young individual of S. triangulare. But by studying the
internal parts I found certain differences, so it is, at present, inadvisable to unite them.
The species S. botellinae is also close to S. africanum, even in the mouth-parts, but
other differences exist, for while the complemental male of S. botellinae has four valves,
that of S. africanum, as seen from this material, has none.
SUPPLEMENTARY DESCRIPTION. One young stage (Fig. 8,7) with calcified plates was
studied. Of the lower latera the rostrum, the rostral and the carinal latera are developed
but rather small. Of the inframedian I was unable to find any trace. The primordial
plates are very distinct and of a peculiar perforated structure, as is also found in S.
eumitos, Barnard, 1924. In other species of Scalpellum I have found these holes to be
filled up. The tentacle-like process at the top of the capitulum is very distinct. On the
peduncle there were the four large scales.
Female. ‘The fully grown specimens were all covered by a thick hairy cuticle, which
had to be removed before one could study the valves. To the description of the capitular
valves nothing can be added to that given by Hoek.
Scutum quadrangular with rather convex umbo and recurved apex.
Tergum triangular with convex occludent margin and recurved apex.
Carina regularly bent, with the umbo at the apex. Dorsal roof convex. Sides well
developed with wide areas in the upper part.
Upper latus quadrangular with the carinal margin shorter than the others, which are
nearly equal in length.
Rostrum triangular with apical umbo.
Rostral latus quadrangular with short basal margin. The plate wider than high.
SCALPELLUM 243
Inframedian latus triangular with apical umbo.
Carinal latus pentagonal with the umbo at the middle of the carinal margin. Lateral,
upper and basal margins nearly of the same length.
Peduncle shorter than the capitulum, with large transversely elongated scales.
Fig. 8. Scalpellum africanum. a. Palpus. 6. Mandible. c. Maxilla I. d. Maxilla II. e. Cirrus VI
and caudal appendage. f. Complemental male (total length 0-62mm.). g. Full-grown specimen,
lateral view (total length 7mm.). . The same specimen, carinal view. 7. Rostrum and rostral latera.
j. Young specimen (total length 1-50 mm.).
The measurements of the dissected specimen are: length of capitulum 4mm.,
breadth 2 mm.; length of peduncle 3 mm., breadth 2 mm.
As the internal parts have not previously been studied, figures and descriptions are
given here.
244 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Mouth-parts: The mouth-parts of the Discovery material agree well with those of
Hoek’s type-material, in which, in spite of their bad state of preservation, it was possible
to see them. Palpus conical, rather pointed, with spines at one side and at the point.
Mandible with four teeth and a pectinated inner angle. Maxilla I with a broad and
distinct notch without bristles; above the notch are stronger spines. Maxilla II broad,
with no notch on the middle of the front edge. A posterior lobe with bristles is differen-
tiated. Behind this is a small maxillary lobe.
Number of segments of the cirri of the dissected specimen
Cirrus I I lI IV V VI Caudal
SS —_—— —S —— S| —> appendage
Segments 7 9 13 14 TAS 5 iy] ik) LOL ig) Gy) I
Cirrus I with rami unequal in length. The other cirri with rami sub-equal in length.
The segments of the sixth cirrus with four pairs of spines on the front edge.
Caudal appendage short, with only one segment; one large bristle at the top. The
appendage about half the length of the proximal segment of the pedicel of the sixth cirrus.
Complemental male (Fig. 8,f) of the sack-like type, without any traces of valves,
smaller than in S. botellinae. The surface is minutely spinose, as in other males.
Scalpellum convexum, Nilsson-Cantell, 1921.
Nilsson-Cantell, 1921, Zool. Bidrag Uppsala, vu, p. 194.
St. 27. 15. iii. 26. West Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 110 m.,r.m. Gear DL. Two full-
grown specimens on Hydroids.
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. 122-136 m., gn.m. st.
Gear OTL. Many specimens of different ages on Gorgonians.
St. 156. 20.1.27. 53° 51’ 00" S, 36° 21’ 30” W. 200-236 m., r. Gear DLH. Some smaller
specimens on Gorgonians.
DisTRIBUTION. South Georgia. The Discovery localities agree well with the localities
of the type collected by the Swedish South Polar Expedition, 1901-3, also from South
Georgia, in 110-310 m.
DISCUSSION AND SUPPLEMENTARY DESCRIPTION. This species, first described by me
in 1921, is now found again in Antarctic regions. There are some species from the same
parts of the ocean nearly related to this, namely S. bouviert, Gruvel, 1906, and S.
weltneri, Gruvel, 1907. I first thought that all three were the same species, but since
I have compared the types with the present material I must affirm that they are all
distinct species, though the differences are not very great. S. bouvieri was identified by
Nilsson-Cantell (1926). As the figures of both species, S. weltneri and S. bouviert, do not
give an exact impression of the shape of the plates, I must here note that the species are
very closely related in external characters. Both have the carina concave dorsally, more in
the latter species than in the former. S. convexum differs from both distinctly in the
strong dorsal convexity of the carina. Other differences in the plates also exist. S. welt-
SCALPELLUM 245
nert and S. bouvieri are externally rather similar, but differences are to be found in the
carino-laterals and the inframedian laterals. The finer structure of the plates which I
Fig. 9. Scalpellum convexum. a. Pupa with primordial valves and upper latus (total length o-94 mm.).
b,c, d. Young specimens (total lengths 1-50, 1-91, and 4:35 mm. respectively). e. Carina, inframedian
latus and rostral latus of a young specimen (total length 5-62 mm.). f. Full-grown specimen, lateral view
(total length 15 mm.). g. Carina and carinal latera. h. The same specimen, rostral view.
have determined by studying the types makes the differences greater than it is possible
to see from figures only. S. weltneri has a very hairy cuticle and S. bouvieri a cuticle
without hairs. They are thus all found to be good species.
246 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
As the Discovery material contains many young stages I can complete the descrip-
tion given by me in 1921, for young stages were not then known.
It is thus possible to show that the external shape of the valves varies much with the
age. We must, consequently, know the different stages of development, especially of
Scalpellum species, if we wish to bring order out of chaos. It is necessary in the future
to figure already described species which have been re-identified. ‘
The first stage (Fig. 9, a) in this collection is a pupa with the first primordial valves
developed. Of the other valves a very small upper latus can be traced. Broch, 1912 and
1924, states that the upper latus is first developed after the five primordial plates in
species of Scalpellum. No peduncle scales are to be seen as in the corresponding stage
of S. gibberum, C. W. Aurivillius, 1892.
In the second stage here figured (Fig. 9, 5) all the valves of the capitulum are formed.
As no intermediate stages are represented we cannot indicate the order of the appearance
of the plates. We see that the rostrum is originally of a triangular shape with the umbo
at the base. On the peduncle the first four large scales are developed. ‘The shape of the
inframedian latus is more rounded than in the later, especially mature, stages. The pro-
cesses, mentioned by Hoek and other authors in young Scalpellum at the apex of the
capitulum, are very distinct. :
In the third stage figured (Fig. 9, c) the valves of the capitulum are somewhat
larger. The new scales of the peduncle appear in the region between the capitulum
and the peduncle, according to Broch. ‘The primordial plates as in the previous
stage.
In the fourth stage figured (Fig. 9, d) the inframedian latus is more elongated by the
upward growth of the sides which forms a small accessory part above the strong umbo.
The scales on the peduncle are more developed in this stage.
Of the fifth stage (Fig. 9, e) three plates are figured. -The inframedian latus
has now reached its definite shape, and in the carina the umbo is removed from
the apex.
Finally, to show the variation in the fully grown stages, I have figured an old specimen
(Fig. 9, f,g, 2), for comparison with that previously figured by me (1921, Fig. 29, h).
In that stage all the plates are fully calcified, but separated by chitinous interspaces.
The limits in the chitin show the same shape as the original plates, as in the first stages
here figured. The calcified portions of the plates are, in some respects, different from
the individual figured by me in 1921. Thus the tergum has the basal margin incom-
pletely calcified. The other plates are smaller, and the interspaces wider, than in the
young stages here figured. This may be due to the fact that the capitulum and the upper
part of the peduncle are much swollen.
By dissecting the specimens I found a large number of Cypris stages, as the first de-
velopment takes place in the capitulum (Nilsson-Cantell, 1921, pp. 101-5). The upper
part of the peduncle is much expanded and, in consequence of this, it is without scales.
Such an interspace is not to be found in younger specimens. Fig. 9, # from the rostral
side shows the degree of deformation.
LEPAS Bay
In the original description the rostrum is said to be long, with the umbo at the apex.
From this material we can study the shape more precisely. First, it is triangular and
becomes more and more elongated. The visible part is often narrow and long but the
real shape is more nearly triangular. The umbo must be situated at the base, to judge
from the young specimens (Fig. 9, b,c, d), as the plate in the upper part is often
broader. ‘The plate seems to me to be more and more reduced during ontogeny. By
many species of Scalpellum the rostrum is totally lost.
Genus Lepas, Linné, 1767
Lepas anatifera var. a, Darwin, 1851.
Darwin, 1851, Monogr. Lepadid. p. 73.
22. xil.25. Cape Town, from ship’s side. Six specimens.
DIsTRIBUTION. Cosmopolitan and pelagic on ships’ bottoms, driftwood and other
floating objects. Barnard (1924), who described the barnacles in the South African
Museum, mentions only two Lepas species in the collection, namely L. anserifera (Table
Bay and Algoa Bay) and L. pectinata (Durban).
Discussion. By dissecting one individual, the presence of two filamentary ap-
pendages on each side could be established. The caudal appendages are rounded, and
differ from those of L. anserifera. Externally there is much resemblance to this species.
The internal parts are like those of L. anatifera, and they must therefore be described
under this species. Of the six specimens all have an umbonal tooth on the right scutum,
which is given as typical for this species. But in that respect there exist variations
(Weltner, 1900, and other authors). As the specimens of this material have small de-
pressed marks on the scutum and sometimes also on the tergum they agree well with
the var. a, Darwin, 1851.
‘The measurements of the largest specimen are as follows: length of capitulum 20 mm.,
breadth 12 mm.; length of peduncle 12 mm., breadth 7 mm.
Lepas australis, Darwin, 1851.
Darwin, 1851, Monogr. Lepadid. p. 89.
St. 8. 8.11.26. 42° 36’ 30”S, 18° 19’ 30” W. Surface. Gear NH. Many specimens of different
sizes on floating Macrocystis.
St. 63. 22. v.26. 48° 50’ 00” S, 53° 56’ 00” W. Surface. Gear NH. Many smaller specimens on
floating Macrocystis.
St. 212. 16.iv.27. Drake Strait. 61° 15’ 00” S, 64° 42’ 50” W. Surface. Gear NH. Many full-
grown specimens on floating Macrocystis.
St. 229. 4.Vv.27. 53°40'00"S, 61° 10’00” W. 46 (-o)m. Gear NiooH. Many smaller
specimens.
DistRIBUTION. Pelagic with a wide distribution in the southern hemisphere. By
Gruvel (1910) the species is held to have a cosmopolitan distribution. In the literature
I have not found localities from the northern seas. As the present species is noted from
DItil 4
248 DISCOVERY REPORTS
a very southern station near the South Shetlands, with rather cold water, the tempera-
ture is not a factor of very great importance in its distribution.
SUPPLEMENTARY DESCRIPTION. The species is represented in this collection by very
typical specimens from four different stations. The specimens have umbonal teeth on
both scuta, which is given as very characteristic for this species. The very closely related
Fig. 10. Lepas australis (a-f from St. 63). a. Pupa (total length 2:55 mm.). 6. Pupa with pri-
mordial valves and initial development of peduncle (total length 3:15 mm.). c. Young specimen just
leaving the Cypris valves (total length 3:35 mm.). d, e, f. Young specimens with initial development
of the calcareous plates (total lengths 3-55, 4:07, and 4:30 mm. respectively). g. Full-grown specimen
from St. 212 (total length 64mm.). h. Carina. 7. Carina seen from beneath. 7. Scuta, ventral view.
L. anatifera sometimes has umbonal teeth on both scuta, but there is yet a difference,
for in L. australis the scuta are more curved in the umbonal part. It may here be pointed
out that these teeth can also disappear during ontogeny, as I have found in some speci-
mens from Juan Fernandez Islands. They were described as var. weltneri (Nilsson-
Cantell, 1929). But, in typical L. australis, there is no variation in the teeth of the scuta
as in L. anatifera. As other good characters for L. australis may be mentioned the very
thin plates of the capitulum and the well-developed prongs on the carina.
CONCHODERMA 249
According to Darwin (1851), L. australis is very closely related to L. fascicularis. In
my opinion, this latter species is distinct from all other species by the very different
carina, and it differs from L. australis by the presence of five filamentary appendages.
I think L. australis is most related to L. anatifera.
The material contains individuals of all stages from pupae without any traces of
plates to fully grown specimens. From St. 8 a very large individual was taken with the
following measurements: length of capitulum 38 mm., breadth 25 mm.; length of
peduncle 45 mm., breadth 9 mm. The largest individual described by Darwin has a
capitulum measuring 25-4 mm. in length, and that by Hoek (1883) 33-6 mm. in length.
Both are shorter than the Discovery specimen. The fully grown specimens agree well
with those figured by Weltner (1922, Fig. 2). For comparison a figure of a full-grown
specimen is given. It is of more interest to describe and figure the young stages, as they
are not exactly figured for all Lepas species.
The first stage (Fig. 10, a) found is a pupa without any traces of plates. The
initial differentiation of the peduncle and the body has already taken place. The pre-
hensile antennae are very difficult to detach from the attachment surface. The shape of
the distal segments cannot be seen until the next stage. They have been studied and
figured previously.
The second stage (Fig. 10, 6) shows the further development of the peduncle, which
extends outside the Cypris valves. Under these the primordial valves of the capitulum
are formed.
The third stage (Fig. 10, c) has a more developed peduncle, and is just leaving the
pupa stage, as the Cypris valves have been cast off.
In the fourth stage (Fig. 10,d) the calcareous plates begin to appear under the
primordial valves. The same is to be seen in the next two stages (Fig. 10,e,f). By
development of these plates the primordial valves of the scuta are moved a little from the
occludent margin, a feature also stated for L. hillit (Leach, 1818) (see Nilsson-Cantell,
1928, p. 15). In the carina the prongs begin to develop, but they are smaller in these
young stages than in the fully grown individual. The umbonal teeth in the scuta are to
be seen already in the young stages here figured. This does not agree with what Jennings
(1915, p.289) found in young specimens of thesame species. He found only “‘an incurving
at the umbo of either scutum”’. Possibly there is some variation in this character.
Finally it must be noted that there exists an individual variation in the size. Young
stages are sometimes found to be larger than more mature stages.
Genus Conchoderma, Olfers, 1814
Conchoderma auritum (Linné, 1767). (Plate I, figs. 1, 2, 3.)
For synonymy see Nilsson-Cantell, 1921, Zool. Bidrag Uppsala, vu, p. 240.
24.11.25. South Georgia. From Blue whale, 2. 22°58m. No. 46. Two small specimens on
Coronula reginae.
27.xi.25. South Shetland Islands. From Sperm whale, 3. Many specimens from teeth.
4-2
250 DISCOVERY REPORTS
20.i.26. South Georgia. From Humpback whale, 9. 13°55 m. No. 387. Many specimens on
Coronula diadema.
6. ii. 26. South Shetland Islands. From Humpback whale (a very white specimen). Many
specimens on Coronula diadema.
23. vii. 26. Durban. From Humpback whale. No. D 3. Many specimens on Coronula
diadema.
5.ix.26. Saldanha Bay. From Blue whale, 9. 21-3m. No. 1065. One large specimen on
Coronula reginae, on mandible of whale.
15. xi. 26. South Georgia, From Blue whale, 9. 25:1 m. No. 1196. Two fully grown specimens
from baleen plate. (Plate I, figs. 1, 2.)
13. iv. 27. Deception Island. From Fin whale. One fully grown specimen on tail.
29.i.27. South Shetland Islands. From Fin whale. Many specimens from baleen plates.
(Plate I, fig. 3.)
29. vi. 27. Simon’s Town. From ship’s side. One specimen.
DIsTRIBUTION. Cosmopolitan and pelagic, on Coronula attached to whales, on teeth
and baleen plates of whales. Also situated on such objects as fishes, eels, ships and
buoys.
SUPPLEMENTARY DEscRIPTION. This species, which was collected from ten sources,
is the best represented in the collection. To the previous descriptions, especially that
of Darwin (1851), not much need be added. Some remarks regarding this material,
however, may be made.
The largest specimen I have seen was among those collected on January 29, 1927, from
a Fin whale in the South Shetlands. Its measurements were: length of capitulum
60 mm., breadth 33 mm.; length of peduncle 76 mm., breadth 15 mm. Darwin’s largest
individual measured 125 mm. in total length. Broch (1924) mentions a specimen with
a capitulum of 35 mm. in length. Otherwise individuals of all sizes down to 6 mm. in
total length are represented in the material.
As regards the colour, the same observation may here be made as that made by
Cornwall (1927), namely, that specimens situated on black objects, as for instance on
the dark tail of a whale, are almost black.
The five plates are well developed in small and medium sized specimens. We find
five plates also in a large specimen having a length of capitulum of 47 mm., a breadth of
22 mm., a length of peduncle of 42 mm., and a breadth of 11 mm. This individual has
a carina of only 1mm. in length, a tergum 5 mm. in length, andascutum 11 mm. in length.
But great variation seems to exist, and one finds small specimens in which the terga
and carina have disappeared. According to Broch (1924) the terga disappear before
the carina, and in this material I have found the same feature. In many specimens,
however, the carina is reduced before the terga. In large individuals the terga and
carina are lost.
The peduncle is in many individuals widely expanded in the basal part, as in the
large specimens from a Fin whale in the South Shetlands in January 1927. This widely
expanded surface of attachment has already been mentioned by Darwin (1851, p. 144).
CONCHODERMA 251
Six specimens were found together on the side of a baleen plate (Plate I, fig. 3).
The surfaces of attachment of the individuals were cemented together to one plate.
Other specimens, from a Blue whale in South Georgia, November 1926, have the basal
part of the peduncle lobed.
Most of the material was attached to Coronula diadema (Linné, 1767) and C. reginae,
Darwin, 1854, which seems to be the most common host for this cirripede. These species
of Coronula were taken from the skin of Humpback and Blue whales. I have never seen
the species fixed directly in the skin. Here we may add as new places of situation:
baleen plates of Fin and Blue whales and the teeth of Sperm whales. The collector,
A. G. Bennett, has written the following regarding the occurrence of this species on the
teeth of a Sperm whale in the South Shetland Islands, November 1925: “This whale
had the fore end of the jaw curved round to the right. On this curvature barnacles
were growing around each tooth. Obviously, the jaw, being bent round the teeth at
the anterior end, did not fit the groove in the upper jaw. Otherwise it would be
impossible for parasites to establish themselves”. In the literature C. auritum is
mentioned from teeth of the Bottle-nosed whale (Hyperoodon rostratus). Finally it may
be noted that C. auritum has been taken from other animals, e.g. slow moving fishes
according to Dr A. Gould (Darwin, 1851), and the tail of a large eel (Gymnothorax
favagineus) according to Barnard (1924). The species is also found on dead things.
Darwin (1851) mentions ships’ bottoms. One specimen in this material was taken from
the ship’s sides (Simon’s 'Town, June 1927).
Conchoderma virgatum (Spengler, 1790). (Plate I, fig. 4.)
For synonymy see Nilsson-Cantell, 1921, Zool. Bidrag Uppsala, VU, p. 242.
8. xi. 25. 2° 02’ 09” N, 12° 33’ 00” S. Gear NH. Five specimens from ship’s sides.
4.x. 26. Saldanha Bay. From Blue whale, 3, 17-6 mm. No. 1170. Two fully grown specimens
attached to Pennella. (Plate I, fig. 4.)
DisTRIBUTION. Cosmopolitan and pelagic from telegraph-cables, ships, drift-wood,
and many animals. The following were hitherto known: fishes, eels, sea-snakes, turtles,
decapods and copepods parasitic on whales.
SUPPLEMENTARY DEsCRIPTION. The specimens are all typical C. virgatum. ‘The
variations in the shape of the scuta have been discussed by Nilsson-Cantell (1928). Small
individuals have narrower branches as in Fig. 7, b (Nilsson-Cantell, 1928), and large
individuals are more like Fig. 7, c (Nilsson-Cantell, 1928).
The species is also of interest as regards the attachment. It is found attached to ships’
bottoms, as were those taken in November 1925. Other floating objects like drift-wood
provide a suitable attachment surface for this Cirripede. It is known from many animals
as, for example, Mola mola (Broch, 1924), sea snakes, Hydrus platurus (Kriiger, 1911),
the eel, Gymnothorax favagineus (Barnard, 1924), the decapod, Neptunus pelagicus, and
turtles (several authors). The Discovery material contains some specimens from the
252 DISCOVERY REPORTS
parasitic copepod Pennella from a Blue whale. Hoek (1909) notes a similar occurrence
of the species. It is certainly to be found on many other animals.
The individuals from the ship’s sides, 8. xi. 25, 2° 02’ 09’’ N, 12° 33’ 00” W, were
collected thirty-four days after the ship left England. Their measurements were: length
of capitulum 19 mm., breadth 12:5 mm.; length of peduncle 22 mm., breadth 9 mm.
Genus Hexelasma, Hoek, 1913
Hexelasma corolliforme (Hoek, 1883).
Balanus corolliformis, Hoek, 1883, Challeng. Rep. v1, p. 155; Gruvel, 1905, Monogr. Cirrhip.
Pp. 255.
St. 175. 2.ii1.27. Bransfield Straits, South Shetlands. 63°17’ 20” S, 59° 48’ 15” W. 200 m.,
m. st. g. Gear DLH. One specimen.
DisTRIBUTION. Kerguelen and South Shetland Islands. 200-280 m.
SUPPLEMENTARY DESCRIPTION. Of this genus Hexelasma, created by Hoek in 1913,
eight species are known. The species here dealt with was first regarded by Hoek as a
Balanus. 'The Discovery specimen is a little smaller than that figured by Hoek. The
external shape of the type differs in the more developed plates in the wall, and in the
consequent wider orifice. This is due only to a difference in age.
The shell in this specimen is covered by a brown membrane with chitinous spines
situated on the growth ridges, and this is in agreement with the description of Hoek.
After removal of this membrane the compartments are seen to be white.
The parietes are here fully figured and described.
Carina little more than half the breadth of the scutum, with distinctly indicated alae.
Carino-lateral compartments rather narrow, with a distinct ala on the lateral side.
No radius visible externally. On the inside of this part a longitudinal depression is
formed where the plate overlaps the carina.
Lateral compartment about twice as wide as the carino-lateral, and with a distinct ala
on the rostral side. No external radius is here differentiated, but the plate covers the ala
of the carino-lateral plate.
‘“‘Rostrum”’ constituting the broadest plate in the wall, with internally marked
longitudinal furrows, against which the alae of the lateralia abut. ‘This plate is held by
Pilsbry (1916) and Withers (1928) to be composed of a real rostrum and two rostro-
laterals. As the genus in all respects is a typical Chthamalid, the real rostrum ought to
have alae.
The compartments of the wall in these specimens seem to be nearly of the same length.
The ‘‘rostrum”’ is here somewhat longer than the carina. In some other species of
Hexelasma the carina is longer than the rostrum (H. antarcticum, Borradaile, 1916, and
H. americanum, Pilsbry, 1916). In this species I am unable to find any traces of a sheath
which, in other Hexelasma species that have been described, is distinctly indicated.
Hoek’s specimens, to judge by his figure, seem not to have such parts.
1 Since writing the above I find that H. hirsutum (Hoek, 1883) must be regarded as a synonym of
this species, of which it is a younger stage.
HEXELASMA 253
The opercular valves agree with the type-description. Figures are given here for
comparison.
Fig. 11. Hexelasma corolliforme. a. Lateral view (carino-rostral diameter to mm.). 6. Left tergum.
c. Left scutum. d. Carina, internal view. e. Carino-lateral compartment, internal view. f. Lateral compart-
ment, internal view. g. “Rostrum”, internal view.
d
Fig. 12. Hexelasma corolliforme. a. Labrum and palpus.
b. Mandible. c. Maxilla I. d. Maxilla II.
Scutum with a distinct articular ridge, an internal furrow in the upper part
of the plate, a pit for the lateral depressor muscle, an indistinctly marked cavity
for the adductor muscle, and an internal ridge, mentioned by Hoek, along the
occludent margin.
254 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Tergum with a strongly developed articular ridge, and a spur near the basi-scutal
angle. Crests for depressor muscles indistinct.
Measurements: the carino-rostral diameter is 10 mm.; the height is 1o mm.
Mouth Parts: the mouth-parts are described by Hoek (1883) and partly figured. For
comparison, figures of the Discovery specimen are given. Labrum of the Chthamalid
type with a slight inward flexion in the middle. Free edge with hairs, but without teeth,
a feature pointed out by Hoek. Palp long and rounded at the end, with feathered
bristles. Mandible with four teeth (two to four with additional teeth) and an inferior
angle divided into three small teeth (quite as stated by Hoek (1883)). Maxilla I with
a broad notch in the upper part with smaller bristles. The lower part projects, and
bears spines of about the same size. Maxilla II is bilobed as in Chthamalus.
Number of segments of the cirri
Cirrus I Il Ul IV V VI
as ———> -S ——————y — > =>
Segments 9 12 i itis 18 20 24 26 28 30 208 at
The number of the segments are smaller than in Hoek’s specimen, as this individual
is younger. Cirrus I with unequal rami. Cirrus II with slightly unequal rami. ‘Those
following with nearly equal rami.
Genus Balanus, da Costa, 1778
Balanus maxillaris, Gronovius, 1763.
Gronovius, 1763, Zool. Gronov. Iconogr. V, P1. xix, figs. 3, 4.
Lepas cylindrica, Gmelin, 1790, Syst. Nat. p. 3213.
Balanus capensis, Ellis, Darwin, 1854, Monogr. Balanid. p. 209; Gruvel, 1905, Monogr. Cirrhip.
p. 218.
Balanus maxillaris, Pilsbry, 1916, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. No. 93, p. 77; Barnard, 1924, Ann. S.
Afric. Mus. xx, No. 7, p. 67.
22. xii. 25. Cape Town. From ship’s sides. ‘Two small specimens.
DIsTRIBUTION. South Africa (Cape of Good Hope, Cape Town, Algoa Bay).
SUPPLEMENTARY DeEscRIPTION. Though the specimens are rather young (the largest
has a carino-rostral diameter of 4 mm. and a height of 3 mm.), it was possible by studying
the opercular plates to identify them as B. maxillaris. The internal parts of this species
have not been closely studied. As the specimens are very small and not in a good state
I will not give a description of the internal parts. ‘They may best be studied in fully
grown specimens.
Balanus laevis, Bruguiere, 1789.
For synonymy see Nilsson-Cantell, 1921, Zool. Bidrag Uppsala, vu, p. 321.
St. 52. 5.v.26. Port William, East Falkland Island. 17m. Gear LH. Some small and large
specimens on mussel shells.
ELMINIUS 255
St. 53. 12. v.26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island, on the hulk of the ‘Great Britain’. o-2 m.
Gear RM. One medium sized specimen on a Mytilus shell.
St. 55. 16. v.26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island. 10-16 m. Gear BTS. Several young speci-
mens on Mollusc shells.
St. 56. 16.v.26. Sparrow Cove, Port William, East Falkland Island. 10}-16m. Gear BTS.
Several young and old specimens on small shells of Molluscs with hermit crabs.
St. 57. 16.v.26. Port William, East Falkland Island. 15 m. Gear BTS. Several large, mostly
empty, shells.
St. 222. 23. iv. 27. St Martin’s Cove, Hermite Island, Cape Horn. 30-35 m. Gear NRL. Three
large specimens.
St. WS 95. 17.1v.27. 48° 58'15”S, 64°45’00” W. 109 m.,f.d.s.st.sh. Gear DC. Several small
dead shells on a mussel shell.
DIsTRIBUTION. California, Chile, Peru, Tierra del Fuego, Magellan Strait, Falkland
Islands, Sandwich Islands, Chinca Islands. From the tidal zone down to 275 m.
(Nilsson-Cantell, 1921). The species is found on stones, shells, tubes, and according
to Darwin also on Balanus psittacus (Molina, 1892), Darwin, 1854.
This well-known species is represented by several specimens. They are all quite
typical. To the discussion by Nilsson-Cantell, 1921, nothing need be added here. It is
of interest to note that some very small specimens were taken from St. 55. The smallest
measures in carino-rostral diameter 1-5 mm.; all have six well developed compartments
in the wall. ‘Therefore it is not possible to make certain whether a stage with four valves
exists here. The localities noted here are not new, as the species is well-known from the
Falkland Islands and Cape Horn.
Genus Elminius, Leach, 1825
Elminius kingi, Gray, 1831.
For synonymy see Nilsson-Cantell, 1921, Zool. Bidrag Uppsala, vu, p. 348.
St. 53. 12. v.26. Port Stanley, East Falkland Island, on the hulk of the “Great Britain’. o-2 m.
Gear RM. One large and two smaller specimens on a Mytilus shell.
DistRIBUTION. Tierra del Fuego, Patagonia, Chile. On rocks, shells and floating
timber in tidal water.
SUPPLEMENTARY DescRIPTION. This species has already been fully described by Darwin
(1854) and Nilsson-Cantell (1921). ‘The Discovery specimens are of a conical shape.
Shell white, without ribs, and in the larger individuals covered by a brown cuticle.
Opercular valves quite typical, and the internal parts are as described by Nilsson-
Cantell (1921). The penis has a dorsal point at the base not previously mentioned for
this genus. Darwin mentions this process for many species of Balanus (see also Nilsson-
Cantell, 1921).
Measurements: the carino-rostral diameter of the large specimen is 14 mm., its
height 11 mm. The carino-rostral diameter of one of the smaller specimens is 6 mm.,
its height 2 mm.
piii 5
256 DISCOVERY REPORTS
The number of segments of the cirri have been given by me (1921) for small
individuals. It may here be completed for larger specimens.
Number of segments of the cirri
Cirrus I I] Ill IV Vv VI
@arino-rostral (diameter! 14;mm.,)|| (8) 04))|| TO ers gh 14242 8a
height 11 mm.
S t
era Carino-rostral diameter 4:5 mm.| 8 14] I0 Io] 11 12] 18 24 | 25 26] — 25
(Nilsson-Cantell, 1921)
The shorter cirri of both specimens agree fairly well in the number of segments.
In the longer cirri an increase in number with age is to be noted. In the dissected
specimen I observed that the segments of the posterior ramus of cirrus III had many
coarsely pectinated spines at the upper border. This has been previously noted by
Darwin in F. plicatus, Gray, 1843, who regarded it as of specific value. In EF. modestus,
Darwin, 1854, I did not find such spines, this being in agreement with Darwin.
Genus Ceronula, Lamarck, 1802
Coronula diadema (Linné, 1767).
For synonymy see Nilsson-Cantell, 1921, Zool. Bidrag Uppsala, vu, p. 371.
20.1. 26. South Georgia. From a Humpback whale, 9. 13:55 m. No. 387. One large specimen.
6.11.26. South Shetland Islands. From a very white Humpback whale. Two large and three
small specimens.
23. vil. 26. Durban. From a Humpback whale, 3. 11-5 m. No. D 3. Two large specimens.
DIsTRIBUTION. Probably cosmopolitan. The species is not yet known to occur uni-
versally in the oceans. No finds are known from the equatorial parts of the Atlantic and
the Indian Oceans.
SUPPLEMENTARY DescriPTION. This species is represented by fully grown individuals.
The young stages would be of interest to study, but none have been collected or de-
scribed. ‘The fully grown specimens are well-known, and have been described by Darwin
(1854), Nilsson-Cantell (1921), Broch (1924), and Cornwall (1927). The specimens
were taken from Humpback whales, which by most authors are mentioned as hosts.
Probably the species is to be found on other whales (Barnard, 1924, p. 94).
The largest specimen has a carino-rostral diameter of 53 mm., and a height of 42 mm.
Coronula reginae, Darwin, 1854. (Plate I, figs. 5-10.)
For synonymy see Nilsson-Cantell, 1926, Ark. Zool. Bd. XVIII a, No. 27, p. 15.
24.11.25. South Georgia. From a Blue whale, 9. 22:58 m. No. 46. One specimen with some
young Conchoderma auritum.
24. vil. 26. Durban, From a Humpback whale, 3. 9°55 m. No. D 4. Three specimens. (Plate I,
figs. g, 10.)
CORONULA 257
1g. vili. 26. Saldanha Bay, South Africa. From a Blue whale, 2. 25-05 m. No. 968. One young
specimen.
20. vill. 26. Saldanha Bay, South Africa. From a Fin whale, 3. 14:1 m. No. 973. One specimen
on tail.
24. vill. 26. Saldanha Bay, South Africa. From a Fin whale, 3. 15:5 m. No. 1000. Two smaller
specimens embedded in the skin. (Plate I, fig. 8.)
5. 1x. 26. Saldanha Bay, South Africa. From a Blue whale, 3. 13:35 m. No. 1064. One small
specimen from the flank, embedded in the skin. (Plate I, fig. 6.)
5. ix. 26. Saldanha Bay, South Africa. From a Blue whale, 2. 21-3m. No. 1065. One large
specimen embedded in the skin.
7.1x.26. Saldanha Bay, South Africa. From a Blue whale, 9. 25:47m. No. 1071. ‘Two small
specimens from the tip of the flipper. (Plate I, fig. 5.)
25.1.27. South Georgia. From a Blue whale, 9. 25-7 m. No. 1425. One specimen and marks of
a large one from tail flukes.
One specimen from the skin of a whale (no number) from Saldanha Bay. (Plate I, fig. 7.)
DisTRIBUTION. This species is probably cosmopolitan. Hitherto it has been taken from
the Arctic and Antarctic seas, the Northern and Southern Atlantic and Pacific Oceans.
As the species is attached to whales it has been found in many localities, chiefly where
there are whale fisheries.
SUPPLEMENTARY DESCRIPTION. The species is in my opinion rather uncertain. This
question has been closely discussed by me (1926). I stated about this species, p. 15:
“Es liegt nahe anzunehmen, dass die weniger stark abgeplatteten C. reginae, C. diadema
sind, die nur eine andere Wachstumsweise angenommen haben. Sie sollten folglich
verschiedene Variationen derselben Art darstellen. Es ist gegenwartig nicht méglich
dieses zu entscheiden, wie man auch die Ursache dieser Erscheinung auffassen mag.”
This rather rich material has not sufficed to clear up the question altogether. Some of the
fully grown specimens are typically C. reginae (those from Saldanha Bay, 24. viii. 26,
Plate I, fig. 8), others more intermediate between C. diadema and C. reginae (that from
Saldanha Bay, 5.ix. 26). I thus prefer as before to recognize the species C. reginae.
Many young examples of Coronula are represented in the Discovery material. I think
they must all be considered as young C. reginae. One of them (from Saldanha Bay,
7. ix. 26) is very young, the youngest seen I think; it has a carino-rostral diameter of
only 2 mm. (Plate I, fig. 5). Of the rest many sizes are represented.
For both the species, C. diadema and C. reginae, it is given as a typical character that
the orifice of the body chamber is much larger than the basal opening. In C. complanata
(Mérch) the basal opening is as large as the orifice. This character must apply rather to
fully grown specimens. One young specimen (Plate I, fig. 7) shows both openings of the
same diameter, but during further growth the comparative size of the openings is altered.
Cornwall (1928), who has studied young specimens of both species at a whaling
station, says that C. reginae at first grows under the skin, which also is the case with
young specimens of the Discovery material. Of C. diadema he says, p. 11: “They are
not imbedded in the skin of the whale at any stage of their growth”.
5-2
258 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Terga, said by Pilsbry (1916) to be wanting, by Cornwall (1927) to be present in the
small individuals. In this material they are found in small and rather large specimens.
I dissected some specimens of C. diadema and C. reginae and did not find the differences
given by Broch (1924) between the mouth-parts, especially the mandibles. I refer here
to Nilsson-Cantell, p. 16, 1926. Cornwall (1927) gives some differences in the number
of spines in the longer cirri, for he found in C. diadema up to five pairs of spines, and in
two dissected C. reginae three pairs in a smaller specimen and three longer pairs and
one small pair in a larger specimen. As in Balanus we often find some differences in
this character, which depends on age, and I think it has no great importance. Yet I will
not for the present deny the possibility that two different but nearly related species exist.
The present specimens were taken from Blue whales, Fin whales, and Humpbacks,
hosts previously recorded.
Genus Xenobalanus, Steenstrup, 1851
Xenobalanus globicipitis, Steenstrup, 1851.
For synonymy see Nilsson-Cantell, 1921, Zool. Bidrag Uppsala, vu, p. 375.
27.X.25. 14° 45’ 00” N, 18° 34’ 00” W. Four fully grown specimens and one small specimen
on the tip of flipper of a whale (species not given).
16. vill. 26. Saldanha Bay, South Africa. From Sei whale, ?. 10:45 m. No. 952. One fully grown
specimen.
20. vill. 26. Saldanha Bay, South Africa. From a Fin whale, 3. 14:1 m. No. 973. Many speci-
mens on tail, fluke, etc.
21.ix. 26. Saldanha Bay, South Africa. From a Blue whale, 9. 16:82 m. No. 1104. One small
specimen on the tip of flipper.
4.x. 26. Saldanha Bay, South Africa. From a Blue whale, 3. 17:1 m. No. 1169. Seven fully
grown specimens from the flukes.
13. iv. 27. Deception Island, South Shetlands. From a Fin whale. Several basal plates on the
tail.
DistRIBUTION. Probably cosmopolitan, on the skin of porpoises, dolphins and whales.
SUPPLEMENTARY DescripTION. The species is here represented by several specimens
from six different stations. Its morphology is already well known and seems not to vary
much. Yet these finds are of great biological and zoogeographical interest. Before
Calman (1920) this species was only noted from the North Atlantic Ocean. This author
describes specimens from the Antarctic (South Shetland Islands). Later, Barnard
(1924) describes specimens from other southern localities (Natal and Saldanha Bay,
South Africa). Stebbing’s species, X. natalensis, 1923, from the same catch, is held by
Barnard to be typical X. globicipitis. As Cornwall (1927) describes some specimens from
the Northern Pacific (Vancouver Islands, B.C.) the species, like other whale parasites,
might have a very wide distribution: it might be said to be cosmopolitan. All the
material here collected is from Antarctic waters, which shows that the species is rather
common there, perhaps as much so as in northern seas.
XENOBALANUS 259
The species was first found in the skin of porpoises (Darwin, 1854). By later authors
it is mentioned from whales and dolphins. In the literature I find the following hosts
for Xenobalanus:
Globicephala melaena (acc. to Nilsson-Cantell, 1921).
G. intermedius (acc. to Pilsbry, 1916).
Balaenoptera borealis (acc. to Nilsson-Cantell, 1921; Broch, 1924).
B. physalus (acc. to Barnard, 1924).
Tursiops catalania (acc. to Barnard, 1924).
Delphinus delphis (acc. to Gruvel, 1920).
Orcinus orca (acc. to Gruvel, 1920).
Pseudorca crassidens (acc. to Gruvel, 1920).
Grampus griseus (acc. to Gruvel, 1920).
The Discovery material contains specimens from the following Cetaceans:
Balaenoptera musculus.
B. physalus.
B. borealis.
The specimens were situated on different parts of the host, for it is here noted from
the tail, tip of flipper, and the flukes. The largest specimen in the collection measures in
total length 36 mm.
Pee RAMONE
AuriviLLius, C. W. S., 1892. Neue Cirripedien aus dem Atlantischen, Indischen und Stillen Ocean. Ofvers.
af K. svenska VetenskAkad. Handl. No. 3, pp. 123-34.
1894. Studien iiber Cirripedien. K. svenska VetenskAkad. Handl. xxvt, No. 7, pp. 1, &c.
Barnarp, K. H., 1924. Contribution to the Crustacean Fauna of South Africa, No. 7, Cirripedia. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. xx, pp. I-103, 1 pl.
BorrapaiLe, L. A., 1916. Cirripedia. Brit. Mus. (Nat. Hist.), Brit. Antarct. (‘Terra nova’) Exp. 1910,
Nat. Hist. Rep. Zool. 111, No. 4, London.
Brocu, Hj., 1912. Die Plattenentwicklung bei Scalpellum Stroemii. K. norske VidenskSelsk. Skr. No. 4,
TPR
1924. Cirripedia thoracica von Norwegen und dem norweg. Nordmeere. Skr. VidenskSelsk. Krist. I.
Mat.-Naturv. Klasse, No. 17, pp. 1-121, 35 figs., 3 pls.
1927. Plattenhomologien, Ontogenie und Phylogenie der Cirripedien. Palaont. Z. vit, Heft 4, pp. 247-
62, 6 figs.
Catman, W. T., 1920. A Whale Barnacle of the Genus Xenobalanus from Antarctic Seas. Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist. ser. 9, VI, pp. 165-6.
Cornwatt, I.E., 1924. Notes on West American Barnacles. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. fourth series, x111, No. 26.
1925. A Review of the Cirripedia of the Coast of British Columbia. Contr. Canad. Biol. N.S. u, No. 18.
1927. Some North Pacific Whale Barnacles. Contr. Canad. Biol. N.S. 11, No. 23.
1928. Collecting at Cachalot Whaling Station. Canad. Field Nat. xu, No. t.
Darwin, Cu., 1851. A Monograph on the Sub-class Cirripedia. 1. Lepadidae. Ray Soc. Pub.
1854. A Monograph on the Sub-class Cirripedia. 11. The Balanidae, Verrucidae, etc. Ray Soc. Pub.
GruveL, A., 1905. Monographie des Cirrhipédes ou Thécostracés. Paris.
—— 1906. Cirrhipédes du ‘ Discovery’. Bull. Mus. Hist. nat. Paris, x1, pp. 270-3.
260 ¢ DISCOVERY REPORTS
GruveL, A., 1907. Note préliminaire sur les Cirrhipédes Pédonculés recueillis par Pexpédition antarctique du
‘Gauss’. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr. xxxul, pp. 157-62.
— 1910. Cirripedien. Deutsche Siidpolarexpedition 1901-3, herausg. von Drygalski, x1, Zoologie 3,
Berlin.
—— 1912. Mission Gruvel sur la céte occidentale d’ Afrique (1909-10) et collection du Muséum d’ Hist. Nat.
Les Cirrhipédes. Bull. Mus. Hist. nat. Paris, xvi, pp. 344-50, pl. vii.
—— 1920. Cirrhipédes. Rés. Camp. sci. Monaco, Fasc. Litt.
Hoek, P. P., 1883. Report on the Cirripedia collected by H.M.S. ‘Challenger’ during the years 1873-6.
‘Challenger’ Report, Zoology, vit, London.
—— 1907. The Cirripedia of the ‘ Siboga’ Expedition. A. Pedunculata. ‘Siboga’ Expeditie, xxx1 a, Leiden.
1909. Die Cirripedien des nordischen Planktons. Nordisches Plankton, herausg. von K. Brandt u.
C. Apstein, Lief. x1, 8, Kiel u. Leipzig.
1913. The Cirripedia of the ‘ Siboga’ Expedition. B. Cirripedia Sessilia. ‘Siboga’ Expeditie, xxxt d,
Leiden.
Jennincs, L. S., 1915. Pedunculate Cirripedia of New Zealand and Neighbouring Islands. Trans. Proc.
N.Z. Inst. xiv, pp. 285-93 illus.
1918. Revision of the Cirripedia of New Zealand. ‘Trans. Proc. N.Z. Inst. L, pp. 56-63.
Krier, P., 1911. Beitrdge zur Cirripedienfauna Ostasiens. Abh. bayer. Akad. Wiss. 11. Suppl.-Bd.,
6 Abhandlg. Miinchen.
Nitsson-CaNTELL, C. A., 1921. Cuirripeden-Studien. Zur Kenntnis der Biologie, Anatomie und Systematik
dieser Gruppe. Zool. Bidr. Uppsala, vu, pp. 75-378 illus., pls. 1-3.
—— 1926. Antarktische und subantarktische Cirripedien. Ark. Zool. xvii1 a, No. 27, Stockholm.
— 1927. Some Barnacles in the British Museum (Nat. Hist.). Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. Pt. 3, pp. 743-90 illus.
1928. Studies on Cirripedes in the British Museum (Nat. Hist.), Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Lond., (10) 0,
pp- 1-39, text-figs.
—— 1929. Cirripeds from the fuan Fernandez Islands. Nat. Hist. Juan Fernandez and Easter Island, edited
by Dr C. Skottsberg, 11, Uppsala.
—— 1930. New and interesting species of Scalpellum from a telegraph cable near the coast of north Chili.
J. Linn. Soc. Zool. xxxvirt, No. 250, pp. 61~78, text-figs. 1-6.
Pirssry, H., 1890. The Nautilus. 1v, 8, p. 96; Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. pp. 441-3, text-fig.
1907. The Barnacles contained in the Collections of the U.S. Nat. Mus. (Smithsonian Institution). Bull.
U.S. Nat. Mus. 60, Washington.
tg1t. Barnacles of Japan and Behring Sea. Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish. xxrx, 1909, pp. 59-84, pls. viii-xvii.
1916. The Sessile Barnacles contained in the Collections of U.S. Nat. Mus.; including a Monograph
of the American Species. Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. 93, Washington.
STEBBING, T’. R. R., 1910. General Catalogue of South African Crustacea. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. v1.
WELTNER, W., 1897. Verzeichnis der bisher beschriebenen rec. Cirripedien-Arten. Arch. JahrNaturgesch.
I, pp. 227-280, Berlin.
1922. Cirripedia der deutschen Tiefsee-Exp. Wiss. Ergebnisse der deutschen Tiefsee-Exp. xx, Heft 2,
Jena.
Witners, T. H., 1928. Catalogue of Fossil Cirripedia in the Department of Geology. 1. Triassic and Furassic.
Brit. Mus. (Nat. Hist.), London.
AO fe aly § Sgr A Na neni 5
30 4yR1 ‘
ae r ers oli nits A go ne oalt al .
rn pedo eco
Cae
| NSE 3 4
voit nt emnivoge. 0 HON : “ disc, wan oe sh eu
aie ,\\
A cobie lecines odt tort asutipg a orniee Sea peer & ett oui ‘a sits ow? on
* “ 2
ae
THO BAC
Fig.
PAE a
. 1. Conchoderma auritum (Linné, 1767). On baleen plate of Blue whale. About 1-7/1.
. Conchoderma auritum (Linné, 1767). On baleen plate of Blue whale. About 1-65/1.
. Conchoderma virgatum (Spengler, 1790). From a parasitic copepod (Pennella) on a Blue whale. About
2
. 3. Conchoderma auritum (Linné, 1767). On-baleen plate of Fin whale. About 0-73/1.
4
I
. Coronula reginae, Darwin, 1854. Two young specimens in the skin of a Blue whale. About 1-63/1.
. Coronula reginae, Darwin, 1854. In the skin of a Blue whale. About 1-86/1.
5
6
. 7. Coronula reginae, Darwin, 1854. In the skin of a whale from Saldanha Bay. About 1-74/1.
8
. Coronula reginae, Darwin, 1854. In the skin of a Fin whale. About 1-74/1.
. 9. Coronula reginae, Darwin, 1854. One full-grown specimen in the skin of a Humpback whale.
About 1-50/T.
10. Coronula reginae, Darwin, 1854. The same specimen from the carinal side. About 1-40/1.
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. II PLATE fE
THORACIC CIRRIPEDES
id
PAN
Ox
x
by ea
' .
DISCOVERY
REPORTS
Vol. II, pp. 261-370, plate II, text-figs. 1-47
Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Government of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands
OCEANIC FISHES AND FLATFISHES
COLLECTED IN 1925-1927
by
J. R. Norman
| CAMBRIDGE
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
1930
Price eleven shillings net
[Discovery Reports. Vol. I, pp. 261-370, Plate IT, text-figs. 1-47, November, 1930.]
OCEANIC FISHES AND FLATEISHES
COLLECTED IN 1925-1927
By
J. R. NORMAN
CONTENTS
Part I. Oceanic FISHES
INTRODUCTION
LIsT OF STATIONS .
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT .
Alepocephalidae
Argentinidae
Gonostomatidae
Sternoptychiidae .
Astronesthidae .
Chauliodontidae
Stomiatidae
Malacosteidae .
Sudidae
Myctophidae
Eurypharyngidae .
Nemichthyidae
Congridae .
Exocoetidae
Gadidae
Macruridae
Stylophoridae .
Diretmidae .
Caristiidae .
Melamphaidae .
Chilodipteridae
Chiasmodontidae .
Stromateidae
Gempylidae
Liparidae
Linophrynidae .
Oneirodidae
Melanocetidae .
Ceratiidae .
Himantolophidae .
Aceratiidae .
Part II. FLATFISHES
INTRODUCTION
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT .
INDEX .
PuateE IT .
page 263
263
354
356
365
following page 370
OCEANIC FISHES AND FLATFISHES
COLLECTED IN 1925-1927
By J. R. Norman
Assistant Keeper, Department of Zoology, British Museum (Natural History)!
(Plate II, text-figs. 1-47).
PART (OGEANIG FISHES
INTRODUCTION
HE present report is based on the collections of oceanic fishes made by the R.R.S.
‘Discovery’ and, to a much less extent, by the R.R.S. ‘William Scoresby’ from
1925 to 1927, chiefly in the South Atlantic and Antarctic Oceans, at depths ranging
from the surface down to 3500 metres. No larval or postlarval specimens are included,
as this material will be the subject of a separate investigation. The report is entirely
systematic in nature, as it is the author’s intention to defer any theoretical considerations
until a later date, when it is confidently expected that further material will be available.
The collections already studied, however, have proved of great interest, and since the
work of the Danish vessel, the ‘Dana’, and of several American investigators has been
confined chiefly to the northern parts of the ocean, the material brought back by the
‘Discovery’ should add considerably to our knowledge of the fish fauna of the Atlantic.
As will be seen from the list which follows, the number of species obtained is about
160, represented in all by more than 2000 specimens: of these 18 prove to be new to
science, 3 representing new genera. The identification of the members of the family
Gonostomatidae has proved a matter of some difficulty, and a revision of these fishes
has been included in this report, based not only on the Discovery material but on all
the specimens in the British Museum, including those obtained by the ‘Challenger’.
Revisions of the fishes of the Berycoid genus Melamphaés, and of the family Chiasmo-
dontidae, also based on the Discovery collections, have already been published in the
Annals and Magazine of Natural History for last year.
When a considerable amount of material of some well-known species has been ob-
tained from a number of different stations in the South Atlantic, no attempt has been
made to give a complete list of these records of locality, etc., in the usual manner, but
a general summary of the localities is given. All the text-figures accompanying this
report are the work of Lieut.-Col. W. P. C. Tenison, D.S.O.
The author takes this opportunity of offering his thanks to the members of the
Discovery Committee for placing this valuable material at his disposal and for en-
trusting him with the preparation of this report. Thanks are also due and are heartily
1 Submitted for publication by permission of the Trustees of the British Museum.
264 DISCOVERY REPORTS
tendered to Dr S. L. Hora of the Indian Museum, Professor L. Roule of the Paris
Museum, Mr A. E. Parr of the Bingham Oceanographic Collection, and Mr A. V.
Taning of the Carlsberg Laboratory, Copenhagen, for the loan of type specimens, or
for information concerning certain fishes under their charge.
List.Or Ssrarvions
When a large number of specimens of a well-known species has been obtained from
various stations no attempt has been made to give the data in full, and a mere summary
is given in the report. A list of these particular stations, with the necessary data, and
names of the species obtained, follows.
St. 3. 3. xii. 25. 29° 3106" S, 13° 56’ 45” W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 500-700 m.: 6 Argyro-
pelecus hemigymnus, 10-32 mm.
St.9. 11. ii. 26. 46° 11’ 30” S, 22° 27’ 30” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 3500 (-o) m.: 5 Cyclo-
thone microdon, 43-56 mm.
St. 65. 22. v. 26. 48° 18’ 00” S, 53° 09’ 00" W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 120 (-o) m.: 2 Lam-
panyctus sp., 48-65 mm.
St. 66. 23. v.26. 48°09’ 00S, 52° 50’ oo” W. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, go (-o) m.: 1 Lampanyctus
guentheri, 28 mm.; 1 L. alatus, 39 mm.
St. 69. 25. v.26. 45°06’ 00" S, 49° 00’ 00” W. 70 cm. tow-net, horizontal, go (-o) m.: 1 Lam-
panyctus guentheri, 41 mm.
St. 71. 30. v. 26. 43° 20’ 00” S, 46° 02’ 00” W. 70cm. tow-net, vertical, 500-750 m.: 1 Cyclo-
thone microdon, 27 mm.
St. 72. 1. vi. 26. 41° 43’ 20” S, 42° 20’ 40” W. 45 m. net, horizontal, 2000 (-0) m.: 5 Cyclothone
microdon, 45-65 mm.
St. 76. §.vi. 26. 39° 50’ 30” S, 36° 2300” W. 43m. net, horizontal, 1500 (—o) m. : 28 Cyclothone
microdon, 30-56 mm.; 1 Lampanyctus alatus, 43 mm.; 1 L. guentheri, 36 mm.
St. 78. 12. vi. 26. 35° 18’ 00" S, 19° or’ 10” W. Young-fish trawl, rooo (0) m.: 72 Cyclothone
microdon, 15-55 mm.; 1 Sternoptyx diaphana, 10 mm.; 1 Lampanyctus sp., 25 mm.
St. 79. 13. vi. 26. 34° 48’ 00” S, 16° 36’ 00” W. 45 m. net, horizontal, 1000 (-o) m.: 5 Cyclothone
microdon, 28-52 mm.
St. 80. 17. vi. 26. 32° 46’00"S, 10°00’ 00” W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 30 (-o) m.: 2 Lampanyctus
townsendi, 40-67 mm.
St. 81. 18. vi. 26. 32° 45’ 00” S, 8° 47’ 00” W. 4} m. net, horizontal, 650 (-o) m.: 70 Cyclothone
microdon, 15-40 mm. ; 6 Argyropelecus hemigymnus, 18-34 mm. ; 12 Sternoptyx diaphana, 17-25 mm. ;
8 Lampanyctus sp., 15-32 mm.
St. 83. 21. vi. 26. 32° 30’ 50” S, 1° 23’ 30” W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 650 (—o) m.: 9 Argyro-
pelecus hemigymnus, 9-26 mm.; 4 Lampanyctus sp., 35-62 mm.
St. 85. 23. vi. 26. 33°07’ 40”S, 4° 30’ 20” E. 43 m. net, horizontal, 2000 (—o) m.: 67 Cyclothone
microdon, 20-60 mm.; 2 Argyropelecus hemigymnus, 23-29 mm.; 1 Sternoptyx diaphana, 12 mm. ;
1 Lampanyctus townsendi, 22 mm.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 2500” S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 43 m. net, horizontal, 1000 (-o) m.: 14 Cyclothone
microdon, 24-45 mm.; 4 Argyropelecus hemigymnus, 9-21 mm.; 3 Sternoptyx diaphana, 14-22 mm. ;
1 Myctophum laternatum, 23 mm.; 1 Lampanyctus sp., 88 mm.
LIST OF STATIONS 265
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33°53’ 45”S, 9° 26’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 19 Cyclothone
microdon, 17-50mm.; 18 Argyropelecus hemigymnus, 8-24 mm.; 5 Sternoptyx diaphana, 12-16 mm.
St. 89. 28. vi. 26. 34° 0515” S, 16° 00’ 45” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 25 Cyclo-
thone microdon, 12-50 mm.; 4 Argyropelecus hemigymnus, 15-27 mm.; 3 Myctophum laternatum,
II-24 mm.
St. 100. 4. x. 26. 33° 20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00” S, 15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl,
2000-2500 m.: 23 Cyclothone microdon, 30-60 mm.; 4 Argyropelecus hemigymnus, 14-32 mm. ;
4 Myctophum laternatum, 19-27 mm. Young-fish trawl, 625-675 m.: 1 Argyropelecus hemigymnus,
32 mm.
St. or. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.:
7 Sternoptyx diaphana, 13-25 mm. ; 6 Lampanyctus alatus, 40-92 mm. 1310-1410 m.: 1 Lampanyctus
sp., 100 mm.
St. 104. 31. x. 26. 41° 33’ 30” S, 17° 58’ 00” W. 70 cm. tow-net, vertical, 110 m.: 1 Lampanyctus
townsendi, 50 mm.
St. 151. 16.1.27. 53°25’ 00"S, 35° 15’ 00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 1025-1275 m. : 22 Cyclothone
microdon, 34-68 mm.; 1 Lampanyctus sp., 76 mm.
St. 169. 22.11.27. 60° 48’ 50” S, 51° 00’ 20” W. Young-fish trawl, 1000-1100 m.: 3 Cyclothone
microdon, 55-60 mm.
St. 239. 2. vi. 27. 46° 56’ 00” S, 46° 03’ 00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 1050-1350 (-o) m.:
89 Cyclothone microdon, 28-60 mm.; 7 Lampanyctus alatus, 80-102 mm.
St. 240. 2. vi. 27. 46° 36’ 30” S, 45° 07’ 00” W. 70cm. tow-net, horizontal, 40 (—o) m.: 1 Lam-
panyctus guentheri, 38mm. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, 70 (-o) m.: 1 L. guentheri, 43 mm. 35 m.:
1 L. guentheri, 43 mm.
St. 241. 5. vi. 27. 40° 34’ 30” S, 36° 35’ 30” W. 1 m. tow-net, horizontal, 152 m.: 3 Lampanyctus
guentheri, 41-50 mm. 70 cm. tow-net, horizontal, 49 (—o) m.: 2 L. guentheri, 30-46 mm.
St. 242. 7. vi. 27. 39° 16’ 30”S, 30° 26’ 00” W. 70 cm. tow-net, horizontal, 124 m.: 1 Lam-
panyctus guentheri, 45 mm. 62 m.: 2 L. guentheri, 32-44 mm.
St. 245. 10. vi. 27. 38° 20’ 00” S, 22°18’00” W. 4} m. net, horizontal, 1800-2000 m.: 9 Cyclo-
thone microdon, 26-54 mm.
St. 256. 23. vi. 27. 35° 14/00" S, 6° 49’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 850-1100 (-o) m.: 70 Cyclo-
thone microdon, 14-54 mm.; 2 Sternoptyx diaphana, 30-60 mm.
St. 257. 24. vi. 27. 35° 01’ 00" S, 10° 18’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 1 Argyropelecus
hemigymnus, 32 mm. ; 3 Lampanyctus alatus, 69-73 mm.
St. 258. 25. vi. 27. 35° 03’ 30” S, 13° 55’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 320-450 m.: 1 Argyropelecus
hemigymnus, 30 mm.
St. 267. 23. vil. 27. 24° 31’ 00” S, 12° 15’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 450-550 (-o) m.: 1 Argyro-
pelecus hemigymnus, 22 mm.
St. 268. 25. vii.27. 18°37’ 00"S, 10° 46’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 100-150 (-o) m.: 1 Lam-
panyctus guentheri, 43 mm.
St. 269. 26. vii. 27. 15°55’ 00"S, 10°35’00” E. 44m. net, horizontal, 600-700 (—o) m.: 4
Sternoptyx diaphana, 15-43 mm.; 14 Stomias colubrinus, go-265 mm.; 9 Lampanyctus sp., 70-
103 mm.
St. 270. 27. vil.27. 13°58’ 30”S, 11° 43’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 200 (-o) m.: 2 Stomias
colubrinus, 63-118 mm. 70 cm. tow-net, oblique, 126 (-o) m.: 1 S. colubrinus, 68 mm. 1m. tow-
net, oblique, 125 (—o) m.: 1 S. colubrinus, 55 mm.; 1 Lampanyctus townsendi, 60 mm.
266 . DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 276. 5. vill. 27. 5°54’ 00” S, 11° 19’ 00” E. 1m. tow-net, oblique, 110 (-o) m.: 3 Stomias
colubrinus, 130-150 mm.
St. 281. 12. vili. 27. 00° 46’ 00" 5, 5° 49’ 15” E. Young-fish trawl, 850-950 (—o) m.: 12 Sternoptyx
diaphana, 6-25 mm.; 1 Lampanyctus guentheri, 81 mm.
St. 282. 12. vill. 27. 1° 11’ 00”S, 5° 38’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 300 (-o) m.: 1 Stomias colu-
brinus, go mm.
St. 284. 15. viii. 27. 2° 13’ 00"S,1° 52’ 00” E. 1 m.tow-net, oblique, 71 (-o) m.: 3 Lampanyctus
guentheri, 40-69 mm.; 4 L. alatus, 19-42 mm.
St. 285. 16. vili. 27. 2° 43’ 30” S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-o) m.: 2
Sternoptyx diaphana, 21-22 mm.; 2 Myctophum laternatum, 14-20 mm.; 1 Lampanyctus townsendi,
66 mm.; 10 L. alatus, 18-48 mm.
St. 286. 17. vili. 27. 3° 06’ 30”S, 3° 53’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 125 (-o) m.: 1 Lampanyctus
townsendi, 48 mm.; 4 L. guentheri, 23-62 mm. 70 cm. tow-net, oblique, 102 (—o) m.: 4 L. guentheri,
42-61 mm. I m. tow-net, oblique, 102 (-o) m.: 4 L. alatus, 26-55 mm.
St. 287. 19. vill. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (-o) m.: 11 Stern-
optyx diaphana, 6-23 mm.; 1 Lampanyctus townsendi, 32 mm. 44m. net, horizontal, 800-1000
(-o) m.: 1 Myctophum laternatum, 19 mm.
St. 288. 21. viii. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 1 Sternoptyx
diaphana, 8 mm.; 4 Lampanyctus guenther’, 34-54 mm.; 5 L. alatus, 20-37 mm. 1 m. tow-net,
oblique, 73 (-o) m.: 1 Myctophum laternatum, 16 mm.; 1 Lampanyctus townsendi, 55 mm.;
1 L. guentheri, 52mm. 70 cm. tow-net, oblique, 100 (-o) m.: 1 L. guentheri, 46 mm.; 2 L. alatus,
21-41 mm.
St. 289. 23. vili. 27. 3° 04’ 45” N, 16° 52’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 125-225 (-o) m.: 1 Mycto-
phum laternatum, 21 mm.; 3 Lampanyctus alatus, 23-45 mm. 1 m. tow-net, oblique, 132 (-0) m.:
2, L. guentheri, 21-32 mm.
St. 293. 24. vili.27. 4° 18’15” N, 16°51’ 00” W. 1m. tow-net, oblique, 100-120 (-0) m.: 2
Lampanyctus guentheri, 32-60 mm.
St. 294. 25. vili. 27. 4° 3315” N, 16° 52’ 45” W. Young-fish trawl, 100-150 (—-o) m.: 2 Lam-
panyctus townsendi, 20-27 mm.; 1 L. alatus, 43 mm.
St. 295. 25. vili. 27. 5°30’ 30” N, 17° 45’00” W. Young-fish trawl, 2500-2700 (-o) m.: 2
Sternoptyx diaphana, 16-21 mm.
St. 296. 26. vill. 27. 8° 12’ 00” N, 18° 49’ 00” W. 1m. tow-net, oblique, 120 (-o)m.: 1 Stomias
colubrinus, 112 mm.; 1 Lampanyctus guentheri, 23 mm.; 3 L. alatus, 23-45 mm. 70 cm. tow-net,
oblique, 120 (-o) m.: 2 Myctophum laternatum, 20-21 mm.; 1 Lampanyctus townsendi, 20 mm. ;
3 L. alatus, 21-39 mm.
St. 297. 28. vill. 27. 12°08’ 00” N, 20° 53’30” W. 7ocm. tow-net, oblique, 163 (-o) m.:
1 Stomias colubrinus, 110 mm.; 1 Lampanyctus alatus, 40 mm. 1 m. tow-net, oblique, 163 m.:
1 L. townsendi, 17 mm.; 3 L. alatus, 30-34 mm. Young-fish trawl, 200-300 (-o) m.: 1 L. guen-
thert, 37 mm.
16. x. 25. 29° 27’ N, 15°07’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 5 Sternoptyx diaphana,
9-17 mm.
28. x. 25. 13225’ N, 18° 22’ W. 44 m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 4 Sternoptyx diaphana,
15-39 mm.; 8 Stomias colubrinus, 60-170 mm.; 1 Lampanyctus alatus, 42 mm.; 3 Lampanyctus sp.,
58-115 mm.
IT. x1. 25. 6° 55’N, 15°54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (—o) m.: 12 Sternoptyx diaphana,
15-24 mm.
ALEPOCEPHALIDAE 267
SMO EEMATIC ACCOUNT
Order ISOSPONDYLI
Family ALEPOCEPHALIDAE
The fifteen genera of this family may be conveniently grouped as follows:
I. Origin of pelvic fins at or about the middle of the length (without caudal) ; eyes normal; pectoral
fins comparatively short.
A. Snout short or of moderate length.
1. Body with scales.
a. Pelvic fins present.
* Maxillaries toothless. Alepocephalus (incl. Conocara), Asquamiceps, Ericara,
Leptochilichthys, Xenognathus
** Maxillaries with teeth. Bajacalifornia, Bathytroctes (incl. Talismania),
Narcetes
b. Pelvic fins absent. Platytroctes
2. Scales absent, sometimes replaced by small nodules.
a. Maxillary not extending beyond eye; no fold in front of dorsal fin.
* Dorsal and anal fins sub-equal, well separated from caudal, which is well developed ;
eyes of moderate size. Xenodermichthys, Rouleina
** Dorsal fin much shorter than anal, which is more than half the length of fish;
caudal peduncle and caudal fin very small; eyes very large. Leptoderma
b. Maxillary extending well beyond eye; a high median fold in front of the dorsal fin.
Anomalopterus
B. Snout long, tube-like, with a small mouth at its extremity ; scales minute, scarcely imbricated.
Aulastomatomorpha
II. Origin of pelvic fins well behind the middle of the length; eyes telescopic ; pectoral fins very long.
Dolichopteryx
Aleposomus, Gill, is asynonym of Xenodermichthys ; Mitchillina, Jordan and Evermann,
and Benthosphyraena, Cockerell, appear to be identical with Alepocephalus.
Asquamiceps velaris, Zugmayer.
Zugmayer, 1911, Bull. Inst. Océan. Monaco, 193, p. 2; 1911, Rés. Camp. Sci. Monaco, xxxv,
p- 10, pl. i, fig. 4.
St. 101. 14-15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 2580 m.:
I specimen, go mm.!
Depth of body 5 in the length, length of head 24. Diameter of eye a little less than
length of snout, which is 44 in that of head; interorbital width 85. Maxillary nearly
reaching middle of eye; no teeth in upper jaw; lower jaw with microscopical teeth.
Gill-membranes united as far back as a point well behind the eye; apparently 5 branchi-
ostegal rays; membranous expansion of operculum partly covering the pectoral fin.
Scales cycloid, irregularly arranged and partially embedded in the skin; about 65 scales
1 All the specimens included in this report are measured to the base of the caudal fin.
268 DISCOVERY REPORTS
in a longitudinal series. Dorsal 15; anal 15; both fins originating at about the same level.
Pectoral with 13 or 14 rays, broad-based, rounded, shorter than eye. Uniformly
blackish; fins pale.
Described from a single specimen, go mm. in length.
Hab. North and South Atlantic.
This genus seems to be well distinguished from Alepocephalus by the form of the
gill-membranes, the smaller number of branchiostegal rays, the nature of the dentition,
and the broad-based, rounded pectoral fin.
Bathytroctes (Bathytroctes) rostratus, Giinther, 1878. [PI. II, fig. 3.]
Bathytroctes rostratus, Holt and Byrne, 1908, Fisheries, Ireland, Sct. Invest. 1906, V, p. 45, pl. iv,
figs. 3-5.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00” S, 6° 31’ 00" E. 43 m. net, horizontal, 1000 (—o) m.: 2 specimens,
30-47 mm.
St. ror. 14-15.x. 26. 33°50’ to 34° 13S, 16°04’ to 15°49’ E. 43m. net, horizontal, 350—-
450 (-O) m.: 2 specimens, 30-40 mm.
I have identified these young examples with Bathytroctes rostratus, Giinther, after
some hesitation, as it is difficult to compare them accurately with the type, which is
considerably larger. They agree very
closely, however, with the small speci-
mens described by Holt and Byrne
under this name. All exhibit the pig-
mented ‘supraclavicular process”’,
and there is no sign of this diminishing
in size in the largest of the specimens
collected by the ‘Discovery’. I count
1g to 20 rays in the dorsal fin, and 14
to 16 in the anal. No mention is made
by Holt and Byrne of the small oval
luminous organs, which in the pre-
served specimens appear as white
spots. They are regularly arranged,
and seem to disappear altogether in
the adult fish. A coloured sketch of the Fig. 1. Outline drawings of three young specimens of
ventral surface of one of the specimens Bathytroctes (Bathytroctes) rostratus, respectively 30, 40 and
from St.86, made by MrE.R.Gunther 47 ™m. in length. (x 13.) A portion of the ventral surface
(PI. I, fig. 3), Eharorthe luminous of the largest specimen is included to illustrate the arrange-
sigand fedltin Sainte the EeGh este ment of some of the principal luminous organs.
although some of those which had been damaged appeared white. Their arrangement
has been well described by Brauer (‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 17, pl. xiv, figs. 2-3),
and is shown in the accompanying figures. Between the pelvic fins is a deeply pigmented
globular body, with a luminous spot on its anterior and posterior surfaces.
ALEPOCEPHALIDAE 269
Bathytroctes (Bathytroctes) sp.
St. 85. 23. vi. 26. 33°07’ 40” S, 4° 30’ 20” E. 4} m. net, 2000 (-0) m.: 1 specimen, 56 mm.
This young specimen agrees very closely with those described above, but the anal fin
originates below the anterior part of the dorsal. The ‘
present, but the luminous organs are much less developed.
‘supraclavicular process” is
Bathytroctes (Talismania) homopterus, Vaillant.
Bathytroctes homopterus, Vaillant, 1888, Expéd. Sci. ‘ Travailleur’ et ‘ Talisman’, Poissons, p. 153;
pl. xii, fig. 1.
Bathytroctes (Talismania) homopterus, Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 43.
St. 269. 26. vii. 27. 15°55’00"S, 10°35’00”E. 44m. net, horizontal, 600-700 (-o) m.: 2
specimens, 83-100 mm.
28. x. 25. 13° 25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 4} m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 47 mm.
Depth of body 41 in the length, length of head a little more than 3. Snout a little
shorter than eye, diameter of which is about 3} in length of head and equal to interorbital
width. Upper part of operculum with a series of diverging ridges ending in feeble
TSO
ce
SWZ:
aa
rsa 2
Si
By
5 —
Fig. 2. Bathytroctes (Talismania) homopterus. (x 1.)
pointed projections. A pointed membranous process above the clavicle. Praemaxillary
somewhat protruding, bearing two or three forwardly directed teeth anteriorly, of which
the inner are longest, followed by a series of smaller conical teeth; the anterior teeth are
more prominent in the young; maxillary toothed, extending to below middle of eye or
a little beyond. About 20 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch. 67~75 scales in a
longitudinal series. Dorsal 18-20; origin a little nearer posterior edge of operculum
than base of caudal. Anal 16-18; origin slightly behind that of dorsal. Caudal peduncle
13 times as long as deep.
Described from three specimens, 47 to 100 mm. in length.
Hab. North Atlantic.
Professor L. Roule has kindly compared one of these specimens with the type of the
species preserved in the Paris Museum, and writes as follows: “ Quant a la spécification,
elle penche plutét, 4 mon avis, aprés examen, du cété B. homoptera Vaillant. Pourtant,
l’exemplaire étant unique, et de petite taille, il m’est malaisé d’opiner avec streté”. It is
of interest to note that the ‘“‘supraclavicular process” is still present in the largest
example.
DItiii 2
270 DISCOVERY REPORTS
In his monograph of the marine fishes of South Africa (1925, Ann. S. Afric. Mus.
XXI, p. 122), Barnard mentions a specimen of Bathytroctes in the British Museum collec-
tion from Cape Point, registered as B. homopterus, Vaillant, and presumably collected
by the S.S. ‘Pieter Faure’. I have examined this fish, which is not a Bathytroctes but an
Alepocephalus. It appears to belong to a species new to science, and may, therefore, be
described here.
Alepocephalus barnardi, n.sp.
Bathytroctes rostratus (non Giinther), Barnard, 1925, Ann. S. Afric. Mus. XX1, p. 122.
Depth of body 6 in the length, length of head 3. Snout about as long as eye, diameter
of which is 34 in length of head; interorbital width 55. Maxillary extending nearly to
below middle of eye; lower jaw included. About 16 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior
arch. 50 (?) scales in a longitudinal series. Dorsal 18. Anal 18; origin below fifth dorsal
ray, more than twice as distant from end of snout as from base of caudal. Caudal
peduncle nearly 3 times as long as deep.
Described from a single specimen, 200 mm. in length.
Hab. Off Cape Point, South Africa; 700 fms.
This species appears to be close to A. blanfordi, Alcock, the type of which has been
lent to me for examination by the Indian Museum. It differs in having a more slender
body, rather longer snout, wider interorbital region, and more slender caudal peduncle.
It may be distinguished from A. productus, Goode and Bean, by the narrower body,
longer snout and larger orbit, and longer caudal peduncle; and from A. umbriceps,
Jordan and Thompson, by the longer snout and larger eye.
Xenodermichthys socialis, Vaillant.
Vaillant, 1888, Expéd. Sci. ‘ Travailleur’ et ‘ Talisman’, Poissons, p. 162, pl. xiii, fig. 1; Collett,
1896, Rés. Camp. Sct. Monaco, x, p. 138; Koehler, 1896, Ann. Univ. Lyon, 11, p. 520, pl. xxvii,
fig. 11; Holt and Byrne, 1908, Fisheries, Ireland, Sci. Invest. 1906, V, p. 48, pl. v, fig. 2; Roule,
1915, Bull. Mus. Paris, No. 2, p. 42; 1919, Rés. Camp. Sci. Monaco, wu, p. 10, pl. i, fig. 5;
Barnard, 1925, Ann. S. Afric. Mus. xx, p. 123.
Aleposomus socialis, Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 48, fig. 58.
Aleposomus cyaneus, Zugmayer, 1914, Bull. Inst. Océan. Monaco, 288, p. 1.
St. 276. 5. viili.27. 5°54’ 00"S, 11°19’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 150 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
100 mm.
X. copei, Gill, from the Western Atlantic, is perhaps identical with this species, but
appears to have a somewhat larger head and a larger eye. X. nodulosus, Giinther, from
Japan, is easily distinguished by the longer and slenderer body, shorter head, smaller
eye, and by the gill-opening only extending to a little above the base of the
pectoral.
Rouleina (Aleposomus, Roule nec Gill) is close to Xenodermichthys, but differs in the
large mouth with stronger teeth, which are developed on the maxillary as well as on the
ALEPOCEPHALIDAE 271
praemaxillary and mandible, and in the smaller number of dorsal and anal rays—14
to 21 instead of 27 to 30. There are five species, viz: R. guentheri (Alcock, 1892),
R. squamilaterus (Alcock, 1898), R. lividus (Brauer, 1906), R. nudus (Brauer, 1906),
and R. watasi (Tanaka, 1909).
Dolichopteryx longipes (Vaillant).
Aulostoma (?) longipes, Vaillant, 1888, Expéd. Sci. ‘ Travailleur’ et ‘ Talisman’, Poissons, p. 340,
pl. xxvii, fig. 4.
Dolichopteryx anascopa, Brauer, 1902, Sitz. Ges. Beford. Ges. Naturwiss. Marburg, 1901, No. 8,
p. 127; 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 24, fig. 4.
St. ror. 14-15.x. 26. 33°50’ to 34° 13'S, 16°04’ to 15° 49’ E. 44m. net, horizontal, 350-
400 (—0) m.: I specimen, 120 mm.
St. 295. 25. vili. 27. 5° 30’ 30” N, 17° 45’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 2500-2700 m.: I specimen,
100 mm.
Hab. North and South Atlantic.
Vaillant’s specimen, taken off the coast of Morocco at a depth of 1163 m., was poorly
preserved and only 45 mm. in total length. It agrees very closely with that described
by Brauer, but there are said to be only 5 dorsal, 9 anal, and 6 pelvic rays, and the
Fig. 3. Dolichopteryx longipes. (x 1.)
pectoral fin is shown in the figure as being comparatively short; further, the eye is not
depicted as telescopic. Brauer’s example, also somewhat damaged, was nearly 35 mm.
in length, and was taken in the Indian Ocean (west of the Cocos Islands) at a depth of
2400m. ‘The two specimens obtained by the ‘Discovery’ are almost certainly the
adults of the same species, but are both very poorly preserved. They differ from the
smaller specimens in having a more slender body, smaller head, and the pelvic fins
inserted much further back. If, as I believe, all the specimens represent a single species,
there is a marked migration of the pelvic fins during growth. In Brauer’s example
(35 mm.) their origin is about 1? times as distant from end of snout as from base of
caudal; in Vaillant’s specimen (45 mm.) it is about twice as far; in the smaller of the
‘Discovery’ examples (100 mm.) it is 22, and in the larger (120 mm.) 33. A brief
description of these two specimens follows.
Depth of body about 12 in the length, length of head about 4}. Minute teeth are
present, at least in the upper jaw. Pseudobranchiae developed. Dorsal 15 (?); last
ray above middle of anal. Anal 12. Pectoral 14; elongate, the third ray broader than the
2-2
272 j DISCOVERY REPORTS
remainder. Pelvic 12; origin 22 to 34 times as distant from end of snout as from base
of caudal. Pectoral and pelvic fins with a muscular basal lobe.
In one of the above-mentioned specimens I have been able to see enough of the skull
to convince me that Brauer was correct in placing this genus in the family Alepoce-
phalidae. The structure of the jaws—the maxillary, two supplemental bones, ete.—
appears to be similar to that found in Aulastomatomorpha, Alcock, as described by
Henning (1906, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (7), XVul, p. 307, fig.).
Family ARGENTINIDAE
Revision of the Genus Bathylagus
I have been able to dissect a poorly preserved example of this genus, but as it has been
in formalin the skeletal characters are difficult to make out. I cannot be certain whether
there is a mesocoracoid, but the parapophyses seem to be ventral rather than lateral.
Regan (1913, Trans. R. Soc. Edinburgh, xix (11), pp. 231, 289) has placed this genus in
the family Argentinidae as defined by him, and I am convinced that it belongs here
rather than to the Microstomidae, with which it is generally associated.
Bathymacrops, Gilchrist, 1922, is easily distinguished by the position of the dorsal
fin, which is in advance of the pelvics, and by the small anal fin. Microstoma oblitum,
Facciola, 1887, from the Mediterranean, may prove to belong to this family. The anal
fin has seven to nine rays, and the origin of the pelvics is immediately behind the dorsal.
The body is rather compressed, but in other characters, and especially in the dentition,
it bears a close resemblance to Microstoma.
Synopsis of the Species of Bathylagus
I. Origin of dorsal nearer to base of caudal than to end of snout.
A. Dorsal with 12 rays; anal with 13 rays; occipital region normal. I. argyrogaster, N.Sp.
B. Dorsal with 8 rays; anal with at least 24 rays; occipital region swollen, with a median keel.
2. milleri, Jordan and Evermann, 1898
II. Origin of dorsal nearer to end of snout than to base of caudal.
A. Anal with 13 rays; depth of body 44 in length. 3. atlanticus, Giinther, 1878
B. Anal with 16 to 25 rays; depth of body 5 to 7} in length.
1. Diameter of eye 22 in head, which is 5} to 54 in length of fish. 4. microcephalus, n.sp.
2. Diameter of eye 2 to 2} (rarely 23) in head, which is 4 to 43 in length of fish.
a. Origin of anal 22 to 3} times as distant from end of snout as from base of caudal;
base of fin 4} to nearly 6 in length of fish.
* Depth of body 6 to 7} in length; anal with 18 to 21 rays.
+ Depth of body 6 to 6} in length, length of head 4§ to 44; interocular width 2}
to 3 in head; origin of dorsal nearer to adipose fin than to end of snout.
5. glaciahs, Regan, 1913
++ Depth of body 7 to 74 in length, length of head 4} to 42; interocular width 4
or more in head; origin of dorsal equidistant from end of snout and adipose fin.
6. gracilis, Lonnberg, 1905
ARGENTINIDAE
Nv
~I
WwW
** Depth of body 5 to 53 in length; anal usually with 19 to 25 rays.
+ Head 44 to 42 in length of fish; eye 2} to 24 in head, equal to or less than post-
orbital part of head; anal with 22 to 25 rays, length of base 4} to 54 in that of
fish. 7. antarcticus, Giinther, 1878
tt Head 43 to 43 in length of fish; eye a little more than 2 in head, greater than
postorbital part of head; anal with about 19 rays, length of base 5? to 53 in that
of fish. 8. benedicti, Goode and Bean, 1895
ttt Head 4 to 4,4, in length of head; eye 2} to 24 in head; anal with (16) 19 rays.
9. pacificus, Gilbert, 1890
b. Origin of anal 34 to 32 times as distant from end of snout as from base of caudal;
base of fin 6} to 62 in length of fish. 10. euryops, Goode and Bean, 1895
Bathylagus argyrogaster, n.sp.
St. 268. 25. vii. 27. 18° 37’ 00” S, 10° 46’ 00” E. 1 m. tow-net, oblique, 73 (-o) m.: I specimen,
62mm. Young-fish trawl, too—150 (—o) m.: 3 specimens, 40-81 mm.
St. 269. 26. vii. 27. 15°55’ 00” S, 10°35’ 00” E. 44m. net, horizontal, 600~700 (-0) m.: 2
specimens, 68-99 mm.
St. 276. 5. vili.27. 5° 54’ 00” S, 11° 19’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 150 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 34 mm.
St. 284. 15. vili. 27. 2° 13’00”S, 1°52’ 00" E. 1 m. tow-net, oblique, 71 (-o) m.: I specimen,
75 mm.
St. 285. 16. viii. 27. 2° 43’ 30” S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 44 m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-0) m.: 5
specimens, 23-115 mm.
St. 288. 21. viii. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
30 mm.
28. x. 25. 13° 25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 4} m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 46 mm.
Depth of body 43 to 54 in the length, length of head 3 to 44. Diameter of eye 23
to 2? in length of head, interocular width about 3, interorbital width about 5. Dorsal
. - Z
ae
\ ACEC E RIESE SAS OC SEER SSS ESE Se oe te Nee ee ———
e oO) S ~
ee Ss < :
Z ==
S eS QS SS
Fig. 4. Bathylagus argyrogaster. Holotype. ( 1.)
12; origin equidistant from base of caudal and anterior part or middle of eye. Anal
14-15 (? 16); origin about equidistant from base of caudal and insertion of pelvic or
nearer the latter, 3} to 4 times as distant from end of snout as from base of caudal;
length of base 7 to nearly 8 times in that of fish. Pelvics 8-rayed, inserted below middle
of dorsal. About 39 scales in a longitudinal series. Brownish above, silvery below;
operculum silvery black.
Described from several specimens, up to 115 mm. in length. The largest example
from St. 285 is selected as the holotype.
274 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Hab. North and South Atlantic.
This species differs from all the others in its lighter coloration, and was actually taken
in shallower water than any of the remaining specimens of Bathylagus collected by the
‘Discovery’. It may be distinguished from all except B. milleri by the more posterior
insertion of the dorsal fin.
Bathylagus milleri, Jordan and Evermann.
Jordan and Evermann, 1898, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. x_vui (3), p. 2825.
Hab. Cortez Banks, off San Diego, California; 776 fathoms.
Known only from the much mutilated type, 155 mm. in length.
Bathylagus atlanticus, Giinther.
Giinther, 1878, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), 1, p. 248; 1887, Deep-sea Fish. ‘Challenger’, p. 219.
? Bathylagus atlanticus, Holt and Byrne, 1906, Fisheries, Ireland, Sci. Invest. 1905, 1, p. 6, pl. 1,
figs. 3-4.
Depth of body 44 in the length, length of head a little more than 4. Diameter of eye
21 in length of head, interocular width 34, interorbital width 53. Dorsal g; origin
nearer to end of snout than base of caudal. Anal 13; origin nearer to base of caudal than
insertion of pelvic, 32 times as distant from end of snout as from base of caudal; length
of base 72 in that of fish. Pelvics 8-rayed, inserted below last ray of dorsal. About 36
scales in a longitudinal series.
Described from a single specimen, 160 mm. in length, type of the species.
Hab. Atlantic.
The specimens described by Holt and Byrne, the largest of which is 54 mm. in
length, were taken off the coast of County Mayo, Western Ireland. I have been unable
to re-examine these examples, but, through the courtesy of Mr G. P. Farran of the
Department of Fisheries, Dublin, I have had the opportunity of studying several more
small specimens taken off south-west Ireland subsequent to the publication of Holt and
Byrne’s paper. Nearly all these are too young to be identified with any degree of cer-
tainty, but one, which is 50 mm. in length, may be the young of this species or of B.
benedicti. A brief description of this fish follows:
Depth of body 54 in the length, length of head nearly 4. Diameter of eye about twice
in length of head, interocular width 3. Dorsal 10. Anal 16 (or 17); origin about equi-
distant from base of caudal and insertion of pelvic, 31 times as distant from end of
snout as from base of caudal; length of base 6 in that of fish.
One specimen, 50mm., 50° 57’ N, 11° 38’ W. Mesoplankton trawl at about 700
fathoms.
Bathylagus microcephalus, n.sp.
St. 101. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 43 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.:
I specimen, 129 mm. 44m. net, horizontal, 350-400 m.: 1 specimen, 172 mm. Holotype.
St. 239. 2. vi. 27. 46° 56’ 00” S, 46° 03’ 00” W. 43 m. net, horizontal, 1050-1350 m.: 4
specimens, 38-84 mm.?
ARGENTINIDAE 275
Depth of body 6 to 6} in the length, length of head 5} to 54. Diameter of eye 22 in
length of head, interocular width nearly 3, interorbital width 54. Dorsal 10—11; origin
much nearer to end of snout than base of caudal, equidistant from former and adipose
fin. Anal 20-22; origin about equidistant from base of caudal and insertion of pelvic,
2; to 3} times as distant from end of snout as from base of caudal; length of base 5 to
53 in that of fish. Pelvics 1o-rayed, inserted below middle or posterior part of dorsal.
About 42 scales in a longitudinal series.
Described from two specimens, 129 and 172 mm. in length, of which the larger is
selected as the holotype.
Fig. 5. Bathylagus microcephalus. Holotype. (x 3.)
Hab. South Atlantic.
This species is close to B. antarcticus, differing chiefly in the somewhat slenderer
body, shorter head, smaller eye and rather longer snout, and the more anterior position
of the dorsal fin.
Bathylagus glacialis, Regan.
Bathylagus antarcticus (part), Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 13, fig. 2.
Bathylagus glacialis (part), Regan, 1913, Trans. R. Soc. Edinb. xutx (ii), p. 231, pl. 1x, fig. 2.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00” S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 43m. net, horizontal, 1000 (-o) m.: 3 specimens,
24-34 mm.
St. 104. 31. x. 26. 41° 33’ 30”S, 17° 58’00” W. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, 112 m.:1 specimen, 45 mm.
St. 239. 2. vi.27. 46° 56’00"S, 46°03’ 00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 1050-1350 (—o) m.: 2
specimens, 102-118 mm,
Depth of body 6 to 6} in the length, length of head 4} to 44. Diameter of eye 2}
to 2} in length of head, interocular width 2? to 3, interorbital width about 6. Dorsal 10;
origin nearer to end of snout than base of caudal, but nearer to adipose fin than end of
snout. Anal 18-21; origin equidistant from base of caudal and insertion of pelvic or a
little nearer the latter, 2? to 3} times as distant from end of snout as from base of caudal ;
length of base nearly 6 times in that of fish. Pelvics 8- or g-rayed, inserted below
middle of dorsal. 36 to 4o scales in a longitudinal series.
Described from four specimens, 80 to 135 mm. in length, including the types of the
species.!
1 Of the five type-specimens of B. glacialis two are preserved in the British Museum collection, of which
one proves to belong to B. euryops. The remainder are in the Royal Scottish Museum at Edinburgh: through
the kindness of Dr J. Ritchie I have been able to examine these examples, and find them all identical with
the type of glacialis in this museum.
276 ~ DISCOVERY REPORTS
Hab. North and South Atlantic; Antarctic.
In addition to the material collected by the ‘Discovery’ and that in the British
Museum, I have examined another specimen, 135 mm. in length, from off 'Tearaght
Rock, Co. Kerry, 8.W. Ireland, at a depth of 720 to 695 fathoms, kindly lent to me by
the National Museum of Ireland, Dublin.
Apart from its more slender form, somewhat larger head and shorter anal fin, this
species is very close to B. antarcticus.
Bathylagus gracilis, Lonnberg.
Lénnberg, 1905, Wiss. Ergebn. Schwed. Siidpolar-Exped. v (6), p. 68.
St. 72. 1. vi. 26. 41° 43’ 20" S, 42° 20’ 40” W. 44 m. net, horizontal, 2000 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
65 mm.? -
St. 76. 5: vi. 26. 39° 50° 30” S, 36° 23’ 00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 1500 (-o) m.: 2
specimens, 50-76 mm.
St. 151. 16. 1. 27. 53° 25° 00" 'S, 35° 15’ 00" W. 44m. net, ‘horizontal, ro2z5—12750m--05
specimens, 30-85 mm.
St. WS 303. 6.x. 28. 54°51’ 24”S, 31° 20°12” W. 7ocm. tow-net, vertical, 1000-750 m.:
I specimen, 50 mm.1 =
St. WS 307. 7.x. 28. 54°19’ 30”S, 30° 31’ 30” W. 7ocm. tow-net, vertical, 1000-780 m.:
I specimen, 60 mm.
Closely related to B. glacialis, but depth of body 7 to 7} in the length, length of head
44 to 42. Diameter of eye about twice in length of head, interocular width about 4,
interorbital width 63 to 7}. Interorbital space deeply concave. Dorsal 10; origin equi-
distant from end of snout and adipose fin. Anal 19-20; origin 23 to 3 times as distant
from end of snout as from base of caudal; length of base about 5 times in that of fish.
40 to 44 scales in a longitudinal series.
Described from four specimens, 50 to 85 mm. in length.
Hab. South Atlantic; Antarctic.
Bathylagus antarcticus, Giinther.
Giinther, 1878, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), 1, p. 248; 1887, Deep-Sea Fish. ‘Challenger’, p. 220;
Barnard, 1925, Ann. S. Afric. Mus. xx, p. 129.
? Bathylagus antarcticus (part), Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 12.
St. 71. 30. v.26. 43° 20’00"S, 46° 02’00” W. Young-fish trawl, 2000 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
142 mm.
St. 101. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° og’ to 15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.: 1
specimen, 200 mm. 44m. net, horizontal, 350-400 m.: 3 specimens, 35-65 mm.
St. 151. 16.1. 27. 53° 25’ 00” S, 35° 15’ 00” W. 43 m. net, horizontal, 1025-1275 m.: 2
specimens, 105-128 mm.
‘A note on the label states that the specimens obtained by the ‘William Scoresby’ were alive
and healthy when brought to the surface in the net, and that one of them lived for just under 12 hours
after capture.
ARGENTINIDAE 277
Depth of body 5} to 52 in the length, length of head 44 to 42. Diameter of eye 2!
to 24 in length of head, equal to or less than postorbital part of head; interocular width
3 to 34, interorbital width 6} to 7. Dorsal g—11; origin nearer to end of snout than base
of caudal. Anal (21) 22~25; origin nearer insertion of pelvic than base of caudal, 22 to
34 times as distant from end of snout as from base of caudal; length of base 44 to 54
in that of fish. Pelvics 9- or 10-rayed, inserted below middle or posterior part of dorsal.
39-44 scales in a longitudinal series.
Described from eight specimens, 35 to 200 mm. in length, including the type of the
species (105 mm.).
Bathylagus benedicti, Goode and Bean.
Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 55, fig. 64; Jordan and Evermann, 1896, Bull. U.S.
Nat. Mus. Xvi (1), p. 529.
? Bathylagus elongatus, Roule, 1916, Bull. Inst. Océan. Monaco, 320, p. 8; 1919, Rés. Camp. Sci.
Monaco, Lu, p. 22, pl. i, fig. 2.
St. 72. 1. vi. 26. 41° 43’ 20” S, 42° 20’ yo” W. 44 m. net, horizontal, 2000 (-0) m.: 3 specimens,
120-135 mm.
St. 151. 16.1.27. 53° 25/00" S, 35° 15’ 00” W. 44 m. net, horizontal, 1025-1275 m.: 1 specimen,
115 mim.
Very close to the preceding species. Depth 5 to 52 in the length, length of head
4 to 43. Diameter of eye a little more than 2 in head, greater than postorbital part of
head; interocular width 2% to nearly 3, interorbital width 5? to 6. Dorsal 9 or 10. Anal
about 19; origin 3 to 34 times as distant from end of snout as from base of caudal;
length of base 52 to 53 in that of fish.
Described from four specimens, 115 to 135 mm. in length.
Hab. North and South Atlantic.
Bathylagus pacificus, Gilbert.
Gilbert, 1890, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. x1, p. 55; Jordan and Evermann, 1896, Bull. U.S. Nat.
Mus. xtvit (1), p. 530; Gilbert, 1915, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. x.viui, p. 312.
Bathylagus borealis, Gilbert, 1896, Rep. U.S. Fish. Comm. (1893), p. 402; Jordan and Evermann,
1898, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. xvii (3), p. 2824.
Hab. Pacific coast of North America from the Bering Sea to southern California.
Bathylagus euryops, Goode and Bean.
Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean Ichth. p. 55, fig. 63; Jordan and Evermann, 1896, Bull. U.S.
Nat. Mus. Xtvit (1), p. 529.
Bathylagus euryops latifrons, Lonnberg, 1905, Wiss. Ergebn. Schwed. Siidpolar-Exped. v (6), p. 67.
? Bathylagus atlanticus, Holt and Byrne, 1906, Fisheries, Ireland, Sct. Invest. 1905, 1, p. 6, pl. 1,
figs. 3-4.
? Bathylagus euryops, Holt and Byrne, 1913, zbid. 1912, 1, p. 24, fig. 10.
St. 101. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 43 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.: 1
specimen, 185 mm. 4} m. net, horizontal, 1410-1310 m.: I specimen, 152 mm.
DITili 3
278 _ DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 169. 22. ii. 27. 60° 48’ 50” S, 51° 00’ 20” W. Young-fish trawl, 1000-1100 m.: 1 specimen,
69 mm.?
St. 245. 10. vi. 27. 38°20’ 00" S, 22° 18’00” W. 43 m. net, horizontal, 1800-2000 m.: 1 specimen,
127 mm.
Depth of body 54 to 64 in the length, length of head 4} to 43. Diameter of eye 23
to 22 in length of head, interocular width 3} to 33, interorbital width about 6. Dorsal
g-10; origin a little nearer to end of snout than base of caudal. Anal 16-18; origin
nearer base of caudal than insertion of pelvic, 3} to 32 times as distant from end of
snout as from base of caudal; length of base 6} to 63 in that of fish. Pelvics 8- or g-rayed,
inserted below middle or posterior part of dorsal. 37 to 41 scales in a longitudinal series.
Described from five specimens, 69 to 185mm. in length. In addition to the
Discovery material I have examined one other specimen, 152 mm. in length, from
51° 35’ N, 11° 55’ W, at a depth of 720 fathoms, lent to me by the National Museum
of Ireland.
Hab. North and South Atlantic.
Family GONOSTOMATIDAE
MONOGRAPH OF THE FAMILY
The Gonostomatidae represent the most primitive family of the sub-order Stomi-
atoidea, which is distinguished from the Clupeoidea by the presence of photophores.
According to Regan,! Photichthys, the most primitive genus, is very similar to E/ops in
skeletal characters. The family may be defined as follows :—
Elongate fishes, with or without scales ; mouth moderate or rather large; suspensortum
generally directed more or less obliquely backwards. No special postocular luminous
organ, and no barbel. Gill-arches with gill-rakers. Dorsal fin in advance of or above
anterior part of anal, generally followed by an adipose fin; pectorals low, pelvics nearly
in the middle of the length. Skull elongate, with the parasphenoid nearly straight;
parietals well developed, meeting or approaching each other above supraoccipital ;
epiotics separated by supraoccipital; basisphenoid and alisphenoids present; no orbito-
sphenoid. Praemaxillary without anterior expansion; maxillary with two supplemental
bones. Post-temporal forked; mesocoracoid present.
Fourteen genera, all of which are oceanic in habitat.
Synopsis of the Genera
I. Serial photophores on body arranged in continuous longitudinal rows; pseudobranchiae absent
or very feebly developed. (Gonostomatinae)
A. A single series of photophores on each side of abdomen; origin of dorsal fin nearly opposite
to that of anal.
1. Origin of dorsal fin a little behind that of anal; no adipose fin; dorsal with 20 rays, anal
with 29 rays. 1. Bonapartia
2. Origin of dorsal fin a little in front of that of anal; adipose fin present; dorsal with 16
rays, anal with 23-26 rays. 2. Margrethia
1 1923, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (9), X1, p. 613.
GONOSTOMATIDAE 279
B. Two series of photophores on each side of abdomen.
1. Interorbital region rather wide; eyes normal; mouth large; teeth well developed; origin
of dorsal behind pelvics.
a. No additional serial photophores on sides of body.
* Origin of dorsal fin opposite to or behind that of anal.
} Praemaxillary and maxillary with a continuous series of long acute teeth, set at
fairly regular intervals, with much smaller teeth in the interspaces between them;
second suborbital more or less enlarged; eye of moderate size; anal with 22 to
31 rays. 3. Gonostoma
+f Praemaxillary with few teeth; maxillary with a series of small teeth, increasing
in size from before backwards, some of them at more or less irregular intervals
a little enlarged; second suborbital not enlarged; eye small; anal with 16 to 20
rays. 4. Cyclothone
* Origin of dorsal fin in advance of that of anal.
+ Origin of dorsal fin a little in advance of that of anal, which commences below
its middle or posterior part.
{ Anal with 23 to 32 rays. 5. Yarrella
tt Anal with 14 to 15 rays. 6. Vinciguerria
++ Origin of dorsal fin well in advance of that of anal, which commences at some
distance behind it. 7. Photichthys
b. An additional series of photophores along the lateral line, and sometimes one or
more rows of luminous spots between these and the two abdominal series; no
adipose fin.
* Body moderately elongate ; dorsal with 10 to 16 rays, origin nearer to base of caudal
than end of snout; anal with 26 to 39 rays. 8. Manducus
** Body very elongate; dorsal with 9 to 11 rays, origin a little nearer to end of snout
than base of caudal; anal with 55 to 63 rays. 9. Diplophos
*** Body moderately elongate; dorsal with ro rays, origin more than twice as near to
end of snout as to base of caudal; anal with 56 to 71 rays. 10. Triplophos
2. Interorbital region very narrow; eyes telescopic; mouth small, the lower jaw included;
teeth minute; origin of dorsal in front of pelvics, which are nearer to base of caudal than
end of snout. 11. Ichthyococcus
II. Photophores large and conspicuous; serial photophores on body more or less distinctly divided
into groups; pseudobranchiae present. (Maurolicinae)
A. Origin of dorsal fin in advance of that of anal.
1. Series of photophores between pelvic and origin of anal separated from that above
anterior part of anal fin; origin of dorsal nearer to base of caudal than end of snout; 25
to 27 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch. 12. Maurolicus
2. Series of photophores between pelvic and origin of anal continuous with that above
anterior part of anal fin; origin of dorsal nearer to end of snout than base of caudal;
about 16 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch. 13. Argyripnus
B. Origin of dorsal fin opposite to that of anal ; photophores above and behind the anal arranged
in four or five small groups, each group on a black background. 14. Valenciennellus
280 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Genus Bonapartia, Goode and Bean
Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 102.1
Zaphotias (Goode and Bean), Jordan and Evermann, 1898, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. xivu (3),
p. 2826.
Cleft of mouth wide. Both jaws with strong acute teeth set at more or less regular
intervals, and with much smaller teeth in the interspaces; a single series of minute
teeth on each palatine, somewhat enlarged anteriorly; a patch of similar teeth on the
pterygoid. Gill-openings very wide; gill-rakers long, comparatively few in number.
Scales large, cycloid. A single series of photophores on either side of the abdomen.
Dorsal 19; no adipose fin. Anal 29-30; origin a little in advance of that of dorsal;
anterior rays greatly prolonged. Pectoral and pelvic small.
A single species.
Bonapartia pedaliota, Goode and Bean.
Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 102, fig. 120; Jordan and Evermann, 1896, Bull. U.S.
Nat. Mus. xtvit (1), p. 580; Jespersen and Taning, 1919, Vid. Medd. Dansk nat. For. LXxx,
p- 221, pl. xvii, figs. 7-8.
Zaphotias pedaliotus, Jordan and Evermann, 1898, ibid. xLvu (3), p. 2826.
St. 282. 12. viii. 27. 1° 11’ 00” S, 5° 38’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 300 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 47 mm.
Depth of body 44 in the length, length of head 32. Snout about as long as eye,
diameter of which is nearly 4 in length of head and a little greater than interorbital
width. About 12 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch. About 40 scales in a longi-
0688 om
5 np COC SORERRS we
asses © Ee
oe
SS
Fig. 6. Bonapartia pedaliota. (x 2.)
tudinal series. Dorsal 19; origin equidistant from posterior margin of eye and base of
caudal. Anal 29-30; origin equidistant from end of snout and base of caudal; the
anterior rays greatly prolonged, the third and fourth about 4 length of fish, reaching
caudal when laid back; base of fin more than twice as long as that of dorsal. Pectoral
1 Goode and Bean’s Oceanic Ichthyology was first published as a Special Bulletin of the United States
National Museum, bearing the date 1895 on the title-page. It was subsequently published as Memoir X XII
of the Museum of C omparative Zoology (1896), and as a Smithsonian Contribution to Knowledge, xxx (1896).
Biittikofer’s note of the name Bonapartia (Aves) occurs in Notes Leyden Museum, xvu11, June, 1896, p. 58.
GONOSTOMATIDAE 281
with 16 rays. Pelvic 8(?); origin equidistant from end of snout and last anal rays. A pair of
photophores at the symphysis of the mandibles and about 12 between the branchiostegal
rays; a single photophore in front of the lower corner of the orbit and another in front
of the upper part of the operculum; a single series on the abdomen, consisting of 16 from
gill-opening to pelvic, 5 from pelvic to origin of anal, 17 from origin of anal to just behind
the last ray, and a group of 3 placed close together on lower edge of caudal peduncle.
Described from a single specimen, 47 mm. in length.
. Hab. Atlantic.
As has already been pointed out by Jespersen and Taning, these specimens from the
eastern Atlantic differ somewhat from those described by Goode and Bean from off the
coast of Florida. According to their original account the jaws are ‘‘armed with a single
series of not very numerous, acicular teeth, uniform in size....”’ Further, the pelvic
and anal fins are further forward in examples from the eastern Atlantic, the anterior
anal rays are more produced, and there are differences in the number and arrangement
of the photophores. ‘There are, however, certain discrepancies between the description
and the figure in Goode and Bean’s work, and I follow Jespersen and 'Taning in identi-
fying my specimens as B. pedaliota.
”
Genus Margrethia, Jespersen and ‘Taning
Jespersen and Taning, 1919, Vid. Medd. Dansk nat. For. LXx, p. 222.
Closely allied to Bonapartia, differing in the rather more anterior insertion of the
dorsal fin, and in the presence of an adipose fin.
A single species.
Margrethia obtusirostra, Jespersen and ‘Taning.
Jespersen and Taning, 1919, t.c. p. 222, pl. xvii, figs. 11-12.
5+ 7+ 3 gill-rakers on the first arch. Dorsal 16; origin nearer to posterior margin
of eye than base of caudal, a little in advance of that of anal. Anal 23-26; anterior rays
somewhat longer than those that follow. Pectoral with about 14 rays. Pelvic 8. Photo-
phores on head similar to Bonapartia; the single series on the abdomen consisting of
14-15 from gill-opening to pelvic, 4 from pelvic to origin of anal, 13 above the anal fin,
and a group of 4 placed close together on the lower edge of the caudal peduncle.
The original description was based on several postlarval and adolescent specimens,
6? to 19 mm. in length, all taken at a depth of about 150 mm.
Hab. Eastern Atlantic.
Genus Gonostoma, Rafinesque
Rafinesque, 1810, Ind. itt. Sicil. p. 64.
Sigmops, Gill, 1884, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. vi (1883), p. 256.
Neostoma, Vaillant, 1888, Expéd. Sc7. ‘ Travailleur’ et ‘ Talisman’, Poissons, p. 96.
Cyclothone (part), Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 99.
Cleft of mouth wide; both jaws with strong acute teeth set at more or less regular
intervals, and with much smaller teeth in the interspaces; a series of minute teeth on
282 - DISCOVERY REPORTS
each palatine, with two or three larger ones anteriorly; vomerine teeth present or absent ;
a patch of minute teeth on each pterygoid. Eye of moderate size. Second suborbital more
or less enlarged. No pseudobranchiae; gill-openings very wide; gill-rakers long, com-
paratively few in number. Scales present or absent. Serial photophores in two rows on
each side of the abdomen, or with the upper row irregularly arranged on the side of the
body. Dorsal 11-17. Anal 22~31; origin opposite to or in advance of that of dorsal.
Four species.
Synopsis of the Species
I. Second suborbital greatly enlarged, covering the entire cheek; vomer without teeth; body com-
pletely covered with scales. 1. denudatum
II. Second suborbital moderately enlarged, not nearly covering cheek; vomer with a pair of conical
teeth; scales, if present, only developed on anterior and posterior parts of body, and in associa-
tion with photophores.
A. Origin of anal very little in advance of dorsal; adipose fin present; dorsal with 13 to 16 rays.
1. Eye 6} to 7} in head; anal with 29 to 31 rays; photophores conspicuous, arranged in two
longitudinal series placed close together near the abdomen. 2. elongatum
2. Eye 7} tog in head; anal with 22 to 24 rays; photophores very indistinct, the upper series
irregular and situated on side of body. 3. bathyphilum
B. Origin of anal well in advance of that of dorsal; dorsal with 11 rays. 4. gracile
Gonostoma brevidens (Kner) Steindachner, and G. raoulensis, Waite, both belong to
the genus Vinciguerria.
Gonostoma denudatum, Rafinesque.
Gonostoma denudatum (-a), Rafinesque, 1810, Ind. itt. Sicil. p. 65; Bonaparte, 1841, Icon. Faun.
Ital. (27), Indice (4) and (138), fig.; Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1849, Hist. Nat. Poiss. xxi,
p. 376; Johnson, 1862, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3) X, p. 279; Giinther, 1864, Cat. Fish. v, p. 391;
1887, Deep-sea Fish, ‘Challenger’, p. 172; Vaillant, 1888, Expéd. Sci. ‘ Travailleur’ et ‘ Talisman’,
Poissons, p. 102; Moreau, 1891, Hist. Nat. Poiss. France, Suppl. p. 79; Goode and Bean, 1895,
Ocean. Ichth. p. 98, fig. 116; Jordan and Evermann, 1896, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. x.vit (1), p. 579;
Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 73, fig. 26; Sanzo, 1912, Mem. R. Com. Talass. Ital.
IX, p. 1, figs.; Jespersen and Taning, 1926, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped. 1908-10, 11, A, 12,
p. 4, figs.
Gasteropelecus acanturus, Cocco, 1829, Giorn. Sci. Lett. Sicilia, XXxV1, p. 145.
Gonostomus acanthurus, Cocco, 1838, N. Ann. Sct. Nat. 1, p. 163.
St. 288. ar. vili. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: 5 specimens,
28-45 mm,
St. 293. 24. viii. 27. 4° 18’ 15” N, 16° 51’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 100-120 (—-o) m.: 3 specimens,
35-40 mm.
St. 295. 25. viii. 27. 5° 30’ 30” N, 17° 45’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 2500-2700 m.: I specimen,
30 mm.
St. 296. 26. vill. 27. 8° 12’ 00” N, 18° 49’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 450-500 (—o) m.: I specimen,
50 mm.
Depth 5} to 6 in the length, length of head about 4. Snout about as long as eye,
diameter of which is 44 (young) to 5? in length of head and about equal to interorbital
GONOSTOMATIDAE 283
width. Second suborbital greatly enlarged, covering entire cheek. Vomer toothless.
The whole body covered with thin cycloid scales; about 36 in a longitudinal series.
ro or 11 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal 14-16 (17); origin about
equidistant from root of pectoral and base of caudal. Adipose fin rather small. Anal
29-31; origin opposite to that of dorsal. Pectoral with 11 or 12 rays. Pelvic 8; origin
equidistant from tip of lower jaw and base of caudal or a little nearer the former. A pair
of photophores at the symphysis of the mandibles, and a series of nine between the
branchiostegal rays; a single photophore in front of the lower corner of the orbit; a
narrow vertical streak in front of the operculum, with one luminous spot above and two
below; three larger luminous patches at base of caudal fin, one above and two below;
lower series of photophores on body consisting of 5 in front of the pectoral fin, ro or
11 from pectoral to pelvic, 5 from pelvic to origin of anal, and 17-19 from anal to base
of caudal; in the upper series there are 13-15 (1 + 9 + 3 + 0-2).
Described from 18 specimens, 28 to 140 mm. in length.
Hab. Mediterranean and Eastern Atlantic.!
Two distinct sub-species of Gonostoma denudatum may be recognised, and the main
differences between them have already been pointed out by Jespersen and 'Taning.?
The true denudatum occurs in the Mediterranean and in the neighbouring parts of the
Atlantic; the specimen from Madeira described by Johnson belongs to this sub-species.
The other, which may be called atlanticum (n.subsp.), occurs only in the Eastern
Atlantic, and may be recognised chiefly by the greater number of gill-rakers and by the
arrangement of the photophores above the origin of the anal fin. The dorsal fin seems
to be inserted a little further forward in this form, but my material is not sufficient to be
certain of this. The two sub-species may be recognised as follows :—
I. Usually 5 + 10 gill-rakers on the first arch; first two photophores above the anal fin placed much
higher than the two which follow, which are themselves situated lower than the remainder.
denudatum
II. Usually 6 + 11 gill-rakers on the first arch; all the anterior photophores above the anal fin
forming an unbroken series at about the same level. atlanticum
Gonostoma elongatum, Giinther.
Gonostoma elongatum, Giinther, 1878, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) 01, p. 187; 1887, Deep-Sea Fish.
‘Challenger’, p. 173, pl. xlv, fig. B; Alcock, 1891, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6) vit, p. 127; 1892,
ibid. (6) x, p. 354; Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p.75, pl. iv, fig. 4; Weber, 1913,
‘ Siboga’ Fische, p. 17; Weber and Beaufort, 1913, Fish. Indo-Austral. Arch. 1, p. 122, fig. 45.
Sigmops stigmaticus, Gill, 1884, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. vt (1883), p. 256.
Neostoma elongatum, Collett, 1896, Bull. Soc. zool. France, xx1, p. 96.
Cyclothone elongata, Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 101, fig. 119; Alcock, 1899, Cat.
Indian Deep-Sea Fish. p. 139.
Cyclothone (Sigmops) elongata, Jordan and Evermann, 1896, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. XLvu (1), p. 583.
1 According to Goode and Bean this species was taken in the Western Atlantic off the New England coast
in 1881, and from off the Californian coast by the ‘ Albatross’. These specimens have not yet been described.
2 T am greatly indebted to Mr A. V. Taning for notes on these sub-species.
284 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Cyclothone rhodadenia, Gilbert, 1905, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. xxtit (1903), p. 602, pl. Ixxi,
imkeg, he
Gonostoma polyphos, Zugmayer, 1911, Bull. Inst. Océan. Monaco, 193, p. 4; 1911, Rés. Camp.
Sct. Monaco, Xxxv, p. 47, pl. ii, fig. 2; Roule, 1919, zbid. Lu, p. 27.
?? Gonostoma rhodadenia, Weber, 1913, ‘ Siboga’ Fische, p. 18; Weber and Beaufort, 1913, Fish.
Indo-Austral. Arch. 1, p. 121.
St. 85. 23. vi. 26. 33°07’ 40” S, 4° 30’ 20” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 2000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
200 mm.
St. 101. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.:
I specimen, 195 mm.
St. 256. 23. vi. 27. 35° 14’ 00" S, 6° 49’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 850-1100 (—o) m.: I specimen,
200 m.
St. 280. 10. viii. 27. 00° 36’ 00” S, 8° 28’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 100-200 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
135 mm.
St. 281. 12. viii. 27. 00° 46’ 00” S, 5° 49’ 15” E. Young-fish trawl, 850-950 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
42 mm.
St. 282. 12. viii. 27. 1° 11’00"S, 5° 38’00” E. Young-fish trawl, 300 (—-o) m.: 1 specimen,
160 mm.
St. 285. 16. viii. 27. 2° 43’ 30”S, 00°56 30” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-o) m.: 7
specimens, 140-180 mm. ;
St. 286. 17. viii. 27. 3° 06’ 30” S, 3° 5300” W. Young-fish trawl, 125 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
55 mm.
Depth of body 6? to 7} in the length, length of head 42 to 4%. Snout as long as or a
little longer than eye, diameter of which is 6} to 7} in length of head and 1+ to 1} in the
interorbital width. Suborbital moderately enlarged, not covering the entire cheek.
Vomer with a pair of conical teeth. Scales mostly wanting, but sometimes traces of
scales associated with photophores immediately behind the head and in the tail region.
About 12 gill-rakers on the lower part of the anteriorarch. Dorsal 13—15 ; origin somewhat
nearer to root of pectoral than base of caudal. Adipose fin well developed. Anal 29-31;
origin very little in advance of that of dorsal. Pectoral with 11-13 rays. Pelvic 8; origin
much nearer to tip of lower jaw than base of caudal. Photophores conspicuous; a pair
at the symphysis of the mandibles and a series of 8 or g between the branchiostegal rays;
a luminous patch below the eye and immediately above the jaw, connected with a
photophore in front of the lower corner of the orbit; a small indistinct spot behind the
end of the maxillary, and another on the upper part of the praeoperculum, the latter
connected with a vertical luminous streak; one supracaudal and two infracaudal patches
as in the preceding species; lower series of photophores on body consisting of 4 in front
of the pectoral fin, 11 from pectoral to pelvic, 4 from pelvic to origin of anal, and 19-22
from anal to base of caudal; in the upper series there are 14 or 15 (8-9 + 3-4+ 2-3).
Uniformly blackish.
Described from 16 specimens, 55 to 200 mm. in length, including the types of the
species.
Hab. North and South Atlantic; Indian Ocean; Hawaiian Islands.
GONOSTOMATIDAE 285
Gonostoma bathyphilum (Vaillant).
Neostoma bathyphilum, Vaillant, 1884, La Nature, xxu1, p. 184, fig.; 1888, Expéd. Sct. ‘ Tra-
vailleur’ et ‘ Talisman’, Poissons, p. 96, pl. viii, fig. 1.
Cyclothone bathyphila, Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 100, fig. 118.
? Gonostoma brevidens, Goode and Bean, t.c. p. 98, fig. 117.
Cyclothone grandis, Collett, 1896, Bull. Soc. zool. France, Xx, p. 99.
Gonostoma bathyphilum, Brauer, 1906, ‘Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 73; Zugmayer, 1g11,
Rés. Camp. Sci. Monaco, xxxv, p. 49, pl. ii, fig. 1; Holt and Byrne, 1913, Fisheries,
Ireland, Sct. Invest. 1912, 1, p. 11, figs. 3-4; Roule, rg19, Rés. Camp. Sct. Monaco, Li, p. 27.
Gonostoma grandis, Barnard, 1925, Ann. S. Afric. Mus. xx, p. 143.
St. 81. 18. vi. 26. 32° 45’ 00" S, 8° 47’ 00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 650 (-o) m.: 2 specimens,
29-35 mm.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00” S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 41m. net, horizontal, 1000 (—o) m.: 3 specimens,
30-70 mm.
St. ror. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° o4’ to 15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.:
I specimen, 60 mm. 44m. net, horizontal, 1310-1410 m.: 3 specimens, 80-130 mm.
Depth of body 6} to 6# in the length, length of head 4 to 44. Snout longer than eye,
diameter of which is 7} to 9 in length of head and nearly twice in the interorbital width.
Suborbital moderately enlarged, not covering entire cheek. A pair of conical teeth on
the vomer. Scales absent. About 15 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal
12-14; origin about equidistant from occipital region and base of caudal. Adipose fin
well developed. Anal 22-24; origin very little in advance of that of dorsal. Pectoral with
7-10 rays. Pelvic 7 or 8; origin much nearer to tip of lower jaw than base of caudal.
Photophores small and indistinct; a series between the branchiostegal rays; a narrow
luminous streak below the eye, and another on the praeoperculum; one supracaudal and
two infracaudal luminous patches; lower series of photophores on body consisting of
2 or 3 in front of the pectoral fin, 8 or 9 from pectoral to pelvic, 3 from pelvic to origin
of anal, and 19-20 from anal to base of caudal; the upper series, consisting of 14 photo-
phores irregularly arranged on the side of the body, ends opposite to the origin of the
dorsal fin. Uniformly blackish.
Described from 13 specimens, 29 to 130 mm. in length.
Hab. North and South Atlantic.
Gonostoma brevidens (Kner and Steindachner), Goode and Bean, from the Western
Atlantic, may be this species, but there are several discrepancies between their descrip-
tion and figure. The number of anal rays, for example, is given as 17-19, but about 26
are shown in the figure. I am indebted to the Director of the Museum of Comparative
Zoology, Cambridge, Mass., for some young examples collected by the ‘Blake’
and identified as this species, but these prove to be Cyclothone microdon.
Gonostoma gracile, Giinther.
Gonostoma gracile, Giinther, 1878, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), u, p. 187; 1887, Deep-Sea Fish.
‘Challenger’, p. 174, pl. xlv, fig. C.
Ditiii 4
286 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Neostoma gracile, Collett, 1896, Bull. Soc. zool. France, xx, p. 96; Jordan, Tanaka and Snyder,
1913, f. Coll. Sci. Tokyo, Xxxit (1), p. 50.
Depth of body 8 to 9 in the length, length of head about 5. Snout about as long as
eye, diameter of which is 6 to 6} in length of head and about equal to interorbital width.
Suborbital moderately enlarged, not covering entire cheek. A pair of conical teeth on
the vomer. Scales apparently absent. About 13 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior
arch. Dorsal 11; origin about equidistant from gill-opening and base of caudal. No
adipose fin. Anal 26-27; origin well in advance of that of dorsal. Pectoral with 11 rays.
Pelvic 7; origin much nearer to tip of lower jaw than base of caudal. Photophores
rather small and indistinct; a series between the branchiostegal rays; a luminous patch
below the eye, in front of which is a small photophore; another, but smaller patch on
the praeoperculum; one supracaudal (?) and two infracaudal luminous patches; some
scattered photophores on sides of body in addition to the two rows on the abdomen;
lower series of photophores consisting of 10 from pectoral to pelvic, 3 or 4 from pelvic
to origin of anal, and 16(?) from anal to base of caudal; there appear to be 7 in the
upper series; an oblique row of 5 photophores is present on the isthmus, running up-
wards to the base of the pectoral fin. Uniformly blackish.
Described from two specimens, 58 to rr0 mm. in length; types of the species.
Hab. South of Japan.
Genus Cyclothone, Goode and Bean
Goode and Bean, 1883, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. x, p. 221; Collett, 1896, Bull. Soc. zool. France,
XXI, p. 96.
Close to Gonostoma, but with a small eye; second suborbital not enlarged; prae-
maxillary with few teeth; maxillary with a series of small teeth, increasing in size from
before backwards, some of them at more or less irregular intervals somewhat enlarged.
Dorsal 13 to 15. Adipose fin present or absent. Anal 16 to 20; origin about opposite to
that of dorsal.
About six species.
I have not attempted a revision of the species of this genus, as my material is quite
inadequate. Further, a good revision has been published by Brauer in 1906 (‘ Valdivia’
Tiefsee-Fische, p. 77), and, apart from an important paper by Jespersen and Taning
(1926, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped. 1908-1910, 11, A, 12, p. 7), based on extensive
material from the Mediterranean and the adjacent parts of the Atlantic, little has been
added to our knowledge of the group since that date.!
Cyclothone signata, Garman.
Garman, 1899, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. xx1v, p. 246, pl. J, fig. 3.
Hab. Gulf of Panama; Atlantic (?).
* Pappenheim (1914, Deutsche Stidpolar-Exped. xv, Zool. v11) has listed a number of specimens of
Cyclothone from the North and South Atlantic, but gives no descriptions. See also Roule (1919, Rés. Camp.
Sct. Monaco, .11, p. 27).
GONOSTOMATIDAE 287
Cyclothone signata alba, Brauer.
Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 80, fig. 30.
Hab. Atlantic and Indian Oceans.
Cyclothone braueri, Jespersen and Taning.
Cyclothone signata (non Garman), Brauer, ¢.c. p. 78, pl. vi, fig. 6, text-figs. 28, 29.
Cyclothone braueri, Jespersen and Taning, 1926, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped. 1908-10, Il,
AS) 1250p: 7, 112s:
St. 89. 28. vi. 26. 34° 05’ 15”S, 16° 00’ 45” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 43 specimens,
15-42 mm.
St. 287. 19. vili. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (-o) m.: 60 speci-
mens, 23-58 mm.
16. x. 25. 29° 26’ N, 15° 07’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 28 specimens, 13-37 mm.
Hab. Mediterranean; North and South Atlantic; Caribbean Sea.
Cyclothone livida, Brauer.
Brauer, 1902, Zool. Anz. xxv, p. 279; 1906, ‘Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 80, pl. vi, fig. 5,
text-fig. 31.
St. 281. 12. viii. 27. 00° 46’ 00" S, 5° 49’ 15” E. Young-fish trawl, 850-950 (—o) m. : 40 specimens,
20-42 mm.
St. 298. 29. viii. 27. 13°01 45” N, 21°34’ 45” W. Young-fish trawl, goo-1200 (-o) m.: 7
specimens, 23-35 mm.
28. x. 25. 13° 25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 44m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 31 specimens, 25-50 mm.
Ir. xi. 25. 6°55’ N, 15° 54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (-o) m.: 12 specimens, 21-53 mm.
Hab. North and South Atlantic.
Cyclothone microdon (Giinther).!
Giinther, 1878, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), , p. 187; 1887, Deep-Sea Fish. ‘Challenger’, p. 175;
Brauer, 1906, ‘Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 82, pl. vi, fig. 4, text-fig. 32; Zugmayer, 1911,
Rés. Camp. Sci. Monaco, xxxv, p. 43; Regan, 1916, Larval Fish. ‘ Terra Nova’, p. 137, pl. v,
fig. 5.
Neostoma quadrioculatum, Vaillant, 1888, Expéd. Sci. ‘ Travailleur’ et ‘Talisman’, Poissons,
p. 99, pl. viii, fig. 2.
The ‘ Discovery’ obtained more than 500 specimens of this species from the following
stations in the North and South Atlantic, at depths ranging from o—2500 m., measuring
from 12 to 70 mm. in length: St. 9, 71, 72, 76, 78, 79, 81, 85, 86, 87, 89, 100, 151, 169,
239, 245, 256."
Hab. Arctic Ocean; North and South Atlantic; Antarctic Ocean; Indian Ocean;
Pacific.
1 For full synonymy see Brauer (1906).
2 A list of these stations is given at the beginning of this report.
288 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Cyclothone microdon pallida, Brauer.
Brauer, 1902, Zool. Anz. xxv, p. 281; 1906, ‘Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 84, pl. vi, fig. 2, text-
fig. 33; Zugmayer, 1911, Rés. Camp. Sci. Monaco, xxxv, p. 44, pl. 11, fig. 3.
Hab. Atlantic and Indian Oceans.
Cyclothone microdon pygmaea, Jespersen and 'T'aning.
Jespersen and Taning, 1926, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped. 1908-10, U1, A, 12, p. 7, figs.
Hab. Mediterranean and neighbouring parts of the Atlantic.
Cyclothone acclinidens, Garman.
Garman, 1899, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. xxiv, p. 247, pl. J, fig. 4; Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’
Tiefsee-Fische, p. 85, pl. vi, fig. 1, text-fig. 34.
Hab. Atlantic and Indian Oceans; Pacific.
Cyclothone atraria, Gilbert.
Gilbert, 1905, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. xxii (1903), p. 605, pl. Ixxii, fig. 2.
Hab. Hawaiian Islands.
Cyclothone canina, Gilbert.
Gilbert, 1905, ¢.c. p. 604, pl. Ixxi, fig. 2.
Hab. Hawaiian Islands.
Cyclothone obscura, Brauer. ,
Brauer, 1902, Zool. Anz. xxv, p. 280; 1906, ‘Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 88, pl. vi, fig. 3, text-
Homa:
St. 295. 25. vili. 27. 5° 30’30” N, 17°45’00” W. Young-fish trawl, 2500-2700 (-o) m.: 5
specimens, 25-60 mm. (?).
Hab. Atlantic and Indian Oceans.
Genus Yarrella, Goode and Bean
Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth, p. 103.
Polymetme, McCulloch, 1926, Biol. Res. ‘Endeavour’, v, p. 166.
Close to Gonostoma, but whole of body covered with deciduous scales. Photophores
conspicuous. Dorsal 10-12. Anal 23-32; origin below middle or posterior part of dorsal.
Two species.
Yarrella blackfordi, Goode and Bean.
Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 103, fig. 121; Jordan and Evermann, 1896, Bull. U.S.
Nat. Mus. xivit (1), p. 584, fig. 249; Jespersen and Taning, 1919, Vid. Medd. Dansk nat. For.
LXX, p. 223, pl. xvii, fig. 13.
GONOSTOMATIDAE 289
St. 273. 31. vii. 27. 9° 38’ 00"S, 12° 42’ 30” E. 1m. tow-net, oblique, 118 (-o) m.: 8 specimens,
33-45 mm.
St. 276. 5. viii. 27. 5°54’ 00”S, 11° 19’00” E. 1 m. tow-net, oblique, 110 (-o) m.: 2 specimens,
40-50 mm.
Depth of body 63 to 7 in the length, length of head 44 to 42. Snout somewhat longer
than eye, diameter of which is 44 to 5} in length of head and about equal to interorbital
width. About 12 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal 10-12; origin about
equidistant from base of caudal and anterior margin of eye. Anal 23~30; origin below
middle of dorsal. Pectoral with 8 rays. Pelvic 7; origin equidistant from tip of lower
jaw and posterior part of anal. Lower series of photophores consisting of 9 in front of
pectoral, 12 or 13 from pectoral to pelvic, 7 or 8 from pelvic to origin of anal, and 20
or 21 from anal to base of caudal; there are 19 or 20 photophores in the upper series.
spansennnsnnnsesss ss
S. (\ SSP SS
S \\\ ‘ S
\
Fig. 7. Yarrella blackfordi. (x 24.)
Described from 16 specimens, 28 to 50 mm. in length.
Hab. Atlantic.
The above specimens differ in several respects from the description of Goode and Bean,
but in view of their small size I have followed Jespersen and 'Taning in identifying them
with that species.
Yarrella corythaeola (Alcock).
Diplophos corythaeolum, Alcock, 1898, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7), U, p. 147; 1899, Llust. Zool.
‘Investigator’, Fishes, pl. xxv, fig. 3.
Photichthys corythaeolus, Alcock, 1899, Cat. Indian Deep-Sea Fish. p. 142.
Yarrella africana, Gilchrist and Von Bonde, 1924, Rep. Fish. Mar. Biol. Surv. S. Afr. 111 (1922),
Spec. Rep. vu, p. 8, pl. i, fig. 2; Barnard, 1925, Ann. S. Afr. Mus. xx1, p. 148.
Polymetme illustris, McCulloch, 1926, Biol. Res. ‘Endeavour’, Vv, p. 167, pl. xlv, fig. 1.
Depth of body 5 to 6 in the length, length of head 4 to 42. Snout as long as or a little
shorter than eye, diameter of which is 4 to 44 in length of head and a little greater than
interorbital width. About 12 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal 11-12;
origin about equidistant from end of snout and base of caudal. Anal 24-32; origin below
last rays of dorsal. Pectoral with 10 or 11 rays. Pelvic 7; origin equidistant from tip
of lower jaw and last rays of anal. Lower series of photophores consisting of g in front of
pectoral, 11 from pectoral to pelvic, 8 from pelvic to origin of anal, and 22-24 from
anal to base of caudal; there are 18-19 photophores in the upper series.
290 -. DISCOVERY REPORTS
Described from 2 specimens, 103 and 130mm. in length; one is the type of
Diplophos corythaeolum, and the other a paratype of Polymetme illustris received in
exchange from the Australian Museum.
Hab. Coast of Natal; Andaman Sea; Southern Australia.
I have no hesitation in uniting these three species. The number and arrangement of
the photophores is exactly the same in all of them, and the only difference is in the
number of anal rays—about 24 in corythaeola, 27-32 in illustris, and 25 in africana.
Genus Vinciguerria, Goode and Bean
Poweria, Bonaparte, 1840, Icon. F. Ital. 111 (under Ichthyococcus poweriae), sign. 1838** [2].
Vinciguerria (Jordan and Evermann), Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 513; Jordan and
Evermann, 1896, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. xtvui (1), p. 577.
Zalarges (Jordan and Williams) Jordan and Starks, 1895, Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. (2), V, p- 793.
Close to Gonostoma and Yarrella. Both jaws with a single series of teeth of varying
sizes ; teeth present on vomer, palatines and pterygoids. Scales developed. Photophores
conspicuous. Dorsal 13-14. Anal 14-15; origin below middle or posterior part of dorsal.
Five or six species.
I have not sufficient material to undertake a revision of this genus, but give a list of
the species, with a fairly complete synonymy in each case. The species are so close to
one another that in many cases it is impossible to be certain as to which one any par-
ticular author was considering unless a reliable figure is provided. For this reason, the
synonymies given below cannot be regarded as more than tentative. Jespersen and
Taning have given a full account of the two Mediterranean species (V. poweriae and
V. attenuata) and have pointed out the characters which distinguish these from V.
sanzoi and V. lucetia. The four species may be recognised as follows :—
I. No photophores at the symphysis of the mandibles.
A. Length of row of photophores from origin of anal to base of caudal shorter than head;
12 (occasionally rr) gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch. I. poweriae
B. Length of row of photophores from origin of anal to base of caudal longer than head ; usually
14 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch. 2. attenuatus
II. A pair of photophores at the symphysis of the mandibles.
A. 24-25 (13 + 11-12) photophores in the upper series; 13-14 gill-rakers on lower part of
anterior arch; dorsal with 14-15 rays; anal with 13~15 rays. 3. Sanzot
B. 21-22 (11-12 + 10-11) photophores in the upper series; 19-20 gill-rakers on lower part
of anterior arch; dorsal with 13-14 rays; anal with 14-16 rays. 4. lucetia
Vinciguerria poweriae (Cocco).
Gonostomus poweriae, Cocco, 1838, N. Ann. Sct. Nat. 1, p. 167.
Ichthyococcus poweriae, Bonaparte, 1841, Icon. F. Ital. (27), Indice [4] and (138**), fig.
Scopelus poweriae, Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1849, Hist. Nat. Poiss. XXU, p. 441.
1 Gonostoma brevidens (Kner) Steindachner (1870, SitzBer. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LX1 (1), p. 443) seems
to be a species of Vinciguerria, but | am unable to identify this.
GONOSTOMATIDAE 291
Maurolicus poweriae, Giinther, 1864, Cat. Fish. v, p. 390; Facciola, 1883, Nat. Sici. u,
p. 207; Carus, 1889-93, Prodr. F. Medit. 11, p. 569.; Liitken, 1892, Vid. Selsk. Skr. (6), Vit,
pa272:
Vinciguerria lucetia, Murray and Hjort, 1912, Depths of the Ocean, p. 604, fig. 457, p- 678,
fig. 495.
Vinciguerria poweriae, Sanzo, 1913, Mem. R. Com. Talass. Ital. xxxv, p. 3, figs.; Jespersen and
Taning, 1919, Vid. Medd. Dansk nat. For. Lxx, p. 218, pl. xvii, figs. 1-4; 1926, Rep. Danish
Ocean. Exped. 1908-10, 11, A, 12, p. 22, figs.
Hab. Mediterranean; Atlantic.
Vinciguerria attenuata (Cocco).!
Maurolicus attenuatus, Cocco, 1838, N. Ann. Sci. Nat. 1, p. 193; Bonaparte, 1841, Icon. F. Ital.
(27), Indice [4] and (138), fig.; Giinther, 1864, Cat. Fish. v, p. 390; Facciola, 1883, Nat. Sicil.
II, p. 208; Carus, 1889-93, Prodr. F. Medit. 1, p. 569; Liitken, 1892, Vid. Selsk. Skr. (6), VU,
p. 272.
Scopelus tenorei, Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1849, Hist. Nat. Poiss. XXxIl, p. 441.
Vinciguerria attenuata, Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 513 ; Jordan and Evermann, 1896,
Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. xtvut (1), p. §77; Sanzo, 1913, Mem. R. Com. Talass. Ital. xxxv, p. 3, figs. ;
Jespersen and Taning, 1919, Vid. Medd. Dansk nat. For. Lxx, p. 218, pl. xvii, figs. 3 and 6;
1926, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped. 1908-10, 11, A, 12, p. 22, figs.
Vinciguerria lucetia (part), Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 97.
Vinciguerria lucetia, Zugmayer, 1911, Rés. Camp. Sct. Monaco, xxxv, p. 56, pl. ii, fig. 4.
St. 78. 12. vi. 26. 35°18’ 00”S, 19° 01’ 10” W. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 2 specimens,
20-24 mm.
St. 85. 23. vi. 26. 33°07’ 40” S, 4° 30’ 20” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 2000 (—o) m.: 4 specimens,
20-35 mm.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00” S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 1000 (—-o) m.: 7 specimens,
22-35 mm.
St. 89. 28. vi. 26. 34°05’15”S, 16°00’ 45” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 3 specimens,
17-22 mm.
St. 252. 20. vi. 27. 35° 26’ 00” S, 1° 43’ 30” E. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, 135 m.: 3 specimens,
18-26 mm.
St. 254. 21. vi. 27. 35°04’00"S, 6°49’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 200 (-o) m.: 8 specimens,
16-45 mm.
St. 257. 24. vi. 27. 35°01’ 00" S, 10° 18’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 21 specimens,
18-26 mm. ’
St. 287. 19. viii. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
20 mm.
Hab. Mediterranean; Atlantic.
1 Leidenfrost (1917, Allatt. Kozlem. Budapest, xv1, p. 13, figs. 1-3) describes several postlarval and
juvenile specimens of a species said to be Vinciguerria attenuata. His first figure represents a true Vincr-
guerria, probably V. poweriae, the second is a young stage of Ichthyococcus, and fig. 3 is probably a larval
Chauliodus.
292 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Vinciguerria sanzoi, Jespersen and Taning.
Vinciguerria lucetia (part), Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 97.
Vinciguerria sanzo1, Jespersen and Taning, 1919, Vid. Medd. Dansk nat. For. Lxx, p. 218, pl. xvii,
figs. 2 and 5; 1926, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped. 1908-10, 11, A, 12, pp. 22, etc., figs.
St. 295. 25. vili.27. 5° 30°30” N, 17°45’00” W. Young-fish trawl, 2500-2700 (-o) m.: 1
specimen, 47 mm.
St. 297. 28. vill. 27. 12°08’ 00” N, 20° 53’30” W. Young-fish trawl, 200-300 (-o) m.: 2
specimens, 20-27 mm.
Hab. Atlantic.
Vinciguerria lucetia (Garman).
Maurolicus lucetius, Garman, 1899, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. xxtv, p. 242, pl. J, fig. 2.
? Vinciguerria lucetia (part), Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 97.
Vineiguerria lucetia, Gilbert, 1908, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. xxv, p. 237; Weber, 1913, ‘ Siboga
Fische, p. 21; Weber and Beaufort, 1913, Fish. Indo-Austral. Arch. u, p. 119, fig. 44; Regan,
1916, Larval Fish. ‘ Terra Nova’, p. 137, pl. v, figs. 6-7.
Hab. South Atlantic; Indo-Pacific.
>
Vinciguerria raoulensis (Waite).
Gonostoma raoulensis, Waite, 1910, Trans. N. Zealand Inst. Xu, p. 373, pl. xxxv, fig. 1.
Vinciguerria raoulensis, McCulloch, 1923, Rec. Austral. Mus. xiv, p. 115.
Hab. Kermadec Islands.
Perhaps identical with V. lucetia.
- Vinciguerria nimbarius (Jordan and Starks).
Zalarges nimbarius (Jordan and Williams), Jordan and Starks, 1895, Proc. Calif. Acad. Sct. (2),
V, p- 793, pl. Ixxvi.
Vinciguerria nimbarius, Gilbert, 1908, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. xxvi, p. 237.
Hab. Pacific.
Apparently very close to V. powertae.
Genus Photichthys, Hutton
Phosichthys, Hutton, 1872, Cat. Fish. N. Zealand, p. 55.
Photichthys, Hutton, 1873, Trans. N. Zealand Inst. v, p. 269.
Cleft of mouth wide; maxillary with a single series of small, subequal teeth; prae-
maxillary with two strong canines in addition to the small teeth; mandible with strong
acute teeth and with smaller teeth in the interspaces; a pair of teeth on the vomer; each
palatine with a single series of curved teeth, the anterior of which are enlarged; ptery-
goids toothless. Suborbital not enlarged. Scales present. Photophores conspicuous.
Dorsal 12-13; origin behind pelvics but well in advance of anal. Adipose fin developed.
Anal 23—26; origin well behind last dorsal ray.
A single species.
GONOSTOMATIDAE 293
Photichthys argenteus, Hutton. [PI. II, figs. 1 and 2.]
Phosichthys argenteus, Hutton, 1872, Cat. Fish. N. Zealand, p. 56.
Photichthys argenteus, Hutton, 1873, Trans. N. Zealand Inst. v, p. 269, pl. xv; Giinther, 1887,
Deep-Sea Fish. ‘Challenger’, p. 178, pl. xlv, fig. A; Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 104,
fig. 122; Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 92, fig. 37; Gilchrist, 1922, Rep. Fish. Mar.
Biol. Surv. S. Afr. 1, Spec. Rep. m1, p. 55; Barnard, 1925, Ann. S. Afric. Mus. xx, p. 150.
St. 81. 18. vi. 26. 32° 45’ 00" S, 8° 47’ 00” W. 43m. net, horizontal, 650 (-o) m.: 3 specimens,
68-75 mm.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33°25’ 00”S, 6°31’ 00” E. 44m. net, horizontal, 1000 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
40 mm.
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33° 53’ 45” 5, 9° 26’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 27 mm.
St. 89. 28. vi. 26. 34°05’ 15” S, 16°00’ 45” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 2 specimens,
18-31 mm.
St. ror. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° o4’ tors5° 49’ E. 43 m. net, horizontal, 350-400 (-o) m.:
12 specimens, 28-165 mm.
St. 258. 25. vi. 27. 35° 03 30” S, 13°55’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 320-450 m.: 9 specimens,
24-32 mm.
Depth of body 6} to 6} in the length, length of head 44 to 44. Snout equal to or
shorter than eye, diameter of which is 4 to 4* in length of head and about equal to
interorbital width. About 11 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal 12-13;
origin a little behind root of pelvic, equidistant from end of snout and base of caudal
or a little nearer the former. Anal 23-26. Pectoral with 9 rays. Pelvic 7; origin equi-
distant from base of pectoral and vent. Lower series of photophores consisting of 10
in front of pectoral, 14 or 15 from pectoral to pelvic, 15 or 16 from pelvic to origin of
anal, and 16 or 17 from anal to base of caudal; there are 33-34 (14 + 19 — 20) photo-
phores in the upper series.
Described from 11 specimens, 27—240 mm. in length, including the type of the species.
Hab. Atlantic; New Zealand.
Genus Manducus, Goode and Bean
Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 514.
Lychnopoles, Garman, 1899, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Xx1v, p. 244.
Eye of moderate size; second suborbital not greatly enlarged. Cleft of mouth wide,
the praemaxillary forming quite half the margin of the upper jaw; praemaxillary and
mandible with one or two irregular series of unequal teeth, maxillary with a single
series ; each palatine with a single row of teeth, the anterior of which are enlarged; two
groups of small teeth on the vomer; a patch of minute teeth on each pterygoid. No
pseudobranchiae; gill-openings very wide; gill-rakers rather long, comparatively few
in number. Scales present. 'T'wo series of conspicuous photophores along each side of
the abdomen, another row along the region of the lateral line, and some additional series
of smaller and less distinct spots on the sides. Dorsal 10-16; origin nearer to base of
Ditiii 5
204 DISCOVERY REPORTS
caudal than end of snout. No adipose fin. Anal 26-39; origin below or a little behind
dorsal.
Two species.
Synopsis of the Species
I. Praemaxillary armed with strong canines; dorsal fin wholly in advance of anal. 1. maderensis
II. Praemaxillary without marked canines; dorsal fin mainly above anal. 2. argenteolus
Manducus maderensis (Johnson).
Gonostoma maderense, Johnson, 1890, Proc. Zool. Soc. p. 458.
Manducus maderensis, Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 515.
Diplophos minutus, Jespersen and ‘Taning, 1919, Vid. Medd. Dansk nat. For. Lxx, p. 224,
pl. xvii, fig. 15.
Diplophos moorei, Welsh, 1923, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. Lxu (3), p. 1, fig. 1.
Depth of body nearly 7 in the length, length of head 5. Snout a little longer than eye,
diameter of which is 5 in length of head and a little less than interorbital width. Each
praemaxillary with 5 canine teeth and with much smaller teeth between them. Nine gill-
Fig. 8. Manducus maderensis. Holotype. (x 1.)
rakers on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal 12; origin equidistant from eye and base
of caudal. Anal 36 (?); origin a little behind last dorsal ray. Pectoral with 9 or 10 rays.
Pelvic 8; origin about equidistant from tip of lower jaw and last anal ray. Lower series
of photophores consisting of 11 in front of pectoral, 19 from pectoral to pelvic, 13
(1 + 12) from pelvic to origin of anal, and 28 from anal to base of caudal; there are 46
(18 + 15 + 13) in the upper abdominal series and about 65 in the lateral line.
Described from a single specimen, 135 mm. in length; type of the species.
Hab. North Atlantic.
Manducus argenteolus (Garman).
Lychnopoles argenteolus, Garman, 1899, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. xxiv, p. 244, pl. liii, fig. 4.
Depth of body 7 in the length, length of head a little more than 5. Snout longer than
eye, diameter of which is 5 in length of head and a little less than interorbital width. Each
praemaxillary with two series of teeth, alternating, none of them distinctly enlarged.
Fourteen gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal 14-16; origin equidistant
GONOSTOMATIDAE 295
from eye and base of caudal. Anal 26-29; origin below sixth ray of dorsal. Pectoral with
g rays. Pelvic 7; origin equidistant from tip of lower jaw and posterior part of anal.
Lower series of photophores consisting of g in front of pectoral, 15 from pectoral to
pelvic, 9 from pelvic to vent, and 22 from vent to base of caudal; there are 43
(11 + 10 + 22) photophores in the upper abdominal series.
Hab. Gulf of Panama.
Garman does not give the length of the type specimen.
Genus Diplophos, Giinther
Ginther, 1873, 7. Mus. Godeffroy, 11, p. 101; 1889, Pelagic Fish. ‘Challenger’, p. 32.
Related to Manducus. Form very elongate. Praemaxillary, maxillary and mandible
each with a single series of small unequal teeth; 2 or 3 teeth on the vomer and a single
series on each palatine. ‘Two series of conspicuous photophores on each side of the
abdomen, and another series along the lateral line. Dorsal g-11; origin a little nearer to
end of snout than base of caudal. Anal 55-63; origin below dorsal.
One or two species.
Diplophos taenia, Giinther.
Giinther, 1873, 7. Mus. Godeffroy, 11, p. 102, fig.; 1889, Pelagic Fish. ‘Challenger’, p. 32, pl. iv,
fig. C; Liitken, 1892, Vid. Selsk. Skr. (6), vul, p. 278, pl. 1, figs. 1-3; Goode and Bean, 1895,
Ocean. Ichth. p. 104; Brauer, 1906, ‘Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 89, fig. 36; Jespersen and
Taning, 1919, Vid. Medd. Dansk nat. For. Lxx, p. 224, pl. xvii, fig. 14; Gilchrist, 1922,
Fish. Mar. Biol. Surv. S. Afr. , Spec. Rep. 11, p. 55; Barnard, 1925, Ann. S. Afric. Mus. xxt,
P- 149.
? Diplophos pacificus, Giinther, 1889, Pelagic Fish. ‘Challenger’, p. 33, pl. iv, fig. B; Goode and
Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. pl. xxxiv, fig. 126.
St. 297. 28. vill. 27. 12°08’ 00” N, 20°53’30” W. Young-fish trawl, 200-300 (-o) m.: 1
specimen, 32 mm.
Depth of body ro to 16 in the length, length of head 6 to 7. Snout longer than
eye, diameter of which is 5 to 6 in length of head and about equal to interorbital
width. Dorsal g-11. Anal 55-63. Pectoral with 8 or g rays. Pelvic 8; origin about
equidistant from tip of lower jaw and middle of anal. Lower series of photophores
consisting of 104-112, upper series of 69-73; there are about 94 photophores in the
lateral line.
Described from 5 specimens, 32-44 mm. in length, including the type of the
species.
Hab. Atlantic; coast of Natal; Indian Ocean; (?) Pacific.
The counts of dorsal and anal rays, and of the serial photophores, given above are
only approximate, as all my material is of small size.
In view of the variation recorded for D. taenia by Brauer and others it is very doubtful
whether D. pacificus can be retained as a distinct species. The type is in poor condition
and has been mounted in glycerine as a microscopic preparation.
296 _ DISCOVERY REPORTS
Genus Triplophos, Brauer
Brauer, 1902, Zool. Anz. xxv, p. 282; 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 98.
Close to Diplophos, but with a short, blunt snout, and the body moderately elongate.
Two series of conspicuous photophores on each side of the abdomen, and two or more
additional rows on the sides of the body. Dorsal 10; origin more than twice as near to
end of snout as to base of caudal. Anal 57—61; origin immediately behind dorsal.
A single species.
Triplophos hemingi (McArdle).
Photichthys hemingi, McArdle, 1901, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7), vu, p. 521; 1905, Ilust. Zool.
‘Investigator’, Fishes, pl. xxxvi, fig. 2.
Triplophos elongatum, Brauer, 1902, Zool. Anz. Xxv, p. 282; 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische,
Pp. 99, pl. vii, fig. 4, text-fig. 41.
Depth of body nearly 8 in the length, length of head 7. Snout shorter than eye, diameter
of which is 6 in length of head and about equal to interorbital width. ‘Teeth arranged in
two irregular series in the upper jaw and in a single series in the lower; strong, pointed,
with smaller ones in the interspaces ; a few small teeth at the anterior end of each palatine
and one or two minute teeth on the yomer; surfaces of the mesopterygoids minutely
denticulated. Dorsal 10. Anal (57) 61. Pectoral with 10 or 11 rays. Pelvic 6; origin
nearer to commencement of anal than base of pectoral. Lower series of photophores
consisting of 16 or 17 in front of pectoral, 13 from pectoral to pelvic, 5 from pelvic to
origin of anal, and 35-36 (41) from anal to base of caudal; there are about 55 in the
upper abdominal series and 43 in the lateral line.
Described from a single specimen, 205 mm. in length; one of the types of the species.
Hab. Indian Ocean.
Apart from a supposed difference in the dentition and some minor differences in the
numbers of serial photophores, I am unable to separate the above specimen from
Brauer’s 7. elongatum. The palatine and vomerine teeth are very small in this species
and were probably overlooked by Brauer.
Genus Ichthyococcus, Bonaparte
Bonaparte, 1841, Icon. F’. Ital. (27), Indice [4] and (138**) [2].
Coccia, Giinther, 1864, Cat. Fish. v, p. 387.
Apparently related to Vinciguerria. Body more or less ovate, compressed. Eyes tele-
scopic; interorbital region very narrow. Mouth small, the lower jaw included and almost
completely hidden by the upper jaw; teeth in the jaws minute; vomer and palatines
toothless. No pseudobranchiae; gill-openings very wide; gill-rakers rather short,
comparatively few in number. Scales present; cycloid. Dorsal 11-12; origin in front
of pelvic, the root of which is much nearer to base of caudal than tip of lower jaw.
A long, low, adipose fin. Anal 15-17; origin well behind dorsal. Photophores con-
spicuous, arranged in two series on each side of the abdomen.
GONOSTOMATIDAE 297
A single species.
This aberrant genus appears to be most nearly related to Vinciguerria, and the
manner in which the photophores develop seems to be the same. Jespersen and Taning,
who have described the marked metamorphosis undergone by Jchthyococcus, state that
in Vinciguerria attenuata (but not in any other species of that genus) the eye is somewhat
telescopic in the adolescent stages, but that this character is scarcely apparent in the
adult. In the telescopic eyes, narrow interorbital region, etc., [chthyococcus approaches
the Sternoptychiidae, but is essentially Gonostomatid in general structure.
Ichthyococcus ovatus (Cocco).
Gonostomus ovatus, Cocco, 1838, N. Ann. Sci. Nat. 11, p. 169, pl. i, fig. 3.
Ichthyococcus ovatus, Bonaparte, 1841, Icon. F. Ital. (27), Indice [4] and (138**) [2]; Vaillant,
1888, Expéd. Sct. ‘ Travailleur’ et ‘Talisman’, Poissons, p. 104, pl. xiv, fig. 2; Moreau, 1891,
Hist. Nat. Poiss. France, Suppl. p. 111; Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 95, fig. 113;
Brauer, 1906, ‘Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 94, figs. 38-39; Zugmayer, 1911, Rés. Camp. Sct.
Monaco, XxxV, p. 57; Sanzo, 1913, Mem. R. Com. Talass. Ital. xxvui, fig. ; Jespersen and Taning,
1919, Vid. Medd. Dansk nat. For. Lxx, p. 218; 1926, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped. 1908-10, 01,
ASPI2s P38, Les:
Scopelus ovatus, Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1849, Hist. Nat. Poiss. xxl, p. 453.
Coccia ovata, Giinther, 1864, Cat. Fish. v, p. 388; Carus, 1889-93, Prodr. F. Medit. 11, p. 568.
Depth of body 23 to 2? in the length, length of head nearly 3. Snout shorter than eye,
diameter of which is 23 to 3 in length of head. About 15 gill-rakers on lower part of
anterior arch. 36~—39 scales in a longitudinal series. Dorsal 11-12; origin about equi-
distant from end of snout and base of caudal. Anal 15-17. Pectoral with 8 rays. Pelvic
with 7 rays. Lower series of photophores consisting of 25 (7 + 1+ 17) in front of
pelvic, 10 or 11 from pelvic to origin of anal, and 13 or 14 from anal to base of caudal;
there are 23-26 photophores in the upper series.
Described from 16 specimens, 25 to 44 mm. in length.
Hab. Mediterranean; Eastern Atlantic; Indian Ocean.
Genus Maurolicus, Cocco
Cocco, 1838, N. Ann. Sci. Nat. 1, p. 192.
Triarcus, Waite, 1910, Trans. N. Zealand Inst. XLu1 (1909), p. 387.
‘Two species.
Cleft of mouth wide, rather oblique, the lower jaw a little projecting; both jaws with
a single series of minute teeth; a single transverse row of similar teeth on the head of
the vomer. Pseudobranchiae well developed; gill-openings very wide; gill-rakers long,
slender, fairly numerous. Scales present. Photophores large and conspicuous; lower
series on body more or less broken up into groups; the series between pelvic and origin
of anal separated from that above anterior part of anal. Dorsal 9-12; origin nearer to
base of caudal than end of snout. A long, low, adipose fin. Anal 23-27; origin just behind
last dorsal ray.
‘Two species.
298 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Maurolicus muelleri (Gmelin).
Salmo muelleri, Gmelin, 1789, in Linnaeus, Syst. Nat. ed. 13, 1, p. 1378.
Argentina pennantii, Walbaum, 1792, Artedi Ichth. ed. 2, 111, p. 47.
Scopelus humboldtii (non Risso), Yarrell, 1836, British Fishes, ed. 1, 11, p. 94; 1841, ed. 2, 0,
p. 161; De Kay, 1842, Fauna New York, Fish. p. 246, pl. xxxviii, fig. 121.
Scopelus borealis, Nilsson, 1832, Prodr. Ichth. Skand. p. 20; Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1849,
Hist. Nat. Poiss. xxu, p. 438.
Maurolicus amethysto-punctatus, Cocco, 1838, N. Ann. Sci. Nat. 1, p. 193; Bonaparte, 1841,
Icon. F. Ital. (27), Indice [4] and (138), fig.; Giinther, 1864, Cat. Fish. v, p. 390; 1876, Ann.
Mag. Nat. Hist. (4), xvu, p. 399; 1877, Trans. N. Zealand. Inst. 1x, p. 472; Moreau, 1881,
Hist. Nat. Poiss. France, 11, p. 509.
Scopelus pennantii, Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1849, Hist. Nat. Poiss. xu, p. 436; Yarrell, 1859,
British Fishes, ed. 3, 1, p. 330, figs.
Scopelus maurolici, Cuvier and Valenciennes, t.c. p. 439.
Maurolicus muelleri, Kroyer, 1846-53, Danmarks Fiske, 11, p. 113, fig.; Smitt, 1895, Scandi-
navian Fish, 1, p. 931, pl. xliv, fig. 3; Collett, 1903, Vid. Selsk. For. No. 9, p. 111.
Maurolicus borealis, Giinther, 1864, Cat. Fish. v, p. 389; Jordan and Gilbert, 1882, Bull. U.S.
Nat. Mus. xvi, p. 284; Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 96, fig. 111; Zugmayer, 1911,
Rés. Camp. Sct. Monaco, Xxxv, p. 58.-
Maurolicus pennanti, Day, 1880-84, Fish. Britain, 1, p. 49, pl. cix, fig. 2; Lilljeborg, 1889,
Sveriges Fiskar, 111 (6), p. 10; Liitken, 1892, Vid. Selsk. Skr. (6), vil, p. 267; Jordan and Ever-
mann, 1896, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. xtvu (1), p. 577; Holt and Byrne, 1913, Fisheries, Ireland,
Sci. Invest. 1912, 1, p. 16, pl. ii, figs. 1-3; Jespersen and Taning, 1919, Vid. Medd. Dansk
nat. For. LXX, p. 220; Barnard, 1925, Ann. S. Afric. Mus. xxi, p. 151; Jespersen and Taning,
1926, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped. 1908-10, 11, A, 12, p. 40, figs.
Maurolicus australis, Hector, 1875, Trans. N. Zealand Inst. vu, p. 250, pl. xi.
Maurolicus parvipinnis, Vaillant, 1888, Miss. Sci. Cap Horn, 1882-3, v1, Zool. Poiss. p. 17,
pl. ii, fig. 3.
Gonostoma australis, Hutton, 1876, Trans. N. Zealand Inst. vii, p. 215.
? Maurolicus borealis, Holt and Byrne, 1907, Trans. Linn. Soc. Zool. X, p. 194, fig. 1.
Triarcus australis, Waite, 1910, Trans. N. Zealand Inst. x11, p. 387, pl. xxxviii.
? Cyclothone sp., Fage, 1910, Ann. Inst. Océan. Monaco, 1 (7), p. 7, figs. 3-5.
Maurolicus japonicus, Ischikawa, 1915, 7. Coll. Agric. Tokyo, v1, p. 183, pls. xii, xii.
Maurolicus pennanti australis, McCulloch, 1923, Rec. Austral. Mus. xiv, p. 114, pl. xiv, fig. 1.
St. 257. 24. vi. 27. 35°01’00"S, 10°18’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: I specimen,
II mm.
St. WS g1. 8. iv. 27. 52°53'45”S, 64°37’30” W. Commercial otter trawl, 191-205 m.: fine
dark sand and shells. 1 specimen, 30 mm.
St. H (Cape trawler). 8. vi. 27. 34° 04’00"S, 17° 36’00” W. Commercial otter trawl, 292-
402 m.: 9 specimens, 35-50 mm. ‘Taken from the stomach of Zeus capensis.
St. M (Cape trawler). 9. vii. 27. 33° 42’ 00"S, 17° 29’ 00” E. Commercial otter trawl, 310—
402 m.: 4 specimens, 38-50 mm. ‘T'aken from the stomach of Merluccius.
Depth of body 3? to 44 in the length, length of head 3 to 34. Snout shorter than eye,
diameter of which is 22 to nearly 3 in length of head and about twice the interorbital
width. 25-27 gill-rakers on lower part of the anterior arch. Dorsal 9-12; origin about
GONOSTOMATIDAE 299
equidistant from base of caudal and middle of eye. Anal 23-27; origin just behind last
dorsal ray. Pectoral with 17 or 18 rays. Pelvic 7; origin much nearer to base of caudal
than tip of lower jaw. Lower series of photophores consisting of 6 on the isthmus, 12
from isthmus to pelvic, 6 (2 + 4) from pelvic to origin of anal, and 1 + 15-18 + 8-9
from anal to base of caudal; there are 9 photophores in the upper row, which ends above
the root of the pelvic fin.
Described from many specimens, 20 to 52 mm. in length.
Hab. Atlantic; Mediterranean; Red Sea; Indian Ocean; New Zealand; Japan.
I have carefully tabulated and compared a number of examples from the Mediter-
ranean, Atlantic and New Zealand, but am unable to detect any differences of sufficient
importance to warrant the recognition of more than one species. Jespersen and 'Taning
have noted certain differences in postlarvae from the Mediterranean and Atlantic
respectively, but are unable to separate the adults.
Maurolicus oculatus, Garman.
Garman, 1899, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. xxiv, p. 241, pl. liti, fig. 3.
Perhaps not distinct from the preceding species, but the dorsal fin is said to have only
6 rays, and the number and arrangement of some of the photophores seems to be some-
what different.
Hab. Coast of California.
The length of the type is not stated.
Genus Argyripnus, Gilbert and Cramer
Gilbert and Cramer, 1896, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. xtx, p. 414.
Closely related to Maurolicus. Praemaxillary, maxillary and mandible with asingle series
of sharp, needle-like teeth ; one or two small teeth on each side of the vomer and some very
small ones on each palatine. Less than 20 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch.
Series of photophores between pelvic fin and origin of anal continuous with that above
the anterior part of the anal. Origin of dorsal nearer to end of snout than base of caudal.
One or two species.
Argyripnus iridescens, McCulloch.
McCulloch, 1926, Biol. Res. ‘Endeavour’, Vv, p. 169, pl. xlv, fig. 2.
Depth of body nearly 34 in the length, length of head 34 to 33. Snout shorter than
eye, diameter of which is about 34 in length of head and much greater than interorbital
width. About 16 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal 12 (12-14). Anal
24-25 ; origin below last rays of dorsal. Pectoral with 16 rays. Pelvic 7; origin nearer to
tip of lower jaw than base of caudal. Lower series of photophores consisting of 6 on the
isthmus, 10 from isthmus to pelvic, 20-21 from pelvic to above anterior part of anal,
5 above middle of anal, and 13 from above last anal rays to base of caudal; there are
7 photophores in the upper series.
300 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Described from two specimens, 98 and too mm. in length; paratypes of the species
received in exchange from the Australian Museum.
Hab. Great Australian Bight.
Argyripnus ephippiatus, Gilbert and Cramer.
Gilbert and Cramer, 1896, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. x1x, p. 414, pl. xxxix, fig. 2.
Probably not distinct from the above, but the dorsal is said to have only 10 rays and
the anal 22. There are 19 photophores in the series from the pelvic to above anterior
part of anal, and 15 from last anal rays to base of caudal.
Hab. Hawaiian Islands.
Known from a single example in bad condition, about 90 mm. in length.
Genus Valenciennellus, Goode and Bean
Valenciennellus (Jordan and Evermann), Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 513; Jordan
and Evermann, 1896, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. xtvui (1), p. 577.
Close to Maurolicus. Dorsal 7-8 ; origin opposite to that of the anal. Anal 23-25. The
photophores above and behind the anal fin are arranged in four or five groups, each of
which is on a black background.
A single species.
Valenciennellus tripunctulatus (Esmark).
Maurolicus tripunctulatus, Esmark, 1871, Vid. Selsk. Forh. Christiania (1870), p. 489; Liitken,
1892, Vid. Selsk. Skr. (6), vu, p. 269, pl. i, fig. 6.
Valenciennellus tripunctulatus, Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth, p. 513; Jordan and
Evermann, 1896, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. xtvut (1), p. 577; Weber, 1913, “Siboga’ Fische, p. 20;
Weber and Beaufort, 1913, Fish. Indo-Austral. Arch. 11, p. 136, fig. 50; Pappenheim, 1914,
Deutsche Siid-polar-Exped. xv, Zool. vit, p. 182; Pietschmann, 1914, SitzBer. K. Akad. Wiss.
Wien, Cxxit (1), p. 427, pl. ii, figs. 4-5.
? Valenciennellus stellatus, Garman, 1899, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. xxiv, p. 239, pl. liu, fig. 2;
Brauer, 1906, ‘Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 100, fig. 42.
? Cyclothone sp. Fage, 1910, Ann. Inst. Océan. Monaco, 1 (7), p. 7, figs. 3-5.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00” S, 6°31’ 00” E. 44m. net, horizontal, 1000 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
24 mm.
St. 276. 5. vill. 27. 5°54’ 00"S, 11° 19’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 150 (—o) m.: 3 specimens,
14-19 mm,
St. 285. 16. vill. 27. 2° 43’ 30” S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
25mm.
St. 287. 19. vill. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (—o) m.: I specimen,
24 mm.
St. 288. 21. vill. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: 6 specimens,
20-23 mm.
Depth of body about 33 in the length, length of head 3?. Snout shorter than eye, dia-
meter of which is about 2} in length of head. Dorsal 7-8; origin about equidistant from
end of snout and base of caudal. Anal 23-25. Pectoral with 12 rays. Pelvic with 8(?) rays.
GONOSTOMATIDAE 301
Described from ro specimens, the largest 25 mm. in length.
Hab. Between Greenland and Iceland; Atlantic; Madagascar; Indian Ocean; ‘Timor
Sea; coast of California.
Family STERNOPTYCHIIDAE
Genus Argyropelecus, Cocco, 1829
Synopsis of the Species of Argyropelecus
I. Photophores forming a nearly continuous series.
A.
B.
Depth of body (without dorsal ridge) 2} to 24 in the length; praedorsal ridge rather low,
length of exposed portion of last spine more than twice in the base of the dorsal fin.
1. affinis, Garman, 1899
Depth of body (without dorsal ridge) 14 to nearly 2 in the length; praedorsal ridge higher,
length of exposed portion of last spine 13 to 13 in the base of the dorsal fin. 2. gigas, n.sp.
II. Postabdominal photophores in three groups (prae-anal, supra-anal, and caudal).
A.
A single serrated abdominal spine; supra-anal photophores separated from prae-anals by a
distance of more than half the length of the supra-anal series, and from the caudal by a
distance which is greater than the length of the supra-anal series.
3. hemigymnus, Cocco, 1829
B. A pair of smooth abdominal spines; supra-anal photophores separated from the prae-anals
by a very short interspace, and from the caudals by a distance which is less than the length
of the supra-anal series.
1. Posterior abdominal spine longer than the anterior and directed backwards; adults with
the dorsal and abdominal ridges serrated, and with a double series of spines on the lower
edge of the caudal peduncle. 4. aculeatus, Cuv. and Val., 1850
2. Abdominal spines subequal or anterior the longer; dorsal and abdominal ridges not
serrated ; no spines on the caudal peduncle.
a. Lower praeopercular spine curved, the upper very small or absent; depth of body
about 14 in the length. 5. olfersit (Cuvier, 1829)
b. Lower praeopercular spine straight, the upper of moderate size or rather small,
directed backwards; depth of body 12 or more in the length.
6. sladeni, Regan, 1908
Argyropelecus elongatus, Esmark [1871, Forh. Vid. Selsk. Christiania (1870), p. 489],
is too briefly described to be identified with certainty, but may be synonymous with
A. affinis. A. bocagei, Osorio [1909, Mem. Mus. Bocage, 1, p. 27, pl. 11, fig. 3], 1s also
unrecognisable.
Argyropelecus affinis, Garman.
Argyropelecus hemigymnus (non Cocco), Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. pl. xxxix, fig. 147.
Argyropelecus affinis, Garman, 1899, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. xxiv, p. 237; Brauer, 1906,
‘Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 103, pl. vii, figs. 1-2; Regan, 1908, Trans. Linn. Soc. Zool. xu,
p. 218; Jespersen and Taning, 1915, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped. 1908-10, 11, A, 2, p. 6; Barnard,
1925, Ann. S. Afric. Mus. xxi, p. 152, pl. viii, fig. 1.
St. 296. 26. viii. 27. 8° 1200” N, 18° 49’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 450-500 (—o) m.: 2 speci-
mens, 43-55 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Caribbean Sea; Indian Ocean.
Diiiii
302 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Argyropelecus gigas, n.sp.
St. 81. 18. vi. 26. 32°45’ 00" S, 8° 47’ 00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 650 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 44 mm.
St. 287. 19. viii. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
87 mm. Holotype.
11. ii. 25. 6° 55’ N, 15° 54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 82 mm.
Related to A. affinis. Depth of body 1 to nearly twice in the length, length of head
34 to 33. Praeoperculum with a strong, straight or slightly curved, downwardly directed
spine at the angle, above which is a much smaller spine directed outwards. No very
Fig. 9. Argyropelecus affinis. (x 14.)
Ve Yo wp
a
a atte f: LY
Fig. 10. Argyropelecus gigas. Holotype. (x 1.)
long teeth in the lower jaw; palatines toothless or with a few feeble teeth anteriorly.
Eleven gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch. Praedorsal ridge rather high, length of
exposed portion of last spine 12 to 13 in base of dorsal fin. Arrangement of photophores
similar to that of A. affinis. Dorsal 9. Anal 13.
Described from 3 specimens, 44 to 87 mm. in length, of which the largest is selected
as the holotype.
Hab. Atlantic.
In addition to the characters mentioned in the synopsis above, this species may be
readily distinguished from A. affinis by the form of the spine at the angle of the prae-
operculum.
STERNOPTYCHIIDAE 303
Argyropelecus hemigymnus, Cocco.! [PI. II, fig. 4.]
Cocco, 1829, Giorn. Sc. Sicil., fasc. 77, p..146; Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 106,
fig. 45; Regan, 1908, Trans. Linn. Soc. Zool. x1, p. 219; Zugmayer, 1gt1, Rés. Camp. Sci.
Monaco, Xxxv, p. 51; Holt and Byrne, 1913, Fisheries, Ireland, Sct. Invest. 1912, 1, p. 21,
figs. 7 5 and 8; Pappenheim, 1914, Deutsche Siidpolar-Exped. xv, Zool. vu, p. 182; Jespersen,
1915, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped. 1908-10, 11, A, 2, p. 7; Roule, 1919, Rés. Camp. Sct. Monaco,
LI, p. 25; Barnard, 1925, Ann. S. Afric. Mus. xxi, p. 153; Jespersen and Taning, 1926, Rep.
Danish Ocean. Exped. 1908-10, U1, A, 12, p. 48.
Sternoptyx mediterranea, Cocco, 1838, Oss. pesct Messina (Il Faro, tv), p. 7.
? Argyropelecus d’urvillei, Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1850, Hist. Nat. Poiss. XXII, p. 405.
? Argyropelecus intermedius, Clarke, 1878, Trans. Proc. N. Zealand Inst. x, p. 244, pl. vi.
? Argyropelecus heathi, Gilbert, 1905, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. xxii (1903), p. 601, pl. Ixxii,
fig. I.
The ‘Discovery’ obtained 57 examples of this species from the following stations in
the South Atlantic, at depths ranging from o-2500 m., measuring from g to 34 mm. in
length: St. 3, 81, 83, 85, 86, 87, 89, 100, 257, 258, 267.
Hab. Mediterranean; Atlantic; Indian Ocean; Hawaiian Islands (?); New Zealand(?).
Argyropelecus aculeatus, Cuvier and Valenciennes.
Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1850, Hist. Nat. Poiss. xxi1, p. 406; Giinther, 1864, Cat. Fish. v,
p- 386; Sauvage, 1891, Hist. Madagascar, xv1, Poissons, p. 483, pl. xlviii, fig. 5; Liitken, 1892, Vid.
Selsk. Skr. (6), Vil, p. 282; Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 127; Collett, 1903, Christiania
Vid. Selsk. For. No. 9, p. 108; Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 110, fig. 47; Murray
and Hjort, 1912, Depths of the Ocean, p. 612; Jespersen, 1915, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped.
1908-10, I, A, 2, p. 27.
Sternoptyx acanthurus, Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1850, Hist. Nat. Poiss. xx, p. 408.
Sternoptychides amabilis, Ogilby, 1888, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales (2), 11, p. 1313.
? Argyropelecus caninus, Garman, 1899, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. xxtv, p. 235.
Argyropelecus amabilis, McCulloch, 1923, Rec. Austral. Mus. xiv, p. 118, pl. xiv, fig. 3.
St. 89. 28. vi. 26. 34°05’15”S, 16°00’ 45” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 5 specimens,
9-55 mm.
St. 257. 24. vi. 27. 35°01’ 00"S, 10° 18’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: 2 specimens,
15-25 mm.
St. 259. 26. vi. 27. 34° 59’ 00” S, 16° 39’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 370-450 (—o) m.: 2 specimens,
14-19 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Indian Ocean.
The adults of this species may be readily distinguished from those of A. olfersii by
the serration of the dorsal and abdominal ridges, and by the double series of spines on
the lower surface of the caudal peduncle. Neither of these characters is apparent in
young or half-grown examples, which may be recognised, however, by the shape of the
body and the form of the abdominal spine.
1 For full synonymy of this species see Brauer (1906)
304 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Argyropelecus olfersii (Cuvier).1
Sternoptyx olfersit, Cuvier, 1829, R. Anim. ed. 2, Ul, p. 316.
Argyropelecus olfersu, Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1850, Hist. Nat. Poiss. xx, p. 408; Brauer,
1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 108, fig. 46; Regan, 1908, Trans. Linn. Soc. Zool. X11, p. 219;
Zugmayer, 1911, Rés. Camp. Sct. Monaco, xxxv, p. 52; Holt and Byrne, 1913, Fisheries, Ireland,
Sci. Invest. 1912, 1, p. 20, fig. 7a; Weber and Beaufort, 1913, Fish. Indo-Austral. Arch. 0,
p. 134, fig. 49; Jespersen, 1915, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped. 1908-10, 11, A, 2, p. 23; Roule,
1919, Rés. Camp. Sct. Monaco, Lu, p. 25; Barnard, 1925, Ann. S. Afric. Mus. xxi, p. 153.
Pleurothyris olfersi, Lowe, 1843, Hist. Fish. Madeira, p. 64.
? Argyropelecus lychnus, Garman, 1899, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. xxiv, p. 234, pl. J, fig. 1.
St. 281. 12. vill. 27. 00° 46’ 00” S, 5° 49 15” E. Young-fish trawl, 850-950 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
22 mm. ?
Hab. Atlantic; Indian Ocean; Pacific coast of Central America (?).
Fig. 11. Argyropelecus aculeatus. Fig. 12. Argyropelecus olfersii.
Young example. (x 24.) Young example. (x 2.)
Argyropelecus sladeni, Regan.
Regan, 1908, Trans. Linn. Soc. Zool. xu, p. 218. Ji
FohRBK OA iioh
St. 170. 23. ii. 27. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island, 61° 25’ 30” S, 53° 46’ 00” W. Young-fish
trawl, 200 (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 26 mm.
St. 269. 26. vii. 27. 15° 55’00"S, 10°35’00” E. 44m. net, horizontal, 600-700 (-0) m.: 3
specimens, 23-28 mm.
St. 276. 5. vill. 27. 5°54’ 00"S, 11°19’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 150 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
25 mm.
St. 285. 16. viii. 27. 2° 43’ 30”S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-o) m.: 32
specimens, 8-27 mm.
St. 288. 21. vili. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 7 specimens,
14-25 mm.
St. 297. 28. viii. 27. 12° 08’ 00” N, 20° 53’30” W. Young-fish trawl, 200-300 (—-o) m.: 1
specimen, 15 mm.
The young and half-grown specimens of this species are often difficult to distinguish
from those of A. olfersii. If specimens of equal size are compared, however, it will be
* For full synonymy of this species see Brauer (1906). Some of the references may refer to A. sladeni.
STERNOPTYCHIIDAE 305
observed that the body is deeper in A. o/fersii and the angle of the body behind the ab-
dominal spines more marked. The lower praeopercular spine is more or less straight in
A. sladeni, the small upper spine being well developed and directed outwards and back-
wards; in A. olfersii the lower spine is always more or less curved, and the upper spine
is very small in young examples and minute or absent altogether in the adults.
Hab. North and South Atlantic; Antarctic; Indian Ocean.
Fig. 13. Argyropelecus sladeni. Young and adult examples. (x 23.)
Sternoptyx diaphana, Hermann, 1781.
Brauer, 1906, ‘Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 115, figs. 56-63.
? Sternoptyx obscura, Garman, 1899, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. xxiv, p. 232, pl. liit, fig. 1.
The ‘ Discovery’ obtained 84 specimens of this species from the following stations in
the North and South Atlantic, at depths ranging from o-2700 m., measuring from 6 to
60 mm. in length: St. 78, 81, 85, 86, 87, 101, 256, 269, 281, 285, 287, 288, 295.
Hab. Atlantic; Indo-Pacific.
Fig. 14. Polyipnus laternatus. (x 14.)
Polyipnus laternatus, Garman.
Garman, 1899, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. xxiv, p. 238.
St. 276. 5. vili. 27. 5° 54’ 00” S, 11° 19’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 150 (-o) m.: 3 specimens, 12—
14 mm.
28. x. 25. 13°25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 43 m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 11 specimens, 18-34 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; West Indies.
Distinguished from P. spinosus, Giinther, 1887, by the form of the post-temporal spines,
the presence of palatine teeth, and the arrangement of the postabdominal photophores.
306 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Family ASTRONESTHIDAE
A monograph of this family has been quite recently published by Regan and Trewavas
(1929, Ocean. Rep. Danish ‘ Dana’-Exped. (1920-2), V, pp. 12-30, pls. i-vi, text-figs.),
based largely on the material obtained by the ‘Dana’ in the Atlantic, Caribbean Sea,
and Gulf of Panama.
Astronesthes filifer, Regan and 'Trewavas.
Regan and Trewavas, 1929, t.c. p. 14, pl. i, fig. 1
St. 294. 25. vili. 27. 4° 33’ 15” N, 16° 52’ 45” W. 1 m. tow-net, oblique, 84 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
28 mm. 70 cm. tow-net, oblique, 84 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 29 mm. Young-fish trawl, 100-150 (-o) m.:
2 specimens, 28-31 mm.
Hab. North Atlantic; Caribbean Sea.
Astronesthes cyaneus (Brauer, 1902).
Regan and Trewavas, f.c. p. 21, fig. 14.
II. Xi. 25. 6°55’ N, 15° 54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 42 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Caribbean Sea; Indian Ocean.
Astronesthes indicus, Brauer, 1902.
Regan and Trewavas, t.c. p. 23, pl. ii, fig. 3.
St. 288. 21. viii. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
85 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Caribbean Sea; Indian Ocean.
Borostomias antarcticus (Lénnberg).
Astronesthes antarcticus, Lonnberg, 1905, Zool. Anz. XXVIII, p. 762.
Astronectes antarcticus, Lonnberg, 1905, Wiss. Ergebn. Schwed. Stidpolar-Exped. v (6), p. 65.
Borostomias antarcticus, Regan and ‘Trewavas, f.c. p. 25.
St. 114. 12. xi. 26. 52° 55’00”S, 9° 50’ 00” E. 43m. net, horizontal, 650-700 m.: 1 specimen,
180 mm.
Depth of body 6} in the length, length of head 5+. Snout a little longer than eye,
diameter of which is 53 in length of head. Postocular luminous organ much smaller
than eye, apparently single, and with a slight anterior prolongation below the eye.
Barbel 14 times as long as head; unpigmented stem! followed by a swollen black part,
which is followed by a hyaline area with a small luminous body on either side and a
short filamentous process; barbel ending in a globular white bulb. Maxillary with 6 or
7 teeth. Dorsal 12; origin just behind pelvics. Anal 15. Pelvics 7-rayed, about equi-
distant from end of snout and base of caudal. Photophores—in ventral series I—P 10;
P-V 25; V—A 22 or 23; A-C 12: in lateral series O-V 23; V—A 22.
1 The skin may have been stripped off.
ASTRONESTHIDAE 307
Described from a single specimen, 180 mm. in length.
Hab. South Atlantic.
In the form of the teeth on the maxillary this species is a typical Borostomias, but in
the anterior prolongation of the postocular luminous organ and in the structure of the
barbel it is very similar to some of the species placed in the genus Diplolychnus by
Regan and Trewavas. The single specimen is unfortunately poorly preserved, and it is
impossible to be certain as to the form of the postocular luminous organ.
SOK —— -
LS
Fig. 15. Borostomias antarcticus. (x 2.) [Barbel x 1}.]
Neonesthes microcephalus, n.sp.
St. 269. 26. vii. 27. 15°55’00"S, 10°35’00" E. 44m. net, horizontal, 600~700 (-o) m.: 2
specimens, 145-148 mm.
Depth of body nearly 7 in the length, length of head 6}. Snout short; diameter of
eye 4 in length of head. Postocular luminous body 3 to 4 in length of head, with a
narrow subocular prolongation more or less covered by a pigment layer. Barbel 1,15 to
W7Ze
Fig. 16. Neonesthes microcephalus. Holotype. (x 2.)
24 times as long as head; in the specimen with the shorter barbel the hyaline stem ends
in a swollen white bulb which is prolonged distally into a fine filament, and there is a
collar of pigmented tissue round the base of the bulb; in the other specimen the hyaline
stem ends in a slightly swollen white tip, which is somewhat damaged but appears to be
without pigmented collar or filament. Dorsal 10, short, above interspace between
pelvics and anal. Anal 22 or 23. Pectorals 8. Pelvics 7-rayed, considerably nearer to
snout than to caudal. Traces of a ventral adipose fin. Photophores—in ventral series
I-P 9-10; P-V 16-17; V—A 18-19; A-C 12 (?): in lateral series O—-V 14 (?); V—A 18 (?).
Described from two specimens, 145 and 148 mm. in length, of which the smaller is
selected as the holotype.
Hab. South Atlantic.
308 3 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Close to N. macrolychnus, Regan and 'Trewavas, from the North Atlantic, differing in
the smaller head and mouth, structure of the barbel, and in the smaller number
of anal rays. The length and form of the barbel appears to be very different in the two
specimens described above, but I am unable to detect any other differences.
Neonesthes macrolychnus, Regan and Trewavas.
Regan and Trewavas, 1929, t.c. p. 30, pl. vi, fig. 2.
St. 81. 18. vi. 26. 32°45’ 00"S, 8° 47’ 00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 650 (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 65 mm.
Hab. North and South Atlantic.
Family CHAULIODONTIDAE
Chauliodus sloanei, Schneider, 1801.
Regan and ‘Trewavas, 1929, Ocean. Rep. Danish ‘ Dana’-Exped. (1920-2), V, Pp. 32, fig. 24.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00” S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 44m. net, horizontal, 1000 (—o) m.: 3 specimens,
33-190 mm.
St. 101. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.:
3 specimens, 195-230 mm. 4} m. net, horizontal, 350-400 (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 190 mm.
Din 202) T2aviil 27. ef Ir 00 .O, 95> 38 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 300 (-o) m.: 3 specimens,
30-70 mm.
St. 285. 16. vill. 27. 2° 43’ 30” S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 43 m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
60 mm.
St. 288. 21. vili. 27. 00° 56’ 00" S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
235 mm.
28. x. 25. 13° 25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 4} m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 7 specimens, 95-180 mm.
II. Xl. 25. 6° 55’ N, 15° 54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 175 mm.
Hab. Mediterranean; Atlantic; Caribbean Sea; Japan; Australia (?).
Chauliodus danae, Regan and 'Trewavas.
Regan and Trewavas, 1929, t.c. p. 34, pl. vii.
St. 81. 18. vi. 26. 32° 45’ 00” S, 8° 47’ 00” W. 4} m. net, horizontal, 650 (-o) m.: 5 specimens,
45-100 mm.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00" S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 1000 (-0) m.: 1 specimen,
145 mm.
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33°53’ 45”S, 9° 26’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
55 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Caribbean Sea; Indian Ocean; New Guinea.
Family STOMIATIDAE
A monograph of this family has been recently published by Regan and Trewavas
(1930, Ocean. Rep. Danish ‘ Dana’-Exped. (1920-2), VI, pp. 53-133, pls. i-xi, text-figs.),
based largely on material obtained by the ‘Dana’ in the Atlantic, Caribbean Sea, and
Gulf of Panama. Through the kindness of the authors I have been able to refer to their
manuscript during the preparation of this report.
STOMIATIDAE 309
Genus Odontostomias, gen. nov.
Elongate; head short. Cleft of mouth straight; jaws rather strong. ‘Teeth tapering to
sharp ends; first tooth in upper jaw rather small, fixed; second long, depressible,
followed by 2 or 3 outer small fixed teeth and 1 inner stronger depressible tooth; lower
jaw with a pair of small depressible teeth at the symphysis,
a strong fixed fang on either side, followed by an inner
depressible tooth and 3 or 4 outer fixed teeth; maxillary
teeth all small, more or less erect; two groups, each of 1 to
4 teeth, on the vomer; 2 to 5 teeth on each palatine; a single
pair of teeth on basibranchials or none. ‘Teeth on gill-arches
in pairs. Postocular luminous organ well developed (3 ?) or
absent (2 ?). Dorsal 20-23. Anal 23-26; origin nearly below
that of dorsal. Pectoral 7-9, without isolated ray. Pelvics
7-rayed, well behind middle of length. ’
Two species. Genotype: Odontostomias micropogon, n.sp. Spo.
Examination of the skulls of the fishes of this genus shows Fig. 17. Upper view of skull
that it belongs to the group containing Opostomias, Flagello- of Odontostomias micropogon.
stomias, Thysanactis and Leptostomias, distinguished by the (* 2) ¢P2 ePictic: fr. frontal;
: leth. lateral ethmoid; meth.
absence of post-temporals and the presence of parietals. In agaaininatileyy meses
the form of the ethmoid region this genus seems to be nearest praemaxillary; pto. pterotic;
to Opostomias, but differs in having no isolated pectoral ray, s2¢. supra-occipital.
and in the fangs of the lower jaw not perforating the praemaxillaries when the mouth is
closed. The structure of the anterior part of the praemaxillaries bears some resemblance
to that found in Thysanactis, but the median process is much less developed and the
lateral projections are narrower.
Odontostomias micropogon, n.sp.
St. 269. 26. vii. 27. 15°55’00"S, 10°35’ 00” E. 44m. net, horizontal, 600-700 (-o) m.: 2
specimens, 180-186 mm.
St. 270. 27. vil. 27. 13° 58’ 30”S, 11° 43’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 200 (-o) m.: 8 specimens,
40-52 mm.
St. 276. 5. vill. 27. 5° 54’ 00” S, 11° 19’ 00” E. 1 m. tow-net, oblique, 110 (-o) m.: 3 specimens,
38-45 mm. Young-fish trawl, 150 (—o) m.: ro specimens, 39-290 mm. (The largest specimen is
selected as the holotype.)
28.x.25. 13°25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 43m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 90 mm.
Depth of body 8} (young) to 12} in the length, length of head 7 to 83. Diameter of
eye 44 to 6 in length of head, a little greater than postocular luminous organ.! Barbel
+ to } length of head; stem black, terminating in a simple white portion, scarcely
1 The postocular luminous organ is well developed in some examples, and is altogether wanting in others.
I have been able to determine the sex of two individuals, and find that the one with an organ is a male and
the one without a female.
DIriii 7
310 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
broader than the stem in adults, but forming a more or less definite bulb in the young.
Five fixed teeth in lower jaw. A pair of teeth on basibranchials. Dorsal 20-23. Anal
23-26. Pectoral 7-9. Pelvic 7. Photophores—in ventral series I—-P 10-11; P—V 34-36;
V-A 13-15; A-C 12-13: in lateral series O-V 32-35; V—A 12-14.
Described from 24 specimens, 38 to 290 mm. in length.
Hab. North and South Atlantic.
Fig. 18. Odontostomias micropogon. Holotype. (x 4.)
Odontostomias masticopogon, n.sp.
28. x. 25. 13° 25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 44 m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 290 mm.
Depth of body nearly ro in the length, length of head 73. Diameter of eye about 6 in
length of head. No postocular luminous organ. Barbel 14 times length of fish; bulb
(and possibly part of stem) apparently broken off. Four fixed teeth in lower jaw. No
teeth on basibranchials. Dorsal 23. Anal 26 (or 27). Pectoral 9. Pelvic 7. Photophores
—in ventral series I-P 10; P-V 36; V—A 14; A-C ?: in lateral series O-V 35;
V-A 15.
Described from a single specimen, 290 mm. in length; holotype of the species.
Hab. North Atlantic.
Fig. 19. Odontostomias masticopogon. Holotype. (x }.)
Flagellostomias boureei (Zugmayer, 1913).
Regan and Trewavas, ¢.c. p. 57, pl. ii, fig. 2, text-fig. 33.
St. 81. 18. vi. 26. 32° 45°00" S, 8° 47’ 00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 650 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
60 mm.
St. 276. 5. vill. 27. 5° 54’00"S, 11° 1900” E. Young-fish trawl, 150 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
85 mm.
II. xi. 25. 6° 55’ N, 15° 54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (-o) m.: 2 specimens, 70-80 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; West Indies.
STOMIATIDAE 311
Leptostomias macropogon, n.sp.
St. 257. 24. vi. 27. 35°01’00"S, 10°18’00" E. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, 55 m.:1 specimen, 65 mm.
Depth of body about 16 in the length, length of head 10. Diameter of eye 4} in
length of head. Maxillary with oblique teeth, the first 2 or 3 larger and nearly erect.
Barbel nearly ? length of fish; proximal part of stem black, distal part with white spots
and patches, which become larger nearer the bulb and finally unite to cover the black
part completely; no filaments or appendages, except just proximal to bulb; bulb about
# length of head, slightly curved, narrow at tip; a series of 4 very small filaments on
distal part of stem and proximal half of convex side of bulb; two pairs of similar fila-
ments on distal part of bulb, and between these another filament, to which is attached
a minute bulb at the end of a very fine stem. Dorsal 20. Anal 25. Pectoral 10. Pelvic 7.
Photophores—in ventral series I-P 10; P-V 47; V-A 22; A-C rr: in lateral series
O-V 45; V-A 22.
VE
sos
Fig. 20. Leptostomias macropogon. Holotype. (x ?.) [Barbel x 3.]
Described from a single specimen, 165 mm. in length; holotype of the species.
Hab. South Atlantic.
This species may eventually prove to be identical with L. gracilis, Regan and Trewavas,
described from four specimens, 70 to 75 mm. in length, but appears to differ in the
length of the barbel and the structure of the bulb. Ina related species, L. ramosus, the
length of the barbel is less than § that of the fish in an example 56 mm. in length, and
nearly 3 in one of 180 mm. In L. leptobolus it is 3 in a specimen of 65 mm. and nearly
? in one of 95 mm. In Flagellostomias boureei the length of the barbel varies from } to
3 that of the fish in specimens measuring from 39 to 322 mm. in length. Assuming that
the barbel grows at much the same rate in all these species, one would expect it to be
about 4 the length of the fish in a specimen of L. gracilis of 165 mm., whereas in that
described above it is nearly ?. L. macropogon may be distinguished from L. haplocaulus
by the form of the bulb and the greater number of P-V photophores, and from L. longi-
barba by the structure of the bulb.
Bathophilus irregularis, n.sp.
St. 81. 18. vi. 26. 32° 45’ 00"S, 8° 47’ 00" W. 43 m. net, horizontal, 650 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
40 mm.
Depth of body about 64 in the length, length of head a little more than 4. Postocular
organ large; a small white spot below its anterior part. Dorsal 12 (or 13). Anal 16.
Pectoral 3 + 7. Pelvics 21-rayed; inserted at middle of side, a little nearer to base of
7.2
7-2
312 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
caudal than end of snout. Photophores in ventral series consisting of 5 in front of the
pectoral fin, 4 very small ones close together immediately behind the pectoral, 2 close
together a little before pelvic and 1 or 2 very small ones just behind that fin, 4 close to-
gether above vent, and 5 behind anal. In the lateral series O-V 10 + 3, forming an
ascending row, the last three being on the back; V—A 11, forming a curved row running
from level of pelvic fin upwards nearly to back and then down again to the same level.
Described from a single specimen, 40 mm. in length; holotype of the species.
Hab. South Atlantic.
Fig. 21. Bathophilus irregularis. Holotype. (x 23.)
This species seems to be most nearly related to B. /ongipes and B. schizochirus, Regan and
Trewavas; it is readily distinguished from the former by the number of pelvic rays, and from
the latter by the number of pectoral rays and larger postocular luminous organ, and from all
other species of the genus by the peculiar arrangement of the lateral photophores.
Bathophilus longipinnis (Pappenheim, 1914).
Regan and Trewavas, t.c. p. 68, pl. v, fig. 1.
St. 81. 18. vi. 26. 32° 4500" S, 8° 47’ 00” W. 43m. net, horizontal, 650 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
102 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Caribbean Sea.
Bathophilus pawneei, Parr, 1927.
Regan and Trewavas, t.c. p. 69, fig. 47.
St. 280. 10. viii. 27. 00° 36’ 00” S, 8° 28’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 200-100 (-o) m.: 5 specimens,
55-62 mm.
St. 286. 17. vili. 27. 3°06’ 30”S, 3° 5300” W. Young-fish trawl, 125 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
47 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Caribbean Sea.
Eustomias (Haploclonus) regani, n.sp.
St. 288. 21. viii. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. 1m. tow-net, oblique, 73-0 m.: 1 specimen,
58 mm.
Depth of body 11} in the length, length of head about 8. Diameter of eye 54 in
length of head, interorbital width about 5. Barbel { length of fish; bulb small, oval, with
STOMIATIDAE 313
terminal filaments arranged as shown in the accompanying figure; long filament with a
luminous swelling at the tip. Dorsal 22 (?). Anal 38. Pectoral 3. Pelvic 7. Photo-
phores—in ventral series I-P 7; P-V 26; V—A 12; A-C 19: in lateral series O—V 26;
V-A 12.
Described from a single specimen, 58 mm. in length; holotype of the species.
Hab. Atlantic.
Apparently related to E. enbarbatus, Welsh, differing chiefly in the form of the barbel.
Named for Dr C. Tate Regan, F.R.S., in recognition of his work on the ‘Dana’
Stomiatoids.
MP
as, ——G—DY65
<a ; Tee
Fig. 22. Eustomias (Haploclonus) regani. Holotype. (x 2.) [Barbel x 6.]
Eustomias (Eustomias) obscurus, Vaillant, 1888.
Regan and Trewavas, ¢.c. p. 81, pl. vii, fig. 4, text-figs. 58—60.
St. 288. 21. vill. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
156 mm.
Hab. Atlantic.
According to the label the basal half of the proximal swelling of the barbel was
coloured pink in life, the apical half and the distal swelling being cream coloured.
Eustomias (Nominostomias) trewavasae, n.sp.
St. 79. 13. vi. 26. 34° 48’ 00” S, 16° 36’ 00” W. 43 m. net, horizontal, rooo (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
60 mm.
Depth of body 12 in the length, length of head (with snout produced) about 8.
Diameter of eye about 5 in length of head. Barbel more than } length of fish; 3 bulbs,
the middle one close to and somewhat larger than the distal one, which bears a knob-
like process at its extremity but no filaments; a small luminous swelling on the stem at
some distance from the proximal bulb; a bunch of about 6 filaments, deeply pigmented
at the base comes off from the stem just distal to the first bulb. Dorsal 23 (?). Anal
35 (?). Pectoral 3. Pelvic 7. Photophores—in ventral series I-P 7; P-V 32; V—A 16;
A-C 15: in lateral series O-V 32; V-A 16.
Described from a single specimen, 60 mm. in length; holotype of the species.
Hab. South Atlantic.
This species appears to be rather close to E. variabilis, Regan and 'Trewavas, and E.
trituberatus, Regan and 'Trewavas, differing from both chiefly in the form of the barbel.
Named for Miss Ethelwynn Trewavas, in recognition of her work on the ‘Dana’
Stomiatoids.
314 DISCOVERY REPORTS
A coloured sketch of the barbel of this species was made by Mr E. R. Gunther on
board the ‘ Discovery’. The proximal swelling and the small swelling just behind it were
pale yellow, the large bulb in the distal portion turquoise, and the distal bulb cream-
coloured with a bright yellow tip. The central axis was said to be pigmented with black
along its centre, and all the bulbs and swellings were enclosed in a wide transparent
coating of pale blue.
Fig. 23. Eustomias (Nominostomias) trewavasae. Holotype. (x 2.) [Barbel x 6.]
Haplostomias tentaculatus, Regan and 'Trewavas.
Regan and 'Trewavas, 1930, ¢.c. p. 109, pl. xi, fig. 1, text-figs.
St. 101. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 44m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.:
I specimen, 204 mm.
Depth of body equal to length of head, which is 8 in length of fish. Diameter of eye
5? in length of head, about as long as postocular luminous organ. Barbel twice as long
as head, with black stem and white ovate bulb; axis of stem prolonged along edge of
bulb, distally becoming free and forming a tentacle-like appendage. Dorsal 16. Anal 19.
Pectoral 5. Pelvic 7. Photophores—in ventral series I-P 8 + 2; P-V 27; V-A 15;
A-C 9g or to: in lateral series O-V 25; V—A 14.
Fig. 24. Haplostomias tentaculatus. (x
hie
ee
Described from a single specimen, 204 mm. in length.
The largest specimen studied by Regan and Trewavas was 100 mm. in length, and the
accompanying figure illustrates the difference in the form of the body in the two fishes.
Echiostoma tanneri (Gill, 1883).
Regan and. Trewavas, t.c. p. 117, fig. 113.
St. 10. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.:
2 specimens, 170-200 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Gulf of Mexico; Caribbean Sea.
STOMIATIDAE 315
Idiacanthus niger, Regan, 1914.
Regan and Trewavas, t.c. p. 128, fig. 124.
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33°53’ 45”S, 9°26’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, r1ooo (-0) m.: 1 specimen,
105 mm.
St. 107. 4. xi. 26. 45° 03’ 00" S, 17° 03’ 00" E. 44m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.: 2 specimens,
425-440 mm.
St. 244. 9. vi. 27. 38° 26’ 30” S, 24° 48’ 30” W. 70 cm. tow-net, horizontal, 93 m.: 1 specimen,
98 mm.
St. 257. 24. vi. 27. 35° 01’00"S, 10°18’ 00" E. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
145 mm.
Hab. South Atlantic; New Zealand; Chile.
Fig. 25. Barbel of Jdiacanthus niger. (x 1%.)
Macrostomias longibarbatus, Brauer.
Brauer, 1902, Zool. Anz. xxv, p. 283; ‘Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 52, pl. iti, fig. 2
St. 281. 12. viii. 27. 00° 46’ 00” S, 5° 49’ 15” E. Young-fish trawl, 850-950 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
95 mm.
Hab. Atlantic and Indian Oceans.
Stomias ferox, Reinhardt, 1842.
Ege, 1918, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped. (1908-10), U1, A, 4, p. 3.
10.X 25. 41°37’ 15” N, 12° 30’ 20” W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, goo (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 88 mm.
Hab. North Atlantic.
Stomias affinis, Giinther.
Giinther, 1887, Deep-Sea Fish. ‘Challenger’, p. 205, pl. liv, fig. A; Goode and Bean, 1895,
Ocean. Ichth. p. 108, fig. 129; Jordan and Sussman 1896, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. xivit (1),
p. 588; Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 51.
Stomias elongatus, Wood-Mason and Alcock, 1891, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), Vi, p. 1295 Alcock,
1899, Cat. Indian Deep-Sea Fish. p. 147.
Stomias valdiviae, Brauer, 1906, * Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 48, pl. iii, fig. 1, text-figs. 11-13.
St. 276. 5. viii. 27. 5°54’00"S, 11° 19’00" E. Young-fish trawl, 150 (-o) m.: 2 specimens,
32-110 mm.
316 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 280. 10. viii. 27. 00° 36’ 00” S, 8° 28’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 100-200 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
158 mm.
St. 282. 12. viii. 27. 1° 11/00”S, 5°38’ 00" E. Young-fish trawl, 300 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
55 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; West Indies; Indian Ocean.
I have examined the type of Stomias affinis (120 mm.), and also the type of S. elong-
atus (105 mm.), lent for examination by the Indian Museum.
Stomias atlanticus, Pappenheim.
Pappenheim, 1914, Deutsche Stidpolar-Exped. xv, Zool. vu, p. 169.
St. 109. 5. xi. 26. 46° 25’ 00” S, 15° 13’ 00” E. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, 192 m.: 1 specimen,
240 mm.
Depth of body 16 in the length, length of head 10$. Snout shorter than eye, diameter
of which is 4} in length of head and about equal to interorbital width. Praemaxillary
with 5 teeth, of which the second is enlarged and fang-like; a few minute teeth on the
Fig. 26. Stomias atlanticus. (x 1.)
maxillary; mandible with 7 or 8 teeth; a single pair of vomerine teeth and 1 or 2 on each
palatine. Barbel ? length of head, trifid at its extremity. Dorsal 18. Anal 20. Photo-
phores—in ventral series I-P 11; P-V 46; V—A 12; A-C 15 (?): in lateral series 58.
Described from a single specimen, 240 mm. in length.
Hab. South Atlantic.
Stomias colubrinus, Garman, 1899.
Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 47, fig. 10.
The ‘ Discovery’ obtained 34 specimens of this species from the following stations in
the North and South Atlantic, at depths ranging from 0-950 m., measuring from 55 to
265 mm. in length: St. 170, 269, 270, 276, 281, 282, 296, 297.
Hab. Atlantic; Pacific coast of Central America.
MALACOSTEIDAE 317
Family MALACOSTEIDAE
This family has also been recently monographed by Regan and 'Trewavas (1930,
Ocean Rep. Danish ‘Dana’-Exped. (1920-22), VI, pp. 133-143, pls. xiii, xiv,
text-figs.).
Photostomias guernei, Collett, 1889.
Regan and ‘Trewavas, t.c. p. 134, figs.
St. 288. 21. vill. 27. 00°56’ 00" S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
32 mm.
28. x. 25. 13° 25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 44m. net, horizontal, goo (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 140 mm.
II. X1.25. 6°55’ N, 15° 54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 92 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Caribbean Sea.
In the male specimen the eye measures 3? in the length of the head, and the post-
ocular organ is very large, 23 in length of lower jaw. In these characters it approaches
P. atrox, Alcock, but the shape of the luminous organ appears to be different. In the
female the eye is about equal to the postocular luminous organ, and 5 in length
of head.
Aristostomias xenostoma, Regan and ‘T'rewavas.
Regan and Trewavas, 1930, ¢.c. p. 139, pl. xiii, fig. 3, text-figs. 133-134.
St. 286. 17. viii. 27. 3° 06’ 30” S, 3° 53’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 102-0 m.: I specimen, 55 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Caribbean Sea.
Malacosteus niger, Ayres, 1857.
Regan and 'Trewavas, t.c. p. 142, fig. 138.
St. 85. 23. vi. 26. 33°07’ 40” S, 4°30’ 20” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 2000 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
150 mm.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’00"S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
120 mm.
St. 100. 2.x. 26. 33°20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00” S, 15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl,
625-675 m.: 2 specimens, 75-95 mm.
St. ror, 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13'S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 44 m. net. horizontal, 850-950 m.:
I specimen, 140 mm.
St. 298. 29. vili. 27. 13°01’ 45” N, 21°34’ 45” W. Young-fish trawl, goo-1200 (-0) m.: I
specimen, 30 mm.
28. x. 25. 13°25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 44m. net, horizontal, goo (—o) m.: 10 specimens, 80-155 mm.
II. x1. 25. 6° 55’ N, 15° 54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 75 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Indian Ocean.
DIlili 8
318 - DISCOVERY REPORTS
Order INIOMI
Family SUDIDAE
Sudis bronsoni, Parr.
Parr, 1928, Bull. Bingham Ocean. Coll. 111 (3), p. 36, fig. 3.
St. 81. 18. vi. 26. 32°45’ 00"S, 8° 47’ 00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 650 (—o) m.: rspecimen, 26mm.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33°25’ 00”S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 1000 (—o) m. : specimen, 55 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; West Indies.
The larger of these specimens agrees very closely with the description of .S. bronsont,
but the diameter of the eye is markedly smaller, being contained about 2# in the length
of the snout and about 6 times in that of the head, as compared with 2} and 44 times
respectively in the type of the species. Mr Parr has been kind enough to compare the
larger of the ‘ Discovery’ specimens with the type, and writes that in general appearance,
body form, pigmentation, position of fins, etc., they are perfectly alike, and that, apart
from the size of the eye, he is unable to detect any other differences. I have, therefore,
identified these examples with his species until sufficient material is available to make
possible a study of the individual variations in these fishes.
Sudis kroyeri (Liitken, 1892).
Rarryt:cyp. 30.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00” S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 44m. net, horizontal, 1000 (—o) m.: 2 specimens,
70-95 mm.
St. 100. 2.x. 26. 33° 20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00” S, 15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl,
625-675 m.: I specimen, 100 mm. :
St. 285. 16. vill. 27. 2° 43’ 30”S, 00° 56’30” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-o) m.: 1
specimen, 45 mm.
Hab. Atlantic.
Family MYCTOPHIDAE!
Scopelopsis multipunctatus, Brauer.
Brauer, 1906, * Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 146, fig. 71.
St. ror. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.:
I specimen, 36 mm.
Hab. Off South Africa.
Genera Myctophum, Lampanyctus, Diaphus, Lampadena2
The species included in the above-mentioned genera are very numerous, but, since
some of them have been briefly and often quite inadequately described, a certain
* Tam much indebted to Mr A. Fraser-Brunner for assistance in determining many of the specimens of
Myctophum, Lampanyctus, Diaphus and Lampadena. His preliminary sorting of the material has greatly
facilitated my work on these genera.
* As suggested by Taning, further investigation will probably lead to the recognition of more than four
well-defined genera in this group.
MYCTOPHIDAE 319
number of nominal species are probably included among them. Brauer [1906, ‘ Valdivia’
Tiefsee-fische, pp. 150-251], who included all the species in a single genus, Myctophum,
was the first to reduce the chaos to some sort of order, and in quite recent years other
investigators have added still further to our knowledge of the group. In 1928 Parr
[Bull. Bingham Ocean. Coll. 111 (3), pp. 49-156] published a complete synopsis of the
four genera, based on the collections made in the Western Atlantic and West Indies by
the ‘Pawnee’, and described a number of new species. His keys to the species have
proved useful in determining many of the ‘ Discovery’ specimens, and as a groundwork,
but, as many of the types of the species preserved in various museums and institutions
were inaccessible to him, these keys are necessarily somewhat tentative. In the same
year Taning [Vzd. Medd. Dansk nat. For. 86, pp. 49—69| published a preliminary synopsis
of the species of the North Atlantic, and he is at present engaged in studying the large
amount of material obtained in this and other regions by the ‘ Dana’. ‘This synopsis has
proved of great value and interest, since, in addition to the ‘Dana’ material from the
Atlantic, Taning has examined some specimens from the Gulf of Panama and from the
Malay Archipelago, and has also studied most of the type specimens of these genera
preserved in various European and other museums. Ina recent paper [1929, Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist. (10), v, pp. 510-15] I have published brief notes and descriptions of certain
specimens in the British Museum collection, as a supplement to the works of Parr and
Taning. In the present report I give for each species a reference to the pages and
figures in the papers of Brauer, Parr and Taning.
Genus Myctophum, Rafinesque, 1810
The group of species distinguished by having no Pol photophores, and the AO
forming a single continuous series, may be arranged as follows :—
I. Lens of the eye excentric, dorsal.
A. The two first SAO and the two Pre separated from one another by wide interspaces.
1. parallelum, Lénnberg, 1905
B. The first two SAO and the two Pre normally spaced. 2. arcticum (Liitken, 1892)
II. Lens of eye normal, central.
A. Depth of body less than 3 in the length, length of head 2} to 3; eye 1 to 2} in head. AO
10-12. 3. rissot (Cocco, 1829)
B. Depth of body more than 3 in the length, length of head 3 to 4; eye 2} to 3 in head.
1. No SAO photophores; AO 14-15, first two elevated. 4. anderssoni, Lénnberg, 1905
2. 3 SAO photophores; AO 15-18, none elevated.
a. Origin of anal just behind last dorsal ray; dorsal commencing a little behind root of
pelvic; 2 PVO, close together and side by side. 5. tenisoni, n.sp.
b. Origin of anal below dorsal, which commences well behind root of pelvic; 2 PVO
placed one above the other.
* Eye 24 to nearly 3 in the head; posterior margin of maxillary truncate; origin of
anal below middle of dorsal. 6. antarcticum (Ginther, 1878)
** Eye 21 to 2} in head; posterior margin of maxillary rounded; origin of anal below
posterior part of dorsal. 7. subasperum (Giinther, 1864)
8-2
320 _ DISCOVERY REPORTS
Myctophum parallelum, Lénnberg.
Lénnberg, 1905, Zool. Anz. xxvill, p. 764; 1905, Wiss. Ergebn. Schwed. Siidpolar-Exped. v (6),
p. 62; Parr, 1928, Bull. Bingham Ocean. Coll. 111 (3), p. 57.
Myctophum (Myctophum) parallelum, Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 174, fig. 86.
St. 78. 12. vi. 26. 35° 18’00”S, 19° 01’ 10” W. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
17 mm.
St. 85. 23. vi. 26. 33°07’ 40S, 4° 30’ 20” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 2000 (—o) m. : 1 specimen, 20 mm.
St. 100. 4.x. 26. 33° 20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00” S, 15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl,
2500 (-O) m.: 2 specimens, 30-31 mm.
St. 100. 4.x. 26. 33° 20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00" S, 15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl,
2500-2000 m.; 2 specimens, 27-29 mm.
St. 101. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 350-400(—o)m.:
2 specimens, 29-30 mm.
Depth of body about 33 in the length, length of head 3} to 34. Diameter of eye 23
to 24in length of head. Dorsal 12. Anal 22. Pectoral 15. Pelvic 8. PLO photophore
on lower part of pectoral base. 2 PVO, situated close together and side by side, below
base of pectoral fin. 5 PO, all level. VLO nearer pelvic fin than lateral line. 4 VO, the
second scarcely elevated. 3 SAO, interspace between first and second greater than that
between second and third, forming a very obtuse angle. AO 15, forming an almost
straight line, 4 behind last anal ray. Pre fairly well separated.
Described from several specimens, 17 to 31 mm. in length.
Hab. Off South-west Africa; South Atlantic.
Myctophum rissoi (Cocco, 1829).
Brauer, t.c. p. 170, fig. 83; Taning, 1928, Vid. Medd. Dansk nat. For. 86, p. 52; Parr, t.c. p. 58.
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33° 53°45” S, 9° 26’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—-o) m.: 1 specimen,
15 mm.
St. IOI. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° og’ to15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 350-400(—0)m.:
3 specimens, 63-72 mm.
St. 285. 16. vili. 27. 2° 43’ 30” S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (—o) m.: 3
specimens, 21-23 mm.
Hab. Mediterranean; Atlantic; Indian Ocean.
Myctophum anderssoni, Lénnberg.
Scopelus antarcticus (non Giinther), Boulenger, 1902, Rep. Coll. Nat. Hist. ‘Southern Cross’,
v, Pisces, p. 174.
Myctophum anderssoni, Lonnberg, 1905, Zool. Anz. XXvuil, p. 763; 1905, Wiss. Ergebn. Schwed.
Siidpolar-Exped. v (6), p. 61; Parr, 1928, t.c. p. 58.
Myctophum (Myctophum) anderssoni, Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 172, fig. 84.
St. 64. 22. v. 26. 48° 34’ 00” S, 53° 34’ 30” W. 1 m. tow-net, horizontal, go (-o) m.: 2 specimens,
18-21 mm.
Depth of body 4} to 43 in the length, length of head 33. Diameter of eye about 3 in
length of head. Dorsal 12. Anal 18-19. Pectoral 14. Pelvic 8. PLO photophore on
MYCTOPHIDAE 321
lower part of pectoral base, forming a straight line with the two PVO, which lie close
together and side by side. 5 PO (6 on one side in the ‘Southern Cross’ specimen), all
level. VLO much nearer pelvic fin than lateral line. 4 VO, all level. No SAO. AO
14-15, the first 2 elevated, the remainder forming a more or less straight line, 4 behind
the last anal ray. Pre close together, second scarcely elevated.
Described from three specimens, 18 to 55 mm. in length.
Hab. South Atlantic; Antarctic (Victoria Land).
The types of this species, 22 and 60 mm. in length, were in poor condition, and the
SAO photophores were described as missing, but their absence in all the specimens
described above suggests that this is the normal condition. It is possible, however, that
the so-called anterior AO, which are elevated above the level of the remainder, should
be regarded as belonging to the SAO series.
Myctophum tenisoni, n.sp.
St. 36. 18. iii. 26. 38 miles N 39° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 1 m. tow-net, horizontal,
go (—o) m.: I specimen, 65 mm.
St. 44. 3. iv. 26. 32 miles N 51° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 1 m. tow-net, horizontal,
170 (—0) m.: 2 specimens, 64—69 mm.
St. 65. 22. v. 26. 48° 18’ 00” S, 53° 09’ 00” W. 2 m. tow-net, horizontal, 120 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
32 mm.
St. 72. I. vi. 26. 41° 43’ 20” S, 42° 20’ 40” W. 43 m. net, horizontal, 2000 (—o) m.: 3 specimens,
36-46 mm.
St. 107. 4. xi. 26. 45° 03’ 00” S, 17° 03’ 00” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.: I specimen,
50 mm.
St. 109. 5. xi. 26. 46°25’ 00" S, 15° 13’00” E. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, 96 m.: 3 specimens,
42-47 mm. (Largest selected as the holotype.)
St. 114. 12. xi. 26. 52°25’00”S, 9° 50’00"E. 44m. net, horizontal, 650-700 (-o) m.: 2
specimens, 43-60 mm.
St. 217. 18. iv. 27. Drake Strait, 58° 27’ 30” S, 67° 55’ 00” W. 1 m. tow-net, horizontal, 77 m.:
2 specimens, 35-36 mm.
St. 239. 2. vi. 27. 46°56’ 00"S, 46°03’ 00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 1050-1350 (—o) m.: 2
specimens, 25~27 mm.
Depth of body 3% to 44 in the length, length of head 3 to 32. Snout much shorter
than eye, diameter of which is 22 to 3 in length of head and much greater than the inter-
orbital width. Angle of praeoperculum nearly vertical. Maxillary expanded behind,
extending to a little beyond posterior margin of eye; lower jaw a little projecting.
Dorsal 11-13; origin slightly behind root of pelvic; longest rays about } head. Anal
22-24; origin just behind last dorsal ray. Pectoral 14-15; }? to + length of head. Pelvic
8. About 42 scales in the lateral line. A very small antorbital luminous organ above the
nostril and a somewhat larger one below the anterior part of the eye; 2 on the prae-
operculum, the upper larger and level with the upper edge of the maxillary; 3 below
the lower jaw, the middle one the largest. PLO on lower part of pectoral base. 2 PVO,
close together and side by side. 5 PO, all level, VLO much nearer pelvic fin than
lateral line. 4 VO, the second scarcely elevated. 3 SAO, all close together and nearly
322 DISCOVERY REPORTS
forming a straight line; the interspace between first and second greater than that be-
tween second and third. AO 17-18, none elevated, 3 or 4 behind last anal ray. No Pol.
2 Pre, close together, second scarcely elevated. 6 or 7 luminous scales on upper edge of
caudal peduncle (3) or 4 or 5 on lower edge (2). Uniformly silvery.
Described from nine specimens, 35 to 69 mm. in length.
Fig. 27. Myctophum tenisoni. Holotype. (x 13.)
Hab. Southern Atlantic (south of 46°); Antarctic.
Named for Lieut.-Col. W. P. C. Tenison, D.S.O., who is responsible for the illustra-
tions in the text of this report.
Myctophum antarcticum (Giinther).
Scopelus antarcticus, Giinther, 1878, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), 11, p. 184; 1887, Deep-Sea Fish.
‘Challenger’, p. 196, pl. li, fig. D.
Myctophum antarcticum, Loénnberg, 1905, Wiss. Ergebn. Schwed. Siidpolar-Exped. v (6), p. 60;
Roule, 1913, Deux. Expéd. Antarct. Frang. (1908-10), Fish. p. 20; Regan, 1913, Trans. R. Soc.
Edinburgh, x.1x, p. 234; 1916, Larval Fishes ‘ Terra Nova’, p. 127, pl. i, figs. 1-3; Parr, 1928,
Es (De. Gist
Myctophum (Myctophum) antarcticum, Brauer, 1906, t.c. p. 168, fig. 82; Pappenheim, 1914,
Deutsche Siidpolar-Exped. xv, Zool. vu (2), p. 192; Barnard, 1925, Ann. S. Afric. Mus. xx1,
Pp. 240.
St. 114. 12. xi. 26. 52°25’00"S, 9°50’00” E. 44m. net, horizontal, 650-700 (-o) m.: 19
specimens, 14-80 mm.
St. 116. 14. xi. 26. 54° 30’ 00” S, 5° 34’ 00” E. 70 cm. tow-net, horizontal, 139 m.: I specimen,
70 mm.
St. 121. 25. xi. 26. 50° 59’ 00” S, 11° 44’ 00” W. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, 58 m.: 1 specimen,
50 mm.
St. 197. 3. iv. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands, 62° 27’ 00” S, 58° 11’ 30” W. 1m. tow-
net, horizontal, 134 m.: I specimen, 78 mm.
St. 202. 5. iv. 27. Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands, 62° 48’ 00” S, 60° 05’ 00” W. 1 m. tow-net,
horizontal, 188 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 95 mm.
St. 267. 23. vii. 27. 24° 31’ 00" S, 12° 15’ 30” E. 1 m. tow-net, oblique, 117 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
21 mm.
St. WS 30. 19. xii. 26. 53°34’ 15” S, 38° 36°15” W. 1 m. tow-net, horizontal, 134 (—67) m.: 1
specimen, 65 mm. :
Depth of body 34 to 4} in the length, length of head 34 to nearly 4. Diameter of eye
24 to nearly 3 in length of head (in specimens over 60 mm.), Posterior margin of
MYCTOPHIDAE 323
maxillary truncate, a little behind posterior edge of eye. Dorsal 13-14; origin well
behind root of pelvic. Anal 19-21; origin nearly below middle of dorsal. Pectoral 13-15.
Pelvic 8. About 40 scales in the lateral line. PLO photophore on lower part of pectoral
base. 2 PVO, close together and one above the other, forming a right-angle with PLO.
5 PO, the last very little elevated. VLO nearer pelvic fin than lateral line. 4 VO, all
level. 3 SAO, forming an obtuse angle, interspace between first and second a little
greater than that between second and third. AO 17-18, almost in a straight line, 4
behind last anal ray. No Pol. 2 Pre, rather close together, the second a little elevated.
6 or 7 luminous scales on upper edge of caudal peduncle, or 5 on the lower edge.
Described from several specimens, 35 to 95 mm. in length, including the types of the
species.
Hab, Circumpolar in southern seas.
Fig. 28. Myctophum antarcticum. (x 1.)
Myctophum subasperum (Giinther).
Scopelus subasper, Giinther, 1864, Cat. Fish. v, p. 411; Liitken, 1892, Vid. Selsk. Skr. (6), vu,
p- 240, fig. 1.
Myctophum megalops, Peters, 1865, Monatsber. Akad. Berlin (1864), p. 393.
? Scopelus colletti, Liitken, 1892, t.c. p. 249, fig. 7.
? Benthosema colletti, Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 78.
Dasyscopelus subasper, Goode and Bean, 1895, t.c. p. 92.
Myctophum (Myctophum) subasperum, Brauer, 1906, ‘Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 175, fig. 87.
Myctophum antarcticum, Gilbert, 1911, Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. xxx, p. 13; Regan, 1914,
Fishes ‘ Terra Nova’, p. 1; Waite, 1916, Fish. Austral. Antarct. Exped. p. 59, pl. iv, fig. 2, text-
fig. 13.
Myctophum subasperum, Parr, 1928, Bull. Bingham Ocean. Coll. 111 (3), p. 58.
St. 78. 12. vi. 26. 35° 18’00”S, 19° 01’ 10” W. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 19 specimens,
17-23 mm. ?
St. 104. 31. x. 26. 41° 33’ 30” S, 17° 58’ 00” W. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, o-5 m.: 1 specimen,
32 mm.
Close to M. antarcticum. Depth of body 3? to 44 in the length, length of head 3} to
nearly 4. Diameter of eye 2} to 23 in length of head. Posterior margin of maxillary
rounded, the maxillary scarcely extending beyond hinder edge of eye. Dorsal 13-14.
Anal 21-22; origin below posterior part of dorsal. Pectoral 16 (?). Pelvic 8. 38 to 40
scales in the lateral line; those on the upper part of the body in adults with deeply
crenulated edges, giving them a ctenoid appearance. PVO more widely separated and
324 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
SAO forming a much less obtuse angle than in M. antarcticum. AO 15-16, forming a
continuous series in which three more or less distinct groups may be recognised; first
two nearer anal base than the remainder, 9 or 10 arranged in a slight ~-shaped curve,
and 4 behind the anal fin parallel with those of the opposite side. One to three luminous
scales on upper or lower edge of the caudal peduncle.
Described from five specimens, 32 tog5 mm. in length, including the type of the species.
Hab. South Atlantic; Antarctic; Tasmania; South Pacific.
This species seems to have been confused with the preceding by some authors, and
some of the references given under M. antarcticum may refer to M. subasperum.
Fig. 29. Myctophum subasperum. (x 1.) [Scale x 3.]
Myctophum interruptum, Taning.
Taning, 1928, ¢.c. p. 56; Parr, t.c. p. 59.
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33° 53’ 45”S, 9° 26’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 35 mm.
St. 257. 24. vi. 27. 35°01’ 00”S, 10° 18’00” E. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
28 mm.
The larger of the two specimens was coloured a brilliant silver on the sides in life,
on which silver photophores were just discernible: the dorsal surface was a brilliant
iridescent deep metallic blue.
Myctophum glaciale (Reinhardt, 1837).
Brauer, t.c. p. 80, fig. 92; Taning, ¢.c. p. 56; Parr, t.c. p. 60
28. x. 25. 13° 25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 4} m. net. horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 14 specimens, 45-50 mm.
Hab. North Atlantic and Arctic waters.
Myctophum laternatum, Garman, 1899.
Brauer, ¢.c. p. 178, figs. go-g1; Taning, f.c. p. 56 (var. atlanticum) ; Parr, t.c. pp. 61, 67.
The ‘Discovery’ obtained 15 specimens of this species from the following stations
in the Atlantic, at depths ranging from o-2500 m., measuring 11 to 27 mm. in length:
St. 86, 89, 100, 285, 287, 288, 289, 296.
Hab. Atlantic; Indian and Pacific Oceans
MYCTOPHIDAE 32
in
Myctophum fibulatum, Gilbert and Cramer, 1897.
Parr, t.c. pp. 61, 67.
St. 257. 24. vi.27. 35°01’ 00"S, 10° 18’00” E. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
30 mm.
Hab. West Indies; South Atlantic; Hawaiian Islands.
Myctophum coccoi (Cocco, 1829).
Brauer, f.c. p. 199, figs. 116-120; Taning, t.c. p. 55; Parr, t.c. p. 61.
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33°53’45”S, 9°26’30”E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
18 mm.
St. 247. 13. Vi. 27. 37° 20’ 00” S, 12° 47’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl 1oo—115 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
33 mm.
Hab. Mediterranean; Atlantic; Indian Ocean; Pacific.
Myctophum asperum, Richardson, 1845.
Brauer, f.c. p. 197, fig. 115; Taning, t.c. p. 54; Parr, t.c. p. 63.
16. vii. 26. 3° 45’ N, 12° 48’ W. Washed on board: 1 specimen, 60 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Pacific; Australian seas.
I have compared the type of this species with one of the types of Dasyscopelus
naufragus, Waite, and find them identical.
Myctophum humboldti (Risso, 1810).
Brauer, ¢.c. p. 192, figs. 1o8—111; Taning, ¢.c. p. 54; Parr, t.c. p. 64.
St. 7. 3. ii. 26. Washed on board: 1 specimen, 69 mm.
St. 71. 30. v.26. 43°20’00"S, 46° 02’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 2000 (-o) m.: 3 specimens,
38-46 mm.
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33°53’ 45”S, 9° 26’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 6 specimens,
16-23 mm.
St. 100. 2. x. 26. 33° 20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00” S, 15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl,
625-675 m.: I specimen, 40 mm.
Hab. Mediterranean; Atlantic; Pacific (?).
Myctophum affine (Liitken, 1892).
Brauer, ¢.c. p. 190, figs. 105-107; Taning, ¢.c. p. 53; Parr, t.c. pp. 65, 69.
St. 240. 2. vi. 27. 46° 36’ 30” S, 45° 07’ 00” W. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, o-5 m.: I specimen,
17 mm.
St. 297. 28. vill.27. 12°08’ 00” N, 20°53’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 200-300 (-o) m.: 7
specimens, 12-30 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Indian Ocean; Pacific.
DI1iii 9
326 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Myctophum phengodes (Liitken, 1892).
Brauer, t.c. p. 177, fig. 88; Parr, t.c. p. 66.
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33°53’ 45”"S, 9° 26’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o)m.: 1 specimen,
24 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Indian Ocean; Australian seas.
Myctophum macrochir (Giinther, 1864).
Maning fc. py 575 batt) tc. ppiO7 74 =
St. 71. 30. v.26. 43° 20’ 00"S, 46°02’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 2000 (-o) m.: 6 specimens,
28-32 mm.
St. 281. 12. vili. 27. 00° 46’ 00" S, 5° 49’ 15” E. Young-fish trawl, 850-950 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
20 mm.
St. 287. 19. viii. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (—o) m.: I specimen,
II mm.
St. 289. 24. viii. 27. 3°04’45”N, 16°52’00”W. 7ocm. tow-net, oblique, 132-om.: 1
specimen, 16 mm.
St. 297. 28. viii. 27. 12° 08’ 00” N, 20° 53’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 200-300 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
12 mm.
II. Xi. 25. 6°55’ N, 15° 54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 37 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; West Indies.
Genus Lampanyctus, Bonaparte, 1840
Lampanyctus nicholsi, Gilbert.
Gilbert, 1911, Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. xxx, p. 17, fig. 1; Parr, t.c. p. 78.
St. 60. 21. v. 26. 50° 45’ 00” S, 56° 33’ 00” W. 1 m. tow-net, horizontal, 75 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
40 mm.
St. 62. 22. v. 26. 49° 2200" S, 54° 48’ 00” W. 1 m. tow-net, horizontal, go (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
St. 106. 3. xi. 26. 44° 42’ 30” S, 17° 47’ 00” E. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, 124 m.: 1 specimen,
75 mm.
St. 217. 18. iv. 27. Drake Strait, 58° 27’ 30” S, 67° 55’ 00” W. 1 m. tow-net, horizontal, 77 m.:
I specimen, 71 mm.
St. WS 236. 6. vil. 28. 46° 55’ 00” S, 60° 40’ 00” W. Net with mesh of 7 mm. attached to back
of trawl, 272~300 m.: dark green sand and mud. 25 specimens, 50-77 mm.
Depth of body 51 to nearly 6 in the length, length of head 34 to 32. Snout much
shorter than eye, diameter of which is 32 to 4 in length of head and about equal to
interorbital width. Dorsal 18-20; origin a little in advance of root of pelvic; longest
rays 3 to § length of head. Anal 20-22; origin below posterior part of dorsal. Pectoral
13. Pelvic 8. 43-45 scales in the lateral line. PLO photophore a little nearer to lateral
line than pectoral fin. 2 PVO, situated close together, level with base of pectoral fin.
5 PO, the last a little elevated. VLO about equidistant from lateral line and pelvic fin
or a little nearer the latter. 5 VO, all level. 3 SAO, almost forming a straight line, the
lowest continuous with the VO series; interspace between first and second not much
MYCTOPHIDAE 327
less than that between second and third, which is close to lateral line. AO in two groups,
well separated from one another; anterior 9-11, the first elevated and level with the
middle SAO, the last sometimes a little elevated ; posterior 7, generally well separated from
Pre series, although in one or two specimens the two are continuous. 2 (occasionally 3)
Pol, the upper just below the lateral line. 6-9 Pre. No luminous scales on caudal peduncle.
Described from numerous specimens, 43~77 mm. in length.
Hab. South Atlantic; Falkland Islands; Drake Strait.
Lampanyctus braueri (Lénnberg).
Myctophum (Lampanyctus) braueri, Lénnberg, 1905, Zool. Anz. Xxviml, p. 764; 1905, Wiss.
Ergebn. Schwed. Siidpolar-Exped. v (6), p. 64, fig. 1; Brauer, 1906, t.c. p. 230, fig. 150.
Lampanyctus braueri, Regan, 1913, Trans. R. Soc. Edinburgh, xix, p. 234; Waite, 1916, Fish.
Austral. Antarct. Exped. p. 61, fig. 14; Parr, 1928, t.c. p. 78.
St. 62. 22. v. 26. 49° 22’ 00” S, 54° 48’ 00” W. 1 m. tow-net, horizontal, go (—-o) m.: 1 specimen,
31 mm.
St. 66. 23. v. 26. 48°09’ 00” S, 52° 50’ 00” W. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, 45 m.: 1 specimen,
45mm. 1 m. tow-net, horizontal, go (-o) m.: 3 specimens, 34-45 mm.
St. 15. 16.1. 27. 53° 25° 00° S, 35 15° 00° W. 43m. net, horizontal, 1025-1275 m.: 2
specimens, 85-133 mm.
St. 239. 2. vi. 27. 46° 56’ 00” S, 46° 03’ 00” W. 44 m. net, horizontal, 1050-1350 m. : 2 specimens,
31-34 mm.
St. 256. 23. vi. 27. 35°14’ 00S, 6° 49’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 850-1100 m.: 3 specimens,
20-32 mm.
Depth of body 52 to 52 in the length, length of head 34 to 34. Snout shorter than eye,
diameter of which is 44 to 44 in length of head and less than interorbital width. Dorsal
15; origin above or a little behind root of pelvic. Anal 18. Pectoral 13. Pelvic 8.
42-45 scales in the lateral line. PLO photophore rather nearer to lateral line than
pectoral fin. 2 PVO, close together, level with pectoral base. 5 PO, fourth nearer to
middle of thorax than the remainder, which are more or less level. VLO about equi-
distant from lateral line and pelvic fin. 5 VO, second, third and fourth a little elevated.
3 SAO, forming a straight line, the lowest level with middle VO. Anterior AO 9 or 10,
the first elevated; well separated from posterior AO which number 8-10. 4 or 5 Pre,
separated from or continuous with the posterior AO, the last separated by a wide inter-
space from the remainder. 2 Pol. No luminous scales on the caudal peduncle.
Described from 10 specimens, 20 to 133 mm. in length.
Hab. South Atlantic; Antarctic; Macquarie Island.
Lampanyctus townsendi (Eigenmann and Eigenmann).
Myctophum townsendi, Eigenmann and Eigenmann, 1889, West. Amer. Sct. v1, No. 48, p. 125.
Scopelus (Nyctophus) warmingii, Liitken, 1892, Vid. Selsk. Skr. (6), Vu, p. 259, fig. 19.
Lampanyctus warmingi, Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 80; Taning, 1928, t.c. p. 65;
Parr, 1928, ¢.c. p. 91, fig. 11.
Lampanyctus townsendi, Jordan and Evermann, 1896, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. xtvui (1), p. 558;
Gilbert, 1908, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. xxv, p. 230, pl. iv; 1913, Mem. Carnegie Mus. V1, p. 98;
McCulloch, 1923, Rec. Austral. Mus. xiv, p. 115, pl. xiv, fig. 2; Parr, 1928, f.c. p. 79.
328 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Myctophum (Lampanyctus) townsendi, Brauer, 1906, t.c. p. 167.
Myctophum (Lampanyctus) warmingi, Brauer, 1906, t.c. p. 229, fig. 149; Pappenheim, 1914,
Deutsche Siidpolar-Exped. xv, Zool. vu (2), p. 195; Barnard, 1925, Ann. S. Afric. Mus. xxi,
Pp- 237.
The ‘Discovery’ obtained 14 specimens of this species from the following stations
in the North and South Atlantic, at depths ranging from o—2000 m., measuring 17 to
67 mm. in length: St. 80, 85, 104, 257, 270, 285, 286, 287, 288, 294, 296, 297.
Depth of body 44 to 4? in the length, length of head 3 to 3}. Snout much shorter
than eye, diameter of which is 3 to 34 in length of head and equal to or greater than
interorbital width. Dorsal 13-15; origin above or a little in front of or behind root of
pelvic. Anal 13-15; origin below last rays of dorsal. Pectoral 13-15; about as long as
head, extending to origin of anal or beyond. Pelvic 8. 36~—38 scales in the lateral line.
PLO photophore much nearer to lateral line than pectoral fin. 2 PVO, well separated
from each other, one opposite the pectoral base, the other vertically below it. 5 PO,
the last a little elevated. VIO equidistant from lateral line and pelvic fin or rather
nearer the latter. 5 VO, the second, third and fifth a little elevated. 3 SAO, very
slightly angulate, interspace between first and second less than that between second and
third; third SAO touching the lateral line. AO 5-6 + 4-6; last of anterior series some-
times a little elevated ; posterior series all behind the anal fin. 2 Pol, the upper in contact
with the lateral line. 4 Pre, the interspace between the third and fourth much greater
than that between the remainder. A luminous scale above the pectoral fin and a group
of 2~7 in the neighbourhood of the lower PVO; a plate sometimes present above axil
of pelvic; a series of 2 to 4 plates between root of pelvic and vent, and often one on each
side of the vent; 3 to 5 plates at base of anal, not extending to hinder end of fin; a series
of plates on upper and lower edges of caudal peduncle, those below extending forward
nearly as far as the anal fin; 3 to 5 small plates on middle part of base of dorsal fin, and
sometimes another series in front of this fin; no plates in front of the adipose fin.
Described from 10 specimens, 27-67 mm. in length, including two of the types of
the species from the Cortes Banks, California.
Hab. North and South Atlantic; Indian Ocean; Pacific.
Lampanyctus hectoris (Gunther).
Scopelus hectoris, Giinther, 1876, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (4), XVU, p. 399.
Scopelus argenteus, Gilchrist, 1904, Mar. Invest. S. Afric. 11, p. 15, pl. Xxxvi.
Myctophum (Lampanyctus) argenteus, Barnard, 1925, Ann. S. Afric. Mus. xxi, p. 238.
Lampanyctus argenteus, Parr, 1928, t.c. p. 83.
St. 99 D. 27. ix. 26. 33° 20’ 00” to 33° 11’ 00" S, 17° 17’ 00” to 17° 26’ 00” E. 7o cm. tow-net,
horizontal, 200 m.: I specimen, 57 mm. ;
Depth of body 43 to 5 in the length, length of head 3} to 34. Snout much shorter
than eye, diameter of which is 3} to 3# in length of head and equal to or less than inter-
orbital width. Dorsal 13-14; origin above or a little behind root of pelvic. Anal 15-16;
origin below last dorsal ray or a little farther back. Pectoral 13-14. Pelvic 8. 37 to 39
MYCTOPHIDAE 329
scales in the lateral line. PLO photophore much nearer to pectoral fin than lateral line.
2 PVO, close together and more or less level with lower part of pectoral base. 5 PO, first,
second and fourth forming a straight line near middle of thorax, third and fifth elevated,
level with root of pelvic. VLO nearer pelvic fin than lateral line. 5 VO, forming a
curved line, the third most elevated. 3 SAO, forming a straight oblique line, the lowest
near to the last VO. AO 8 + 6, the two series well separated. 1 Pol, about equidistant
from lateral line and ventral series of photophores. 5 Prc, well separated from posterior
AO, the last about equidistant from lateral line and lower edge of caudal peduncle.
No luminous scales.
Described from 7 specimens, 40 to §7 mm. in length, including the type of the species
and co-types of L. argenteus.
Hab. Off South Africa; New Zealand.
Lampanyctus elongatus (Costa, 1844).
Brauer, f.c. p. 232, figs. 152-153; Taning, ¢.c. p. 64; Parr, t.c. p. 80.
St. 168. 21. ii. 27. 60° 58’ 00” S, 48° 05’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 100-150 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
52 mm.
St. 287. 19. viii. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (-0) m.: 1 specimen,
30 mm.
St. 288. 21. viii. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
53 mm.
St. 293. 24. viii. 27. 4° 18’ 15” N, 16° 51’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, roo—120 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
50 mm.
Hab. Mediterranean; North and South Atlantic; Antarctic; Pacific.
Lampanyctus photothorax, Parr.
Parr, 1928, f.c. pp. 81, 95, fig. 13.
St. 256. 23. vi. 27. 35° 14’ 00” S, 6° 49’ 00" E. Young-fish trawl, 850-1100 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
25 mm.
St. 281. 12. viii. 27. 00° 46’ 00” S, 5° 49’ 15” E. Young-fish trawl, 850-950 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
42 mm.
Hab. North and South Atlantic; West Indies.
Lampanyctus guentheri, Goode and Bean, 1895.
Taning, #.c. p. 65; Parr, t.c. p. 82.
The ‘Discovery’ obtained 39 specimens of this species from the following stations
in the North and South Atlantic, at depths ranging from o-1500 m., measuring 21 to
70mm. in length: St. 66, 69, 76, 240, 241, 242, 268, 281, 284, 286, 288, 289, 293,
296, 297.
Hab. North and South Atlantic; Australian seas (?).
330 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Lampanyctus pusillus (Johnson, 1890).
Taning, f.c. p. 66; Parr, t.c. pp. 89, 112.
St. 85. 23. vi. 26. 33°07’ 40” S, 4° 30’ 20” E. 43 m. net, horizontal, 2000 (—0) m.: 1 specimen, 28 mm.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00" S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, rooo (—o) m.: 3 specimens,
30-34 mm.
St. 89. 28. vi. 26. 34°05’ 15” S, 16° 00’ 45” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 25 mm.
St. 100. 4.x. 26. 33° 20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00" S, 15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl,
2000-2500 (—O) m.: 2 specimens, 33-35 mm.
St. 257. 24. vi.27. 35° 01’00"S, 10° 18’00” E. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 31 mm.
Hab. North and South Atlantic.
Lampanyctus alatus, Goode and Bean, 1895.
Lampanyctus pseudoalatus, 'Taning, 1928, t.c. p. 66; Parr, 1928, t.c. p. go.
Lampanyctus alatus, Parr, 1929, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. Lxxvi (10), p. 25, fig. 12.
The ‘ Discovery’ obtained 65 specimens of this species from the following stations in
the North and South Atlantic, at depths ranging from o-1500 m., measuring 18 to
102 mm. in length: St. 66, 76, 101, 239, 257, 281, 284, 285, 286, 289, 294, 296, 297.
Hab. North and South Atlantic; (?) Indian Ocean.
Lampanyctus festivus, T'aning.
Taning, 1928, ¢.c. p. 67; Parr, t.c. p. 84.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00" S, 6°31’ 00" E. 44m. net, horizontal, 1000 (-o) m.: 2 specimens,
84-90 mm.
St. 257. 24. vi. 27. 35°01’00"S, 10°18’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 250(—o) m.: 1 specimen, 31 mm.
St. 285. 16. viii. 27. 2° 43’ 30”S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 44 m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
60 mm.
St. 288. 21. viii. 27. 00° 56’ 00" S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 52mm.
Hab. North and South Atlantic.
Lampanyctus intricarius, Taning.
Taning, 1928, t.c. p. 67; Parr, t.c. p. go.
St. 76. 5. vi. 26. 39° 50’ 30” S, 36° 23’00” W. 43 m. net, horizontal, 1500 (—o) m.: 2 specimens,
60-100 mm.
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33° 53’ 45” 5S, 9° 26’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 3 specimens, 40-
55 mm.
St. 100. 2.x. 26. 33° 20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00” S, 15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ oo” E. Young-fish trawl,
625-675 m.: 4 specimens, 62-68 mm.
St. 101. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.:
3 specimens, 68-115 mm.
St. 107. 4. xi. 26. 45° 03’ 00” S, 17° 03’ 00” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.: 10 specimens,
70-115 mm.
St. 250. 17. vi. 27. 36°09’ 00"S, 5° 33’00” W. Young-fish trawl, 300 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
46 mm.
Hab. North and South Atlantic.
MYCTOPHIDAE 331
Lampanyctus ater, ‘T'aning.
Taning, 1928, ¢.c. p. 68; Parr, t.c. p. 88.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00” S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 43 m. net, horizontal, 1000 (0) m.: 4 specimens,
55-61 mm.
St. ror. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16°04’ to 15° 49’ E. 43 m. net. horizontal, 350-400(—o)m.:
I specimen, 142 mm.
St. 239. 2. vi. 27. 46° 56’00"S, 46° 03’00" W. 43m. net, horizontal, 1050-1350 (-o) m.: 1
specimen, 140 mm.
St. 259. 26. vi. 27. 34° 59’ 00” S, 16° 39’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 370-450 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
30mm. ?
Hab. North and South Atlantic.
Lampanyctus micropterus (Brauer, 1904).
Brauer, 1906, ¢.c. p. 239, fig. 157; Parr, f.c. p. 85.
St. 287. 19. vili. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. 1 m. tow-net, oblique, 124 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
58 mm.
Hab. Atlantic and Indian Oceans.
Lampanyctus niger (Giinther, 1887).
Brauer, ¢.c. p. 242, fig. 159; Parr, ¢.c. p. 87.
St. 81. 18. vi. 26. 32° 45’ 00" S, 8° 47’ 00” W. 44 m. net, horizontal, 650 (—o) m.: 12 specimens,
30-70 mm.
St. 241. 5. vi. 27. 40° 34’ 30” S, 36° 35’ 30” W. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, 152 m.: 1 specimen,
75 mm.
St. 252. 20. vi. 27. 35° 26’ 00” S, 1° 43’ 30” E. 1 m. tow-net, horizontal, 135 mm.: 1 specimen,
40 mm.
Hab. South Atlantic; Indian Ocean; Pacific.
Lampanyctus, sp.
The ‘Discovery’ also obtained 32 examples of Lampanyctus, which are all in
bad condition, and cannot be specifically identified with any certainty. These
specimens are from the following stations in the North and South Atlantic, at
depths ranging from o-1410 m., and measure 15 to 130 mm. in length: St. 65,
78, 81, 83, 86, 101, 151, 269. wo are from the stomach of a Blue whale taken
near the South Shetlands.
Genus Diaphus, Eigenmann and Eigenmann, 1891
Diaphus dumerili (Bleeker, 1856).
Taning, t.c. p. 58; Parr, t.c. p. 126.
St. 280. 10. vili. 27. 00° 36’ 00” S, 8° 28’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 100-200 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
47 mm.
Hab. ‘Tropical Atlantic; Indo-Pacific.
332 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Diaphus dofleini (Zugmayer, 1911).
TAaning, f.c. p. 58; Parr, f.c. p. 124.
St. 85. 23. vi. 26. 33°07’ 40” S, 4° 30’ 20” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 2000 (—o) m. : 1 specimen, 34 mm.
St. 250. 17. vi. 27. 36°09’ 00” S, 5° 33’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 300 (0) m.: 2 specimens,
34-42 mm.
St. 251. 18. vi. 27. 35°54’ 30” S, 3° or’ 30” W. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, 79 m.: 1 specimen,
30 mm. 1 m. tow-net, horizontal, 159 m.: 1 specimen, 48 mm.
St. 254. 21. vi. 27. 35°04’ 00” S, 2° 59’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 200 (-o) m.: 2 specimens, 33-
34 mm.
St. 285. 16. viii. 27. 2° 43’ 30” S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 43 m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-o) m.: 4
specimens, 34-40 mm.
St. 286. 17. viii. 27. 3° 06’ 30” S, 3° 53’00" W. Young-fish trawl, 125 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
47 mm.
St. 294. 25. viii. 27. 4° 33’ 15” N, 16° 52’ 45” W. Young-fish trawl, roo—150 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
43 mm.
Hab. Mediterranean; Atlantic.
Perhaps identical with D. gemellari (Cocco).
Diaphus fulgens, Brauer, 1904.
Brauer, 1906, t.c. p. 224, fig. 146; Parr, f.c. p. 117.
St. 3. 3. xil. 25. 29° 31’ 06” S, 13° 56’ 45” W. 2 m. tow-net, horizontal, 500-700 m. : 1 specimen,
39 mm.
Hab. Atlantic and Indian Oceans.
Diaphus taaningi, n.sp.
St. 280. 10. viii. 27. 00° 36’ 00” S, 8° 28’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 100-200 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
36 mm.
Depth of body nearly 4 in the length, length of head about 35. Snout much shorter
than eye, diameter of which is nearly 3 in length of head and about equal to interorbital
width. Maxillary not expanded posteriorly, extending to well beyond eye. Operculum
with a short rounded membranous process above the pectoral fin. 13 gill-rakers on
lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal 14; origin a very little behind root of pelvic. Anal 13;
origin behind last dorsal ray. Pectoral with 11 or 12 rays, a little more than 3 length of
head. Pelvic 8. 35 scales in a longitudinal series. Upper antorbital (dorsonasal)
luminous organ small, rounded, entirely above nostril and well separated from that of
opposite side. No lower antorbital. A single suborbital (ventronasal) organ, rather
broad and of moderate length, extending to a little beyond anterior margin of pupil,
connected with the upper antorbital merely by a black pigmented band along the an-
terior margin of the eye. No supraorbital organ. A large luminous scale at PLO, which
is nearer to pectoral fin than lateral line. 2 PVO, the upper on lower part of pectoral
base, the lower a little in advance. 5 PO, the fourth elevated, opposite the space between
the third and fifth, about level with upper PVO. VLO slightly nearer pelvic fin than
lateral line. 5 VO, second and third progressively elevated, forming a straight line with
MYCTOPHIDAE 333
the first; fourth and fifth level. 3 SAO, forming an almost vertical straight line, the
lowest close behind and a little above level of last VO; interspace between first and
second less than that between second and third; third SAO well below lateral line.
AO 5+ 5; first photophore of anterior series elevated, above level of second SAO;
those of posterior series all level. Pol well below lateral line, about level with third
SAO. 4 Pre, more or less equally spaced and forming an even curve, the last distinctly
below lateral line. No luminous plates on upper or lower edges of caudal peduncle.
Uniform brownish black.
Described from a single specimen, 36 mm. in length; holotype of the species.
Hab. Middle Atlantic.
This species appears to be very close to D. fulgens, Brauer, differing chiefly in the
form of the suborbital organs and the lower position of the PLO, VLO, SAOg, Pol and
Pre, photophores. Mr Taning has studied two
of Brauer’s types of D. fulgens, respectively
1o and 22 mm. in length, but the larger example
of 39 mm. is not in the collection of the Zoo-
logical Museum at Berlin. He has kindly
examined the specimen described above, and
informs me that in his opinion this should
probably be regarded as a species new to
science, but adds that the species of this particular group of Diaphus are very
difficult to identify. He tells me that both the small types of D. fulgens have a
small posterior suborbital organ, which is not shown in Brauer’s figure of the
species.
Fig. 30. Diaphus taaningi. Holotype. (x 14.)
Diaphus luetkeni (Brauer, 1904).
Brauer, 1906, ¢.c. p. 221, figs. 141-142; Taning, ¢.c. p. 59; Parr, ¢.c. p. 118.
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33° 53’ 45” 5S, 9° 26’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 45mm.
St. 257. 24. vi. 27. 35°01’ 00"S, 10° 18’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: 2 specimens,
31-35 mm.
St. 281. 12. viii. 27. 00° 46’ 00" S, 5° 49’ 15” E. Young-fish trawl, 850-950 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
42 mm,
St. 284. 15. viii. 27. 2° 13’ 00”S, 1° 52’ 00” E. 1 m. tow-net, oblique, 71 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
38 mm.
St. 285. 16. vili. 27. 2° 43’ 30” S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-o) m
specimens, 40-45 mm.
St. 288. 21. viii. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: 3 specimens,
33045 am
St. 289. 23-24. vili. 27. 3°04’ 45” N, 16°52’00” W. Young-fish trawl, 125-225 (-o) m.: 4
specimens, 34-43 mm. 70 cm. tow-net, oblique, 132 (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 18 mm,
Hab. Atlantic and Indian Oceans.
pDuiii Io
334 ' DISCOVERY REPORTS
Diaphus brachycephalus, ‘Taning.
Taning, 1928, f.c. p. 59; Parr, t.c. p. 119.
St. 288. 21. viii. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 2 specimens,
22-25 mm.
St. 293. 24. viii. 27. 4° 18’ 15” N, 16° 51’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 100-120 (—o) m.:1 specimen,
26 mm.
Depth of body 34 in the length, length of head about 3. Diameter of eye a little less
than 3 in length of head. Dorsal 13; origin opposite root of pelvic. Anal 14; origin a
little behind last dorsal ray. Pectoral 12 (?). Pelvic 9. 32 scales in the lateral line.
Photophores all large. Upper antorbital organ small, rounded, entirely above nostril and
well separated from that of opposite side. First
suborbital long and narrow, extending from nostril
to behind lens of eye; second small, oval in shape,
situated close behind the first. No supraorbital
organ. PLO without luminous scale, much nearer
pectoral fin than lateral line. 2 PVO, the lower
below pectoral base. 5 PO, the interspace between
first and second greater than that between any of
the remainder; fourth elevated, opposite space between third and fifth. VLO much
nearer pelvic fin than lateral line. 5 VO, third elevated, second, fourth and fifth level.
3 SAO, third about equidistant from lateral line and ventral series of photophores.
AO 4-5 + 4; fifth anteroanal a little elevated. Pol well below lateral line. 4 Prec, forming
Fig. 31. Diaphus brachycephalus. (x 2.)
a slight curve.
Described from two specimens, 22-25 mm. in length.
Hab. Atlantic.
Diaphus rafinesquei (Cocco, 1838).
Brauer, ¢.c. p. 223, figs. 144-145; Taning, t.c. p. 60; Parr, t.c. pp. 119, 131, figs.
St. ror. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ 5, 16° og’ to 15° 49’ E. 45 m. net, horizontal, 350-400(—o) m. :
7 specimens, 25~70 mm.
St. 241. 5.vi.27. 40° 34’ 30”S, 36°35’ 30” W. 7ocm. tow-net, horizontal, 49 (-o)m.: 1
specimen, 20 mm.
St. 257. 24. vi. 27. 35°01’ 00"S, 10° 18’00” E. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 3 specimens,
16-18 mm.
St. 266. 21. vii. 27. 29° 34’ 00” S, 14° 24’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 200 (—o) m.: 5 specimens,
20-32 mm.
St. 267. 23. vii. 27. 24° 31’ 00” S, 12° 15’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 450-550 (—0) m. : 6 specimens,
20-31 mm. 1 m. tow-net, oblique, 117 (-o) m.: 5 specimens, 18-36 mm.
St. 268. 25. vii. 27. 18° 37’ 00” S, 10° 46’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 100-150 (—o) m.: 2 specimens,
31-32 mm.
St. 285. 16. viii. 27. 2° 43’ 30” S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 43 m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-o) m.: 3
specimens, 31-48 mm.
MYCTOPHIDAE 335
Hab. Mediterranean; Atlantic; Marquesas Islands; Japan.
I have examined more than fifty examples of this species from the Mediterranean
and Atlantic and find that, as suggested by Parr, it is impossible to recognise Taning’s
two species, D. rafinesquei and D. holti, in the Atlantic, although the Mediterranean
material seems to fall readily into two forms. D. mollis, 'Taning, may also prove to be
identical with this species.
Diaphus lucidus (Goode and Bean, 1895).
Brauer, ¢.c. p. 164; Taning, t.c. p. 62; Parr, t.c. pp. 121, 141, fig. 31.
St. 285. 16. viii. 27. 2° 43’ 30” S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 4} m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-o) m.: 2
specimens, 75-85 mm.
St. 288. 21. viii. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
60 mm.
Hab. Atlantic.
Diaphus splendidus (Brauer, 1904).
Brauer, 1906, f.c. p. 218, figs. 138-139; Taning, ¢.c. p. 60; Parr, f.c. p. 123.
St. 285. 16. vili. 27. 2° 43’ 30"S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 43m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-0) m.: 3
specimens, 26-30 mm.
The ‘Discovery’ also obtained the following specimens of Diaphus, which are either
very young or poorly preserved, and cannot be identified with certainty :—
Diaphus sp.
St. 240. 2. vi. 27. 46° 36’ 30” S, 45°07’ 00” W. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, o-5 m.: 1 specimen,
I2 mm.
St. 247. 13. vi. 27. 37° 20’ 00” S, 12° 47’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 100-115 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
33 mm.
St. 280. 10. viii. 27. 00° 36’ 00” S, 8° 28’ oo” E. Young-fish trawl, 100-200 (—0) m.: 7 specimens,
12-15 mm.
Genus Lampadena, Goode and Bean, 1895
Lampadena braueri, Zugmayer, 1914.
Taning, t.c. p. 63; Parr, t.c. p. 149.
St. 269. 26. vii. 27. 15° 55’ 00” S, 10° 35’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, horizontal, 600-700 (—o) m. :
2 specimens, 88-94 mm.
Depth of body 44 to 4} in the length, length of head 3} to 32. Snout about } dia-
meter of eye, which is twice or a little more than twice in length of maxillary, { of the
interorbital width, and about 3 in length of head. Dorsal 14-15; origin above root of
pelvic, about equidistant from tip of snout and front of supracaudal plate. Anal 14-15;
origin distinctly behind last dorsal ray. Pectoral 17. Pelvic 9. 40-42 scales in a longi-
tudinal series (from upper angle of gill-opening to base of caudal). Photophores rather
indistinct. PLO very close to lateral line. 2 PVO, the lower below the pectoral base.
10-2
336 _ DISCOVERY REPORTS
5 PO, all level. VLO a little nearer lateral line than pelvic fin. 6 (?) VO, all level, the
last in front of the origin of the anal. Only 2 SAO, the first nearer to the anal fin than
to lateral line, a little posterior to the second, which is just below the lateral line.
AO 6-7 + 2-3, all level; posteroanal series well behind the anal base and just in front of
the infracaudal plate. 1 Pol, near the lateral line. 2-3 + 1(?) Pre. Supracaudal plate
emarginate posteriorly, shorter than infracaudal plate, which is a little more than 4
length of head.
Described from two specimens, 88 to 94 mm. in length.
Hab. Eastern Atlantic.
Fig. 32. Lampadena braueri. (x 3.)
Lampadena minima, ‘l'aning.
Taning, 1928, ¢.c. p. 63; Parr, t.c. cle fig. 377.
The following young specimens from the South Atlantic appear to belong to this
species :—
St. 85. 23. vi. 26. 33°07’ 40” S, 4° 30’ 20” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 2000 (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 20 mm.
St. 89. 28. vi. 26. 34°05’15”S, 16°00’ 45” E. Young-fish trawl, rooo (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
1g mm.
Hab. Atlantic.
Lampadena nitida, Taning.
Taning, 1928, ¢.c. p. 62; Parr, ¢.c. p. 155.
St. 286. 17. vili.27. 3° 06’ 30”S, 3° 53°00” W. Young-fish trawl, 102 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 115mm.
Depth of body 54 in the length, length of head 34. Snout about } diameter of eye,
which is 34 in length of maxillary, } of the interorbital width, and 4? in length of head.
Dorsal 15; origin in advance of root of pelvic,
about equidistant from tip of snout and front
of supracaudal plate. Anal 14; origin behind
last ray of dorsal. Pectoral 16; about § length
of head. Pelvic 8. 37 scales in a longitudinal
series (from upper angle of gill-opening to
base of caudal). PLO rather close to lateral line. 2 PVO, the lower below pectoral
base. 5 PO, the fourth vertically above the third. VLO about equidistant from lateral
line and pelvic fin. 5 VO, nearly level. 3 SAO, interspace between second and third
much greater than that between first and second. Upper SAO and Pol very close
Fig. 33. Lampadena nitida. (x 4.)
MYCTOPHIDAE 337
to lateral line. AO 5 + 2, all level; first posteroanal just in front of infracaudal plate,
second above its anterior part. 2+ 1 Pre, the first two above procurrent spines of
caudal fin, the third on lateral line at base of fin.
Described from a single specimen, 115 mm. in length.
Hab. Atlantic.
As far as one can judge from this single example, and from the descriptions of Parr
and 'Taning, the Atlantic form seems to be sufficiently distinct from that of the Indo-
Pacific as described by Brauer, Garman, and Weber and Beaufort, to be recognised as
a distinct species. It differs chiefly in the somewhat slenderer body, larger head, and in
having 2 + 1 instead of 3 + 1 Pre photophores.
Order LYOMERI
Family EURYPHARYNGIDAE
Eurypharynx pelecanoides, Vaillant, 1888.
Zugmayer, 1911, Rés. Camp. Sci. Monaco, xxxv, p. 88, pl. iv, fig. 3; Roule, 1919, zbid. LU, p. 93.
St. 281. 12. viii. 27. 00° 46’ 00” S, 5° 49’ 15” E. Young-fish trawl, 850-950 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
295 mm.
St. 287. 19. viii. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
170 mm.
Hab. Atlantic.
Order APODES
Family NEMICHTHYIDAE
A preliminary synopsis of the Eels of this family has been published by Roule and
Bertin (Bul. Mus. Paris, 1924, p. 61).
Nemichthys scolopaceus, Richardson, 1848.
Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 126, pl. ix, fig. 1.
St. 85. 23. vi. 26. 33°07’ 40"S, 4° 30’20” E. 44m. net, horizontal, 2000 (—o) m. : I specimen, 580mm.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00" S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 44m. net, horizontal, 1000 (—o) m. : 1 specimen, 750mm.
St. 245. 10. vi. 27. 38° 20’ 00”S, 22° 18’ 00” W. 4} m. net, horizontal, 1800-2000 m. : I specimen,
375 mm.}
St. 247. 13. vi. 27. 37° 20’ 00” S, 12° 47’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 100-115 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
620 mm.
St. 268. 25. vii. 27. 18° 37’00”S, 10° 46’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 100-150 m.: 7 specimens,
430-500 mm.
St. 269. 26. vii. 27. 15°55’00”S, 10°35’00" E. 44m. net, horizontal, 600-700 (-o) m.: 6
specimens, 400-485 mm.
28. x. 25. 13° 25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 44m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 4 specimens, 470-720 mm.?
Hab. Mediterranean; Atlantic, Indian and Pacific Oceans.
1 ‘Tail incomplete.
338 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Nematoprora polygonifera, Gilbert.
Gilbert, 1905, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. xxi1l (1903), p. 587, fig. 234.
St. 285. 16. viii. 27. 2° 43’ 30” S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-o)m.: 12
specimens, 220-300 mm.
28. x. 25. 13° 25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 4} m. net, horizontal, goo (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 260 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Hawaiian Islands.
Avocettina infans (Giinther, 1878).
Brauer, 1906, ¢.c. p. 129, pl. viii, figs. 5—6.
St. 72. 1. vi. 26. 41° 43’ 20” S, 42° 20’ 40” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 2000 (-o) m.: 2 specimens,
450-470 mm.
St. 76. 5. vi. 26. 39° 50’ 30” S, 36° 23’ 00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 1500 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
360 mm.!
St. 79. 13. vi. 26. 34° 48’ 00” S, 16° 36’ 00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 1000 (-o) m.: 1
specimen, 200 mm.?
Hab. Atlantic, Indian and Pacific Oceans.
Serrivomer beanii, Gill and Ryder, 1883.
Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 155, fig. 175.
St. 79. 13. vi. 26. 34° 48’ 00” S, 16° 36’ 00” W. 44 m. net, horizontal, rooo (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
295 mm.
St. 81. 18. vi. 26. 32° 45’ 00” S, 8° 47’ 00” W. 44 m. net, horizontal, 650 (—-o) m.: 5 specimens,
140-490 mm.
Hab. Atlantic, Indian and Pacific Oceans.
Family CONGRIDAE
Genus Grammatocephalus, gen. nov.
Body of moderate length, the tail a little shorter than the trunk, naked; dorsal and
anal fins well developed, confluent with the caudal; pectorals present. Head with some
large mucous pores, regularly arranged, and with a number of fine, close-set, and more
or less parallel ridges, arranged in regular longitudinal, transverse and oblique series,
more developed on the upper surface; snout broad and flat; nostrils lateral, neither with
a tube. Mouth of moderate width, the angle below the posterior border of the eye;
lower jaw included, much narrower than the upper. Teeth villiform, conical, forming
rather broad bands in both jaws; similar teeth on the vomer, apparently arranged in a
horseshoe-shaped patch. ‘Tongue free. Gill-openings widely separated, forming narrow
slits of moderate size. Pores of lateral line distinct.
Genotype. Grammatocephalus kempi, n.sp.
1 'Tail incomplete.
CONGRIDAE 339
Grammatocephalus kempi, n.sp.
St. ror. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° og’ to 15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.:
I specimen, 160 mm. Holotype.
Depth of body about 20 in the length, length of head (measured from tip of snout to
anterior edge of gill-opening) 34 in the distance from posterior edge of gill-opening to
vent; head as broad as deep, its depth less than its length; snout broadly rounded
anteriorly, with a shallow median emargination, about as broad as long, its length 44
in that of head and a little greater than the diameter of the eye. Anterior nostril equi-
distant from end of snout and posterior nostril, which is in front of upper part of eye.
Origin of dorsal well behind gill-opening, about equidistant from tip of snout and vent.
Pectoral more than twice as long as diameter of eye. More or less uniformly brownish
above, lighter beneath.
Fig. 34. Grammatocephalus kempi. Holotype. (x 1.) [View of open mouth x 2.]
Described from a single specimen, 160 mm. in length; holotype of the species.4
Hab. Off South Africa.
Grammatocephalus seems to be most closely related to Promyllantor, Alcock, and
Pseudophichthys, Roule, but is readily distinguished by the position of the vent, the
dentition, and the presence of ridges on the head.
Order SYNENTOGNATHI
Family EXOCOETIDAE
Halocypselus evolans (Linnaeus, 1758).
13. 1. 28. 01° 00’ S, 31° 20’ W. Washed on board: 1 specimen, 55 mm.
Order ANACANTHINI
Family GADIDAE
Bregmaceros maclellandi, ‘Thompson.
Thompson, 1840, Mag. Nat. Hist. N.S. 1v, p. 184, fig.; Giinther, 1864, Cat. Fish. 1v, p. 368;
Day, 1865, Fish. Malabar, p. 171; 1877, Fish. India, p. 418; Alcock, 1883, F. Asiat. Soc. Bengal,
1 Named in honour of Dr Stanley Kemp, Director of Research, Discovery Expedition.
340 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Lxu (2), p. 181; Giinther, 1888, Pelagic Fish. ‘Challenger’, p. 25, pl. iii, figs. A-B; Goode and
Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. pp. 388, 531; Jordan and Evermann, 1898, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus.
XLVI (3), p. 2527; Alcock, 1899, Cat. Indian Deep-Sea Fish, p. 75; Weber, 1913, Fische ‘ Siboga’-
Exped. p. 174; Gilchrist and Thompson, 1914, Ann. S. Afric. Mus. xt, p. 87; 1917, Ann.
Durban Mus. 1, p. 320; Barnard, 1925, Ann. S. Afric. Mus. xx1, p. 325; Weber and Beaufort,
1929, Fish. Indo-Austral. Arch. v, p. 6, fig. 2.
Calloptilum mirum, Richardson, 1845, Zool. Voyage ‘ Sulphur’, p. 95, pl. xlvi, figs. 4-7.
Asthenurus atripinnis, 'Tickell, 1864, F. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, xxxtv (2), p. 32, fig.
Bregmaceros atripinnis, Day, 1869, Proc. Zool. Soc. p. 522; 1877, Fish. India, p. 418, pl. xci,
ii oats
Bregmaceros atlanticus, Goode and Bean, 1886, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. xu, p. 165; 1895, Ocean.
Ichth. p. 388, fig. 331; Borodin, 1928, Bull. Vanderbilt Ocean. Mus. 1 (1), p. 13.
Bregmaceros bathymaster, Jordan and Bollman, 1890, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. xt, p. 173.
St. 277. 7. vill. 27. 1° 44’ 00S, 8° 38’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 63 (—o) m.: 2 specimens, 43-45 mm.
St. 281. 12. vill. 27. 00° 46’ 00” S, 5° 4915” E. Young-fish trawl, 850 m.: 1 specimen, 35 mm.
St. 284. 15. vill. 27. 2° 13/00” S, 1° 52’ 00” E. 1m. tow-net, oblique, 71—o m.: 1 specimen,
27 mm.
1. Xi. 25. 6° 55’ N, 15° 54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (-o) m.: 2 specimens, 39-42 mm.
Hab. Atlantic, Indian and Pacific Oceans.
I have examined a fairly representative series of specimens of this species from several
localities, and am unable to detect any marked differences between those from the
Atlantic and Indo-Pacific respectively. There seems to be little doubt that B. atlanticus
is, at the most, a race of B. maclellandi.
Melanonus gracilis, Giinther.
Giinther, 1878, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), u, p. 19; 1887, Deep-Sea Fish. ‘Challenger’, p. 84,
pl. xiv, fig. B; Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 380, fig.; Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’
Tiefsee-Fische, p. 277, pl. xii, fig. 5.
St. 72. 1. vi. 26. 41° 43’ 20” S, 42° 20’ 40” W. 43 m. net, horizontal, 2000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
140 mm.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00” S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 1000 (-o) m.: 3 specimens,
50-70 mm.
St. 100. 4.x. 26. 33°20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00” S, 15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl,
2500 (—0) m.: I specimen, 67 mm.
St. ror. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 43 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.:
2 specimens, 67—72 mm.
St. 239. 2. vi. 27. 46° 56’ 00" S, 46° 03’00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 1050-1350 (—o) m.: 3
specimens, 100-160 mm.
St. 276. 5. viii. 27. 5° 54’ 00"S, 11° 19’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 150(—o) m.: 3 specimens, 15-
47 mm.
Depth of: body 6} to 6} in the length, length of head 54 to 53. Snout 3} to 3} in
length of head, diameter of eye 4 to 44, interorbital width 25. Maxillary extending to
below posterior border of eye or not quite as far; both jaws with narrow bands of minute
villiform teeth; similar teeth generally present on vomer, palatines and pterygoids.
GADIDAE 341
About 70 scales in a longitudinal series. Dorsal 5-8 + 59-67 +. Anal 52-54 +. Third
dorsal + caudal + second anal about 50. Pectoral 12-14. Pelvic 7.
Described from 5 specimens, 67 to 142mm. in length, including the type of the species.
Hab. South Atlantic; Antarctic.
Melanonus zugmayeri, n.sp.
Melanonus gracilis (non Ginther), Zugmayer, 1g11, Rés. Camp. Sct. Monaco, xxxv, p. 120,
pl. vi, fig. 1.
St. 270. 27. vil. 27. 13° 58’ 30” S, 11° 43’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 200 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
110mm. Holotype.
St. 288. 21. viii. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 6 specimens,
23-58 mm.
28.x.25. 13°25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 43 m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: one specimen, 50 mm.
Depth of body 4§ to 54 in the length, length of head a little more than 4. Snout 34
in length of head, diameter of eye 4? to 5, interorbital width 24. Maxillary extending
nearly to below posterior edge of eye; teeth all stronger than in M. gracilis; a pair in
Fig. 35. Melanonus zugmayeri. Holotype. (x 1.)
front of upper jaw and some of those at sides of lower jaw somewhat enlarged; a single
series of teeth on each side of the head of the vomer, and a similar row on each palatine.
About 80 scales in a longitudinal series. Dorsal 6+ 64+. Anal 50 + (?). Third
dorsal + caudal + second anal about 50. Pectoral 13, about } length of head. Pelvic 7.
Described from three specimens, 58 to 110 mm. in length. The largest is selected as
the holotype.
Hab. North and South Atlantic.
Family MACRURIDAE
Cynomacrurus piriei, Dollo.
Dollo, 1909, Proc. R. Soc. Edinburgh, xxtx, p. 316; Regan, 1913, Trans. R. Soc, Edinburgh,
XLIX, p. 236, pl. iii, fig. 1.
St. 9. 11. ii. 26. 46° 11’ 30” S, 22° 27’ 30” W. 2 m. tow-net, horizontal, 1250 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
135 mm.
St. 71. 30. v. 26. 43° 20’00”S, 46° 02’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 2000 (-o) m.: I specimen,
80 mm."
1 'Tail incomplete.
Dirili II
342 - DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 76. 5. vi. 26. 39° 50’ 30” S, 36° 23’ 00” W. 43 m. net, horizontal, 1500 (—-o) m.: 1 specimen,
240 mm.
St. 153,06. 4. 27: 53.25 00° S37 35-1500: Wee 4s ms net, vhorizontal sro25—r275 om:
specimens, 100-220 mm.1
Hab. South Atlantic (south of 39°); Antarctic.
The characteristic strong antero-lateral canines of this species are not developed in
specimens under 135 mm. in length.
Order ALLOTRIOGNATHI
Family STYLOPHORIDAE
Stylophorus chordatus, Shaw.
Shaw, 1791, Trans. Linn. Soc. 1, p. 90, pl. vi; Starks, 1908, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Lit, p. 17,
pls.; Regan, 1924, Proc. Royal Soc. B, 96, p. 193, figs.
St. 276. 5. viii. 27. 5°54’00"S, 11° 19’ 00" E. Young-fish trawl, 150 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
38 mm.
St. 296. 26. viii. 27. 8° 12’ 00” N, 18° 49’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 450-500 (—-o) m.: I specimen,
185 mm.
ETO cl
ok TMS
Fig. 36. Young specimen of Stylophorus chordatus. (x 24.)
Hab. Atlantic; West Indies; south of Galapagos Islands.
In his diagnosis of this species Regan states that there are no pelvic fins, but an
examination of the small specimen obtained by the ‘Discovery’ shows that these are
present, and that each has the form of a single ray lying below the hinder part of the
base of the pectoral fin. This is very fragile and is wanting on one side of the fish, and
there is little doubt that these structures have been broken off in all the specimens
previously studied.
Order BERYCOMORPHI
Family DIRETMIDAE
Diretmus argenteus, Johnson.
Johnson, 1863, Proc. Zool. Soc. p. 403, pl. xxxvi, fig. 2; Giinther, 1887, Deep-Sea Fish. ‘ Chal-
lenger’, p. 45; Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 211, fig. 234; McCulloch, rg09, Rec.
Austral. Mus. vu, p. 320; Zugmayer, 1911, Rés. Camp. Sci. Monaco, xxxv, p. 107, pl. v, fig. 7;
Roule, 1919, zbid. Lu, p. 52.
1 Tail incomplete.
DIRETMIDAE 343
Discus aureus, Campbell, 1879, Trans. N. Zealand Inst. x1, p. 298, fig.
Diretmus aureus, Ginther, 1887, t.c. p. 45.
Gyrinomene nummularis, Vaillant, 1888, Expéd. Sci. ‘ Travailleur’ et ‘ Talisman’, Poissons, pp. 18,
355 (n.n.).
St. 81. 18. vi. 26. 32° 45’ 00” S, 8° 47’ 00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 650 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
55 mm.
St. 101. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal,.350-400(-o) m.:
I specimen, 60 mm.
Hab. North Atlantic; coast of New South Wales; New Zealand.
Zugmayer regards the fish described by Campbell from New Zealand as belonging
to a distinct genus, but both Giinther and McCulloch are of the opinion that it is
specifically identical with Diretmus argenteus. Discus is said to differ from Diretmus in
having no enlarged pelvic spine, and in the presence of denticulated scales on the
abdomen. In both the examples obtained by the ‘Discovery’ (55 and 60 mm.) the
pelvic spine is less developed than in the type of the species (go mm.) preserved in the
British Museum collection, and the ventral margin of the body is denticulated.
Family CARISTIIDAE
Caristius macropus (Bellotti).
Pterachs macropus, Bellotti, 1903, Atti Soc. Ital. Sci. Nat. XLu, p. 137, pl. vi.
Caristius macropus, Jordan and Thompson, 1914, Mem. Carnegie Mus. v1, p. 243, pl. xxviii,
fig. 7.
Elephenor macropus, Jordan, 1919, Ann. Carnegie Mus. xu, p. 330, pl. liv.
St. 285. 16. viii. 27. 2° 43’30”S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-o) m.: I
specimen, 60 mm.
Depth of body 13 in the length, length of head 2?. Body much compressed. Anterior
profile of head nearly vertical. Diameter of eye about } length of head, a little greater
than its distance from the maxillary. A number of radiating ridges on upper part of
operculum ending in feeble spinous points; angle of praeoperculum and margin of
suboperculum crenulated. Cheek and opercular bones scaly. Maxillary not expanded
posteriorly, partially concealed by the praeorbital, extending to below anterior part of
eye. A single series of small slender teeth in each jaw, and traces of similar teeth on
vomer and palatines. Gill-rakers rather slender, of moderate length; 15 on lower part
of anterior arch. Scales small, cycloid; irregularly arranged; some of those below the
pectoral fin somewhat enlarged. No distinct lateral line. Dorsal 35. Anal 17. Bases of
both dorsal and anal covered by a scaly sheath. Pectoral with 17 (?) rays. Pelvic 1 5;
origin just in front of base of pectoral, separated from origin of anal by a space which is
nearly 3 length of head; rays very long, reaching base of caudal when laid back. Caudal
with 19 principal rays, of which 17 are branched; the spinous procurrent rays feeble.
Uniformly greyish brown.
Described from a single specimen, 60 mm. in length.
II-2
344 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Hab. Atlantic; Japan.
It is only after some hesitation that I have identified the specimen described above
with Bellotti’s species, as both his figure and that of Jordan and Thompson show a
very narrow space between the eye and the
maxillary, although in the description given
by the American authors the cheek is said to
be “deep and triangular, about four-fifths
of the diameter of the eye indepth”. Further,
the mouth seems to be somewhat larger in
the examples from Japan, and the diameter
of the eye is said to be 2°33 to 2:5 in the ee
length of the head. Caristius japonicus, Gill &
and Smith, of which Platyberyx opalescens,
Zugmayer, may be a synonym [cf. Regan,
1912, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8), x, p. 637],
is closely related to C. macropus, differing
chiefly in the narrower cheek, larger eye,
pluriserial teeth, and in the more anterior
insertion of the pelvic fins. There seems to
be little justification for placing C. macropus ;
in a distinct genus, as has been done by Big 3 72— Camastees CrP aa)
Jordan. There is no doubt that the species described by Bellotti and Gill and Smith
are congeneric, and, although the osteology of these fishes has not yet been studied,
I feel certain that Regan was right in placing them with the Berycoids.
Family MELAMPHAIDAE
Genus Melamphaes
I have recently published a revision of this genus, based on the material obtained by
the “Discovery’, the specimens in the British Museum collection, including those
obtained by the ‘Challenger’, and a series of authenticated examples of certain
species kindly lent to me by the Smithsonian Institution of Washington (1929,
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 10, Iv, p. 153). A few additional specimens have since come
to light, and are duly listed below, together with the remainder of the ‘ Discovery’
material.
Melamphaes typhlops (Lowe, 1843).
Norman, t.c. p. 156.
II. xi. 25. 6° 55’ N, 15° 54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 26 mm. (?).
Hab. Eastern North Atlantic.
MELAMPHAIDAE 345
Melamphaes microps (Giinther, 1878).
Norman, f.c. p. 157.
The following examples, all of small size, seem to belong to this species, which may
prove to be identical with M. typhlops:—
St. 81. 18. vi. 26. 32° 45’ 00” S, 8° 47’ 00” W. 4} m. net, horizontal, 650 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
28 mm.
St. 285. 16. vill. 27. 2° 43’ 30” S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 44 m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-o) m.: 2
specimens, 20-43 mm.
St. 287. 19. viii. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. 70 cm. tow-net, oblique, 124 (-o) m.: I specimen,
25 mm.
II. xi. 25. 6°55’ N, 15° 54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (—o) m.: 4 specimens, 18-31 mm.
Hab. North and South Atlantic; Indian Ocean.
Melamphaes nordenskjoeldii, Lonnberg, 1905.
Norman, f.c. p. 159.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00"S, 6°31’ 00” E. 43 m. net, horizontal, 1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 72 mm.
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33° 53’45”S, 9° 26’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m. : 6 specimens, 14-80 mm.
St. 256. 23. vi. 27. 35° 1400" S, 6° 49’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 850-1100 (—o) m.: 12 specimens,
15-28 mm.
Hab. South Atlantic.
Melamphaes robustus, Giinther, 1887.
Norman, f¢.c. p. 160.
St. or. 15.x. 26. 33°50’ to 34° 13S, 16°04’ to 15° 49’ E. 43m. net, horizontal, 2580 m.:
I specimen, 65 mm. Do. 1310-1410 m.: 2 specimens, 50-55 mm.
St. 287. 19. vili. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (—o) m. : 2 specimens,
20-35 mm.
Hab. North and South Atlantic; Banda Sea (?).
Melamphaes megalops, Liitken, 1877.
Norman, f¢.c. p. 161.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’00"S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 1000 (—0) m.: 1 specimen, 50mm.
St. 267. 23. vii. 27. 24°31’00"S, 12°15’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 450-550 m.: 2 specimens,
43-62 mm.
St. 287. 19. viii. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. _Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (—o) m.: I specimen,
60 mm.
St. 296. 26. viii. 27. 8° 12’ 00” N, 18° 49’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 450-500 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
30 mm.
St. 298. 29. viii. 27. 13° 01’45” N, 21° 3445” W. Young-fish trawl, goo-1200 (-o) m.: 2
specimens, 27-32.
28. x. 25. 13° 25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 44m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 2 specimens, 65~70 mm.
It. xi. 25. 6°55’ N, 15° 54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 35 mm.
Hab. North and South Atlantic; Indian Ocean.
346 3 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Melamphaes cristiceps, Gilbert, 1890.
Norman, ¢.c. p. 162.
St. ror. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 1310-1410 m.:
3 specimens, 78-105 mm.
St. 245. 10. vi. 27. 38° 20’ 00” S, 22° 18’ 00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 1800-2000 m.: 1 specimen,
180 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Pacific coast of North America.
Melamphaes atlanticus, Norman.
Norman, 1929, ¢.c. p. 165.
St. ror. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 4} m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m. :
2 specimens, 105-110 mm. (The smaller is the holotype.)
St. 151. 16.i1.27. 53°25’00"S, 35°15’ 00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 1025-1275 m.: 2 specimens,
75-78 mm.
St. 239. 2. vi. 27. 46° 56’ 00” S, 46° 03’ 00” W. 44 m. net, horizontal, 1050-1350 (-o) m. : 1 specimen,
125mm.
Hab. South Atlantic; off South Africa.
Fig. 38. Melamphaes atlanticus. Holotype. (x 1.)
Melamphaes beanii, Giinther, 1887.
Norman, t.c. p. 166.
St. 78. 12. vi. 26. 35° 18’00"S, 19° o1’ 10” W. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 105 mm.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33°25’ 00"S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 43 m. net, horizontal, 1000 (—o) m.: 2 specimens,
45-70 mm.
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33° 53’ 45” S, 9° 26’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 2 specimens, 128—
130 mm.
St. 100. 3-4. x. 26. 33° 20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00” S, 15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ oo” E. Young-fish trawl,
g0o-1000 m.: I specimen, 125 mm.
St. ror. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13'S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 43 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.:
2 specimens, 75-120 mm.
St. 267. 23. vii. 27. 24° 31’ 00” S, 12° 15’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 450-550 (-0) m.: 2 specimens,
53-115 mm.
St. 269. 26. vii. 27. 15° 55’ 00" S, 10° 35’ 00” E. 43 m. net, horizontal, 600~700 m.: 8 specimens,
60-75 mm.
Hab. North and South Atlantic.
MELAMPHAIDAE 347
Melamphaes mizolepis (Giinther, 1878).
Norman, f.c. p. 168.
St. 276. 5. viii. 27. 5° 54’ 00S, 11° 19’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 150 (-o) m.: 2 specimens, 28—
30 mm.
St. 281. 12. viii. 27. 00° 46’ 00” S, 5° 4915” E. Young-fish trawl, 850-950 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
20 mm.
St. 285. 16. viii. 27. 2° 43’ 30” S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (—o) m.: 12
specimens, 35-60 mm.
St. 288. 21. vili. 27. 00°56’ 00"S, 14° 08’ 30” W. 70cm. tow-net, oblique, 100 (-o)m.: 1
specimen, 12 mm. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: 27 specimens, 20-75 mm.
St. 296. 26. viii. 27. 8° 12’ 00” N, 18° 49’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 450-500 (—o) m.: 2 specimens,
28-30 mm.
28. X. 25. 13°25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 44 m. net, horizontal, goo (—o) m.: 12 specimens, 25-85 mm.
Hab. North and South Atlantic; Indian Ocean and Archipelago; Pacific coast of
North America.
Melamphaes sp.
The following specimens are small and poorly preserved, and cannot be identified :—
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00" S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 4} m. net, horizontal, 1000 (-o) m.: 3 specimens,
15-22 mm.
St. lol. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.:
4 specimens, 28-38 mm.
St. 245. 10. vi. 27. 38° 20’ 00” S, 22° 18’ 00” W. 44 m. net, horizontal, 1800-2000 m.: I specimen,
50 mm.
St. 298. 29. vili. 27. 13°01’ 45” N, 21°34’45” W. Young-fish trawl, goo—-1200 (—o) m.: 1
specimen, 24 mm.
II. xi. 25. 6°55’ N, 15° 54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 60 mm.
Caulolepis longidens, Gill, 1884.
Brauer, 1906, ‘ Valdivia’ Tiefsee-Fische, p. 286, pl. xii, fig. 4; Zugmayer, 1911, Rés, Camp. Sct.
Monaco, Xxxv, p. 102, pl. v, fig. 3.
St. 239. 2. vi. 27. 46° 56’ 00” S, 46° 03’ 00” W. 44 m. net, horizontal, 1050-1350 (-o) m.: 3
specimens, 115-150 mm.
Depth of bodya little more than twice in the length, length of head 24 to 34. Diameter
of eye 4 to 43 in length of head, interorbital width 2} to 23. Dorsal III 16-17. Anal II
7-8. Pectoral 15. Pelvic I 6.
Hab. Atlantic; coast of California; Hawaiian Islands.
C. subulidens, Garman, from the Pacific coast of Panama, appears to differ chiefly in
the form of the body, more anterior insertion of the pelvics, with a greater distance
between them and the anal, and in having the praemaxillary produced posteriorly into
a long slender process which extends beyond the broadly rounded hinder end of the
maxillary.
348 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Order PERCOMORPHI
Family CHILODIPTERIDAE
Genus Rhectogramma, gen. nov.
Body somewhat elevated, covered with firm ctenoid scales of moderate size; head
scaled. Mouth oblique; jaws equal anteriorly; maxillary exposed, its hinder end rather
broad. A single series of minute villiform teeth in each jaw; no canines; vomer and
palatines apparently toothless. Posterior margin of praeoperculum feebly serrated, with
one or two stronger spines at the angle; operculum with a group of spines at its upper
angle and one or two acute spines near its junction with the suboperculum, which is
armed with a similar but shorter spine. Gill-rakers numerous, long, slender, close-set.
Pseudobranchiae present. First dorsal with 8 spines, well separated from second dorsal,
which has g rays. Anal with 3 spines and 7 rays; originating below anterior part of
dorsal. Dorsal and anal scaleless, with some fine flexible rods resembling rudimentary
rays between the principal rays.1 Caudal forked. Vent immediately in front of anal
fin. Lateral line interrupted; the pores simple.
Genotype. Rhectogramma sherborni, n.sp.
This genus appears to be related to Parasphyraenops, Bean, and Parahynnodus,
Barnard. It differs from the former in the form of the maxillary and operculum, and
in the separate dorsal fins, and from the latter chiefly in the form of the maxillary and
operculum, scaly head, dentition, and interrupted lateral line.
Fig. 39. Rhectogramma sherborni. Holotype. (x 1.)
Rhectogramma sherborni, n.sp.
St. ror. 15. x. 26. 33° 50’ to 34° 13’ S, 16° 04’ to 15° 49’ E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 850-950 m.:
I specimen, 80 mm. Holotype.
Depth of body 3} in the length, length of head 22. Snout much shorter than eye,
diameter of which is greater than interorbital width and 24 in length of head. Maxillary
1 These structures, which have the appearance of slender rays, extend nearly to the margin in the
anterior part of the fin but become much shorter posteriorly.
CHILODIPTERIDAE 349
extending to below anterior half of eye. 22 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch.
36 scales in a longitudinal series; 4 between origin of first dorsal and lateral line;
2 + 6 + 27 scales in the lateral line, which is interrupted near its origin and again just
behind first dorsal fin. Dorsal VIII + I 9; origin of first dorsal 14 times as distant from
base of caudal as from end of snout; first spine very short; fourth longest, more than
4 length of head. Anal III 7. Pectoral with 14 or 15 rays, about as long as head. Pelvic I
5, below base of pectoral. Dark brownish; head lighter, with silvery reflections.
Described from a single specimen, 80 mm. in length; holotype of the species.
Hab. Off South Africa.
Named in honour of Mr C. D. Sherborn, to whose extensive and unrivalled know-
ledge of matters of nomenclature the author is greatly indebted, as a slight appreciation
of his magnificent work, the Index Animalium.
Family CHIASMODONTIDAE
I have given an account of the osteology of this interesting family in a recent paper,
together with a systematic revision of the genera, which includes the material obtained
by the ‘Discovery’ (1929, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 10, 11, p. 529).
Chiasmodon niger, Johnson, 1863.
Norman, t¢.c. p. 538, fig. 8 a.
St. 239. 2.vi.27. 46°56’ 00"S, 46° 03’00” W. 44m. net, horizontal, 1050-1350 (—-o) m.: I
specimen, 60 mm.
St. 285. 16. viii. 27. 2° 43’ 30” S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 44 m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (-o) m.: 1
specimen, 42 mm.
II. xi. 25. 6°55’ N, 15° 54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 58 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Caribbean Sea; Indian Ocean.
Chiasmodon bolangeri, Osorio.!
Osorio, 1909, Mem. Mus. Bocage, 1, p. 22, pl. il, fig. 1.
Chiasmodon microcephalus, Norman, t.c. p. 539, fig. 8 b.
St. 76. 5. vi. 26. 39° 50’ 30” S, 36° 23’ 00” W. 43 m. net, horizontal, 1500 (—o) m.: 2 specimens,
85-115 mm.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00" S, 6°31’ 00” E. 43 m. net, horizontal, 1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 48 mm.
Hab. Atlantic.
Dysalotus alcocki, MacGilchrist 1905.
Norman, f.c. p. 541, fig. 9.
St. 245. 10. vi. 27. 38° 20’ 00" S, 28° 18’ 00" W. 44 m. net, horizontal, r800-2000 m. : 1 specimen,
145 mm.
Hab. South Atlantic; Bay of Bengal.
1 The paper by Osorio, entitled Contribuigao para o conhecimento da Fauna Bathypelagica visinha das
Costas de Portugal, was never included in the Zoological Record, and as unknown to me until quite recently.
Dirill 12
359 - DISCOVERY REPORTS
Dysalotus macrodon, Norman.
Norman, f.c. p. 542, fig. 10.
St. 100. 4.x. 26. 33° 20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00” S, 15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl,
2500-2000 m.: I specimen, 145 mm. (Holotype.)
Hab. South Atlantic.
Pseudoscopelus scriptus, Liitken, 1892.
Norman, ¢.c. p. 543, fig. 11.
St. 288. . 21. viii. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
100 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Sagami Sea.
Family STROMATEIDAE
Nomeus gronovii (Gmelin, 1788).
Regan, 1902, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7), X, p. 122.
2. xi. 25. 7°17’ N, 16° 19’ W. Hand net, surface: 8 specimens, 16-40 mm.
Hab. Atlantic and Indo-Pacific.
Cubiceps gracilis (Lowe, 1843).
Regan, f.c. p. 123.
Cubiceps lowei, Osorio, 1909, Mem. Mus. Bocage, 1, p. 14.1
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00”S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 44 m. net, horizontal, 1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 92 mm.
Hab. Mediterranean; coast of Portugal ; Madeira; Cape of Good Hope; South Atlantic.
Comparison of a number of examples from South Africa with Lowe’s types shows
that C. capensis (Smith, 1845) is synonymous with C. gracilis.
Psenes cyanophrys, Cuv. and Val., 1833.
Regan, t.c. p. 125.
St. 291. 24. vill. 27. 3° 46’ 00” N, 16° 49’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 100 (-o) m.: I specimen
30 mm.
Hab. Atlantic and Indo-Pacific.
Psenes pellucidus, Liitken.
Liitken, 1880, Spoilia Atlantica, p. 516, fig. 601; Regan, t.c. p. 125.
St. 285. 16. viii. 27. 2° 43’ 30” S, 00° 56’ 30” W. 44 m. net, horizontal, 125-175 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
36 mm.
Depth of body twice in the length, length of head 34. Snout shorter than eye, diameter
of which is nearly 3 times in length of head and about equal to interorbital width.
1 See footnote under Chiasmodon bolangeri on p. 349.
STROMATEIDAE 351
Maxillary extending to below anterior part of eye. Dorsal X or XI, 132. Anal III 32.
Posterior rays of dorsal and anal fins longest, about # length of head. Pectoral nearly as
long as head. Pelvic a little longer than head. Pale yellowish and semi-transparent;
sides of body and bases of vertical fins with large brown spots; distal parts of vertical
fins dusky; pectorals pale, pelvics dusky.
Described from a single specimen, 36 mm. in length.
Hab. Atlantic.
Fig. 40. Psenes pellucidus. (x 1%.)
Family GEMPYLIDAE
Nealotus tripes, Johnson.
Johnson, 1865, Proc. Zool. Soc. p. 434; Giinther, 1887, Deep-Sea Fish. ‘Challenger’, p. 35;
Goode and Bean, 1895, Ocean. Ichth. p. 199.
St. 281. 12. vili.27. 00°46’00"S, 5°49'15”E. Young-fish trawl, 850-950 (—o) m. : 1 specimen, 53 mm.
St. 291. 24. viii. 27. 3° 46’00” N, 16° 49’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 100 (—0) m.: 1 specimen, 88 mm.
Depth of body 8 to 82 in the length, length of head nearly 4. Snout longer than eye,
diameter of which is greater than interorbital width and 44 to 4} in length of head.
Maxillary extending to below anterior part of eye; lower jaw strongly projecting.
A single series of small teeth of varying sizes in both jaws; three pairs of strong canines
Fig. 41. Nealotus tripes. ( 1.)
anteriorly in upper jaw and a single pair of much smaller ones at symphysis of lower
jaw. Dorsal XX-XXI, 17-19 + 2. Anal 15-16 + 2. Pectoral about } length of head.
Pelvic represented by a single spine, equal in length to diameter of eye, and rather
longer than the dagger-shaped spine behind the vent.
Described from two specimens, 53 and 88 mm. in length.
Hab. Atlantic.
352 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Order SCLEROPAREI
Family LIPARIDAE
Paraliparis gracilis, n.sp.
St. 146. 8.1.27. 53° 48’ 00"S, 35°37’30” W. Large dredge, heavy pattern, 4 ft. in length
(1-2 m.), 728 m.: rock. 1 specimen, 70 mm. Holotype.
Depth of body equal to length of head and 54 in length of fish. Snout rather obtuse,
scarcely projecting beyond mouth, shorter than eye, diameter of which is about 4 of head.
Maxillary extending to below posterior part of eye; teeth villiform, in broad bands.
Lower end of gill-opening opposite upper pectoral rays. Dorsal with about 59 rays; origin
above extremity of operculum; first four rays very short and partially hidden beneath
the skin. Anal with about 56 rays; origin below about tenth ray of dorsal. Pectoral with
10+1+1+1-+ 3 rays; longest rays of upper portion about equal to those of lower and
as long as head; upper and lower portions separated by three single rays set wide apart.
Fig. 42. Paraliparis gracilis. Holotype. (x 14.)
Described from a single specimen, 70 mm. in length; holotype of the species.
Hab. North of South Georgia.
Very close to P. terrae-novae, Regan, which was described from a single young speci-
men, 35 mm. in length, from McMurdo Sound. It appears to differ in the greater
number of anal rays and in the form of the pectoral fin. The three Antarctic species may
be distinguished as follows.
I. Upper portion of pectoral with 19 rays. 1. antarcticus, Regan, 1914
II. Upper portion of pectoral with about to rays.
A. Anal with 43 rays; pectoral fin without elongate lower rays. 2. terrae-novae, Regan, 1916
B. Anal with about 56 rays; pectoral with 3 elongate lower rays. 3. gracilis, n.sp.
Order PEDICULATI
Family LINOPHRYNIDAE
Haplophryne mollis (Brauer, 1902).
Regan, 1926, Ocean. Rep. Danish ‘ Dana’-Exped. (1920-2), U1, p. 25, pl. iii, fig. 3.
St. 287. 19. vill. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (—o) m. : 1 specimen,
40 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Indian Ocean; New Zealand.
ONEIRODIDAE 353
Family ONEIRODIDAE
Dolopichthys heteracanthus, Regan, 1925.
Regan, 1926, ¢.c. p. 28, pl. v, fig. 1.
28. x. 25. 13° 25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 43 m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 2 specimens, 28-50 mm.
Hab. North Atlantic; Gulf of Panama.
B
Fig. 43. Distal end of the illictum of Dolopichthys allector. A. Lateral view. B. Dorsal view.
(x 8.) From sketches made by Mr E. R. Gunther.
Dolopichthys allector, Garman, 1899.
Regan, t.c. p. 28.
St. 297. 28. vill.27. 12°08’ 00” N, 20° 53’30” W. Young-fish trawl, 250-300 (-o) m.: 1
specimen, 36 mm.
354 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Hab. North Atlantic; Gulf of Panama.
The structure of the bulb of the illictum of this specimen seems to be a little different
to that of D. allector, but in the absence of more data as to the variability of these
structures, and as I have been unable to detect any other differences, I have hesitated
to describe a new species on the basis of a single small specimen. According to a note
made by Mr E. R. Gunther on the fresh specimen, the bulb is silvery in colour with a
tinge of blue, slightly speckled with light brown. This is surmounted by a silvery organ,
perhaps connected with the production of light, which in turn bears a transparent
membranous process pigmented at its base. The Y-shaped appendage attached to and
almost embracing the bulb and silvery organ is reddish brown in colour, and is fringed
by membranous processes of varying length, the distal ends of which are devoid of
colour and nearly transparent.
Dolopichthys longicornis, Parr.
Parr, 1927, Bull. Bingham Ocean. Coll. 111 (1), p. 18, fig. 6.
St. 287. 19. viil. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
35 mm.
28. x. 25. 13° 25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 43m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 30 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; West Indies.
Lophodolus acanthognathus, Regan, 1925.
Regan, 1926, ¢.c. p. 30, pl. vi, fig. 1.
St. 287. 19. vill. 27. 2° 49’ 30” S, 9° 25’ 30” W. Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen,
23 mm.
Hab. Atlantic.
Family MELANOCETIDAE
Melanocetus johnsoni, Giinther, 1864.
Regan, t.c. p. 33.
St. 269. 26 vii. 27. 15° 55’ 00” S, 10° 35’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 600~—700 (—o0) m.: 8 specimens,
25-73 mm.
St. 270. 27. vil. 27. 13° 58’ 30S, 11° 43’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 200 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
35 mm.
28. x. 25. 13° 25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 43m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 2 specimens, 26-30 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Indian Ocean (?).
Family CERATIIDAE
Cryptosparas couesii, Gill, 1883.
Regan, f.c. p. 35, pl. ix, fig. 2.
St. 87. 25. vi. 26. 33°53'45”S, 9° 26’ 30” E. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 1 specimen,
65 mm.
CERATIIDAE 355
28.x.25. 13°25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 44m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 1 specimen 15 mm.
II. xi.25. 6°55’ N, 15°54’ W. 2m. tow-net, horizontal, 800 (—o) m.: 1 specimen, 17 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Gulf of Aden; Gulf of Panama.
The specimen from St. 87 was examined alive on board the ‘Discovery’. It was
observed continually to beat the water with the pectoral fins, suggesting that this action
was in some way connected with respiration. When the water was churned, as by pouring
in more salt water, or when the illicitum was stroked, the luminous distal end emitted a
greenish blue light for half a minute or so. This phenomenon was noted three times.
Definite projections of the skin in the form of very fine black papillae were noted in six
places on each side of the body: three on each side of the lower jaw; one on each side of
the head between the nostril and the base of the illicium; and a pair on each side of the
back at the middle of the body. The position of these papillae is indicated in the accom-
panying figure.
Fig. 44. Outline drawings of Cryptosparas couesii, showing the position of the papillae in the skin.
A. Lateral view. B. Front view. (x 1.)
Mancalias uranoscopus (Giinther, 1878).
Regan, t.c. p. 37, text-fig. 21.
St. 293. 24. viii. 27. 4° 18’ 15” N, 16°51’ 00” W. Young-fish trawl, 100-120 (—o) m.: 2 speci-
mens, 28-30 mm.
28. x. 25. 13° 25’ N, 18° 22’ W. 44m. net, horizontal, goo (-o) m.: 1 specimen, 70 mm.
Hab. Atlantic; Hawaiian Islands.
Mancalias tentaculatus, n.sp.
St. 114. 12. xi. 26. 52° 25’00"S, 9° 50’ 00” E. 44m. net, horizontal, 650~700 m.: I specimen,
110 mm. (Holotype.)
Closely related to M. uranoscopus. Basal bone of illictum a little more than } length of
fish (without caudal), and little longer than the illictum itself; bulb pigmented proximally,
pale yellowish white distally; at the tip of the bulb is a very small brown ring, close to
which are two small and almost transparent tentacles. In front of the pair of stalked
caruncles is a stout ray, which is nearly as long as the distance from the caruncles to the
upper ray of caudal fin, and about 34 in length of fish.
Described from a single specimen, 110 mm. in length; holotype of the species.
Hab. South Atlantic.
In 1908 ‘Tanaka described a somewhat similar fish, 440 mm. in total length, from
356 z DISCOVERY REPORTS
Japan, under the name of Paraceratias mitsukurit, and Regan has shown that apart from
the presence of the tentacle-like ray in front of the caruncles this is exactly similar to
Cryptosparas couesit. Another fish from Japan described by Ginther as Ceratias
carunculatus, which was 35 mm. in length, has this ray represented by a slight pro-
minence, under which is a gland with a pore, but likewise resembles Cryptosparas
couesii in other characters. It is of some interest to find a species with this ray on the
back occurring in both genera.
Fig. 45. Mancalias tentaculatus. Holotype. (x $.) [Distal portion of illicium x 3.]
Family HIMAN'TOLOPHIDAE
Genus Paroneirodes, Alcock, 1890
Regan, who had not seen Alcock’s specimen, united this genus with Diceratias, but
it may be distinguished by the smooth skin, feeble teeth, and more backward position
of the illictum, which arises between the sphenotics.
Fig. 46. Paroneirodes glomerosus. (x 23.)
Paroneirodes glomerosus, Alcock.
Alcock, 1890, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), v1, p. 206, pl. ix, fig. 6.
Oneirodes glomerosus, Alcock, 1899, Cat. Indian Deep-Sea Fish. p. 57; 1900, Illust. Zool. ‘ In-
vestigator’, Fishes, pl. xxviii, fig. 4.
Diceratias glomerulosus, Regan, 1926, t.c. p. 42.
St. 269. 26. vil. 27. 15° 55’ 00" S, 10° 35’ 00” E. Young-fish trawl, 600~700 (—o) m.: I specimen,
26 mm.
Illictum about } length of fish, more than four times as long as the ray behind it;
oO
terminal bulb without filaments. Dorsal 6. Anal 4. Caudal 8 (?).
HIMANTOLOPHIDAE 357
Described from two specimens, 26 to 28 mm. in length, including the type of the
species lent to me by the Indian Museum!.
Hab. South Atlantic; Indian Ocean (Bay of Bengal).
Family ACERATIIDAE
Lipactis tumidus, Regan, 1925.
Regan, 1926, t.c. p. 43, pl. xii, fig. 2.
St. 298. 29. vill. 27. 13°01’ 45” N, 21° 34’ 45” W. Young-fish trawl, goo-1200 (-o) m.:
I specimen, 13 mm.
Hab. North Atlantic.
Rhynchoceratias brevirostris, Regan, 1925.
Regan, 1926, t.c. p. 43, pl. xiii, fig. 1, text-fig. 25 a.
St. 298. 29. viii. 27. 13° o1’ 45” N, 21° 34’ 45” W. Young-fish trawl, goo-1200 (-o) m.:
I specimen, 40 mm.
1 This specimen is poorly preserved, and the ray behind the illictum has been torn away from the skin,
thus appearing somewhat longer at first sight.
Diuiii 13
PARA ae Aa ESS lela
INTRODUCTION
es collection of Flatfishes made by the R.R.S.‘ Discovery’ and R.R.S. ‘William
Scoresby’ includes examples of nine species, and, although of small size, is of con-
siderable interest. It includes a single specimen of a genus and species apparently new
to science. With the sole exception of one specimen of Heteromycteris capensis, the
collection was made either in the Magellan-Falkland Islands region or off the coast of
West Africa.
My thanks are due to the members of the Discovery Committee for permission to
examine this material, and are gratefully tendered. 'The figure of Achiropsetta tricholepis
has been drawn by Lieut.-Col. W. P. C. Tenison, D.S.O.
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT
Order HETEROSOMATA
Family BOTHIDAE
Genus Thysanopsetta, Giinther
Giinther, 1880, Shore Fishes ‘Challenger’, p. 22.
Thysanopsetta naresi, Giinther.
Giinther, 1880, ¢.c. p. 22, pl. xi, fig. A.
St. 51. 4. v.26. Off Eddystone Rock, East Falkland Islands. From 7 miles N 50° E to 7-6 miles
N 63° E of Eddystone Rock. Large otter trawl, 105-115 m.: fine sand. 2 specimens, 100-127 mm.
St. WS 77. 12. iii.27. 51° 01'00"S, 66°31’ 30” W. Commercial otter trawl, 110-113 m.:
coarse dark sand. 4 specimens, 38-115 mm.
St. WS go. 7. iv. 27. *13 miles N 83° E of Cape Virgins Light, Argentine Republic. Commercial
otter trawl, 82-81 m.: fine dark sand. 5 specimens, 63-132 mm.
St. WS g1. 8.iv.27. 52°53’ 45”S, 64°37’ 30” W. Commercial otter trawl, 191-205 m.:
fine dark sand and shells. 1 specimen, 44 mm.
St. WS 92. 8.iv.27. 51° 58'30"S, 65° 01'00” W. Commercial otter trawl, 145-143 m.:
fine dark sand and stones. 2 specimens, 41-61 mm.
St. WS 96. 17. iv. 27. 48° 00’ 45”S, 64° 58’ 00” W. Commercial otter trawl, 96 m.: fine dark
sand. 35 specimens, 34-80 mm. [Taken from stomach of Merluccius.]
St. WS 97. 18.iv.27. 49° 00’ 30”S, 61°58’ 00” W. Commercial otter trawl, 146-145 m.:
sand, gravel and stones. 1 specimen, 83 mm.
St. WS 216. 1. vi. 28. 47° 37’ 00S, 60° 50’ 00” W. Net attached to back of trawl, 219-133 m.:
fine sand. I specimen, 142 mm.
BOTHIDAE 359
St. WS 219. 3. vi. 28. 47°06’00"S, 62° 1200" W. Tow-net attached to back of trawl, 116—
114 m.: dark sand. 2 specimens, 70-75 mm.
St. WS 222. 8. vi. 28. 47° 23’ 00”S, 65° 00’ 00” W. ‘Tow-net attached to back of trawl, 10o-
106 m.: coarse brown sand and shells. 5 specimens, 37-45 mm.
Depth of body 24 to 23 in the length, length of head 4 to 5. Upper profile of head
generally a little notched in front of eyes. Snout shorter than eye, diameter of which
is 3 to 34 in length of head and more than twice the width of the flat, scaly interorbital
space; upper eye a little in advance of lower and close to edge of head. Jaws and
dentition about equally developed on both sides; the maxillary extending to below
middle of eye or not quite as far, length a little more than 2 in that of head; lower jaw
scarcely projecting, its length 13 to nearly 2 in head; rather broad bands of small
conical teeth in both jaws. Margin of gill-cover fringed; gill-rakers long, slender, 20 to
23 on lower part of anterior arch. Scales small, ctenoid on both sides of body ; 67 to 72
in lateral line. Dorsal 84-90; origin above nostrils of blind side and just in front of
upper eye; all the rays simple, not scaled. Anal 61-66; first interhaemal spine not pro-
jecting. Pectoral of ocular side with g or 10 simple rays, length about } that of head;
that of blind side shorter. Pelvics with 6 rays; short-based, subequal and nearly
symmetrical. Caudal with 15 simple rays, rounded; caudal peduncle short. Brownish
or greyish, mottled and spotted with darker, and with small dark dots forming irregular
lines running along the body between the series of scales; all the rays of the fins finely
dotted with brown or black.
Described from several specimens, up to 175 mm. in total length, including the holo-
type of the species.
Hab. Magellan-Falkland Islands region.
Genus Eucitharus, Gill
Citharus (non Reinhardt, 1838), Bleeker, 1862, Versl. Akad. Amsterdam, XII, p. 424.
Eucitharus, Gill, 1889, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. x1, p. 600.
Eucitharus linguatula (Linnaeus).
Pleuronectes linguatula, Linnaeus, 1758, Syst. Nat. ed. 10, p. 270.
Citharus linguatula, Giinther, 1862, Cat. Fish, tv, p. 418.
Eucitharus linguatula, Carus, 1889-93, Prodr. Faun. Medit. 11, p. 588.
St. 272. 30. vii.27. Off Elephant Bay, Angola; from 13° 11'S, 12° 44" 45” E to 13° 09’ 45"S,
12° 46’ E. Large otter trawl, 73-97 m.: green sand and mud. 3 specimens, 200-212 mm.
St. 274. 4. viii. 27. Off St Paul de Loanda, Angola; from 8° 40’ 15”"S, 13° 13’ 45” E to
8° 38’ 15” S, 13° 13’ 00” E. Large otter trawl, 64-65 m.: grey mud. 4 specimens, 28-80 mm.
St. 279. 10. viii. 27. Off Cape Lopez, French Congo; from 8-5 miles N 71° E to 15 miles N 24° E
of Cape Lopez Light. Large otter trawl, 58-67 m.: mud and fine sand. 2 specimens, 140-170 mm.
Depth of body 24 to 2? in the length, length of head 3 to 3. Upper profile of head
distinctly concave. Snout a little longer than eye, diameter of which is 5 to 53 in length
13-2
360 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
of head; eyes separated by a low bony ridge, the upper a little in advance of lower and
very close to edge of head. Posterior nostril a large opening, that of blind side covered
by a membranous valve which extends downwards towards the mouth. Maxillary
extending to below posterior edge of eye or not quite as far, length about 4 head; lower
jaw strongly projecting, its length 12 to 1? in that of head; a shallow emargination at its
anterior end receives a corresponding prominence on the upper jaw; praemaxillary with
an outer series of rather strong teeth, inside which are one or two large canines ; maxillary
with a single series of smaller teeth; mandibulary teeth uniserial, somewhat enlarged
anteriorly ; two or three strong teeth on the vomer. Gill-rakers of moderate length and
rather slender, 11 or 12 on lower part of anterior arch. Scales rather large, thin,
deciduous, more or less ctenoid on both sides of body; 35 to 39 scales in the lateral line.
Lateral line well developed on both sides of body, with a strong curve above the
pectoral fin; continued to posterior edge of caudal fin; the tubules simple. Dorsal
64~72; origin immediately behind lower part of posterior nostril on blind side of head
and just in front of eye; nearly all the rays branched, not scaled. Anal 44-48; tip of
first interhaemal spine not projecting. Pectoral fin of ocular side with 10 rays (7
branched), length a little more than } that of head; that of blind side shorter. Pelvics
with 6 rays; short-based, subequal, that of ocular side situated on median line of body.
Caudal with 2/15/2 rays; double-truncate; caudal peduncle 12 times as deep as long.
Greyish or yellowish brown; a black spot at base of last rays of dorsal fin and a
similar spot above posterior end of anal; a row of round black spots on dorsal and
anal fins.
Described from several specimens, 28 to 170 mm. in total length.
Hab. Mediterranean; West Africa.
This species, which does not appear to have been adequately described before, has
not been previously recorded from the coast of West Africa.
Genus Arnoglossus, Bleeker
Bleeker, 1862, Versl. Akad. Amsterdam, xi, p. 427.
Arnoglossus imperialis (Rafinesque).
Bothus imperialis, Rafinesque, 1810, Car. n.gen., p. 23.
Arnoglossus imperialis, Kyle, 1913, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped. 1908-10, 1, A, 1, p. 79, fig. Io.
St. 272. 30. vil. 27. Off Elephant Bay, Angola; from 13° 11'S, 12° 44’ 45” E to 13° 09’ 45",
12° 46” E. Large otter trawl, 73-97 m.: green sand and mud. 1 specimen, 80 mm.
St. 274. 4.vili.27. Off St Paul de Loanda, Angola; from 8° 40’15”S, 13° 13’ 45” E to
8° 38’ 15" S, 13° 13 00” E. Large otter trawl, 64-65 m.: grey mud. 1 specimen, 75 m.
St.279. 10. vill. 27. Off Cape Lopez, French Congo; from 8-5 miles N 71° E to 15 miles N 24° E
of Cape Lopez Light. Large otter trawl, 58-67 m.: mud and fine sand. 1 specimen, 90 mm.
All these specimens are rather small and in poor condition, but appear to belong to
this species. The most southerly point from which it has been previously recorded is
south of the Azores (‘ Hirondelle’).
BOTHIDAE 361
Genus Lepidopsetta, Giinther
Giinther, 1880, Shore Fishes ‘Challenger’, p. 18.
Lepidopsetta maculata, Giinther.
Giinther, 1880, ¢.c. p. 18, pl. xxx, fig. C.
St. WS 218. 2.vi.28. 45°45’ 00"S, 59° 35’00” W. Commercial otter trawl, 311-247 m.:
dark sand. 1 specimen, 238 mm.
Depth of body 2} to 2 in the length, length of head about 3#. Upper profile of head
a little notched in front of eyes. Snout shorter than eye, diameter of which is 3 to 34
in length of head; eyes separated by a very narrow scaly space, the lower in advance of
upper, which is close to edge of head; upper parts of both eyes densely scaled. Jaws
about equally developed on both sides; the maxillary extending to below anterior part
of eye, length } or more than + that of head; lower jaw not projecting, its length about
2 in head; teeth more developed on blind side; small, conical, uniserial in both jaws;
no teeth on the vomer. Gill-rakers rather short and stout, about 12 on lower part of
anterior arch. Scales ctenoid on both sides of body, 114 to 120 in lateral line. Lateral
line well developed on both sides of body, nearly straight. Dorsal 118-119; origin
behind posterior nostril of blind side and just in front of eye; highest rays about 4 length
of head. Anal 97-98; tip of first interhaemal spine not projecting. No pectorals. Pelvic
fin of ocular side with 7 rays, elongate, situated on median line of body; that of blind
side with 5 rays, short-based, lateral in position, its first ray opposite to fourth of right
pelvic; both pelvic fins free from anal. Caudal with 2/15/2 rays, rounded; caudal
peduncle very short. Brownish; head, body and fins covered with irregular rounded
darker spots and blotches.
Described from two specimens, 134 and 238 mm. in total length, the smaller being
the holotype of the species.
Hab. Near Prince Edward’s Island; South Atlantic, north of the Falkland Islands.
Genus Achiropsetta, gen. nov.
Body rather elongate ; the middle portion fairly thick and muscular, continued above
and below as a thin, semi-transparent region containing the supports of the fins. Eyes
on the left side, separated by a flat scaly space. Mouth rather small; jaws and dentition
about equally developed on both sides; teeth very small, pointed, not enlarged an-
teriorly ; apparently uniserial in both jaws; palate toothless. Gill-rakers short and stout.
Dorsal fin commencing above posterior nostril of blind side and in advance of upper
eye; all the rays simple and scaled on both sides; dorsal and anal ending very close to
base of caudal. No pectorals. Pelvic fin of ocular side elongate, median anteriorly,
twisted on to left side of body posteriorly; that of blind side with shorter base, lateral.
Scales very small, ctenoid, the long spinules directed vertically, giving the skin a pilose
appearance; upper surfaces of both eyes densely scaled. Lateral line well developed on
both sides of body, nearly straight.
362 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Genotype: Achiropsetta tricholepis, n.sp.
Apparently related to Lepidopsetta, differing chiefly in the form of the body and the
structure of the scales.
Achiropsetta tricholepis, n.sp.
St. WS 89. 7. iv. 27. 9 miles N 21° E of Arenas Point Light, Tierra del Fuego; from 53° o1’ 00” S,
68° 07’ 00” W to 52° 59’ 30” S, 68° 06’ 00” W. Commercial otter trawl, 23-21 m.: mud, gravel
and stones. I specimen, 100 mm. Holotype.
Depth of body 24 in the length, length of head 44. Upper profile of head evenly
convex. Snout shorter than eye, diameter of which is about 3} in length of head and
3 times the interorbital width; lower eye in advance of upper, which is rather close to
edge of head. Maxillary extending to below anterior part of eye, length a little more
Y Y, WMA IW W079:
RE RESENSHOS RoeeRG Sp
Fig. 47. Achiropsetta tricholepis. Holotype. (Nat. size.)
than } that of head ; lower jaw scarcely projecting, its length nearly } head. Upper angle
of gill-opening below commencement of lateral line, level with centre of interorbital
space; 9 or 10 gill-rakers on lower part of anterior arch. Dorsal about 130; highest rays
less than 4 length of head. Anal 114. Pelvic fin of ocular side with 7 rays, that of blind
side with 6. Caudal with 18 rays, rounded. Uniformly yellowish brown.
Described from a single specimen, 100 mm. in total length; holotype of the species.
Hab. Off Tierra del Fuego.
Genus Bothus, Rafinesque
Rafinesque, 1810, Car. n.gen., p. 23.
Bothus podas (Delaroche).
Pleuronectes podas, Delaroche, 1809, Ann. Mus. H.N. (Paris), x11 (77), p. 354.
Bothus podas, Kyle, 1913, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped. 1908-10, U1, A, 1, p. 100, fig. 17.
St. 271. 29. vii. 27. Elephant Bay, Angola. Seine net, 5—o m.: 3 specimens, 55-73 mm.
St. 299. 4. ix. 27. Tarrafal,S. Antonio, Cape Verde Islands. Medium rectangular net, 7-11 m.:
I specimen, 38 mm.
Hab. Mediterranean; Eastern Atlantic, southwards to Angola.
SOLEIDAE 363
Family SOLEIDAE
Genus Solea, Quensel
Quensel, 1806, Vet. Akad. Handl. xxvit, p. 229.
Solea (Dicologlossa) chirophthalmus, Regan.
Solea chirophthalmus, Regan, 1915, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8) xv, p. 129.
Dicologlossa chirophthalmus, Chabanaud, 1927, Bull. Inst. Océan. Monaco, 488, p. 28.
St. 274. 4. vill.27. Off St Paul de Loanda, Angola; from 8° 40’15”S, 13° 13’ 45” E to
8° 38’ 15” S, 13° 13’ 00” E. Large otter trawl, 64-65 m.: grey mud. 2 specimens, 145-210 mm.
Hab. West Africa.
Known previously only from the types (170-200 mm.) from Lagos.
Genus Heteromycteris, Kaup
Kaup, 1858, Arch. Naturg. Xx1v, 1, p. 103.
Heteromycteris capensis, Kaup.
Kaup, 1858, ¢.c. p. 103; Chabanaud, 1927, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (9) XX, p. 525.
St. 91. 8. ix. 26. 0-5 mile off Roman Rock, False Bay, South Africa. Large rectangular net,
35 m.: sand. 1 specimen, 104 mm.
Hab. South Africa.
Family CYNOGLOSSIDAE
Genus Symphurus, Rafinesque
Rafinesque, 1810, Indice Itt. Sicil. pp. 13, 52.
Symphurus nigrescens, Rafinesque.
Rafinesque, f.c. pp. 13, 52.
Plagusia lactea, Bonaparte, 1833, Icon. Faun. Ital. (5).
Symphurus lactea, Kyle, 1913, Rep. Danish Ocean. Exped. 1908-10, U1, A, 1, p. 139, fig. 23.
St. 274. 4.viii.27. Off St Paul de Loanda, Angola; from 8° 40’15”"5S, 13°13’ 45” E to
8° 38’ 15” S, 13° 1300” E. Large otter trawl, 64-65 m.: grey mud. 6 specimens, 23~77 mm.
St. 279. 10. viii. 27. Off Cape Lopez, French Congo; from 8-5 miles N 71° E to 15 miles N 24° E
of Cape Lopez Light. Large otter trawl, 58-67 m.: mud and fine sand. 7 specimens, 62-90 mm.
Hab. Mediterranean; West Africa.
These small specimens appear to be identical with the species originally described
from the Mediterranean, but I have no material from the latter locality for comparison.
It has been recorded from the Bay of Biscay and from near the Azores.
acanthognathus, Lophodolus, 354.
acanthurus, Gonostomus, 282
acanthurus, Sternoptyx, 303
acanturus, Gasteropelecus, 282
acclinidens, Cyclothone, 288
Aceratiidae, 357
ACHIROPSETTA, 361
aculeatus, Argyropelecus, 301, 303
affine, Myctophum, 325
affinis, Argyropelecus, 301
affinis, Stomias, 315
africana, Yarrella, 289
alatus, Lampanyctus, 330
alba, Cyclothone, 287
alcocki, Dysalotus, 349
Alepocephalidae, 267
ALEPOCEPHALUS, 267, 270
ALEPOSOMUS, 267, 270
allector, Dolopichthys, 353
Allotriognathi, 342
amabilis, Sternoptychides, 303
amethysto-punctatus, Maurolicus, 298
Anacanthini, 339
anascopa, Dolichopteryx, 27%
anderssoni, Myctophum, 319, 320
ANOMALOPTERUS, 267
antarcticum, Myctophum, 319, 322
antarcticus, Bathylagus, 273, 276
antarcticus, Borostomias, 306
antarcticus, Paraliparis, 352
Apodes, 337
arcticum, Myctophum, 319
argenteolus, Manducus, 294.
argenteus, Diretmus, 342
argenteus, Lampanyctus, 328
argenteus, Photichthys, 293
Argentinidae, 272
ARGYRIPNUS, 279, 299
argyrogaster, Bathylagus, 272, 273
ARGYROPELECUS, 301
ARISTOSTOMIAS, 317
ARNOGLOSSUS, 360
asperum, Myctophum, 325
ASQUAMICEPS, 267
ASTHENURUS, 340
ASTRONESTHES, 306
Astronesthidae, 306
ater, Lampanyctus, 331
atlanticum, Gonostoma, 283
atlanticus, Bathylagus, 272, 274
atlanticus, Bregmaceros, 340
atlanticus, Melamphaes, 346
atlanticus, Stomias, 316
atraria, Cyclothone, 288
Ditiii
INDEX
atripinnis, Asthenurus, 340
atrox, Photostomias, 317
attenuatus, Vinciguerria, 290, 291, 297
AULASTOMATOMORPHA, 267, 272
aureus, Discus, 343
australis, Maurolicus, 298
AVOCETTINA, 338
BaJACALIFORNIA, 267
barnardi, Alepocephalus, 270
BATHOPHILUS, 311
BaTHYLAGUS, 272
BATHYMACROPS, 272
bathymaster, Bregmaceros, 340
bathyphilum, Gonostoma, 285
BATHYTROCTES, 267, 268
beanit, Melamphaes, 346
beanit, Serrivomer, 338
benedicti, Bathylagus, 273, 277
BENTHOSPHYRAENA, 267
Berycomorphi, 342
blackfordi, Yarrella, 288
blanfordi, Alepocephalus, 270
bocagei, Argyropelecus, 301
bolangeri, Chiasmodon, 349
BoNAPaARTIA, 278, 280
borealis, Bathylagus, 277
borealis, Maurolicus, 298
borealis, Scopelus, 298
BOROSTOMIAS, 306
Bothidae, 358
Botuus, 362
boureei, Flagellostomias, 310
brachycephalus, Diaphus, 334
braueri, Cyclothone, 287
braueri, Lampadena, 335
braueri, Lampanyctus, 327
BREGMACEROS, 339
brevidens, Gonostoma, 282, 285, 290
brevirostris, Rhynchoceratias, 357
bronsont, Sudis, 318
CALLOPTILUM, 340
canina, Cyclothone, 288
caninus, Argyropelecus, 303
capensis, Cubiceps, 350
capensis, Heteromycteris, 363
Caristiidae, 343
CaRISTIUS, 343
carunculatus, Ceratias, 356
CAULOLEPIS, 347
Ceratiidae, 354
Chauliodontidae, 308
CHAULIODUS, 308
14
366
CHIASMODON, 349
Chiasmodontidae, 349
Chilodipteridae, 348
chirophthalmus, Solea, 363
chordatus, Stylophorus, 342
CITHARUS, 359
Cocca, 296
coccoi, Myctophum, 325
colletti, Scopelus, 323
colubrinus, Stomias, 316
Congridae, 338
Conocara, 267
copet, Xenodermichthys, 270
corythaeola, Yarrella, 289
couestt, Cryptosparas, 354.
cristiceps, Melamphaes, 346
CRYPTOSPARAS, 354.
CUBICEPS, 350
cyaneus, Aleposomus, 270
cyaneus, Astronesthes, 306
cyanophrys, Psenes, 350
CYCLOTHONE, 279, 286
Cynoglossidae, 363
CYNOMACRURUS, 341
danae, Chauliodus, 308
denudatum, Gonostoma, 282
diaphana, Sternoptyx, 305
Diapuus, 318, 331
DIcERATIAS, 356
DICOLOGLOsSA, 363
DIPLOPHOS, 279, 295
Diretmidae, 342
DIRETMUS, 342
DIScus, 343
dofleint, Diaphus, 332
DOLICHOPTERYX, 267, 271
DOLOPICHTHYS, 353
dumerili, Diaphus, 33%
@urvillet, Argyropelecus, 303
DYSALOTUS, 349
ECHIOSTOMA, 314.
ELEPHENOR, 343
elongatum, Gonostoma, 283
elongatum, Triplophos, 296
elongatus, Argyropelecus, 301
elongatus, Bathylagus, 277
elongatus, Lampanyctus, 329
elongatus, Stomias, 315
Evops, 278
enbarbatus, Eustomias, 313
ephippiatus, Argyripnus, 300
ERICARA, 267
EUCITHARUS, 359
euryops, Bathylagus, 273, 277
Eurypharyngidae, 337
EURYPHARYNX, 337
EUSTOMIAS, 312
Exocoetidae, 339
INDEX
EXOCOETUS, 339
evolans, Halocypselus, 339
ferox, Stomias, 315
festivus, Lampanyctus, 330
fibulatum, Myctophum, 325
filifer, Astronesthes, 306
FLAGELLOSTOMIAS, 309, 310
fulgens, Diaphus, 332
Gadidae, 339
gemellari, Diaphus, 332
Gempylidae, 351
gigas, Argyropelecus, 301, 302
glaciale, Myctophum, 324
glacialis, Bathylagus, 272, 275
glomerosus, Paroneirodes, 356
GONOSTOMA, 279, 281
Gonostomatidae, 278
gracile, Gonostoma, 282, 285
gracilis, Bathylagus, 272, 276
gracilis, Cubiceps, 350
gracilis, Leptostomias, 351
gracilis, Melanonus, 340
gracilis, Paraliparis, 352
GRAMMATOCEPHALUS, 338
grandis, Cyclothone, 285
gronovit, Nomeus, 350
guentheri, Lampanyctus, 329
guentheri, Rouleina, 271
guernet, Photostomias, 317
GYRINOMENE, 343
HALOCYPSELUS, 339
haplocaulus, Leptostomias, 311
HAPLOCLONUS, 312
HAPLOPHRYNE, 352
HAPLOSTOMIAS, 314.
heathi, Argyropelecus, 303
hectoris, Lampanyctus, 328
hemigymnus, Argyropelecus, 301, 303
hemingi, Triplophos, 296
heteracanthus, Dolopichthys, 353
HETEROMYCTERIS, 363
Himantolophidae, 356
holti, Diaphus, 335
homopterus, Bathytroctes, 269
humboldti, Myctophum, 325
humboldtii, Scopelus, 298
ICHTHYOCOCCUS, 279, 296
IDIACANTHUS, 315
illustris, Polymetme, 289
imperialis, Arnoglossus, 360
indicus, Astronesthes, 306
infans, Avocettina, 338
Iniomi, 318
intermedius, Argyropelecus, 303
interruptum, Myctophum, 324.
intricarius, Lampanyctus, 330
iridescens, Argyripnus, 299
irregularis, Bathophilus, 311
Isospondyli, 267
japonicus, Caristius, 344.
japonicus, Maurolicus, 298
johnsoni, Melanocetus, 354
kempt, Grammatocephalus, 339
kroyeri, Sudis, 318
lactea, Symphurus, 363
LAMPADENA, 318, 335
LAMPANYCTUS, 318, 326
laternatum, Myctophum, 324
laternatus, Polyipnus, 305
latifrons, Bathylagus, 277
LEPIDOPSETTA, 361
leptobolus, Leptostomias, 311
LEPTOCHILICHTHYS, 267
LEPTODERMA, 267
LEPTOSTOMIAS, 309, 311
linguatula, Eucitharus, 359
Linophrynidae, 352
LIPACTIS, 357
Liparidae, 352
livida, Cyclothone, 287
lividus, Rouleina, 271
longibarba, Leptostomias, 311
longibarbatus, Macrostomias, 315
longicornis, Dolopichthys, 354
longidens, Caulolepis, 347
longipes, Bathophilus, 312
longipes, Dolichopteryx, 271
longipinnis, Bathophilus, 312
LOoPHODOLUS, 354
lucetia, Vinciguerria, 291, 292
lucidus, Diaphus, 335
luetkeni, Diaphus, 333
LYCHNOPOLES, 293
lychnus, Argyropelecus, 304
Lyomeri, 337
maclellandi, Bregmaceros, 339
macrochir, Myctophum, 326
macrodon, Dysalotus, 350
macrolychnus, Neonesthes, 308
macropogon, Leptostomias, 311
macropus, Caristius, 343
MACcROSTOMIAS, 315
Macruridae, 341
maculata, Lepidopsetta, 361
maderensis, Manducus, 294
Malacosteidae, 317
MALACOSTEUS, 317
MANCALIAS, 355
MANDUCUS, 279, 293
MarGRETHIA, 278, 281
masticopogon, Odontostomias, 310
maurolict, Scopelus, 298
Maurolicinae, 279
INDEX 367
MAUuROLICUS, 279, 297
mediterranea, Sternoptyx, 303
megalops, Melamphaes, 345
megalops, Myctophum, 323
MELAMPHAES, 344
Melamphaidae, 344
Melanocetidae, 354
MELANOCETUS, 354
MELANONUS, 340
microcephalus, Bathylagus, 272, 274
microcephalus, Chiasmodon, 349
microcephalus, Neonesthes, 307
microdon, Cyclothone, 287
micropogon, Odontostomias, 309
microps, Melamphaes, 345
micropterus, Lampanyctus, 331
MicrosToMa, 272
Microstomidae, 272
milleri, Bathylagus, 272, 274.
minima, Lampadena, 336
minutus, Diplophos, 294
mirum, Calloptilum, 340
MITCHILLINA, 267
mitsukurii, Paraceratias, 356
mizolepis, Melamphaes, 34.7
mollis, Diaphus, 335
mollis, Haplophryne, 352
mooret, Diplophos, 294.
muelleri, Maurolicus, 298
multipunctatus, Scopelopsis, 318
Myctophidae, 318
MycroruuM, 318, 319
NARCETES, 267
narest, Thysanopsetta, 358
naufragus, Dasyscopelus, 325
NEALOTUS, 351
NEMATOPRORA, 338
Nemichthyidae, 337
NEMICHTHYS, 337
NEONESTHES, 307
NEOSTOMA, 281
nicholsi, Lampanyctus, 326
niger, Chiasmodon, 349
niger, Idiacanthus, 315
niger, Lampanyctus, 331
niger, Malacosteus, 317
nigrescens, Symphurus, 363
nimbarius, Vinciguerria, 292
nitida, Lampadena, 336
nodulosus, Xenodermichthys, 270
NOMEUS, 350
NOoMINOSTOMIAS, 313
nordenskjoeldti, Melamphaes, 345
nudus, Rouleina, 271
nummularis, Gyrinomene, 343
oblitum, Microstoma, 272
obscura, Cyclothone, 288
obscura, Sternoptyx, 305
14-2
368
obscurus, Eustomias, 313
obtusirostra, Margrethia, 281
oculatus, Maurolicus, 299
ODONTOSTOMIAS, 309
olfersii, Argyropelecus, 301, 304
Oneirodidae, 353
opalescens, Platyberyx, 344
OPOSTOMIAS, 309
ovatus, Ichthyococcus, 297
pacificus, Bathylagus, 273, 277
pacificus, Diplophos, 295
pallida, Cyclothone, 288
PARACERATIAS, 356
PARAHYNNODUS, 348
PARALIPARIS, 352
parallelum, Myctophum, 319, 320
PARASPHYRAENOPS, 348
PARONEIRODES, 356
parvipinnis, Maurolicus, 298
pawneei, Bathophilus, 312
pedaliota, Bonapartia, 280
Pediculati, 352
pelecanoides, Eurypharynx, 337
pellucidus, Psenes, 350
pennantii, Argentina, 298
pennantii, Maurolicus, 298
Percomorphi, 348
phengodes, Myctophum, 326
PHOTICHTHYS, 278, 279, 292
PHOTOSTOMIAS, 317
photothorax, Lampanyctus, 329
piriet, Cynomacrurus, 34%
PLATYBERYX, 344
PLATYTROCTES, 267
PLEUROTHYRIS, 304
podas, Bothus, 362
polygonifera, Nematoprora, 338
POLYIPNUS, 305
POLYMETME, 288
polyphos, Gonostoma, 284.
POWERIA, 290
poweriae, Vinciguerria, 290
productus, Alepocephalus, 270
PROMYLLANTOR, 339
PSENES, 350
pseudoalatus, Lampanyctus, 330
PSEUDOPHICHTHYS, 339
PSEUDOSCOPELUS, 350
PTERACLIS, 343
pusillus, Lampanyctus, 330
pygmaea, Cyclothone, 288
quadrioculatum, Neostoma, 287
rafinesquet, Diaphus, 334
ramosus, Leptostomias, 311
raoulensis, Gonostoma, 282
raoulensis, Vinciguerria, 292
regant, Eustomias, 312
INDEX
RHECTOGRAMMA, 348
rhodadenia, Cyclothone, 284.
RHYNCHOCERATIAS, 357
rissol, Myctophum, 319, 320
robustus, Melamphaes, 345
rostratus, Bathytroctes, 268, 270
ROULEINA, 267, 270
sanzol, Vinciguerria, 290, 292
schizochirus, Bathophilus, 312
Scleroparei, 352
scolopaceus, Nemichthys, 337
SCOPELOPSIS, 318
scriptus, Pseudoscopelus, 350
SERRIVOMER, 338
sherborni, Rhectogramma, 348
Siemops, 281
signata, Cyclothone, 286
sladeni, Argyropelecus, 301, 304
sloanei, Chauliodus, 308
socialis, Xenodermichthys, 270
SOLEA, 363
Soleidae, 363
spinosus, Polyipnus, 305
splendidus, Diaphus, 335
squamilaterus, Rouleina, 27%
stellatus, Valenciennellus, 300
Sternoptychiidae, 301
STERNOPTYX, 305
stigmaticus, Sigmops, 283
STOMIAS, 315
Stomiatidae, 308
Stromateidae, 350
Stylophoridae, 342
STYLOPHORUS, 342
subasper, Dasyscopelus, 323
subasperum, Myctophum, 319, 323
subulidens, Caulolepis, 347
Sudidae, 318
SupDIS, 318
SYMPHURUS, 363
Synentognathi, 339
taenia, Diplophos, 295
taaningi, Diaphus, 332
TALISMANIA, 267, 269
tanneri, Echiostoma, 314.
tenisont, Myctophum, 319, 321
tenorei, Scopelus, 291
tentaculatus, Haplostomias, 314
tentaculatus, Mancalias, 355
terrae-novae, Paraliparis, 352
'THYSANACTIS, 309
'THYSANOPSETTA, 358
townsendi, Lampanyctus, 327
trewavasae, Eustomias, 313
'TRIARCUS, 297
tricholepis, Achiropsetta, 362
tripes, Nealotus, 351
‘TRIPLOPHOS, 279, 296
tripunctulatus, Valenciennellus, 300
trituberatus, Eustomias, 313
tumidus, Lipactis, 357
typhlops, Melamphaes, 344
umbriceps, Alepocephalus, 270
uranoscopus, Mancalias, 355
valdivae, Stomias, 315
VALENCIENNELLUS, 279, 300
vartabilis, Eustomias, 313
velaris, Asquamiceps, 267
VINCIGUERRIA, 279, 290
INDEX
warmingt, Lampanyctus, 327
watasi, Rouleina, 27%
XENODERMICHTHYS, 267, 270
XENOGNATHUS, 267
xenostoma, Aristostomias, 317
YARRELLA, 279, 288
ZALARGES, 290
ZAPHOTIAS, 280
sugmayert, Melanonus, 341
369
Paw (ee
ARLES Lda
at! A » ‘a
WoC aye
Pee AQ UK) Un J A
Snel Sas mney rays
¥
yt
Ne
Bee oie “pot
euler wary ies. 2aeuMY SEE
8 0} beiudinste 2) aoiterolos shor
4
PLA YE) Et
Range of colour in photophores of oceanic fishes.
From sketches made during life by Mr E. R. Gunther.
Fig. 1. Photichthys argenteus. Ventral view showing distribution and
green colour of photophores.
Fig. 2. P. argenteus. Lateral view of two lateral and two ventral
photophores on right side of body (opposite > x in Fig. 1). Lateral
photophores with long concave reflectors, ventral photophores with
shorter concave reflectors.
Fig. 3. Bathytroctes rostratus. Ventral view showing distribution and
red colour of photophores (damaged photophores appear white). The
body colour is black.
Fig. 4. Argyropelecus hemigymnus. Ventral view to show distribution
of photophores. The violet coloration is attributed to a diffraction
effect.
I]
PLATE
REPORTS, VOL. II
RY
q
4
DISCOVE
I2BS°9>2e28092
AS one >
92 93: $32:
:
a
PIIPBDQVO
FISHES
ANIC
OCE
=
‘
—
Ss
‘
~
&
——
Ng
7s
DISCOVERY
REPORTS
Vol. II, pp. 371-402, plates III and IV, text-figs. 1-18
Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Government of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands
CEPHALOPODA, I. OCTOPODA
by
G. C. Robson, M.A.
—,
Laine
~ 28S%25 %
“DEG £2 790. 3}
\ Ara SEL eh ‘
a | a ae
evan wmUsSe
CAMBRIDGE
AT THE UNIVERSITY. PRESS
1930
Price three shillings net
one
[Discovery Reports. Vol. II, pp. 371-402, Plates III and IV, text-figs. 1-18, November, 1930.]
CLEVE AMvOrO DAT OCLOPODA
By
G. C. ROBSON, M.A.
CONTENTS
Introduction (with special reference to the ““Eledoninae”) . . . page 373
Systematic: se" 6s. gp a. ss fe er Ss go ec es es eS
Cirroteuthis Slactalss Spat Feeney ei te oy ae eS 7S
‘Eledonella massyae, subsp. purpurea, subsp. nov. . . . . . . . 379
Vatreledonellantransiuctda.snsp ss --nei -aen SOO
Amphitretuswihiclerenispar a) Ge es ae ee) eS OS
Graneledoneicharcott, 9%) 3) = Se ae ee ee eee
Graneledone\turquelti, 2 (3 4 2 ee as OO.
Graneledoneypolymonphas0:Sp= satan nen ee eS OO
Dhaumeledonevountert, m- cen 0-Sp-) 0-1) net nn SO
Benthoctopus:Spia © faeces, ee mek soe) Re eae) ated de ee SO
IEG TAT TS URNS 5 6 6 @ 6 38 8 8 8 5 6 & 56 6 BOG
Octopus (Enteroctopus) megalocyathus . . . . . . . . « . 396
(Orsimns (Qaim) WHOS 5 6 0 6 60 5» 9 o 0 6 6 0 9 o AH)
Octopus\(Cctopus)\wulgarisy. pty) eee Or)
INGOT RIOR NG ob GG SS HOH
Bibliography: qi) 40 cn ESE Ue sy Se es ee OL
byes INCE INS 5 5 5 5 o o 6 0 0 0 0 Sollee nCGe ACP
CEMA ALOPODA I OC TOPODAN
By G. C. Robson, m.a.1
(Plates III and IV, text-figs. 1-18) ‘
INTRODUCTION
HE Octopoda obtained by the ‘Discovery’ form a rich and important collection.
Fifty-nine specimens were obtained, representing fourteen species. Of these the
majority were taken in sub-Antarctic or Antarctic waters, the collection being the
richest ever obtained in these latitudes.
The series is of more than ordinary interest from the systematic and distributional
point of view. The chief items of interest may be presented under two heads.
1. The expedition obtained a number of rare pelagic Octopods belonging to various
families. ‘The most important of these are a single male of a new species of
Vitreledonella, and one specimen each of the rare genera Alloposus and Amphitretus,
both constituting the types of new species. A new and remarkable species of Cirro-
teuthis was obtained, for which a separate genus may ultimately be required.
2. Perhaps the most valuable outcome of this study is the flood of light cast on the
genus Eledone by the plentiful supply of specimens which were obtained by the expedi-
tion. No less than forty-three specimens of this characteristic Antarctic group were
obtained, representing four species. Two of these species are new, and for one of these
a new genus Is created.
The study of these forms confirms me in the belief that the Antarctic is, as Berry
(1917, p. 13) suggested, the metropolis of this group. It is absent from nearly the whole
of the Indo-Pacific and Aleutian regions, and is rather sparsely represented in North
Atlantic waters.
Naef has questioned whether the genus as known to him might not be polyphyletic.
Study of the Discovery material and a re-examination of the types of Hoyle’s ‘Chal-
lenger’ species has rendered it most probable that Naef’s suggestion is correct. The
Mediterranean and Antarctic forms are shown to be radically dissimilar in several im-
portant characters, and it seems more likely that the single row of suckers (the only
common feature?) has been acquired independently on two or more occasions. Further-
more, the group of sub-Antarctic and Antarctic forms is not homogeneous. Grane-
ledone (represented by G. charcoti, etc.) is very distinct from Thaumeledone and Eledone
rotunda from further afield but possibly having a sub-Antarctic range. Berry’s £.
challengeri (Kermadec Is.) (= “‘ verrucosa,” Hoyle, 1886) seems to require recognition in a
separate genus on account of its archaic radula. Thaumeledone and Eledone rotunda both
1 Published by permission of the Trustees of the British Museum.
2 Tt is not yet certain how many species of Eledone share with FE. cirrosa and moschata the charac-
teristic of depositing large eggs.
374 DISCOVERY REPORTS
lack ink-sacs (as in the Bathypolypodinae). At present it is impossible to say whether
the Bathypolypodinae are a natural group and whether Thaumeledone and its fellow are
Bathypolypods that have independently acquired a single row of suckers, or whether
(as I am strongly inclined to suspect) the Octopodidae are in a very active evolutionary
stage (Robson, 1929, p. 4), out of which large and natural subdivisions have not yet
been evolved and stabilised, so that the ink-sac has been lost and the suckers have
become uniserial on more than one occasion. These are highly interesting matters which
I hope to discuss at fuller length in a subsequent publication.
One of the most interesting phenomena that have been revealed from the study of
the Discovery material is the degeneration of the radula of Thaumeledone gunteri. Other
forms were examined, and a similar state of affairs was found in Hoyle’s Eledone brevis.
In both these species the radula consists only of the median tooth, vestiges of a lateral
being detected in T. gunteri. These forms represent the end term of a progressive reduc-
tion in the outer teeth seen in E. rotunda, E. polymorpha and certain Bathypolypods.
We are irresistibly reminded of the complete loss of the radula in the Cirromorpha.
But it remains to be seen what the significance of the reduction and loss of the radula
in these forms may be, and whether the loss of the lateral teeth in Thaumeledone is a
stage in a process of general atrophy, or if it merely represents a progressive concentra-
tion of the process of mastication on the median tooth. In favour of the latter, it should
be pointed out that the median is very strong and solid in Thaumeledone. It may be
recalled in this connection that groups of other Mollusca show a similar process of re-
duction to a single strong tooth, e.g. some Aeolididae and Elysia among Opisthobranchs,
some Rachiglossa among the Streptoneura and Chaetoderma among the Amphineura.
It is a source of great pleasure to record the excellent state of preservation of these
specimens. Octopoda of all kinds are usually a source of great trouble to the taxonomist.
Contraction, distortion, discoloration and effacement of the epidermal “sculpture”’
have usually made the task of specific diagnosis unusually difficult. The Discovery
specimens, however, are in magnificent condition, even the delicate pelagic forms being
little distorted.
Note. Certain measurements are given herein in the form of index-numbers in
accordance with the system used in a comprehensive work on Octopod classification
(Robson, 1929, pp. 24 seq., 38, 42). They may be briefly indicated as follows :
: : maximum width of mantle x 100
I. Width, index = —— —_—,
length, eyes to apex of mantle
af interocular width x 100
2°) Head, sadex length (as in 1)
Nene maximum arm length x 100
SP ‘ total length
diameter of largest sucker « 100
4. Suckers, index = ealenoah (Geum)
_ depth of deepest sector (edge to mouth) x 100
5. Web, index :
maximum arm-length
375
SYSTEMATIC
Order OCTOPODA, Leach
Sub-order CIRROMORPHA, Robson, 1929
Cirroteuthis glacialis, n.sp.
St. 182. 14. i. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 64° 21'00”S, 62° 58’ 00” W. 278—
500 m., mud. Large otter trawl: one 3.
Dimensions (in mm.).
Eyes—mantle apex ... yee vat cee 78 Web, depth, in Sector A 148
,, edge of web (between dorsal arms) 140 8 . 53 B 136
Interocular width ... 386 aes nae 80 5 Pe a (cc 116
Body, maximum width oe ase en 58 re a - D 2
Fins, length ... dec ee sts oe 75 5 53 +3 E 66
SE WIdthie sa. see wa am ae 54
Arm (left), length:
TSt) eee Sas diag et zine 200
201 eee ss Jes ne sa 195
gral Gon 2 as BaD as 185
Athy <.. be Sets sie S00 175
The general appearance is characterised by the extraordinarily deep and heavy fins and
the relatively short body and wide head. It is really unlike that of any known species,
though in general outline it recalls C. megaptera, Verrill (Joubin, 1920)!. The arms are in
the order 1, 2, 3, 4. The longest bear about seventy-four suckers. The first fourteen to
seventeen suckers are very deeply sunk in the surface tissues. When sectioned they are
found to be very muscular, the inferior chamber and suctorial surface being excep-
tionally well developed. This fact, considered in relation to the feebleness of the suckers
of some deep-water Octopods, renders the problem of the adaptation of these animals
extremely baffling (v. anon).
The cirrhi are disposed as usual. ‘They do not exceed about 5-5 mm. in length, and the
proximal and distal ones become very minute. The web is of the pattern A, B, C, D, E.
E is well under half the depth of A, a remarkable feature. The head is large, and wider
than long. The eyes are } of the area of the mantle, and are thus of relatively moderate
size (Robson, 1926, p. 1349). The fins are very large. Unlike such forms as C. magna and
megaptera”, in which the fins are also very large, the base is nearly the widest part and
is not narrow, as in those species. The striking thing about the fins is their very great
depth, which is over § of the length from the eyes to the apex of the body. The surface
tissues are, as usual, gelatinous, but the general consistency is firmer and more solid
than usual. The head and arms and the dorsal surface of the mantle are of a fine bluish
purple. The fins and under-surface of the body are more of a reddish tint. A very
It is not at all like the original specimen of megaptera (Verrill, 1885, pl. xliii, fig. 1). It resembles a
specimen taken in 16° 12’ N, 24° 43’ W and named megaptera by Joubin (loc. cit.). Very unfortunately
Joubin did not describe this example in detail and I am quite unable to say if it is rightly named. Though
it resembles this specimen in general proportion, the ‘Discovery’ example differs from it in the size and
shape of its fins,
2 In Joubin’s megaptera (loc. cit.) the sides of the fins seem to be parallel.
376 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
peculiar feature of the oral surface is that the arms and web are coloured the same
purple hue, except for a circular band of paler colour about 30 mm. deep, which passes
round the mouth at the level of the 14th to the 2oth sucker. The oral surface of the arms
(but not of the suckers, which is ochreous) preserves the purple shade?.
The mantle-aperture is very narrow; but it is still to some measure free of the funnel,
and not in contact with it at its side. The temporary adhesion of the funnel to the mantle-
rim is, however, very perfect. The surface of the funnel is excavated to receive the
Fig. 1. Cirroteuthis glacialis, n.sp. x 1.
mantle-edge and the two elements of the locking apparatus are very well developed.
The cephalic element is singularly well developed, especially laterally. In fact I know no
other Octopod in which these ridges are so deeply flanged. When the latter are engaged,
it seems to me that the intake of water must be entirely prevented, as the base of the
funnel is so deep that there is no room for leakage at the sides. This condition is fore-
1 Since writing this description, which is based on the preserved specimen, I have seen the original
colour-sketch made when the animal was alive. The circular band of pale colour turns out to be a
circumoral ring of eight round white patches, each of which lies astride an arm. Between this ring
and the mouth, the web was bright reddish purple; peripherally and beyond the ring it was of an
intense bluish purple. This pattern and coloration are extremely vivid and arresting.
CIRROTEUTHIDAE 377
shadowed in Macrochlaena (Robson, 1929, p. 194). The funnel itself is well developed.
It is narrowly conical in shape, and its organ is well developed (Fig. 3). It consists of a
thick-limbed plate in the shape of an inverted V (A). The fin supports (Fig. 2) are like
none so far described. As in Chunioteuthis ebersbachii and C. grimaldii and umbellata, the
y
Fig. 3. Curroteuthis glacialis.
Funnel-organ. x 3.
=
Fig. 4. Cirroteuthis glacialis. Fig. 5. Curroteuthis glacialis.
Alimentary canal. 1-2. Male reproductive organs. x 4.
Fig. 2. Cirroteuthis glacialis. Fin support.
4 Os Be
“arms” of the supports are long. The apical part is angular (rather as in C. meangensis)
and the whole structure is like a broad-based V.
Palhal cavity. 'The gills are prominent globular masses, as in C. umbellata(Ebersbach,
1915). They are relatively small (about 1-1 of the pallial area) and consist of six main
378 DISCOVERY REPORTS
laminae, of which the most interior is reduced. I ought to point out here in connection
with the general problem of adaptation that, though the gills are reduced in size, the
laminae are much more folded, so that the surface of each filament is increased. The
median adductor is very small, as in C. umbellata (Ebersbach, l.c., fig. 3). On the
other hand, owing to an excessive increase of connective tissue, the pallial cavity has
become subdivided completely into two, a very unusual condition (cf. Robson, 1928,
p.261):
Alimentary canal (Fig. 4). The mandibles are present and, though somewhat soft, are
normally developed. The palatal lamella of each is very small. ‘The radula is absent. The
anterior salivary glands are very small. There are no posterior salivary glands. The
oesophagus is straight, and there is no crop. The lower end of the canal shows some
peculiar features, which must be more fully discussed elsewhere. The stomach is
equipped with a remarkably well-developed grinding apparatus. It contained a few
fragments of Polychaeta. ‘The caecum is much larger than the stomach, and may include
part of the “third stomach”’ seen in Opisthoteuthis and C. umbellata. Its contents were
so finely reduced that it was impossible to identify them. The intestine is bent on itself,
as in Opisthoteuthis.
Reproductive organs (3) (Fig. 5). There is no external trace of sexual differentiation,
e.g.no abruptly enlarged suckers as in S. albatrossi and Opisthoteuthis (Sasaki, 1929, pp. 8,
11). The internal organs are like those of C. wmbellata (Ebersbach, /oc. cit., 'Text-fig. 17)
in general, but the proportions of the first accessory gland to the (conjoined) second and
third is different.
Remarks. This interesting form is like no described species. It seems to be most
closely related to C. megaptera in external appearance. ‘The internal organs are not un-
like those of C. umbellata. 'The external appearance differentiates it at once from the other
Antarctic species of Cirromorpha (.S. mawsoni, Berry). It is a pity that Hoyle’s Weddel
Sea form (1912) was only fragmentary.
I hope shortly to publish a general discussion on this group. In the meantime, I must
point out that the question of the adaptive significance of many of the peculiar features
of these animals is rendered far more open than my recent account (1926) would lead
one to suppose. In spite of the presence of some gelatinous tissue in C. glacialis, the
arm- and fin-musculature is singularly powerful. The suckers are, if simpler in structure,
more muscular than those of many Octopodinae, and are strangely assorted with the
feeble mandibles and the absence of the radula. The gills, if small, have their small size
compensated by the increased surface. The funnel and locking-apparatus are powerful ;
the adductor pallii medianus, as in C. umbellata, is feeble. This sketch will sufficiently
indicate that we have to deal with an actively swimming and darting form with need for
an ample supply of oxygen. Its diet seems to be that of a carnivore, but it is not easy to
reconcile the lack of radula and the weakness of the jaws with the presence of powerful
suckers, unless it be that it is a carrion eater and the suckers are used not for grasping
prey, but in coition.
379
Sub-order JINCIRRATA, Grimpe
Family ELEDONELLIDAE
Eledonella massyae, Robson, subsp. purpurea, subsp. nov.
St. 86. 24. vi. 26. 33° 25’ 00S, 6° 31’ 00” E. 1000 (-o) m. 44 m. tow net: one 9.
Dimensions (in mm.).
Arms, length: L. R.
Length of mantle (apex to eye) 53 Ist pair... it 45 =
Mantle, width ... oe a 35 2nd ,, a3 ie 37 + —
Head, width ... = ms 18 Br die a8 ah 4r(?+) —
ACh sie 30 40 45
This form is related more closely to E. massyae (Robson, 1924, 1924 a) than to the
other Atlantic or the Pacific forms.
It differs in the following particulars: (1) The suckers (which attain a maximum
number of 10) are more widely spaced, viz. 6-5 mm. apart (as a maximum), instead of
475mm. (2) The arms are a little shorter (54 instead of 56 per cent). (3) ‘The funnel-
organ (Fig. 6) is longer and more angular. (4) The radula differs in several particulars.
In massyae the rhachidian bears three cusps on each side of the mesocone, the first
lateral five cusps on an average. In the new variety there are two cusps aside on
the rhachidian, and four cusps on an average on the first lateral. A still more striking
difference is in the size of the mesocone of the rhachidian, which is 5 of the base in the
type of massyae. In the new variety it is } of the base in length. (5) The gills are much
smaller in the variety, being about g per cent of the mantle in length, while those of the
type are about 16 per cent. (6) The colour is deeper and the chromatophores on the
head tend to fuse up to a very dark purple hue.
Fig. 6. Eledonella massyae (right) and massyae, var. purpurea (left). Funnel-organs. x 7.
This form is quite adequately distinguished from FE. pygmaea, Verrill, by the spacing
and number of suckers, the proportions of the arms and by the radula'; from B. diaphana
by its characteristic funnel-organ and the number and spacing of the suckers; and
‘from E. heathii, Berry, by the spacing and number of the suckers and the relative
1 | assume that the radula figured by Thiele (1915, p. 491) is correctly referred to Verrill’s species.
Ditiv 2
380 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
arm-length. In the remarkably low rhachidian mesocone it approaches B. diaphana
(Thiele, 1915, fig. 60).
A very peculiar feature, which may be accidental, is seen in the surface tissues of the
mantle. The epidermis is free from the underlying viscera, and encloses a spacious
cavity in which the viscera and surrounding body-wall, by reason of their small size,
are suspended free of the epidermis. I am unable to say if the absence of the subcut-
aneous gelatinous layer is natural, or caused by some accident of preservation. It seems
to me that the latter is most unlikely.
Remarks. I treat this form as a variety of F’. massyae rather than as a distinct species,
because on the whole the general facies is quite like that of massyae. The radula and
funnel-organ certainly display marked differences. But for the time being I think the
bulk of the resemblances is more important. As in the case of Alloposus hardyi (p. 397)
we have to deal with a marked and peculiar character (in this case the absence of the
subcuticular gelatinous layer), the precise morphological and systematic importance
of which we cannot yet decide, as we do not know if it is not produced by accident.
Vitreledonella translucida, n.sp.
St. 273. 31. vii. 27. 9° 38’ 00” S, 12° 42’ 30” E. 200-230 (-o) m. Young-fish trawl: one ¢.
Dimensions (in mm.).
Mantle, length (eyes to apex) 41 Arms, length: L. R.
Mantle, width, °% length 68 % Ist pair... on is 48
Head, width, °%, mantle-length Bi OF PENG! ep 256 see, 040 44?
Web, maximum depth 14 (?) grd 4, + Br? 37?
Suckers, maximum width 2°4 4th ,, soe So) cas 32
“5 minimum width 1:0
DescrIPTION. The large and rather narrowly ovoid mantle is very unlike that of
V. richardi (Joubin, 1924, pl. i), alberti (id. loc. cit. pl. ii) and V. ingeborgae (id. 1929 6,
p. 18: fig. 40 seems to show a longer visceral sac than the text would suggest). The
head, as in Joubin’s species, is extraordinarily short. ‘The eyes are small and prominent.
Most of the arms have had their extremities damaged, but I am under the impression that
they are in the order 1, 2, 3, 4. They are relatively very short, being about 54 per cent of
the total length, as compared with 72 per cent in V. ingeborgae (240/330 mm.), 78 per cent
in richardi and 71 per cent in alberti (the dimensions of Joubin’s species being taken from
the figures and therefore subject to a slight correction). The arms are thick and clumsy
(though very transparent and delicate) over the greater part of their length, becoming
rather rapidly thinner at the extremities. None of the apical suckers are preserved, except
on the hectocotylised arm, so that I am very uncertain as to the total number. There are
a maximum of twelve left on one arm, and I am inclined to believe that there were
about eight smaller suckers beyond these, i.e. some twenty in all. On most of the arms
there are seven to eight small and very widely spaced suckers, followed by about four
much larger and more closely opposed ones. ‘These (see above) were probably succeeded
ELEDONELLIDAE 381
by about eight much smaller ones. The arrangement of the first part of the arm is not
unlike that found in V. ingeborgae, but the extremity of the arm differs. As in V. richardit
and alberti the suckers are planted in a gelatinous boss, which raises them well above the
Fig. 7. Vutreledonella translucida. Funnel-organ. » 6:2.
level of the arm. The enlarged suckers, however, are placed at the ordinary level. ‘They
are simple, thin walled, and show scarcely any structural differentiation. ‘The web has been
partly destroyed and Iam unable to make out its exact form. I believe it attains a depth of
Fig. 8. Vitreledonella translucida. Radula.
about 4 of the arm-length. The mantle-aperture is wide, the funnel short and stout. It
contains a well-developed funnel-organ of the same general shape as that of V. richardi,
but differing in sundry features (Fig. 7, and Joubin, 1924, pl. vi, fig. 5). There are
seven filaments in the outer demibranch. ‘The inner demi-
branch is absent as in V. richardi.
The radula (Fig. 8). Joubin’s figure of V. richardi
is not like that of translucida, except in general plan.
The median tooth of translucida is markedly asymmetrical,
and there is an Octopus-like seriation. ‘The admedian
has a large median mesocone, small ectocone and
shallow base. The second lateral has an obvious inner
“heel.” The third laterals are long and slender and
the marginal plates oblong. The radula is remarkably
Octopus-like and very unlike that of Eledonella and its
allies (v. anon).
The hectocotylus (2?) (Fig. 9). The third arm of the
left side has the appearance of being hectocotylised.
The arm is shorter than its fellows, and on one side
there is a narrow lateral membrane (absent from the
other arms) like a seminal channel. There are a large Fig. 9. Vitreledonella translucida.
number of closely appressed small suckers at the extremity Hectocotylus (7). x ¢. 20.
(unlike the other arms). Shortly before the end they terminate in a faintly grooved
2-2
382 F DISCOVERY REPORTS
excrescence, into which the presumed seminal channel also runs. The whole structure
is not unlike that of Amphitretus pelagicus figured by Sasaki (1917, fig. 2). The
likeness is heightened by the arrangement of the suckers and the absence of enlarged
suckers on this arm. On the other hand, I could find no paired suckers (such as
Sasaki figures) beyond the terminal swellings. The occurrence of this presumed
hectocotylus on the left side and its resemblance to that of Amphitretus is very
interesting.
Remarks. The discovery of another species of this rare and remarkable form is an
eminently satisfactory result. I propose to
treat its structure as fully as possible in a
forthcoming publication, and confine these
remarks to the specific status of the Dis-
covery specimen and one or two other
points. Vztreledonella is represented at pre-
sent by three species: V. alberti (Joubin,
1924, p. 38) was obtained at 33° 40’-52’ N,
19°-19° 16’ W in o-3500 mm., and at
35.09 N, 21° 21’ W in o-3500 m.; V.
richard: (Joubin, 1918, p. 13 1924, p. 15)
was obtained at 30° 50’ N, 25° 43’ W in
5300 m.; V. imgeborgae (Joubin, 1929 J,
p. 16) was taken by the ‘ Dana’ at 36° 36’ N,
26° 14’ W in 2000m. V. translucida is quite
distinct from all these species. ‘The principal
differences are tabulated as shown on the
opposite page.
Joubin (1924, p. 16) was evidently of two
minds as to whether these forms are pelagic
or benthic. He admits that, though the net
in which V. richardi was taken was lowered
to a great depth (cf. zd. 1929 6), it might
have entered the net at an intermediate
Fig. 10. Vitreledonella translucida. x 2. depth. The present record conclusively
(Semi-diagrammatic.) See p. 380. shows that it is a pelagic organism, though
it may possibly have a very wide vertical
range. Joubin (/oc. cit. p. 18) makes the highly interesting observation that his V.
ingeborgae is incubatory.
I shall discuss the affinities of this form more fully in a later publication. It is neces-
sary, however, to point out the close resemblance of the radula to that of the Octopodidae
and its divergence from that of Eledonella and Amphitretus, with which the genus is now
ranked (‘Tribe Ctenoglossa).
ELEDONELLIDAE 383
Suckers
Mantle Web R Chromato- | Length of
adula :
shape depth Arrange- phores gill
Number 2
ment
1. richardi Squat ?* armlength | 30 (?) 12-14 See below Very rare on 10
(47 X 47mm.) (largest) arms, more 47
numerous on
dorsal head
and mantle
2. ingeborgae | Squat Nearly 4 arm | 28 10 or Not described | Close and 8 *
(30 x 30mm.) |: length II-I4 numerous 30?
(Joubin, (from fig.) (largest) everywhere,
1929), p. 18) especially
on dorsum
3. translucida | Oblong Under } arm | 12 large, | g-12 Base of Plentiful on al
(41 x 27mm.)] length probably} (largest) | rhachidian arms and 41
8 small shallower head: absent
than in 1; from mantle
entocone of
first lateral
much taller;
? shape of
second lateral
unlike 1, third
lateral taller
and more
slender
4. alberti Squat ?Larm length | 22 6-9 Not described | ? absent Smaller
(41 x 41) (largest) than in
V.richardi
* The mantle length is that given on p. 18 of Joubin’s paper (1929 b). Even if allowance is made for the lack of
precision in defining the length, the measurement does not seem to agree with that indicated by Fig. 40 (p. 17).
Family AMPHITRETIDAE
Amphitretus thielei, n.sp. (PI. III, fig. 2.)
? Amphitretus pelagicus, Hoyle, Thiele, 1915, p. 532.
St. ror. 15. x. 26. 33° 50'-34° 13'S, 16° o4’-15° 49’ E. 350-400 (-o) m. 43 m. tow net: one 9.
Mantle, length from eyes to apex
Mantle, maximum width
Head, width
Arms, length:
Ist pair —-
and ,, 180 x 82
ard, 192
Athy 5; 207
+
+
98
52
24,
Dimensions (in mm.).
Web, depth in Sector A
B
C
D
15,
95
87
106
100
go
| Provisional
DescriPTION. The body has been somewhat distorted, and the gelatinous coat found
in this genus removed (?) by the action of preservatives. The outer tissues are trans-
384 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
parent, tough, and traversed by a network of thick fibres. The body is elongate-ovoid,
the head very narrow and the eyes, as usual, closely set on the dorsal surface, and
very prominent. The arms were probably subequal ;
but they are badly damaged. They attain a maximum
of 67 per cent of the total length. The suckers
are uniserial and widely spaced (about 14 mm. apart
at the widest). The ends of the arms are damaged,
but the suckers seem to have been alternating towards
the tips. At about the thirteenth they become much
larger. They are of a very simple structure and very
thin walled. Except in Melanoteuthis | have never
Fig. 11. Amphitretus thielei. Inferior seen such an undifferentiated type. ‘There must
mandible. (The pigmented streaks on have b outros. tommeachtasen
one side have been omitted.) ave been about forty (t) on eac :
The web is about half as deep as the arms and
may have been subequal. The funnel is, as usual, adherent to the cephalic tissues,
and extends well beyond the eyes. Its organ is large and broadly W-shaped. ‘There
is no trace of a valve.
The gills have seven to eight filaments in each demibranch. They are long and narrow
and the inner demibranch is very much reduced, being but half as deep as the other.
The mandibles are very weak and imperfectly chitinised. They are not so much splayed
fost
(b)
Fig. 12. Amphitretus thielei. (a) Radula, (6) Mandibles.
out as in Thiele’s figure of A. pelagicus, and differ in many details, especially in the
arrangement of the thickenings on the edge of the lower jaw (cf. Fig. 11 and Thiele, Joc.
cit., fig. 65). The radula differs in many respects from that figured by Thiele, especially
in the second and third laterals. The vaginae are remarkably thick and large. ‘They are
clearly demarcated from the small spermathecae.
Remarks. The position of this form is very perplexing. So far a single species of this
genus (A. pelagicus) has been observed. It was first described by Hoyle (1885, p. 235,
AMPHITRETIDAE 385
1886, p. 67) from a small specimen obtained off the Kermadec Islands. In 1g02 Ijima
and Ikeda (1902, p. 85) described a female obtained in 1897 in the Sagami Sea, Japan.
Chun (1900, fig. on p. 535) and Thiele (/oc. cit.) figured and described a third specimen
from the Agulhas Stream (34° 31'S, 26° 2’ E). Sasaki (1917, p. 361) described a male,
also from the Sagami Sea. ‘This and the other Japanese specimen were again described
by Sasaki (1929, p. 16).
Now it is, to my mind, very uncertain whether all these descriptions relate to one and
the same species. Sasaki had the advantage of seeing [jima and Ikeda’s specimen, and
regarded it as conspecific with his own. But the relation of
the Japanese, the South African and the Kermadec specimens
is very uncertain. Hoyle’s specimen is very small and in a poor
condition, and Thiele only described the radula, mandibles
(not known in the Japanese forms) and eye of the ‘ Valdivia’
example, so that we are plainly not dealing with comparable
data.
Whatever we may think of these forms I am quite convinced
that the specimen obtained by the ‘Discovery’ is not con- AW
specific with any of the previously described forms. This is \
all the more striking, as it was obtained at no great distance
from the spot at which the ‘Valdivia’ specimen was taken.
It is very singular that two different species of this very rare
genus should be taken more or less in the same area.
However, it should be pointed out that the ‘Discovery’
specimen was taken to the west of Cape ‘Town, i.e. in the
Benguela Stream, and the ‘Valdivia’ one on the other side of the Agulhas divide.
The following table will make clear the differences:
Fig.13. Amphitretus thielet.
Female gonaduct, etc. x 4.
Total Ee Lie Mantle Suckers, Gill
length ams (7) | WED|G/a) width (°%) no. filaments
thielet 305 mm. 67 51 5B ? 40 + 7-8
pelagicus :
Thiele 72 (?) 69 (?) 46 = = a
(from fig.) (fig.)
Hoyle (text and specimen) 45 66 75 122 (?) 23 —
Ijima and Ikeda 148 64 72 100 32-35 10
Sasaki (1917, 1929) 135 62 52 (?) 88 32 ie)
In addition, the radula and mandibles of ¢hielet and the ‘ Valdivia’ specimen are singularly
unlike, and the funnel-organ of thielet agrees with that of neither the type of pelagicus
nor of the Japanese forms.
Too much store need not be set on these characters, especially as only single specimens
are involved. In the ‘ Valdivia’ pelagicus the only useful systematic data we know are
of the radula, jaws, general shape and web (as seen in the figure of Thiele, Joc. cit.
pl. xci, fig. 6). The web is more like that of thzelei, about half as long as the arms, not
386 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
two-thirds or three-quarters as long as in the type and Ijima and Ikeda’s specimens of
pelagicus. The latter and Sasaki’s specimens seem to differ quite markedly from thielez.
It thus seems that ¢hielez is quite distinct from the type and other specimens of pelagicus,
though in one character it is not unlike Thiele’s pelagicus. The status of the latter is
very uncertain. In the light of this evidence it is quite impossible to do otherwise than
treat A. thielei as a distinct species.
Concerning the general affinities and status of these forms, I need say very little at
present. They plainly present us with a problem of the greatest interest. In the first place,
the external ‘“‘choroidal”’ gelatinous coating, double pallial aperture, multicuspid teeth
and telescopic eyes suggest high specialisation. ‘The remarkably developed teeth, however,
seem to accord little with the very weak jaws (the reverse situation in fact to that in the
Cirromorpha) and simple suckers. he suckers, teeth, vaginae (?) and gills suggest
relationship with the Eledonellidae. ‘The funnel-organ is, however, Octopus-like.
Family OCTOPODIDAE
Sub-family ELEDONINAE
Forty-four specimens were obtained by the ‘ Discovery,’ all of which were in very good
condition. This rich haul, which far surpasses any series obtained previously, provides
us with an admirable opportunity of reviewing this characteristic Antarctic group.
In a work, shortly to be published, I hope to discuss in full the systematic relationship
of all the forms that have been placed in Eledone and the status of the sub-family. I am
of the opinion that Naef was correct in his suggestion that the genus may be polyphyl-
letic (1923, p. 716). A final verdict on this subject is not at the moment possible. I con-
tent myself with pointing out the following facts:
(1) The Antarctic species so far described differ very markedly from the Mediter-
ranean forms, and certainly do not belong to the same genus. I consider that the name
Eledone should be kept for E. moschata and cirrosa and that charcoti, Joubin (aurorae,
Berry syn.), turqueti, Joubin, antarctica, Thiele, harrissoni and adelieana, Berry, and
polymorpha (p. 390) should all be placed in Graneledone, Joubin. ‘The status of Berry’s
albida is not for the moment clear, though I believe it should be placed with E. rotunda,
Hoyle, in a distinct genus or sub-genus. 7. gunteri (p. 392) is placed in a different
genus, principally on account of its highly degenerate radula.
(2) The new species now described bring up the number of Eledonid species to
sixteen (irrespective of doubtful forms), if we accept Berry’s suggestion (1918) that his
aurorae is identical with charcoti and keep media, Joubin, as a distinct species (cf. Joubin,
1924, p. 38). Of these nine are from Antarctic or sub-Antarctic waters, three more are
from southern waters. The remaining four are from the north Atlantic. The group is
very largely absent from tropical waters, and is poorly represented in the Indo-Pacific
region. Its metropolis and probable place of origin is the littoral of the Antarctic
continent and deeper water further north, with a smaller offshoot in the north Atlantic
and Mediterranean.
OCTOPODIDAE 387
The identification of the various forms represented in this collection, and their re-
lationship to previously described species, have proved a very difficult matter. They do
not readily fall into line with the specific distinctions proposed by other workers, nor
am I satisfied that those distinctions represent natural groups. The initial difficulties
towards a clear understanding of the Antarctic Eledones will become clear, if the fol-
lowing facts are borne in mind.
(x) In general the parts usually described in systematic papers are very variable and,
unless a large number of individuals is available from which a clear statistical expression
can be obtained, descriptions such as ‘web deep,” ‘“‘arms short,” etc., are valueless.
(2) The character of the hectocotylus is a valuable feature.
(3) The epidermal sculpture is very liable to be effaced and is subject to modification
by the contraction of the skin.
(4) Though very little is known on the subject, it is plain that the proportions of arms,
web and eyes alter during development, so that the young stages differ materially from
the adults.
Now the descriptions of previously known forms of Eledone from this area are difficult
to utilise, either because they are based on a single or a few specimens, or because the
latter are small, or because females only were available, or finally because they were based
on characters of very dubious value.
The species in question are as follows: E. charcoti. 'The type is a rather small female
specimen. Joubin subsequently figured (without description) two smaller examples
(1914). Massy (1916) described in some detail the anatomy of this form from fifteen
adults and five young. She did not, however, describe the variation in the external
diagnostic features. Hoyle (1912) described the colour, hectocotylus and radula, using
two specimens from the South Orkneys, but without giving other external diagnostic
characters. In 1917 Berry described a single male from off Queen Mary Land under the
name of “ Moschites aurorae.”” Odhner (1923) recorded some examples from South Georgia
without full description. The same incompleteness rules in our knowledge of F. turquetz.
This was originally described from Wandel Island off Danco Land by Joubin (1906)
from a single small female specimen measuring 42 mm. over all, and in 1914 he cited
(with a few notes and two figures) three small specimens and one much larger example
from King George Island, South Shetlands. In 1916 Massy described the anatomy of
four specimens (three females, one male) from Rio de Janeiro and McMurdo Sound,
Ross Sea.
Turning now to the Antarctic species described by Berry (1917), we find that MW.
albida (Wilkes Land) is known from one female, adelieana is represented by a single
adult female and two young and harrissoni by three females and one other specimen.
From these remarks it will be seen at once that the available descriptions are either
based on very small series, or are of uncertain application. The determination of the
specimens obtained by the ‘ Discovery’ is therefore of no little difficulty.
In the forty-four specimens available I find that four distinct forms can be recognised :
(1) A broad-bodied form with rather a narrow head and small eyes. The web varies
Ditiv : 3
‘ 66
388 DISCOVERY REPORTS
from 22-42 per cent: the funnel-organ is double, its components are thick and short.
The hectocotylus is 8-11 per cent of the third arm. The sculpture is never as close and
as well developed as that of EF. charcoti, though it is of the same type. I regard this form
as conspecific with FE. charcott.
(2) A broad-bodied, narrow-headed form with exceptionally short arms (57 per cent)
and very deep web (60 per cent). The funnel-organ is double. The gill-filaments are
exceptionally low (five to six) in number. The eyes are large, but not adnate. The sculp-
ture is highly characteristic, being composed of flattish irregular, very clear-cut,
tubercles, rather like those of O. pallidus. It has no ink sac and the radula is degenerate.
It is so distinctive that I must treat it not only as a new species, but as referable to a
new genus (p. 392).
(3) A narrower, smooth or obscurely granular form, with very large eyes. The head
is not much narrower than the body. The hectocotylus is rather small (6-8). The funnel-
organ is double. This I regard as Joubin’s FE. turqueti, though the original specimen of
the latter was very small and, at the same time, unlike those figured subsequently by
Joubin. I rely on the later figures for my identification.
(4) More uncertainty invests the fourth form, which seems to occur in two phases,
one of which seems to be related to certain forms of E. charcoti. I provisionally treat this
as a distinct species (E. polymorpha). The skin is granular, the eyes moderate to large,
the funnel-organ is single and the hectocotylus large (17-9 per cent). It appears in two
phases: (a) a narrow form with the head as wide as the body and a deep web, and (6)
a more obese form with a shallower web. This form has a marked tendency to bear a
peripheral keel. In other respects it is not unlike E. charcott.
I have carefully considered the relationship of the new species with those given in
Berry’s key (1917, p. 14), and can find no likeness to any in the latter. E. polymorpha
has certain features in common with Berry’s E. harrissoni. This matter is discussed on
p. 392 and the possibility that these forms may be conspecific is set aside as most unlikely.
Consideration of the structure of the radula, hectocotylus and other organs leads me
to believe that this genus should be sub-divided into several sub-genera to render
apparent certain marked structural divergences. Some of these have been already
proposed, but I defer to a later publication the complete rearrangement of the group.
For a preliminary discussion and remarks on the interesting new genus, Thaumeledone,
see Pp- 374; 392:
Genus Graneledone, Joubin
Graneledone charcoti, Joubin.
Eledone Charcoti, Joubin (1905, p. 22).
Thirteen examples (five 33, eight 2°) from South Georgia and vicinity.
St. 39. 25. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 179-235 m., grey mud. Large otter
trawl: three 99 (Brit. Mus. ro (i-iii)).
St. 42. 1. iv. 26. Mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 120-204 m., mud. Large otter
trawl: one ¢ (Brit. Mus. 12).
OCTOPODIDAE 389
St. 45. 6.iv.26. 2-7 miles S 85 E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m., grey mud. Large
otter trawl: one 2 (Brit. Mus. 3). Three 33 (Brit. Mus. 13).
St. 123. 15. xii. 26. Mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 230-250 m., grey mud. Large
otter trawl: one 9 (Brit. Mus. 7).
St. 140. 23. xii. 26. Stromness Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. 122-136 m., grey mud
and stones. Large otter trawl: one Q (Brit. Mus. 15).
St. 154. 18.i.27. Jason Harbour to Larsen Point, South Georgia. 60-160 m., mud. Large otter
trawl: one ? (Brit. Mus. 6).
St. WS 25. 7. xii. 26. Undine Harbour (North), South Georgia. 18-27 m., mud and sand. Small
beam trawl: one ¢ (Brit. Mus. 16).
St. WS 32. 21. xii. 26. Mouth of Drygalski Fjord, South Georgia. 225 m., grey mud. Small
beam trawl: one 9 (Brit. Mus. 8).
The body is usually plump and the head narrow, the mantle index averaging 116-93,
that of the head 84-60. The average form of the head and body is thus very like that
figured by Joubin. The arms are short, 72~76 per cent of the total length. The suckers do
not vary in diameter as between males and females (range 12-8-3 per cent). ‘The web is
42-22 per cent of the arms. E tends to be larger than A, and C is the deepest. There is
usually a trace of a lateral keel. ‘The sculpture is very variable. It should be noted here
that Joubin’s earlier description dealt with a heavy sculpture of closely apposed. boss-
like tubercles. His later description was of a more granular sculpture (cf. 1914 [?], fig. 1).
In the material before me I find a similar variation which may be tabulated as follows:
Brit. Mus. 3: rather isolated warts, nearly obsolete apically; warts present on inner side of arms;
? ocular cirrhi.
Brit. Mus. 12: large (not close) and granular warts; ocular cirrhi absent.
Brit. Mus. 7: warts ? originally well developed, though widely spaced, now very much worn; ocular
cirrhi present.
Brit. Mus. 8: warts very small; ocular cirrhi.
Brit. Mus. 15 = 3: ocular cirrhi present.
Brit. Mus. 16: warts granular; ocular cirrhi.
Brit. Mus. 13 = 3: but warts sparser; ocular cirrhi.
Brit. Mus. 10: (two specimens too much wrinkled to examine). Small close warts; ocular cirrhi
present.
The specimens from the ‘'Terra Nova’ collection are more regularly warty and less
granular than the Discovery ones, and I think are nearer Joubin’s heavily sculptured form.
The funnel-organ is V V-shaped and, as indicated by Massy, the limbs are coarse and
thick, though they are not always so coarse as is seen in her figure. There are eight to
eleven filaments in each demibranch. The hectocotylus is 8-11 per cent of the arms.
The calamus is well developed and acute, the ligula usually well excavated, with thick
sides. A number of rather feeble laminae are present. The hectocotylus, it should be
noted, is far more like that of Octopus than are those of the European forms, which lack a
calamus. I suggest that the Antarctic forms are more archaic in this respect. The penis
in two specimens (10) was short and coarse, and bears a large saccular diverticle con-
taining an enormous spermatophore, about 82 mm. long, and very thick (cf. Massy,
1916, p. 153).
3-2
390 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
Graneledone turqueti, Joubin.
Eledone Turqueti, Joubin (#905, p. 29).
St. 158. 21.1. 27. 53°48’ 30”S, 35°57 00” W. 401-411 m., rock. Large dredge: three young
specimens (¢ 1, ? 1, ? sex 1) (Brit. Mus. 4 a).
St. 181. 12. iii. 27. Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago. 160-335 m., mud. Large otter
trawl: three adult specimens (2 $d, 1 2, two inv.) (Brit. Mus. 4). (?)
‘Fhe body is saccular, and the head but little narrower than the mantle. ‘The arms are
very short (72-64) and the suckers small (11-5—7-4). The biserial arrangement of the
suckers on the fourth arms, noted by Joubin in his first description, is found in one
Discovery specimen; but this feature is not of diagnostic value. ‘The web is markedly
bilateral, C and D being much deeper than A and E. The web is shallow. In the
Discovery specimens it is 20-25 per cent of the arms. In one ‘Terra Nova’ example
it reaches 27 per cent. The head is broad, and the eyes very large. ‘The skin is either
quite smooth, or else here and there it shows traces of fine granulations. It is of a more
or less uniform light purple colour.
The mantle aperture is very narrow. The funnel-organ is V V-shaped; in the larger
specimens its limbs seem to be almost as thick as those of charcoti. ‘There are ten to
eleven filaments in each demibranch. The hectocotylus is small, about 6 per cent of the
hectocotylised arm, that of the only ‘Terra Nova’ male being 7 per cent. Unfortunately,
this organ is fully developed in none of the Discovery males. In the largest it looks as
though it might ultimately grow to resemble that of charcotz. The penis has a large bent
receptaculum, as in charcoti (above).
Remarks. Joubin’s species was, as already pointed out, based on small examples.
Graneledone polymorpha, n.sp. (PI. III, fig. 1.)
St. 39. 25. iii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 179-235 m., grey mud. Large otter
trawl: one ¢ (Brit. Mus. ro (iv)).
St. 42. 1. iv. 26. Mouth of Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 120-204 m., mud. Large otter
trawl: seven specimens (3 3d, 4 9?) (Brit. Mus. 12).
St. 45. 6.iv. 26. 2°7 miles $ 85° E of Jason Light, South Georgia. 238-270 m., green mud. Large
otter trawl: one 9 (Brit. Mus. 13 (iv)).
St. 142. 30. xii. 26. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 88-273 m., mud. Large otter trawl:
six specimens (1 3, 5 9?) (Brit. Mus. 1).
St. 148. 9.i.27. Off Cape Saunders, South Georgia. 132-148 m., grey mud and stones. Large
otter trawl: two 992 (Brit. Mus. 9).
St. WS 62. 19.i.27. Wilson Harbour, South Georgia. 15-45 m. Small beam trawl: four
specimens (2 3d, 2 99) (Brit. Mus. 14). (?)
St. MS 63. 24. ii. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 23 m. Small beam trawl: one g
(Brit. Mus. 11). (?)
St. MS 68. 2. iii. 25. East Cumberland Bay, South Georgia. 220-247 m. Large rectangular net:
two specimens (1 ¢, 1 2) (Brit. Mus. 5).
DescriPTION. This form occurs in two phases, the external features of which are
described separately here.
OCTOPODIDAE 391
(1) Form oblonga (13 (iv), 10 (iv), 5 (i)). The mantle is narrow (80-64) and the head
but little narrower (69-61). The arms are 73-67 per cent of the total length . The suckers
are very small, 7-8 per cent. The web is deep, 38-34 per cent. The proportions of the
sectors vary. The eyes are rather large. There are seven to eight filaments in each demi-
branch. The funnel-organ is W-shaped. The surface is covered with rather widely
spaced, small granules. In 5 (i) these are larger than in the other two, and might pass as
small warts. 5 (i) is rather different from the other two, not only in sculpture but also
in its web (which is longer than in the other two examples and is in addition equal in
all its sectors save E) and in its wider body. The hectocotylus of 5 (i) and ro (iv) are,
however, both long (15 and 13-9 per cent respectively) and very alike. ‘The calamus is
acute and upstanding, the ligula rather shallower than in charcoti and crossed by a
number of deep laminae, which resemble those of a Bathypolypus.
Jee
Fig. 14. Graneledone poly- Fig. 15. Graneledone polymorpha. Radula.
morpha. Hectocotylus. x 3.
(2) Form affinis (1, 9, 11, 12, 14). The body is rather wide, its index being 104-70.
The head is usually much narrower, 93-53 per cent, the most usual form being that with
a globular body and small, clearly defined head. The arms are about as long as the form
oblonga, viz. 74-66. The suckers range from 11-67 per cent. The web is distinctly
shallower (30-27 per cent) and tends to be rather regularly bilateral. The eyes are
moderate to large. The sculpture, as in oblonga, varies from fine, rather widely spaced
granules to granular warts. The funnel-organ is W-shaped. There are seven to ten
filaments in each demibranch. The hectocotylus (Fig. 14) varies from 17 to 9 per cent
(2 7 per cent) of the arm in length. The forms of the ligula and calamus are very like
those in var. oblonga, though the copulatory groove is narrower, and its walls corre-
spondingly thicker. This condition is best seen in the male from Station 42. In the
other males the organ is more like that of E. charcott.
In both forms the dorsal surface is demarcated from the ventral. In practically every
example there is a well-marked ridge, in some specimens amounting to a thick keel (e.g.
392 DISCOVERY REPORTS
in some from Station 142). This ridge or keel is absent in the specimen from Station
MS 63. The radula (Fig. 15) has a rhechidian with a long stout mesocone, the height
of which exceeds the base. There are, on some teeth, faint traces of entocones; but the
tooth is to be regarded as unicuspid. ‘The admedian is small, narrow and has a low,
blunt entoccne. The second lateral has a rather narrow and shallow base with a low,
heavy subterminal cusp. The third ‘aterals are small, much curved and have wide bases.
The colour in all these specimens varies from dull olivaceous purple to brown.
Remarks. I am far from certain as to the status of all the forms which I have placed
in this species. Perhaps the issue will be narrowed a little, if we realise that, of all the
previously described species, its closest relationships are with FE. charcoti. It clearly has
no connection with the smooth Antarctic forms adelieana and albida, from both of which
it differs in many characters.
Similarly it is very unlike turqueti. The squatter phase has some likeness to EF. har-
rissoni and, indeed, from the key given by Berry (Joc. cit. p. 14) one might think that the
two forms would prove to be identical, except for the difference in the form of the
funnel-organ. Moreover, the ‘dull clouded slaty grey”’ colour, alluded to by Berry, is
very often found in polymorpha. On the other hand, the form of the funnel-organ and
radula, the shape of the eyes, head and body and the greater depth of sector A of the
web (20-23 per cent in harrissoni, 30-27 per cent in polymorpha) are all characters which
make it impossible to identify the two forms.
There remains E. charcoti, and with that form the resemblance is nearer. As far as
the bodily proportions, arms, suckers and gills are concerned, the two species do not
differ in any material respect, except of course in so far as the form oblonga is much
narrower. The web of the latter, but not of form affinis, is as deep as that of charcoti. The
sculpture in the more extreme forms (e.g. the type) of charcoti is, of course, very dis-
tinctive; but there are specimens in which it is more granular and like that of poly-
morpha. The following characters, which seem to be regularly associated, are, to my
mind, good differentia: the form of the funnel-organ, hectocotylus and radula, and the
regular presence of a prominent and well-developed keel (either absent or seen merely
as a poorly developed ridge in charcoti). It must be borne in mind that, in the array
before us, there are a certain number of individuals which exhibit various combinations
of the characters of the two species, and may be hybrids. The species are to be
recognised on account of the higher frequency of certain character-associations.
Genus Thaumeledone, n.gen.
The radula is very degenerate, being reduced to little more than the rhachidian teeth.
There is no ink sac. The funnel-organ is double. The gills are very much reduced. ‘Type
of the genus: Eledone brevis, Hoyle.
Thaumeledone gunteri, n.sp. (PI. IV, fig. 3.)
St. 158. 21.1. 27. 53° 48’ 30S, 35° 57’ 06” W. 401-411 m., rock. Large dredge: one 9 (Brit.
Mus. 2) [Type].
OCTOPODIDAE 393
Dimensions (in mm.).
Dorsal mantle, length ab see 36
Head, width, °% mantle length ... 86
Mantle, width, °%, mantle length ... Ill
Arms, of total length
Suckers, diameter, °/, mantle length 8-3
Web, index is - fs 60
The body is globular, and the head ene narrower than the body. It is, however,
rather broader than is usual in charcoti. The eyes are distinctly larger than in most
examples of the latter. The arms (see above)
are very short for an adult Octopod, being
amongst the shortest recorded. The suckers
are small and close set. The sectors of the web
are, I think, subequal, C and D being slightly
deeper than the others. The web is very large,
and attains the great depth of 60 per cent of
the arms. The surface is rather a rich, light
purple dorsally, becoming paler ventrally. It
is covered dorsally and laterally by a number
of close-set warts. These are very curious, and Fig. 16. Thaumeledone gunteri. Radula. (The
confer on the animal a rather mossy appear- remains of the degenerate second laterals are
ance. On the sides of the web and on the arms S"°™" dotted.)
they tend to be circular and bubble-like. On the anterior surface of the web, head and
body, they are branched and irregular, and it is here that they are seen to stand out
very clean-cut from the surface. They remind me of the similarly clean-cut warts in
Octopus pallida, though they are not stellate in gunteri. It is possible that they may be
like those of a form of charcoti. Joubin (1906, p. 6) says that in the latter some of the
warts were probably branched. From the figure (oc. cit. pl. 1, figs. 1-2) it is quite evident
that, in charcoti, the warts on the head and body are in contact with each other, while
in gunteri they are quite separate. In Joubin’s later figure (1914[?], p. 36) and in one
of the ‘Terra Nova’ specimens the warts are quite separate but, in the former, they are
granular, and in the latter, they are mammiform, both very unlike those in gunteri.
The funnel is short, narrow and pointed. The funnel-organ 1s V V-shaped. The limbs
are rather slender and pointed at each end. They remind one of those of E. “ aurorae”’
(Berry, 1917, fig. 14). There are five to six filaments in each demibranch, a very low
number. The ink sac is absent. The radula is degenerate and represented by a simple
unicuspid rhachidian, the mesocone of which is low and stout. There are faint traces of
admedian teeth and of an oblong second lateral with a low cusp.
Remarks. This species has a superficial resemblance to E. charcoti. For a long time
I considered that it should be treated as a well-marked sub-species of the latter, especi-
ally since only a single specimen is available, and that a female. The profound differences
in radula, etc., were then discovered. The degeneration of the radula and loss of the
ink sac, length of the arms, depth of the web, number of gill filaments, the sculpture and,
394 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
in a less degree, the shape of the funnel-organ components and head, form a highly
peculiar and characteristic assemblage. é
Upon examination of other species of Eledone from adjacent seas I find that EF. brevis,
Hoyle (1886), has a degenerate radula of the same type as gunteri. It is also devoid of an
ink sac. hough quite distinct specifically, I consider that these two interesting forms
are congeneric.
Sub-family BATH YPOLYPODINAE
Benthoctopus sp. (? januarii var.). (PI. IV, fig. 2.)
St. WS 86. 3. iv. 27. 53° 53’ 30”S, 60° 34’ 30” W. 151-147 m., sand, shells and stones. Com-
mercial otter trawl: five specimens (3 3d, 2 99).
Dimensions (in mm.).
Head,
Mantle Width width, Arms Suckers Gills Web Ligula
length | % Length | °%% mantle} (index) (index) (index) (index) _
length
its 92 88 66 79 7:6 = 21 =
2G) 7B 76 65 79 6°7 10 25 6-6
30.5 64 82 71 79 ? 10 29 5°6
4.3 43 100 100 75 8-1 = 30 371
5a 43 88 88 77 8-1 10 36 —
It will be seen from these figures that the five specimens are by no means alike.
I think, however, that the differences between the two larger and the two smaller are
mainly referable to age. All five specimens have unmistakably the same general facies,
though the smaller are admittedly squatter and broader headed. In addition to the features
indicated above the following points must be noted. The skin is entirely smooth, and
there are no cirrhi of any sort. The funnel-organ is W-shaped. It is better preserved in
the younger specimens, and in them it is rather widely spread and thin limbed. In the
older specimens it seems thicker and narrower, though of this I am not quite certain, as
the organ is not well preserved in them. The gill is remarkably deep, the longest filament
measuring 18 mm. in the largest specimen. The inner demibranch is little reduced.
There is no ink sac in any of the specimens. The radula is not unlike that of B. januarit,
at least in so far as its admedian and first lateral teeth are concerned. The rhachidian
has the same general type of seriation in both species, but differs in sundry details. The
third laterals are more slender in the Burdwood Bank forms.
The hectocotylised arm is 56-69 per cent of the longest arm. The ligula is short and
pointed, and in no. 2 (the best developed) the copulatory groove is deep and narrow,
the sides thick and traversed by transverse grooves. The calamus is well developed and
reaches about a third of the way along the organ.
The internal male organs. Needham’s organ has a moderate head and slender ex-
tremity. There is but a feebly indicated appendix. The penis has a moderate diverticle.
There are numerous thread-like spermatophores, about 45-47 mm. long, with very
OCTOPODIDAE 395
slightly swollen heads. They are of a peculiar milky white colour. The spermatophores
of B. januari are much thicker and have swollen heads.
The colour in all the specimens is a pale fawn-pink.
Remarks. This very interesting form has given me a good deal of trouble, and I am
still undecided as to whether it is a distinct species or a form of one of the South
American or sub-Antarctic species. It seems to have distinct affinities with B. januari
(s.s.) and B. magellanicus (Robson, 19304, p. 332), and some likeness to B. eureka. For
the time being, and until the work I have on hand upon the genus is completed, I
think it better to give this a non-committal description. The following list exhibits
the differences from the more closely related forms:
(1) It differs from B. januari in (a) arm-length, (b) web depth, (c) form and size of
hectocotylus, (d) size of gills, (e) spermatophores. ‘The general facies (smooth rounded
body and large eyes, and radula) are points in common.
(2) It differs from B. magellanicus in (a) funnel-organ, (6) colour, (c) hectocotylus.
The sculpture (if any) of B. magellanicus is not properly known.
(3) It differs from B. eureka in (a) form of penis, (b) appendix, (c) radula,
(d) colour.
I should point out that the other members of the Octopodidae reported from
Magellanic waters are either referable to foubinia or Enteroctopus and cannot be identified
with this form for many reasons. Hoyle’s “ Polypus brucet”’ from the Burdwood Bank
(1912) is a form of Gould’s F. megalocyathus with which also Lénnberg’s O. patagonicus
is synonymous.
Benthoctopus magellanicus, Robson.
St. WS 97. 18. iv. 27. 49° 00’ 30” S, 61° 58’ 00” W. 146-145 m., sand, gravel and stones.
Commercial otter trawl: one 2.
This species was distinguished by me (19304, p.332) from B. eureka by certain features
that still seem to me important. It is a little unfortunate that the female of the nearly-
allied B. eureka is unknown, and also that there is as yet no comparable material of the
funnel-organ which, in the Paris specimen (°) originally labelled ““O hyadesi”’ (see
Robson, /.c., p. 330), 1s so characteristic.
The following table and data will show that this specimen, which measures 385 mm.
over all, is probably more like B. magellanicus :
(1) (2) (3)
Discovery magellanicus (2 3) eureka (3)
WS 97 (2) (Robson, 19304) (Robson, 1929)
Arm-length (°% total length) 77 78-74 79-81
Suckers, diameter (index) ... 13 10-9 12
Web, depth (index)... 38 32 32-31 23-28
Colour re ... | Reticulate, purple on inn Dark purple with a few
a light ground patches of pink on
dorsum
Diliv 4
306 DISCOVERY REPORTS
In addition, the Discovery specimen has long, narrow and crescentic eggs (21 x 5-5 mm.)
exactly like those of magellanicus. The size and shape of the oviduct is exactly alike in
the two forms, and the relative proportions of oviduct and vagina are alike. The form of
the funnel-organ is uncertain.
While admitting the very remote possibility that magellanicus is a form of eureka,
I believe that the Discovery specimen is more like the former than the latter (except
in the diameter of the suckers). We have no female of ewreka for comparison, but
it is worth pointing out that, though the Discovery specimen and the type female and
male of magellanicus are very alike, the latter differs from the eureka (male) in the
hectocotylus.
Sub-family OCTOPODINAE
Octopus (Enteroctopus) megalocyathus, Gould.
St. 222. 23.iv.27. St Martin’s Cove, Hermite Island, Cape Horn. 30-35 m. Large rectangular
net: one 9.
Dimensions (in mm.).
Mantle, length, eyes to apex 44 Suckers, maximum diameter
» width, % length 81 (as °%, mantle length) 18
Head, width, °% mantle length 68 Web, depth, in sector A 37
Arms, length: R. Ibe » » » B 39
Ist pair ... seo NAYS 137 » » ” C 39
2nd » eee vee «=132 136 ” ” ” D 38
3rd ” doo siae — 118 ” ” ” E 29
AWN ce BoC gos tzA6) 120 Web, °% longest arm 30
Arms, % total length 75
While admitting that the correct names and the identity of the Magellanic Octo-
podinae are still uncertain, I do not feel much hesitation in referring this specimen
to the broad form of Gould’s species as re-defined by myself (1929). The very
characteristic funnel-organ, like a flattened W (cf. Robson, 19294, p. 617, and 1930,
p. 240), wide suckers, smooth skin, light brown colour, the number of branchial
filaments (eleven in each demibranch), the form of the web (A, B, C, and D subequal,
and E more or less markedly shorter), all remind one strongly of certain forms of mega-
locyathus. The arms are rather shorter, and the web is certainly deeper than in the
average megalocyathus. The ink sac is present. The oviducts, etc., and ovary are in a
very undeveloped (? atrophied) condition.
Octopus (Octopus) rugosus (Bosc).
St. WS 237. 7. vii. 28. 46° 00’ S, 60° 05’ W. 150-256 m., coarse brown sand, shell fragments.
7 mm. mesh net on trawl: one 9.
Simon’s Town. 29. vi. 27. Found while draining the dock: one 2.
The specimen from near the Falklands is typical in respect of its colour and reticulate
pattern, squat body, rather broad head, shortish arms and web-form. The skin is closely
and tightly wrinkled, and it is impossible to say if the typical shagreen of rough warts is
OCTOPODIDAE 397
present. In any case, however, I think that it is smoother than is usual and in parts may
be entirely smooth. It is otherwise so characteristic that I do not hesitate to identify it
with Bosc’s species. Sector A, though shallower than E, is not noticeably shallower (as
is usually found in O. rugosus).
The specimen from Simon’s Town is a typical form with well-developed sculpture of
neat, close multifid warts. The colour is rather dark, but the characteristic reticulate
pattern is well seen.
Octopus. (Octopus) vulgaris, Lam.
Simon’s Town. 29. vi.27. Found while draining the dock: one 9.
A very large specimen with typical sculpture, about 120 mm. long in dorsal mantle
length. The arms are so much contracted that I cannot satisfactorily ascertain their
length and that of the web. The suckers, as in some old females of this and other
species, are very wide, the index (see p. 374) amounting to 15-16. It is a pity that
it is not possible to study this specimen in greater detail, as it is desirable to check
carefully all identifications of this species in tropical and southern latitudes.
Family ARGONAUTIDAE
Sub-family ALLOPOSINAE
Alloposus hardyi, n.sp. (PI. IV, fig. 1.)
St. 288. 21. viii. 27. 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W. 250 (-o) m. Young-fish trawl: one 3.
Dimensions (in mm.).
Mantle, length, eyes to apex 40 Web, depth, in sector A 50
. width ... Ae 35 = as 53 B 43
Head, width 38 = Fe + c 36
Arms, length: ... we OR? L. » » » D 24?
Ist pair wf 112 » » » E 18?
2ndiye 22 eae 3 87?
ard. |; , Are ees ?
4th ,, woh se) 00 50
The body seems to be broadly ovoid. Its width is only a little less than its length.
It decreases in width from the level of the base of the arms towards the apex. On the
left side there is a low keel. The general shape recalls that of the short, broad form of
Bathypolypus arcticus. The eyes are large and prominent. The arms are 73 per cent of
the total length and are, as usual in the group, in the order 1, 2, 3 (?), 4, the last arm
being about half the first in length. The web is in the order A. B,C, Ds EYE beme
nearly 4 the depth of A. The tissues are almost entirely gelatinous. A very remarkable
feature may be noticed at this point. Viewed laterally (Fig. 17) the animal bears a
striking resemblance to the extraordinary new form described by Joubin (1929 a,
p. 383) as Retroteuthis, in that the velar area has undergone a rotation through about
60-70° and its anterior surface has become largely attached to the dorsal region. The
4-2
398 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
result of this rotation is that, if we imagine the animal orientated with its oral surface
downwards in the traditional horizontal plane of the Cephalopod, the mantle aperture
instead of being posterior has become dorsal. This is exactly what has happened in
Joubin’s Retroteuthis and also in his Heptapus (Joubin, 1929 8, p. 13). In that genus
Joubin failed to find any indication that the condition is anything else than normal. In
this instance I am in practically the same position. Not only is the posture of the body
altered in relation to the oral surface, but the web has definitely become concrescent with
the dorsal tissues, and ventrally it has become elongated, apparently as a result of (or to
meet) the pressure imposed on it by the backward rotation of the visceral mass and head.
I do not think this can be caused by accidental distortion or pressure. On the other hand,
this form is very gelatinous, and I am not quite clear as to what distortion might occur when
a rather heavy gelatinous organism of this kind is kept permanently on a hard surface.
were
Fig. 17. Alloposus hardyi. x c. 1°5. Fig. 18. Alloposus hardyi. Radula.
(Semi-diagrammatic.)
If the rotation is normal, its origin is very obscure. ‘The animal was taken near the
surface in water of a depth of 1600 fathoms and must therefore be pelagic. The modifica-
tion can have no relation, as far as I can see, to crawling on the bottom, and in any case
the normal Octopod posture is suited to this. It is noteworthy that Retroteuthis, which
also shows a similar modification, is quite remotely allied to A. hardyt.
The suckers tend to be uniserial or very widely alternating except about and just
beyond the margin of the web where they are more or less biserial. They are very
prominent but small (6-2 per cent of the mantle length) and extremely weak. Like those
of A. mollis (Joubin, 1900, pl. v, fig. 14) they are simple, undifferentiated cups, but the
walls are everywhere thinner in A. hardyi.
The mantle aperture is as in Alloposina microcotyla (Hoyle, 1904, p. 9) shaped like a
flat W. Its pallial edge is non-adherent. The funnel is mainly incorporated in the head,
but there is a free tubular portion about 8-10 mm. long. The shape of the funnel-organ
is obscure. Unlike the other forms there are a number of longitudinal folds near the
aperture, below which are the remains of what may have been a W-shaped funnel-organ.
The gills have six to seven filaments in each demibranch.
ARGONAUTIDAE 399
The mandibles are unlike those of A. mollis (figured by Joubin, 1895, fig., p. 16) in
that there is no marked sub-rostral notch. ‘The radula resembles that of mollis in general
(Joubin, Joc. cit. pl. v, fig. 11) but differs in sundry details. The shape of the first and
third laterals are in particular different. ‘These two species differ markedly from pacificus
(Sasaki, 1929, p. 18 [A. pelagicus] in error) in having bicuspid admedians.
There was no trace of the hectocotylus, but exploration of the mantle cavity revealed
the presence of a penis with a long diverticle.
Remarks. Verrill (1880, p. 393) included in his definition of Alloposus the words
“mantle united firmly to the head by a ventral and two lateral commissures.”” Hoyle
(1886, p. 72) adopted the genus for a “ North Atlantic” fragment without questioning
the definition. Joubin (1895, 1900 and 1920) does not discuss the latter, though he used
the name for various North-east Atlantic fragments. In 1904 (p. 9) Hoyle in dis-
cussing the relationship of Bolitaena (= Alloposina) microcotyla does not allude to
infundibulo-pallial sutures.
In 1902, however, [jima (in [jima and Ikeda, 1902, p. 87, footnote) commented on
Verrill’s description and said that the median infundibulo-pallial suture seems to be
simply a part of the ventro-median septum (median pallial adductor) which is extended
far forwards and passes under but does not join the ventral edge of the funnel. He
also explains away Verrill’s “lateral longitudinal commissures.”’
This feature is not discussed by Berry (1914, p. 286) in his description of the Pacific
form of A. mollis, nor does he include it in his family and generic definition.
Lastly it is ignored by Sasaki (1929, p. 17) in his description of A. pacificus. Naef
(1923, figs. on p. 727 and p. 731) describes and figures this infundibulo-pallial suture, but
I think purely on the strength of Verrill’s account!
It must be admitted that there might be room for confusion here. Thus, we might
have grounds for suggesting (a) that Verrill was not likely to be mistaken, (5) that the
subsequent forms, most of them obviously fragmentary, identified as Alloposus by
Hoyle, Joubin and [jimat, etc., were not referable to that genus. In any case no one
seems to have troubled to examine the type of A. mollis. What grounds have we then
for accepting the subsequently described forms as referable to Alloposus and fo1
modifying Verrill’s description in an important feature, viz. the siphono-pallial suture?
Actually there is singularly little common ground in the description of Verrill, on the
one hand, and of the later writers on the other. Thus Verrill figures the hectocotylus,
but this organ is certainly unknown in Berry’s specimen and those of the Japanese
writers. Joubin and Sasaki figure the radula of the East Atlantic and Japanese (pacificus)
forms, but it is not known in Verrill’s or Hoyle’s specimens. Verrill did not describe
the funnel-organ. The common factors are the gelatinous tissues, suckers tending
to be partly uniserial, wide mantle aperture, deep web and funnel reaching beyond
the eyes. We cannot infer from Berry’s female specimen if this form has the remarkable
1 Jjima makes the observation on his A. mollis that “there are two buttons at the siphon base, fitting into
grooves on the inner surface of the mantle.’’ Sasaki does not mention this Decapod-like trait characteristic
of the Argonautidae in his review. There is no “‘stud and socket” adhesive organ in A. hardyi.
400 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
Argonautid sex dimorphism or the peculiar hectocotylus. ‘The dimorphism and
hectocotylus are not described in A. pacificus or in the East Atlantic forms described by
Joubin. Onthe whole this is not a very propitious situation for judging whether the various
specimens are congeneric with the type! For the time being I think there is nothing to be
done but to be guided by “ general facies” and to retain the forms described by Joubin,
Hoyle, Sasaki and Berry in Alloposus, pending an examination of the type of A. mollis.
A. hardyi differs from A. mollis (Verrill’s description, Joc. cit. and 1881) in (1) the
shape of the mantle-aperture, (2) length of the web, and (3) disposition of the suckers.
Furthermore, if we utilise Joubin’s description, it differs in (4) details of radula,
(5) mandibles, (6) length-ratio arm 1 : arm 4. It differs very clearly from A. pacificus in
(1) radula (q.v.), (2) general build and proportions, (3) length of arms (relative and
maximum length), and (4) number of gill lamellae. I have excluded from this discussion
the very remarkable rotation of the velar area (comparable to that found in Retroteuthis),
as I am not wholly satisfied as to the origin of this feature.
401
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Berry, S. S., 1914. The Cephalopoda of the Hawaiian Islands. Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish. Washington, xxx,
P: 257-
1917. Cephalopoda. Australasian Antarctic Exp. Sci. Rep. C. Iv, pt 2, p. 1.
1918. Postscript to Australasian Antarctic Exp. Sci. Rep. C. Iv, pt 2 (1917).
Cuun, C., 1900. Aus den Tiefen des Weltmeeres, Jena.
EpersBacH, A., 1915. Zur Anatomie von Cirroteuthis umbellata.... Z. wiss. Zool. Leipzig, cx1il, 3, p. 361.
Hoye, W. E., 1885. Diagnoses of new species of Cephalopoda, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 5, Xv, p. 222.
1886. Cephalopoda. Report...H.M.S. ‘Challenger.’ Zoology, xvi, pt 44.
1904. Reports on the Cephalopoda. . .‘ Albatross’ (1899-1900). Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard,
PUAN 18)5 Le
1912. Cephalopoda of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinb. xvii,
pt ii, p. 273.
Iyma, I. and Ikepa, S., 1902. Notes on a specimen of Amphitretus. Ann. Zool. Jap. 1Vv, pt iii, p. 85.
Jounin, L., 1895. Contributions a Pétude des Céphalopodes de l Atlantique Nord. Rés. Camp. Sci... . Albert, 1,
fasc. ix.
— 1900. Céphalopodes provenant des campagnes de la ‘Princesse Alice.’ Rés. Camp. Sci....Albert, 1,
fasc. xvii.
—— 1905. Description de deux Elédones. Mém. Soc. Zool. France, xvii, p. 22.
—— 1906. Expédition Antarctique Francaise (Sci. Nat. Doc. Sct.); Céphalopodes.
—— ?1914. Deuxiéme Expéd. Antarctique Francaise; Céphalopodes.
—— 1918. Etude préliminaire sur... Vitreledonella Richardi. Bull. Inst. Océanogr. Monaco, No. 340.
— 1920. Céphalopodes provenant des campagnes de la ‘ Princesse Alice.’ Rés. Camp. Sci... .Albert, 1,
fase. liv.
—— 1924. Contribution a l'étude des Céphalopodes de l Atlantique Nord (4). Rés. Camp. Sci... .Albert, 1,
fasc. Ixvil.
— 1929. Notes préliminaires sur les Céphalopodes des croisiéres du ‘Dana.’ Ann. Inst. Océanogr. Paris,
(a) V1, fasc. iv, p. 363; (0) vu, fase. 1, p. I.
Massy, A. L., 1916. Mollusca, IT, Cephalopoda. British Antarctic (‘Terra Nova’) Expedition, 1910,
Zoology 1, p. 141.
Naer, A., 1923. Die Cephalopoden. Fauna e Flora del Golfo di Napoli, Monogr. 35.
Opuner, N., 1923. Die Cephalopoden. Zool. Res. Swedish Antarctic Exp. 1, No. 4, p. 1.
Rosson, G. C., 1924. On new species, etc., of Octopoda from South Africa. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 9,
XIII, p. 202.
—— 1924 a. On the Cephalopoda obtained in South African Waters. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 589.
—— 1926. The Deep Sea Octopoda. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 1323.
—— 1928. On the giant Octopus of New Zealand. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 257.
—— 1929. A Monograph of the Recent Cephalopoda. Part 1, London (British Museum).
— 1929 a. Notes on the Cephalopoda, 1X. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 10, 11, p. 609.
—— 1930. Notes on the Cephalopoda, X. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 10, v, p. 239.
— 1930a. Notes on the Cephalopoda, XI. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 10, v, p. 330.
Sasakt, M., 1917. On the male of Amphitretus pelagicus. Ann. Zool. Jap. 1X, pt ili, p. 361.
1929. A Monograph of the Dibranchiate Cephalopods of the Japanese and adjacent waters. Journ. Coll.
Agric. Hokkaido, Imp. Univ. xx, Supplementary Number,
THIELE, J., 1915. In CuuNn. Wiss. Ergebn. Deutsche Tiefsee Exp. xvii1, 1i (passim).
VeRRILL, A. E., 1880. Notice of the remarkable Marine Fauna...New England. Am. Journ. Sci. Arts (3),
XX, P. 390.
1881. The Cephalopods of the North-eastern Coast of America. Trans. Conn. Acad. Sci. v, pp- 366, 420.
—— 1885. Third Catalogue of Mollusca... New England Coast. Trans. Conn. Acad. Sci. v1, p. 395.
“
D
iy ed)
PLATE Iil
Fig. 1. Graneledone polymorpha, n.sp. Nat. size. (Type.)
Fig. 2. Amphitretus thielet, n.sp. x§. (Type.)
PLATE Il
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL.II
*vopUoT] px] Uostjarue y SUS (eg UYOE
vd0d0L90 ‘I VdOd01IVHda)
ih
%
+i
ad
“lf
')
‘PRR arr Ww
VI aT AES
; ae @i faces Z -
ote Je gen ree amogelh x nit
costa 3s ge mieten
, ae pe ‘. 7 ; ~~ ¥
= (.9qyT) _osie ast ‘q2.4 _neaiseay, statyalagean tT
PLATE IV
Fig. 1. Alloposus hardyi, n.sp. Nat. size. (Type.)
Fig. 2. Benthoctopus sp. Nat. size.
Fig. 3. Thaumeledone gunteri, n.sp. Nat. size. (Type.)
ISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL.II
A.J.E.Terzi,del.
CEPHALOPODA I, OCTOPODA
PLATE
John Bate Sons A Danielssun L“4 London
IV
‘oie
int
DISCOVERY
REPORTS
Vol. II, pp. 403-434, plate V, text-figs. 1-5
Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Government of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands
THE AGE OF FIN WHALES AT
PHYSICAL MATURITY
WITH A NOTE ON MULTIPLE OVULATIONS
by
J. F. G. Wheeler, M.Sc.
—qasanith WSTiTy ily eg
S85 240 AY
x JAN 20 Sat =}
seus yy,
Na yp Cot
'ONaAL NAL MUSE —
CAMBRIDGE
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
1930
Price four shillings net
[Discovery Reports. Vol. IT, pp. 403-434, Plate V, text-figs. 1-5, December 1930.]
ieeAGE OF FIN WHALES AT PHYSICAL
VAT UR Y
Wir AN Onl EON
MUL IPLE OVULATION S
By
J. F. G. WHEELER, MSc.
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
THE AGE OF FIN WHALES AT PHYSICAL MATURITY
Determination of physical maturity
Unreliability of length as a measure of age
Age evidence from the corpora lutea
page
Correlation of physical maturity data with age evidence font corpora lutea
Conclusions summarized
NOTE ON MULTIPLE OVULATIONS
LIST OF LITERATURE CITED
TABLE OF RECORDS
IPTSATER AV ert oe on ee ees
following page
405
407
hey)
409
417
418
419
421
422
434
lenis
Liat
PEaEeAGE OF FIN WHALES AT PHYSICAL
Vi Ae eRe
Wit AS NOTE, ON
MULE ERE © Vv UL AT TONS
By J. ba G. Wheeler anise:
(Plate V, text-figs. 1-5)
INTRODUCTION
alee determination of age in whales is a question of much scientific interest and
economic importance. Hitherto, both in our own work on Blue and Fin whales
(1929) and in that undertaken by others (Hinton, 1925; Risting, 1928), the only ground
of comparison between individual whales or groups of whales has been that of length.
At South Georgia and elsewhere anatomical investigations have shown that whales
become sexually mature at lengths which for each species vary within comparatively
narrow limits, and the mean values have been used in determining the state of maturity
in other whales in which the anatomy could not be studied. There is a possibility, how-
ever, that the mean lengths at sexual maturity are not the same in all areas: and, when
mature whales are under consideration, average lengths may be very misleading if age
is in any way implied.
The enormous size normal to most of the species produces an impression of great
age. It is indeed a not unnatural inference that the larger the animal the longer it must
live to grow to that size. An estimated length of life of more than a thousand years for
whales of the larger species, attributed to Cuvier, is mentioned by Dewhurst (1834,
p. 45). The statement appears in a supplement to the Cetacea in a translation of Cuvier’s
Regne Animal (1827), and is apparently due to the translator. Camper (1820), while not
committing himself on the subject of age, suggested that as the whales then being caught
were not as large as those first taken in the fishery 200 years before, they were not being
allowed time to grow to their full size. The idea of a long life and of a relation between
growth phases and the span of life appears in G. F. Cuvier’s work (1836): “.. .la durée
de leur vie qui doit étre considérable, si l’on en juge par analogie avec celle des autres
animaux 4 mamelles, toujours proportionnelles 4 celle de la croissance qui est propor-
tionnelle elle-méme 4 celle de la taille”. Probably much the same opinion was under-
stood if not expressed when the only data concerning whales were obtained from
occasional stranded specimens and the reports of whales seen or captured at sea.
I-2
406 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Several authors have suggested that the length of life of an animal bears a direct
relation to the length of the period of its growth. Lankester (1870) discusses this ques-
tion, and mentions the 5 to 1 ratio advanced by Flourens (see Grindon, 1863), and the
6 or 7 to 1 ratio previously put forward by Buffon (1775). Flourens states that the
Right whale lives for 300 years, but does not give the length of the period of growth
or the source of this information. The period of growth was calculated as 20 to 25 years
by Dewhurst (1834, p. 23) from notches in the baleen. Later estimates based upon
greater practical knowledge include those of Scammon (1874) and Haldane (1905). The
former (p. 18) considered that the natural term of life was from 30 to 100 years; the
latter (p. 71) that the limit was reached at about 40 years.
Two observations mentioned by Allen (1916) are of interest. He notes that Sibbald
refers to a Sulphurbottom whale recognized by fishermen in the Firth of Forth for
20 years before it was cast ashore in 1692, and also that Verrill (1902) mentions a
Humpback, known by a peculiar whistle caused by a large barnacle on its blowhole,
that appeared regularly in the Bay of Fundy for 20 years.
The age at sexual maturity is known to be two years from birth (Mackintosh and
Wheeler, 1929). Economically it is the years following sexual maturity that are im-
portant, for from this time onward the female is believed to give birth to a calf not
more often than once in every second year, with the result that the whale population
will not increase unless the females are allowed to live for at least four years after sexual
maturity.
In the previous report (1929) a theory was advanced that the accumulations of scar
tissue due to the degeneration of corpora lutea might give a clue to age in females for
at least several successive seasons following maturity. Further data on this point were
obtained by Messrs F. C. Fraser and G. W. Rayner during seasons 1927-8 and 1928-9,
and by Mr F. D. Ommanney and myself during 1929-30. Recently we have found
it possible to study also the ankylosis of the vertebral epiphyses with their centra, thus
gaining indications of the degree of physical maturity which has been attained; and it is
with this work, correlated with that yielded by further study of the corpora lutea, that
this paper is mainly concerned.
It may be mentioned that indications of age were again sought for in the ridges of
the baleen plates, the structure of bone, and the scars of parasite wounds in the epidermis.
Of these the last only was suggestive, but to a very limited and uncertain extent.
While working on the formation of the corpora lutea the question of multiple ovula-
tions, i.e. more than one ovum liberated at one ovulation, appeared to be of some im-
portance. This subject is dealt with in the note on p. 419.
DETERMINATION OF PHYSICAL MATURITY 407
DHE SAGE OF FIN WHALES AT PHYSICAL MATUREDY
THE DETERMINATION OF PHYSICAL MATURITY
The fused or unfused condition of the vertebral epiphyses has been used as an index
of physical maturity. The method employed is essentially that described in the Report
of 1929 on p. 447. While the vertebral column is being turned during the process of
stripping away the muscles, the ventral surface is exposed, and by cutting the edges
of the vertebrae the state of fusion can be gauged at a glance. Owing to conditions on
the flensing plan and the rapidity with which the whales are disposed of, there is rarely
time to examine more than three or four vertebrae of each whale, even when using an
axe for the work instead of the knife that was tried at Saldanha Bay in 1926.
The presence of a layer of cartilage between epiphysis and centrum is a sign that
fusion has not occurred. Towards maturity the cartilage layer becomes very thin, and
can sometimes be traced by the cracking away of splinters of centrum from epiphysis
or vice versa. After ankylosis a whitish line marks the join, but this eventually dis-
appears and no sign of fusion can be seen. Enumeration of the vertebrae has always
been done by counting forward from the rst caudal, which can easily be recognized
because the first of the ventral chevron bones is situated between it and the 2nd caudal.
As a routine one vertebrae at the posterior end of the lumbar series was examined
(1st caudal, 15th or 14th lumbar), one vertebra in the middle of the lumbar series,
one in the posterior thoracic region, and one or two as far forward as possible, z.e. the
2nd, 3rd or 4th thoracic. Usually the opposed ends of two vertebrae were cut, but no
difference was noticed between the state of fusion at the posterior end of one vertebra
and the anterior end of the next.
Although the cervical vertebrae of Fin, Blue and Sei whales are neither wholly nor
partly coalesced into a cervical mass as they are in the Right whales and many toothed
whales, they are thickly enclosed in connective tissue and, for this reason, it was not
found possible to examine them on the plan in the limited time at our disposal.
Following the statement of Flower (1864) that ankylosis begins from the ends of the
vertebral column and proceeds towards the middle, the posterior lumbar vertebrae were
at first considered diagnostic of complete maturity. Thoracic (dorsal) vertebrae were
examined at the same time, however, and it soon became evident that the lumbar
epiphyses might be ankylosed while the thoracics were still separated from their centre
by thin cartilage.
Certain stages in maturity have been noted, but we have not had the opportunity
of examining a complete column in the transition state. In a few whales the lumbar
vertebrae were fused while the thoracics were unfused; in some, when fusion had
occurred throughout the column, the join was visible in both thoracics and lumbars;
in others it could be seen in thoracics only, and in still others no sign of the join could
be seen anywhere.
408 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Photomicrographs of the condition in a Fin female of 21-42 m. (No. 3178) are shown
in Plate V, figs. 1-3. In this whale pieces of the vertebrae were chipped off with the
axe, decalcified in formalin and nitric acid, and sectioned with the freezing microtome.
The sections were stained by Schmorl’s picrothionin method.
The notes made upon the plan were as follows:
2nd—3rd thoracic... .... Epiphyses not fused to centra; separating
cartilage layer very thin
15th thoracic-1st lumbar... Epiphyses fused to centra. Join visible
13th-14th lumbar _... .... Epiphyses fused to centra. No sign of join
The cartilage layer, plainly continuous in the anterior thoracic vertebrae, is in process
of invasion by bone cells in the posterior thoracic region, and has completely dis-
appeared at the posterior end of the column.
A second series from a Fin female of 22:0 m. (No. 3196) is given in Plate V,
figs. 4-6. The vertebrae examined and the notes made on the plan were as follows:
2nd—3rd thoracics ... as Epiphyses unfused. Thin cartilage
4th—5th lumbars ... Gis Epiphyses unfused. ‘Thin cartilage
15th lumbar-—tst caudal ... Epiphyses fused
The staining of these sections was not as successful as in the first series. ‘Too long
immersion in picric acid had the effect of masking the thionin stain, with the result
that the cartilage appears lighter than the bone. The different stages of invasion, how-
ever, can still be clearly seen.
Nearly 200 sexually mature female Fin whales were examined, and from these it may
be said that, at least as far forwards as the 3rd or 4th thoracic vertebra, ankylosis pro-
ceeds from the posterior end of the column. In one only (No. 3181) did the observa-
tions suggest that ankylosis might be completed in the posterior thoracic region rather
than at the anterior end of this series. The full results are given in the table of records
on pp. 422-434. In male Fin whales and all Blue and Sei whales results similar to those
given above were found.
It is interesting to note that fusion from the posterior end of the column was observed
by Barrett-Hamilton (see Hinton, 1925), who, in his notes on the Humpback (p. 79)
mentions “‘ vertebral epiphyses fusing but visible in lumbars, thoracics not fused and
thin”: among Fin whales (p. 105) and Blue whales (p. 139) he gives several examples of
lumbar vertebrae fused while the thoracics were distinct.
On the advice of Sir Sidney Harmer a detailed examination was made of the skeletons
of whales and dolphins in the British Museum (Natural History) to determine the state
of the cervical epiphyses and vertebrae during the process of ankylosis. More than
ninety specimens, including a few seen at the Zoological Museum at Cambridge, were ©
examined, and although in some of them the epiphyses were free throughout and in
others physical maturity had been reached and the epiphyses were completely ankylosed,
LENGTH AS A MEASURE OF AGE 409
there were many in the intermediate stage, and Flower’s statement that ankylosis begins
at both ends of the column was fully confirmed.
No epiphyses were found on the articular surfaces of the atlas, and only a reduced
slip of bone on the anterior surface of the axis in one immature specimen. Otherwise
the epiphyses could usually be traced from the posterior surface of the axis throughout
the column, except sometimes in the extreme caudal vertebrae.
In the most frequently noted intermediate stage the epiphyses were ankylosed from
the anterior end of the column to the rst thoracic, and from the posterior end forward
to the 7th or 8th caudal. In one or two specimens anterior ankylosis appeared to have
reached as far back as the 4th thoracic, while posterior ankylosis had not proceeded
beyond the 1st caudal. No later stages were found, perhaps because of the difficulty of
differentiating between the last stages of ankylosis in dried specimens.
We can state, then, that ankylosis commences at both ends of the column and is
completed among the anterior thoracic vertebrae. When the epiphyses of these vertebrae
are ankylosed, physical maturity has been attained and growth in length ceases.
UNRELIABILITY OF LENGTH AS A MEASURE OF AGE
In the course of the work on whales it has become very evident that length is an
uncertain guide to age—that is, relative age—except possibly as an average. This is so
even among immature whales, for in these the limit of length overlaps by more than
a metre the length of the smallest sexually mature whale. This can be seen in Fig. 1.
The smallest sexually mature female Fin whale taken in season 1929-30 was 18°75 m.
(No. 2630).. It was pregnant. The largest immature female Fin was 21-4 m. (No. 3175).
As might be expected, the lengths at physical maturity show at least equal divergence.
A female whale 21-05 m. long (No. 2915), and several very little longer, were physically
mature, but females more than 23 m. long have been examined in which the epiphyses
were still unfused.
AGE EVIDENCE FROM THE CORPORA LUTEA
Before attempting to discuss the correlation of physical maturity with the age data
from the corpora lutea, the origin and fate of the latter must be mentioned and the
reasons given for considering that they form an index of age. Part of this work has
been put forward in the report on Southern Blue and Fin whales (1929), but further
observations have !ed to a modification of the theory then suggested.
On the expulsion of the ovum the Graafian follicle grows to form a corpus luteum.
If fertilization of the ovum follows, the corpus luteum persists practically unchanged,
in size at least, until late in gestation. At the end of gestation, or during lactation, it
shrinks and grows harder by the reabsorption of the luteal cells and the increasing
growth of connective tissue. If, on the other hand, the ovum is not fertilized, the
corpus luteum, which is formed exactly as in pregnancy, persists as a functional body
for a shorter period. There is no evidence concerning the shrinkage of the corpus luteum
410 DISCOVERY REPORTS
of the unfertilized ovum in whales. In other animals, however, it takes place rapidly,
and if the animal is polyoestrous, the corpus has become functionless in time for the
ripening of follicles for the next oestrous period (Marshall, 1925, p. 48).
NUMBERS OF INDIVIDUALS
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
LENGTH OF WHALE IN METRES
Fig. 1. Fin whales, females: Season 1929-30. Frequency of half-metre lengths.
——— — Immature whales. Sexually mature whales. | —gW— Physically mature whales.
The length of time the corpus luteum can be recognized in the ovaries is discussed
by Marshall (1922, p. 147). In the human female the corpus is reduced to an insigni-
ficant scar two months after ovulation. In the sow, Corner (1925) found that corpora
lutea from one ovulation overlapped those of an earlier ovulation during any one
sexual season. Donaldson (1924) gives figures which show definitely the accumulation
of corpora lutea with age in the rat (Table X, p. 39). Our own work, as stated on
pp. 394-6 of the Report (1929), indicates that, by careful examination of the ovaries
of whales, traces can be found of all the ovulations that have occurred since the sexual
maturity of the animal.
It will be seen later that this view is upheld by the facts of physical maturity. One
example may be cited. During season 1929-30 two female Fin whales (Nos. 2765,
AGE EVIDENCE FROM CORPORA LUTEA 411
2766) were captured and brought to the station on the same day. They were of the
same length (22-5 m.), but one possessed twenty-four old corpora lutea and a functional
corpus luteum (pseudo-pregnancy); the other had one old corpus luteum and one of
pregnancy. In the former, ankylosis of the epiphyses throughout the vertebral column
showed that complete physical maturity had been reached ; in the latter, thick cartilaginous
layers still separated the epiphyses from their centra.
45
40
35
30
tr
S
_
or
_
i]
ao
NUMBER OF CORPORA LUTEA
18 19 20 21 22 23 24
LENGTH OF WHALE IN METRES
Fig. 2. Fin whales, females: Season 1929-30. Length of whale and number of corpora lutea.
o Epiphyses not ankylosed throughout column. @ Epiphyses ankylosed throughout.
If the numbers of corpora lutea are plotted against the corresponding lengths of the
whales, and the physically mature whales distinguished from those not mature (Fig. 2),
it is readily seen that physical maturity bears little relation to length, but does bear a
relation to the number of corpora lutea. Indeed, of 105 whales with less than fifteen
corpora lutea only two, with eleven and twelve respectively, were physically mature;
while of 66 whales with more than fifteen corpora lutea only four, with sixteen,
sixteen, twenty and twenty-one, were physically immature.
The age at physical maturity is thus the number of years occupied in the accumula-
tion of fifteen corpora lutea in the ovaries plus the two years that elapse between birth
and sexual maturity.
One of the applications of this result is that if the number of corpora lutea has been
noted, comparisons can be made between the number of physically mature whales
caught in different seasons and areas. This applies particularly to our own previous
DIIV 2
412 - DISCOVERY REPORTS
work, but should be of value if any future observations are made from floating factories,
where the genitalia can often be obtained when there is no opportunity of examining
the vertebral column.
When further work has been done on these lines the restriction of comparison to
the physically mature whales of successive seasons should lead to a more accurate
indication of increase or diminution of stock than is at present available.
The sexual season is limited in some animals to a single oestrous period, and, ovula-
tion taking place at oestrus only, the accumulation of corpora lutea will be slow or rapid
according to whether one or more than one ovum is normally shed at this time. In
other animals the oestrous (dioestrous) cycle is shorter, and is repeated during the
sexual season until pregnancy supervenes or the season ends. In these polyoestrous
animals corpora lutea will accumulate rapidly. In some animals again the ovum is not
shed unless coition occurs, that is to say, only corpora lutea of pregnancy will be found
in the ovaries.
It is obviously of the utmost importance to discover the condition normally existing
among whales if there is to be any solid foundation beneath a theory involving the
corpora lutea.
The reasons for considering Blue and Fin whales as polyoestrous animals in which
ovulation occurs regardless of coition are given in the Report (1929) on p. 390. It was
there shown that, although foetuses are sometimes lost at sea, and perhaps occasionally
very early stages are missed in spite of thorough search, there are too many apparent
pregnancies in which no foetus can be found to be accounted for in any way other than
by ovulation.
This view has received support from observations during 1929-30. Thirteen ap-
parent ovulations have been noted. The size and condition of the uterus in these whales
did not suggest the presence of a foetus, although little reliance can be placed on
measurements and observations of congested condition in an organ so capable of rapid
recovery as the uterus. When a foetus has been present some indication of the occur-
rence can usually be found. During this season three foetuses are known to have been
slipped at sea, and one of them, about 0-2 m. long (No. 2753), was discharged. in its
membranes from the parent whale upon the deck of the catcher that was towing it?.
Whales have been recorded in which two or more ova have been liberated at the same
time, but they are too few to form a serious exception to the rule of normal behaviour,
which is the shedding of a single ovum at each ovulation. (See note on Multiple
Ovulations on p. 419.)
That ovulation takes place without the stimulus of coition is now almost beyond
doubt. The high percentage of ovulations at South Africa (Saldanha Bay, 1926) and
the comparatively large number of ovulations recorded from South Georgia suggest
this condition. The only direct evidence is the capture this season of a Fin female with
1 Whales are towed alongside the catcher tail first and always float ventral side uppermost. Internal
decomposition and extra pressure during stormy weather would be sufficient to cause the discharge
of the foetus. On the flensing plan foetuses are sometimes blown two or three yards from the parent.
AGE EVIDENCE FROM CORPORA LUTEA 413
one old corpus luteum in the ovaries, immature mammary glands, and an unbroken
vaginal band (No. 3070). A similar whale was reported in 1925.
Fin and Blue whales are thus polyoestrous animals in which ovulation is spon-
taneous, one ovum is discharged at a time, and all ovulations leave a permanent record
in the ovaries. The question now arises whether something cannot be done towards
the estimation of the actual age from the number of corpora lutea.
It has been noticed this season, as in previous seasons, that certain numbers of corpora
lutea appear to be much more frequent than other numbers. An explanation of this
fact was attempted in 1929, and the theory of age, fully explained below, was briefly
outlined at the same time (p. 450).
In polyoestrous animals with a definite sexual season, the number of ovulations in
any one season depends upon the occurrence of pregnancy within the limits imposed
by the season itself. In social animals like whales, that live in communities or schools
and undertake extensive migrations more or less simultaneously at certain times, one
would expect to find, at least for one or two seasons after sexual maturity, that the
experience of all had been somewhat similar, and that circumstances or conditions that
had affected one had affected others in the same way. This certainly applies to the course
of migration. There would be no “Fin years” or ‘“‘Blue years” at South Georgia
(seasons when one species appears in great numbers while the other is practically
absent) if conditions affecting migration did not affect the whole herd.
Take then, for example, a group of whales in their first sexual season. At the close
of the season the minimum number of corpora lutea will be one (corpus luteum of
pregnancy) and the whale will be pregnant, the maximum will represent the number of
dioestrous cycles that are possible during the season. If, in the majority of these whales,
fertilization of the ovum for some reason does not occur for one or more oestrous
periods, there will be a majority of whales having the same number of corpora lutea
in the ovaries; that is, there will be traces of a certain number of ovulations and a
corpus luteum of pregnancy. In the following season these whales will be lactating,
while a fresh group is becoming mature. This fresh group may undergo the same
experience as the previous whales or it may not, but the number of corpora lutea cannot
exceed the maximum which is limited by the season.
As gestation and lactation occupy most of two years, it is during their third season
that the first whales again experience a sexual season and the number of corpora lutea
again increases. The second group is now lactating, so the number of corpora lutea
remains stationary, and a third group is verging upon maturity. In the following year
the first group is again lactating, the second ovulating, the third lactating, and a fourth
is becoming mature.
Thus, in representative samples from one area, the frequency of the numbers of
corpora lutea will show a succession of nodes or peaks marking the increase in numbers
every two years.
The graph of the frequency of corpora lutea for season 1929—30 at South Georgia is
shown in Fig. 3. Peaks at one, seven, and eleven are clear, and there are indications
2-2
414 DISCOVERY REPORTS
of others at eighteen and twenty-one. The whales can be grouped round each of these
peaks as follows: Group I, whales with one, two, three or four corpora lutea; Group II,
whales with five to nine; Group III, with ten to fourteen; Group IV, with fifteen to
nineteen; Group V, with twenty to twenty-four.
We have thus in the number of corpora lutea an indication of the age of any female
Fin whale up to eight years from sexual maturity; and because each group is composed
mainly of pregnant and lactating whales or of resting whales one year older, we can
obtain a rough idea of the number of each age caught during the season from the
number of whales in each group as indicated by the frequency chart.
FREQUENCY OF NUMBERS OF CORPORA LUTEA
NUMBER OF CORPORA LUTEA
Fig. 3. Fin whales, females: Season 1929-30. Frequency of numbers of corpora lutea.
——— a Vertebral epiphyses not ankylosed throughout column.
Vertebral epiphyses ankylosed throughout column.
The assumption has here been made that pregnancy recurs every two years. That
this is in all probability normal behaviour is shown in the Report (1929, p. 431) from
consideration of the percentage of pregnant and resting whales. During 1929-30
pregnant, lactating and resting whales constituted 64, 17 and 12 per cent respectively
of the catch of mature females. The remaining 7 per cent were ovulating. The per-
centage of pregnant whales is rather high—theoretically it should be 50 per cent—
but allowing for possible segregation and seasonal variation the figures point to
a recurrent pregnancy at intervals of two years.
In several resting whales the size and condition of the mammary glands showed that
lactation had not long ceased, and seven whales from a total of 199 were pregnant
AGE EVIDENCE FROM CORPORA LUTEA 415
1927-8
1929-30
FREQUENCY OF NUMBERS OF CORPORA LUTEA
30 35 40 45 50 55
iw)
or
5 10 15 20
NUMBER OF CORPORA LUTEA
Fig. 4. Fin whales, females: Frequency of numbers of corpora lutea for six seasons at South Georgia.
416 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
and lactating at the same time. In one lactating whale ovulation without subsequent
fertilization had occurred. These pregnant and lactating, or ovulating and lactating
whales suggest either that lactation is sometimes unduly prolonged, or that post-
partum ovulation may sometimes take place. If the latter is the true explanation, the
interval between successive births in these whales is one year instead of two.
In Fig. 4 the frequency graphs for six seasons at South Georgia can be compared.
In the two previous ‘‘ Fin years”’ (1925-6; 1928-9) a grouping similar to that of 1929-30
can be recognized, although the peaks alter their position within the groups according to
the number of unsuccessful ovulations that was most frequent in that particular season.
It will be noticed in the previous work on the frequency of the corpora lutea (Report,
1929, p. 451) that Group I included the present Groups I and IT. The present Group I
with a maximum at one was not evident because, in two of the three seasons reported
upon, the early part of the season was missed, and it can be shown by the incidence of
pregnant whales with a single corpus luteum that the earliest pregnancies of the season
arrive early at South Georgia. During this season there were eight single corpus
luteum pregnancies in November (thirty-five mature whales), four in December (eighty-
one mature whales), five in January (seventy-six mature whales), one in February
(twenty-nine mature whales), and none in March. Last season there were four in
October (thirty-one mature), two in January (forty-two mature), and one in February
(fifty mature). From the single functional corpus luteum it is evident that these whales
had been fertilized at the first ovulation of the season.
There is a noticeable difference between Group I and all the subsequent groups in
that the greatest frequency occurs at the beginning rather than near the middle; in
other words, that in the first sexual season the majority of whales become pregnant
at the first ovulation, while in subsequent seasons unsuccessful ovulations usually
precede pregnancy. A possible explanation is that whales nearing the time of maturity
tend to stay near the breeding areas, or, at any rate, do not make a long southward
migration, and they are thus the first to be impregnated, while the older whales arrive
from the south somewhat later, after one or more ovulations not usually fertilized.
In Fig. 5 the figures for 393 mature Fin females—the total catch since 1924—5—are
combined, and it can be seen that, notwithstanding the overlapping that must necessarily
occur, the grouping is still evident.
While it is not suggested that the groups in themselves give more than an indication
of difference in age of a number of whales, some idea of the amount of overlap between
the groups can be gained in the following way. There are certain whales whose age
can be ascertained on anatomical grounds. Thus whales pregnant with one functional
corpus luteum are naturally in their first year from sexual maturity, while lactating
whales with one corpus luteum must be in their second year. When more than one
corpus luteum is present the state of the mammary glands has to be taken into account ;
for if the gland is immature then unfertilized ovulations have occurred during the first
season with or without a later successful ovulation depending on whether the whale is
pregnant or not.
AGE EVIDENCE FROM CORPORA LUTEA 417
From the mature females of 1929-30 there are forty in which the age can be deter-
mined in this way. ‘Thirty-five of these belong definitely to the first or second year from
sexual maturity, i.e. they constitute Group I of the frequency graph, and five are
definitely in their third year (Group II). Now there are fifty-two whales with one, two,
three or four corpora lutea (Group I) in the frequency graph (Fig. 3). Thus the overlap
from Group II is seventeen, of which five have already been traced.
FREQUENCY OF NUMBERS OF CORPORA LUTEA
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
NUMBER OF CORPORA LUTEA
Fig. 5. Fin whales, females. Frequency of numbers of corpora lutea.
All records from South Georgia since 1924-5.
CORRELATION OF PHYSICAL MATURITY DATA WITH AGE
EVIDENCE FROM CORPORA LUTEA
In Fig. 3 the physically immature whales are distinguished from the mature, and it
is evident that the change takes place between Groups III and IV. Therefore female
Fin whales become physically mature between four and six years after sexual maturity,
that is, between six and eight years from birth.
Although this early maturity agrees with the very rapid bodily growth that is known
to occur before sexual maturity, it does not suggest very long life. Whether the length
of life can ever be more than a subject for speculation is doubtful and, perhaps, for
economic purposes the knowledge is not necessary. At least one whale caught this season
had attained the age of twenty years (No. 2815), if the average increase in the number
of corpora lutea every two years is taken as four. No sign of a climacteric or diminution
of fecundity appeared in the ovaries of any whale, not even in those of the whale men-
tioned above which possessed forty-six corpora lutea. Nevertheless the largest size and
greatest weight of ovary was found in whales with eighteen to twenty corpora lutea,
which indicates that after about ten years the reproductive prime is over.
418 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
CONCLUSIONS SUMMARIZED
The conclusions advanced in this paper may be summarized as follows:
1. Ankylosis of the epiphyses starts from both ends of the vertebral column, but
anteriorly it does not proceed much beyond the cervical series. Ankylosis is completed
among the anterior thoracic vertebrae.
2. Complete ankylosis—that is, physical maturity—bears little relation to length, but
is found when more than fifteen corpora lutea are present in the ovaries.
3. All ovulations are permanently recorded in the ovaries.
4. Because whales act collectively the number of unfertilized ovulations before preg-
nancy tends to be the same in any one season, and this manifests itself in the greater
frequency of certain numbers of corpora lutea than others.
5. Each peak of the frequency graph represents an age group at an interval of two
years from the one previous to it.
6. There are three peaks in the frequency graph before the physically immature
whales give place to the mature. This indicates that physical maturity is attained when
whales are from six to eight years of age.
+. No signs of a climacteric have been observed in whales up to twenty years of age,
but there appears to be a sexual “‘prime”’ at ten years, after which the size and weight
of the ovaries diminish.
NOTE ON MULTIPLE OVULATIONS
Three of the female Fin whales captured during 1929-30 possessed more than one
apparently functional corpus luteum in the ovaries.
No. 2798 was captured in December. It had twin foetuses, a male of 1-04 metres
and a female of 1-06 metres, and in one of the ovaries three large corpora lutea, all with
the characteristics of the functional corpus luteum of pregnancy, were found. The sizes,
measured in three directions at right angles, were as follows: 13 x 15 x 5°5 cm.,
13 X 14 X 7cm., 8-5 x 7 x 7 cm. The tissue of each was soft, somewhat yellow, and
stained deeply with both Nile Blue and Osmic acid. Obviously three ova had been
shed at one ovulation and two of them had been fertilized.
No. 2815 was brought to the station three days later. No foetus was present but
there were two corpora lutea in one ovary and one in the other. These appeared to be
functional from their structure and staining reactions. The sizes were 11-5 x 12°5 x 4cm.,
Gane 2-2)/Cml.,. 2-2) < 4-5 4-5 Cm.
In whale No. 2874 a male foetus was present, 0-41 metres long, and in the ovaries
there were two apparently functional corpora lutea, one measuring 19 x 16:5 x 7cm.,
the other 8-5 x 6:5 x 4.cm.
Among the whales examined by Messrs Fraser and Rayner in season 1928-9, one
Fin whale possessed male twins of 3-72 and 3:67 metres. There were two large functional
corpora lutea, one in each ovary, measuring 15 x 15 x 8cm., 15 X 14 X I2 cm.
The above observations show that a very small percentage of whales liberate several
ova at one ovulation, and thus provide an explanation of the multiple foetuses occa-
sionally reported.
It is curious that when three ova are shed and two are fertilized, two corpora lutea
remain large while the third dwindles; that when two ova are shed and both are fer-
tilized, the corpora lutea are both of large size; while if two ova are shed and only one
is fertilized only one corpus luteum maintains its size.
These facts suggest a close and somewhat exclusive relation between corpus luteum
and foetus. If two ova are fertilized then two corpora lutea will remain functional, if
one foetus is developing then one corpus luteum is sufficient. Perhaps, indeed, the
corpus luteum reflects the fate of its own released ovum.
Multiple foetuses have been reported from a number of localities in both the Northern
and Southern Hemispheres. Haldane (1910, p. 117) gives the lengths of six foetuses
from a Common Rorqual taken off Iceland, but does not record the sexes or details
of the ovarian condition (see also Collett, 1911-12). Seven foetuses were taken from
a Blue Whale at South Georgia in 1924-5 and the lengths, weights and sexes were
reported in the Norsk Hvalfangsttidende (Risting, 1925, pp. 98, 99) where reference
Dilv 3
420 ; DISCOVERY REPORTS
is made to multiple foetuses in other species. It has been suggested that, when
differences exist between the lengths of the foetuses, two or more successive ovulations
are indicated, and the differences in length have been used as a measure of the interval
between ovulations (Hinton, 1925, p. 124). Such a theory is very speculative, because
the occurrence of multiple foetuses is abnormal and differences, especially in size, may
be expected. In consequence this question is likely to remain unanswered until records
are obtainable of the condition of the ovaries in addition to the sizes of the foetuses.
EISL OF LITERATURE CITED
ALLEN, G. M., 1916. Whalebone Whales of New England. Mem. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. vit, No. 2, pp. 109-
322, figs. 1-12, pls. 8-16.
Barrett-Hamitton, G. E. H. See Hinton, M. A. C.
Burron, G. L. L. pe, 1775. The Natural History of Animals, Vegetables and Minerals with the Theory of
the Earth in general. ‘Translated by W. Kenrick and J. Murdoch. Vol. 1. London.
CamPER, P., 1820. Observations anatomiques sur la structure intérieure et le squelette de plusieurs espéces de
Cétacés, pp. 1-218. Paris.
CoLueTT, R., 1911-12. Cetacea. Norges Hvirveldyr. 1. Norges Pattedyr, pp. 543-722, illus. Kristiania.
Corner, G. W., 1925. Cyclic changes in the ovaries and uterus of the Sow, and their relation to the mechanism
of implantation. Contrib. to Embryology, x11, 1921, pp. 117-46, 2 figs., 4 pls. Carnegie Inst.
Washington, Publ. 276.
Cuvirr, G. F., 1836. De [Histoire naturelle des Cétacés, pp. 1-416, pls. 1-xx11. Paris.
Cuvier, G. L. C., 1827. The Animal Kingdom. Translated by Ed. Griffith and others. Vol. 1v, pp. 429-98.
London.
Dewuurst, H. W., 1834. The Natural History of the Order Cetacea, pp. 1-294, illus. London.
Donatpson, H. H., 1924. The Rat. Mem. Wistar Inst. Anat. (Amer. Anat. Mem.), No. 6, Philadelphia,
pp. i-xiv, 1-469.
Fiower, W. H., 1864. Notes on the Skeletons of Whales in the Principal Museums of Holland and Belgium,
with Descriptions of two Species apparently new to Science. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1864, pp. 384-
420, text-figs. I-17.
Grinpon, L. H., 1863. Life: its Nature, Varieties and Phenomena. 3rd ed. London.
Hapang, R. C., 1905. Notes on Whaling in Shetland, 1904. Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist. pp. 65-72, pl. 3, 1 text-fig.
— 1910. Zoological Notes. Extraordinary Fecundity of a Whale (Balaenoptera musculus). Ann. Scot.
Nat. Hist. p. 117.
Hinton, M. A. C., 1925. Report on the Papers left by the late Major Barrett-Hamilton, relating to the Whales
of South Georgia, pp. 57-209. Crown Agents for the Colonies, London, 1925.
LANKESTER, E. R., 1870. On Comparative Longevity in Man and the Lower Animals. London.
MacxintosuH, N. A. and WHEELER, J. F. G., 1929. Southern Blue and Fin Whales. Discovery Reports, 1,
PP. 257-540, text-figs. 1-157, pls. XxV—XLIV.
MarsuaL., F. H. A., 1922. The Physiology of Reproduction. London.
1925. An Introduction to Sexual Physiology. London.
RisTING, S., 1925. Sjelden Fosterforekomst. Norsk Hvalfangsttid. No. 9.
— 1928. Whales and Whale Foetuses. Statistics of Catch and Measurement collected from the Norwegian
Whalers’ Association, 1922-5. Rapp. Cons. Explor. Mer. L, pp. 1-122, text-figs. 1-30.
Scammon, C. M., 1874. Marine Mammals of the North West Coast of North America, pp. 1-319, illus.,
pls. r-xxvu. San Francisco.
VerrILL, A. E., rg01-2. The Bermuda Islands. Trans. Conn. Acad. New Haven, x1, pp. 1-548, illus.
nN
(as)
Date
24
25
27
Whale number
Length (m.)
22°6
22°5
22'9
19°9
FIN WHALES, FEMALES:
Number of functional
corpora lutea
°
Number of old
corpora lutea
NO
N
co
TABLE OF RECORDS
& Bile & sy
erealte es cles
2: 2°
Bs é 3.46 F §
S5sl|sos) F
Bet 3 oS So
ERS) EER) gs
Grea ers s\) a6
= 9:0 aS
18-0 — °
— 34°0 0:86
Male
— 20°0 O-4I
Female
— 5°5 =
19'0 19:0 fo)
=, 45 —
= 45°0 | 4:4
Female
28-0 22:0 1:04
Male
21'0 — °
39°0 28-0 0°66
Male
21'0 23'0 —
28°5 310 0:265
Male
16-0 22°0 _—
30°0 22:0 0°68
Male
58-0 39°0 1-6
Female
36-0 28-0 0°86
Male
I*5-2°0
(decom-
posed)
23°0 24'0 0'275
Male
33°0 21'0 0°45
Female
58:0 28:0 1°23
Male
50°0 = 0-72
Female
60-0 410 1°42
Female
420 18-0 0°59
Female
SOUTH GEORGIA, 1929-30
mammary gland (cm.)
Thickness of
10°0
22°'0
50
2°3
State of mammary
Immature
Resting
Involuted
Involuted
Immature
Involuted
Immature
Involuted.
Yellow fluid
present
Involuted
Involuted
Involution
nearly
complete
Involuted
Lactating
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Immature
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Immature
Vertebrae examined
S) 4
y 2 i <
eee ie
A 4 1S)
= 12th
6th 8th —
7th oth
8th 13th
gth 14th
13th
14th
7th 8th --
8th oth
1oth —- —
11th
11th 7th —
12th 8th
8th 8th —
oth oth
6th 7th —
7th 8th
13th
14th
7th oth a
8th roth
8th roth —
oth r1th
13th
14th
5th 8th -=
6th oth
oth
10th
oth oth =
10th 10th
8th oth —
oth roth
8th 8th _—
gth oth
— 6th —
7th
4th 6th —
5th 7th
8th
oth
5th 7th —
6th 8th
oth 8th —
roth oth
State of epiphyses
Not ankylosed
Ankylosed. No sign
of join
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed
Ankylosed. No sign
of join
Ankylosed. No sign
of join
Not ankylosed. Car-
tilaginous layers least
in 13th and 14th
lumbar
Ankylosed. Join just
visible in thoracics
Ankylosed. Join just
visible in thoracics
Ankylosed. No sign
of join
Ankylosed. Join visible
in thoracics
Ankylosed. No sign
of join
Ankylosed. Join visible
in 6th and 7th cervicals
Ankylosed. No sign
of join
Ankylosed. No sign
of join
Not ankylosed
Ankylosed. Join visible |
in thoracics
TABLE OF RECORDS: FIN FEMALES 423
Vertebrae examined
(cm.)
State of epiphyses
Number of functional
mammary gland (cm.)
corpora lutea
Length (m.) and sex
Whale number
Length (m.)
Number of old
corpora lutea
Diameter of uterus,
pregnant or ex-
pregnant cornu
Diameter of uterus,
immature or non-
pregnant cornu (cm.)
of foetus
Thickness of
State of mammary
Thoracic
oo
rhs
io”
088 3 Involuted
Female
o'185 : Immature
Male
i
Ko}
Ankylosed. Join visible
in thoracics
Not ankylosed
i
© CWO
aa
BaiDae
“I
=
ion
Immature Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage layers
Immature Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage layers
Not ankylosed. Thin
cartilage layers in
lumbars
Involuted Ankylosed. Join visible
in thoracics
Involution Ankylosed. No sign
almost of join
complete
Involuted Ankylosed. No sign
Female of join
O-4 : Immature Not ankylosed. Thick
Female cartilage layers
I°l7 : Involuted Not ankylosed. Thin
Male cartilage layers
08 q Involuted Ankylosed. No sign
Male of join
1-66 : Involuted ‘ Ankylosed. No sign
Female of join
0-09 : Immature Not ankylosed. Thick
Male cartilage layers
1°36 : Involuted Not ankylosed. Thin
Female cartilage layers
Involuted Ankylosed. Join just
visible in thoracics
Involuted Not ankylosed. Thin
cartilage in lumbars
Involuted Ankylosed
Involuted Ankylosed
Involuted Ankylosed. No sign
of join
1'09 : Immature = —_
Female
1°42 : Involuted Almost ankylosed. Very
Male thin cartilage layers
in thoracics
0:98 : Involuted Not ankylosed
Male
° , Involuted Ankylosed
1°55 : Involuted Ankylosed. Join visible
Male in thoracics
Immature
424
Number of functional
Whale number
corpora lutea
Number of old
corpora lutea
Length (m.)
26
17
Ree
DISCOVERY REPORTS
2 Gil» @il ©
Sees
2 Qs z
5 Z e|5e8¢2 §
46 || Se BS Ca
Situs) || Gos g
5 pr 3 o way Sa
Scie || geteetc || meets
SRG |ESh] & 8
Soo |]. § o ae
Agasa/AEa|] AS
26:0 25°0 °
17°0 45°0 08
Female
36'0 13°0 o'81
Female
80:0 34:0 1°73
Female
58-0 25°0 1°42
Male
38:0 27°0 1:26
Female
81-0 32:0 098
Female
ae 9:0 a
20°0 17'0 O-31
Female
48-0 37:0 1°23
Female
ae 6-0 =
= 75 =
== = o-9
Female
62:0 23'0 I°IQ
Female
66:0 27°0 1°64
Male
67:0 27:0 1°88
Male
= 32'0 1-79
Female
19'0 21:0 —
40°0 28°0 083
Male
mammary gland (cm.)
Thickness of
“NI
wn
N
w
2°3
7s)
ay)
State of mammary
gland
Involuted
Immature
Immature
Involuted
Involuted
Immature
Involuted
Immature
Involuted
Lactating
Involuted
Immature
Immature
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Vertebrae examined
2 4
2 | 2 | 3
rs) E 5
ect =) 3
HH 4 1S)
7th 7th =
8th 8th
6th — ==
7th
t2th
13th
oth Ist —
roth 11th
15th 12th
7th oth =
8th roth
11th
12th
7th roth =
8th 11th
12th
13th
8th 2nd —
gth 3rd
roth
11th
roth — —
11th
7th roth —
8th 11th
7th Ist =
8th 11th
15th 12th
6th 2nd —
7th 3rd
11th
12th
14th
15th
8th 11th =
oth 12th
13th
14th
8th 3rd =
oth 4th
11th
12th
6th roth =
ath 11th
t2th
13th
6th 11th =
7th 12th
13th
14th
6th toth ~-
7th 11th
11th
12th
8th 12th —
gth 13th
7th 11th —
8th 12th
State of epiphyses
Ankylosed. Join visible
in thoracics
Not ankylosed. Note:
‘The foetus was found
in that cornu of the
uterus to which was
attached the ovary
without the func-
tional corpus luteum
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage layers
Ankylosed. Join visible
in thoracics
Thoracics not anky-
losed. Thin cartilage
present. Lumbars
ankylosed
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage layers
Ankylosed. No sign
of join
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Ankylosed. No sign
of join
Not ankylosed. Car-
tilaginous layer thin- —
ner in lumbars than
thoracics
Not ankylosed in thor-
acics. Ankylosed in
lumbars
Ankylosed. No sign
of join
Not ankylosed. Car-
tilage layer thinner
in lumbars than thor-
acics ]
Ankylosed. Join visible
in thoracics
Not ankylosed. Thin
cartilage
Not ankylosed
Ankylosed. No sign
of join
TABLE OF RECORDS: FIN FEMALES 425
i =] > > 4 a F
§ ie) g on § 4 Ss > Vertebrae examined
c=) H 4 u co Lo} ~ a
we a 3 i) 0) } |] SS er S| ze §
3 Seleeiote|2te| & | Ws :
Date is ¢ a 2 aA 2 688] 6 $ 5 g 2 ee S State of epiphyses
a = Bar|) ee a fe oh PI a o& cy Bey
a SOSA ee seamed ll eorciiss ges Gs ) 9
a to sole | gee las 5 tp 2 eI ov g
E e |Se\Se| eee) eee] ge | es gs é
2 Sra e4eo hoarse | eA || is |e e Aw =
1929 5
10 Dec. : 20° A 0°2005 Bes Involuted Not ankylosed
Male
To! ,, : : 4 0°37 p Involuted Ankylosed. Join visible
Female
re 5, . 2°83 . Involuted Ankylosed. No sign
Male of join. Note: Whale
very rotten
ig) ;, : 31° . 0:2(?) . Immature Not ankylosed
14 as . 1°98 : Involuted Ankylosed. Join visible
Female in anterior thoracics
ia, : : : : Lactating Ankylosed. Join visible
in thoracics. Note:
Foetal membranes
found.
Tae 5; . : : : : Immature Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
i as : : . . : Involuted Not ankylosed
iS . . : : Involution Ankylosed. Join visible
almost in 3rd and 4th thor-
complete acics
ee 5 : . c 1°87 2: Immature Not ankylosed. Thick
Female cartilage
oh <5 : S: : . Involuted Ankylosed. Join visible
in anterior vertebrae
r6) ;, . : : c . Involuted Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage layers
16 ,, : . 22° : Involuted Thoracics and first
lumbar not anky-
losed. Posterior lum-
bars ankylosed
no). 8 : : . Lactating Ankylosed. Joins
visible as far as first
lumbar
TOY, : d . Involuted 2 Ankylosed. Join visible
in anterior thoracics
16 ,, : : : Involuted Not ankylosed. Thin
cartilage in lumbars
Date
1929
16 Dec.
16
16
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
20
21
N
Nv
23
24
426
Whale number
2776
2791
2797
2798
2801
2806
2810
2811
2813
2814
2815
2819
2821
2826
2827
2828
Length (m.)
20°0
21°05
22'°2
22°35
Number of functional
corpora lutea
°
Number of old
14
32
43
16
corpora lutea
Diameter of uterus,
pregnant cornu (cm.)
pregnant or ex-
450
43°0
63°0
65:0
85:0
65:0
SSO)
84:0
67:0
30°0
goo
170
DISCOVERY REPORTS
Diameter of uterus,
immature or non-
pregnant cornu (cm.)
250
27°0
35°0
23°0
64:0
38-0
14'0
SES)
25°0
18:0
Length (m.) and sex
of foetus
Female
2°77
Male
1:06
Female
1°04
Male
o-51
Female
2°05
Female
1°47
Male
1°9
Female
mammary gland (cm.)
Thickness of
2°0
6:0
eo
4°5
5°5
6-0
7°0
State of mammary
Immature
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Immature
Vertebrae examined
Thoracic
Ist
Ist
State of epiphyses
Not ankylosed
Not ankylosed
Not ankylosed
Ankylosed. Join visible
in anterior thoracics
Thoracics not anky-
losed. Thin cartilage.
Lumbars — ankylosed.
Join visible
Ankylosed. Join visible
in thoracics
Ankylosed. Join visible
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Thoracics not anky-
losed. Thin cartilage.
Lumbars ankylosed.
Join visible
Ankylosed. No sign of
join
Note: Veryrotten. One of ©
later lumbar vertebrae
with unfused epiphyses
Not ankylosed
Ankylosed. No sign of
join
Ankylosed. No sign of
join
Ankylosed. No sign of
join
Ankylosed. No sign of
join
Not ankylosed. Note:
Whale very rotten
|
Date
24
24
24
24
24
24
24.
24.
24.
24
24
27
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
Whale number
2830
2831
2835
2836
2837
2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2845
2846
2851
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2865
2866
2868
Length (m.)
21°85
21°55
20°95
19°65
I9'I
21°7
22°1
22°65
21°7
19°85
17°55
22°35
21°95
21°5
22°5
DIIV
Number of functional
corpora lutea
°
4
Number of old
corpora lutea
i]
oo
N
nN
27
19
15
5:
(+2)
Diameter of uterus,
pregnant or ex-
pregnant cornu (cm.)
H
2)
fo)
66-0
45°0
310
13'0
20°0
TABLE OF RECORDS: FIN FEMALES
a g S & Vi cami
aan hs 9 i: = ertebrae examined
Heel g s
Se aces i
S88) ¢ Ee :
by Be Se 2 ey 3 2
aes ese lose % Bo Bole
ie i O < & :
See] g2 | 2§ ae SE se
Asa) as | Bs a eo = 4 S
23°0 — 7:0 Involuted Ist —
2nd
11th
12th
24°0 1-4 4°5 Involuted 3rd 7th Ist
Female 4th 8th
t2th 15th
13th
21-0 0:83 7:0 Involuted 4th 15th Ist
Male 5th
12th
13th
190 0°43 B52 Immature and 4th Ist
Male 3rd 5th
roth 15th
1ith
13'0 0-6 5°5 Involuted 7th 14th —
Male 8th 15th
13'0 — 250 Lactating and — —
3rd
oth
10th
18-0 0°39 3°5 Immature 5th Ist Ist
Female 6th 2nd
14th 3rd
15th 15th
8-0 = 2'0 Immature
8:0 = 2°5 Immature
24°0 0-61 6°5 Involuted 4th —_— —
Male 5th
roth
11th
28-0 21 30 Involuted 8th roth Ist
Female oth 11th
15th
24'0 —_ 5°5 Involuted 4th 15th 1st
5th
12th
13th
6-0 — 3°0 Immature
5:0 ~ I's Immature _— — —_
27:0 1-82 8-0 Involuted 4th — —
Female 5th
10th
rith
15'0 ° 12'0 Lactating 4th 7th Ist
slightly 5th 8th
oth 15th
roth
1ith
12th
5'0 = I'0 Immature =< = =
16:0 — 25°0 Lactating 3rd oth —
slightly 4th roth
1ith
12th
59:0 2°66 65 Involuted 2nd — _
Male 3rd
8th
gth
= —= 5°5 Involuted 3rd — —
4th
toth
11th
427
State of epiphyses
Ankylosed. No sign
of join
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Thoracics not anky-
losed. Lumbars and
caudal ankylosed.
Join visible
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Ankylosed. No sign
of join
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Ankylosed. No sign
of join
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Note: Whale rotten
Thoracics not anky-
losed. Thin cartilage
in 4 and 5. Very thin
in 12 and 13. Lum-
bars ankylosed
Ankylosed. Join visible
Thoracics not anky-
losed. Thin cartilage.
Anterior lumbars an-
kylosed. Join visible.
No sign of join in
posterior lumbars
Ankylosed. Join visible
in thoracics
Ankylosed. No sign
of join
Ankylosed. No sign
of join. Note: Whale
rotten
428 : DISCOVERY REPORTS
= > > :
s g 5 4 3 § E & 7 Vertebrae examined
Q '
- g(2./288|s82] & E :
- lee ciel asia ere | cee, 5 : .
Date E € 35 6 5 5 8 8 S 2 8 € a a . State of epiphyses
5 tke ae || See See) apes |) ee 5 3 a os
a bp a 2 Tei | Sse. sis bp 2 3 ov 5 v
a & SE| So) soo] 88 2 Bee a & s& ES E 5
= SH IAs (48 |Asaea)es se) 2 | Be at B a ts)
1929 ie ea. eee lhe ee lope et See el eae | ee | ee
29 Dec. 2870 18°45 ° ° — 5°0 — I‘0 Immature =
SO sp 2874. 23'0 2 14 27°0 24'0 O-41 7:0 Involuted and 15th Ist Thoracics not anky-
Male 3rd losed. Very thin car-
8th tilage. Lumbars an-
oth kylosed. Join visible
14th
15th
BOs 2875 177 ° fo) — 8-5 — o'75 Immature —
512) 65 2876 19°3 ° ° — 7:0 — 1°75 Immature = — — —
SOM; 2877 IQ'I ° ° — 7:0 — I°5 Immature —
3) sp 2878 21°7 I I 58-0 20'0 2°04 4:0 Involuted Ist 4th — Not ankylosed. Thick
Female 2nd 5th cartilage in thoracics
13th
14th
3° 2879 22°4 I 6 68-0 30°0 2°5 50 Involuted 2nd 14th — Thoracics not anky-
Male 3rd 15th losed. Thin cartilage.
12th Lumbars ankylosed.
13th Join visible
SR! oy 2883 21°4 I I 47°0 30°0 08 3°5 Involuted 2nd 15th Ist Not ankylosed. Thick
Male 3rd cartilage in thoracics
11th
12th
Ss» 2885 19°25 ° ° 4:0 Immature = — = =
1930
3 Jan 2887 18-3 ° ° — 8:0 = = — saat
3 » 2888 22°2 ° 8 20°0 29°0 — 19'0 Lactating 3rd Ist Ist Not ankylosed. Thick
4th 2nd cartilage in thoracics
roth gth
11th roth
15th
3 » 2889 17'0 ° ° _ 4:0 — I'0 Immature 15th Ist — Not ankylosed
4 » 2890 16°7 ° ° — 6:0 — =. — — — — —
O x 2807 20°7 I 6 35'0 19'0 0°69 5°5 Involuted 3rd 14th — Not ankylosed
Male 4th 15th
roth
11th
Oey 2900 23°16 ° 20 19'0 19'0 — 9°5 Involuted 2nd — — Ankylosed. Join visible
3rd in thoracics |
roth |
11th
6 2903 19°85 I ° 50°0 27'0 I'°5 2:0 Immature Ist 15th Ist Not ankylosed |
Male 2nd |
O 2907 21°3 ° “9 17'0 17°0 —_— 8-5 Involution 2nd 14th —- Not ankylosed. Thin |
just com- 3rd 15th cartilage
plete 13th
14th
6 ,, 2909 21°96 I 3 40°0 30°0 2°08 30 Involuted and 7th Ist Not ankylosed. Thin —
Female 3rd 8th cartilage in lumbars
13th 15th
14th
15th ;
Ch sp 2910 22°5 I 27 87:0 36:0 3°07 5'5 Involuted 2nd = = Ankylosed. Join just
Male 3rd visible in anterior
11th vertebrae
12th
6 ,, 2911 19°25 ° ° 7:0 8-0 —_— 2°5 Immature 4th 3rd — Not ankylosed. Thick
5th 4th cartilage
De 2912 21°85 I 13 70:0 40°0 2°83 5:0 Involuted grd 11th — Thoracics not anky- _
Male 4th 12th losed. Very thin car-
8th tilage. Lumbars an- |
oth kylosed. Join visible )
Involuted Ankylosed. Join visible
TABLE OF RECORDS: FIN FEMALES 429
3 > > :
§ a Gl eae 3 § Ss Vertebrae examined
uw 3 ao} g y = 8 Ss i as) g
3 esl on 3% fe | a = Ge 5 €
=> o o SO! |e oO aN © oD S i
Date g g Sissi || elas) © ome) 2 z 5 g IS g State of epiphyses
e eee otet les) anlecre sulecesra |) a4 2 & eS g 4 ms
4 t “e 5 2 5 FI Py & 4 3 & SO a4 & ° s ia} «
e co ER) Ea | 8S) FE & 22 2g Ore 8 gE E
oO 35.4 Bu = UY sav oO aa Sa cc 3 Co]
= H 48/428 /8aac Asal as |] bs A "eo B 4 Ss)
1930 a | ee ey iia Gree |e
| 7 Jan. 2917 21'1 I o-2 3°5 Involuted 14th Ist Ist Not ankylosed. Thick
| Male 15th and cartilage
| 15th
a2 2923 21-4 I 1°64 20 Immature 3rd 15th Ist Not ankylosed
| Male 4th
i 12th
13th
3); 2926 21°4 I 1°27 6°5 Involuted 2nd 14th — Ankylosed. No sign
Female 3rd 15th of join
| 12th
: 13th
‘) 2927 22°2 I 3:0 6:0 Involuted 3rd 14th — Thoracics not anky-
' Female 4th 15th losed. Thin cartilage.
12th Lumbars fused. Join
| 13th visible
Sy 2930 20°0 I 1°95 5:0 Involuted 3rd 14th = Not ankylosed. Thick
Female 4th 15th cartilage
roth
11th
II ,, 2948 20°6 I 1°23 3'0 Immature 4th 11th Ist Not ankylosed. Thick
Male 5th 12th cartilage
12th 15th
13th
I2 ,, 2951 22:0 I 1°3 3°5 Involuted 5th Ist Ist Not ankylosed. Thick
Female 6th 15th cartilage
15th
12 5, 2954 21°5 ° _ 5:0 Involuted 3rd -— —_ Ankylosed. No sign
4th of join
11th
12th
12, 2956 20°47 ° — 7:0 Involuted 2nd 15th Ist Not ankylosed. Thick
grd cartilage
12th
13th
12, 2958 21°05 I 0:22 4:0 Involuted 4th 1st rst | Not ankylosed. Thin
Male 5th 2nd cartilage in lumbars
3rd and caudal
4th
15th
12) yy 2959 18-0 ° — 2°5 Immature =
12 yy 2961 19°3 ° — res Immature = = = =
13 5, 2966 19°8 ° — 3:0 Immature =
135 2967 20°5 I 2°83 45 Involuted 2nd 15th Ist Not ankylosed. Thick
Female 3rd cartilage in thoracics
14th
15th
1355 2970 18-2 ° — 2:0 Immature =
14 5, 2979 21°9 ° = 23°5 Lactating 3rd 15th Ist Not ankylosed. Thick
4th cartilage
13th
14th
set 3 2980 22°45 I I'4 25°0 Lactating 3rd —- — Ankylosed. Join visible
Male 4th
13th
14th
Si 5) 20984 I4'1 ° — 275 Immature =
5» 2990 22°1 I 2°03 6°5 Involuted 3rd 15th 1st Thoracics not anky-
Male 4th losed. Thin cartilage.
13th Lumbars ankylosed.
14th No sign of join
I5 5 2991 2270 ° — 75 Involuted 2nd — -- Ankylosed. No sign
3rd of join
11th
12th
430 DISCOVERY REPORTS
3 gt FO Mel ees “ ¢ c
& g £| g 4 g % SS > Vertebrae examined
3 Blige || et ae} a} g
3 Be Seale aller ens 8 :
= ws 3 = > © “tb i
Date E g % 5 % E : s 8 & 3 8 aye 2 mn 2 State of epiphyses
: a eee yeaa |e fe se | ae % coh ey ||
s me [eea/€a|SSm|8eh| BS | Bs 2F S E g
ate § 5h) se | S00] 880 aa. 6 a § ze) 5 a
s a a Sz 6s) Area Geseae| ao |) ene A "eb B 4 ) |
1930
15 Jan. 2992 23°2 I 17 87:0 28-0 30 7:0 Involuted Ist = = Ankylosed. No sign
Male and of join
11th j
12th
WP sp 2998 20'6 I ° 710 30°0 1°73 30 Immature 3rd 14th = Not ankylosed. Thick
Female 4th 15th cartilage
11th ;
t2th
19 5, 2999 20°2 I ° 38°5 19°5 0-72 2°5 Immature 3rd 15th Ist Not ankylosed. Thick
Female 4th cartilage
IQ 5, 3000 17°75 ° ° — 4:0 — I°0 Immature —
20 5, 3001 19°6 ° ° = 9°55 = 20 Immature —
Bik Sy 3007 21'7 ° II 15"0 28-0 a+ 7:0 Involuted 4th 15th Ist Thoracics not anky- |
5th losed. Thin cartilage. —
13th Lumbars ankylosed. —
14th Join visible |
AD. ‘ep 3012 17°35 ro) fo) — 45 — — _ =
22s 3014 18°35 ° ° = 570 — bare) Immature —
2 2tee 3016 21°67 ° II 9°5 Involution 4th 15th Ist Not ankylosed. Thick
just com- 5th cartilage in anterior
plete 13th thoracics
14th
22); 3021 22'0 I 2 18:0 17:0 O21 4:0 ? Immature Ist Ist ist Not ankylosed. Thick
Male and 15th cartilage
14th
15th
22a. 3022 18°85 ° ° — 9:0 — 15 Immature =
23» 3023 16°6 ° ° — 5:0 — I'5 Immature _— — — —
23s 3024 16°5 ° ° —_ 4°5 = 20 Immature =
23; 3025 20°8 ° I — 150 — 17°0 Lactating 2nd 15th Ist Not ankylosed. Thick
3rd cartilage
2s 3029 18°55 ° ° — 50 — axe) Immature =
2A 3030 18:25 fo) ° —_ 6:0 == — — —_—
24 55 3034 21°55 I 6 550 32°0 1°74. 7:0 Involuted 2nd 15th Ist Not ankylosed. Thin
Male 3rd cartilage
oth
roth
24 55 3036 20°8 ° 2 12:0 g:0 — 20 Immature 3rd 15th Ist Not ankylosed. Thick
4th cartilage
12th
13th
25 3039 “4 ° ° = 6:0 = 2'0 Immature =
205, 3045 1°75 I 2 410 17:0 0:97 3:0 Immature _- 14th = Not ankylosed. Thick
Female 15th cartilage
28 ,, 3049 22°5 I 28 58:0 35°0 I°I4 24:0 Lactating 3rd == — Ankylosed. No sign
Female 4th of join
oth
roth
14th
15th
28 ,, 3050 21°75 I 28 67:0 59°0 1'26 20:0 Lactating 3rd oth — Ankylosed. Join visible
Female 4th roth in thoracics
oth
toth
13th
14th
ZSi 55 3053 18-65 ° ° — 5:0 —_ I°5 Immature ai
28 ,, 3054 21°4 I 3 79:0 27°0 2°88 570 Involuted oth 14th — Not ankylosed. Thick
x Male roth 15th cartilage
28 2) 3056 16:0 ° ° — 5:0 — 20 Immature — —_ = —
28 ” 3°57 17°75 ° ° = = = 1°5 Immature =
28 ,, 3058 211 ° ° 2°5 Immature —
29 55 3063 20°9 I 2 79° 340 2°03 5:0 Involuted 3rd Ist 1st Not ankylosed. Thick
Female 4th and cartilage
15th
29
30
3°
30
31
31
31
31
31
Date
Whale number
3°74
3°75
3°79
3082
3085
3089
3090
3092
3993
3094
3099
3100
3102
3104
3105
3106
3107
3110
3119
3121
3122
Length (m.)
19°5
21'6
21°3
22°2
Number of functional
corpora lutea
ooo
Number of old
corpora lutea
DH
18
TABLE
fa | ay vi
oo! 29
55 2/562 §
ta | ol ae
oO i3} fal
3 Py i 3 SES Ca
toaa]/seq| 32
edd aad Ep 2
AverenitGesea, ys
= 9:0 ——
13'0 140 —_—
47°90 26:0 1°07
Female
8-0 Ilo —_—
750 39°0 3:2
Male
= OD =
= 9:0 ===
—_ ie 2-5
Male
130 140 —_
21'0 23'0 _
aes ae 18
Male
— a 3°4
Female
= 5°5 =
= 45 =
76:0 53°0 2°64
Female
—— 5-0 =
96-0 62:0 3°8
Male
—_ 8-0 =
76:0 —_ 1°95
Male
85:0 45°0 2°88
Female
25°0 20:0 —
20°0 20'0 —
19'0 20'0 —
mammary gland (cm.)
Thickness of
2°5
Ilo
17°0
19'0
State of mammary
Immature
Lactating
Immature
Immature
Involuted
Immature
Immature
Involuted
Immature
Immature
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Involuted
Immature
Immature
Immature
Immature
Immature
Involuted
Immature
Involuted
Involuted
Involution
just com-
plete
Lactating
Lactating
OF RECORDS: FIN FEMALES
Vertebrae examined
431
State of epiphyses
c 4
2 | 2 | 3
rs) = 5
G 2 3S
ca 4 6)
2nd 13th —-
3rd 14th
3rd 15th Ist
4th
11th
12th
Ist 15th Ist
2nd
and 13th —
3rd 14th
8th
oth
2nd 14th _
3rd 15th
14th
15th
2nd Ist 1st
3rd and and
15th 3rd
3rd roth Ist
4th 11th
12th 15th
13th
4th Ist Ist
5th and
15th
and 14th ~~
3rd 15th
7th
8th
2nd 1st —_
3rd 13th
15th 14th
7th 15th Ist
4th = Ist
5th and
12th
13th
and 15th Ist
3rd
roth
11th
4th 7th —
5th 8th
14th
15th
3rd 8th —_—
4th gth
roth
11th
3rd 15th Ist
4th
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Thoracics not anky-
losed. Thin cartilage.
Lumbars ankylosed.
Join visible
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage. Note:
Whale rotten
Thoracics not anky-
losed. Thin cartilage.
Lumbars ankylosed.
Join visible
Not ankylosed. Car-
tilage in thoracics
and anterior lumbars
thick
Not ankylosed. Car-
tilage thick in thor-
acics, thin in lum-
bars. Note: Whale
rotten
Ankylosed. Join visible
in thoracics. Note:
Whale rotten
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage in thoracics,
thin in lumbars
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Ankylosed. Join visible
in thoracics
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage in thoracics
Date
19 yy
19 »
19 5,
20° 5;
27s
28 5,
Zins
28) 55
4 Mar.
432
Whale number
3150
3151
3154
3156
3166
3173
3175
3176
3178
3181
3184
3186
3188
Length (m.)
21:28
21°2
21°42
23°64
21°66
23°0
21°5
Number of functional
corpora lutea
oooo
oo
Number of old
corpora lutea
12
DISCOVERY REPORTS
= = acy
aa eee ¥ ¢
vo
§/2.8) 2 s
2 Zz J
Oo 2) | 2s I re
eens a ae su Ge
ca) Bi || Ss it) om © Ob
re cas Rone a a
=
te || See || ye aa
osc a oes 32 €
re} fe! & sc bp @ ~
ERR| ESS! Bs | SE
See|see) 82 | #8
a) 733, (53, || [S}a2] (ey =) Big
saxo)
= 6:0 I'o
= 5-0 a. Is
= 5-0 = zs
66:0 47° 30 50
Male
= 60 =5 =
—- 8-0 = 20
eS 6°5 = BO
26:0 26°0 = 20°0
17'0
a= — — 2'0
26-0
= — — 6°5
—_— 30 = I'0
18:0 20°0 = 6-0
= 8-0 — 3:0
38:0 20°0 0°56 5:0
Male
63:0 57:0 2°42 20°0
Male
70:0 36:0 27 19'0
Female
II'o 12:0 — 17'0
90
16:0 17:0 — 26:0
State of mammary
gland
Immature
Immature
Immature
Involuted
Immature
Immature
Lactating
Lactating
Immature
Lactating
Involuted
Immature
Involuted
Immature
Involuted
Lactating
slightly
Lactating
Lactating
Lactation
just over
Lactating
Vertebrae examined
4 &
io} wo =
os as) a
SN ey ela
H 4 1S)
and 13th ——
3rd 14th
8th
gth
3rd —_ —
4th
roth
rith
3rd 4th Ist
4th 5th
12th 15th
13th
3rd 1st Ist
4th and
15th
and 3rd Ist
3rd 4th
15th
2nd 15th Ist
3rd
13th
14th
and 6th Ist
3rd 7th
15th
3rd 14th _—
4th 15th
3rd 6th Ist
4th 7th 4th
8th 5th
oth
15th
and Ist —
3rd 13th
15th 14th
3rd 14th =
4th 15th
5th
8th
oth
13th
14th
and 15th Ist
3rd
4th
and — _—
3rd
12th
13th
and 15th Ist
3rd
12th
13th
State of epiphyses
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Ankylosed. Join visible
Ankylosed. Join visible
in thoracics
Not ankylosed, Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Anterior thoracics not
ankylosed. Very thin
cartilage. 15th thor-
acic ankylosed, join
visible. Posterior epi-
physes ankylosed
Posterior thoracics not
ankylosed. Very thin
cartilage. Anterior
thoracics apparent-
ly ankylosed. Join
visible but epiphysis
did not crack away
from centrum
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Ankylosed. Join visible
in anterior thoracics.
Note: Whale very
rotten
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Date
18
18
18
18
18
19
Whale number
3190
3191
3195
3196
3199
3229
3234
3238
Length (m.)
21°45
22°3
23'0
14°6
21-4
20°4
22°35
23°3
N
N
w
Number of functional
corpora lutea
fe}
Number of old
corpora lutea
wn
20
12
TABLE OF RECORDS: FIN FEMALES
Diameter of uterus,
pregnant or ex-
pregnant cornu (cm.)
©
on
°
12'5
80:0
go-o
140
ee Fe ¢
s 1 3 a a}
ge5| = :
34¢ 3S &
ne 5735 — i)
og z ek
o82e| “2 | ee
aed ss Ss
Eee es) leone
ao Ge | ae
ABS! As | BE
50°0 3°88 6:0
Male
12:0 = 10:0
6-0 —_ I°5
16:0 = 18:0
35°0 = 15°0
I == I's
16-0 — 18:0
12:0 — 20°0
535 = T'5
63:0 4:78 8:0
Male
45 = °5
14'0 = 28-0
60-0 3°2 6:0
Female
120 — 200
4:0 = 19
130 —~ 19'0
50:0 3°2 455
Male
60:0 2°15 6:0
Male
15°0 — 26'0
120 —_— 23'0
State of mammary
gland
Involuted
Lactation
nearly
over
Immature
Lactating
Lactating
Immature
Lactating
Lactating
Immature
Involuted
Immature
Lactating
Involuted
Lactating
Immature
Lactating
Involuted
Involuted
Lactating
Lactating
Vertebrae examined
2 4
2 | 2 |
E B | 8
ia 4 ie)
3rd 5th Ist
4th 6th
15th
grd 15th Ist
4th
11th
12th
and 4th Ist
3rd 5th
15th
3rd 15th Ist
4th
12th
13th
and Ist _—
3rd 14th
15th 15th
and Ist —
3rd 2nd
14th
15th
3rd 12th —
4th 13th
12th
13th
2nd 7th _
3rd 8th
10th
11th
sth 13th —
6th 14th
12th
13th
Ist 14th _—
and 15th
13th
14th
grd 3rd Ist
4th 4th
15th
and and Ist
3rd 3rd
11th 15th
12th
3rd 15th Ist
4th
roth
11th
2nd 1st —
3rd 2nd
14th
15th
Ist 15th Ist
and
12th
433
State of epiphyses
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Thoracics and an-
terior lumbars not
ankylosed. Thin car-
tilage
Ankylosed. Join visible
in thoracics
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Not ankylosed
Ankylosed. Join visible
in thoracics
Ankylosed. Join visible
in thoracics
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage in thoracics,
thin in lumbars
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage in thoracics
and anterior lum-
bars, thin in pos-
terior lumbars
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
Ankylosed. Join visible
in anterior thoracics
Thoracics and an-
terior lumbars not
ankylosed. Posterior
lumbars ankylosed.
Join visible
Not ankylosed. Thick
cartilage
434 DISCOVERY REPORTS
a > > : :
5 @ 8 9 ag g g p Vertebrae examined
te uy ~S Lda
u 2 ks) Sua|28sa| % 2) E
S) Bo || ela rei ay) (et | Sh ish a cei FS
oo aie Se OU reece Sou 5 3) 5 5 ary ° tp a SJ fepiok
Date g £ Sibi Gop (ee Cae e care £ “ 2 bs g tate of epiphyses
, sg |S2/82/888|/ 238! s2 | es os 5 : =
2 | & le8\e2|e66|i5| #2 | 22] es See rle lee
a § SE] sae] 800)] 88 o gia ‘a ¢ a & cf 3 z
= ee Zacdece WIA ecco|/Gesnea|) sels | ems De B A 6)
1930
22 Mar. 3243 20°95 I 7 80-0 67:0 4°97 8-0 Involuted 2nd 15th Ist Not ankylosed. Thick
Male 3rd cartilage in thoracics,
14th thin in lumbars
15th
25am 3246 17°I ° ° b azo) Immature =
AF on 3250 21°98 ° 21 25°0 26°0 — 26:0 Lactating 4th 15th st Ankylosed. Join visible
5th in thoracics
11th
12th
Aileen, 3251 21°75 I 7 100°0 67-0 3°62 6:0 Involuted 4th 15th Ist Not ankylosed. Thin
Male 5th cartilage
13th
14th
ass 3253 18-1 ° ° — 50 — 2:0 Immature = = = —
3 Apr. 3263 19°65 ° ° — 6:0 = 30 Immature =
oismsi mi tutinas diiw aiey
eeaverd KOTGAR TH)
PLATE Y,
Photographs of sections showing the ankylosis of epiphysis with centrum in female
Fin whales. (Centrum on right; epiphysis on left.) (x17 approx.)
Fig. 1. 2nd thoracic vertebra of whale No. 3178.
Fig. 2. 15th - on 5 No. 3178.
Fig. 3. 13th lumbar 3 No. 3178.
Fig. 4. 2nd thoracic 55 3 No. 3196.
Fig. 5. 4th lumbar 7 . No. 3196.
Fig. 6. 15th lumbar . . No. 3196.
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. II PIL ANIEIS, Wf
Fig. 3 Fig. 6
THE AGE OF FIN WHALES AT PHYSICAL MATURITY
DISCOVERY
REDON S
Vol. Il, pp. 435-482, plates VI and VII, text-figs. 1-12
Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Government of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands
ON THE ANATOMY OF A MARINE
OSTRACOD, CYPRIDINA (DOLORIA)
LEVIS SKOGSBERG
by
H. Graham Cannon, Sc.D.
Sat Be ERE Oe ii?
ST asd *
6 iat 26 19st
rons e877 :
CAMBRIDGE
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
LOS h
Price seven shillings and sixpence net
a
eye RD
MAT %
at
7
a site
vant
[Discovery Reports. Vol. II, pp. 435-482, Plates VI and VII, text-figs. 1-12, February, 1931.]
ONG fae VNALONY OF A MARINE
OSC OD iG Vek DINA (DOLORTA)
LEVIS SKOGSBERG
By
H. GRAHAM CANNON, Sc.D.
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
FEEDING MECHANISM
SKELETON AND Bopy WALL
Endoskeleton and Sclerites
Endosternite
Dorsal Body Wall .
BLoop SysTEM
Heart and Pericardium
Blood Vessels
Circulatory Process
Gut
NERVOUS SYSTEM
External Anatomy
Basal Ganglion System
Sympathetic System
Internal Structure
Giant Fibre System
SEGMENTAL ExCRETORY ORGANS
SUMMARY
LITERATURE CITED
Pirates VI anv VII
. page 437
following page
438
472
472
474
476
479
480
482
ON THE ANATOMY OF A MARINE
OSTRACOD, CYPRIDINA (DOLORIA)
PEE ek OGshERe
By H. Graham Cannon, sc.D.
Professor of Zoology in the University of Sheffield
(Plates VI and VII, text-figs. 1-12)
INGRODUCTLION
le 1926, I received from Dr Kemp a tube containing about thirty specimens of an
Ostracod, most of which were carrying embryos. I identified them as a Cypridinid
described by Skogsberg (1920, p. 225) from South Georgia and placed by him in a
sub-genus Doloria as Cypridina (Doloria) levis. I shall refer to them as Doloria.
They had been specially fixed for me in alcoholic Bouin (Dubosq-Brasil). I attempted
to section them, and at first failed. The ribbon of sections refused to stick on the slide.
In this way all except eight specimens were destroyed. These, as a last resort, I placed
in very strong acid alcohol—about 1 part of conc. HCI to 5 of 70 per cent aleohol—for
three days. They then sectioned perfectly, and on staining them in Mallory’s triple
stain I found them to be extraordinarily well fixed. The state of fixation can be seen
from Plate VII. I have since treated British marine Ostracods to the same technique
but the results have been very poor.
Since the internal anatomy of Cypridinids and, in fact, of Ostracods generally is very
incompletely known, I decided to work out the main systems of organs, and the fol-
lowing paper is the result of these investigations.
The systems described are enumerated on the opposite page. I have not described
the genital system, as my material was incomplete for this purpose. The labral glands
I omitted, as these have already been described many times in detail. The observa-
tions are, of necessity, mainly descriptive and will form a basis for comparative work
when specimens of Ostracods from other groups are obtained sufficiently well fixed
for anatomical work.
I had a further supply of material which, however, had been fixed in alcohol. While
sections of these specimens were of no use for studying the details of anatomy, they
were useful for skeletal preparations and for confirming observations on my well-fixed
material, especially details of musculature.
The exoskeleton and part of the endoskeleton were studied from preparations treated
with potash. I used the method which I have previously described (1927, p. 355) in
order to obtain sagittal or frontal halves or slices of specimens. These I treated with
potash and mounted in glycerine jelly.
438 DISCOVERY REPORTS
In following out the musculature I found the use of polarized light to be of great
assistance. (For details see p. 447.)
The figures in Plate VII are of colour photomicrographs taken by the Lumiere
process. Their colouring is fairly accurate, but not as brilliant as in the original pre-
parations.
FEEDING MECHANISM
The feeding mechanism of Doloria may be deduced from a comparison of its body
shape and limb arrangement with those of Pionocypris vidua, whose feeding habits I
have described from direct observation (1926 a).
The form of the body is shown in Fig. 2 and Plate VI. It shows a marked difference
from P. vidua. In the latter, the mouth is brought to the level of the edges of the valves
by the large oral mass consisting of the labrum and hypostome (Fig. 1). In Doloria
the mouth is well inside the valves. The labrum is large but the hypostome is a flat,
quadrangular plate, forming the hinder margin of the mouth.
The shell cavity, as in all Ostracods, is divided effectively into two chambers by the
attachment of the body to the valves. This runs dorso-anteriorly from the attachments
of the adductor muscle (Fig. 2), as a narrow isthmus, and spreads out fore and aft in
the region of the heart. The space in the dorsal part of the anterior chamber is almost
filled, laterally by the paired eyes, the antennules and the enormous basal joints of the
antennae, and medially by the nauplius eye and frontal organ. Below these, the labrum
projects downwards in the middle line. Close against its sides, overlapped by the
antennae above and projecting forwards in the same relative position as the mandibular
palps of P. vidua, are the mandibles (Plate VI). ‘The mandibular exopodite forms a
small claw on the “knee” and there is no vibratory plate. The maxillules project
antero-ventrally at the level of the mouth, their tips working together in the middle
line just below the latter. Close behind and parallel with the maxillules are the maxillae
with their vibratory plates guarding the entrance from anterior to posterior chamber.
The first trunk limbs form two setose triangular plates, parallel and lying close to the
median plane between the maxillae. The second trunk limbs, the “bottle brush”
limbs, project dorsally into the posterior chamber.
The posterior chamber serves as a brood pouch. In the ripe female it is almost filled
by the posterior part of the body. The latter ends in a powerful caudal furca which
may project from the shell (Plate VI), or may be flexed up between the first trunk
limbs, thus reaching forwards to the level of the mouth.
The similarity between the arrangements of the body in Doloria and in Pionocypris
and the similar structures, not necessarily homologous, which occupy analogous posi-
tions in the two chambers of the shell, I consider suggest very strongly that the principle
of the feeding mechanism is the same in the two forms.
The vibratory plate of the maxilla, in its oscillation, must paddle water out of the
posterior opening of the shell, and, since this plate spans completely the junction of
the two chambers (Plate VI), the water must be sucked in at the anterior end of the
FEEDING MECHANISM 439
shell. Food particles carried on this stream will be abstracted by the grasping action
of the mandibles. The latter are bent double at the level of the exopodite so that the
tips reach back to the mouth. Doloria is probably capable of foraging on the bottom
as does the common British Cypridinid Cylindroleberis oblonga. In this case, since the
mandibles can be projected beyond the edges of the valves, food would be kicked up
by their tips in the same manner as function the antennae of P. vidua. Such particles
would be sucked into the shell cavity by the inhalent stream.
Food is thus gathered or sucked into the shell just underneath the labrum. The
immense labral glands open in this region. ‘Their secretion is, of course, the origin of
the luminescence of certain Cypridinids. However, it also undoubtedly functions as a
food-entangling substance as in the case of P. vidua, and enables the mandibles to pass
the entangled mass backwards on to the maxillules. The latter are bent double just
as are the mandibles but, in this case, the “knee”, which occurs between basipodite
and coxopodite, points outwards so that the tips of the limbs can be rotated inwards
and upwards towards the mouth. These tips are formed by the massive endopodites,
and are situated some distance below the actual mouth. In P. vidua the maxillules
work together in the middle line immediately at the mouth entrance and, with the help
of the food rakes arming the back of the mouth, pass the food directly on to the mandibles
which are on the same level. In Doloria, the food mass has to be lifted up by the tips
of the maxillules and deposited on the actual biting parts at the mouth entrance. The
latter are formed by the three endites of the maxillule and the endites and part of the
exopodite of the maxilla, which work in series with one another. All are armed with
complex powerful spines which have been described in great detail by Skogsberg
(1920, p. 225). The armature of the first endite of the maxillule is in a line posteriorly
with that of the second endite of the maxilla, the second with that of the third and
the third with the main tooth of the exopodite of the maxilla.
The food entering the shell is thus entangled in the labral gland secretion, passed
backwards by the mandibles on to the endopodite of the maxillule, and lifted up on
to the complex biting spines on the more proximal parts of the maxillules and maxillae,
where it is triturated.
While this is happening the food mass must be continually subjected to the antero-
posterior current passing through the shell. ‘This is counteracted by the first trunk
limbs. The setae of the endites of these limbs extend forwards so as to lie actually
between the biting setae of the maxillae. The musculature suggests that the limbs move
backwards and forwards, thus continually pushing the food mass on to the biting parts.
Even if the limbs did not move they would form an effective barrier to food particles.
Similarly the powerful setae on the second exopodite joint of the maxilla project
obliquely forwards, and must serve to push any particle which happens to reach them
on to the tips of the maxillules and so to the biting parts.
The inward movement of the grinding mouth-parts has a slight upward component
which is enhanced by the tendency of the spines to slope upwards, and this results in
the food mass, during trituration, passing upwards towards the mouth.
DOLORIA
PIONOCYPRIS
Fig. 1. Side view of Doloria levis after removal of left valve. Diagram of the parts shown in Plate VI.
An outline drawing of the corresponding figure of Pionocypris vidua (Cannon, 1926 a, Plate 11) is given
below for comparison. a. 1, antennule; a. 2, antenna; /ab. labrum; m. mouth; mdb. mandible; mdb.plp.
mandibular palp; mx. 1, maxillule; mx. 2, maxilla; mx. 1, vib.pl. vibratory plate of maxillule; mx. 2, vib.pl.
vibratory plate of maxilla; ¢.. 1, first trunk limb; t./. 2, second trunk limb.
FEEDING MECHANISM 441
The first endite of the maxilla together with the more dorsal spines of the first endite
of the maxillule and the gnathobasic process of the mandible point directly upwards
into the mouth.
A summary of the above comparison between the feeding mechanisms of P. vidua
and D. levis is shown in the following table (see Fig. 1):
P. vidua D. levis
Food stream through shell pro- Vibratory plate of maxillule Vibratory plate of maxilla
duced by
Food collected by Mandibular palps Mandibles
Food entangled by Labral gland secretion Labral gland secretion
Food mass passed by mandible Maxillule Endopodite of maxillule
on to
Food mass passed from maxillule Gnathobasic coxopodites of man- Three endites of maxillules, two
on to biting mouth-parts which dibles endites of maxilla and part of
are exopodite of maxilla
Food prevented from escaping First trunk limbs First trunk limbs
and pushed back on to mouth-
parts by
During bottom feeding food may Antennae Mandibles
be scraped up by
SKELETON AND BODY WALL
The body wall of Doloria, apart from the valves and limbs, is, as in all Ostracods,
excessively thin. The appendicular system attains its stability through two separate
skeletal organizations—a series of narrow articulating sclerites which radiate from the
attachment of the adductor muscle to the valves, and a rigid system comprising the
upper lip and powerful endoskeletal structures connecting the latter to the adductor
muscle. The adductor muscle is thus the centre of stability for the whole body.
In considering the mechanics of the body, it may be divided into two portions—a
soft flexible dome covering the back between heart and caudal furca (Plate VI), and
the ventral half to which the limbs and furca are attached (Fig. 2). The latter can again
be divided into two parts—the anterior which supports the eyes and limbs, and the
posterior caudal furca.
ENDOSKELETON AND SCLERITES
The anterior limb-bearing portion centres round the massive upper lip. The labrum
is helmet-shaped, and is encircled completely about its equator by a slightly thickened
chitinous ring. Postero-laterally this thickening becomes more massive and extends
around the sides and back of the mouth. It thus forms the anterior margin of the hypo-
stome, which consists of an oblong plate with the longer axis lying transversely. From
its anterior corners there project inwards a pair of massive tubular endoskeletal struc-
tures which extend dorsally and, at their upper ends, turn sharply at right angles towards
the middle line but do not meet (Figs. 2, 3). Their upper portions are embedded in the
tendon of the adductor muscle (Figs. 4, 5) which forms the hinder portion of a com-
plicated endosternite. They have been termed by Miiller (1894, p. 19) and others the
“Sternalaste 1”. I am naming them the “anterior hypostomal apodemes”’.
mM. PC.C.
*
Wi
i\'\\ “ANTERIOR
NY (PERICARDIUM
\ oe
\
m.nN.€.
a.m.add.
Fig. 2. Side view of Doloria levis, the left valve, the limbs and the left eye having been removed. The
attachment of the limbs to the body and the body to the shell are indicated approximately. They are
shaded by a dark, and the sclerite system by a light stippling. ‘The musculature associated with the
pericardium and dorsal body wall is also figured. a.b.v. attachment of body to valves; a.h.a. anterior
hypostomal apodeme; a.l.a. antenno-labral apodeme; a.m.add. attachment of adductor muscle; f.2. frontal
knob; fr.a. frontal apodeme; fr.o. frontal organ; h.v. hepatic valve; m.l.s.pe. lateral sub-pericardial
muscle; m.n.e. nauplius eye muscle; m.pc.c. pericardial compressor; p./..s. posterior hypostomal strut;
p-pe. posterior pericardium.
Fig. 3. Semi-diagrammatic view of the ventral skin of Doloria levis, seen irom the inside, and showing the
attachments of the limbs (black) and the endoskeletal structures (white). @./.a. anterior hypostomal
apodeme; a.J.a. antenno-labral apodeme; ant.1. antennule; ant. 2, antenna; fra. frontal apodeme; Jab.
labrum; mdb. mandible; mx. 1, maxillule; mx. 2, maxilla; p.t.s. posterior hypostomal strut; ¢./. 1, first
trunk limb; ¢./. 2, second trunk limb. (x 134 approx.)
DIIvi
444 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Around the upper limit of the labrum, at the level of the small rigid knob, the “ frontal
knob” (Figs. 2, 4), between the attachment of the antennules, there is another less-
marked chitinous loop which extends backwards to the inner point of attachment of
the antennae, and is then produced into the body on either side as a powerful endo-
skeletal tube. These slope back for a short distance, and each then divides into a small,
outer branch and a larger, flat, inner branch (Figs. 2, 3, 5), which lies more or less
in a frontal plane and slopes backwards to become embedded in the endosternite just
anterior to the anterior hypostomal apodeme. They have been termed the ‘‘ Oberlip-
penaste”’ (Miiller, 1894, p. 19). Since they are inward extensions of the fold of cuticle
which forms the junction of the median face of the antennae with the labrum, I am
calling them the “antenno-labral apodemes”’.
The upper labral loop and the equatorial loop are joined by a thickening down the
sides of the labrum, completing a triangle with the endoskeletal apodemes. The whole
of the labrum is thus supported by a rigid scaffolding from the adductor muscle.
A third paired endoskeletal structure exists, which Miiller has termed the “ Sternalaste
2’ (1894, p. 19). It is not, however, of the same nature as his “‘Sternalaste 1”? which
are true apodemes. It consists of a chitinous strut, which spans the body cavity from
the posterior corner of the hypostome to the posterior attachment of the maxillule to
the body (Fig. 2). It has presumably been formed by the nipping off of the edge of an
infolding between maxillule and maxilla in a manner comparable to the formation of
the intersegmental bars, which become transverse tendons in Hemimysis (Manton,
1928, p. 414). It should thus be distinguished from an apodeme, the development of
which (Manton, 1928, p. 412) suggests that they arise by the gradual sinking into the
body of the surface of attachment of a muscle or group of muscles. Hence I have called
it the “posterior hypostomal strut’’. At its upper end it sends forward a small pro-
longation which is a true apodeme, serving for the attachment of a muscle which runs
to the anterior hypostomal apodeme, and then continues up the side of the body as
a cuticular thickening.
In addition to these paired skeletal structures, there is an excessively thin median
apodeme—the frontal apodeme—arising from the ectoderm just above the frontal knob
(Figs. 2, 3, 4). It is so delicate that it cannot be seen in preparations of the ventral
skeleton. In sagittal sections, however, it can be seen as a triangular fold of cuticle
in the median plane which narrows down to a thin hollow strand and passes through
a small aperture in the hinder margin of the brain. It then curves upwards and forwards,
and spreads out as a triangular plate, to which is attached a thin tendinous sheet, the
aortic tendon (Figs. 4, 5).
The frontal apodeme is a very important structure in relation to the blood system,
and will be referred to later. The paired elements, together with the armoured upper
lip, function mainly as limb supports. They support certain limbs directly. Thus the
mandible, at the lowest point of its attachment, is joined firmly to the equatorial
thickening around the labrum just in front of the mouth. The rest of the attachment
is thin, the limb merging into the lateral body wall. The articulation of the maxillule
SKELETON AND BODY WALL 445
is bounded ventrally by the thick lateral edge of the hypostome, and posteriorly by the
cuticular thickening which runs up between the maxillule and maxilla to the upper
end of the posterior hypostomal strut.
The mandibles and maxillules are thus firmly connected to the adductor muscle by
the endoskeletal apodemes and labrum. The remaining limbs, with the possible excep-
tion of the first trunk limbs, are connected with the adductor system through a series
of articulating sclerites which, until a more detailed and comparative account of the
skeleton can be given, I am denoting by letters.
A thin sclerite labelled a (Fig. 2) runs antero-dorsally from the upper margin of the
attachment of the adductor muscle. It articulates with a shorter sclerite 6, which, in
its turn, articulates with sclerite c which is shaped like an inverted Y. This runs down
towards the labrum. The anterior branch of the Y reaches a point just above and at
the side of the frontal knob. It articulates directly with a thin sclerite running along
the median face of the first joint of the antennule. The posterior branch similarly sup-
ports the inner attachment of the antenna to the body. It stretches down to the com-
mencement of the antenno-labral apodeme. At the junction of the a and b sclerites a
fourth sclerite d slopes downwards and supports the outer attachment of the antenna
to the body.
The lateral eyes are attached to the body by short eye stalks close against the front
of the upper ends of the c sclerites. Their movement is effected through muscles which
attach to these anterior sclerites.
From the posterior side of the attachment of the adductor muscle to the body, a
thin sclerite e runs downwards and supports the attachment of the second trunk limb.
Dorsally it is connected with the base of the a sclerite by a powerful apodeme which
runs anteriorly just below the dorsal constituent of the adductor muscle.
Postero-ventrally to the adductor attachment a thin sclerite f, pointed at both ends
with a posterior knob projecting about the middle of its length, runs down to the end
of the thickening which has already been described as the continuation up the side of
the body of the posterior hypostomal strut. On the posterior knob a small rod-like
sclerite articulates, and supports the upper part of the vibratory plate of the maxilla.
The first trunk limbs are attached to the body, very close together in the middle
line. The body wall, both in front of them and behind, is folded inwards so as to form
a transverse ridge (Figs. 2, 3), but there does not appear to be any special sclerite sup-
porting the attachment.
ENDOSTERNITE
The true endoskeletal elements exhibit a characteristic staining reaction in Mallory.
On the whole they stain a fairly deep Cambridge blue, but always a part stains
bright orange (Plate VII), which is the colour taken up by the exoskeletal sclerites.
The endosternite, on the other hand, stains a bright royal blue, and can be clearly
distinguished from the endoskeletal elements. It is of a different composition from the
latter, as it disappears completely after treatment with potash.
n
n
446 DISCOVERY REPORTS
The main mass of the endosternite (Fig. 5), consisting of a transverse plate in which
are embedded the upper ends of the anterior hypostomal apodemes, curves upwards
at the sides and merges into the two halves of the adductor muscle. As a result of this
dorsal concavity of the adductor system, contraction of the muscle must lift the body
into the shell as the valves close.
Laterally, the endosternite is prolonged forwards on either side of the oesophagus
(Fig. 5) as a thin, elongated triangular plate, the apex of which serves for the attachment
of the posterior eye muscles. The latter run forwards and attach to the sclerites c im-
mediately behind the eye stalks.
The two anterior prolongations I have called the endosternite fork. The flat inner
ends of the antenno-labral apodemes are embedded in the proximal parts of the prongs
of the fork.
Spanning the gap between the tips of the fork is the aortic tendon (Fig. 5). This is
an extremely thin tendinous sheet, in the median posterior part of which is embedded
the inner end of the frontal apodeme.
From the level of the anterior hypostomal apodemes there occurs, on either side,
a thin strut connecting the adductor muscle tendon with the upper part of the stalk
of the antenno-labral apodeme (Fig. 5).
Posteriorly there arise two very thin tendinous strands, which slope rapidly towards
the middle line and terminate in a pair of median plates (Fig. 5), one above the other,
which serve for the attachment of muscles running to the vibratory plate of the maxilla.
The lower plate also serves muscles from the maxillule.
DORSAL BODY WALL
I have already described the dorsal body wall between the heart and caudal furca
as a soft flexible dome. It consists of a chequer-work of muscles, formed of dorsal
longitudinal muscles and a series of transverse muscles—or, more accurately, circular
muscles—lying close inside the ectoderm and connected through it direct to the cuticle.
The latter are figured but not described by Miiller (1894, Pl. 35, fig. 5).
The dorsal longitudinal muscles consist on either side of about eight thin strands—
the number varies—running side by side from the caudal furca to the sides of the heart.
The arrangement and anterior attachments will be described later in connection with
the blood system. Throughout their length they are attached at intervals by short thin
tendinous strands, certainly to the ectoderm and probably through the latter to the
cuticle.
From the mid-dorsal line numerous circular muscle bands extend round the sides
of the body (Figs. 2, 4). In extending ventrally they converge and fuse with the ecto-
derm, just below the most lateral of the dorsal longitudinal muscles. ‘The ventral
attachment of the more anterior bands merge into an extremely thin tendinous sheet
connected with the e sclerite. The muscles lie just inside the ectoderm and are attached
closely to it by tendinous strands at very short intervals.
SKELETON AND BODY WALL 447
The constitution of this body wall shows up very clearly when examined by polarized
light. I made a microtome preparation of the right half of Doloria and, after removing
the wax, and transferring the specimen to glycerine, picked out the gut and gonads
with fine needles and washed out the body cavity. Such a specimen, when examined
between crossed Nicols, shows either the dorsal longitudinal muscles brilliantly illu-
minated and the circular muscles as dark streaks across them, or the reverse, depending
on the relation between the direction of their myofibrils and the axes of the Nicols.
A more satisfactory method of study is to place a thin selenite layer underneath the
lower Nicol. In this case one set of muscles will appear brightly coloured and the other
set also bright, but in a different colour. By rotating the stage the colours can be
reversed. In this way the circular muscles can be followed very accurately to their point
of fusion with the ectoderm. They do not appear to be so markedly doubly refractive
as the dorsal longitudinal muscles.
The extremely close association of the circular muscles with the cuticle, and the fact
that it is difficult to decide exactly where the muscle emerges from the ectoderm, sug-
gests that these muscles are of ectodermal origin. Further in support of this, is their
staining reaction and histological detail. The dorsal longitudinal muscles stain on the
whole a deep purplish red, and show all the detail of typical striped muscle. The circular
muscles, on the other hand, stain a brighter red and exhibit merely an alternation of
staining and non-staining zones which merge into each other. Krause’s membrane is
entirely absent. Now these are just the characteristics of the early stages of those dorso-
ventral muscles of Chirocephalus which I was able to show (1926 8, p. 406) were derived
from the ectoderm. ‘They also exhibited this ‘‘moniliform”’ staining and did not show
Krause’s membrane during their early stages.
Further, I showed that in still earlier stages of these muscles the myofibrils were
continuous and stained uniformly throughout their length. Just behind and above the
attachment of the adductor muscle of Doloria, sections tangential to the surface show
bands of such continuous myofibrils running in various directions, and these appear
to lie in the ectoderm cells. I consider that these are ectodermal muscle cells which
are even less “‘mature”’ than the circular muscles.
The chief interest in the dorsal body wall of Doloria lies in the fact that, in its con-
stitution, it is Annelidan. In the Annelid the body wall consists of a thin cuticle, the
ectoderm, the circular muscles and the longitudinal muscles occurring in this order
from outside inwards, and the circular muscles of Criodrilus are ectodermal according
to Staff (1910). In Doloria there is the same arrangement. I do not mean to imply
that the circular muscles of Doloria are homologous with those of Annelids. From my
work on Chirocephalus 1 believe, although I did not stress this point in the paper, that
the Annelid circular muscles became transverse and dorso-ventral muscles when the
cuticle hardened and took over the function of supporting the musculature, and the
Annelid became thus transformed into an Arthropod. The ancestral Crustacean pro-
bably had this muscle constitution. But in Doloria the whole body has become enclosed
in a protective shell. All the limbs, the mouth-parts and the eyes are supported by the
448 DISCOVERY REPORTS
efficient system of endoskeletal elements and articulating sclerites to the powerful
adductor muscle and this, in turn, reciprocally supports the bivalve shell. The dorsal
body wall is thus, to a large extent, emancipated from any supporting function and
consequently it has lost its rigidity and become a soft flexible dome.
In all the Crustacea the function of the dorsal longitudinal muscles is to extend the
caudal region. In Doloria, and probably in Ostracods generally, since they all have a
flexible body wall, the softening of the cuticle in this region would have placed these
muscles at a disadvantage and so, as a compensation, they have become attached along _
their length to the cuticle. On contraction they can still extend the caudal region but, at
the same time, they must press in the body wall and so have a great effect on the move-
ment of body fluids. This new function of moving the body fluids or of regulating the
body fluid pressure, I believe, must be the main function of the dorsal body wall, and
to enhance it the circular muscles have developed.
That they have developed from the ectoderm is not strange. The Crustacean ecto-
derm is, in my opinion, a supporting tissue of varied potentialities. It may produce a
hard external plate or sclerite. It may pass inwards and produce an endoskeletal apodeme
(Manton, 1928, p. 414), or a tendon joining transverse muscles (Manton, 1928, p. 412).
Or again, it may give rise to a muscular sphincter, a group of cells exhibiting con-
tinuous myofibrils but not striation, such as I described in Cyprids (1925, p. 15). It
may finally give rise to typical striated muscle which “cannot be distinguished from
the mesodermal muscles”’ (Cannon, 1926 b, p. 413). All these are cases where the actual
development of the ectoderm has been followed embryologically. The circular muscles
of Doloria | consider come between the last two cases quoted.
BLOOD SYSTEM
Very little is known concerning the circulatory system of Ostracods beyond the
fact that a globular heart with a single pair of ostia occurs in Cypridinids and Halo-
cyprids. Claus (1891) described the histology and general anatomy of the Halocyprid
heart, and from his figures it is obvious that he was dealing with moderately well-fixed
material. Both Miiller (1927, p. 415) and Klie (1929, p. 37) state, in addition, that a
short vessel arises anteriorly which runs to the brain and that, in many Cypridinids,
a pair of lateral vessels run towards the attachment of the adductor muscles (see later,
p- 453). The lengthiest description of an Ostracod blood system is that of Gigantocypris
by Liiders (1909). It is, however, badly illustrated and undoubtedly inaccurate (see
later, p. 449).
HEART AND PERICARDIUM
The heart lies in a well-defined pericardial space close under the middle region of
the hinge of the shell just above the level of the eye stalks (Figs. 4, 5). The general
anatomy and histology of the Halocyprid heart described by Claus (1891, p. 41) will
apply equally to Doloria.
The whole heart is covered, except for its apertures, by a layer of parenchymatous
BLOOD SYSTEM 449
cells which, in places, are drawn out into strands connected to the pericardial walls.
This tissue is mentioned by Liiders (1909, p. 114), and he probably referred to the
suspensory cells when he stated: “Auch trifft man vereinzelte Kerne mit faserigen
Auslaiifern an, die mit Ganglienzellen grosse Ahnlichkeit haben, besonders mit denen,
die man in den Schalennerven antrifft”. But since, in his detailed description of the
nervous system, he does not mention a shell nerve, and, so far as I am aware, no such
nerve has ever been described in the Crustacea, it is difficult to see what he was actually
referring to.
The heart has five apertures, a pair of ostia postero-dorsally, an opening into a
median aorta antero-ventrally—the aortic valve, and a pair of openings through the
pericardial floor into a parenchymatous tissue surrounding the gut (see later, p. 464),
which I call the hepatic valves (Figs. 5, 11). I use this term merely for convenience,
and do not imply any special function of this parenchymatous tissue.
All these apertures are effectively splits in the heart wall, but the constitution of the
ostia differs from that of the others. Each ostium, as Claus described, consists of a pair
of parallel muscles which run close together from the median plane obliquely back-
wards. Their apposed edges project inwards into the heart cavity as in typical Arthropod
ostia and so, on contraction of the heart, they act as valves in preventing the escape of
blood.
The remaining apertures consist of gaps in the muscular wall of the heart, the edges
of the gaps being fused with the pericardial floor. The actual openings thus consist
of splits in the latter, and the splits are bounded by a development of myofibrils. This
can be seen very clearly in one of my preparations, where the heart wall around the
hepatic valve has been drawn out into a cylindrical tube which terminates round the
split. These apertures must function quite differently from the ostia. The latter act
as true valves, only allowing the passage of blood into the heart, whereas the former
are not real valves but rather taps. By the contraction and relaxation of their muscles
the apertures can be closed and opened, but the passage of blood through them is
equally possible in either direction. However, I am calling them valves for want of
a better word and because, in all probability, blood passes through them only in one
direction.
Wrzesniowski (1879, p. 539) described the hearts of various Amphipods, and states
that these terminate anteriorly and posteriorly in a complicated valve consisting of a
thin diaphragm containing a median split, and Wilson (1903, p. 689) mentions similar
openings occurring with true ostia in the heart of certain species of Branchiura.
The connection between the heart and the gut parenchyma was described by Liiders
in Gigantocypris (1909, p. 115). However, it was undoubtedly these connections that
Claus discovered as early as 1891 in a heart dissected out of a Conchoecissa (p. 41). He
mentions the fact that they are not true ostia but simply “freien Streifen zwischen
benachbarten Gruppen von Muskelziigen”’ (p. 42).
Liiders describes the hepatic apertures as afferent structures and states that each is
provided with a valve allowing the passage of blood into the heart (p. 116). He did
\
“MMS. pe» “
m.pe.d.
p-pe.f.
a0. Ve
MN.
m.a0d.
m.1.s.pe.
ao.t.
M.a-.Q0.0€.
m.p.Q0.0€.
M™.Q0.€.
end.
ala.
a.h.a.
Fig. 4. A. Right half of the fore-part of Doloria levis, viewed from the sagittal plane, to show the blood
system and associated muscles. B. Left half of pericardial floor and heart, which have been removed to
obtain the view shown in Fig. 3 A. a.e.pc. anterior entrance to pericardium; a.k.a. anterior hypostomal
apodeme; a./.a. antenno-labral apodeme; ao.t. aortic tendon; ao.v. aortic valve; end. endosternite; fr.a.
frontal apodeme; m.a.ao.oe. anterior aortic-oesophageal muscle; m.ao. aortic muscle; m.ao.e. aortic-
endosternite muscle; m.l.s.pe. lateral sub-pericardial muscle; m.m.s.pc. median sub-pericardial muscle;
mn. nauplius eye muscle; m.p.ao.oe. posterior aortic-oesophageal muscle; m.pe.d. pericardial dilator;
p-pc.f. floor of posterior pericardium; v. valve in supraneural vessel. ( 200 approx.)
BLOOD SYSTEM 451
not, however, give any figures, and this is undoubtedly incorrect. He missed com-
pletely the pericardial floor and, without this, the functioning of the heart cannot be
clearly understood.
The pericardium consists strictly of two parts, the anterior pericardium in which
lies the heart (Fig. 4 A) and the posterior pericardial space which extends into the
trunk (Fig. 2).
The anterior pericardium is roofed and walled laterally by the carapace. The front
wall is formed by the body wall above the nauplius eye, and the hind wall by a soft
flexible portion of the body wall which bulges in between the trunk ventrally and the
carapace dorsally. The pericardial floor can be considered as a membrane slung from
a median point just above the nauplius eye and the median point which marks the
anterior limit of the soft flexible dome of body wall covering the trunk. Laterally it is
attached partly to the body wall and partly directly to the valves of the carapace. Its
line of attachment has been twisted into a distorted M by certain muscles, whose inser-
tions lie in bays formed by its lateral margins. This is illustrated in Figs. 4 A, B. The
former represents the right half of a specimen of Doloria and the latter is a drawing
of the left half of the pericardial floor and heart which has been removed to obtain
Fig. 4 A. These figures are based on various series of sections. It is quite impossible
to see the actual floor in dissection as its extreme thinness renders it invisible.
The first bay is occupied by the common dorsal attachment of three separate muscles.
The first of these is a muscle which runs from the median ectoderm just below the
nauplius eye and extends up on either side to attach to the carapace valves just lateral
to the hinge and immediately in front of the most anterior of the dorsal longitudinal
muscles which attach directly to the carapace. I have called it the nauplius eye muscle
(Figs. 2, 4 A, 6). The second is the aortic muscle which I shall describe later and the
third, a muscle which I have not figured, running to the paired eye, the anterior eye
muscle.
The pericardial floor, after curving upwards to accommodate this attachment, re-
curves sharply downwards to pass underneath the attachment of a muscle running in
the pericardium itself. This runs from a point just above the eye stalk to a point slightly
lateral to the mid-ventral region of the hinder wall of the anterior pericardium (Figs. 2,
6). Here it is joined to its fellow by a tendinous strand, and continues after a tendinous
junction as the most median of the dorsal longitudinal muscles. This muscle I have
called the pericardial compressor.
The attachment of the pericardial floor now passes postero-dorsally to curve round
the posterior attachment of a big muscle (not figured), the postero-dorsal eye muscle.
Passing forwards along the posterior face of this muscle it turns sharply backwards and
enters the trunk region as the lateral margin of the posterior pericardium.
In order to explain the posterior pericardium I must describe in more detail the
dorsal longitudinal muscles. Passing from the hinder wall of the anterior pericardium
and extending posteriorly to the caudal furca are three band-like muscles which may
bifurcate and again join up before reaching their hinder limit (Fig. 2). The first of these,
Divi 3
452 DISCOVERY REPORTS
that is, the most median, I have already mentioned as being a continuation, through a
tendinous junction, of the pericardial compressor. ‘The second runs forward to attach
directly to the carapace immediately behind the upper attachment of the nauplius eye
muscle. The third attaches close behind the second.
Lateral to these three muscles is a group of five more, the fourth to the eighth. These
also attach anteriorly to the carapace valves, and in a line with the attachment of the
more median muscles. The more lateral muscles attach more posteriorly, that is, the
fourth attaches just behind the third, and the eighth has the most posterior attachment. _
As they pass out of the anterior pericardium they lie close over the pericardial floor and,
in side view, appear to cross each other. They extend a short distance behind this level
and attach directly to the ectoderm (Fig. 2). From here they run parallel, and are
attached at intervals to the ectoderm and to the circular muscles. They curve ventrally
and end in a tendinous plate immediately inside the ectoderm, which extends forwards
to the lower limit of the e sclerite.
The lateral attachment of the anterior pericardial floor, on entering the trunk region,
passes posteriorly just outside the eighth dorsal longitudinal muscle. The floor of the
posterior pericardium does not extend right across the body, but has a medial line of
attachment. This extends from the median ventral point of the hind wall of the anterior
pericardium, across the first dorsal longitudinal muscle and, after sending a small bay
down the second and third muscles, extends down the medial side of the fourth (Figs.
4 A, 5). The posterior pericardial floor thus lies close underneath the lateral group of
dorsal longitudinal muscles. It can be traced almost to their posterior limits where it
disappears.
The middle line of the anterior pericardial floor is pulled down into the form of a V
by a powerful muscle, the pericardial dilator (Figs. 4 A, 6). The anterior arm of the
V is split along the middle portion of its length. The sides of the split have developed
continuous myofibrils and are fused with the walls of the heart. The split forms the
aortic valve by which the heart communicates with the aorta. The posterior arm of
the V consists of a well-marked band of continuous myofibrils—the median sub-
pericardial muscle.
The apex of the V is rounded, and along the curved part is attached the pericardial
dilator. In side view (Figs. 2, 4 A) this appears as a fan-shaped muscle spreading out
to its dorsal attachment. It is, however, continuous posteriorly with the median sub-
pericardial muscle and anteriorly with the muscles in the lips of the aortic valve. In
passing ventrally, it spreads out laterally and attaches along a transverse line to the
aortic tendon. Actually, the shape of the muscle is that of a tetrahedron with curved
edges (Fig. 6).
Passing upwards from the e sclerite, that is, just behind the attachment of the
adductor muscle, there is a thin tendinous sheet, which narrows down and becomes
muscular as it extends dorsally. It lies at first immediately inside the ectoderm and,
while still in this position, enters the posterior pericardium (Fig. 4). Here it runs
obliquely forwards across the eighth, seventh and sixth dorsal longitudinal muscles,
BLOOD SYSTEM 453
and then passes in between the sixth and fifth (Fig. 2) and merges into the pericardial
floor in the region where this passes over from posterior to anterior pericardium (Figs.
5, 6). It now curves downwards and disappears towards the region of the hepatic
valves. Where it lies in the pericardial floor it is excessively thin, and can only be seen
in sections when it happens to lie in the plane of the section. I have called it the lateral
sub-pericardial muscle. I was able to follow it clearly in polarized light in the type of
preparation I have already described for the study of the dorsal body wall.
The functioning of the various muscles of the pericardium is described later (p. 456)
after a description of the blood vessels.
BLOOD VESSELS
An aorta extends backwards from the heart lying in a groove between the two halves
of the brain. Anteriorly it ends blindly in the parenchyma which occurs around the
antero-medial attachment of the pericardial floor, this latter attachment marking the
level of the floor of the aorta. Posteriorly it extends as far as the aortic tendon which
forms its roof in this region. The lower face of the pericardial dilator and the median
strip of the pericardial floor from this muscle, as far as the posterior limit of the aortic
valve, run in the middle line of the roof of the aorta. The aortic valve thus cuts obliquely
through the aorta (Fig. 4 A), its posterior end being in the roof and the anterior end
in the floor. The walls of the aorta are supported by a pair of muscles, the aortic
muscles (Figs. 4 A, 5,6), which run forward from the aortic tendon and join the nauplius
eye muscles just below their upper attachment. Posteriorly they are flattened and form
part of the aortic roof, but in sections through the more anterior part they can be seen
lying on the inner face of the aortic walls.
The walls of the aorta are thin but very definite and, as in all the arteries, it is im-
possible to distinguish any cell limits or nuclei. The aorta is supported anteriorly by
the parenchyma already mentioned. This extends backwards along its sides and joins
the gut parenchyma which runs up to the hepatic valves (Fig. 11). Apart from this
the aortic walls are naked.
Liiders (1909, p. 117) refers to a vessel in Gigantocypris which must be the aorta,
but he describes it as a more or less indefinite split between connective tissue cells.
At the level of the aortic tendon the aorta divides into two (Fig. 5). Each half at
once divides again sending one branch laterally to the antennae, and the other
branch posteriorly underneath the prongs of the endosternite fork and above, and
attached to, the lateral portions of the nerve ring. This bifurcation is probably what
is referred to by Miller (1927, p. 415), when he states that the aorta sends two branches
to the neighbourhood of the attachment of the adductor muscle, and by Klie (1929,
Pp. 37), who describes “2 seitliche, nach der Schalenmitte gerichtete Bahnen”’.
The posterior branches each give off a vessel to the mandibles and then join each
other behind the muscles which pass through the nervous system behind the trito-
cerebral commissure (Figs. 4 A, 5). At the same time they open into the body cavity
directly underneath the main mass of the tendon of the adductor muscle. The aorta
m.™M, Spc.
HEART
m,L.s. pe. fe
W4
Ye
m.a.a0.0€.
M. 0.0. nk
ant.a a Mm. p.d0.0€.
a.l.d. SMe
mdb.a.
Ve
m.add.t.== =
ahd.
‘Dp. Lent
ENDOSTERNITE
MxX2, 02
Fig. 5. Dorsal aspect of blood system of Doloria levis to show the associated musculature and the endosternite.
a.h.a. anterior hypostomal apodeme; a./.a. antenno-labral apodeme; ant.a. antennal artery; ao.t. aortic
tendon; f.a.pc. floor of anterior pericardium; f.p.pc. floor of posterior pericardium; fr.a. frontal apodeme ;
hv. hepatic valve; m.a.ao.oe. anterior aortic-oesophageal muscle; m.add.t. tendon of adductor muscle;
m.ao. aortic muscle; m.ao.e. aortic-endosternite muscle; m.l.s.pc. lateral sub-pericardial muscle; m.m.s.pe.
median sub-pericardial muscle ; .p.ao.0e. posterior aortic-oesophageal muscle; m.p.e. posterior eye muscle ;
m.pc.d. pericardial dilator ; mdb.a. mandibular artery ; mx. 2, t. tendinous plate for attachment of muscles of
vibratory plate of maxilla; p./.n.r. posterior lobe of nerve ring; s.n.r. supra-neural ring vessel; v. valve in
supraneural vessel. ( 200 approx.)
BLOOD SYSTEM 455
thus joins a ring vessel and, since this lies immediately above the nerve ring, I have
called it the supraneural ring or artery.
The anterior part of the supraneural artery is provided with a complex of muscles
(Figs. 4 A, 5) attached partly to the endosternite and partly to the ectoderm of the
oesophagus. One of these consists of a thin sheet of myofibrils developed in its roof
running from the prong of the endosternite to the aortic tendon. I have called it the
aortic-endosternite muscle. The endosternite prongs turn outwards at an angle about
the middle of their length and, along the inner edges of the distal halves, are attached
the aortic-endosternite muscles.
A narrow strip along the inner edges of these muscles appears to contain myofibrils
which differ from the remainder of the muscle. The latter are striated, but the former
are homogeneous and stain a very bright red, which contrasts clearly with the purplish
red of the rest of the muscle. They appear to be of the same type as the musculature
I shall describe (p. 463) for the gut. These narrow strips converge on the middle point
of the aortic tendon and join the aortic muscles.
At a region just behind and slightly lateral to the attachment of the aortic muscles,
two muscles originate which pass backwards dorsal to the aortic-endosternite muscles
and then extend down the oesophagus to end against its cuticular lining. These
I have called the anterior aortic-oesophageal muscles. Each splits into two portions,
one of which extends round the sides of the oesophagus and passes down its posterior
side. The second extends straight down the front of the oesophagus and crosses from
one side of the body to the other.
From the hinder margin of the aortic tendon, on either side of the frontal apodeme,
a pair of muscles, the posterior aortic-oesophageal muscles, run directly down the front
of the oesophagus.
All the aortic-oesophageal muscles insert themselves between the circular muscles,
pass through the longitudinal muscles, and attach to the cuticular lining of the oeso-
phagus.
A pair of valves occur in the supraneural ring (Figs. 4 A, 5, and Plate VII, fig. 1, c) on
either side at the level of the hinder face of the oesophagus. Each consists of a muscular
curtain hanging down from the roof of the artery. The muscle is attached anteriorly to
the wall of the mandibular artery and, in curving upwards over the supraneural vessel,
it passes obliquely backwards and inwards. It narrows down and curves ventrally to
attach to the hinder of the muscles which pass through the nervous mass behind the
tritocerebral commissure. Contraction of this muscle must pull down the muscle cur-
tain so that it presses against the floor of the artery and blocks the passage. ‘This can
be seen in Plate VII, fig. 1, in which that part of the supraneural artery proximal to
the heart is empty, but on the distal side of the valve there is a mass of coagulated
blood.
The antennal arteries extend laterally and then forwards into the base of the limbs
(Fig. 11). On entering they apparently divide into two. ‘The outer, smaller branch,
appears to open into the cavity of the limb, but the inner can be followed into the cyto-
456 DISCOVERY REPORTS
plasm of a large muscle on the inner side of the protopodite. ‘This muscle, which is
the largest in the limb, consists of a number of pillars of striated myofibrils arranged
in the form of a fan. Their cytoplasm, however, forms a continuous sheet on their inner
face, and it is into this sheet that the antennal artery can be traced as a thin slit which
gradually tapers and disappears.
I have now described all the arteries which can be traced from the heart. In addition
to this system of vessels, blood leaves the heart by the hepatic valves and is pumped
directly into the gut parenchyma. This tissue is described later (p. 464). The actual.
passage of blood through the parenchyma cannot be traced in Doloria, but in another
unnamed Cypridinid from South Georgia I traced definite sinuses extending from
the hepatic valves to a region under the gut. Presumably the blood forced into the
parenchyma oozes out through the crevices between the parenchymatous cells.
Blood returns to the heart by the pericardium, and this has two entrances. The first
I have already described, namely, via the posterior pericardium. The second occurs
anteriorly, and leads from the cavities of the carapace valves. Blood enters the carapace
directly from the body cavity at the attachment of the adductor muscles. In addition,
a tongue of gut parenchyma passes into the valves alongside the adductor muscle, and
so blood may pass into the valves from this tissue. From this point there is a system
of radiating channels in the thickness of the carapace valves. These were mentioned by
Claus (1876, p. 93) in a footnote. They extend outwards to the edges of the valves,
where they join to a marginal vessel. This is most marked anteriorly and has been
figured by Miiller (1894, PI. 2, fig. 2) who, however, does not describe it. ‘These marginal
sinuses extend up the anterior edges of the valves, past the antennal notches, and open
directly into the pericardium at the combined attachment of the aortic and nauplius
eye muscles (Fig. 4 A). The entrance of each sinus into the pericardium is guarded
by a minute muscle which runs from the floor of the sinus obliquely backwards and
outwards to the outer layer of the carapace, and attaches alongside the attachment of
the second dorsal longitudinal muscle. Contraction of this muscle must pull up the
floor of the sinuses, and so close the entrance to the pericardium.
CIRCULATORY PROCESS
From the arrangement of the muscles associated with the pericardium and arteries,
I believe it is possible to analyse the process by which the blood is pumped round the
body.
The attachments of the pericardial dilator indicate that, on contraction, the peri-
cardial floor must be pulled down and the pericardial space thus enlarged. Similarly,
the attachments of the pericardial compressors show that they must function by pulling
in the walls of the pericardium, thus diminishing the pericardial space. A regular
alternate contraction of these two muscles would then produce a rhythmical diastole
and systole of the pericardium. At first sight this seems the obvious method of working,
but, as I shall attempt to show, such a method is not possible.
I assume that these muscles contract rhythmically and synchronously with the heart.
BLOOD SYSTEM 457
The first possibility is that the heart contracts as the pericardium enlarges, and vice
versa. ‘This appears impossible because of the nature of the cardiac valves. The aortic
valve is simply a median split in the pericardial floor, the lips of which are muscular
extensions of the pericardial dilator. Now the myofibrils of this muscle run upwards
and spread out towards the attachment to the pericardial floor. Here a small band
runs forwards (Figs. 2, 4 A) and splits into two as the myofibrils supporting the lips
a m.d.l.1
fa: pe.
AM i
CMY
"nim
Min,
m.L.S. pC.
M.pC.€.
m.N.E.
m.pe.d.
M.Q0.
Fig. 6. Perspective view of pericardial floor, based on an isometric projection, to show the attachments of
the pericardial compressor. f.a.pc. floor of anterior pericardium; f.p.pc. floor of posterior pericardium;
h.v. hepatic valve; m.ao. aortic muscle; m.d./.1, 1st dorsal longitudinal muscle; m./.s.pc. lateral sub-
pericardial muscle ; m.n.e. nauplius eye muscle; m.pc.c. pericardial compressor ; m.pc.d. pericardial dilator.
of the aortic valve. The majority of the fibrils, however, converge and run upwards
as the median sub-pericardial muscle. The direction of these fibrils can be established
clearly with polarized light. From this arrangement it is clear that contraction of this
muscle must pull the pericardial floor both downwards and backwards. This must tend
to increase the pericardial space but, at the same time, the lips of the aortic valve will
become tense and will be pulled close together in the middle line, thus shutting the
valve. Similarly with the hepatic valves. Although the minute muscles of the latter
appear to be isolated and not connected directly with any other muscle, it is reasonable
458 DISCOVERY REPORTS
to suppose that any tension on the pericardial floor, such as must occur on contraction
of the pericardial dilator, would also cause these valves to close.
It thus appears that, when the pericardial dilator contracts, the cardiac valves must
close, and hence that the heart cannot be in systole. This leads to the second possibility
that the heart and pericardium contract and dilate together.
It is quite possible for the heart and pericardium to contract together, but they
cannot dilate together. he expansion of the heart must be passive. ‘There are no
muscles attached to its walls by which it could be actively dilated, and the structure
of the parenchymatous cells covering the outer surface of the heart is such that they
could not exert any tension on the heart walls. This being so, the pressure around the
heart as it expands must be the same as, or slightly higher than, the pressure in the heart.
Only in these circumstances could the ostia open and allow blood to pass in, and the two
ostia are the only entrances to the heart, the aortic and hepatic valves being closed by
the contracting pericardial dilator. Now enlargement of the pericardium would tend
to make this a region of low pressure. Blood would tend to be sucked in from all
possible sources. ‘That is, blood would tend to be sucked out of the passively expanding
heart, and this would immediately close the ostia.
The conclusion of the above reasoning is that there can be no diastole and systole
of the pericardium synchronous with that of the heart. There is still another possibility,
namely, that the volume of the pericardium remains practically constant, and this
I believe actually to be the case. The pericardial muscles, by their activity, control
the volume and internal pressure of the pericardium, so that the heart is free to
pulsate and, at the same time, blood is admitted to replace that forced out by
the heart.
I suggest that the pericardial dilator and the compressors contract together during
diastole of the heart.
At the sides of the attachment of the median sub-pericardial muscle are the attach-
ments of the pericardial compressors which run forwards and outwards to their anterior
attachments in the lateral walls of the pericardium. Contraction of the latter muscles
will thus pull inwards both the lateral and the posterior walls of the pericardium, and
so tend to reduce the pericardial space.
Also the upper attachment of the median sub-pericardial muscle is in the middle
point of the lower edge of the soft flexible hinder wall of the pericardium. Hence,
contraction of the pericardial dilator, through this muscle, will pull downwards and
slightly forwards the hinder wall and this will tend to counteract, but only slightly,
the enlarging effect of the dilator muscle.
Thus I deduce that contraction of the pericardial dilator closes the aortic valve and,
therefore, that during this contraction the heart must be dilating. At the same time,
it must tend to increase the pericardial space and so diminish the intra-pericardial
pressure. But, if this were to happen, the heart could not dilate. Hence, to counteract
this, the pericardial compressors contract and so, during diastole, both the pericardial
dilator and the pericardial compressors contract.
BLOOD SYSTEM 459
During systole these muscles relax. An antagonistic muscle common to both of
them is the first dorsal longitudinal muscle. Contraction of this muscle will pull back
the hinder wall of the pericardium which has been pulled forwards during diastole.
The relaxation of the pericardial dilator relieves the tension on the valves, and so
allows blood to be pumped by the heart into the aorta and in smaller quantities into
the gut parenchyma.
Blood must at this stage pass into the pericardium to replace that forced out by the
heart. Some will pass in direct from the marginal sinuses, but not at any great rate,
as such blood must be sucked through the network of minute channels in the valves.
I believe that it passes in chiefly through the posterior pericardium. In the floor of
this part of the pericardium lie the lateral sub-pericardial muscles. These curve upwards
from their position of origin in the ectoderm over the floor of the posterior pericardium
and down again to attach to and merge into the floor of the anterior pericardium
(Figs. 2, 4 A, 5, 6). Hence, on contraction, each must pull down its middle portion,
that is, the portion lying over the floor of the posterior pericardium, and so convert
this space into a tube leading directly into the anterior pericardium.
It is possible that, to a slight extent, as the floor is depressed, the roof of the posterior
pericardium is lifted up by the contracting first dorsal longitudinal muscle. From
Figs. 2 and 4 A it can be seen that the commencement of this muscle slopes
markedly upwards, and so must tend to lift up the body wall covering the posterior
pericardium.
To summarize the suggested interaction of heart and pericardium, during diastole
both pericardial dilator and compressors contract. During systole these muscles relax
and the lateral sub-pericardial muscles contract, thus allowing blood to enter the peri-
cardium from the main body cavity.
The further passage of blood from the heart through the vessels into the body cavity
can, I think, be predicted with a certain degree of accuracy.
The roof of the aorta is attached to the pericardial floor. Since, during systole, the
latter is raised the roof of the aorta must also be lifted up and, in this way, the volume
of the anterior part of the aorta is enlarged and accommodates the blood forced out of
the heart. This follows necessarily if the suggested working of the heart and pericardium
is accepted. As will be seen later, I believe that, during this phase, the hinder part of
the aorta is occluded by its roof being pulled down on to its floor by contraction of all
the aortic muscles (Fig. 7 A).
At the commencement of diastole then, the anterior aorta will be swollen with blood.
The pericardial dilator will now commence to contract and the aortic musculature will
relax. This will cause three things. The aortic valve will close. The pericardial floor
will be pulled downwards on to the anterior part of the aorta and the aortic tendon and
hence the roof of the hinder part of the aorta will be raised. The aorta will thus tend
to be occluded anteriorly and opened up posteriorly. Hence blood will be forced back-
wards into the hind end of the aorta, and the anterior part of the supraneural ring
(Fig: 7 B; C).
Dilvi 4
ty £ Sry yA (ajoyserq Apieq) g oreduroo ‘saposnur Jo uoNRoyNUep! 10,7 ‘papeys ‘Apysiy surxejor
are yorya asoy} pue ‘Apravay ore Sunovsyuoo ose YoY saposnur oy,y, *sseooid Aroyeynom poysassns 9y} UT sase}s IMoF Suyvaysny! weswserq “4 “Sry
aTOLS VIC
2)
ATIOLSVIG
ATUVA
ATOLSAS
BLOOD SYSTEM 461
Towards the end of diastole, when the pericardial dilator is fully contracted, the
posterior aortic-oesophageal muscles and the aortic muscles will contract. This will
bring the aortic tendon down on to the floor of the aorta and so squeeze the blood
laterally into the anterior part of the supraneural vessel (Fig. 7 D). The aorta will thus
be closed posteriorly and, at the same time, the contraction of the aortic muscles, since
these are attached further apart at their anterior ends than posteriorly, will cause the
anterior part of the aorta to widen and so accommodate the blood forced out at the
commencement of systole.
Systole now commences, and the blood from the previous systole has reached the
anterior part of the supraneural artery. This blood is now forced backwards by con-
traction of the anterior aortic-oesophageal muscles and the aortic-endosternite muscles
(Fig. 7 A). From Fig. 5 it can be seen that contraction of these muscles will pull back-
wards the anterior faces of the laterally running part of the supraneural vessel on to
the posterior. Thus, just as the hinder part of the aorta was occluded, so now the
anterior part of the supraneural ring will be emptied and the blood passed backwards.
When it reaches the body cavity at the hind end of the supraneural artery the valves
in this vessel will close. The aortic musculature now relaxes (Fig. 7 B). This opens up
the posterior part of the aorta. Blood cannot pass forwards into this region from the
body cavity because the supraneural valves are closed but, as I have already explained,
it will become filled with blood from the anterior end of the aorta by the downward
pressure of the pericardial floor.
As the anterior end of the supraneural vessel is emptied, part of the blood, instead of
passing backwards, will be forced laterally into the antennal arteries. At the point in these
vessels where they turn sharply forwards into the bases of the antennae there is a muscular
system which may act as a valve, but I could not settle its structure with certainty.
I have now described in detail what I consider to be the most probable mode of
action of the complicated system of muscles in the heart, pericardium and blood vessels.
The whole argument is based on the premise that the muscles contract synchronously
with the heart. On this assumption, the action of heart and pericardium which I have
described is, as far as I can see, the only possible method. 'The action of the muscles
of the blood vessels is simply a method which appears to me to be probable.
The presence of a circulatory system accessory to the heart is not surprising when
the diameter of the blood vessels and the probable rate of heart beat are taken into
account. In all observed cases of Ostracods the pulse is very rapid—Miiller (1894,
p. 169) records 200 heart beats per minute in Cylindroleberis oblonga—while the aorta
of Doloria is certainly not more than 50 in diameter. In these conditions the viscous
resistance of the blood in the capillary aorta would entirely prevent the heart beating
at any speed, were there not some accessory system to help the blood through the
vessels once it had left the heart. A similar condition has been described in Argulus
by Wilson (1903, p. 690), who points out that the lacunar circulation in this form cannot
depend on the heart alone for the movement of blood round the body, but must be
assisted by rhythmical contractions of the muscles of the body.
462 DISCOVERY REPORTS
From a morphological standpoint, one of the chief features of the blood system is
that, if the mechanism I have suggested is correct, circulation would still be possible
in complete absence of the heart. Thus blood is sucked into the pericardium indepen-
dently of the heart and would pass into the aorta whether the heart were there or not,
since the aortic valve is part of the pericardial floor, and is controlled by the pericardial
dilator. And, further, the presence of valves in the supraneural vessel would ensure
a one-way circulation in the absence of the heart with its ostia. This is significant from
the fact that, in certain groups of Ostracods, the heart is entirely absent. In these forms
it is possible that the pericardial floor and vessels may yet be present.
GUT
The labrum has already been described (p. 438). The labral glands will not be dealt
with, as they have been investigated so often before in other Cypridinids (Newton
Harvey, 1919).
The gut consists of a well-defined oesophagus, leading into a globular stomach, which
merges into an extremely short hind gut opening at the anus just in front of the caudal
furca.
The oesophagus exhibits a typical structure. Its anterior wall is thickened and bulges
posteriorly, converting the lumen into a cavity, moon-shaped in section. The whole
oesophagus is lined by very thin chitin and the bulge on the anterior wall extends a
short distance into the stomach. The aortic muscles which extend down and attach
to the oesophagus have already been described. Outside these there is a series of
circular muscles and, in addition, various dilator muscles which run to the anterior
walls of the labrum.
The stomach, as in most Cypridinids, has no hepatic outgrowths, but is completely
enveloped in a mass of tissue which I have called the gut parenchyma. It is obvious,
even from the small amount of material at my disposal, that this tissue varies con-
siderably, not only in its staining reaction, but in its bulk. In two of my specimens
it almost obliterates the body cavity, while in the specimen figured in Fig. 8 there is a
large blood space between it and the body wall. A description of the variation based on
my material would be of little use but, since it probably is an indication of food storage,
an investigation of this point will be interesting when further material is available.
In Fig. 8 I have drawn a section which exhibits all the cellular elements to be found
in the gut and its parenchyma. The gut epithelium consists of a uniform layer of tall
columnar cells, the cytoplasm of which is heavily vacuolated. It is separated from the
parenchyma by a network of muscles but, as will be seen from the figure, this separation
is not very marked. There is no basement membrane as described by Liiders (1909,
p- 113) in Gigantocypris. The bases of the cells may even in places bulge through the
network, so that they interdigitate with the inner layer of gut parenchyma cells. ‘This
agrees with Miiller’s description of Gigantocypris (1895, p. 159), where he describes
a “‘strukturlosen, starkgefalteten Membran”’ at the base of the gut epithelium.
GUT 463
The muscle layer consists of a network of comparatively thick, circular and longitu-
dinal strands, which I call muscles because they correspond in position to the gut
MIDDLE MASS
INNER
EPITHELIUM
-MUSCLE LAYER
-GUT EPITHELIUM
Fig. 8. ‘Transverse section through gut wall and parenchyma. (x 666.)
musculature of other Crustacea, but they exhibit no trace whatever of any form of
striation. In sections stained with Mallory each strand appears a brilliant red and per-
fectly homogeneous. Further, fixed preparations of true muscles always show the
464 DISCOVERY REPORTS
muscle running straight from one point of attachment to the other. Now, in one of
my preparations, which is exceptionally well fixed, certain of the longitudinal strands
form loops which follow the bulges of the gut epithelial cells into the parenchyma.
However, certain of the longitudinal strands can be traced forwards down the oeso-
phagus and backwards to the anus, and in these regions they stain a purplish red and
exhibit a typical striation. Certain of the transverse strands in the proctodaeal region
appear as slings for the gut. In the median region they support the gut epithelium
and are homogeneous. Laterally, they leave the gut musculature and attach to the body
wall, and in so doing exhibit a complete striation. I could find no nuclei in association
with the muscle strands.
I know of no similar musculature in any other Crustacean, but in the young larva
of Estheria, before any true gut musculature was formed, I described (1924, p. 399)
long, homogeneous strands extending forwards over the surface of the gut from the
proctodaeal musculature.
Liiders (1909, p. 113), in his description of Gigantocypris agassizii, describes a muscle
layer in a similar position, but does not mention the chequer arrangement of the muscles
or comment on any peculiarity of the individual strands. It is stated by Liiders (1909,
p. 113) that, according to Miller, Gigantocypris pellucida differs from Gigantocypris
agassizui in lacking this muscle layer. It may be that the homogeneity of the muscles
rendered them non-staining in the technique he employed. The staining reaction in
my material differed markedly in different specimens. In the best the staining was
intense, but in others not so well fixed, the musculature stained a pale orange and was
difficult to distinguish.
The gut parenchyma is composed of three zones, an inner epithelium, a middle mass
and an outer layer.
The inner epithelium consists of a layer of very large cells covering the gut muscula-
ture (Fig. 8). As already described the bases of these cells interdigitate with the bases
of the gut epithelial cells. The actual position of the gut musculature in relation to these
two epithelia is uncertain. It probably lies in between the two, but, in sections, it
appears as if the muscle strands actually pass through the cytoplasm of the cells of
one or other of the epithelia.
The middle mass contains two distinct types of cell. The first, a large cell enormously
distended with coagulable matter. These I call reserve cells and they form the main bulk
of the parenchyma. Their nuclei are very much flattened, presumably owing to the
distension of the cell body, and stain intensely. The second can only be identified from
their nuclei, which have well-defined nucleoli and do not stain intensely. These, I
believe, form the walls of a system of ramifying lacunae and canaliculi which lie in
the interstices between the reserve cells. It is into this system that the blood is passed
from the heart through the hepatic valves.
The outer layer of cells forms an epithelium covering the whole of the gut paren-
chyma. The cells are for the most part flattened, but in places the layer dips down
into a crypt (Fig. 8) and the cells become more polyhedral. Also posteriorly there is
GUT 465
a zone where this layer is thickened and extends inwards to the inner epithelium, and
here the cells have a similar shape.
The gut parenchyma is produced postero-dorsally in a series of five ridges, which
extend up and attach to the body wall in between the dorsal longitudinal muscles. In
this way the body cavity is divided up into a series of aisles. Each ridge consists of a
plate of reserve cells covered by a very attenuated layer of the outer epithelium.
Laterally the parenchyma sends an outgrowth on either side, which extends a short
distance into the valves.
Anteriorly the gut parenchyma sends outgrowths towards the pericardium, along the
aorta and to the antennal glands in the basal joints of the antennae.
The aortic outgrowths lie close against the aorta, and extend to the anterior limit
where the latter ends blindly. The pericardial outgrowths extend up to the hepatic
valves (Fig. 11), and along their length there is a well-defined channel connecting the
heart directly with the canalicular system of the parenchyma.
The antennal outgrowths extend into the base of the antenna and surround the duct
of the antennal gland and the basal ganglion of the antenna. They differ in constitution
from the rest. They contain no reserve cells, or, if they do, they contain no coagulable
staining matter. They consist simply of large polyhedral cells which stain very faintly
and resemble the cells which have already been mentioned as surrounding the heart.
NERVOUS SYSTEM
The anatomy of the nervous system of Ostracods and more particularly of Cypridinids
is very incompletely known. Miiller (1894, Pl. 40, fig. 10) published a figure showing
the general structure of the nervous system of Pyrocypris punctata, but did not describe
it in any detail, and it is on this figure that Klie, in a recent paper (1929, p. 39), bases
his general account. The most complete description of any Ostracod nervous system
is that of Gigantocypris published by Liiders (1909), but he had very little material
and apparently was unable to cut many sections.
Recently Hanstrém has published several accounts (1924, 1927 and 1928), basing
his observations on Eucypris fuscata and Philomedes globosa, but he deals chiefly with
the internal arrangement of the nerve centres and fibre tracts. Apparently, however
(1927, p. 240), he experienced great difficulty in fixation, and has not yet obtained a
series of sections from which he can describe the finer histological detail.
Claus (1891) described in fair detail the anatomy of the Halocyprid nervous system,
and includes a figure of a section of the brain of Cypridina mediterranea.
EXTERNAL ANATOMY
The present description is based on a wax model, reconstructed from a series of
sections frontal to the nerve ring.
The shape of the central nervous system can be seen from Figs. 9 and ro. It consists
of a massive circum-oesophageal ring to which is attached posteriorly, by a pair of
short stalks, all that remains of the ventral chain of ganglia.
Ty
med. NTL
ASS
piebr
SS
Alle
nu.d.1
n.d.ant.2
|
—)n.v.ant.2
)1.0.Us
nu.symp.
nu.mdb.
9M. p.0-
Ss SES — Se eS
SS pan SON | ZS SSS
y Ss
SS
SQ) S =
nu.mx.1 =) n.2,MX.2 SS
nu.mx.2 CZ,
EV
tr.ceb.
nuat.l. Zee
92.3, NX. 2
yNt.1.2
2S
SSS
=x
Fig. 9. Dorsal aspect of nervous system of Doloria levis to show nerve roots, the main nuclei and the giant
fibre system (green). c.b. central body; ¢c.p. corpora pedunculata; Jam. lamina of optic lobe; m.nu.a. 2,
motor nucleus of antenna; med. medulla of optic lobe; n.1,mx.2, n.2,mx.2, n.3,mx.2, first, second and
third maxillary nerves; n.a.v. anterior valve nerve; n.add.m. adductor muscle nerve; n.d.ant.2, dorsal
antennal nerve; 7.fr.o. frontal organ nerve; n./.e. optic nerve; m.mx.1. maxillulary nerve; 7.n.e. nerves to
nauplius eye; 7.p.v. posterior valve nerve; 7.t./. 2, 2nd trunk limb nerve; .v.ant. 2, ventral antennal nerve;
nu.a. 1, nucleus of antennule; mu.a. 2, nucleus of antenna; nu.mdb. nucleus of mandible; nu.mx. 1, nucleus
of maxillule; nw.mx. 2, nucleus of maxilla; nv.n.e. nucleus of nauplius eye; u.symp. nucleus of sympathetic
system; nu.t.J.1, nucleus of first trunk limb; nw.t./.2, nucleus of second trunk limb; op.tr. optic tract;
pr.br. protocerebral bridge; tr.c.b. tritocerebral central body. (x 260 approx.)
NERVOUS SYSTEM 4607
The fore-part of the ring consists of the fused optic and protocerebral lobes. Between
the tips of these lobes there arise five nerves (Fig. 9), three running to the three divisions
of the nauplius eye and two arising more ventrally and passing to the frontal organ
(Fig. 2). Laterally, the optic lobes give rise to the short eye stalks of the paired eyes.
On the ventral side of the fore-part of the nerve ring there are two swellings from
which the antennulary nerves arise. ‘This marks the deuterocerebral part of the brain,
and in the hinder part of this region there is a small median aperture through which
passes the frontal apodeme and a portion of the sympathetic system. This aperture is
probably of little morphological significance as no fibres pass behind it.
The deuterocerebral lobes pass postero-laterally into the tritocerebral region. There
is no marked waist between these regions, so that Hanstrém (1924, p. 32) is not strictly
correct when he states that, apart from the Phyllopoda, the Ostracods are the only
Crustacea which show a distinct separation between these two parts of the brain. The
tritocerebral lobes extend backwards and meet behind the oesophagus, thus forming
the anterior part of the hinder half of the nerve ring. The division between the trito-
cerebral commissure and the more posterior nervous mass is not marked by a gap,
but by a pair of muscles which pass through the nervous system. ‘These have already
been mentioned (p. 453) in connection with the blood system, and are shown in Fig. 4 A.
The nerves arising from the tritocerebral lobes are, anteriorly, the antennal nerves
which have double roots and, postero-dorsally, a pair of massive nerves which pass
outwards to the attachment of the adductor muscle where they enter the carapace. In
parasagittal sections they can be traced spreading out towards the margins of the valves.
I have called them the anterior valve nerves. Immediately below the latter a small
nerve emerges which runs to the posterior muscles of the base of the antenna.
On the ventral side of the hinder half of the nerve ring there are two swellings, from
which arise the mandibular nerves and the roots of the sympathetic system (Fig. 10 A, B).
These are on the same level as the muscles which mark the hinder limit of the trito-
cerebral commissure. Just in front of them there are two small laterally projecting
lobes. They are probably of little significance, as no nerves arise from them and they
contain no fibre tracts.
The postero-lateral corners of the nerve ring are marked by two prominent lobes—
the posterior lobes—which curve round the anterior hypostomal apodemes. ‘They have
been figured by Miiller (1894, Plate 40, fig. 10). These lobes, together with the small
lobes at the sides of the mandibular swellings, do not represent any special division
of the nervous system, and probably arose mechanically as a result of the extreme con-
densation of the anterior part of the ventral chain.
Immediately above the mandibular swellings, and near the dorsal surface of the nerve
ring, are the roots of two massive nerves which extend laterally and innervate the adductor
muscle. These nerves correspond to Turner’s “thoracic nerve” (1896, p. 31) and to
Klie’s “‘shell nerve”’ (1926, p. 23).
From the dorsal tip of the posterior lobe a nerve runs obliquely forwards and enters
the shell at the adductor muscle attachment. It spreads out to the margins of the valves,
DIIVi 5
468 DISCOVERY REPORTS
and is a posterior valve nerve. From the lower edge of the stalk of the posterior lobe
a nerve curves forwards around the anterior hypostomal apodeme and runs to the
maxillule.
From the hinder margin of the nerve ring there arise two pairs of nerves, one situated
just below the paired stalk of the ventral chain, and another pair more laterally. They
are the first and second maxillary nerves.
The remainder of the ventral chain consists of a nervous mass which is triangular in
both dorsal and lateral aspects (Figs. 9, 10 B). It is joined to the nerve ring by the paired _
stalk already mentioned, and is more condensed than in any other Cypridinid I have
studied.
Ventrally, at the root of the stalk, it gives rise to the small nerves running to the first
trunk limbs. Dorsally at about the middle of its length there are two small swellings,
from which arise a pair of nerves which run forwards, the third maxillary nerves. These
innervate the musculature of the vibratory plate and, in addition, the most dorsal com-
ponent of the adductor muscle which attaches above the apodeme joining the d and
esclerites. Postero-laterally there arise the nerves to the second trunk limbs. Dorsally,
at the morphologically posterior end, there is an irregular connection to a group of
nerve cells in the caudal furca, but I have not been able to follow the details in this
region with certainty.
The nerves which I have described have been figured by Liiders in Gigantocypris
in the same relative positions, with the exception of the three largest, the adductor
muscle nerve and the anterior and posterior valve nerves.
BASAL GANGLION SYSTEM
The nervous system of Doloria is peculiar in that each segmental nerve swells out
into a ganglion in the base of the limb it supplies. These ganglia I call the basal ganglia.
A ganglion at the base of the antennule has been described in many Crustacea.
A ganglion in the base of the antenna is figured by Claus in Halocyprids (1891, Plate 1),
and Liiders (1909, p. 136) mentions a basal ganglion occurring in the fused bases of
the first trunk limbs (his second thoracic limb), but these authors do not comment
upon the occurrence of these ganglia. So far as I am aware no Crustacean has been
described with basal ganglia in all its limbs.
From sections of Gigantocypris, also collected by the Discovery expedition, I find
that a similar series of ganglia occurs in this form, but I have not yet examined the
sections in detail.
The antennulary basal ganglion is the largest in the body, occupying most of the
basal joint. Certain fibres pass directly through the ganglion to the muscles (Fig. 10 A).
These probably represent the motor nerves, and may correspond to one of the pair of
nerves in those forms where antennulary nerves with double roots have been described
(Hanstrém, 1924, Figs. 1,2). Other fibres on entering the ganglion from the antennulary
nerve turn sharply inwards, and appear to terminate in cells in the postero-medial
corner of the ganglion. From this region other fibres extend to the distal end of the
Fig. ro. Ventral (A) and lateral (B) views of the nervous system of Doloria levis to show the basal ganglia
em. In A the fibre tracts of the left antennulary basal ganglion are shown. g.d. I,
; g.fr. frontal ganglion; g.lab. labral ganglion;
and sympathetic syst
antennulary basal ganglion; g.a. 2, antennal basal ganglion; §
g.mdb. mandibular basal ganglion; g.mx. 1, maxillulary basal ganglion;
g.st. stomach ganglion; g.t.J. 1, basal ganglion of first trunk limb; g.t./. 2, basal ganglion of sec
g.mx. 2, maxillary basal ganglion;
ond trunk
limb. (x 200 approx.)
470 DISCOVERY REPORTS
ganglion, and pass out as a bundle which can be traced to the tip of the limb. In the
angle between these two bundles of fibres there is a group of four or five bipolar cells,
from which arise medium-sized giant fibres (Fig. 10 A, see later, p. 474).
The two roots of the antennal nerve fuse into a basal ganglion, more or less conical
in shape, lying between the powerful muscles of the protopodite. The ganglion lies
immediately in front of the antennal gland and is embedded in the peculiar tissue, an
extension of the gut parenchyma, which I have already described.
The upper root of the antennal nerve consists of a bundle of five giant fibres. ‘These
pass directly through the basal ganglion (Fig. 11) and will be described in a later
section. The lower root contains one giant fibre which also passes through, but its
main mass consists of minute fibres which, on entering the ganglion, divide into four
main tracts. These pass through the ganglion and emerge as radiating nerves which
can be traced to the superficial parts of the limb. A minute nerve can be traced from
the ganglion to the duct of the antennal gland (Fig. 11).
The mandibular basal ganglion is a compact ovoid mass occupying the proximal half
of the basipodite. A tract of fibres passes through it, and bifurcates into a small branch
running to the exopodite and a larger branch which can be traced to the tip of the endo-
podite.
The maxillulary basal ganglion is less compact than the mandibular ganglion. It is
quite distinct in its proximal portion, but it tapers off distally into a string of nerve
cells closely associated with large gland cells (Fig. ro B).
In the maxilla there is no single basal ganglion, but rather a group of distinct ganglia
connected by a network of anastomosing nerve cells. The second maxillary nerve passes
down the front of the limb and, after giving off a small branch, extends as a chain of
nerve cells to an elongated ganglion b which reaches the lower edge of the first joint.
The first maxillary nerve passes to a compact ganglion a at the hinder margin of the
first joint. From the lower corner of this ganglion a connective passes to a small sub-
spherical ganglion c, lying just inside ganglion b. The second maxillary nerve, soon
after entering the limb, gives off a thin branch which, after sending a connection to
ganglion a, terminates in a plexus of nerve cells lying on the median side of ganglion c.
The first trunk limbs contain a conspicuous mass of gland cells, on the anterior face
of which occurs a layer of nerve cells forming the basal ganglia of these limbs.
The basal ganglion of the second trunk limb—the brush limb—consists of a compact
ovoid mass situated at the base of the limb.
The whole system of basal ganglia may be compared with the parapodial ganglia
of Polychaetes or the ganglia at the base of the appendages of 'Tardigrades (Marcus,
1928). However, Dr Hanstrém has suggested to me that, strictly, they should not
be called ganglia until it has been shown that they contain ganglion cells. ‘The basal
ganglion of the antennule has always been termed a ganglion, and we must use the term
merely for convenience but, until the constitution of these basal ganglia has been studied
by special neurological methods, the possibility remains that they are nothing more than
accumulations of sensory cells which have passed in from their primitive superficial
NERVOUS SYSTEM 471
position. This possibility is supported by the constitution of the maxillary basal ganglia,
which are still partly a diffuse network of nerve cells lying close underneath the ecto-
derm. In this case they would not be physiologically comparable with the parapodial
ganglia of Polychaetes in which ganglion cells occur (Hamaker, 1898).
If, however, they are simply accumulations of sensory cells, these cells cannot be
the usual type of bipolar cells which are always figured in the Crustacean antennulary
ganglion. For, in the latter ganglion of Doloria, as I have described, the bundle
of fibres constituting the antennulary nerve bifurcates on entering the basal ganglion.
One branch extends through the ganglion and the other curves round to the median
posterior angle, and from this corner another set of fibres extends distally through
the ganglion. Now these two sets of fibres must either belong to different groups
of nerve cells, in which case it is probable that true ganglion cells are present in
the basal ganglion, or else they must be the centrifugal and centripetal branches of
unipolar cells situated in the corner of the ganglion. That is, they are axons of cells of
the type usually described as characteristic of the vertebrate spinal ganglion (Parker,
LOL P2L)
SYMPATHETIC SYSTEM
Hanstrém (1924, p. 33) has recently described in Cypris fuscata a labral ganglion
(Lippenganglion), which is joined by a loop to the lower side of the posterior part of
the circum-oesophageal commissure, the junction being marked by a swelling which
he terms the visceral ganglion. Turner (1896, p. 30) describes a similar state of affairs.
He mistakenly refers to the “‘/abial nerve or nerve to the upper lip’, but it is impossible
from his figures to determine exactly what he was attempting to describe.
Liiders (1909, p. 137) describes a few minute median ganglia connected with the
ventral chain in Gigantocypris which he terms sympathetic ganglia.
The sympathetic system of Doloria (Figs. 10 A, B) is well developed and agrees with
that of other Crustacea. The mandibular swellings are connected by a loop, which
originates just in front of the mandibular nerves and passes close against the front
wall of the oesophagus, and which may be termed the labral loop. This is enlarged
medianly into a ganglion, the labral ganglion, which extends a considerable distance
dorsally just outside the circular muscles of the oesophagus. It continues upwards as
a thin nerve to the frontal foramen of the brain (Fig. ro A). Here it meets another nerve
which extends from a small ganglion—the frontal ganglion—consisting of two or three
cells, situated at the base of the frontal apodeme. The two nerves pass through the
foramen, uniting in doing so, and are then joined by another nerve which can be traced
to the aortic roof and the pericardial dilator. ‘The fused nerves run backwards to a
globular ganglion—the stomach ganglion—situated at the junction of oesophagus and
stomach. This lies embedded in gut parenchyma between the aortic oesophageal
muscles, and gives off branches to them. Posteriorly it gives off a small nerve towards
the stomach. Antero-ventrally it gives off a nerve which, almost at once, penetrates
underneath the circular musculature of the oesophagus. I have succeeded in tracing
this nerve without any doubt in both sagittal and frontal sections. It passes down as
472 DISCOVERY REPORTS
a single nerve to about half-way between the stomach ganglion and the labral loop.
Here it radiates into five nerves (Fig. 10 A), of which two continue downwards and join
the labral loop laterally, the remainder disappearing in the gut musculature. ‘These two
branches are joined together by a connective about the middle of their length. Their
junction with the labral loop is marked by a small swelling, which may represent the
visceral ganglion described by Hanstrém (1924, p. 33).
The sympathetic system shows many points of resemblance to that of Astacus as
described by Keim (1915). The labral ganglion corresponds to the oesophageal ganglion
of Astacus. In the latter it is connected to the circum-oesophageal commissures by two
roots. In all my specimens of Doloria there is one large root on either side, but in one
specimen there are indications of a double root, and in all there are minute nerves,
apparently single nerve fibres, given off to the oesophageal musculature between the
two ends of the labral loop.
The stomach ganglion is equivalent to the ganglion ventriculi superius. From both
a nerve originates which runs along the aorta.
The connection between the stomach ganglion and the labral loop which lies inside
the oesophageal musculature corresponds to the nervus stomatogastricus inferior of
Keim.
The connection which passes through the frontal foramen appears to correspond to
the two nerves, the nervus ventriculi impar inferior and superior, the former of which
runs from the oesophageal ganglion to the brain, the latter running from the brain
to the nervus stomatogastricus inferior and so to the stomach ganglion. However, these
are two separate nerves, both originating from the brain. In all my preparations of
Doloria which showed the sympathetic system clearly, this connection forms a distinct
loop passing through the frontal foramen, and does not show any connection with the
brain. However, it passes so close against the surface, that it is possible that a small
connection in this region exists.
I could find no trace of a sympathetic system such as Liiders described in Giganto-
cypris (1909, P- 137).
INTERNAL STRUCTURE
The main nerve fibre tracts are shown in Fig. 9. I have made no attempt to study
this internal structure in detail, and have figured only those tracts which are conspicuous
and which appear to me significant. The fixation of the nervous system is so extra-
ordinarily good that, without doubt, a competent neurologist would be able to make out
many more connections than shown in the figure.
The distribution of nerve cells is shown by the stippling in Fig. 9. The whole ventral
surface is a sheet of neurones, and these extend up the sides to the extent shown in
the figure. In addition, the dorsal surface of the fore-part of the brain and a dorso-
medial area at the hind part of the nerve ring are both covered with nerve cells.
Among the neurones there are a number of giant cells but, apart from these, all are
of approximately the same size. Thus, as Hanstrém points out for Branchiopoda
(1928, p. 458), it is impossible to distinguish globuli cells.
NERVOUS SYSTEM 473
The central body is well marked and occupies a typical position.
The optic lobes each contain two optic masses, the lamina and the medulla. From
the latter a well-marked band of fibres passes backwards and then sharply inwards to
the protocerebral bridge.
The protocerebral bridge consists of four glomerular masses.
The corpora pedunculata appear to be represented on each side by a small but
distinct glomerular mass in the roof of the protocerebrum on a level with the proto-
cerebral bridge. From this mass a band of fibres passes inwards and, looping round
the optic tract, extends downwards to the outer edges of the central body. Here some
fibres enter the latter. Others cross over and join the corresponding tract on the other
side, and the remainder continue downwards and outwards to the antennulary nucleus
to end in a glomerular mass which may be distinct or may be a dorsal lobe of the latter.
The antennulary nucleus is a glomerular structure occurring in the antennulary lobe.
It consists certainly of two main lobes, an inner and an outer, the latter on each side
being connected by a broad commissure—the main antennulary commissure. Certain
fibres of the antennulary nerve pass directly between the two lobes and extend down the
inner side of the nerve ring to the tritocerebrum, joining a thick bundle which emerges
from the posterior lobe.
The nucleus of the nauplius eye consists of three glomerular masses embedded in
the median mass of nerve cells formed from the fused optic lobes. The three nerves
of the nauplius eye each connect with one of these glomeruli. Posteriorly each glomerulus
gives rise to a tract of fibres which pass back between the constituents of the proto-
cerebral bridge to the central body, and finally to the main antennulary commissure.
In the latter, as well as in the central body, each tract gives off fibres to both right
and left sides of these structures.
In front of the nucleus of the nauplius eye, between the nerves emerging from it, is
a group of giant cells from which emerge the two nerve fibres to the frontal organ.
Holmgren (1916, p. 118) has described a similar arrangement in Apus.
There is a large commissure immediately in front of the central body, as well as a
small one below the protocerebral bridge.
The position of the nuclei of the segmental nerves can be seen from Fig. g. It will
be noted that there is no distinct nucleus for the antennal nerve. ‘The main bulk of the
fibres of the lower antennal nerve pass inwards and then curve slightly towards the
antennulary nucleus, but they form no compact nucleus. The region in which they
terminate is a tangled mass of medium-sized giant fibres. The remainder of the fibres,
apart from the giant fibres, pass backwards along the inside of the nerve ring to the
tritocerebral commissure.
Although the third maxillary nerve does not enter the nerve ring direct, its fibres
apparently pass through the stalk into the hinder part of the nerve ring, where they
terminate in a nucleus which abuts against the nucleus of the first and second maxillary
nerves. These nuclei are joined by a distinct commissure.
The sympathetic system has its own nucleus just in front of the mandibular nucleus.
474 DISCOVERY REPORTS
The fibres of the anterior valve nerve, for the main part, pass into the tritocerebral
commissure. A part, however, curve forwards towards the antennal region and join
the tract of fibres from the posterior valve nerve.
The fibres of the adductor muscle nerve pass directly into the tritocerebral com-
missure, where they terminate in an ovoid mass which, since it has the same appearance
as the central body of the brain, I am calling the tritocerebral central body. Close
behind this body, but distinct from it, is another neuropilem mass, and behind the
latter still a third but not so distinct a mass. Since this region consists of the extremely
condensed ventral chain, these centres must correspond to the “‘sensorisches Ventral-
neuropilem”’ which Zawarzin has figured for the insect Aeschna (1924).
GIANT FIBRE SYSTEM
In addition to the commissural tracts and centres of co-ordination, there exists in
the nervous system of Doloria a complicated system of giant fibres. These are un-
doubtedly typical neurochord cells, firstly because of the immense diameter of their
fibres, and secondly because they are provided with a non-staining medullary sheath.
The latter makes the fibres particularly noticeable when they happen to be cut trans-
versely, but it also makes it easy to trace them in frontal sections.
In Fig. 9 I have drawn the most conspicuous of these fibres but, actually, there are
a great many more which are not so thick. In fact, there seem to be all sizes from the
enormous fibre emerging from the lower antennal nerve down to the fibres of normal
size—no longer giant. Thus the dorsal region between the antennulary and the indistinct
antennal nuclei is a complete tangle of medium-sized giant fibres.
The largest of the giant fibres are connected with the antennae. The dorsal antennal
nerve appears to consist of a bundle of five (Figs. 9, 11). These are labelled a. They
can be traced outwards to the antennal basal ganglion, through which they pass, to
the immense muscles on the median face of the limb. The individual fibres can be traced
into the cytoplasm which covers the outer surface of the muscles (Fig. 11). They appear
to end blindly, there being no special end organ. Internally they can be traced to
a dorsal region on a level with the anterior valve nerve, where, after giving off a few
branches, they end. I could not find their cell bodies, but just in front and above the
antennal nucleus there is a group of very large cells, and these may represent their
cell stations.
The very large giant fibre 6 which runs in the lower antennal nerve innervates muscles
on the outer side of the limb, and internally terminates in the same region as the
fibres from the upper antennal nerve. In addition, it gives off a branch to the antennal
nucleus.
Although, as I have just stated, I could not find the cell bodies of these fibres, I
feel certain, from a careful study of the antennal basal ganglion, that they are not to be
found there. They must be somewhere within the nerve ring, and their fibres must
represent the motor elements of the big swimming muscles. I am hence calling the
region where they terminate internally the antennal motor nucleus.
NERVOUS SYSTEM 475
On either side of the tritocerebral central body, there is a giant cell which gives rise
to the giant fibre c. This crosses in the tritocerebral commissure to the other side of
calpesttllty
UAT
on tha}
HEPATIC VALVE
ae BASAL
A, GANGLION
Aatirn Nesey, OF
Hae y : y
tiny s . ANTENNA
i h
WW
Vi
Z
Cp,
ANTENNAL
ARTERY
Fig. 11. Semi-diagrammatic view of section through base of antenna to show the antennal basal ganglion,
antennal artery, the giant fibre system of the antenna (green) and the antennal gland. (x 300 approx.)
the body and, after bending slightly backwards, curves forwards to end in an arboriza-
tion in the antennal motor nucleus.
A pair of giant fibres d extend forwards from the antennal motor nucleus, and cross
each other just in front of the frontal aperture of the brain. Each fibre at once bifurcates,
Ditvi 6
476 DISCOVERY REPORTS
sending a branch forwards and a branch backwards. The latter terminates in the lateral
part of the nerve ring, after having given a branch to the antennal nucleus. ‘The anterior
branch extends forwards as far as the posterior mass of the protocerebral bridge in
which it terminates. In addition, it gives rise to a branch which crosses to the other
side of the body and terminates in the central body. I could not determine the cell
bodies of these fibres.
Other fibres which I have labelled e, f and g appear comparatively simple, and their
position can be seen from Fig. 9. Underneath the cell bodies labelled f in the trito-_
cerebral commissure there is a bundle of medium-sized fibres extending up to the
antennal motor nucleus, but I could not find any cell stations.
The giant fibre system is undoubtedly, as in other Crustacea in which such a system
has been described, a co-ordinating system for linking up the two sides and the various
regions of the body. From the fact that the majority of the fibres terminate in the
antennal motor nucleus, it appears probable that the system is a special development
for correlating the activities of these limbs with the activities of the other parts of the
body. The antenna is, of course, immensely more powerful than any other limb, and
it is the main, if not the only, swimming limb. Hence it is not surprising that its
nervous mechanism should have such an elaborate intercommunication system with
the rest of the nervous centres.
In addition to the giant association fibres there are the giant motor fibres of the
antenna. Such fibres have recently been described in detail by Johnson (1924) in
Cambarus, but apparently he did not trace them to their termination. In Doloria they
can be traced without any doubt to their endings in muscle. If they represent the only
motor elements to these muscles, and that seems highly probable, then, as Mr Pantin
has pointed out to me, the degree to which the muscles can be stimulated is very much
limited.
SEGMENTAL EXCRETORY ORGANS
From recent accounts of the Ostracoda, it is clear that the question of the occurrence
of segmental excretory organs in the group is still very obscure. Thus Klie (1926, p. 20)
states that fresh-water Ostracods possess three pairs of segmental excretory organs.
He mentions the antennulary gland which was originally described by Bergold (1910).
This I showed in 1925 was not an antennulary gland, as it occurred in the antenna.
The antennal gland he describes is the shell gland of the Cyprids and again, in the same
paper, I demonstrated that this could not be considered as a segmental organ for the
reason that a true antennal gland, having the typical constitution of a segmental excre-
tory organ, occurs alongside the shell gland. It is a larval organ and disappears after
the fourth larval stage. He correctly describes the maxillary gland which was first fully
described by Bergold (1910) and subsequently by myself (1925).
In a subsequent publication Klie (1929, p. 37) 1s still more obscure. He describes
a gland ‘‘zweifellos als Nephridium anzusprechen” opening at the distal end of the
stem of the antenna, but unfortunately he does not say in what form this occurs.
ANTENNAL
ARTERY
TS
Yy 2S en
— ae
q
Vf
END SAC
Fig. 12. Frontal section through antennal gland, showing sphincter
between end sac and duct. (x 685.)
478 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Both Klie (1929) and Miiller (1927) describe various glands as excretory organs in
marine Ostracods. Thus they both describe two rudimentary “ nephridia”’ as occurring
at the bases of the second and third pair of walking legs of Paradoxostoma. But there
is no evidence at all that any of these organs, which are probably ectodermal glands,
are even excretory in function, let alone serially homologous with the established seg-
mental excretory organs of other Crustacea.
By the term “segmental excretory organ’ I do not mean to imply that I know such
a structure to be definitely excretory in function. It is a morphological term which has
acquired a definite meaning. It implies in the Arthropoda a structure, segmental in
value, which exhibits an end sac and a duct leading to the exterior, or else an organ
about which there is definite evidence to indicate that it arose from such a structure.
Further, in the Crustacea, it has never yet been shown that such organs occur in segments
other than the antennal and maxillary and, hence, in this group, there is additional need
for caution in describing organs as segmental excretory organs outside these segments.
In the Cypridinids no organ has ever before been described which, on the grounds
I have just explained, could be homologized with the segmental excretory organs of
other Crustacea. In Doloria, however, I have found a typical antennal gland and,
although I have not examined my sections fully, the same gland occurs in Gigantocypris.
Thus, in the Cypridae, there is a larval antennal gland and a maxillary gland in the
adult. In the Cypridinidae there is an antennal gland in the adult and there is no trace
of maxillary gland.
The antennal gland occurs in the posterior part of the basis of the antenna (Figs. 11,
12), close behind the antennal basal ganglion. The duct opens to the exterior by a minute
pore at the postero-lateral angle of the joint. It broadens out as it passes forwards and
then turns sharply upwards along the anterior face of the end sac. It is apparently
intra-cellular, as I could only find three nuclei which were definitely in its walls. The
lumen is, however, wide and the walls consist of a vacuolated outer layer separated
sharply from an inner homogeneous or striated layer. The walls exhibit the same general
appearance that I described for Estheria (1924) and figured for Chirocephalus (1926 b,
Plate 22, fig. 2).
The entrance of the duct into the end sac is guarded by a muscular sphincter valve.
The myofibrils are very distinct, but I could not be quite certain as to the number of
cells forming the sphincter. I believe it is three, in which case it agrees with the similar
sphincter in the maxillary gland of Cypris (Cannon, 1925) and the antennal gland of
Chirocephalus (Cannon, 1926 6). The lips of the sphincter bulge into both end sac and
duct, but most markedly into the latter (Fig. 12). In section it appears similar to the
valve which we described in Anaspides (Cannon and Manton, 1927, Fig. 3) and which
Vejdovsky (1901) described in Niphargus and Gammarus.
The end sac shows the typical structure for a segmental excretory organ. It consists
of a thin-walled sac lying dorsally like a saddle across the duct. The cells constituting
its walls are vacuolated on their inner faces, and contain a layer of spherical bodies in
their outer layer which stain dark red in Mallory.
SUMMARY 479
SUMMARY
It is suggested from a comparison of the limb arrangement of Doloria with that of a
Cyprid, that the principle of feeding is the same in Cypridinids as in Cyprids, but that the
limbs which carry out the various processes involved in the feeding mechanism are not in
all cases homologous. Thus a food stream through the shell is produced by the vibratory
plate of the maxillule in the case of a Cyprid and of the maxilla in a Cypridinid.
The skeletal stability of the body of Doloria centres on the powerful adductor muscle
which connects the two valves. The limbs are connected to a massive endosternite,
which forms the tendon between the right and left halves of this muscle, by a series
of strong apodemes. In addition to this endoskeleton, the limbs and paired eyes are
supported by a system of articulating sclerites which radiate from the attachment of
the adductor muscle to the valves.
The dorsal body wall forms a soft flexible dome between heart and caudal furca.
It is peculiar in that its musculature consists of a chequer-work of muscles, formed
of the dorsal longitudinal muscles and a series of circular muscles lying close inside
the ectoderm, both sets of muscles being connected to the cuticle. It is suggested that
the latter are of ectodermal origin.
The globular heart, which possesses one pair of dorsal ostia, is slung on a muscular
pericardial floor. Its walls fuse with the latter in three places, where splits occur which
are bounded by myofibrils and which act as valves from the heart. A pair of these lead
directly into a system of ramifying channels in a parenchymatous tissue which surrounds
the gut. The third opens into an aorta.
The aorta leads into a circular vessel surrounding the oesophagus which opens into
the body cavity underneath the endosternite. In addition, it gives off antennal arteries
which can be traced to their termination in the protoplasm of the powerful swimming
muscles in the bases of the antennae.
The whole system of blood vessels is provided with a series of muscles running in
their walls (not circular muscles), or attached to their walls by which they can be dis-
tended or collapsed. In addition, there is a pair of muscular valves at the point where
the main vessels open into the body cavity. It is suggested that this muscular system
is an accessory circulatory mechanism, and, from a study of the arrangement of the
muscles, it has been possible to suggest the actual mechanism by which the blood is
forced round the body. The heart does not appear to be essential, and this is significant
from the fact that in many Ostracods the heart is absent.
The gut musculature consists of a chequer-work of fibres which appear to be homo-
geneous, showing no trace of striation.
The compact nervous system is peculiar in that a basal ganglion occurs in each limb.
A well-defined system of giant fibres is present, most of which are, as usual, associative
elements, but some are apparently motor neurones which can be followed to their
termination in the large muscles of the antennae. A well-defined sympathetic system
is present, and shows a marked similarity to that of Astacus.
480 DISCOVERY REPORTS
The chief features of the internal structure of the nervous system are described and
figured. The tritocerebrum is peculiar in that a central body occurs in the tritocerebral
commissure.
The segmental excretory organs are antennal glands, and not maxillary glands as in
the Cypridae. The glands show a typical structure, and there is a well-defined sphincter
between end sac and duct.
RAT URE (Clin Dp
BauMANN, H., 1921. Das Gefaszsystem von Astacus fluviatilis. Zs. wiss. Zool. Leipzig, CxviIt, p. 246.
BERGOLD, A., 1910. Beitrdge zur Kenntnis des innern Baues der Siiszwasser Ostracoden. Zool. Jahrb. Jena,
Abt. f.Anat., Xxx, p. 0
Cannon, H. G., 1924. On the Development of an Estherid Crustacean. Phil. Trans. R. Soc. London, Ser. B,
CCXII, p. 395.
1925. On the Segmental Excretory Organs of Certain Fresh-Water Ostracods. Phil. Trans. R. Soc.
London, Ser. B, ccxtv, p. 1.
1926 a. On the Feeding Mechanism of a Freshwater Ostracod, Pionocypris vidua. J. Linn. Soc. Zool.
London, xxxVI, p. 325.
1926 b. On the Post-Embryonic Development of the Fairy Shrimp, Chirocephalus diaphanus. J. Linn.
Soc. Zool. London, xxxv1, p. 401.
Cannon, H. G. and Manton, S. M., 1927. Notes on the Segmental Excretory Organs of Crustacea, I-IV.
J. Linn. Soc. Zool. London, xxxvi, p. 439.
Craus, C., 1876. Untersuchungen zur Erforschung der Genealogischen Grundlage des Crustaceen-Systems.
Vienna.
1891. Die Halocypriden des Atlantischen Oceans und Mittelmeeres. Vienna.
Hamaker, J., 1898. The Nervous System of Nereis virens. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoél. Cambridge, Mass.
XXXII, p. 89.
Hanstr6M, B., 1924. Beitrag zur Kenntnis des zentralen Nervensystems der Ostracoden und Copepoden.
Zool. Anz. Leipzig, LX1, p. 31.
— 1927. Neue Beobachtungen tiber Augen und Sehzentren von Entomostracen, Schizopoden und Pantopoden.
Zool. Anz. Leipzig, Lxx, p. 236.
1928. Vergleichende Anatomie des Nervensystems der Wirbellosen Tiere. Berlin.
Harvey, E. Newron, 1919. The Nature of Animal Light. Philadelphia and London.
H6éimerrn, N., 1916. Zur vergleichenden Anatomie des Gehirn von Polychaten, Onychophoren, Arachniden,
Crustaceen, Myriopoden und Insekten. KK. Svenska Vet.-Ak. Handl. Stockholm, LVI, p. 1.
Jounson, G. E., 1924. Giant Nerve Fibres in Crustaceans, with special reference to Cambarus and Palae-
monetes. J. Comp. Neur. Psych. Philadelphia, xxxvi, p. 323.
Kem, W., 1915. Das Nervensystem von Astacus fluviatilis. Zs. wiss. Zool. Leipzig, Cx, p. 485.
Kuie, W., 1926. Biologie der Tiere Deutschlands. Teil 16. Ostracoda. Berlin.
1929. Die Tierwelt der Nord- und Ostsee. 'Teil X b. Ostracoda. Leipzig.
Liprrs, L., 1909. Gigantocypris Agassizii (Miiller). Zs. wiss. Zool. Leipzig, XCII, p. 103.
Manton, S. M., 1928. On the Embryology of a Mysid Crustacean, Hemimysis lamornae. Phil. Trans.
R. Soc. London, Ser. B, Ccxv1, p. 363.
Marcus, E., 1928. Zur vergleichenden Anatomie und Histologie der Tardigraden. Zool. Jahrb. Jena, Abt. f.
allg. Zool. XLV, p. 99.
Mier, G. W., 1894. Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel—Die Ostracoden. Berlin.
1895. Reports on the Dredging Operations off the West Coast of Central America to the Galapagos...,
No. 5. Die Ostracoden. Cambridge, Mass.
1927. Handbuch der Zoologie, gegr. von Dr Willy Kukenthal, 11, pt 4. Berlin and Leipzig.
LITERATURE CITED 481
Parker, G. H., 1919. The Elementary Nervous System. Philadelphia and London.
SkKOGSBERG, T., 1920. Studies on Marine Ostracods, Part I. Zool. Bidr. Uppsala, Suppl. Bd. 1.
StrarF, F., 910. Organogenetische Untersuchungen tiber Criodrilus lacuum Hoffmstr. Arb. Zool. Inst. Univ.
Wien, XVIII, p. 227.
Turner, C. H., 1896. Morphology of the Nervous System of Cypris. J. Comp. Neur. Psych. Philadelphia,
VI, p. 20.
VeEJDovsky, F., rg01. Zur Morphologie der Antennen- und Schalendruse der Crustaceen. Zs. wiss. Zool.
Leipzig, LxIx, p. 378.
WILson, C. B., 1903. A New Species of Argulus, with a more complete account of two species already described.
Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. Washington, xxvil, p. 627.
WrzeEsNiowskI, A., 1879. Vorldufige Mitteilungen tiber einige Amphipoden. Zool. Anz. Leipzig, 1, p. 536.
ZAWARZIN, A., 1924. Histologische Studien iiber Insekten VI, Zs. wiss. Zool. Leipzig, CXXIl, p. 323.
e.
4
ee
y
PLATE YI
Cypridina (Doloria) levis Skogsberg. Lateral view after removal of left
valve. A diagrammatic key to the parts shown is given in text-fig. 1,
P- 440.
PEATE, VI-
PORTS, VOL. Il.
4
RE
DISCOVERY
Uupuoy] py] Morsay 8u
“STAYT
(vIao'10d)
7
v
NiCad AY
i
\
{pot servation bs
“egtt a hone
be ge:
Xt th ty
“hil: Pgisid dope sifvitane Lstog 2 a or
Seesy, gali Aagusmetige’ at; rors tuft uss Te oe
© “
&Q Jug teu
* robreaas ah siqen
atk P Fb ‘
Fenoit2s2 ARnoe Lg: a ae
"4 ges fr eo NO at
PFURT OBC ay lipo Y
~~ at
.
4 ak " 1
Losige x" “aren a ait
a -noilanny Love igie 0
ay noitoa ipsnon 4
sinohy dah noadis
PLATE Vit
Photomicrographs (x 140) of sections of Doloria levis.
Fixation: figs. 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 Dubosq-Brasil; fig. 5 alcohol.
Stain: Mallory.
Fig. 1. Frontal section through brain and supraneural vessel.
a. antennal artery; 6. supraneural ring vessel; c. valve in supraneural
ring vessel.
Fig. 2. Parasagittal section through gut parenchyma leading up to
hepatic valve. Left side of photograph is anterior. d. gut parenchyma
leading to hepatic valve; e. antennal artery; f. gut musculature.
Fig. 3. Frontal section through optic tracts and stomach ganglion.
g. heart; #. optic tract; k. stomach ganglion.
Fig. 4. Oblique frontal section through base of antenna, showing
antennal basal ganglion and giant fibres entering muscle. m. lamina of
optic lobe; n. giant fibre passing from basal antennal ganglion (right)
to muscle (left).
Fig. 5. Accurate sagittal section. Top of photograph is anterior.
o. stomach ganglion; p. oesophagus; 7. stomach.
Fig. 6. Frontal section through base of antenna, showing sphincter of
antennal gland. s. nucleus of nauplius eye; ¢. central body of brain;
v. sphincter valve of antennal gland.
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. IL. PLATE VII.
C.E. Stewart phot
THE ANATOMY OF A MARINE OSTRACOD.
Baan onan
Sp pPRCRERERAR ORR
A
~~
i) Fan
2) bss)
es an Bilaniia
~~ mo “— ~
mm com
-—~ ot OS
om \
RAApaanananannncnce>
a
1
NARARRAAR ARRAY
1 a
es
AAA . an
SAARAcaaa oo onoe 2 Bee
~ alga
AAA A AAnaaaaee-. AAAAAAAAR aa |
manne PARRAR EA AARR AR PRRREREREEAE RASA mn
RARRRRARAARRRAAAAAOAAAA RARS
ARRAAAAARAAR panel
AR
RA ARAAAAAARnAns A )
Pn on
aan mannannnnns eso
alent V AnH) ~|
poeesaeasaeeeeees em RAPA RR SER,
AARARRARASA OOO RAR A AAA AAR APE SARA RAR mn
3s nananAnns arnanm | =
SUS AA \ a el a a mo y
pays = as en em ~A ANS = | AAA AA
a y = hn AR \
ae }
} | q
JH yy ‘J W 4 MW \ a Fs NBG EN lS ae on, Y= Yh ON ee
—_
$s
wanna
YY \o\alalanen nana
sana RaRAARARAARARARARE”
Try A ;
a ea ae
= THVT YY esa =v ANA Ne aanenenenaan
AAA Pala ee es ARAL 9
lameness lonlecn Rize
Renee a ataaaan aman ann aan Anna aenneee eaaaeene
Aeeererrrrrrr rey ARR
ARR ARAaN
AAAAAA CO RARRRAARAA SO NO ei Ee
CN RAC PORRCR REECE PEA nmenpern
eaaaaanaanrnmanaa AAAS RRARPERCORT SE
maa rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrry a
Torah VpAaAaAAnAnAnnnnObOOl cre eCEnCn cc an =n
SIAN SNR NS ex =
RRA Sy eae Oe
saan p= yon iia,
Ann nmnmnn ~\ pena nnnnnn nnnnnnnnn nnn
Rann NAAR, Dy) ER Py oa om "Y Velen oy RO :
apeePrerrAaeamamamasneerrrr ue Annan a A FR
SRP ORES EP. aoa nae ge manne Aaa ARRARARARRAS
PAP RREREDAAE RAAT a ahaa a
a ay SFR AAA
lesa Palas,
Anan an “aanwanwanaananne peer’
NEN ES NSS Baan AAA Aa aan AA ARE
A
ANA AANA
NNR NN ee a a
— >
WARARAARAAAAAAAA ee nln olionlen
prporepreryn aAnen eet
AAA NAVA 5 RAAF — Va 5 NS ENS PA 1 SN AS AX
Py am ae ema.
—_—
Qe? =a lel
= “ey
BAAap amen anon
amp nnpnaner a es aaaaaannanar Naar
RRA R AC SaannanAnOnAnARAANAAAA nara
SaAAAAAaa Ramanan anaaa A
“als AAS
apnananaaaecaaael AAC
pesaananns scasanaaanaaaaseastnens apnnarA wAnnYeYY
AAA A DA EE | 0 a on | — |
)
(son focagpen amo
AAA Tle rennet | AAA AARARAARAGAD
AA AGRA A Ae! =| a
AAA APE EP PEP? aaa AANA RRAARAASA=
alala\a\a| RAAAAAAARAaaa, na
aaa AAAAAARARAARARAanar
L
pee =
le
|
OME
3 8 01408 7878
Ih
- 1 |
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11